Smart Sketch Guide

SmartSketch
User's Guide
Version 2014 (8.0)
September 2013
DSKT2-PE-2000008G
Copyright
Copyright 1996 - 2013 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
300 Intergraph Way
Huntsville, AL 35813
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on eCustomer, SharePoint, or
box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph as guidance for
using a software product.
Terms of Use
a.
Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b.
For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensees internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensees internal, non-commercial. The Other Documentation may
not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for any
reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
SmartSketch User's Guide
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATIONS LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporations software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a.
To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b.
To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www,bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List,
www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html, and the U.S. Department of State
Debarred List.
c.
To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d.
To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporations Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN, MARIAN,
SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are
trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 19
What's New in SmartSketch? ................................................................................................................... 21
Introducing SmartSketch .......................................................................................................................... 23
Technical User Forum ........................................................................................................................... 24
Additional Documentation ..................................................................................................................... 24
Using SmartSketch Options .................................................................................................................. 24
AEC Solutions ................................................................................................................................ 25
Electrical Solutions ......................................................................................................................... 25
Image Integrator ............................................................................................................................. 25
Mechanical Solutions...................................................................................................................... 26
Process Solutions ........................................................................................................................... 26
Symbol Authoring ........................................................................................................................... 27
Programming Tools ........................................................................................................................ 27
Translators ...................................................................................................................................... 28
User Assistance .................................................................................................................................... 28
Display Context-Sensitive Help ...................................................................................................... 29
Help Command............................................................................................................................... 29
Access the Printable Guides .......................................................................................................... 29
Access Online Tutorials .................................................................................................................. 29
Display the Tip of the Day .............................................................................................................. 30
Turn the Tip of the Day On or Off ................................................................................................... 30
Display Help Topics ........................................................................................................................ 31
Open the SmartSketch Home Page ............................................................................................... 31
Display Information About the Software ......................................................................................... 31
About Command ............................................................................................................................. 31
Getting Started with SmartSketch ........................................................................................................... 33
Using the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility .................................................................................... 33
Install SmartPlant License Checkout Utility .................................................................................... 33
Check Out a License for SmartSketch ........................................................................................... 34
License Checkout Utility Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 35
Exploring the Interface .......................................................................................................................... 35
Exploring the Window with Your Mouse ......................................................................................... 36
Menu Bar and Menus ..................................................................................................................... 38
Ribbons and Dialog Boxes ............................................................................................................. 39
Toolbars .......................................................................................................................................... 40
Keyboard ........................................................................................................................................ 51
Mouse ............................................................................................................................................. 52
Status Bar ....................................................................................................................................... 53
Viewing Your Work ............................................................................................................................... 54
Zoom Area ...................................................................................................................................... 55
Zoom In on an Area ........................................................................................................................ 55
Zoom Out ........................................................................................................................................ 56
Fit All Elements in the Active View ................................................................................................. 57
Restore a View ............................................................................................................................... 57
Contents
Pan a View ..................................................................................................................................... 57
Switch to Another Open Document ................................................................................................ 58
Open a New Window ...................................................................................................................... 58
Change the Window Layout ........................................................................................................... 59
Understanding Document Concepts ....................................................................................................... 61
Document Explorer Command .............................................................................................................. 61
Document Explorer Window ........................................................................................................... 62
Filter Objects Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 62
View Document Properties ............................................................................................................. 62
Setting Up Documents .......................................................................................................................... 63
Create a New Document ................................................................................................................ 64
Open a Document .......................................................................................................................... 65
Set Up a Drawing Sheet ................................................................................................................. 66
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet ..................................................... 68
Most Recently Used Files Command ............................................................................................. 68
Set Document Properties ............................................................................................................... 68
View the Properties of a Document ................................................................................................ 69
Managing Multi-Sheet Documents ........................................................................................................ 73
Sheets and Document Templates .................................................................................................. 76
Create a New Drawing Sheet ......................................................................................................... 76
Scroll Through Drawing Sheet Tabs .............................................................................................. 77
Activate a Drawing Sheet ............................................................................................................... 77
Select and Manipulate Drawing Sheets ......................................................................................... 77
Create a Background Sheet ........................................................................................................... 78
Display Background Sheets ........................................................................................................... 79
Change the Background Sheet ...................................................................................................... 79
Rename a Drawing Sheet .............................................................................................................. 80
Delete a Drawing Sheet.................................................................................................................. 80
Reorder Sheets .............................................................................................................................. 81
Move Sheet Border ......................................................................................................................... 82
Using Title Blocks.................................................................................................................................. 84
Title Block Properties Command .................................................................................................... 84
Title Block Field Command ............................................................................................................ 84
Title Block Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 85
Drawing Diagrams................................................................................................................................. 88
Saving and Printing Documents............................................................................................................ 91
Saving Documents ......................................................................................................................... 92
Printing Documents ........................................................................................................................ 99
SmartSketch Templates .......................................................................................................................... 107
AEC Templates ................................................................................................................................... 108
Architectural Templates ................................................................................................................ 108
HVAC Templates .......................................................................................................................... 110
Landscape Templates .................................................................................................................. 111
Site Templates .............................................................................................................................. 112
Electrical Diagramming Templates ..................................................................................................... 114
Control Loop Templates ............................................................................................................... 114
Electrical Templates ..................................................................................................................... 115
General Diagramming Templates ....................................................................................................... 117
Atlas Mapping Templates ............................................................................................................. 117
Basic Diagramming Templates .................................................................................................... 119
Contents
Directional Mapping Templates .................................................................................................... 121
Flowchart Templates .................................................................................................................... 122
Network Diagram Templates ........................................................................................................ 124
Office Layout Templates............................................................................................................... 126
Organizational Chart Templates ................................................................................................... 128
Workflow Diagram Templates ...................................................................................................... 130
Organizational Chart Wizard ............................................................................................................... 131
Mechanical Engineering Templates .................................................................................................... 131
Mechanical Templates.................................................................................................................. 132
Process Diagraming Templates .......................................................................................................... 134
Ortho Piping Templates ................................................................................................................ 135
PFD and P&ID Templates ............................................................................................................ 136
Plot Plan Templates ..................................................................................................................... 138
Process Block Diagramming Templates ...................................................................................... 139
Technical Drawing Templates ...................................................................................................... 141
Title Block Templates .......................................................................................................................... 142
Create a Template .............................................................................................................................. 143
Save a Document as a Template........................................................................................................ 143
Save as Template Command ....................................................................................................... 143
Drawing Basic Elements ......................................................................................................................... 145
Drawing Lines ..................................................................................................................................... 146
Draw a Line .................................................................................................................................. 146
Draw a Point ................................................................................................................................. 148
Drawing Connectors ........................................................................................................................... 149
Connector Drawing Elements ....................................................................................................... 150
Place a Connector ........................................................................................................................ 150
Modify a Connector ...................................................................................................................... 152
Format a Connector ...................................................................................................................... 154
Attach a Connector to an Object .................................................................................................. 154
Merge Connectors ........................................................................................................................ 155
Reverse Connector Direction ....................................................................................................... 155
Connect Two Objects ................................................................................................................... 155
Split a Connector .......................................................................................................................... 156
Drawing Doublelines ........................................................................................................................... 158
Draw a Doubleline ........................................................................................................................ 158
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses .................................................................................................... 160
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points ....................................................................................... 160
Draw a Circle by Center Point ...................................................................................................... 161
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements .......................................................................... 162
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points ......................................................................................... 163
Draw an Arc by Center Point ........................................................................................................ 165
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements ........................................................................................ 166
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs .................................................................................................. 166
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with FreeSketch ....................................................................... 167
Draw a Curve ................................................................................................................................ 168
Insert a Node into a Curve ........................................................................................................... 169
Delete a Node from a Curve ......................................................................................................... 169
Change the Curve Type ............................................................................................................... 170
Change the Node Type ................................................................................................................ 171
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points .................................................................................... 172
Draw an Ellipse by Center Point ................................................................................................... 174
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons .................................................................................... 174
Contents
Draw a Rectangle or Square ........................................................................................................ 175
Draw a Fillet Rectangle ................................................................................................................ 176
Draw an N-Sided Polygon ............................................................................................................ 178
Draw a Polygon by Center point ................................................................................................... 179
Drawing FreeForm Shapes ................................................................................................................. 180
Draw a Line with FreeSketch ....................................................................................................... 182
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch ..................................................................................................... 182
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch ....................................................................................................... 183
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch ............................................................................. 183
Draw a Curve with FreeForm ....................................................................................................... 185
Creating Isometric Drawings ............................................................................................................... 186
Draw an Isometric Circle .............................................................................................................. 187
Draw an Isometric Line ................................................................................................................. 189
Draw an Isometric Rectangle ....................................................................................................... 191
Format Part of an Element ........................................................................................................... 193
Using Scaled Sketching ...................................................................................................................... 194
Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the SmartSketch Toolbar .................................................... 194
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor ........................................................................... 194
Scaled Sketching Command ........................................................................................................ 195
Scaled Sketching Ribbon ............................................................................................................. 195
Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements ........................................................................................... 197
Display the Change Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 198
Selecting Elements ............................................................................................................................. 198
Select an Element ........................................................................................................................ 199
Select Elements Using SmartSelect ............................................................................................. 202
Undo Actions ................................................................................................................................ 205
Redo Actions ................................................................................................................................ 205
Finding Elements ................................................................................................................................ 206
Find a SmartSketch Object .......................................................................................................... 206
Moving Elements................................................................................................................................. 210
Move an Element.......................................................................................................................... 211
Move an Element with the Select Tool ......................................................................................... 211
Move an Element Precisely .......................................................................................................... 212
Nudge an Element ........................................................................................................................ 213
Copying and Pasting Elements ........................................................................................................... 213
Copy an Element .......................................................................................................................... 213
Copy an Element with the Select Tool ......................................................................................... 214
Copy a Format .............................................................................................................................. 214
Paste an Element ......................................................................................................................... 215
Paste an Element with a Different Format.................................................................................... 216
Offset Elements ............................................................................................................................ 216
Cutting or Deleting Elements .............................................................................................................. 219
Delete an Element ........................................................................................................................ 219
Cut an Element ............................................................................................................................. 220
Creating Patterns ................................................................................................................................ 220
Draw a Rectangular Pattern ......................................................................................................... 221
Draw a Circular Pattern ................................................................................................................ 222
Adding Text to Documents ..................................................................................................................... 225
Placing Annotations ............................................................................................................................ 225
Move an Annotation...................................................................................................................... 228
Contents
Place a Text Box .......................................................................................................................... 230
Move a Text Box ........................................................................................................................... 237
Delete Text in a Text Box ............................................................................................................. 237
Apply a Border to a Text Box ....................................................................................................... 237
Edit a Text Box ............................................................................................................................. 237
Resize a Text Box ........................................................................................................................ 238
Use Spell Checker ........................................................................................................................ 238
Place a Balloon ............................................................................................................................. 239
Place a Revision Cloud ................................................................................................................ 242
Add a Leader ................................................................................................................................ 245
Insert a Vertex in a Leader ........................................................................................................... 247
Delete a Vertex from a Leader ..................................................................................................... 248
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box ....................................................................................... 248
Labels .................................................................................................................................................. 250
Create a Text Label ...................................................................................................................... 251
Edit a Text Label ........................................................................................................................... 252
Move a Label ................................................................................................................................ 252
Place a SmartLabel ...................................................................................................................... 252
Place Multiple Labels.................................................................................................................... 252
Edit a SmartLabel ......................................................................................................................... 253
Engineering Fonts ............................................................................................................................... 254
Drawing with Relationships.................................................................................................................... 255
Display the Relationship Toolbar ........................................................................................................ 257
Using Relationships as You Draw....................................................................................................... 257
Intent Zones .................................................................................................................................. 259
Draw with Relationships ............................................................................................................... 261
Suspend Relationships ................................................................................................................. 263
Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command .......................................................... 263
Delete a Relationship ................................................................................................................... 263
Maintain Relationships ................................................................................................................. 264
Display or Hide Relationship Handles .......................................................................................... 264
Lock an Element or Key Point ...................................................................................................... 265
Insert a Detail View....................................................................................................................... 265
Drawing Precisely.................................................................................................................................... 267
Placing Elements in Precise Locations ............................................................................................... 267
Draw with PinPoint ....................................................................................................................... 268
Move an Element with PinPoint and the Select Tool ................................................................... 269
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point ........................................................................................... 269
Re-Orient PinPoint ........................................................................................................................ 269
Placing Elements with a Grid .............................................................................................................. 271
Place Elements with a Grid .......................................................................................................... 272
Modify Grid Intensity ..................................................................................................................... 273
Dimensioning Drawing Elements ........................................................................................................ 274
Types of Dimensions .................................................................................................................... 277
Display the Dimension Toolbar .................................................................................................... 278
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension ............................................................................. 279
Dimension Along a Curve ............................................................................................................. 290
Align Dimensions .......................................................................................................................... 291
Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points .......................................................... 292
Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements ......................................................................... 294
Contents
Dimension Groups ........................................................................................................................ 295
Place a Dimension Group ............................................................................................................ 296
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group ...................................................................................... 297
Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension ...................................................................................... 298
Set a Dimension Axis ................................................................................................................... 300
Set the Dimension Type ............................................................................................................... 301
Edit a Dimension Prefix ................................................................................................................ 302
Set the Dimension Units ............................................................................................................... 303
Move a Dimension ........................................................................................................................ 303
Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements ......................................................................... 305
Converting Dimensions to Individual Elements ............................................................................ 308
Setting Paper and Model Units ........................................................................................................... 309
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet ................................................... 310
Measuring Distances and Areas ......................................................................................................... 310
Measure a Distance...................................................................................................................... 311
Measure the Length of a Line ....................................................................................................... 312
Measure the Distance Along an Object ........................................................................................ 313
Measure an Area .......................................................................................................................... 316
Set Bearing and Azimuth .............................................................................................................. 318
Using the Variable Table ..................................................................................................................... 318
Create a Variable with a Value or Expression .............................................................................. 320
Edit an Existing Variable............................................................................................................... 320
Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine ....................................................................... 321
Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet ........................................................................... 322
Edit a Formula Containing a Function .......................................................................................... 323
Insert a Function into a Formula ................................................................................................... 323
Format a Column .......................................................................................................................... 323
Transforming Elements .......................................................................................................................... 329
Changing the Shape of an Element .................................................................................................... 330
Modify an Element with the Select Tool ....................................................................................... 330
Change Command ....................................................................................................................... 331
Rotating Elements ............................................................................................................................... 331
Rotate an Element ........................................................................................................................ 331
Rotate Command ......................................................................................................................... 332
Rotate Ribbon ............................................................................................................................... 332
Mirroring Elements .............................................................................................................................. 334
Mirror an Element ......................................................................................................................... 334
Aligning SmartSketch Objects ............................................................................................................ 336
Align SmartSketch Objects ........................................................................................................... 337
Scaling Elements ................................................................................................................................ 338
Scale an Element ......................................................................................................................... 339
Scale an Element with Its Handles ............................................................................................... 340
Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its Original Model Size ............................................................ 340
Extending or Trimming Elements ........................................................................................................ 341
Trim an Element ........................................................................................................................... 343
Trim to Element Command .......................................................................................................... 343
Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements ................................................................. 344
Trim an Element to a Point ........................................................................................................... 345
Trim Part of Element..................................................................................................................... 345
Split Graphic Elements ................................................................................................................. 345
Extend an Element ....................................................................................................................... 347
Extend an Element to a Point ....................................................................................................... 348
10
Contents
Draw a Chamfer ........................................................................................................................... 349
Draw a Fillet .................................................................................................................................. 352
Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements ........................................................................ 354
Make Elements Concentric .......................................................................................................... 356
Make Elements Collinear.............................................................................................................. 357
Connect Elements ........................................................................................................................ 357
Make Elements Equal................................................................................................................... 358
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical .................................................................... 358
Make Elements Parallel ................................................................................................................ 359
Make Elements Perpendicular ..................................................................................................... 359
Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis ................................................................................... 360
Make Elements Tangential ........................................................................................................... 360
Arranging Elements ................................................................................................................................ 363
Grouping Elements ............................................................................................................................. 363
Group or Ungroup Elements ........................................................................................................ 364
Element Display Priority ...................................................................................................................... 367
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order ..................................................................... 368
Send an Element to the Back of the Display Order ...................................................................... 368
Pull an Element Up in the Display Order ...................................................................................... 369
Push an Element Down in the Display Order ............................................................................... 369
Using Layers to Arrange Elements ..................................................................................................... 370
Control the Display of Elements in a Window .............................................................................. 371
Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers ........................................................................... 374
Create a Layer .............................................................................................................................. 374
Display or Hide Layers ................................................................................................................. 375
Change the Layer of an Element.................................................................................................. 376
Change the Active Layer .............................................................................................................. 376
Create a Layer Group ................................................................................................................... 377
Modify Layers in a Layer Group ................................................................................................... 377
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group .............................................................................. 377
Delete a Layer Group ................................................................................................................... 378
Remove Empty Layers ................................................................................................................. 379
Using Symbols in Documents ................................................................................................................ 381
Creating Symbols ................................................................................................................................ 381
Create a Symbol ........................................................................................................................... 381
Create Symbol Command ............................................................................................................ 382
The Symbol Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 382
Symbol Explorer Window ............................................................................................................. 384
Open a Symbol Library ................................................................................................................. 385
View a Web Page with the Symbol Explorer ................................................................................ 386
View Documents with the Symbol Explorer.................................................................................. 386
Close the Symbol Explorer ........................................................................................................... 387
Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer ................................................................................ 387
Set the Home Page for the Symbol Explorer ............................................................................... 387
Move the Symbol Explorer ........................................................................................................... 388
Show a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer .......................................................................... 388
Add to the Favorites List in the Symbol Explorer ......................................................................... 389
Delete From a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer ............................................................... 389
Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles ........................................................................................ 390
Associate a Symbol with an Element ........................................................................................... 392
11
Contents
Placing Symbols.................................................................................................................................. 392
Place a Symbol ............................................................................................................................. 393
Place Copies of a Symbol ............................................................................................................ 394
Editing Symbols .................................................................................................................................. 395
Edit a Symbol ............................................................................................................................... 396
Symbol Ribbon ............................................................................................................................. 397
Edit Symbol Properties ................................................................................................................. 398
Create a Symbol Report ............................................................................................................... 401
Update a Symbol Report .............................................................................................................. 401
Scaling Symbols.................................................................................................................................. 402
Scale a Symbol ............................................................................................................................. 402
Mirroring Symbols ............................................................................................................................... 403
Mirror a Symbol ............................................................................................................................ 403
Rotating Symbols ................................................................................................................................ 403
Rotate a Symbol ........................................................................................................................... 404
Manipulating Symbols ......................................................................................................................... 405
Manipulate a Symbol .................................................................................................................... 406
Unlock a Symbol From an Element .............................................................................................. 406
Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points ................................................................. 406
Mechanism Modeling .......................................................................................................................... 407
Attach a Connector to an Object .................................................................................................. 407
Working with Attributes .......................................................................................................................... 409
Display the Attribute Viewer ................................................................................................................ 410
Attribute Viewer ................................................................................................................................... 410
Move the Attribute Viewer ................................................................................................................... 410
Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer......................................................................................................... 411
Edit Attributes ...................................................................................................................................... 411
Edit Common Attributes Within a Select Set ...................................................................................... 412
Delivered Reports ............................................................................................................................... 412
Create a Custom Report ..................................................................................................................... 412
Report Generator Command ........................................................................................................ 413
Report Generator Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 413
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors ................................................................................................. 415
Applying Formats with Styles .............................................................................................................. 416
Apply a Style ................................................................................................................................. 417
Rename a Style ............................................................................................................................ 417
Apply a Style to a Group of Elements .......................................................................................... 418
Delete a Style ............................................................................................................................... 418
Create a Style Using a Formatted Element .................................................................................. 418
Create a Style with the Style Command....................................................................................... 419
Change the Formats of a Style ..................................................................................................... 419
Save a Style to a Template .......................................................................................................... 419
Add Styles to the Current Document ............................................................................................ 420
Applying Unique Formats .................................................................................................................... 431
Format a Geometric Element ....................................................................................................... 432
Format a Text Box ........................................................................................................................ 440
Format a Dimension or Annotation ............................................................................................... 440
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries .......................................................................... 442
Place a Fill .................................................................................................................................... 444
Format a Fill .................................................................................................................................. 445
12
Contents
Create a Fill Color ......................................................................................................................... 445
Refill a Modified Boundary ........................................................................................................... 446
Draw a Mask ................................................................................................................................. 448
Working with Object, Linking and Embedding ..................................................................................... 451
How Embedding Works ...................................................................................................................... 453
Embed an Object .......................................................................................................................... 454
Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software ................................................................... 455
How Linking Works ............................................................................................................................. 457
Link an Object ............................................................................................................................... 458
Open an OLE Object for Editing ................................................................................................... 459
Edit a Linked Object ..................................................................................................................... 459
Change the Source for a Linked Object ....................................................................................... 459
Break a Connection to a Linked Object ........................................................................................ 460
Close a Linked Object's Source Document and Save the Changes ............................................ 460
Customizing the Software ...................................................................................................................... 463
Customize the Software with the Options Command ......................................................................... 464
Options Command........................................................................................................................ 464
Options Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 464
Create a New Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 469
Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default Settings............................................................................. 470
Toolbars Command ...................................................................................................................... 470
Toolbars Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 470
New Toolbar Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 471
Add a Button to a Toolbar ................................................................................................................... 471
Remove a Command from a Toolbar.................................................................................................. 471
Create a New Menu ............................................................................................................................ 471
Add a Command to a Menu ................................................................................................................ 472
Delete a Command from a Menu ........................................................................................................ 472
Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings ............................................................................. 473
Customize Command ................................................................................................................... 473
Customize Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 473
Run a Custom Command ................................................................................................................... 475
Custom Commands Command .................................................................................................... 475
Custom Command Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 476
Assign a Shortcut Key ......................................................................................................................... 476
Customize Keyboard Command .................................................................................................. 477
Customize Keyboard Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 477
Installing Additional Tools ................................................................................................................... 478
Install or Remove an Add-In ............................................................................................................... 479
Add-Ins Command........................................................................................................................ 479
Add-In Manager Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 479
Install the To Do List Add-In................................................................................................................ 480
To Do List Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 480
Create a To Do List ............................................................................................................................. 480
To Do List Manager Command .................................................................................................... 481
To Do List Manager Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 481
To Do List Options Command ...................................................................................................... 481
To Do List Notification Options Dialog Box .................................................................................. 482
13
Contents
Using the Line Style Editor ..................................................................................................................... 483
Customize the Line Style Editor Toolbar ............................................................................................ 484
Customize Toolbar Dialog Box (Line Style Editor) ....................................................................... 484
Creating a Buried Pipe Line Style ....................................................................................................... 485
Line Style Editor Command .......................................................................................................... 492
Line Style Editor Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 492
Create Custom Point Styles ................................................................................................................ 493
Create New Style Command ........................................................................................................ 494
Create New Point Style Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 494
Create Custom Linear Patterns .......................................................................................................... 494
Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 494
Create Custom Linear Styles .............................................................................................................. 495
Create New Linear Style Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 495
Create Custom Fill Styles ................................................................................................................... 495
Create New Fill Style Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 495
Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles ...................................................... 496
Copy Style Command................................................................................................................... 496
Copy Point Style Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 496
Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 496
Copy Linear Style Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 497
Copy Fill Style Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 497
Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear Styles ..................................................................... 497
Import Style Command ................................................................................................................. 497
Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles .................................................... 497
Delete Style Command................................................................................................................. 498
Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles ................................................... 498
Properties Command.................................................................................................................... 498
Point Style Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 498
Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 499
Linear Style Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 501
Fill Style Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 503
Show Styles in Resource Files Command ................................................................................... 503
Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet ............................................................................................ 504
Place Point Style Graphics Command ......................................................................................... 504
Redefine Point Styles .......................................................................................................................... 504
Define Point Style Graphics Command ........................................................................................ 504
Symbol Authoring ................................................................................................................................... 505
Planning Your Symbol ........................................................................................................................ 505
Create a Parametric Symbol ........................................................................................................ 506
Define Symbol Properties ............................................................................................................. 508
Define Handles for a Symbol ........................................................................................................ 508
Add a Symbol Attribute ................................................................................................................. 509
Modify a Symbol Attribute ............................................................................................................ 509
Remove a Symbol Attribute .......................................................................................................... 509
Attach a Help File to a Symbol ..................................................................................................... 510
Define an Icon for a Symbol ......................................................................................................... 510
Define Several Representations of a Symbol in One Document ................................................. 515
Redefine the Origin of a Symbol .................................................................................................. 518
Managing Text in Symbols .................................................................................................................. 519
Define SmartText Attributes for a Smart Label ............................................................................ 520
Edit SmartText Attributes for a Symbol ........................................................................................ 521
14
Contents
Create a Leader for a SmartText Label ........................................................................................ 521
Define a Text-Driven Symbol ....................................................................................................... 522
Create a SmartLabel With SmartText Fields ................................................................................ 524
Integrating Programs with Your Symbol ............................................................................................. 529
Add Symbol Commands ............................................................................................................... 529
Run a Program That You Created from a Symbol ....................................................................... 530
Using Blank Color and Fill with Symbols ............................................................................................ 530
Create a Symbol with a Fill for Masking ....................................................................................... 531
Defining SmartPoints .......................................................................................................................... 531
Define SmartPoints for a Symbol ................................................................................................. 531
Place a SmartPoint with Connect Attributes................................................................................. 532
Place a SmartPoint with Drag Attributes ...................................................................................... 532
Place a SmartPoint with Drop Attributes ...................................................................................... 532
Edit SmartPoints on a Symbol ...................................................................................................... 533
Symbol Lookup Tables ....................................................................................................................... 534
Set Up an ODBC Data Source ..................................................................................................... 535
Generate a Lookup Table ............................................................................................................. 535
Using the Internet .................................................................................................................................... 539
Open a Document Inside the Internet Explorer .................................................................................. 539
Hyperlinks ........................................................................................................................................... 539
Insert a Hyperlink .......................................................................................................................... 539
Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu) .................................................................................... 541
Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu) ....................................................................................... 541
Edit a Hyperlink ............................................................................................................................ 543
Working with Raster Images .................................................................................................................. 545
Insert a Raster Image ......................................................................................................................... 546
Image Command .......................................................................................................................... 547
Save Changes to a Linked Image ....................................................................................................... 547
Save Selected Image(s) Command ............................................................................................. 547
Undo Changes to Images ................................................................................................................... 547
Image Undo Command ................................................................................................................ 548
Redo Changes to Images ................................................................................................................... 548
Image Redo Command ................................................................................................................ 548
Select a Rectangular Area of an Image .............................................................................................. 548
Rectangular Select Area Command ............................................................................................. 549
Select a Polygon-Shaped Area of an Image ....................................................................................... 550
Polygonal Select Area Command ................................................................................................ 551
Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image ................................................................................ 551
Contrast and Brightness Command ............................................................................................. 552
Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 552
Invert Colors in an Image .................................................................................................................... 553
Invert Command ........................................................................................................................... 553
Fill an Image Area with Color .............................................................................................................. 553
Fill Command ............................................................................................................................... 554
Fill Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................... 554
Position an Image by Dragging ........................................................................................................... 554
Position Command (Shortcut Menu) ............................................................................................ 555
Position an Image by Clicking ............................................................................................................. 556
Position Command ....................................................................................................................... 556
View Image Properties ........................................................................................................................ 556
15
Contents
Image Properties Command ........................................................................................................ 557
Image Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 557
Erase Part of An Image ....................................................................................................................... 558
Image Erase Command................................................................................................................ 558
Remove Speckles from an Image ....................................................................................................... 558
Speckle Remove Command ......................................................................................................... 559
Speckle Remove Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 559
Warp an Image Using Multiple Points ................................................................................................. 560
Multi-Point Warp Command ......................................................................................................... 560
Multi-Point Warp Ribbon............................................................................................................... 560
Warp Options Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 561
Working with CAD Drawings .................................................................................................................. 565
Working with MicroStation Files .......................................................................................................... 565
Command Comparison with MicroStation .................................................................................... 567
Task Comparison with MicroStation ............................................................................................. 574
MicroStation-Based Workflow Examples ..................................................................................... 578
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import .............................................................................. 581
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Export .............................................................................. 587
Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation .............................................................. 591
Open a MicroStation Document ................................................................................................... 595
Place MicroStation Information in the Document ......................................................................... 597
Create a Template to Insert a MicroStation Document ................................................................ 598
Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File ........................................................... 598
Control Layers in a MicroStation Reference File .......................................................................... 599
Add MicroStation Styles to a Document ....................................................................................... 599
MicroStation Cells in Your Document........................................................................................... 600
Open a MicroStation Cell Library ................................................................................................. 600
MicroStation Construction Class Information ............................................................................... 601
Working with AutoCAD Files ............................................................................................................... 601
Command Comparison with AutoCAD ......................................................................................... 603
Task Comparison with AutoCAD .................................................................................................. 609
AutoCAD-Based Workflow Examples .......................................................................................... 617
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import ................................................................................... 620
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export ................................................................................... 626
Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation ................................................................... 631
Open an AutoCAD Document ...................................................................................................... 638
Place AutoCAD Information in the Document .............................................................................. 638
Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File .............................................................. 639
Control Layers in an AutoCAD Reference File ............................................................................. 640
Using the Validation Add-In Tool ........................................................................................................... 641
Install the Validation Tools Add-In ...................................................................................................... 641
Run the Validate Tool on the Active Document .................................................................................. 642
Validate Command ....................................................................................................................... 643
Validation Options Command ....................................................................................................... 643
Validation Options Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 643
Sample Workflows................................................................................................................................... 645
Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained ................................................................................... 645
Connect Points While Drawing a Line................................................................................................. 646
16
Contents
Connect Points While Modifying a Line .............................................................................................. 646
Creating a Kinematics Animation ........................................................................................................ 647
Customizing a Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 650
Dimension the Length of a Line .......................................................................................................... 651
Dimension the Diameter of a Circle .................................................................................................... 651
Draw an Arc ........................................................................................................................................ 651
Draw a Horizontal Line ........................................................................................................................ 652
Draw a Line ......................................................................................................................................... 653
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line ............................................................................................. 653
Draw a Line with PinPoint ................................................................................................................... 654
Establish More Than One Relationship .............................................................................................. 654
Formatting a New Drawing ................................................................................................................. 655
Formatting an Existing Drawing .......................................................................................................... 656
Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet .................................................................................................... 656
Measure the Length of a Line ............................................................................................................. 657
Place a Doubleline Precisely .............................................................................................................. 658
Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional Values .............................................................................. 659
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 661
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 677
17
Contents
18
Preface
This document is a user's guide for SmartSketch and provides conceptual information and
procedural instructions for creating drawings. The content is identical to the online Help that is
delivered as part of the SmartSketch software.
Intergraph gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as you need for
non-commercial use at your company. You cannot reprint this document for resale or
redistribution outside your company.
19
Preface
20
SECTION
What's New in SmartSketch?

Version 2014 (8.0)
A topic has been added showing how to create a wrapper symbol that contains a symbol
and a SmartLabel. For more information, see Create a SmartLabel With SmartText Fields
(on page 524). (P4 IT: 49078)
SmartSketch supports the import and export of MicroStation V8 DGN files.
SmartSketch supports the import and export of AutoCAD 2010-2012 files.
Changes have been made to the MicroStation and AutoCAD Export Options dialog box
to show only supported versions. Each selected version is then listed in the Save as type list
in the Save As dialog box. For more information see the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog
Box) (on page 467) and Save As Dialog Box (on page 94). (P2 IM: 52181)
The Import Cells2 as Symbols setting has been added to the ITMSTN.INI configuration file
to define whether Type 2 cell headers are imported from MicroStation V8 files as symbols or
groups.
Added the Owner group option to the Colors tab of the Options dialog box. For more
information, see Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 465).
The SmartPlant menu and corresponding commands (Register, Set Active Plant, Publish
and Refresh) have been removed. Use SmartPlant Enterprise tools such as SmartPlant
Foundation to publish SmartSketch documents. (P2 IT: 49144)
The Fillet Rectangle command allows you to draw a fillet rectangle using a single
command. Previous versions of the software required you to use a combination of the
Rectangle and Fillet commands to draw the same object. For more information, see Fillet
Rectangle Command (on page 177). (P2 IT: 49184)
Version 2011 R1 (7.1)
Configuration settings for MicroStation have been updated. There is a new ini setting called
Symbol Layers. These changes are reflected in CR-IT-48941, CR-IT-48942, and
CR-IT-48943. For more information, see Configuration File Settings for MicroStation
Translation (on page 591).
Version 2011 (7.0) Service Pack 1
SmartSketch is now supported on the following operating systems:
Microsoft 64-bit Windows Standard/Enterprise Server 2008 (R2)
Microsoft 32-bit Windows 7 Professional and Enterprise Client
Microsoft 64-bit Windows 7 Professional and Enterprise Client
You can specify whether toolbars use high-color icons or the classic icons. See Toolbars
Dialog Box (on page 470).
21
What's New in SmartSketch?
22
SECTION 1
Introducing SmartSketch
SmartSketch is the only desktop application that gives you the power to create quick sketches,
complex engineering designs, production drawings, plot plans, schematics, business diagrams,
and more.
Industry templates with numerous symbols available for SmartSketch
Sketch ideas spontaneously and accurately, instantly transforming them into precise CAD
geometry
What-if scenarios and testing real-world models reduce prototyping time
Merge your designs with AutoCAD and MicroStation using the Translators option
Add text and spreadsheets from Word, Excel, and PowerPoint; integrate with popular
databases
Industry Solutions Available in SmartSketch and in SmartSketch Options

Get a quick start in projects with workflow templates tailored to different industries including:
Process: Process Flow Diagrams, P&ID, Electrical Schematics, Ortho Piping, Control Loop,
Process Block Diagramming
Business Diagrams: Workflow Diagramming, Basic Diagramming, Office Layout, Flowcharts,
Organization Charts, Network Diagrams
Network Diagram
Technical Drawing
Mapping: Atlas Mapping, Directional Mapping
AEC: Architecture, Construction, HVAC, Plot Plans, Site, Landscape
Mechanical: Mechanical Drawings (ANSI & ISO)
SmartSketch Works with Leading CAD Products

Unlike most low-end sketching and drawing products, SmartSketch supports major existing CAD
environments such as AutoCAD and MicroStation. You have full import and export capabilities
for traditional CAD data. In addition, you can work with .dgn and .dwg data in native formatsas
if these formats were OLE-enabled.
Acting as wrappers around foreign data, OLE servers allow you to simply drag AutoCAD or
MicroStation data into SmartSketch. You can even locate points in the CAD geometry and work
directly off those points in your SmartSketch document.
This capabilitygiving you live access to legacy datamakes SmartSketch a powerful tool on
your desktop.
23
Technical User Forum

See http://www.intergraph.com/ppm/customers/tuf/smartsketch.aspx
http://www.intergraph.com/ppm/customers/tuf/smartsketch.aspx to open the SmartSketch
Technical User Forum website. This site contains user discussions on SmartSketch.
Additional Documentation
For more information about installing and using SmartSketch, the following documentation is
provided:
SmartSketch User's Guide (SmartSketchUsersGuide.pdf) - Provides all of the information
found in the online Help file, presented in a printable .PDF format. You can access this guide
using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software. Additionally, the user's guide
is delivered on your computer to the ..\SmartSketch\Program\resdlls\0009 folder after you
install the software.
SmartSketch Installation Guide (SmartSketchInstallGuide.pdf) - Provides installation and
configuration information for system administrators. You can access this guide on the
SmartSketch CD and on the AutoPlay dialog box, or using the Help > Printable Guides
command in the software. The installation guide is also delivered on your computer to the
..\SmartSketch\Program\resdlls\0009 folder after you install the software.
SmartSketch README (README.HTM) - Contains installation and configuration
information, along with notes about last-minute fixes and other helpful hints. You will find this
file on the SmartSketch CD.
SmartSketch Programming Help (SktchGd.chm and SktchPrg.chm) - These files,
available online only, contain instructions and complete reference information for
programming with the SmartSketch Automation Interface. You will find these files in the
..\SmartSketch\Programming Help folder after you install the SmartSketch Programming
option.
See Also
User Assistance (on page 28)
Getting Started with SmartSketch (on page 33)
Using SmartSketch Options

The following options further enhance the functionality found in SmartSketch. They are available
via the Custom setup feature. For more information, see the Installation Guide, accessible from
the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.
AEC Solutions (on page 25)
Electrical Solutions (on page 25)
Image Integrator (on page 25)
Mechanical Solutions (on page 26)
Process Solutions (on page 26)
Symbol Authoring (on page 27)
Programming Tools (on page 27)
Translators (on page 28)
24
AEC Solutions
A variety of AEC templates and symbols are provided with the SmartSketch AEC Solutions
option. After installing the AEC Solutions option, you will be able to use the AEC templates with
any AutoCAD, MicroStation, DXF, or IGR reference file.
You can install the AEC Solutions option using the Custom setup feature. For
more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide
accessible from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.
Electrical Solutions
The Electrical Solutions option for SmartSketch contains industry-specific templates (both
Imperial and metric), task-specific toolbars, and industry-standard symbols that let you quickly
and easily create electrical schematics.
When installed, the Electrical Solutions option delivers 250 electrical symbols, including:
Circuit Protectors
Contacts and Relays
Electron Tubes
Fundamental Items
High Voltage
Logic Gates
Qualifying Symbols
Rotating Mach
Semiconductors - Diodes, Thyristors, Transistors
Signaling
Switches
Terminal and Connectors
Transformers and Inductors
Transmission Path
You can install the Electrical Solutions option using the Custom setup feature.
For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide
Image Integrator
The Image Integrator option provides integrated tools for viewing and manipulating images in a
vector/raster drawing environment. You can manipulate all or part of an image using such edits
as cut and move, copy and move, tint, paint, or erase. You can adjust contrast and brightness,
or invert the pixel values to negative or positive. You can even scale and rotate images to match
vector drawings or maps using source and target registration points. Image Integrator supports
popular binary grayscale, indexed color, and true color image formats including GIF, JPG, BMO,
TIF, CAL, PC, RLE, COT, CIT, TG4, CRL, CMP, and RGB.
When you install the Image Integrator option in conjunction with the Translators (on
page 28) option, you can import hybrid raster/vector files into and exported from AutoCAD and
MicroStation files while maintaining all reference data.
You can install the Image Integrator option using the Custom setup feature. For
25
See Also
Image Command (on page 547)
Insert a Raster Image (on page 546)
Mechanical Solutions
The Mechanical Solutions option for SmartSketch includes symbol sets that let you create and
place GD&T (Geometric Dimension and Tolerancing) and Weld Symbols into SmartSketch
drawings. The symbols are placed through a simple drag-and-drop operation from the Symbol
Explorer. You can also place text fields that build up the symbols via this same drag-and-drop
operation. Several of the symbols feature multiple representations that you can easily access
with a simple right-mouse click on your placed symbol. Once you see the representation you
like, you simply left-mouse click it to change the display of the symbol in your drawing.
GD&T symbols include input fields - such as tolerance value - which are easily accessed with a
simple double-click of your mouse; you can then edit the input field to change its value. You can
access these symbols when you open a Mechanical template in SmartSketch. GD&T and Weld
Symbols for SmartSketch include both Metric and Imperial templates.
You can install the Mechanical Solutions option using the Custom setup feature.
For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide
See Also
Mechanical Engineering Templates (on page 131)
Mechanical Templates (on page 132)
Process Solutions
When installed, the Process Solutions option for SmartSketch provides industry-specific
templates, task-specific toolbars, and industry-standard symbols that let you produce 2D
process diagrams, schematics, and precision drawings. With the included report macros, you
can easily create component reports.
Simple drag-and-drop actions let you quickly position major components of a process system
into their appropriate locations in the drawing area. Using SmartSketch's intelligent routing (the
Connector command) together with predefined linestyles to represent pipes and
instrumentation lines, you can connect components at each symbol's connect points. You can
place other inline components, such as valves, directly on a pipeline or instrumentation line.
You can install the Process Solutions option using the Custom setup feature. For
See Also
Ortho Piping Templates (on page 135)
PFD and P&ID Templates (on page 136)
Plot Plan Templates (on page 138)
Process Block Diagramming Templates (on page 139)
26
Symbol Authoring
When installed, the Symbol Authoring option for SmartSketch provides integrated tools for
creating new symbols and modifying existing symbols. Symbol Authoring tools give you the
ability to:
Define SmartPoints on your symbols that predetermine points where connectors should
attach (connect points), multiple origin points for placement (drag points), and points where
other symbols should attach (drop points)
Define symbol behaviors such as rotation angles, desired handles (mirror, scale, rotate),
label positions, etc.
Define symbol attributes (text information) and symbol parameters (dimensional information)
Define special processes (actions) that execute on symbol drop, double click, and so forth.
Define bitmaps and help files to be associated with your symbol.
Drive symbol parameters and attributes from external datasources such as Excel or MS
Access (lookup tables)
Define several graphic representations (multiple representations) of a symbol that can be
changed after placement using the right mouse short-cut
You can install the Symbol Authoring option using the Custom setup feature. For
See Also
Planning Your Symbol (on page 505)
Managing Text in Symbols (on page 519)
Programming Tools
The Programming Tools option includes programming libraries that allow developers to create
custom programs that run with SmartSketch.
Programming Tools is not a requirement to run the custom programs, only to create
custom programs for SmartSketch.
The Programming Tools option includes a type library delivered with the software that contains
all the objects, properties, and methods available with SmartSketch. On-line documentation for
these libraries is delivered locally to [Product Directory]:\Program
Files\SmartSketch\Programming Help. These guides are designed to:
Provide an overview of how you can customize SmartSketch with standard Windows
programming tools and languages, including Visual Basic.
Describe the tools available in SmartSketch for customization
Show practical examples of customization using the sample custom commands that are
delivered with the Programming Tools option.
You can install the Programming Tools option using the Custom setup feature.
For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide accessible
from the Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.
27
Translators
The Translators option allows you to translate or reference MicroStation and AutoCAD files
for use with SmartSketch. MicroStation and AutoCAD fonts, linestyles, and fill styles are fully
supported, so you can modify your drawings in SmartSketch and then save them as either
MicroStation or AutoCAD formats. CAD translation provides equivalent objects to and from
which elements or entities may be mapped during translation. Translator options let you
customize how MicroStation or AutoCAD fonts, linestyles, widths, views, and units are imported,
referenced, or saved as MicroStation or AutoCAD drawings.
If your MicroStation or AutoCAD drawings are "hybrid" drawings containing both graphic
and raster data, we recommend that you install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option for
SmartSketch as well. Although hybrid MicroStation and AutoCAD drawings will import without
Image Integrator, all of the raster data will be ignored in your new file.
You can install the Translators option using the Custom setup feature. For more
information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide accessible from the
Help > Printable Guides command from within the software.
See Also
Working with MicroStation Files (on page 565)
Working with AutoCAD Files (on page 601)
User Assistance
You can access different kinds of information any time you are running the software, including
reference topics, narrative descriptions, or instructional material. In addition, the software
provides several learning tools that you can activate from the online Help menu.
You can use About SmartSketch on the Help menu to see your software version and license
information.
Online Help
A structured table of contents, an index, and full-text search capabilities provide easy access to
Help topics. Press F1 any time you need online Help during a design session. When a
command is active, the Help topic for that command appears. If no command is active, then the
table of contents for the Help topics appears.
You can also access the table of contents by clicking SmartSketch Help Topics on the Help
menu.
Learning Tools
To learn to use the software more efficiently, explore the tutorials available on the Help
menu.
Every time you activate the software, a Tip of the Day dialog box displays a helpful tip. You
can use More Tips on the dialog box, or Tip of the Day on the Help menu, to display more
tips.
User Interface Features
28
Tool tips help you find command names. When you pause the mouse pointer on the
command button on the toolbar, a yellow label displays the command's name.
Brief command descriptions show you the basic function of a command. When you point the
pointer at the command button on the toolbar, the description appears in the Status Bar at
the bottom of the window. Also, messages that explain your actions for each step of the
command appear in the Status Bar.
Display Context-Sensitive Help

1. On the main toolbar, click Help
. The pointer changes to a northwest arrow with a
question mark.
2. Click a command or dialog box in the main window.
What's This Help Command

Displays context-sensitive Help on an item in the current window. You can use this
command to get help on any item even when the item is not active. When this command is
active, the pointer changes to a northwest arrow with a question mark.
You can press Shift + F1 to get context-sensitive Help on an active command.
Help Command
Displays the table of contents for the SmartSketch Help topics, which include step-by-step
instructions for using the software, reference information, examples of features, and technical
support information. It also provides access to the Help index and full-text search.
See Also
Display Help Topics (on page 31)
Access the Printable Guides

1. Click Help > Printable Guides.
2. In the browser that opens, click a link to the guide that you want to view or print.
To print the guide, use the printing capability of the application that opens the guide.
The printable SmartSketchUser's Guide contains the same information that is in the
online Help.
Printable Guides Command

SmartSketch documentation is available in PDF format. To view these files, you need a PDF
reader such as Adobe Reader. After you have installed a PDF reader, you can click a
document title to open its PDF file.
Intergraph gives its customers permission to print as many copies of the delivered PDF files that
you need for non-commercial use at your company. You cannot print the PDF files for resale or
redistribution outside your company.
To prevent Internet Explorer from blocking PDF files, you can change your Internet Options to
allow active content located on your computer to run:
1. In Internet Explorer, click Tools > Internet Options.
2. Select the Advanced Tab.
3. Scroll to the Security section of the settings, and select Allow active content to run on My
Computer.
Access Online Tutorials

1. Click Help > Learning SmartSketch.
29
2. Select a tutorial.
3. Follow the instructions in the Learning Center to navigate within the tutorials.
4. Return to the product at anytime by clicking the SmartSketch icon on the bottom of your
screen.
If you installed the software from a network, verify the network drive or Universal Naming
Convention (UNC) network connection.
Learning Center Command

Accesses a set of HTML-based tutorials to help you get up and running with the software.
See Also
Access Online Tutorials (on page 29)
Display the Tip of the Day

Click Help > Tip of the Day.
If you want to turn off Tip of the Day, set the check box on the Tip of the Day dialog box
that appears when you start the software.
To turn Tip of the Day back on, you can click Tip of the Day on the Help menu. Then, on
the Tip of the Day dialog box, set the Show Tips at Startup check box.
Turn the Tip of the Day On or Off

Turn Off Tip of the Day
1. Click Help > Tip of the Day.
2. On the Tip of the Day dialog box, clear the Show Tips at Startup check box.
Turn On Tip of the Day

1. Click Help > Tip of the Day.
2. On the Tip of the Day dialog box, click the Show Tips at Startup check box.
Tip of the Day Command

Displays tips about using features in the software. This command also offers a tip each time you
start the software.
See Also
Display the Tip of the Day (on page 30)
Tip of the Day Dialog Box (on page 30)
Tip of the Day Dialog Box

Displays a tip each time you start the software. You can also activate this dialog box by
choosing Tip of the Day from the Help menu.
30
Did You Know - Displays a tip about using a feature.
More Tips - Displays a list of available tips.
Next Tip - Displays the next tip in the list.
Show Tips At Startup - Displays a tip every time you start the software. If you do not want to
display tips when you start the software, clear this option.
See Also
Display the Tip of the Day (on page 30)
Display Help Topics

Click Help > SmartSketch Help.
Open the SmartSketch Home Page

1. Click Help > SmartSketch on the Web.
2. Follow the instructions on the SmartSketch web page to navigate within the site and to leave
the site.
3. Return to the SmartSketch product at anytime by clicking the SmartSketch icon on the
bottom of your screen.
On this page, you can access a variety of tools to help you learn and use SmartSketch
more efficiently.
SmartSketch on the Web Command

Activates your World Wide Web browser and opens the SmartSketch web page. On this page,
you can:
Access registration and support information
Access learning tools
Keep up-to-date on product events
View a web gallery of SmartSketch drawings
Contact Intergraph.
Display Information About the Software

Click Help > About SmartSketch.
About Command
Displays information about your copy of the software, including the version number and the
copyright, legal, and licensing notices.
See Also
Display Information About the Software (on page 31)
31
32
SECTION 2
Getting Started with SmartSketch

After installing SmartSketch, you are ready to start the application and begin using SmartSketch
for all your 2D precision design and production drafting needs. Before starting, you need to be
familiar with the interface components, understand Setting Up Documents (on page 63), and
familiar with using the pre-defined templates.
See Also
Exploring the Interface (on page 35)
Setting Up Documents (on page 63)
SmartSketch Templates (on page 107)
Using the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility

The SmartPlant License Checkout utility (License Checkout Utility.exe) allows you to obtain
licenses for SmartPlant products for use on a non-networked computer (for example, a remote
laptop). Each user on a server can check out an individual license on that machine.
When you check out a license, the license and expiration information are stored on your local
machine, separate from another user's license and expiration information. A license is available
only for the user that checks out the license. Each time you start the product during the checkout
period, a message displays the expiration date for the checked-out license.
When the checkout period for the license expires, the SmartPlant product attempts to request a
license using SmartPlant License Manager the next time you start the product. For example,
after the license expires at 11:59 PM on the expiration date, the next time you start the product,
it attempts to access the SmartPlant License Manager license machine for base and module
licenses prior to running.
You must install and configure SmartPlant License Manager before checking out a license.
You must have administrator privileges to setup and install the utility.
Install SmartPlant License Checkout Utility

1. Insert the product CD into the CD-ROM drive. If the installation does not start automatically,
double-click setup.exe in the main folder.
2. Click SmartPlant License Checkout Utility.
3. Type your name and company name.
4. Verify your name and company name, then click Next.
5. Click Display to read and accept the license agreement, and then click Yes.
6.
7.
8.
9.
You must have a PDF reader to view the license agreement.

Specify the destination folder.
Review your settings, and then click Next.
Click Install to start the installation process.
Click Finish.
33

You can uninstall the License Checkout utility at any time, even if you are currently
running a product in remote license mode.
Check Out a License for SmartSketch

Be sure that SmartPlant License Manager is installed and configured on your computer.
1. Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant License Checkout Utility > License
Checkout Utility.
2. Select the product for which you want to check out a license.
3. Click OK.
34
Checked out licenses cannot be checked in.

When running in remote license mode, you cannot use setup to modify the product
installation until the following conditions are met:
The checkout duration expires.
The system is working with SmartPlant License Manager in connected license mode
once again.
In other words, you cannot install or remove modules while running in remote license mode.
If the product is running in remote license mode but is unable to confirm for any reason that
it is running in that mode, the product automatically returns to connected license mode and
attempts to obtain the licenses from SmartPlant License Manager. The product notifies you if
it is unable to obtain licenses from SmartPlant License Manager.
Each time you start the product while using the remote license mode, the software displays
a message informing you when the checked out license will expire. The first time that you
run the product after the checked out licenses expire, the software displays a message
informing you that the checked out licenses have expired and that the software is reverting
to the standard connected license mode and attempting to get licenses from SmartPlant
License Manager.
When SmartSketch Drawing Editor (Standalone) is used, a SmartSketch license is assigned
to it.
License Checkout Utility Dialog Box

Allows you to select the product for which you want to check out a license.
Product - Displays the installed products available for license checkout. Select the product for
which you want to check out licenses.
Modules - Displays the modules available with your product. A grayed-out entry means that
module is not installed on your workstation. If no modules appear in the list, either your product
contains no supported modules, or no modules have been installed. Check the box beside the
module for which you want to check out a license. If you want to check out only the base
product, do not check any of the modules.
Duration - Specify the number of days that you want to check out a license. Remember that
after licenses are checked out, they cannot be checked in before the license period expires.
When the checkout period for the license expires, the product returns to normal, connected
licensing using SmartPlant License Manager the next time you start the product.
Exploring the Interface

The window consists of several components. Most of the software's user interface components
are fully customizable. You can arrange your workspace in several ways:
Move windows around on the screen.
Display, hide, or customize toolbars using Toolbars on the View menu or the buttons on the
Main toolbar.
Move a ribbon to the top or bottom of the drawing sheet.
Set viewing options for the active window by clicking Options on the Tools menu and
setting the options you want on the dialog box.
User Interface Components

Menu Bar and Menus (on page 38)
Ribbons and Dialog Boxes (on page 39)
35

Toolbars (on page 40)
Keyboard (on page 51)
Mouse (on page 52)
Exploring the Window with Your Mouse

Use the left mouse button to do the following:
Select multiple elements by dragging to fence them.
Drag a selected element.
Click or drag to draw an element.
Select a menu or toolbar command.
Double-click to activate an embedded or linked object.
Use the right mouse button to do the following:
Restart a command.
Display a shortcut menu. Shortcut menus are context-sensitive. The commands on the
menu depend upon your mouse location and which elements, if any, are selected.
You can also use the mouse to locate objects. As you move the pointer around on the drawing
sheet, objects under the mouse change to a highlight color to indicate that they have been
located. When you move the mouse away from a highlighted object, the object returns to its
original color.
Using Ribbons and Dialog Boxes

Because the software is Office-Compatible, you will find the ribbons and dialog boxes work just
like those in Windows. A unique ribbon appears when you click a specific command or when
you select an element. These ribbons help you control various settings for the active command.
You can place a ribbon bar only at the top or the bottom of the window. You can drag a ribbon to
the top or the bottom, but not to the sides, of the window The following figure shows a ribbon.
Ribbons and dialog boxes contain one or more of the following tools:
A check box sets or clears an option. When you click the check box, an X appears to show that
the option is set. Clicking the check box again clears it.
36

Some options give you two or more choices. You can click an option to activate it.
A box accepts a value when you type it and press Tab or Enter. You can edit the text by
highlighting it with the mouse and then pressing Backspace or Delete.
A drop-down list box gives you several options to select from. In some cases, you can also type
a value in the field.
A list box allows you to select an item from a list. You can scroll through the list using the scroll
bar and double-click an item. Or, you can click an option on the list and then click OK on the
dialog box.
37
Using Toolbars
The toolbars give you quick access to commands. You can place a toolbar anywhere within the
application window, either docked at the top, bottom, right, or left, or floating anywhere in your
workspace.
On a toolbar, some command buttons display fly-outs when you click and hold the command
button. Fly-outs access commands that are closely associated with the button that you clicked.
These types of buttons have a small black arrow in the bottom right corner.
Arranging Your Work Space

You can arrange the workspace in several ways:
Move windows around on the screen.
Display, hide, or customize toolbars using Toolbars on the View menu or the buttons on the
Main toolbar.
Move a ribbon to the top or bottom of the drawing sheet.
Set viewing options for the active window by clicking Options on the Tools menu and
setting the options you want on the dialog box.
Menu Bar and Menus

The software's menu bar allows you to access all commands, divided by workflow or task. When
you click a command, a description of the command appears in the message field at the bottom
left of the main application window. You can also click the Help button on the Main toolbar, and
then click a menu command to view a description of that command.
38
Ribbons and Dialog Boxes

A unique ribbon appears when you click a specific command or when you select an element.
These ribbons help you control various settings for the active command. You can place a ribbon
bar only at the top or the bottom of the window. You can drag a ribbon to the top or the bottom,
but not to the sides, of the window.
Ribbons and dialog boxes contain one or more of the following tools:
A check box sets or clears an option. When you click the check box, an X appears to show that
the option is set. Clicking the check box again clears it.
Some options give you two or more choices. You can click an option to activate it.
A box accepts a value when you type it and press Tab or Enter. You can edit the text by
highlighting it with the mouse and then pressing Backspace or Delete.
A drop-down list box gives you several options to select from. In some cases, you can also type
a value in the field.
A list box allows you to select an item from a list. You can scroll through the list using the scroll
bar and double-click an item. Or, you can click an option on the list and then click OK on the
dialog box.
See Also
Exploring the Window with Your Mouse (on page 36)
39
Toolbars
Toolbars contain the same commands found on menus in the software. You can show or hide
toolbars or move them to any location in your workspace. You can also add or remove
commands from toolbars, or create your own.
To show or hide a toolbar, point to Toolbars on the View menu. The list shows all of the
available toolbars. A check mark next to a toolbar name means that the toolbar will be
displayed. To show a toolbar that isn't checked, click its name. To hide a toolbar, click the
name of the toolbar to clear the check mark.
To move a toolbar to a different location, click the toolbar's title bar and then drag the toolbar
to the new location.
On a toolbar, some command buttons display fly-outs when you click and hold the command
button. Fly-outs access commands that are closely associated with the button that you
clicked. These types of buttons have a small black arrow in the bottom right corner.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To add a command to a toolbar from a menu, click View > Toolbars > Customize and then
click the Commands tab. In the Categories list, click the group that contains the command
you want to add, and then in the Commands list, click that command and drag it to the
toolbar in your workspace.
To remove a command from a toolbar, drag it off the toolbar and release it anywhere in the
3D model viewing area (except on another toolbar).
If you add commands to one of the default toolbars, such as the Dimension toolbar, you
can reset the toolbar to its original state:
Click View > Toolbars.
Click the Toolbars tab.
In the Toolbars dialog box, select the toolbar you want to reset.
Click Reset.
Click OK.
Change Toolbar
The Change toolbar contains commands that you can use to modify elements of your symbol.
You can activate the Change toolbar by using the View > Toolbars command.
Moves an element or a select set in small increments. You use the Delta box on the Nudge
ribbon to define the size of the increment, and then use the arrow keys to "nudge" the element
or select set in the corresponding direction (left, right, up, and down).
Move - Moves elements from one location to another. For more
information, see Move Command (on page 212).
Nudge - Moves an element or a select set in small increments.
Offset - Draws an offset copy of an element or a set of contiguous
elements. For more information, see Offset Command (on page
217).
Rotate - Rotates one or more elements. For more information, see
Rotate Command (on page 332).
Mirror - Mirrors one or more selected elements about a line that
you define. For more information, see Mirror Command (on page
40

335).
Align - Allows you to align two or more elements in a selection
set. For more information, see Align Command (on page 338).
Scale - Reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor
that you define. For more information, see Scale Command (on
page 341).
Rectangular Pattern - Copies selected elements in a rectangular
pattern. For more information, see Rectangular Pattern Command
(on page 221).
Circular Pattern - Arranges selected elements in a circular
pattern. For more information, see Circular Pattern Command (on
page 222).
Delete - Deletes the selected element and any relationships and
dimensions that have been placed on it. For more information, see
Delete Command (on page 219).
Bring to Front - Moves a selected element to the front of the
display order. For more information, see Bring to Front Command
(on page 368).
Send to Back - Moves a selected element to the back of the
display order. For more information, see Send to Back Command
(on page 369).
Pull Up - Moves a selected element up one position in the display
order. For more information, see Pull Up Command (on page
369).
Push Down - Moves a selected element down one position in the
display order. For more information, see Push Down Command
(on page 369).
Group - Binds elements so that you can locate, select, and
manipulate them as a unit. For more information, see Group
Command (on page 365).
UnGroup - Removes elements from groups that were defined
using the Group command. For more information, see UnGroup
Dimension Toolbar
The Dimension toolbar contains commands to dimension elements of your symbol. You can
activate the Dimension toolbar with the View > Toolbars command or by clicking Dimension
on the main toolbar.
SmartDimension - Places several different dimensions. For more
information, see SmartDimension Command (on page 280).
Distance Between - Places a linear dimension that measures the
distance between elements or key points. For more information, see
Distance Between Command (on page 293).
41

Angle Between - Places a dimension that measures the angle
between elements or key points. For more information, see Angle
Between Command (on page 281).
Axis - Sets a dimension axis for a drawing. For more information,
see Axis Command (on page 301).
Coordinate Dimension - Places a dimension that measures the
distance from a common origin to one or more key points or
elements. For more information, see Coordinate Dimension
Symmetric Diameter - Places a dimension that measures the
distance between a center line and another element or key point.
For more information, see Symmetric Diameter Command (on page
299).
Measure Distance - Measures the distance between points in free
space or between key points. For more information, see Measure
Distance Command (on page 313).
Measure Distance Along - Measures the distance along an object
based on two points. For more information, see Measure Distance
Along Command (on page 315).
Measure Area - Displays the most recently selected area of the
boundary in the current units. For more information, see Measure
Area Command (on page 317).
Character Map - Inserts a character into a text box using a different
font. For more information, see Character Map Command (on page
249).
Leader - Adds a leader to an annotation or to another leader. For
more information, see Leader Command (on page 246).
Balloon - Places a balloon containing text. For more information,
see Balloon Command (on page 240).
Dimension Text - Overrides a driven dimensional value with a text
string. For more information, see Dimension Text Command (on
page 306).
Draw Toolbar
The Draw toolbar displays by default docked to the left side of the interface. You can use the
commands on this toolbar to place the basic elements of your symbol.
Some commands on the Draw toolbar display fly-outs when you click and hold the command
button. Fly-outs access commands that vary from but are closely associated with the original
command that is displayed.
Select Tool - Use to select, modify, and manipulate elements. For
more information, see Select Tool (on page 201).
SmartSelect - Creates a select set by drawing a rectangular or
polygonal fence around objects based on points that you define. For
more information, see SmartSelect Command (on page 202).
42

Line/Arc Continuous - Draws one line or a series of connected
lines. For more information, see Line/Arc Continuous Command (on
page 147).
Place Doubleline - Draws a doubleline or a series of connected
doublelines. For more information, see Place Doubleline Command
(on page 159).
Connector - Connects two elements together. For more information,
see Connector Command (on page 156).
Tangent Arc - Draws an arc tangent or perpendicular to one or two
elements. For more information, see Tangent Arc Command (on
page 168).
Arc by 3 Points - Draws an arc using three points. For more
information, see Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 165).
Arc by Center Point - Draws an arc using three points. For more
information, see Arc By Center Point Command (on page 166).
Curve - Draws a smooth, open or closed curve. For more
information, see Curve Command (on page 171).
FreeForm - Draws freeform curves or splines. For more information,
see FreeForm Command (on page 185).
FreeSketch - Draws lines, arcs, rectangles, and circles by converting
a sketch into a precision drawing. For more information, see
FreeSketch Command (on page 184).
Circle by Center Point - Draws a circle using a center point and
radius. For more information, see Circle by Center Point Command
(on page 162).
Circle by 3 Points - Draws a circle using three points that define the
circumference. For more information, see Circle by 3 Points
Tangent Circle - Draws a circle tangent to one or two elements. For
more information, see Tangent Circle Command (on page 163).
Ellipse by Center Point - Draws an ellipse using the center point
and two edge points. For more information, see Ellipse by Center
Point Command (on page 174).
Ellipse by 3 Points - Draws an ellipse using three edge points. For
more information, see Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 173).
Rectangle - Draws a rectangle using three points. For more
information, see Rectangle Command (on page 176).
Fillet Rectangle - Draws a rectangle using four points and a
user-specified radius. For more information, see Fillet Rectangle
Polygon - Draws an n-sided polygon based on user-defined
properties. For more information, see Polygon Command (on page
178).
Polygon by Center - Draws an n-sided polygon based on
43

user-defined properties. For more information, see Polygon by Center
Revision Cloud - Places a cloud around objects in a drawing. For
more information, see Revision Cloud Command (on page 243).
Point - Draws a point. For more information, see Point Command (on
page 148).
Text Box - Places a text box in a document. For more information,
see Text Box Command (on page 231).
Fillet - Draws a fillet between two elements. For more information,
see Fillet Command (on page 353).
Chamfer - Draws a chamfer, or bevel. For more information, see
Chamfer Command (on page 351).
Trim - Trims open and closed elements to the closest intersection in
both directions. For more information, see Trim Command (on page
343).
Trim Corner - Draws a corner by extending or trimming two selected
open elements. For more information, see Trim Corner Command (on
page 344).
Trim to Element - Trims the selected element to another selected
element. For more information, see Trim to Element Command (on
page 343).
Trim to Point - Trims the selected element to a point in space. For
more information, see Trim to Point Command (on page 345).
Trim Inside - Trims within the selected element (partial delete). For
more information, see Trim Inside Command (on page 345).
Extend to Next - Extends one or more open elements until they
intersect with the nearest element. For more information, see Extend
to Next Command (on page 348).
Extend to Point - Extends one or more open elements to a point in
space or to another element. For more information, see Extend to
Point Command (on page 349).
Fill - Places a solid color or pattern inside a closed boundary. For
more information, see Fill Command (on page 446).
Mask - Masks out underlying graphics without deleting or trimming.
For more information, see Mask Command (on page 448).
44
Image Integrator Toolbar

The Image Integrator toolbar contains commands that you can use for viewing and
manipulating images in a vector/raster drawing environment. You can manipulate all or part of
an image using such edits as cut and move, copy and move, tint, paint, or erase. You can adjust
contrast and brightness, or invert the pixel values to negative or positive. You can even scale
and rotate images to match vector drawings or maps using source and target registration points.
Image Integrator supports popular binary grayscale, indexed color, and true color image formats
including .GIF, .JPG, .BMO, .TIF, .CAL, .PC, .RLE, .COT, .CIT, .TG4, .CRL, .CMP, and .RGB.
To use this functionality, you must first install Image Integrator using Add-Ins on
the Tools menu. If you do not see the Image Integrator add-in listed in the Add-In Manager,
you must run the Custom setup to install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option. For more
information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide, available with the Help
> Printable Guides command from within the software.
Insert Image - Places a raster image into your document. For
more information, see Image Command (on page 547).
Save Selected Image - Saves changes you make to the raster
image to the image source file. For more information, see Save
Selected Image(s) Command (on page 547).
Image Undo - Reverses the last change made to the raster
image. For more information, see Image Undo Command (on
page 548).
Image Redo - Reverses the last change most recent undo
command. For more information, see Image Redo Command (on
page 548).
Rectangular Select Area - Creates a select area in a raster
image by drawing a rectangle around pixels that you define. For
more information, see Rectangular Select Area Command (on
page 549).
Polygonal Select Area - Creates a select area in a raster image
by drawing a polygon around pixels that you define. For more
information, see Polygonal Select Area Command (on page 551).
Contrast and Brightness - Modifies the contrast and/or
brightness of an image. For more information, see Contrast and
Brightness Command (on page 552).
Invert - Creates a negative image of the selected raster image,
replacing each pixel color with its opposite on the color wheel. For
more information, see Invert Command (on page 553).
Fill - Fills the select area with the selected fill color. For more
information, see Fill Command (on page 554).
Position - Positions a raster image in a document. You can move,
scale, rotate, and skew a source image to match a target image or
vector frame. For more information, see Position Command (on
page 556).
45

Image Properties - Allows you to view the properties of a raster
image. For more information, see Image Properties Command (on
page 557).
Image Erase - Erases the selected image or selected edit area.
For more information, see Image Erase Command (on page 558).
Speckle Remove - Removes all unwanted areas of speckle in a
binary image. For more information, see Speckle Remove
Multi-Point Warp - Performs linear and non-linear transformations
of images. For more information, see Multi-Point Warp Command
(on page 560).
Isometric Toolbar
The Isometric toolbar contains commands to create 2D drawings that represent 3D elements,
such as cubes. This type of drawing is called an isometric drawing. An isometric drawing is not
a true 3D drawing, because you cannot view the drawing in perspective or from another angle.
However, you can create a 3D effect by aligning the elements and objects in a drawing along
three major axes.
The software supplies several tools to create these types of documents:

Isometric Rectangle
Isometric Circle
Isometric Line
Segmented Styles
To access these commands, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In Manager dialog box,
select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.
After you enable the Isometric Toolbar Commands add-in, you can use View > Toolbars
to toggle on/off the Isometric toolbar.
Isometric line - Allows you to draw lines that appear at 30, 60, or
90 degrees in an isometric drawing. For more information, see
Isometric Line Command (on page 190).
Isometric rectangle - Allows you to draw an isometric rectangle.
For more information, see Isometric Rectangle Command (on
page 192).
46

Isometric circle - Allows you to draw an isometric circle. For
more information, see Isometric Circle Command (on page 188).
Segmented style - Applies a line type, line weight, or color to
part of an element.. For more information, see Segmented Style
Main Toolbar
The Main toolbar displays by default docked to the top of the SmartSketch window just
underneath the menu bar. Most of the commands on this toolbar provide shortcuts for
commands found in the menus.
New - Creates a new document or template. For more information,
see New Command (on page 64).
Open - Opens an existing document or template in a new window.
For more information, see Open Command (on page 65).
Save - Saves the active document with its currently defined name,
directory, and format. For more information, see Save Command (on
page 94).
Print - Sends a copy of the active document to a specified plotter,
printer, or file. For more information, see Print Command (on page
104).
Cut - Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to
the Clipboard. For more information, see Cut Command (on page
220).
Copy - Copies selected elements and their associated relationships
to the Clipboard. For more information, see Copy Command (on
page 214).
Paste - Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same coordinates the
elements had in the source document. For more information, see
Paste Command (on page 215).
Format Painter - Copies formatting, such as line weight, color and
line style, from a selected object and applies it to other objects as
they are selected. For more information, see Format Painter
Command (Main Toolbar) (on page 215).
Undo - Reverses an action. For more information, see Undo
Redo - Repeats the most recent action taken or reverses the most
recent Undo. For more information, see Redo Command (on page
206).
Hyperlink - Adds hyperlinks to objects, symbols, text, connectors,
and elements, such as lines, circles, ellipses, and groups. For more
information, see Hyperlink Command (on page 540).
Dimension - Displays the Dimension toolbar. For more information,
see Dimension Command (on page 281).
47

Change - Displays the Change toolbar. For more information, see
Change Command (on page 331).
Relationships - Displays the Relationship toolbar. For more
information, see Relationships Command (on page 261).
PinPoint - Helps you draw elements with precision by displaying
coordinate data at the pointer. For more information, see PinPoint
Layers - Displays or hides layers. For more information, see Layers
Symbol Explorer - Activates the Symbol Explorer window and the
Atrribute Viewer. For more information, see Symbol Explorer
Zoom Area - Enlarges the display of elements in the active window.
For more information, see Zoom Area Command (on page 55).
Zoom In - Enlarges the display of elements around a specified point
in the active window. For more information, see Zoom In Command
(on page 56).
Zoom Out - Reduces the display of elements around a specified
point in the active window. For more information, see Zoom Out
Fit - Fits all visible elements in the active view. For more information,
see Fit Command (on page 57).
Pan - Allows you to move in any direction from a specific point in a
document to see other areas of the drawing or model. For more
information, see Pan Command (on page 58).
Help - Displays context-sensitive Help on an item in the current
window. For more information, see What's This Help Command (on
page 29).
Relationship Toolbar
The Relationship toolbar contains commands that you can use to define relationships between
elements. You can activate the Relationship toolbar with the View > Toolbars command or by
clicking Relationships
on the Main toolbar.
Connect - Connects two elements or key points at one point. For
more information, see Connect Command (on page 358).
Horizontal/Vertical - Makes a line horizontal or vertical. For more
information, see Horizontal/Vertical Command (on page 359).
Parallel - Makes two lines parallel. For more information, see Parallel
Perpendicular - Makes two elements perpendicular. For more
information, see Perpendicular Command (on page 359).
Tangent - Makes two elements tangent. For more information, see
Tangent Command (on page 361).
48

Collinear - Makes two lines collinear. For more information, see
Collinear Command (on page 357).
Concentric - Makes an arc or circle concentric with another arc or
circle. For more information, see Concentric Command (on page
357).
Symmetric - Makes elements symmetric about an axis. For more
information, see Symmetric Command (on page 360).
Equal - Makes elements equal. For more information, see Equal
Lock - Controls elements so they cannot be modified. For more
information, see Lock Command (on page 265).
Relationship Handles - Displays any relationship handles on
elements. For more information, see Relationship Handles Command
(on page 264).
Alignment Indicator - Displays dashed lines to show horizontal or
vertical alignment while you draw. For more information, see
Alignment Indicator Command (on page 263).
Maintain Relationships - Places relationship handles as you draw.
For more information, see Maintain Relationships Command (on
page 264).
Schematic Toolbar
The Schematic toolbar displays by default docked to the left side of the interface when you
open a drawing that is based on a template designed to create a schematic diagram. Schematic
diagrams are primarily created using symbols, connectors, and text at a 1:1 scale. Schematic
diagrams do not represent a logical flow.
For more information about schematic templates that are available with the software, see
SmartSketch Templates (on page 107).
Select Tool - Use to select, modify, and manipulate elements. For
more information, see Select Tool (on page 201).
SmartSelect - Creates a select set by drawing a rectangular or
polygonal fence around objects based on points that you define. For
more information, see SmartSelect Command (on page 202).
Connector - Connects two elements together. For more information,
see Connector Command (on page 156).
Delete - Deletes the selected element and any relationships and
dimensions that have been placed on it. For more information, see
Delete Command (on page 219).
Text Box - Places a text box in a document. For more information,
see Text Box Command (on page 231).
Fill - Places a solid color or pattern inside a closed boundary. For
more information, see Fill Command (on page 446).
Grid Display - Displays a grid so that you can place elements with
49

precision. For more information, see Grid Display Command (on
page 272).
Grid Snap - Aligns elements with the grid. For more information, see
Grid Snap Command (on page 273).
Symbol Authoring Toolbar

As well as providing you with ready-to-use symbols, SmartSketch's Symbol Authoring option
gives you the flexibility to create your own.
There are several ways to create your symbols in SmartSketch. You can:
Draw a shape from scratch using the drawing tools, such as the line, rectangle, ellipse, and
freeform tools.
Merge a shape with other shapes to create a new, unique symbol.
Revise an existing SmartSketch symbol.
To use this functionality, you must first install Symbol Authoring using Add-Ins on
the Tools menu. If you do not see the Symbol Authoring add-in listed in the Add-In Manager,
you must run the Custom setup to install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option. For more
information on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide, available with the Help
> Printable Guides command from within the software.
SmartPoint Properties - Places SmartPoints on a symbol.
For more information, see SmartPoint Properties Command
(on page 533).
Symbol Origin - Defines the origin of the symbol that you are
creating. For more information, see Symbol Origin Command
(on page 518).
Symbol Properties - Defines properties for a symbol. For
more information, see Symbol Properties Command (on page
510).
Lookup Table - Imports data from an open database
connectivity (ODBC) data source to drive values for symbol
parameters and attributes. For more information, see Lookup
Table Command (on page 536).
Symbol Representation - Defines different representations of
the same symbol within one symbol document (.sym). For
more information, see Symbol Representation Command (on
page 517).
Edit SmartText - Defines the contents of a SmartLabel.
SmartLabels are associated to an object's attributes and
displays those attributes as text in the document. For more
information, see Edit SmartText Command (on page 523).
50
Keyboard
Use the following keys and key combinations to execute functions or enter commands:
Standard Control Keys

The following table lists the standard Microsoft shortcuts the software supports. You can access
these commands by pressing Ctrl + a letter.
Ctrl + A
Select All
Ctrl + C
Copy Text
Ctrl + N
New
Ctrl + O
Open
Ctrl + P
Print
Ctrl + S
Save
Ctrl + V
Paste Text
Ctrl + X
Cut Text
Ctrl + Y
Redo
Ctrl + Z
Undo
Function Keys
Certain function keys work only when the appropriate command is active. For instance, F9
through F12 are only available when you use PinPoint.
The following table lists F-keys and their corresponding functions. Function key equivalents and
modifier keys, if any, display next to commands on menus, according to standard Microsoft
Windows conventions.
F1
Help
F3
Grid Snap
Alt + F4
Exit
Ctrl + F4
Close File
F5
Update Active View
Alt + F5
Previous Zoom Level
Ctrl + F7
Paste From Clipboard
F9
Toggle PinPoint Display
Ctrl + F9
Cut to Clipboard
F10
PinPoint Lock X axis
Shift + F10
Select First Menu Item
F11
PinPoint Lock Y axis
F12
Reset PinPoint Home
51
Mouse
Use a standard mouse or Microsoft IntelliMouse Features (on page 52) to quickly and efficiently
manipulate different views of the drawing.
Use the left mouse button to do the following:
Select multiple elements by dragging to fence them.
Drag a selected element.
Click or drag to draw an element.
Select a menu or toolbar command.
Double-click to activate an embedded or linked object.
Use the right mouse button to do the following:
Restart a command.
Display a shortcut menu. Shortcut menus are context-sensitive. The commands on the
menu depend upon your mouse location and which elements, if any, are selected.
You can also use the mouse to locate objects. As you move the pointer around on the drawing
sheet, objects under the mouse change to a highlight color to indicate that they have been
located. When you move the mouse away from a highlighted object, the object returns to its
original color.
See Also
Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse (on page 53)
Microsoft IntelliMouse Features

You can use the Microsoft IntelliMouse with the software so that you can manipulate different
views of the document faster and more efficiently.
The newest version of Microsoft IntelliPoint Drivers (2.2) supports universal scrolling.
Universal scrolling allows you to scroll up and down in any window that displays scroll bars by
using the wheel button on the IntelliMouse. Universal scrolling prohibits the recognition of the
scrolling behavior defined for the software. You must, therefore, identify the name of the
software and any other applications as exceptions to universal scrolling.
Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse (on page 53)
52
When you do this:
The view does this:
Rotate the wheel button forward
Zooms in at the current pointer location

Rotate the wheel button
backwards
Zooms out at the current pointer

location
Drag the wheel button
Pans from one location to another
Press Ctrl and drag the wheel

button
Zooms the area of the window that you

defined by dragging the pointer
Press Shift and click the wheel

button
Fits the graphics on the document to

the window
Press Alt and click the wheel

button
Restores the previous view
You can perform any of these actions with a three-button mouse; you click the middle
mouse button, instead of the wheel button. No action occurs when you click the wheel button
just one time.
Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.

Select the Mouse icon.
On the Mouse Properties dialog box, click the Wheel tab.
In the Universal Scrolling area of the dialog box, click Exceptions.
On the Exceptions for Universal Scrolling dialog box, click Add.
On the Add Exception for Universal Scrolling dialog box, click to open the Program Files
folder. Next, click SmartSketch > Program > draft.exe. Then click Open.
7. Accept the new settings.
The appropriate IntelliMouse drivers, or equivalent, must be installed in order to see
the wheel tab on the Mouse Properties dialog box.
See Also
Microsoft IntelliMouse Features (on page 52)
Status Bar
The status bar is at the bottom of the SmartSketch main window. It provides information such as
the status of a drawing document and the meaning of a command. Command information
displays as you pause the cursor over the command button.
In addition, the status bar displays the coordinates of the cursor position in the active drawing
window. The units and precision are the same as the distance unit settings in the document
properties (see View Document Properties (on page 62)).
When the Grid Snap setting is turned OFF, the exact cursor location is displayed. When
the Grid Snap setting is turned ON, the coordinates represent the "snapped to" position and not
the true cursor position.
See Also
Exploring the Window with Your Mouse (on page 36)
Exploring the Interface (on page 35)
53
Viewing Your Work

You can manipulate windows and views to affect how you see a document on the computer
screen. A window can be compared to a camera. When you look through a camera, you see a
view of a real-world object. When you look through a window on the computer screen, you see a
view of the objects in the document. In both cases, you can change the view by zooming in and
out, and focusing on different parts of the document. You can also use the Microsoft
IntelliMouse to zoom or pan views.
Windows
When you start the software, the application window displays a blank document. You use
commands on the File menu to create a new document or open an existing one.
With the commands on the Window menu, you can create and arrange new windows that allow
you to see more than one section of a document or more than one document. You can minimize
open windows and display them as icons in the application work space.
Views
Views are what you see in software windows. With the view commands, you can do the
following:
Use Zoom Area to set the zoom area to see more detail in the document.
Use Zoom In to enlarge the display of elements around a specified point in the document.
Use Zoom Out to reduce the display of elements around a specified point in the document.
Use Pan to position another part of the document in the center of a view, fit all of the
document in a view, or identify the area of the document you want to see.
Use Fit to restore the previous view of the document.
Use Previous to restore the previous view.
Use Toolbars to display or hide toolbars in the application window.
Drawing Sheets
With drawing sheets, you can place different drawings on different sheets in a document.
Working sheets are the drawing sheets on which you place most of your graphics. Background
sheets are drawing sheets that allow you to define and display the border of a drawing sheet.
Layers
Within each drawing sheet, you can place several layers so that you can group elements.
Layers allow you to keep track of elements in the document and manipulate them more easily.
You can also specify the way you want elements to be displayed in a window.
See Also
Pan a View (on page 57)
Restore a View (on page 57)
Fit All Elements in the Active View (on page 57)
54
Zoom Area
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area
.
2. On the drawing sheet, drag around the area that you want to zoom in on. The view zooms in
on the area you fenced with the pointer.
When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel forward, the view zooms in at the current
pointer location. You can also press CTRL and drag the mouse wheel to zoom an area or
window.
To go back to the previous view, click View > Previous, or click ALT + F5.
To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This is convenient if you are
working with a large document. To refresh the window, press <F5>.
To exit the command, right-click or press ESC.
See Also
Zoom Out (on page 56)
Zoom In on an Area (on page 55)
Zoom Area Command

Enlarges the display of elements in the active window.
If you have an IntelliMouse or a three-button mouse, you can zoom in an area by holding
CTRL, pressing the mouse wheel or middle mouse button, and dragging the pointer. To stop
the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This feature is convenient if you are
working with a large document. To refresh the window, press F5.
You can also right-click to access Zoom Area on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Zoom In Command (on page 56)
Zoom Out Command (on page 56)
Zoom In on an Area
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom In
2. Click on the area of the drawing you want to see in greater detail until it is the appropriate
size.
You can also click View > Zoom In.

To exit the command at any time, press ESC.
When the Continuous View Commands command is enabled, the Zoom In command
remains active so that you can repeatedly select other points in the image you want to view
in greater detail . To exit the command, click Esc.
See Also
Zoom Area Command (on page 55)
55
Zoom In Command
Enlarges the display of elements around a specified point in the active window.
If you have an IntelliMouse or a three-button mouse, you can zoom in by rolling the wheel of
the IntelliMouse. To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press Esc. This feature is
convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh the window, press F5.
You can also right-click to access Zoom In on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Zoom Out
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Out
2. Click the view.
You can drag the mouse to dynamically zoom out of the view.
When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel backward, the view zooms out at the current
pointer location.
To go back to the previous view, click View > Previous, or click ALT + F5.
See Also
Zoom Out Command

Reduces the display of elements around a specified point in the active window.
Select a point to zoom out from, and the active view is redrawn with that point as the center of
the display. This command shows more of the active view but at a lower resolution.
You can also zoom out by rolling the wheel of the IntelliMouse. To stop the repainting of
elements in the window, press Esc. This feature is convenient if you are working with a large
document. To refresh the window, press F5.
You can also right-click to access Zoom Out on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Zoom Out (on page 56)
56
Fit All Elements in the Active View

On the Main toolbar, click Fit .
Fits all visible elements in the active view if no elements are currently selected. If any elements
are selected, the command zooms to the selected elements. You can also click View > Fit or
Ctrl + F.
If you have a Microsoft IntelliMouse, you can press Shift and click the mouse wheel to fit
the view.
See Also
Fit Command (on page 57)
Fit Command
Fits all visible elements in the active view if no elements are currently selected. If any
elements are selected, the command zooms to the selected elements.
See Also
Fit All Elements in the Active View (on page 57)
Restore a View
Click View > Previous.
You can also right-click to access Previous on the shortcut menu.

You can also select the Previous option by right-clicking within the drawing area.
You can also press ALT and click the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel to restore the view.
See Also
Previous Command (on page 57)
Previous Command
Restores the previous view.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Previous button on a toolbar.
You can also right-click to access Previous on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Restore a View (on page 57)
Pan a View
1. On the Main toolbar, click Pan
.
2. Click in the view you want to pan.
57

3. Click in the view again to show how far you want to pan.
You can also drag the pointer to pan the view.

When you drag using the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel, the view pans.
Click the wheel to start the pan, and then click when the pan is complete.
When you press and drag the mouse wheel and move the pointer from one location to
another, the view pans from one location to another.
To go back to the previous view, click Previous on the View menu.
See Also
Pan Command (on page 58)
Pan Command
Allows you to move in any direction from a specific point in a document to see other areas of
the drawing or model.
You can also right-click to access Pan on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Pan a View (on page 57)
Switch to Another Open Document

When multiple documents are open, you can switch between documents. Only one document at
a time, called the active working document, can receive input.
To switch between multiple documents, do one of the following:
If you can see a portion of the document that you want to switch to, click its window.
On the Window menu, click the document you want to work in. The document is displayed
on top of other open documents.
See Also
New Window Command (on page 59)
Cascade Command (on page 59)
Window List Command

Displays an alphabetical list of open document windows below the commands on the Window
menu. You can easily access another open document by clicking one of the window names on
the list.
See Also
Open a New Window

1. Click Window > New Window.
2. The software opens a new window and displays the same document as the active window.
58
New Window Command

Opens a new window that displays the same document as the active window. The new
window appears on top of all the other windows and becomes the active window. If you change
the contents of the open document in one window, the other windows that contain the same
document reflect the changes.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the New Window button on a toolbar.
See Also
Change the Window Layout

When you have multiple windows open, you can use the commands on the Window menu to
organize their layout.
To arrange open all windows so that they overlap, click Window > Cascade.
To arrange all open windows so that they fit horizontally in the SmartSketch window, click
Window > Tile Horizontally.
To arrange all open windows so that they fit vertically in the SmartSketch window, click
Window > TIle Vertically.
Cascade Command
Overlaps windows diagonally across the screen.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Cascade Windows button on a toolbar.
See Also
Tile Horizontally Command

Arranges windows to fit horizontally on the screen. All the windows appear at an even distance
from each other on the screen.
See Also
59
Tile Vertically Command

Arranges windows to fit vertically on the screen. All the windows appear at an even distance
from each other on the screen.
See Also
60
SECTION 3
Understanding Document Concepts

SmartSketch provides quick and easy to use tools for setting up, saving, and printing
documents.
You can create documents by selecting one of many industry standard templates provided with
SmartSketch, or you can open SmartSketch using NORMAL.igr as a starting template. Once a
document has been created, the document itself can be saved as a template for future use.
With Sheet Setup on the File menu, you can create unlimited sheets within a document. Each
sheet acts like a separate drawing. You can make changes to each sheet individually, and then
save them collectively in a multi-sheet document.
The SmartSketch File menu provides several options for saving your documents, including the
ability to automatically save open documents at specified intervals or to save an existing
document in a new format.
You can print your documents by choosing a menu command or toolbar button.
See Also
Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page 73)
Document Explorer Command

Activates the Document Explorer window. The Document Explorer window displays the
contents of a document in a tree view format. You can view such items as the document
properties, elements and styles. If you double-click on an element in the tree view, you can view
additional information about the object, if any is available.
See Also
Document Explorer Window (on page 62)
View Document Properties (on page 62)
61
Document Explorer Window

Displays the active document in a tree view format.
Fit Graphical View - Fits the drawing object you select in the Document Explorer tree to
the active view of the drawing sheet. As long as the option is toggled on, each drawing object
that you select in the tree view is fit into the graphical view.
Add Element to Select Set - Selects objects in both the tree view and the document view.
Objects that you select in one view are simultaneously selected in the other view. In the
following illustration, when you select Symbol2d 671 in the Document Explorer tree view, the
corresponding object (in this case, a Parametric Tower) is also selected in the graphic view
As you click nodes in the tree view, the select set in the graphic view changes.
Show Target Around Element - Locates objects in the active document. This feature is
especially useful in large documents.
Refresh - Reloads the display of the tree view.
Filter - Opens the Filter Objects dialog box where you can specify which objects display in
the Document Explorer tree view. You can select specific types of objects, all objects, or no
objects.
See Also
View Document Properties (on page 62)
Filter Objects Dialog Box

Filter - Lists the drawing object types that you can include or exclude from the tree view of the
Document Explorer. By default, all objects in the drawing are included. To exclude an object
type, clear its check box. To include an object type, select its check box.
OK - Accepts the changes and returns to the Document Explorer.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without making any changes.
Select All - Includes all drawing object types in the filter so that they are displayed in the
Document Explorer tree view.
Clear All - Excludes all drawing object types.
See Also
View Document Properties

1. Click File > Document Explorer.
2. Within the Document Explorer window, you can access several commands that allow you
to change or filter the view in the window. For more information about these commands, see
Document Explorer Window (on page 62).
You can dock or undock the Document Explorer window on the left or right side of the
main window.
You can also resize the Document Explorer window.
See Also
Document Explorer Command (on page 61)
62
Setting Up Documents
When you start SmartSketch, a new, blank document opens. You can format each new
document you create or use a pre-formatted template as a starting point for a new document
and save the changes when you are finished.
When you create a drawing, the drawing is displayed on your screen. You can use the
commands on toolbars and in menus to add information to your document, and you can use edit
commands to modify the information in your document.
Any changes you make are temporarily stored in memory. You have to save the document to
preserve the changes to your document. You can also save documents in a specific format.
Opening Existing Documents

Open on the File menu opens existing documents. SmartSketch keeps track of the documents
you open and displays them at the bottom of the File menu. Options on the Tools menu allows
you to set the number of entries SmartSketch displays in the list. To open one of the documents,
choose it from the list.
Setting Up Properties for a Document

Properties on the File menu allows you to view, edit, and store properties for a document.
Document properties can include the title, the author, and keywords that identify important
information. These properties also can include document statistics, such as document size and
the date that a document was created and last modified. Some properties, such as the date the
document was last modified, are updated automatically.
Setting Up Units of Measure for a Document

The units of measure settings for a document are stored as a property. You can set units of
measure in both English and metric units for values such as length, area, or angles. Once you
set the units of measure, all the measurements in the drawing are affected. For example, if you
set the length unit of measure to inches, then all the measurements in the drawing display in
inches.
You can change the unit of measure at any time while you are drawing, and the document still
retains complete accuracy of the measurements in the drawing.
The precision readout determines the accuracy of the unit readout value by setting the number
of significant figures to display. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type
into the fields, only the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up.
For example, if the precision readout is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then
the line value length is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches long. If you are using
mm as your drawing sheet units, you can have the values display in the fields as 3.5 mm or 3.50
mm.
When you set the units of measure for a document, the settings do not affect the
dimensional values for the document. You can set units for the dimensional values with the
Dimension Properties dialog box. You can access this dialog box by selecting a dimension and
then clicking Properties on the shortcut menu. You can also set the dimension units by editing a
dimension style with Dimension on the Format menu.
Working with Several Open Documents

Several documents can remain open in the same session. You can use Cut, Copy, and Paste
to move or copy information between the documents or within one open document. You can use
63

commands on the Window menu to arrange all the open documents so that you can view them
easily.
You can also use Object on the Insert menu to import objects, such as drawings, spreadsheets,
or text created in other software, into an open document. You can link or embed the imported
objects. You can also drag information from another document into an open document.
See Also
Open a Document (on page 65)
Save a Document as a Template (on page 143)
Create a New Document

1. On the Main toolbar, click New
You can also click File > New.

2. In the Templates list, select the template you want to use to create the document.
If you want to create a template, you can simply save the document to the TEMPLATE
folder located in the folder where you installed the software. A different filename extension is
not needed.
You can change the folder where templates are saved by selecting Options on the Tools
menu and setting the folder that you want to use on the File Locations tab of the Options
dialog box.
See Also
New Command (on page 64)
New Dialog Box (on page 64)
New Command
Creates a new document or template. You can use a template to create the document.
See Also
Create a New Document (on page 64)
New Dialog Box (on page 64)
New Dialog Box

Creates a new document or template.
Templates - Lists the templates available in the Template folder that is located in the folder
where you installed the software. Select the template that you want to use to create a new
document or template.
You can change the default folder where templates are stored by selecting Options on the
Tools menu and setting the folder that you want on the File Locations tab of the Options
dialog box. If you change this setting, the Templates list on the New dialog box displays a list of
the templates in the folder that you specified.
Set as Default - Sets the selected template as the default for new documents. You can change
the default setting by selecting another template in the list and clicking Set as Default.
64

See Also
New Command (on page 64)
Create a New Document (on page 64)
Open a Document
Open a Document without Exiting the Software
1. On the Main toolbar, click Open
You also can click File > Open.

2. Select the folder containing the document you want to open.
3. Type the name of the document or select it from the list of documents.
4. On the Open dialog box, click Open.
Drag and Drop a Document

1. Open the Windows Explorer and select the document that you want.
2. Drag the document to the title bar at the top of the software window.
Documents created using SmartSketch 1.0 or SmartSketch 2.0 are not supported in this
version of the software.
The bottom of the File menu displays the last four files you opened.
In the Open dialog box, you can double-click the document name for the document to open
the document.
The last file type opened displays automatically in the Files of Type field.
If you do not see the document you want to open, make sure the drive, folder, and type are
correct.
If you do not know the location of a document, you can look for the document. On the
Windows Taskbar, click Start > Find.
See Also
Open Command (on page 65)
Open Dialog Box (on page 65)
Open Command
Opens an existing document or template in a new window.
See Also
Open Dialog Box (on page 65)
Open Dialog Box

Controls how a document is opened.
When you position the pointer on this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of
standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, right
click on a document, and click Select on the shortcut menu to automatically open a document.
You can also perform other tasks like creating shortcuts and mailing your documents.
The last file type opened displays automatically in the Files of Type field.
65

See Also
Set Up a Drawing Sheet

1. Click File > Sheet Setup.
2. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the options you want.
If you want to set up a background sheet, click the Background tab and set the
options you want.
You can save the sheet setup as a default using Save Defaults on the Sheet Setup dialog
box. The current settings will then be used as the default settings for any new drawing
sheets you create in the document.
You can set up options for an existing drawing sheet by double-clicking any sheet tab to
access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by
moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu, and
clicking Sheet Setup.
See Also
Sheet Setup Command

Defines the properties of the working sheet. You can display and modify the following
properties: the name, size, and scale used in the working sheet; and the properties of the
working sheet margin. You can also select the background sheet you want to use.
You can save settings only for the active working sheet. These settings can also be saved so
that they are used when you add a new working sheet to the document. To display a working
sheet, use Working Sheets.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Sheet Setup button on a toolbar.
See Also
Sheet Setup Dialog Box (on page 66)
Sheet Setup Dialog Box

Defines the properties of the active drawing sheet.
See Also
New Sheet Command (on page 76)
Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 66)
Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 67)
Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) (on page 67)
Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box)
Defines details for the drawing sheet size, scale, and print setup information.
Sheet size - Sets the size for the drawing sheet.
Same as print setup - Sets the drawing sheet size using the current print setup definition. For
example, if the printer is set up as 8 1/2 X 11, the drawing sheet size is set up as 8 1/2 X 11.
66

Standard - Defines the drawing sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes.
Custom - Defines the drawing sheet size according to the entered width and height values.
Drawing scale - Sets options for the scale of the drawing sheet.
Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. As a result, the representation of the objects
on the drawing sheet is the same size as the real- world object being described.
Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of
the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, the 2 represents the
size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the real-world object.
Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance on the drawing
sheet and the second value defines what this distance is equal to in the real world.
Paper units - Sets the paper units for the drawing sheet.
Units - Controls the display of numeric values in dialog boxes that define the size of non-scaled
objects. Some examples of non-scaled object values are text height and line width. This setting
does not affect dimension units.
Only value boxes use this option. For example, if you are working in feet and inches, you can
specify that you want to read and type values for text height in fractional inches. (1/8" instead of
0.00'-0.125")
When printing or plotting a drawing sheet, the non-scaled items appear on the printed
document with the exact size that you specify.
Precision - Sets the number of significant figures to display, or the accuracy of the unit readout
value. The precision setting does not change the numbers that you can type in the fields, only
the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up to the next whole
number.
For example, if you set this control to .001 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches, then the
line length value is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches. If you set this control to
0.01 and you type a line length value of 3.5 mm, the length value appears as 3.50 mm.
See Also
Change the Background Sheet (on page 79)
Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box)
Defines the color, margin settings, and background sheet display information.
Background sheet Specifies the background sheet that you want to use for the working
sheet. If you have not created a background sheet, this box does not display any options. You
must first create a background sheet before you can select it from the list.
All graphics on the background sheet display on the working sheet. Changing the background
sheet updates the size and margin settings of the working sheet to the values defined by the
selected background sheet.
Show background Displays the background sheet graphics on the selected working sheet.
Preview Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.
See Also
Create a Background Sheet (on page 78)
Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box)
Defines the name of a drawing sheet. You can also change the name of a drawing sheet.
67

Sheet name Specifies a name for the drawing sheet. You can also use this box to rename a
drawing sheet by selecting the sheet in the document before clicking Sheet Setup on the File
menu.
See Also
Rename a Drawing Sheet (on page 80)
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing

Sheet
2. On the Size and Scale tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the sheet size that you
want. After you close the dialog box, the correct sheet size is displayed.
3. Draw the elements that you want using real-world units. Do not worry if the elements do not
fit on the sheet.
4. Click File > Sheet Setup to check the ratio of the sheet size to the overall drawing size.
5. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, on the Size and Scale tab, click Custom. You should use
the ratio of the drawing to the drawing sheet to determine the custom scale for the drawing
sheet. After you close the dialog box, the drawing scales to the scale that you selected. All
dimensions appear in real-world units.
If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet, the terminators, spaces,
text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and
extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the
dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container document.
If you select Scale on the Change toolbar to scale the drawing, the dimensions are scaled
to compensate for the change in size. Scale changes the size of one set of geometry to another
set of geometry in the document. To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the
paper size, use the File > Sheet Setup command.
See Also
Sheet Setup Command (on page 66)
Most Recently Used Files Command

Opens one of the documents that you worked on most recently. The file names are listed near
the bottom of the File menu. You can change the number of files listed on the menu by clicking
Tools > Options and selecting the General tab.
See Also
Options Command (on page 464)
General Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 465)
Set Document Properties

1. Click File > Properties.
2. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that you want, such as summary information
or keywords.
You must save the document before you can set or view the document statistics or
summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box.
See Also
Properties Dialog Box (on page 69)
68
View the Properties of a Document

2. On the Properties dialog box, click the tab that contains the information you want to see.
You must save the document before you can set or view the document statistics or
summary information on the Statistics and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box.
The Properties dialog box displays information about the current condition of the active
document. If the document has unsaved changes, you must save the document to update the
property information.
See Also
Display the Attribute Viewer (on page 410)
Properties Command (File Menu)

Retrieves general information about the current document. You can review and edit the following
document information: the document summary, statistics, units, and Browser properties. If a
symbol document (.sym) is open, you can review and edit the general, unit, behavior, and
specific symbol properties for the document. This command is available only on the File menu.
See Also
Set Document Properties (on page 68)
Properties Dialog Box

Manages information about the properties of a document.
You must save the document before you can access the Statistics and Summary tabs of
the Properties dialog box. If a symbol document (.sym) is open, the only tabs that appear are
the General, Units, Browser, Symbols, and Behavior tabs.
See Also
General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 71)
Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 72)
Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 72)
Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 73)
Browser Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 71)
Symbol Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 72)
Behavior Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 69)
Behavior Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
This tab is available only for documents that are symbols and have a .sym
extension.
Insertion Type Specifies the insertion type for a symbol. You can set the insertion type by
clicking Options on the Tools menu and then clicking the Symbols tab on the Options dialog
box. After you set an insertion type for a symbol, you cannot change the type.
Update Displays the type of update for the link on the symbol. To change the update status
of a link, click Automatic. To prevent updating the link, click Frozen. You can select Automatic
when you want the document to automatically reflect any changes to the symbol document. You
can select Frozen when you do not want the symbol in the current document to change at all.
69

Scale Factor Specifies the scale factor that the symbol uses when you drag it into the active
document. The scale factor used is relative to the model units of the symbol. For example, if you
set the scale factor to 2 and the symbol has 1 cm square in model units, it displays 2 cm square
when you drag it into the active document.
Lock Scale Specifies if you can scale the symbol after you place it in a document.
You can scale a symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar or by dragging the
symbol handles.
Allow Rotation By Relationships Allows a symbol to change its orientation on the drawing
sheet according to the applied relationships. If you clear the check box, the symbol does not
change its orientation regardless of changes to its relationships.
This check box is available only when the symbol is an open document. You can open the
symbol document (.sym) with the Open command on the File menu. When you set or clear this
check box and close the symbol document, the setting affects the behavior of the symbol when
it is dragged from the Symbol Explorer onto the drawing sheet.
The check box is clear by default. When the check box is clear, a symbol maintains its
orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the symbol or other elements that are related to
it. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end
of the symbol is grounded in place with a lock relationship.
If you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension between the line and symbol to modify
the position of the elements, the symbol does not change its orientation on the drawing sheet.
The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale, as indicated by the
underlined dimensional value.
When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box, the symbol changes orientation
on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships. In the example, when you edit the
dimensional value of the driving dimension to change the position of the elements, the symbol
changes orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the dimensional relationships.
70

Nested Display Defines the behavior of nested symbols. The options are Public and Private.
When you open a document that contains nested symbols, the public option displays these
symbols, but the private option hides these symbols.
See Also
Browser Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
Sets the home address for the active document. Every time you open this document and click
Home on the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer goes to the address in the Address box.
Address - Sets the home address for the current document. When you open a document and
then open the Symbol Explorer and click Home
, the Symbol Explorer goes to the address
that you type here. You can any address that you use in a web browser, such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer; for example, you can type http://www.smartsketch.com.
If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at the symbols folder on your computer,
you can type the full path to your symbols folder in the Address box. Each time you open this
document and click Home in the Symbol Explorer, the symbol documents in the folder path
you specified are displayed.
Browse - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box so that you can set another folder for the
Symbol Explorer to look in. You can set the dialog box to look in folders on your computer or a
network drive.
See Also
General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
Displays general information about the current document.
If some of the following information is not available, the boxes display "Unknown."
Filename Displays the name of the document.
Type Displays the type of document. The type is based on the application used to create the
document.
Location Displays the folder containing the document.
Size Displays the size of the document in bytes, kilobytes, and megabytes.
MS-DOS Name Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a File Allocation
Table file naming system. These types of documents have an eight-character name and
three-character extension.
Created Displays the date and time the document was created or copied.
Modified Displays the date and time the document was last modified.
Accessed Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied.
Attributes Displays the attributes of the current document. These settings are read-only.
Read-Only Indicates that the document is read-only. You cannot open a read-only file for
writing. You cannot create a file with the same name as a read-only file.
Archive Shows that the document is an archive document.
Hidden Indicates that the document is a hidden document. You usually cannot see this
document in the Windows Explorer.
System Shows that the document is a system document. You usually cannot see this
document unless you change the options in the Internet Explorer.
71

See Also
View the Properties of a Document (on page 69)
Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
Displays detailed information about the current document. The software automatically generates
these properties when you create, save, or print the document.
Created Displays the date and time the document was created or copied.
Creating Application Displays the name of the application that created the document.
Modified Displays the date and time the document was last modified.
Accessed Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied.
Last Saved By Displays the name of the person who last saved the document.
Saving Application Displays the name of the application that most recently saved the
document.
Currently Opened By Displays the name of the person who has the document open.
See Also
Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
Displays the title and author, if available, along with keywords and comments for the current
document. The software generates the author and template information when you create, save,
or print the document. You can also edit these properties, with the exception of the template,
unless the document is write-protected.
Title Specifies the title of the current document.
Subject Gives a general description of the current document.
Author Displays the name of the person who created the document.
Keywords Displays a list of words that identify the document when you browse or search
documents.
Comments Specifies comments about the current document.
Template Displays the name of the document template that was used to create the
document.
See Also
Symbol Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)

This tab is available only for documents that are symbols and have a .sym
extension.
Defines the symbol properties for a .sym document. With this tab, you can assign descriptive
information that identifies the symbol. When you drag the symbol into a document, these values
appear in the Attribute Viewer.
For example, if you wanted to define a bill of materials, you can assign manufacturing
information on this tab for a door symbol, place the symbol in a document, and then create a
report that displays the manufacturing information.
72

Name Defines a property name.
Type Specifies the property type you want to define for the symbol property name. You can
choose from Text, Number, Money, or Date.
Value Specifies a value for the symbol. For example, you can assign a manufacturer's name,
a serial number, or other descriptive information as a value.
Attributes The properties table lists all the properties currently defined for the symbol.
See Also
Working with Attributes (on page 409)
Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length, area, or angle values in a
drawing.
The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to display. It sets the accuracy of
the unit readout value. The precision setting does not alter the numbers that you type into the
fields, only the display of the numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. For
example, if the precision readout is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then the
line value length is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches long. If you are using
mm as your drawing sheet units, you can have the values display in the fields as 3.5 mm or 3.50
mm.
Length Readout Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the length values in a
document.
Angle Readout Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle values in a
document.
Area Readout Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area values in a
document.
See Also
Managing Multi-Sheet Documents

Drawing sheets are similar to pages in a notebook. You can place different sketches or drawings
on different drawing sheets in the document. For example, you can draw one idea for a design
on one drawing sheet and another idea on another drawing sheet, and then save both drawings
in the same document. There is no limit to the number of sheets you can have in a document.
73

When you create a new document, a default sheet appears with a border and a title box. You
can modify the default settings with Sheet Setup on the File menu. For example, you can give a
specific name to a sheet by setting options with this command. If you want to insert new sheets,
click New Sheet on the Insert menu.
Each sheet acts like a separate drawing and can have different scales and sheet borders. If you
want to locate or use relationships between elements, you should place the elements on the
same sheet.
You can display a number of drawing sheets on top of each other and simultaneously view the
drawings on all of the drawing sheets, much as you would view a stack of transparencies.
Areas of a Drawing Sheet

A drawing sheet has two areas that affect the way you work - the sheet outline and the working
sheet. The sheet outline (A) shows the orientation of the sheet and the default print region of the
sheet. You can change the size and orientation of the sheet outline with Sheet Setup on the
File menu.
You can draw new elements on the sheet outline or outside the borders of the outline. All new
graphics that you create are placed on the active drawing sheet.
74

The sheet where you will create most of your graphics is called a working sheet. In a document,
you can create as many working sheets as you need to plan your project. A working sheet can
have a single background sheet attached to it.
Choosing a Sheet Size

You can modify a drawing sheet's characteristics, such as the size and scale of the sheet, with
Sheet Setup on the File menu. Sheet Setup also allows you to set the defaults for all new
working sheets created in the document. You can do this by setting the options you want and
then clicking Save as Default.
Drawing Sheet Scale

Drawing sheets allow you to use a specified scale as you draw. When you specify the scale with
Sheet Setup the File menu, everything on the drawing sheet is scaled except for dimensions
and annotations. For example, if the scale is one inch to ten inches and you place a line 30
inches long, the line is three inches long in proportion to the drawing sheet and three inches
long when printed. However, a dimension measures the length of the line as 30 inches.
The dimension and annotation sizes in your working sheets are independent of the drawing view
scale. For example, when you define the height and size of dimension text, these values specify
how you want the dimensions to appear when you print the drawing.
The graphics on the attached background sheet are displayed at a 1:1 scale. The scale set with
Sheet Setup on the File menu does not affect them.
Manipulating Drawing Sheets

At the bottom of the drawing sheet, you can see drawing sheet tabs that allow you to manipulate
and display the drawing sheets in your document. When you open a document or create a new
one, the tabs are displayed at the bottom of the work space. There is a tab for each drawing
sheet in your document.
Attaching a Background Sheet

After you set up the drawing sheet, you can attach a background sheet. A background sheet is
used as a backdrop to the working sheet. For example, you can add borders to a drawing, draw
a title block, insert a raster image, or draw geometry. You can make one background sheet and
attach the same background sheet to several different drawing sheets.
When you attach a background sheet to a working sheet with the Sheet Setup command, the
items on the background sheet are displayed and printed. The size of the working sheet is
automatically set to the size of the background sheet you attach. This is so the paper sizes and
graphics on both sheets line up.
75

Background sheets allow you to customize your borders and title blocks so that they match your
company standards and requirements. You can use the background sheet delivered in a
template or design your own background sheet. You can create tailor-made background sheets
by adding your company logo, creating any other graphics that you need, and using various
styles and options. A typical customization scheme would be to have a different background
sheet for each standard-sized drawing (A, B, C, D; or A0, A1, A2, A3, A4).
Sheets and Document Templates

You can re-use your sheets by creating and saving them in a document template. When you
create a new document based on a template, all of the drawing sheets that are part of the
template are copied into your new document.
See Also
Activate a Drawing Sheet (on page 77)
Move Sheet Border (on page 82)
Create a New Drawing Sheet (on page 76)
Delete a Drawing Sheet (on page 80)
Create a New Drawing Sheet
Click Insert > New Sheet, or right-click the sheet tab and click Insert. The new sheet is
inserted after the active drawing sheet.
You can attach a background sheet to any drawing sheet using File > Sheet Setup. Click
the Background tab on the Sheet Setup dialog box to find the background sheet settings.
See Also
New Sheet Command

Creates a new drawing sheet in the document using the default drawing sheet settings. You
can change the default settings using Sheet Setup.
You can create either a working sheet or a background sheet with this command. To create a
background sheet, set the Background Sheets toggle on the View menu before selecting New
Sheet. To create a working sheet, clear the Background Sheets toggle before selecting New
Sheet.
You can use the Tools >Customize command to place the Insert Sheet button on a
toolbar.
See Also
Sheet Setup Dialog Box (on page 66)
76
Scroll Through Drawing Sheet Tabs

On the current drawing sheet, click a scroll button next to the drawing sheet tabs. Clicking a
scroll button displays the drawing sheet tabs so that you can access them easily and select a
drawing sheet. Click the scroll buttons of the following picture to find out what each button does:
Clicking a scroll button does not display a different drawing sheet. If the document has only
a few drawing sheets, the scroll buttons might not be available.
See Also
Activate a Drawing Sheet
Click the tab of the drawing sheet you want to activate.
You can display an available shortcut menu by right-clicking while the pointer is over a
drawing sheet tab.
You can double-click any sheet tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can also
access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving the pointer over a drawing sheet tab,
right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu, and clicking Sheet Setup.
See Also
Select and Manipulate Drawing Sheets

To display or manipulate a drawing sheet, you must click a drawing sheet tab. Drawing sheet
tabs are displayed at the bottom of the work space. There is a tab for each drawing sheet in
your document.
To select a drawing sheet
Click a drawing sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing sheet. The drawing sheet is displayed
and the name of the drawing sheet appears in bold. This drawing sheet becomes the
working sheet.
To select several drawing sheets
Press and hold Ctrl and click one or more tabs.
To de-select several drawing sheets, press and hold Ctrl and click one or more current
drawing sheet tabs.
To select a range of drawing sheets
Click the first tab in the range, hold Shift, and then click the last tab in the range.
To clear the selection of all of the drawing sheets in a range, click any tab that is not part of
the range.
To select all drawing sheets at once
On the shortcut menu, click Select All Sheets.
77

To access this command, you must hold the pointer over one of the drawing sheet tabs
and right-click.
When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box,
all the selected sheets are printed as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another.
The software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final
document.
To reorder sheets
On the shortcut menu, click Reorder Sheets. From the Reorder Sheets dialog box, you
can move a selected sheet up or down in the list to rearrange their display.
See Also
Working Sheets Command

Displays all working sheets in a document. If a background sheet is attached to the working
sheet, the graphics on the background sheet are displayed on the working sheet. When you
attach a background sheet to a working sheet, the software automatically adjusts the size and
the margin of the working sheet to match the size and margin of the background sheet. This
command is available only on the View menu.
See Also
Activate a Drawing Sheet (on page 77)
Select All Sheets Command (Shortcut Menu)

Selects all the drawing sheets in the document. When you select all the sheets, all elements in
the document are displayed at once, and the active sheet is displayed with bold characters. Only
elements in the active sheet can be located.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must move the pointer
over a drawing sheet tab.
You can also select multiple sheets by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking the
sheets. This allows you to see data only on the desired sheets.
See Also
Create a Background Sheet

1. Click View > Background Sheets.
2. Click Insert > New Sheet. The background sheet is created using the default drawing sheet
settings.
4. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the options you want.
5. On the new background sheet, draw any graphics, such as title blocks and borders, which
you want to appear on your working sheets.
6. Click View > Working Sheets.
8. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Background tab.
78

9. Click the Background Sheet list box and select the name of the background sheet you just
created to attach the new background sheet to the working sheet.
You can preview the background sheet by selecting the name of the background sheet from
the Background Sheet list on the Working Sheets dialog box.
See Also
Background Sheets Command (on page 79)
New Sheet Command (on page 76)
Display Background Sheets
Click View > Background Sheets.
See Also
Change the Background Sheet

2. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Background tab.
3. Select a new background sheet from the list.
If a background sheet has not been created, the list does not display any options.
When you change the background sheet, the size and margins of your working sheet equal
the settings of the selected background sheet.
See Also
Background Sheets Command

Switches the view from a working sheet to the background sheet. When you set this toggle, all
of the background sheets in the document are displayed as tabs at the bottom of window. All
working sheet tabs are hidden. You can use a background sheet to draw graphics that you want
to display on more than one drawing sheet. For example, you can draw borders and title blocks
that contain your company logo, your name, and information about the drawings. This command
is available only on the View menu.
You can display background sheet graphics on any or all working sheets, using Sheet Setup.
See Also
Display Background Sheets (on page 79)
79
Rename a Drawing Sheet

1. On the drawing sheet, click the tab of the sheet you want to rename.
3. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Name tab and type a new name for the sheet you
selected.
You can also rename a drawing sheet using Rename on the shortcut menu. The shortcut
menu is available when you right-click on a sheet tab.
See Also
Rename Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 80)
Rename Command (Shortcut Menu)

Renames a sheet.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must move the pointer
over a drawing sheet tab.
See Also
Rename a Drawing Sheet (on page 80)
Rename Dialog Box (on page 80)
Rename Dialog Box

Renames a drawing sheet.
New Name - Renames the active sheet when you type a new name.
See Also
Delete a Drawing Sheet

1. Click Edit > Delete Sheet.
2. Confirm the selection.
You can also delete a drawing sheet using Delete on the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu
is available when you right-click on a sheet tab.
Delete Sheet deletes the active drawing sheet and any drawing sheets whose drawing
sheet tabs are selected.
See Also
80
Delete Sheet Command

Deletes the active drawing sheet and any other sheets whose tabs are selected. This command
is available only on the Edit menu.
You can delete either a working sheet or a background sheet with this command. To delete a
background sheet, set the Background Sheets toggle on the View menu before selecting
Delete Sheet. To delete a working sheet, clear the Background Sheets toggle before selecting
Delete Sheet.
See Also
Delete a Drawing Sheet (on page 80)
Reorder Sheets
1. Click Edit > Reorder Sheets.
2. From the Reorder Sheets dialog box, select the sheet you want to move and click the
appropriate Move Up/Down button. The sheets listed from top to bottom denote their
left-to-right display in Smartsketch.
3. Click OK when you have finished.

The sheets are now displayed in the new arrangement.
Reordering sheets using this command does NOT change the print order of the sheets.
You can also reorder drawing sheets using Reorder Sheets on the shortcut menu. You can
get the shortcut menu by moving the pointer and right-clicking on the drawing sheet tab.
See Also
Reorder Sheets Dialog Box (on page 82)
81
Reorder Sheets Command

Rearranges the drawing sheet display. This command is available on the Edit menu and the
drawing tab shortcut menu. Reordering sheets using this command does NOT change the print
order of the sheets.
See Also
Reorder Sheets Dialog Box (on page 82)
Reorder Sheets Dialog Box

Rearranges drawing sheets in the SmartSketch display. The sheets listed from top to bottom
denote their left-to-right display in Smartsketch.
Move Up - moves the selected sheet up in the list.
Move Down - moves the selected sheet down in the list.
See Also
Reorder Sheets (on page 81)
Move Sheet Border

1. Click File > Move Sheet Border.
2. Specify the options to move, scale, and select the paper size for the sheet.
When you open a foreign data file and the software creates the graphic objects relative to
their original X, Y positions, the objects often position off the existing sheet.
Your changes to the sheet scale and size appear in the Sheet Setup dialog box.
When you click the settings that you want on the Move Sheet Border dialog box, you can
click Apply to preview your settings. When you click Apply, the settings apply to the active
sheet. However, the settings are not final until you click OK.
See Also
Move Sheet Border Command

Moves the active working sheet to reposition, scale, and select paper size. This command is
available only on the File menu.
See Also
Move Sheet Border Dialog Box (on page 83)
82
Move Sheet Border Dialog Box

Allows you to reposition or scale a working sheet and selects paper size.
When you click the settings that you want on this dialog box, you can click Apply to
preview your settings. When you click Apply, the settings update the active sheet. However, the
settings are not final until you click OK.
Sheet Origin Location - Specifies the X and Y coordinates for the sheet origin. The sheet origin
is the lower left corner of the drawing sheet. After setting these coordinates, click Apply.
Interactive Move - Allows you to use the pointer to identify a location for the lower left corner of
the sheet. Selecting this option automatically attaches the drawing sheet border to the pointer.
Click once and the sheet is in the location that you want. You must click Apply for your changes
to start.
While you are moving the sheet border with the pointer, the Move Sheet Border
dialog box is not displayed. It appears again after you click the pointer to complete the move.
Drawing scale - Sets options for the scale of the drawing sheet.
Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. This ratio means that the representation of
the objects on the drawing sheet is the same size as the real-world elements contained in the
document.
the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 1:2 ratio, the 1 represents the
distance of the drawing sheet and the 2 represents the real-world distance. That is, every
centimeter of paper is equal to two centimeters of real-world distance. Thus, the largest
real-world element that you can represent on an 21.59 x 27.94 cm drawing sheet is 43.18 x
55.88 cm.
When the first value is smaller than the second value, the sheet size is usually increased.
When the first number is larger than the second number, the sheet size is usually reduced.
Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance on the drawing
sheet and the second value defines what this distance is equal to in the real world.
Sheet Size - Sets the size for the drawing sheet.
Same As Print Setup - Sets the drawing sheet size using the settings for the default system
printer. For example, if the printer is set up as 27.94 x 43.18 cm paper, the drawing sheet size is
set to 27.94 x 43.18 cm.
Standard - Defines the drawing sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and ISO paper sizes.
Custom - Defines the drawing sheet size according to the entered x and y values.
Previous - Clears the last set of options that you applied to the drawing sheet.
See Also
83
Using Title Blocks

The title block can include the information which enables the drawing to be intepreted, identified
and archived. SmartSketch provides You can insert and modify title blocks for drawing
documents in SmartSketch.
Title Block Properties Command

Edits properties about the selected title block.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Title Block Properties button on a toolbar.
See Also
Title Block Properties Dialog Box (on page 85)
Title Block Field Command

Positions title block fields on the drawing. The command allows you to place drawing properties
defined as title block information on the drawing. When you click Insert > Title Block Field, the
Title Block Field ribbon appears in the toolbar area.
See Also
Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433)
Title Block Field Ribbon (on page 84)
Title Block Field Ribbon

Sets options for title block field placement on a drawing. You can access this ribbon when you
click Insert > Title Block Field.
Label Set - Specifies a property category. This list shows the categories of drawing properties
available for the current drawing. The label set controls the fields listed in the Field dropdown
list and the enabling of other options on the ribbon.
Field - Lists the properties available in the selected Label Set. This is the information you are
placing on the title block of the drawing.
Display Label Names - Toggles between displaying the label name and the label value.
More - Expands the ribbon to display more formatting options.
The options on the expanded ribbon include:

Style - Lists and applies the available styles.
Font - Lists and applies the available fonts.
Font size - Applies a text size.
Text Color - Sets the color of the font.
Bold - Makes text bold.
Italic - Italicizes text.
Underline - Underlines text.
Paragraph Alignment - Positions the paragraph to the left, center, or right of the text area
edges in edit mode.
84

Border - Displays three options for setting borders. These options allow you to either display
no border, display a border, or display a border with a shadow.
Textbox Width - Sets the width of the text box.
Textbox Height - Sets the height of the text box.
See Also
Title Block Properties Dialog Box

Views and edits properties about the selected title block.
See Also
Title Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) (on page 85)
Signature Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) (on page 86)
Issue Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) (on page 86)
Revision Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) (on page 87)
Notes Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box) (on page 87)
Title Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for the title area of a drawing. Any information you add to this tab will overwrite the
previously defined information in corresponding rows in the active drawing.
Border - Specifies the border attribute that stores the name of border for the title block. This
attribute also stores the dimensions of the border.
ChargeNumber - Defines the charge number for the drawing.
ChargeTitle - Describes the ChargeNumber box. The charge title text is placed to the left of the
charge number.
CompanyName - Specifies the name of the company for which the project is designed.
Desc1 - Describes the drawing. This description is the first of four lines of text used to describe
the drawing.
Desc2 - Describes the drawing. This description is the second of four lines of text used to
describe the drawing.
Desc3 - Describes the drawing. This description is the third of four lines of text used to describe
the drawing.
Desc4 - Describes the drawing. This description is the fourth of four lines of text used to
describe the drawing.
DivisionLocation - Specifies the location of the division for which the project is designed.
DivisionName - Specifies the name of the division for which this project is designed.
DrawingNumber - Displays the unique identifier for the drawing.
DrawingSize - Defines a standard note value for the border size.
DrawingType - Defines the three-letter code to identify the type of drawing. For example, the
type can be DGN.
JobNumber - Defines the unique identifier assigned to a capital project or job.
NoteLine - Specifies text for a miscellaneous note line.
PlantName - Specifies the name of the plant or project for which the drawing is designed.
ProjectVersion - Defines the number and letter sequence that identifies a particular generation
of a document that was created since the last approved revision.
RevisionNumbers - Defines the number of the current revision for this drawing.
85

Sheet - Defines the number of the page and the total number of pages that are associated with
this one. For example, the value might be 3 of 5.
SiteLocation - Specifies the site location for which the drawing is designed.
SiteName - Specifies the name of the site where the plant is being constructed.
Title1 - Specifies text for the first miscellaneous title. This title is usually a description of the area
shown on the drawing.
Title2 - Specifies text for the second miscellaneous title. This title is usually a description of the
type of drawing.
Title3 - Specifies text for the third miscellaneous title.
Signature Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box)

Sets options for the signature area of drawings.
ApprovedBy - Specifies the name of the person responsible for approving the drawing.
ApprovedDate - Specifies the date the drawing was approved.
CheckedBy - Specifies the name of the person responsible for checking the drawing.
CheckedDate - Specifies the date the drawing was checked.
DesignedBy - Specifies the name of the person who specified or designed the information on
the drawing.
DesignedDate - Specifies the date the drawing was designed.
Drawing Status - Defines the status code for the drawing.
DrawnBy - Specifies the name of the person who drew the drawing, or created it.
DrawnDate - Specifies the date the drawing was drawn or created.
ExtraSignBy1 - Specifies the name of an extra person who is signing the drawing.
ExtraSignBy2 - Specifies the name of an extra person who is signing the drawing.
ExtraSignDate1 - Specifies the date the drawing was signed by the person whose name
appears on this line.
ExtraSignDate2 - Specifies the date the drawing was signed by the person whose name
appears on this line.
ExtraSignTitle1 - Defines the title of the person whose name appears on this line.
ExtraSign Title2 - Defines the title of the person whose name appears on this line.
MfgRepDate - Specifies the date that the manufacturing representative initials the drawing.
MfgRepName - Specifies the name of the manufacturing representative who signed the
drawing.
PlantNumber - Defines the plant number.
ProjEngineerDate - Specifies the date the project engineer initials the drawing.
ProjEngineer ame - Specifies the name of the person who is the project engineer for the project
using the drawing.
SpecBy - Specifies the name of the person who specified or designed the information on this
drawing.
SpecDate - Specifies the date this drawing was specified or designed.
Issue Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies issue information. The combination of the IssueNo and IssuedRevision fields
constitute a unique identifier for the Issue record and cannot be duplicated. A document can
86

contain any number of issue records. To delete an issue record, double-click that row and press
Delete.
If you add Issue data to a document and subsequently publish that document, the
existing Issue data is deleted from the document and lost.
IssueNo - Displays the issue number for the drawing.
IssuedRevision - Displays the issue revision for the drawing.
MaterialOrJobSpec - Identifies the job specification for the issued document.
IssueDate - Shows the date issued.
IssueReason - Shows the reason the document was issued.
Revision Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box)

Sets properties for handling revisions. The Revision tab is always read-write.
MajorRev_ForRevise - Specifies the major revision number for the drawing. For example, you
can enter 1.
MinorRev_ForRevise - Specifies the minor revision number for the document. For example,
you can enter a.
Version - Specifies the letter of the current revision.
RevisedBy - Identifies the initials of the person who made the revisions.
RevDate - Specifies the date of the revision.
CheckedBy - Identifies the initials of the person who checked the revisions.
CheckDate - Specifies the date the revisions were checked.
ApprovedBy - Identifies the initials of the person who approved the revisions.
ApprovedDate - Specifies the date the revisions were approved.
RevisionDescription - Describes briefly the scope of the revisions.
Notes Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog Box)

Sets notes for the item.
ParentNotes - Type notes for the currently selected document.
Notes - Type any additional notes for the currently selected document.
The following graphics demonstrate how parent notes and notes work. The first graphic shows
how notes can be added at different levels of the hierarchy. The Notes tab shows ParentNotes
and Notes that have been entered for a particular document.
87

When the document is updated and displayed, the Note Region of the template contains the
specified information.
Drawing Diagrams
You can create diagrams quickly and easily with the software. To do this, you can use the
following tools:
Templates
Symbols
Connectors
Annotations
You can learn how to draw a diagram with a tutorial in the Learning Center. Click the Help
menu and then click Learning Center.
Templates
When you first open the software, you can select a template based on the industry solution that
you need. The best templates to select for drawing diagrams are in the Process template folder.
For example, you can select the Process Flow (Intergraph).igr template.
88

When you open the Process Flow (Intergraph).igr template, the Schematic toolbar
automatically displays the buttons that you would need most often to create a diagram. These
commands include Connector, Grid Display, Grid Snap, Text Box, and others.
To use the Process Flow (Intergraph).igr template, you must install the Process
Solutions option.
You can still draw lines, circles, and so forth with buttons on the Draw toolbar. To display
the Draw toolbar, you can click Toolbars on the View menu.
Connectors
Connector on the Schematic toolbar allows you to place connectors anywhere that you need
them. You can connect lines, circles, symbols, or points in free space.
There are special connector styles that you can use in the diagram. Some examples in the
Process Flow template include Primary Line, Secondary Line, and Electric Signal. On the
Connector ribbon, you can click the style that you want in the Style box.
On the Connector ribbon, you can also select the line start and line end terminators that you
want. The following connectors display some of the different types of terminators that you can
apply.
Symbols
The template automatically displays the symbols that you need for a diagram in the Symbol
Explorer. For example, the Process Flow template offers you many kinds of symbols to include
pumps, compressors, heat exchangers, and others.
To place these symbols, you can drag them from the Symbol Explorer into the document.
89

You can manipulate symbols with special handles that appear when you select the symbol.
Some symbols have several different kinds of handles:
Black boxes on the outside corners of the range box lines represent scale handles (A). You can
drag a scale handle to resize the entire symbol.
Yellow boxes in the middle of the range box lines represent standard parametric handles (B).
You can drag a parametric handle to resize part of the symbol.
A green plus sign represents a mirror handle (C). You can drag a mirror handle to create a copy
of the symbol directly horizontal or vertical to the original symbol.
A large green circle represents a rotate handle (D). You can drag this handle to rotate the entire
symbol. Specific increments are displayed by the pointer while you rotate the symbol.
A series of small green circles represents drag points (E). You can use these points to attach
the symbol at a precise point to another symbol or element.
A small green lock represents a lock handle (F). You can click the lock handle to unlock the
symbol. Unlocking allows you to move a symbol away from the element to which the symbol
was associated.
A lock handle appears only if you drag the symbol to an element with one of the drag
points on the symbol.
Text and Labels

You can also drag labels from the Symbol Explorer. For example, the Process Flow template
offers a collection of SmartLabels in the \PFD folder.
Some SmartLabels display a question mark in the Symbol Explorer. You can also double-click
on some SmartLabels and edit the text.
90

SmartLabels can assume the attributes of the element or symbol that you drag the SmartLabel
to. You can edit the attributes of the SmartLabel in the Attribute Viewer.
If you want to quickly add text that is associated to an element, you can double-click any
element in the diagram. A text label appears in the center or below the element. When you type
in text and press Enter, the text label orients itself with the element. When you move the
element,the text label moves with it.
To add text that is not associated with an element, you can click Text Box on the
Schematic toolbar.
Grids
You can use a grid view and grid snap to place the items in your diagram at precise intervals.
You can view the grid by clicking Grid Display on the View menu. When you select Grid Snap
on the View menu, elements always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid
lines.
Reports
The software delivers some reports that you can update automatically when you add symbols to
a document. The reports work with symbols that have specific attributes assigned to them. You
must have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on your computer. The software includes
several example reports.
See Also
Drawing Basic Elements (on page 145)
Placing Symbols (on page 392)
Creating Symbols (on page 381)
Saving and Printing Documents

To keep your work for future use, you must give the document a name and save it. After you
save it, the document is available each time you want to use it.
91

It's best to name and save a document soon after you start working on it. After that, it's a good
idea to frequently save drawings or diagrams as you work. You should also be sure to save any
template files that you change.
You can print your drawings by choosing a menu command or toolbar button.
Saving Documents
When you first save a new document, the software provides a default name and directory
location. You can give the document a meaningful name and specify where you want to store
the document.
When you open an existing document, the software copies the document from its stored location
and displays it on the screen. As you work, the changes you make to the document are
displayed on your screen. To preserve these changes, you must again save the document.
You can quickly save changes to an open document by clicking Save
on the Main
toolbar.
After you save a document, it remains displayed on the screen. You can use Close to close the
document and clear it from your screen, or you can use Exit to close the document and exit the
software.
Saving a Copy
If you need to make a copy of your work, click Save As on the File menu and type a different
name for the document in the Save As dialog box. You can also save a document into other
formats such as AutoCAD or MicroStation.
Closing a Document
If you want to close a document without saving your work, click Close on the File menu and
then, when prompted to save your work, click No. If you do want to save your work, click Yes. If
you decide not to close the document at all, click Cancel.
Saving a Document Automatically

You can set an option to automatically save open documents at the interval that you specify.
This safety feature prevents you from losing work in case of an unexpected system shutdown.
You can set several options for AutoSave, including how often to save, which documents to
save, and whether to be prompted for each save. You can use AutoSave when you have one or
more documents open.
If AutoSave does not appear on the Tools menu, you must install it by clicking
Add-Ins on the Tools menu.
Saving Documents to a Previous SmartSketch Version

If you want to share drawings you create with users still using the previous version of
SmartSketch, you can do so with the Save As command. Click Save As on the File menu and
select SmartSketch 5.x in the Save as type list.
92
In order to save files containing unavailable linked references to a previous version of the
software, you must do one of the following:
Delete the SmartFrame that references the unavailable linked file.
Make the link available by restoring it to its original location, or place the linked file in the
same location as the file that references the link.

Sending a Document to Others
After you finish drawing a sketch or adding notes to it, you can send the document to other
users by clicking Send on the File menu. An e-mail message appears, allowing you to attach
the drawing to the message. You can also embed or link the drawing to a Word document and
send the document in e-mail to other users.
See Also
Close Command (on page 99)
Save a Document (on page 93)
Save a Document
If you save a document that has not previously been saved, the software automatically prompts
you to indicate if you want to save the changes.
To save the active document

1. Click File > Save.
2. If you have made changes after the document was last saved or if you have never saved the
active document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. Do one of
the following:
If you do not want to save your changes, click No.
If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is
displayed so that you can give the document a name, and specify a folder and format to
save it to.
If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.
To save a document to the previous version

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click File > Save As.

Select the drive and folder for the new document.
In the File Name box, type a new name for the document.
In the Save As Type box, select SmartSketch 5.x (*.igr) so it can be shared with users still
using the previous version of SmartSketch.
If you open a .sha file in SmartSketch, the software will not allow you to save it to a previous
version.
To save a document in a different format

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click File > Save As.

Select the drive and folder for the new document.
In the File Name box, type a new name for the document.
In the Save As Type box, select the document format you want to use.
If the active document is read-only, you can save changes only by saving the document with
a new name.
To save files containing unavailable linked references to a previous version of the software
(SmartSketch 5.x), you must do one of the following:
93
See Also
Save As Command (on page 94)
Save as Template Command (on page 143)
Save Command
Saves the active document with its currently defined name, folder, and format. If you are
saving the document for the first time, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give
the document a name and specify a folder and format to save it to.
See Also
Save As Dialog Box (on page 94)
Save As Command
Saves the active document to a new name, folder, and format. This command is available only
on the File menu.
See Also
Save As Dialog Box
Specifies the name, location, and format of a document when you save it. The MicroStation and
AutoCAD file types displayed in the Save as type list are set in the Foreign Data export
options. After you install SmartSketch, only the latest version of a supported foreign file format
displays. To change the version or select multiple versions, go to Tools > Options > Foreign
Data > Export Options. For more information see the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box)
(on page 467).
To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the question mark in the upper right
corner of the dialog box, and then click the control that you want information about.
When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can access a variety of
standard commands that help you manage your documents more efficiently. For example, if you
select a document in the list and then right-click, you can then click the Select command on the
shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts; send the
document somewhere else, and other activities.
Saving a Document Automatically

You can set an option to automatically save open documents at the interval that you specify.
This safety feature prevents you from losing work in case of an unexpected system shutdown.
You can set several options for AutoSave, including how often to save, which documents to
save, and whether to be prompted for each save. You can use AutoSave when you have one or
more documents open.
If AutoSave does not appear on the Tools menu, click Tools > Add-Ins. In the Add-In
Manager dialog box, click the AutoSave check box and then click OK.
See Also
Installing Additional Tools (on page 478)
AutoSave Command (on page 95)
AutoSave Dialog Box (on page 95)
94

Set AutoSave Options
You must install the AutoSave add-in using Add-Ins on the Tools menu before you set
AutoSave options.
1. Click Tools > AutoSave.
2. Select the options you want from the AutoSave dialog box.
3. Click OK.
See Also
AutoSave Dialog Box (on page 95)
AutoSave Command
Automatically saves open documents at the interval you specify.
The AutoSave command is delivered as a default add-in. If you do not see
AutoSave on the Tools menu, the AutoSave add-in is not been installed. To install the add-in,
click Tools > Add-Ins. In the Add-In Manager dialog box, click the AutoSave check box and
then click OK.
See Also
AutoSave Dialog Box

Save automatically every __ minutes - Automatically saves open documents at the interval
you specify.
Prompt Before Saving - Displays a dialog box whenever AutoSave begins saving documents.
You can click one of the following buttons to answer the dialog box question: "Save changes in
<document name>?"
Save backup - Saves a backup of the active document.
Save active document only - Saves only the active document.
Save all open documents - Saves all documents that are open.
The Save As dialog box appears if the document has not yet been saved.
See Also
Save a Document as a PDF File

1. Click File > Save as PDF.
2. On the Save as PDF dialog box, specify the options that you want.
3. Click OK.
See Also
Save as PDF Dialog Box (on page 96)
Save as PDF Command (on page 96)
95

Save as PDF Command
Saves the current file as a PDF document. You can control such options as the resolution of the
PDF file as well as the compression for embedded images. If you are saving a multi-sheet
document, you can specify which sheets to save and whether or not to create bookmarks for
each sheet. This command is available only on the File menu.
If you are using a 64-bit version of Windows 7 or Windows XP, special settings are
needed to save a file to PDF. For more information, see Configure SmartPlant PDF Converter
for 64-bit Windows.
See Also
Save a Document as a PDF File (on page 95)
Save as PDF Dialog Box
Converts the active drawing to a PDF document.
Sheets - Displays options for specifying which sheets will be converted to PDF. With multi-sheet
documents, you can specify that all sheets are converted or you can specify that only certain
sheets are converted.
Create bookmarks - Creates a bookmark for each sheet added to the PDF file.
Resolution - Modifies the dots per inch, or "dpi". The greater the dpi, the better the clarity.
Increasing the resolution setting increases the file size and can slightly increase the time
required to process some files.
Color - Creates a PDF using the colors available in the document. You can only create a color
PDF from a color drawing sheet.
Grayscale - Creates a PDF using a 256-color grayscale.
Pure black and white - Creates a PDF that has no color or grayscale. Anything that is not pure
white is drawn as black.
JPEG compression - Compresses images embedded in your document according to the
compression level you define. If your drawing contains a lot of images, compression settings are
very important for achieving good image quality at a manageable file size. Use the pull-down
menu to set the compression level. Compression levels in the High quality range do not
noticeably affect image quality, and produce larger file sizes than settings in the Low quality
range. However, using a mid-range compression level usually strikes the best balance in
creating a compact file while still maintaining enough information to product high-quality images.
See Also
Save as PDF Command (on page 96)
Save a Document as a PDF File (on page 95)
Save as Image
1. Click File > Save as Image.
2. In the Save as Image dialog box, define the file format and resolution for the image.
3. To modify the compression factor for the selected file type, move the Compression factor
slider to the left or right.
4. To define a specific area of the sheet to save as an image, click Define sheet area to save
as image.
5. To force the new image file to be linked to a new SmartFrame on a new sheet, click Place
image on new sheet.
6. To create the new image, click OK.
96

If you clicked Define sheet area to save as image, click and drag to define the
area of the sheet that you want to save as an image.
7. Use the options in the Save As dialog box to provide the name and location of the newly
created image file.
8. Click Save to store the new image file.
To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.
See Also
Save as Image Command (on page 97)
Save as Image Dialog Box (on page 97)
Save as Image Command

Saves the graphic data on the sheet as a raster image and, optionally, links the new raster file to
a SmartFrame on a new sheet. The Save as Image command is useful in preparing a sheet for
plotting. This command is available only on the File menu.
The new sheet has the same properties as the sheet that you converted to a raster image.
You can define an area of the sheet to convert to an image, instead of using the default sheet
area, by clicking Define Area and specifying the area to include in the raster image by defining
two points. Define two points by clicking the first point and dragging the cursor to the second
corner point.
See Also
Save as Image (on page 96)
Save as Image Dialog Box (on page 97)
Save as Image Dialog Box

Saves a snapshot of the graphic data on the active sheet as a raster file and allows you to link
the new raster file to a SmartFrame on a new sheet.
File Format - Allows you to specify the graphic file type for the new image. If you select JPEG
as the file format, you can also customize the compression factor, also called Q-factor, using the
Compression factor slider or the Value box.
Resolution - Allows you to modify the default resolution for the new graphic. The default value
is 400 dpi if the default units are not metric. If you set the units of measure to metric, the default
units for the resolution are pixels per centimeter (DPCM).
Compression - Allows you to specify the compression type for the image. Compression types
vary based on the file format you select.
Compression Factor - Allows you to specify the quality of compression versus file size for the
image. The compression factor for an image is also referred to as the Q-factor. To change the
compression factor, move the slider to the left to increase the file size and decrease
compression. To create a smaller, lower quality image, move the slider to the right. A
compression factor of 30 for JFIF and TIFF JPEG images provides optimal balance between
quality and compression. For Intergraph JPEG images, a compression factor of 15 provides the
optimal balance between quality and compression.
Value - Specifies a numeric value for the compression factor of the image. As you move the
Compression Factor slider, the value in the Value box changes.
Define sheet area to save as image - Allows you to define the area of the sheet to be saved as
an image. Select two points to define the area by clicking the first point and dragging the cursor
97

to the second corner point. If this option is not selected, the software saves the current sheet as
an image.
Place image on new sheet - Creates a new SmartFrame and links the new image file to the
new SmartFrame when the image is created. The software places the SmartFrame on a newly
created sheet. The size of the new sheet is the same as the source sheet unless you rotate the
output, in which case the size of the new sheet is B x A, where the size of the source is A x B.
See Also
Save as Image (on page 96)
Send a Document to Others

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the document you want to send.

Click File > Send.
Select the recipients using your electronic mail application's dialog box.
Type the subject and the accompanying message.
Send the message with the document attached.
Send Command
Activates your electronic mail application so you can send a mail message with the active
document attached.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Send button on a toolbar.
See Also
Add a Button to a Toolbar (on page 471)
Add a Command to a Menu (on page 472)
Close a Document
1. Click File > Close.
2. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if you have never saved a
new document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. Do one of
the following:
If you do not want to save your changes, click No.
If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is
displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a directory and format
to save it to.
If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.
See Also
98
Close a Document Without Saving Changes

Any changes not saved when you close a document or exit are lost and cannot be recovered. If
you want to close the document without saving any changes, select the No button on the Close
dialog box. When you open the document again, it will revert to the state when the last save was
performed.
See Also
Close Command
Closes the active document. If you have made changes since the document was last saved
or if you have never saved a new document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save
your changes. If you do not want to save your changes, click No. If you want to save the
changes, click Yes. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel. If you click Yes, the
Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a
directory and format to save it to.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Close command on a toolbar.
See Also
Exit Command (File Menu) (on page 99)
Close a Document (on page 98)
Exit Command (File Menu)

Closes all open documents and exits the software. If you have made changes after the
document was last saved or if you have never saved a new document, you are prompted to
indicate if you want to save your changes. If you do not want to save your changes, click No. If
you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.
If you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name
and specify a folder and format to save it to.
This command is not available on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Close a Document (on page 98)
Printing Documents
You can print your documents on many different devices ranging from dot matrix printers to
high-end laser printers. Except for the color settings and a few special effects your drawing
prints exactly as it appears on the drawing sheet.
Preparing to Print
The printer you use affects the way the current document prints and displays text on the screen.
Before you print a document, you must install and select the printer that you want to use. For
more information about installation, see your printer documentation.
99

Before you print, you will want to choose a printer and the settings for it. To do this, click Print
on the File menu and then click the printer that you want to use. You can set properties for the
printer by clicking Properties. To set the print range and scale, click Settings.
Printing a Document
As you work on a document, you might need to send a copy of it to a specified printer, plotter, or
file. You can click Print on the File menu to do the following:
Print an entire document or specific sheets from a document.
Print a draft copy of a document.
Set printing options, such as the range of sheets or number of copies to print.
The software supports WSYWIG plotting, using standard Windows plotting capabilities. The
software also supports pen plotters, subject to the limitations of the device driver. Elements
appear the same on the screen and in the printed document.
However, the fonts that you choose can affect the match between what you see on the
screen and what appears on the printed page. Three kinds of fonts affect your work:
scalable fonts, printer fonts, and screen fonts. Use scalable fonts, such as TrueType fonts,
to confirm that what you see on the screen is what appears on the printed page. If you use
printer fonts, you must have a corresponding screen font and font size to display each font
on the screen. If each screen font you use has a matching printer font, the screen display of
the document will closely match the printed document.
Printing Part of a Document

You can print selected sheets in a document or a selected area. This practice is handy if you are
working on a complex drawing and you want to print only certain parts to proof them.
To print selected sheets, first select sheets in the document to make them active. To do this, you
can click the drawing sheet tabs of the sheets that you want while pressing Ctrl. Then, you
select Print on the File menu and click Selected Sheets on the dialog box.
When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all the
selected sheets are printed as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. The
software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final
document.
To print a selected area, you should first select the drawing sheets that you want to print. Then,
you select Print on the File menu and click Print Area on the dialog box. After you click OK, a
set of crosshairs appears. You drag over the area that you want to print. The Print Area dialog
box then automatically appears and allows you to set options for printing the selected area.
Printing Time
Required time for printing varies by document. Expect longer print times when you have
drawings that contain a large number of the following items:
Curved elements
Many fills that have complex colors, patterns, or textures
Large bitmaps
Links to various documents
The type of printer that you have also affects the printing time. PostScript printers print faster
than LaserJet printers because they can calculate faster. Some older versions of PostScript
printers are slower when compared to the newer ones. The type of controller boards and the
amount of RAM in the printer also affect your printing times.
100

See Also
Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet (on page 102)
Print to a File (on page 103)
Print Several Documents Simultaneously (on page 103)
Print a Document
Because the fonts available on the selected printer affect both display and printing, select the
printer you will use before you begin working on a document.
Before you can print for the first time, you must connect the printer to the computer or network,
install a printer driver, and select the printer you will use to print the document. For more
information about how to install a printer, see the printer's documentation. To set options for an
installed printer, click Print on the File menu and then click Properties.
1. Click File > Print.
You can also click Print
2. On the Print dialog box, in the Name box, select the printer you want to use.
3. In the Number Of Copies box, type the number of copies you want.
4. In the Print range box, specify the range of pages you want to print.
You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or Settings on the Print
dialog box.
It is a good idea to save your document before you print it. This way, if a printer error or
other problem occurs, you will not lose any work completed after the last time you saved the
document.
You can display the document as it will be printed. Click Options on Tools menu. Then, on
the View tab, click the Display As Printed check box.
See Also
Set Printing Options

1. On the Main toolbar, click Print
2. Do one of the following:
To print
Do this
A selected area of a
sheet
Under Print Range, click Print Area and then click

OK. A set of crosshairs appears that you can drag
to define the area. The Print Area dialog box
automatically appears so that you can set options
for printing the area.
A range of
continuous sheets
In the Sheets box, type a range with a hyphen

between the sheet numbers. For example, to print
sheets 3 through 7, type 3-7. This prints each
sheet on a separate piece of paper.
101
Noncontinuous
sheets
In the Sheets box, type the sheet numbers,

separated by commas. For example, to print pages
1 and 6, type 1,6.
Selected sheets
In the document, select the sheets you want to

print; then, on the Print dialog box, click Selected
Sheets. This prints the selected sheets as a
composite drawing, like layers on a single sheet of
paper. The software uses the scale, paper size,
and orientation of the active sheet for printing the
final document.
An entire document
Click All Sheets. This is recommended only when

all the sheets have the same orientation and paper
size.
Multiple copies of
the entire document
In the Number of Copies box, type or select a

number of copies. To sort the sheets by sheet
number, select the Collate Copies check box.
When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all
the selected sheets are printed as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another.
dialog box. You can set the paper size, source, and orientation.
Click File > Sheet Setup to specify the drawing sheet size and scale.
See Also
Print a Document (on page 101)
Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet

Because the available fonts on the selected printer affect both display and printing, select the
printer to use before you begin working on a document.
Before you can print for the first time, you must connect the printer to the computer or network,
install a printer driver, and select the printer to print the document. For more information about
installing a printer, see the printer documentation. To set options for an installed printer, click
Print on the File menu, and then click Properties.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
On the Main toolbar, click Print

.
On the Print dialog box in the Name box, select the printer you want to use.
In the Number Of Copies box, type the number of copies you want.
In the Print Range box, click Print Area and click OK.
When a set of crosshairs appears, drag them to define the area that you want to print.
On the Print Area dialog box, set the options to print the area that you selected.
dialog box. You can set the paper size, source, and orientation.
When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print dialog box, all
the selected sheets print as one composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. The
102
software uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the final
document.
Click Sheet Setup on the File menu to specify the drawing sheet size and scale.
Saving your document before you print it is a good idea. This way, if a printer error or other
problem occurs, you will not lose any work completed after the last time you saved the
document.
You can display the document as it will be printed. Click Options on Tools menu. Then, on
the View tab, click the Display As Printed check box.
See Also
Print Command (on page 104)
Printing Documents (on page 99)
Print Several Documents Simultaneously

The command line that you type to print several documents simultaneously uses the
options that you set in the software, except for printer selection and the number of copies.
Before you begin, review the options on the Print dialog box. On that dialog box, click Settings
to review the options on the Settings dialog box.
1. Open a Command Prompt window.
Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
Click Start > Run. In the Open box, type command and then click OK.
2. In the Command Prompt window, type a command line with the following syntax:
smartsketch.exe<space>/p<space>/q<space><printer
path><space>/c<integer for number of copies><space><document
path><space><document path><space><document path, and so forth>
Example: /p /q \\print1\laserjet /c2 c:\temp\first file.igr c:\temp\second_file.igr
Spaces separate the document paths. If the printer name or filename contains a space,
you must use double quotes.
Press ENTER to print the document.
See Also
Printing Documents (on page 99)
Print to a File
1.
2.
3.
4.
On the Main toolbar, click Print

.
On the Print dialog box, set Print to file.
Click OK.
On the Print to file dialog box, type the name of the file and select the folder to print to.
See Also
103

Print Command
Sends a copy of the active document to a specified plotter, printer, or file. Options are
available for defining the printing area, range, number of copies, and other printing
characteristics.
Before using this command, you must install and select a printer. For help on installing a printer,
see the Windows documentation.
See Also
Print Dialog Box (on page 104)
Print Dialog Box
Controls the way a document prints.
Name Specifies the printer that you want to use. You can select from a list of all the
configured printers available for printing.
Properties Accesses the Printer Document Properties Dialog Box (on page 105).
Status Displays the current status of the selected printer. This area is read-only.
Type Displays the type of printer currently selected. This area is read-only.
Where Displays the printer path or location for the currently selected printer. This area is
read-only.
Comment Displays any comments you input during printer configuration. This area is
read-only.
Print to file Prints the document to a file, instead of a printer. You specify the file's name on
the Print to file dialog box after you set the check box and click OK on the Print dialog box.
This saves a document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer or plotter. Then, you can
print from a computer that does not have the application installed or print to a printer other than
the one you currently have installed.
Print Range Displays options for selecting the print range.
All Sheets Prints all drawing sheets in the active document.
Selected Sheets Prints all the sheets that you selected as a composite document, as layers
all on one sheet of paper.
Sheets Specifies the range of pages that you want to print. You can type the starting page
you want to print as the "From" value and the ending page you want to print as the "To" value.
In the Sheets box, type a range with a hyphen between the sheet numbers. For example, to
print sheets 3 through 7, type 3-7. This prints each sheet on a separate piece of paper.
Print Area Accesses the Print Area dialog box. When you click this option and then click OK
on the dialog box, a set of crosshairs appears. You drag the crosshairs to define the area that
you want to print. Then, the Print Area dialog box automatically appears so that you can set
various options for printing the area that you selected.
Copies Sets options for the number of copies you want to print.
Number Of Copies Specifies the number of copies you want to print.
104

Collate Organizes sheets when you print multiple copies.
Pure Black and White Prints a black and white document.
Settings Accesses the Settings dialog box.
See Also
Printer Document Properties Dialog Box
Sets properties for the current printer that you selected on the Print dialog box. The settings
available on this dialog box depend on the type of printer that you selected.
To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark
in the upper
right corner of the dialog box and click the control that you want information about.
See Also
Print Area Dialog Box
Specifies the area that you want to print.
Scale Controls the scale applied to the print area in a document.
Best Fit Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the
configured device.
Manual Scale Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing. For
example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12,
then the printed range appears as 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper.
If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale, you can set the paper length to 1 and the
design length to 1.
If you type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes, the red, blue, and black
boxes in the Preview area change to reflect the values.
Paper Length Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print.
Design Length Specifies a design length.
Origin Adjusts the location of the effective print area on the printer paper.
Center Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If you do not set this
option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left.
X origin Sets a shift in the X direction from the origin.
Y origin Sets a shift in the Y direction from the origin.
XY Range Clears the previous defined print area and prompts you to define a new print area.
See Also
105
Settings Dialog Box

Controls the print area of a selected sheet.
Scale - Controls the scale applied to the print area in a document.
Best Fit - Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer paper for the
configured device.
Manual Scale - Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during printing. For
example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and you set a manual scale of 1:12,
then the printed range appears as 1 cm by 1 cm on the printer paper.
If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale, you can set the paper length to 1 and the
design length to 1.
If you type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes, the red, blue, and black
boxes in the Preview area change to reflect the values.
Paper Length - Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print.
Design Length - Specifies a design length.
Origin - Adjusts the location of the effective print area on the printer paper.
Center - Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If you do not set this
option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom left.
X origin - Sets a shift in the X direction from the origin.
Y origin - Sets a shift in the Y direction from the origin.
Preview - Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.
If you click Manual Scale and type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes,
the red, blue, and black boxes change to reflect the values.
See Also
Print Dialog Box (on page 104)
106
SECTION 4
SmartSketch Templates
Templates are used as a starting point in creating a document. A template is a file that provides
tools such as text, formats, geometry, dimensions, units of measurement, toolbars, and styles
that are used to produce a new document that uses a specified format. You can either use one
of the pre-defined templates SmartSketch provides or you can create your own.
SmartSketch Industry-Specific Templates
SmartSketch provides an extensive selection of templates on which you can base your
documents. The template that you use depends on the type of information you want to put in the
document. For example, if you want to create a drawing that contains a schematic of an
electrical component, you can use an electrical schematic template.
When you select a specific template, tools are available that allow you to create either a
schematic diagram or a precision drawing.
Schematic diagrams are primarily created using symbols, connectors, and text at a 1:1
scale. Schematic diagrams do not represent a logical flow. The Schematic toolbar is
available when you select a template designed to create a schematic diagram.
Precision drawings represent physical elements such as lines, arcs, curves, and rectangles
that you draw precisely with the Draw toolbar. Precision drawings are created at real-world
scale, and you can maintain relationships between elements in precision drawings.
Additionally, when you base a document on a particular template, that template automatically
points to the symbols that you would most likely use for that type of document. The Symbol
Explorer displays the appropriate symbol set for the task.
To base new documents on a template, choose New on the File menu and select the template
from the list. You can also open the template and save the document under another name.
Custom SmartSketch Templates
If you find it necessary to use the same document settings over and over in different drawings,
you can create customized templates. Document settings might include such options as
drawing sheet settings, scales, actual elements that you draw, and a background sheet.
To save a document as a template, use Save As Template on the File menu. By default, the
software saves templates in the Template directory located in the directory where you installed
the software. You can, however, save your template to a UNC path. A different file extension in
the name of the document is not necessary.
To preserve the data integrity of your custom template files from one software version to
the next, Intergraph PPM recommends after installing the latest version of the software that you
open all your custom template files and save them to new file format.
See Also
Create a Template (on page 143)
107
AEC Templates
The AEC templates are precision templates designed according to accepted industry standards.
The templates have imperial units in feet and inches, as well as metric units in meters and
centimeters. AEC templates include:
ANSI, Architectural, and ISO standard sheet sizes and borders
Architectural fill styles
The AEC template symbols are based on AIA, ASHRAE, and ISO standards for residential and
commercial designs. The AEC templates also provide ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS
dimensioning standards.
You must install the AEC Solutions (on page 25) option before you can use the
AEC templates.
See Also
Architectural Templates (on page 108)
HVAC Templates (on page 110)
Landscape Templates (on page 111)
Architectural Templates
You use these precision templates to produce architectural designs and drawings according to
accepted industry standards.
Architectural (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and
architectural sheet sizes and borders, architectural fill styles, and provides symbols based
on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs.
Architectural (Metric)This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO
standard architectural sheet sizes and borders, architectural fill styles, and provides symbols
based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs.
The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these templates.
When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create
precision drawings.
Production Drafting Workflow for Floor Plans

You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the AIA standards.
Set up the sheet .
Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the design. The default
scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the average plan on a D-Size sheet.
Select a border or create one.
The Architectural templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the borders from
Sheet Setup on the File menu so that they appear in the current design. On the
Background tab, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet. Use Select
Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border.
108
The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications
Institute (CSI).
From the View tab on the Options dialog box, set the grid settings to Grid style to Static,
Grid spacing to 1, and Grid index to 1.
Workflow A: Draw the approximate perimeter walls of the floor plan, using Place Doubleline
and SmartSketch. Use Trim, Trim to Corner, and Extend to Next for any intersection cleanup
between elements where walls overlap or do not intersect cleanly.
Workflow B: Verify on the Tools menu that Maintain Relationships is set on. Draw the
approximate perimeter walls of the floor plan, using Place Doubleline, SmartSketch Settings,
and PinPoint. Then adjust the distance between walls (doubleline graphics) using Select Tool
on the Draw toolbar to make precision distances with PinPoint. Use Trim, Trim Corner, and
Extend to Next for any intersection cleanup between elements.
Short cut keys F9 and F12 for PinPoint are useful when you draw walls.
Avoid trimming for openings, doors, or windows.
Press and hold Shift while using Place Doubleline; this action prevents a beginning or end
cap from being placed. (Pressing and holding Shift while using Place Doubleline is useful
for tracing.)
Draw the interior walls.
Using the same techniques and commands you used to draw the perimeter walls, add the
appropriate interior walls and adjust accordingly.
Place door and window symbols.
Using the Symbol Explorer, select the Doors folder from the Plan Symbols folder in the
tree view. Drag the door symbols onto the represented wall elements, and use the bold
parameters that appear in the Attribute Viewer to change the size of the door and the
handles that appear to orient the door to the position you want. Repeat the same steps you
used to place doors for placing windows and all other types of symbols.
You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:
Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release
the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp
Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the
symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release
Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
Annotate the drawing.
Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units
regardless of the sheet scale. To label windows and doors, use the labels that automatically
appear on symbols when you double-click them. Or use labels provided in the Label directory in
the Plan Symbols directory.
The following symbol sets aid in production drafting.
Content
Description
Elevation Symbols
Symbols of typical elevation view content based on AIA

standards and other common designs.
Plan Symbols
Symbols of typical plan view content based on AIA

standards and other common designs. Some symbols
such as doors and windows can be modified by
parameters that appear when the symbols are placed.
You must install the AEC Solutions (on page 25) option before you can use the
Architectural templates.
109
See Also
Drawing Connectors (on page 149)
HVAC Templates
You use these precision templates to produce HVAC designs and drawings according to
HVAC (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and
Architectural sheet sizes and borders, and Architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based
on ASHRAE and ISO standards for residential and commercial designs.
HVAC (Metric)This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO standard
Architectural sheet sizes and borders, and Architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based
on ASHRAE and ISO standards for residential and commercial designs.
The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these
templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to
help you create precision drawings.
Production Drafting Workflow for Double Line Duct Layout

To produce a fairly complex production drawing, you should set Maintain Relationships
off.
1. Set up the sheet - Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the
design. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the average plan on a D-Size
sheet.
2. Reference a floor plan or open one - Reference a floor plan by using the Object
command on the Insert menu or by dragging and dropping in the reference file. Or click File
on the Open menu to open (translate) the file.
3. Place duct symbols - Using the Symbol Explorer, select the Double Line Duct folder
from the HVAC folder in the tree view. Drag the duct symbols over the reference file,
connecting one to another. Use the bold parameters that appear in the Attribute Viewer to
change the size of the duct.
Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you
release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options.
Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of
the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can
release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
4. Annotate the drawing - Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing.
Text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label double line ducts, use
the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click them.
5. Select a border or create one -The HVAC templates are delivered with ten border sizes.
Select the borders with Sheet Setup on the File menu so that they appear in the current
design. On the Background tab, select the background sheet to display with the working
sheet. Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border.
110
The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications
Institute (CSI).
Content
Description
HVAC (Intergraph)
HVAC symbols designed to best fit Double

Line Duct and Single Line Duct Layout
workflows. Several of these symbols are
designed with special behaviors and
parametric properties.
HVAC (ASHRAE)
HVAC symbols designed to ASHRAE

standards.
To use this functionality, you must install the AEC Solutions (on page 25) option.
See Also
Landscape Templates
Use these precision templates to produce landscape designs and drawings according to
Landscape (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and
architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based
AIA standards for residential and commercial designs.
Landscape (Metric)This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO
standard architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It provides
symbols based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs.
The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two
templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help
you create precision drawings.
Production Drafting Workflow for Landscape Designs

off.
Set up the sheet.
Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale for the design. The default scale is inches =
1 foot, which is appropriate for the average plan on a D Size sheet.
Reference a floor plan or open one.
Reference a floor plan by using Object on the Insert menu or by dragging and dropping in
the reference file. Or use Open on the File menu to open (translate) the file.
Any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document can be a reference file.
Create a foot print.
If you reference the plan, using the drawing tools on the Draw tool bar, you can trace the
outer perimeter of the reference plan to create the outline shape of the building. Either delete
or move the reference file to a layer and turn it off.
111
Place symbols.
Drag the landscape symbols into the document in the appropriate positions.
a. Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you
b. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of
Annotate the drawing
Use text and dimensioning to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units
regardless of the sheet scale. To label landscape symbols, use the labels that automatically
appear on symbols when you double-click them.
The Landscape templates are delivered with ten border sizes.
Select the borders with Sheet Setup so that they appear in the current design. On the
Background tab, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet.
Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border.
The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications Institute
(CSI).
Content
Description
Elevations Symbols Provide AIA and Intergraph standard elevation

symbols for commercial and residential
Landscape design.
Plan Symbols
Provide AIA and Intergraph standard plan

symbols for commercial and residential
Landscape design.
See Also
Site Templates
You use these precision templates to produce site designs and drawings according to accepted
industry standards.
Site (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet and inches, ANSI and architectural
sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It also provides symbols based on AIA
standards for residential and commercial designs.
Site (Metric)This template has metric units in meters and centimeters, ISO standard
architectural sheet sizes and borders, and architectural fill styles. It also provides symbols
based on AIA standards for residential and commercial designs.
The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two
templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help
you create precision drawings.
112
Production Drafting Workflow for Site Designs
off.
Set up the sheet.
Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the
average plan on a D-Size sheet.
Reference a floor plan or open one.
Reference a floor plan by using the Object command on the Insert menu or by dragging
and dropping in the reference file. Or click the Open command to open (translate) the file.
Any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document can be a reference file.
Create a foot print.
If you reference the plan, using the drawing tools on the Draw toolbar, you can trace the
outer perimeter of the reference plan to create the outline shape of the building. Either delete
or move the reference file to a layer and turn it off.
Place symbols.
Drag the landscape symbols into the document in the appropriate positions.
a. Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you
b. Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of
Annotate the drawing.
Use text and dimensioning to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in paper units
regardless of the sheet scale. To label site symbols, use the labels that automatically appear
on symbols when you double-click them.
The Site templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the borders with Sheet Setup
so that they appear in the current design. On the Background tab of the Sheet Setup
dialog box, select the background sheet to display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool
to position the graphics appropriately in the border.
The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction Specifications Institute
(CSI).
Content
Description
Elevations Symbols
Provide AIA and Intergraph standard elevation

symbols for commercial and residential Site
design.
Plan Symbols
Provide AIA and Intergraph standard plan

symbols for commercial and residential Site
design.
113
See Also
Electrical Diagramming Templates

This collection of industry-specific templates (both Imperial and Metric) includes task-specific
toolbars and industry-standard symbols that allow you to quickly and easily create sophisticated
electrical schematics.
Using simple drag-and-drop methods, you can easily position electrical components into their
appropriate locations on the drawing sheet. With intelligent routing - the Connector command
you can connect components at each symbol's connect points, or you can drag-and-drop
components onto the connectors you've already placed. Many inline components such as
resistors, batteries, capacitors, diodes, and switches auto-align and glue when dropped onto a
connector.
Drawing annotation is easy: simply double-click a component or connector, then type the text.
Many symbols (such as resistors, batteries, and capacitors) have predefined SmartLabels that
can be edited with a double-click selection. There is also an annotation symbol directory with
drag- and-drop auto-sizing text boxes.
The Control Loop Diagram template includes more than 200 control loop-specific symbols. The
symbols are grouped into logical categories and include Controllers, Flow Elements, Indicators,
Recorders, Switches, Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips and Transmitters.
To use this functionality, you must install the Electrical Solutions (on page 25)
option.
See Also
Control Loop Templates (on page 114)
Electrical Templates (on page 115)
Control Loop Templates

You use this schematic template to produce control loop diagrams using Intergraph supplied
symbols according to accepted industry standards.
Imperial TemplateThis template defaults to a B size sheet. The sheet background
consists of two sections divided into two categories. The main sections are Field and I/O
Building.
The Field section is divided into Instrument and Junction Box categories.
The I/O Building is divided into Termination Rack and I/O Cabinet categories.
If you need a different configuration for the background, click Background Sheets on the
View menu, and select a sheet and modify as needed. Then click Working Sheets on the View
menu. The working sheet displays the changes that were made in the background sheet.
Control Loop Workflow

You should create schematic drawings with Maintain Relationships cleared.
Set up the sheet. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default sheet size is B with a scale of
1:1.
114
Place your symbols.
1. The Symbol Explorer defaults to the Control Loop symbol set. The set is divided into
logical components such as controllers, recorder, terminal strips, transmitters and others.
Select a component and drag it to the location you want.
A typical configuration might be as follows: FieldInstrumentThermocouple,
Junction Box- 3 Wire Terminal Strip; I/O BuildingTermination Rack3 Wire Terminal Strip
w/ground and I/O CabinetElectrical Recorder.
2. Click Connector
on the Draw toolbar and connect the components together as you want.
3. Connect points have been placed on each component where typical connections can be
made.
Edit attributes.
1. Some components have attributes associated with them that change the text associated
with them. Select the component, and change the attributes you want to change in the
Symbol Explorer. The text labels are updated to display the input values. The following
symbol sets to aid in control loop diagramming.
Content
Description
Control Loop Diagrams
Control Loop symbols categorized into the

following groupings: Controllers, Flow Elements,
Indicators, Positioners, Recorders, Switches,
Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips,
Transmitters and Valves.
option.
See Also
Electrical Templates
You use these schematic templates to produce electrical drawings according to accepted
industry standards.
Imperial TemplateThis template is defined with ANSI sheet sizes and borders. The
default sheet size is C with a 1:1 scale.
Metric TemplateThis template is defined with ISO sheet sizes and borders. The default
sheet size is A1 with a 1:1 scale.
Both templates point to the electrical symbol sets. The electrical symbols include main
classifications of the following: Circuit Protectors, Contacts and Relays, Electron Tubes,
Fundamental Items, High Voltage, Logic Gates, Qualifying Symbols, Rotating Mach,
Semiconductors, Signaling and Readout Devices, Switches, Terminals and Connectors,
Transformers and Inductors, and Transmission Path.
You should design schematic drawings with Maintain Relationships set off (default
setting).
Electrical Workflow 1
Set up the sheet.
1. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale.
115
2. Place an initial symbol correctly rotated.
3. Route a connector from that symbol to form a rough outline of the circuit.
4. From the Symbol Explorer, select the type of symbol or component needed, and drag the
component onto the sheet and over the connector.
5. The connector is highlighted when the pointer moves over the element. Most of the
components automatically align to the connector.
6. Drop the symbol, and it is placed, associated to the connector. Or, if the orientation of the
symbol is not correct, use the left or right arrows to rotate the symbol to a new orientation.
When the symbol is dropped, it maintains the orientation.
7. Enter any attribute information that you want in the Attribute Viewer.
8. When the information is changed in the viewer, the text information on the symbol also
changes. If you do not want the attribute text, you can select the text box and delete text
from the symbol.
9. Continue adding or modifying connectors and adding components until the circuit is
complete.
Electrical Workflow 2
Set up the sheet.
1. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale.
2. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the component onto the sheet to the location you want.
3. Or, if the orientation of the symbol is not correct, use the left or right arrows to rotate the
symbol to a new orientation. When the symbol is dropped, it maintains the orientation.
4. Enter any attribute information that you want in the Attribute Viewer.
5. When the information is changed in the viewer, the text information on the symbol also
changes. If you do not want the attribute text, you can select the text box and delete text
from the symbol.
6. Continue dragging and dropping components as needed to complete the circuit.
7. Using Connector
on the Draw toolbar, connect the individual components.
8. Continue adding components and connecting them together until the circuit is complete.
Differences in Workflow 1 and 2
116
Workflow 1 places the symbol or component on the connector or wire. It does not break the
wire. It only masks out the connector beneath it. In this case the components are glued to
the connector. To modify the circuit in such a case, you move the connector, and the
symbols follow it to the new location.
Workflow 2 places a connector or wire between the components that are placed. Workflow 2
is more of a real-world flow. In this case, you can select and move the components, and the
connector or wires move to adjust to the new component location.
You can combine the workflows. You must, however, remember which is the parent and
which is the child when you combine the two.
The following symbol sets aid in electrical schematic creation.
Content
Description
Electrical Symbols
Circuit Protectors Contacts and Relays Electron Tubes

Fundamental Items High Voltage Items Logic Gates
Qualifying Symbols Rotating Mach & Comp Assembly
Semiconductors Diodes Thyristors Transistors
Signaling & Readout Devices Switches Terminal &
Connectors Transformers & Inductors Transmission
Path
option.
See Also
General Diagramming Templates

SmartSketch provides General Diagramming templates for mapping, basic diagrams, network
diagrams, flowchart diagrams, workflow diagrams, and office layout diagrams.
The general diagramming templates provide the following:
Imperial templates-These templates have imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet
sizes, ANSI or ASA dimensioning, and Arial, ANSI, or Architectural text.
Metric templates-These templates have metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO
dimensioning, and Arial or ISO text.
General diagramming template symbols are provided in the Symbol Explorer. Also, tools to
create drawings using the general diagramming templates are available on the Draw toolbar.
The dimensioning and text standard will vary with each template. For example, the Atlas
Mapping Imperial template provides ANSI dimensioning and Arial text, while the Office Layout
Imperial template provides ASA dimensioning and Architectural text.
See Also
Atlas Mapping Templates (on page 117)
Basic Diagramming Templates (on page 119)
Directional Mapping Templates (on page 121)
Flowchart Templates (on page 122)
Network Diagram Templates (on page 124)
Office Layout Templates (on page 126)
Organizational Chart Templates (on page 128)
Atlas Mapping Templates

You use these templates to produce maps.
Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes,
ANSI dimensioning, and Arial text.
Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO
dimensioning, and Arial text.
117
Atlas Map symbols for the United States are available in the Symbol Explorer for these
templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create maps appears on the left of the drawing
window.
Mapping Workflow
You can create maps with Maintain Relationships set on or off.
Set up the sheet.
1. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1.
Draw the map.
2. Place map symbols by using the mouse to drag from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging
a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to rotate the symbol
dynamically before placement.
3. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement.
If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled,
allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment.
4. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:
Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of
the symbol while holding down the Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can
release the Ctrl key and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the
symbol.
5. When you drag and pause a symbol over an existing map symbol drop point, a tool tip
appears, identifying the state to be placed adjacently. Dropping the symbol on the drop point
ensures that the state boundaries match perfectly.
Place text.
6. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol. The active text settings in the
file are used.
7. To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until
the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents
the text. Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties.
8. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the text to a new position.
Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale.
Finish the drawing.
9. Finish the map by drawing details, adding text, or modifying the symbols to enhance the
map.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing maps.
Content
Description
\PROGRAM
United States Map symbols. These symbols
FILES\SMARTSKETC have drag points as well as special behaviors
H\SYMBOLS\DIAGRA for enhanced placement and modification.
MMING \ATLAS
MAP\US STATES
See Also
118
Basic Diagramming Templates

You use these templates to produce business diagrams.
ANSI dimensioning and ANSI text.
dimensioning, and ISO text.
Basic diagramming symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The
Schematic toolbar containing tools to create diagrams appears on the left of the drawing
window.
Setting Up a Basic Diagram

1. Set up the sheet.
Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to draw. The
default scale is 1:1.
2. Prepare to draw.
Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display,
and Grid Snap.
For more grid options click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set the grid style to
either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.
These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you draw.
To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed.
Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high quality results.
You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.
Simple Diagramming Workflow

1. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer.
2. Use Connector to connect symbols.
3. Double-click each symbol to add text.
Optimal Diagramming Workflow

1. Place basic diagramming symbols by using the mouse to drag from the Symbol Explorer.
While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically
during placement.
Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before
placement.
If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily
disabled, allowing you to place a symbol using grid snap or visual alignment.
release the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two
options. Click Stamp Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of
the symbol.
119
Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first
instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first
symbol, you can release Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies
of the symbol.
2. Connect the symbols by using Connector.
When drawing connectors, you should set Clearance. Type the minimum distance from
the symbols that you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. This action
allows you to control the visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns
just before they attach to a symbol.
When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you
want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested
targets for the connector appear.
The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry.
If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal drawing mode will be
temporarily activated, allowing the connector to be drawn at any angle with or without
grid snap.
3. Place text.
Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol.
The active text settings in the file are used.
To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text
until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that
represents the text.
Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties.
To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the text to a new
position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale.
4. Finish the diagram.
Use color to modify the symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing. The following
symbol sets are aid in drawing diagrams.
Content
Description
\PROGRAM
FILES\SMARTSKETCH
\SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMI
NG \BASIC
Common business diagramming

symbols. You can double-click these
symbols to place text. These symbols
also have special behaviors for
enhanced placement and
modification.
See Also
120
Directional Mapping Templates

You use these templates to produce directional maps.
Directional Map symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw
toolbar containing tools to create maps appears on the left of the drawing window.
Directional Mapping Workflow

Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1.
2. Draw a directional map.
Draw transportation routes first using Line/Arc Continuous or Curve on the Draw
toolbar. Select a linestyle such as Rural Road or Railroad.
When you use Line/Arc Continuous, press Shift+A to draw an arc. To turn line
mode back on, press Shift+L.
When you use Curve, press the left mouse button as you draw.
You can label transportation routes by double-clicking the line and typing the name
of the road or railroad. The text automatically aligns to linear elements.
3. Place symbols.
Place directional map symbols to represent landmarks by dragging from the Symbol
Explorer.
before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the
symbol before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment
indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual
alignment.
the symbol.
of the symbol.
4. Place text.
Double-click symbols or lines to place text.
The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for repositioning or
editing text properties or moving properties, pause the pointer over text until the
PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents
the text.
Right-click the highlighted text to edit properties.
121
5. Finish the map.
Draw details and modify the color or linestyles of the symbols to enhance the map. The
following symbol sets aid in drawing directional maps.
Content
Description
\PROGRAM
FILES\SMARTSKETCH\SYMBOL
S\ DIAGRAMMING
\DIRECTIONAL MAP
Directional Map symbols have

special behaviors for enhanced
placement and modification.
See Also
Flowchart Templates
You use these templates to produce flowcharts and diagrams.
Imperial Template - This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes,
ANSI dimensioning and Arial text.
Flowchart, Audit, Dataflow, and TQM symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these
templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create flowcharts and diagrams appears
on the left of the drawing window.
Setting Up a Flowchart
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
You can create flowcharts and diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off.
Set up the sheet.
Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allows enough paper space to draw. The
Prepare to draw.
Set the drawing aids to your preferences using the SmartSketch Settings, Grid
Display, and Grid Snap.
For more grid options, click the View tab after you click Options on the Tools menu to
set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid
spacing.
Drawing a Simple Flowchart and Diagram

122
Drawing an Optimal Flowchart and Diagram
1. Place flowchart and diagram symbols by dragging from the Symbol Explorer.
While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to
rotate the symbol dynamically before placement.
placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are
temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment.
the symbol.
of the symbol.
When drawing connectors, set the clearance using Clearance. Type the minimum
distance from the symbols that you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur.
This action allows you to control the visual consistency of connectors that make
right-angle turns just before they attach to a symbol.
The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry. If
you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal drawing mode will be temporarily
activated, allowing the connector to be drawn at any angle with or without grid snap.
3. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbols.
The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for properties
editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears.
Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the
highlighted text to edit properties. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to
unlock.
Then with the pointer drag the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper
units regardless of the sheet scale.
Use color to modify the symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing. The following
symbol sets are provided to aid in drawing diagrams.
Content
Description
\PROGRAM
FILES\SMARTSKETCH\
SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING
\FLOWCHART
Flowchart, Audit, Dataflow, and

TQM symbols. You can double-click
these symbols to place text. These
symbols also have special
behaviors for enhanced placement
and modification.
123
See Also
Network Diagram Templates

You use these templates to produce network diagrams.
ANSI dimensioning, and ANSI text.
Network Diagram symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The
Schematic toolbar containing tools to create network diagrams appears on the left of the
drawing window.
Network Diagram Workflow

You can create network diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off.
Select an appropriate sheet size. The network symbols are accurately scaled to 1/10th
of their true size so you should leave the sheet scale at 1:1, the default.
2. Prepare to draw.
and Grid Snap. For more grid options click the View tab after you click Options on the
Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static. Set the static grid to the
preferred grid spacing.
Simple Network Diagram

Optimal Network Diagram

1. Place network diagram symbols by dragging from the Symbol Explorer.
before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the
symbol before placement.
disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment.
the symbol.
of the symbol.
124
2.
3.
4.
5.
Some network symbols mount into the rack or chassis symbols when you drag the
symbol into a rack or chassis. When you pause over a drop point in a chassis or rack, a
tool tip appears; for example, Attach Module. When you move a symbol, all associated
symbols follow. To independently move an associated symbol, select the symbol and
click the green lock. This frees the symbol from the element. A symbol is not associated
to an element if a green lock is not displayed when you select the symbol.
Add attributes to the network symbols by selecting the symbol and editing fields in the
Attribute Viewer.
Connect the symbols by using Connector, or by dragging in Cable symbols and then
connecting the endpoints to network symbols. The result is a symbolized connector with
attribution.
When drawing connectors, you should set Clearance. Type the minimum distance from
the symbols that you would like the first turn in the connectors to occur. This action
allows you to control the visual consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns
just before they attach to a symbol.
targets for the connector appear. The connector end point can be placed on a target or
any of the symbol vector geometry. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the
diagonal mode is temporarily invoked and the alignment indicators are temporarily
disabled.
Note the connect points display a tool tip when the connector end point is drawn or
modified over a port on the network symbol.
You can edit attribute information on the connector and the network symbols in the
Attribute Viewer.
SmartLabels are provided for network symbols and cables. These SmartLabels appear
in the Symbol Explorer in the network symbol directories. When you drag a network
SmartLabel over the drag point (usually the lower left corner) of a network symbol, the
label associates to the symbol and accesses the symbol attribute information.
The description attribute data is displayed in the label. The cable labels display the type
and the speed-type of the cable.
Place text.
Double-click on the symbols to place text below the symbol or connector. The active text
settings in the file are used.
Right click on text to edit properties.
To move the text, select and highlight the text.
Click the green lock to unlock; then with the pointer, drag the text to a new position.
Report on the network diagram.
Drag a report from the Symbol Explorer on to the sheet and follow the instructions. An
Excel spreadsheet is updated from the attributes of all the network symbols in the file.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing diagrams.
125
Content
Description
\PROGRAM
FILES\SMARTSKETCH\
SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMI
NG\ NETWORK
DIAGRAM
Network diagram symbols that include

Cables, Chassis, Cards, Modules,
Input-Output Devices, Intelligent Network
Devices, Network Accessories,
Non-intelligent Network Devices, Physical
Plant, and Servers and Storage devices.
These symbols have attribution and
special behaviors for enhanced
placement and modification.
See Also
Office Layout Templates

You use these templates to produce Office Layout drawings.
ASA dimensioning, and Architectural text.
Metric Template - This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO
Office layout symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw
toolbar containing tools to create office layout drawings appears on the left of the drawing
window.
Office Layout Workflow

Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the design. The
default scale is 1/4" = 1' for the Imperial template and 1:50 for the Metric template.
2. Prepare to draw.
and Grid Snap.
For more grid options, click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set the grid style
to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.
These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you
draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed.
3. Draw walls.
Click Place Doubleline on the Draw toolbar and set the thickness of the walls to be
drawn in the ribbon.
Click the appropriate button on the ribbon to indicate whether you draw from the center
of the wall or one of the edges (primary line buttons).
Draw the walls first.
126
4. Next, use Trim, Trim Corner, and Extend to Next for any intersection cleanup.
If you press Alt while drawing, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled.
When you draw the walls, you may want to select a neutral gray for the line color. After
you draw the walls, you can avoid cleaning the intersections by color filling the walls
with a solid fill of the same neutral gray color.
Use the door and window symbols to complete the floor plan. These symbols
automatically align to the wall and can be mirrored, scaled and rotated after placement.
You can also use Place Doubleline for drawing office partitions, along-wall working
surfaces, counter tops, work benches, stockroom shelves, custom bookcases, custom
desks, and cat walks. If you press and hold Shift while drawing with Place Doubleline,
the end caps do not automatically merge into another section of doubleline. This feature
is useful for drawing partitions perpendicular to walls. You can use Fillet to round the
corners of counter tops.
5. Reference or open an existing floor plan.
Reference a floor plan by using Object on the Insert menu or by dragging the existing
file into the drawing window. Or click the Open command on the File menu to open an
existing floor plan file.
You can reference or open any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document.
Place office layout symbols.
Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol, use the left/right
arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow
keys to select different drag points on the symbol before placement.
Office Layout symbols can be physically associated to walls or other symbols. When
you move a symbol or a wall, all associated symbols follow.
To independently move an associated symbol, select the symbol and click the green
lock to unlock the association. A symbol is not associated if a green lock is not
displayed when the symbol is selected.
the symbol.
of the symbol.
6. Annotate the drawing.
Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. To label, double-click
symbols, walls, or other drawn elements. The active text settings in the file are used for
labels that you double-click.
To edit existing text properties, right-click text and select properties from the pop-up
menu. To move text, click to select; then click the green lock to unlock.
Move by dragging the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units
regardless of the sheet scale.
7. Finish the drawing.
127
Change the color of symbols to enhance furniture or identify existing and new
equipment. You can also use connectors to enhance the drawing by adding
communication and computer networking lines. The following symbol sets aid in
creating office layout drawings.
Content
Description
\PROGRAM
FILES\SMARTSKETCH
\SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMI
NG \OFFICE LAYOUT
Office Layout symbols have special

behaviors for enhanced placement and
modification.
See Also
Organizational Chart Templates

You use these templates to produce organizational charts.
Org Chart symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic
toolbar containing tools to create organizational charts appears on the left of the drawing
window.
Automated Organizational Chart Creation

1. Load the add-in.
On the Main toolbar, click Add-Ins on the Tools menu and check the box for Org Chart
Wizard.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Org Chart Wizard on the Tools menu and follow the instructions
to continue.
This wizard creates an organizational chart with or without personnel data. The
completion of the wizard results in a new sheet added to the open file containing your
chart. You can edit the resulting symbols and connectors interactively as if the chart had
been drawn manually.
Organizational Chart Workflow

You can create organizational charts with Maintain Relationships set on or off.
Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to draw. The
2. Prepare to draw.
and Grid Snap. For more grid options, click the View tab after you click Options on the
Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the
preferred grid spacing.
These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow while you
draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid Snap with a static grid displayed.
128
Simple Workflow Diagram

Optimal Workflow Diagram

1. Place Org Chart symbols by dragging them from the Symbol Explorer.
While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to
rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select
different drag points on the symbol before placement.
These symbols automatically expand to the size of the text. You can also size them by
using the yellow handles.
You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol.
the symbol.
of the symbol.
When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set Clearance: to the
minimum distance from the symbol where the first turn in the connector appears.
The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry. If
you press the Alt key while drawing a connector, the diagonal mode is temporarily
invoked and the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing the connector to
be drawn with or without grid snap.
3. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol.
The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for editing
properties, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears.
Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click the
highlighted text to edit properties.
4. Finish the organizational chart.
Use color to modify the symbols and use connectors to enhance the drawing.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing organizational charts.
129
Content
Description
\PROGRAM
FILES\SMARTSKETCH
\SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMIN
G \ORG CHARTS
Organizational Chart symbols. You can

double-click these symbols to place text.
These symbols also have special
behaviors for enhanced placement and
modification.
See Also
Organizational Chart Wizard (on page 131)
Workflow Diagram Templates

You use these templates to produce workflow diagrams.
Work flow symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Schematic
toolbar containing tools to create workflow diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.
Drawing a Simple Workflow Diagram

Drawing an Optimal Workflow Diagram

1. Place symbols.
Place symbols by using the pointer to drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer.
before placement.
placement.
disabled, allowing you to place a symbol using Grid Snap or visual alignment.
the symbol.
Press the Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first
of the symbol.
2. Connect the symbols.
130
Use Connector. When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set
Clearance on the ribbon to the minimum distance from the symbol where the first turn in
the connector occurs.
If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal mode is temporarily invoked
and the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing the connector to be
drawn with or without grid snap.
3. Place text.
Double-click symbols to edit text labels at the bottom of the symbols. To highlight
existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the
PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the numbered box that represents
the text. Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties.
Use color to modify the symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing workflow diagrams.
Content
Description
\PROGRAM
Workflow Diagram symbols. These
FILES\SMARTSKETCH\SYMBO symbols have special behaviors for
LS\DIAGRAMMING\WORKFLO enhanced placement and modification.
W DIAGRAM
See Also
Organizational Chart Wizard

Creates an organizational chart with or without personnel data. Adds a new sheet to the open
file containing your chart. You can edit the resulting symbols and connectors.
See Also
Organizational Chart Templates (on page 128)
Mechanical Engineering Templates

SmartSketch provides tools that let you create part drawings and assembly drawings that
provide information for manufacturing a product. Part drawings (or detail drawings) show each
part contained in a product. Assembly drawings show how all the parts fit together. These
drawing templates (Metric and Imperial) are available with the GD&T (Geometric Dimension and
Tolerancing) and Weld Symbols option. GD&T and Weld Symbols are symbol sets that let you
create and place GD&T and Weld Symbols into SmartSketch drawings. The symbols are placed
through a simple drag-and-drop operation from the Symbol Explorer. You can also place Text
Fields that build up the symbols via this same drag-and-drop operation. Several of the symbols
feature multiple representations that you can easily access with a simple right-mouse click on
131
your placed symbol. Once you see the representation you like, you simply left-mouse click it to
change the display of the symbol in your drawing.
GD&T symbols include input fields - such as tolerance value - which are easily accessed with a
simple double-click of your mouse; you can then edit the input field to change its value. You can
access these symbols when you open one of the Mechanical templates in SmartSketch.
To use this functionality, you must install the Mechanical Solutions (on page 26)
option.
See Also
Mechanical Templates (on page 132)
Mechanical Templates
ANSI Template - This template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes and
borders, implements the ANSI Y14.5 dimensioning standard, and provides ANSI Y14.5
GD&T and American Welding Society (AWS) Weld symbols.
ISO TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes and borders,
implements the ISO dimensioning standard, and provides ISO GD&T and Weld symbols.
The DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two templates.
When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create
precision drawings.
Part Design Workflow

Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for small
parts.
2. Sketch the part.
Draw the elements, using the tools from the Draw toolbar and the SmartSketch
Settings command. As you draw, relationships are established that capture your design
intent.
As an example the system remembers when you draw a line horizontally, vertically, or
parallel to another line and maintains that information when you modify the drawing. You do
not need to give much attention to the exact size of the part; it is often easier to dimension
the part and change the dimensions later.
3. Dimension the part.
Use SmartDimension and the other dimensioning tools to dimension the part. These
dimensions drive dimensions that can be changed to iterate your design. Redundant
dimensions are shown through the driven elements.
4. Refine the drawing.
Select individual dimensions and change the values to iterate your design.
If you plan to use the part in a mechanism or assembly, then select all of the geometry
and create a symbol with an appropriate name.
Mechanism Modeling Workflow
132
You can design mechanisms, using rigid body symbols.

You should set Maintain Relationships to On in the mechanism file.
1. Prepare the parts.
You must save each part in the mechanism as a symbol and turn Allow Rotation by
Relationships on, using the Symbol Authoring tools, so the parts can act as a rigid
body in the mechanism.
2. Start a new drawing.
You should create the mechanism in a new drawing with an appropriate sheet scale for
the whole mechanism. Set the symbol browser to the location of the components.
3. Drag the parts.
Drag the parts into their rough location on the sheet, but do not give much attention to
precision placement or orientation.
4. Connect the parts.
Use the tools on the Relationship toolbar to establish the relationships between the
parts in the mechanism. Connect
on the Draw toolbar allows you to connect a
specific location on one part to a specific location on another part. Use relationship
indicators to determine the connection type, such as end point to center point or end
point to midpoint. You can also use specific tools to establish other relationships, such
as tangent, parallel, perpendicular, colinear, concentric, and others.
5. Create driving dimensions.
Use SmartDimension
on the Dimension toolbar or other dimensioning tools to
establish the controlling dimensions for the mechanism.
6. Move the mechanism.
Select a driving dimension and change the value to move the mechanism into a specific
configuration.
Production Drafting Workflow

You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the ANSI standards.
To produce a fairly complex production drawing, set Maintain Relationships off.
Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the part. The default
scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for small parts on an A-Size sheet.
2. Draw the views.
Draw a principle view of the part using the draw tools (with precision key-in values on
the ribbon), SmartSketch Settings, and PinPoint. Draw other views using
SmartSketch Settings to align key edges from each view.
3. Annotate the drawing.
Use the text, dimensioning, GD&T symbols, and weld symbols to annotate the drawing.
Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. The following
symbol sets are provided to aid in production drafting.
Content
Description
Geometric Dimensioning Datum and feature control frames are

and Tolerancing (GD&T) provided according to the ANSI Y14.5 or
Symbols
ISO standard. Components of each frame
are provided as symbols with appropriate
drag points to fit into the frames.
133
Weld Symbols
The weld reference line and components

are provided according to the American
Welding Society (AWS) or ISO standard.
To use this functionality, you must install the Mechanical Solutions (on page 26)
option.
See Also
Process Diagraming Templates

Process application templates (both Imperial and Metric) present industry-standard sheet sizes
and properties so that you can produce:
Control Loop Diagrams This template includes more than 200 control loop-specific
symbols. The symbols are grouped in logical categories such as Controllers, Flow Elements,
Indicators, Recorders, Switches, Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips and Transmitters.
Process Block Diagrams This template includes 24 typical block diagram symbols. Each
symbol has a double- click text action that lets you enter the text needed for each particular
process in the diagram.
Ortho Piping Diagrams This template delivers more than 850 ortho piping symbols,
grouped by size and function. Each size contains 150# and 300# valves and valve
assemblies, flanges, elbows, tees, and actuators. By using pre-defined line and double-line
styles that depict the sizes and types of pipes, you can create both associative and
non-associative piping layouts.
PFDs and P&IDs The Process Flow and P&ID templates are grouped by ANSI, ISO, and
Intergraph symbol standards. The ANSI symbol set contains approximately 150 symbols; the
ISO symbol set contains approximately 240 symbols; the Intergraph PFD symbol set
contains more than 370 symbols, and the Intergraph P&ID symbol set contains more than
860 symbols. Many Intergraph process symbols have a set of pre-selected attributes that
can be edited via the Attribute Viewer (you can add additional attributes to any symbol).
Every pipeline, instrumentation line, and symbol can have SmartLabels applied to add and
display attribute information. Based on these attributes, reports- such as Vessel Reports,
Pump/Compressor Reports, Heat Exchanger Reports, and Stream Reports- can be easily
generated using delivered report macros. You simply drag-and-drop these macros into the
diagram just as you would any other symbol in the Symbol Explorer.
Plot Plans This template delivers 36 parametric symbols, which include Annotation,
Equipment, Roads, Site, and Vehicles directories. When used with the Image Integrator
option for SmartSketch, raster images can then be referenced and scaled to the correct size
and orientation, and vector graphics can be drawn on top to accurately represent the new
facilities.
To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions (on page 26)
option.
See Also
Ortho Piping Templates (on page 135)
PFD and P&ID Templates (on page 136)
Plot Plan Templates (on page 138)
Process Block Diagramming Templates (on page 139)
134
Ortho Piping Templates

You use this precision template to produce orthographic piping drawings, using common sized
components and pipes.
Ortho Piping TemplateThis template has imperial units in feet and inches, with a
precision of 1/32. The sheet scale is set to 1/2 = 1.
ANSI, ISO, DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are available in the template. The default
dimension type is ANSI. When you open this template, the Draw toolbar appears, containing
tools to help you create precision drawings.
Ortho Piping Workflow 1 (Small Layouts)

You can create small layouts with Maintain Relationships set on.
Select Midpoint from SmartSketch Settings.
Set up the sheet.
1. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1/2 = 1.
2. From the Symbol Explorer, select the size of piping to be placed. A list of folders containing
appropriate components for that size of pipe is displayed.
Place a line.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous
2. On the ribbon, select the appropriate line style. Click to place the line.
3. Drag one of the piping components into the document close to the end of the pipe where it is
placed. Example 150# Gate Valve with flanges. If the orientation of the valve is not correct
relative to the pipe, use the left or right arrow keys to rotate as needed. Click the symbol.
4. To display the Relationships toolbar, click Relationships
5. On the Relationships toolbar, click Connect

.
6. Identify the center on one end of the valve as the first point to connect to. You can see the
midpoint indicator as the pointer moves over the center of the end of the valve.
7. Identify the end of the line placed previously as the other end to connect. The valve moves
to the end of the pipe. If Maintain Relationships is set on, the valve remains connected when
modifications are made.
8. Place another line from the other end of the valve. Select the midpoint of the end of the
valve from which to start. Place the line an approximate length.
9. From the 4 Els directory select the 90 degree elbow and drag it into the file. Use the rotate
keys to rotate to a correct orientation. Connect the midpoint of the elbow to the end point of
the 4 line.
10. Repeat the process as needed until the layout is complete.
11. Place dimensions between key components of the layout.
Workflow method 1 is recommended for small layouts because the constraints needed to
handle a large piping layout may make the system too slow for practical use.
Ortho Piping Workflow 2 (Large Layouts)

You should create large piping layouts with Maintain Relationships set off.
Be sure to select Midpoint from SmartSketch Settings.
1. To set up the sheet, select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the
piping layout. The default scale is 1/2 = 1.
135
2. From the Symbol Explorer, select the size of components to be placed. A list of folders
containing appropriate components for that size of pipe is displayed.
3. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous. Draw a single line, centerline, layout of
the piping system to be drawn. Placing centerlines on a different layer is recommended.
4. From the Symbol Explorer, select the proper sized components to be placed, and drag the
components onto the line.
5. When the components are placed in their proper locations, turn off the centerline layer.
6. Select Place Doubleline, a flyout on the Line/Arc Continuous. Set the placement option
on the toolbar to Center Primary Line; then select a width.
7. Use relationship indicators to locate the midpoint of one of the components, and click the left
mouse button. Use midpoint to locate the end of the next component that has been placed,
and right-click. A doubleline representing the size of the pipe is placed.
8. Continue connecting components in this manner until all components are connected.
To show pipes crossing, the doubleline representing the pipe on top can be filled or
patterned with a blank color. The pipe that is to be displayed below can be selected and
pushed to the bottom in the display. To select and push the pipe to the bottom, click
Send to Back on the Change toolbar.
You can place pipes using the method in Workflow 1 with Line/Arc Continuous instead
of using Place Doubleline.
The following symbol sets aid in Ortho Piping layouts.
Content
Description
Orthographic Piping Symbols Sizes

1,2,3,4,6,8,10,12 Inches
Each Size contains the

following: 150# Valves 300#
Valves Actuators Annotation
Els Olet Reducers Welds and
2 Inch sizes also include 600#
and 800# valves.
option.
See Also
PFD and P&ID Templates

You use these schematic templates to produce process flow diagrams according to accepted
industry standards.
PFD (Intergraph) Template - This template is set up to be a schematic template to create
process flow diagrams. The default symbol set is a subset of the Intergraph SP2D symbol
set. The delivered set draws most PFDs. If you need other Intergraph symbols, you can
copy them from the P&ID (Intergraph) symbol set.
PFD ANSI Template - This template is set up to be a schematic template to create process
flow diagrams based on ANSI Process Flow Standards. ASA Z32.2.3-1949.
PFD ISO Template - This template is set up to be a schematic template to create process
flow diagrams based on ISO Process Flow Standards. (General RulesFlow Diagrams for
Process Plants - ISO 10628)
136
P&ID (Intergraph) Template - This template is set up to be a schematic template to create

process flow diagrams and P&ID diagrams. The symbol set is the Intergraph SP2D symbol
set, consisting of approximately 1000 symbols. You can reconfigure the symbol locations
and directories to your specification for easy location.
PFD and P&ID Workflow

You should create schematic drawings with Maintain Relationships cleared.
Set up the sheet.
1. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the schematic drawing.
The default scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for the symbol sizes.
Place symbols.
1. Drag in the major components of the PFD and place them at locations on the sheet.
2. These components usually include vessels, pumps, and heat exchangers.
3. You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:
Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the template. When you release
the right mouse button to place the symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp
Here, and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button. Place the first instance of the
symbol while holding down Ctrl. Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release
Ctrl and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
Enter attribute information for the individual components.
1. To enter data in the attributes, select the symbol and add the information in the Attribute
Viewer.
Attach nozzles to major equipment.
1. Nozzles are automatically aligned and can be placed anywhere on the major equipment.
2. From the Schematic toolbar select Connector.
3. Connect the major components together at the locations you want on each symbol.
Each symbol has predefined connect points; however, the connector can connect to any
graphic location on the symbol.
The connector routes itself away from the original symbol and toward the target symbol.
You can attach connectors to connectors.
A connector being placed or modified can have its starting or ending point anywhere along
another connector.
Set connector flow direction at any time.
1. There are two methods to set the flow direction:
When you place the connector, you can use the options on the connector toolbar to select
the starting and ending terminator for the connector.
You can drag an arrowhead symbol from the browser and connect it to the end of the
connector.
Drag inline symbol components such as valves onto the connectors.
1. The valve symbols have automated aligning turned on. This means that the valve
automatically aligns to the direction of the connector.
2. Note that the valve is placed on top of the connector and hides the portion of the connector
that the valve covers.
To associate a text box with a symbol that does not already have associated text.
1. Double-click the symbol.
137
2. Then, type in text.
Moving the symbol causes the text to move and maintain its relative location to the
symbol.
If a symbol already has associated text, double-clicking the symbol allows you to edit
the text.
3. After you have placed components and connectors, you can modify the symbols and/or
connectors by selecting and dragging them to a new location.
You can select and drag multiple symbols to a new location.
You can select and modify single connectors.
You can adjust segments of connectors to new locations or move and reattach
endpoints.
The following symbol sets aid in schematic drawings of PFDs and P&IDs.
Content
Description
P&ID (Intergraph)
Intergraph Symbol set containing symbols

needed for creating PFDs, P&IDs, and Material
Handling drawings.
PFD (Intergraph)
Symbol set that is a subset of the P&ID

(Intergraph) set. Symbols are adequate to create
most PFDs. Other symbols from P&ID or other
symbol sets can be copied to the PFD directory
and are displayed for selection.
PFD (ISO Standard) Symbol set based on the ISO 10628 standard.
General rules for flow diagrams for process
plants.
PFD (ANSI)
Symbol set based on ASA Z32.2.3-1949 ASME

Y32.2.2.3 Graphical symbols for pipe fittings,
valves and piping.
option.
See Also
Plot Plan Templates

You use these precision templates to produce plot plan and equipment layout drawings.
Plot Plan (Imperial) TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI
sheet sizes and borders.
Plot Plan (Metric) TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes
and borders, and implements the ISO dimensioning.
The DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two templates. When
you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create
precision drawings.
138
Plot Plan Workflow
You can draw plot plans associatively or non-associatively. The default behavior is
non-associative. To draw the plot plan associatively, set Maintain Relationships on.
Set up the sheet.
1. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default sheet scale is 1 in:100 ft. for imperial and
1mm:1000mm for metric.
Sketch the layout.
2. Draw the geometry for roads, buildings or equipment, using the tools from the Draw toolbar
and SmartSketch Settings. As you draw, relationships are established that capture your
design intent. As an example, with Maintain Relationships set on, the software remembers
when you draw a line horizontally, vertically, or parallel to another line and maintains that
information when you modify the drawing.
Drag any symbols that are needed for the drawing.
3. You can place symbols precisely, relative to other components using PinPoint or the
precision Move.
Dimension the part.
4. Use SmartDimension and the other dimensioning tools to dimension the layout. If Maintain
Relationships is set on, these dimensions are driving dimensions that can be changed to
iterate your design. Redundant dimensions are shown through the driven elements.
Finish the drawing.
5. Select individual dimensions and change the values to iterate your design.
The following symbol sets aid in construction of plot plan drawings.
Content
Description
Plot Plan
Assorted symbols to aid in the construction of Plot Plans.

Symbols include direction arrow, buildings, vessels, tanks,
vehicles, and others. Some of the symbols are parametric
and can be changed in the content explorer.
option.
See Also
Process Block Diagramming Templates

You use these templates to produce process block diagrams.
Metric Template - This template has metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO
Basic Diagramming symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these two templates. The
Schematic toolbar containing tools to create diagrams appears on the left of the drawing
window.
139
Setting Up a Process Block Diagram
You can create block diagrams with Maintain Relationships set on or off. It is suggested
that you accept the default, Maintain Relationships set off.
Set up the sheet.
1. Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to draw. The
Prepare to draw.
2. Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid Display, and
Grid Snap. For more grid options, click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set the
grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.
Drawing a Simple Diagram

Drawing an Optimal Diagram

1. Place basic diagramming symbols by using the pointer to drag from the Symbol Explorer.
2. Place multiple copies of a symbol by using the right mouse button to drag and by selecting
Stamp Here.
3. While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on the keyboard to
rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to select
different drag points on the symbol before placement.
4. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled,
allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment.
6. When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set Clearance: to the minimum
distance from the symbol so that the first turn in the connector appears.
7. When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the direction you want
the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears the symbol, suggested targets for the
connector appear.
8. The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol geometry. If you
press Alt while drawing a connector, the alignment indicators are temporarily be disabled,
allowing the connector to be drawn with or without grid snap.
Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol.
9. The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for properties editing or
moving, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears.
10. Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the
highlighted text to edit properties.
11. To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Then with the pointer drag the
text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale.
140
Finish the diagram.
12. Use fills and modify the elements in symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing diagrams.
Content
Description
Process Block
Diagrams
Common Basic diagramming symbols. You can

double-click these symbols to place text. These
symbols also have special behaviors for
enhanced placement and modification.
option.
See Also
Technical Drawing Templates

You use these templates to produce technical drawings, sketches, and illustrations.
A set of simple drawing elements is also available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates.
The Draw toolbar containing tools to create precision drawings appears on the left of the
drawing window.
Drawing/Sketching Workflow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Set up the sheet

Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to enough paper space to draw.
The default scale is 1:1.
Draw elements
Use the tools on the Draw toolbar and SmartSketch Settings, or drag symbols available in
the Symbol Explorer.
Place multiple copies of symbols by using the right mouse button to drag and by selecting
Stamp Here, or by pressing Ctrl while dragging a symbol from the Symbol Explorer.
If Maintain Relationships is set on, relationships between drawn objects are established.
As an example the system remembers when you draw a line horizontally, vertically, or
parallel to another line and maintains that information when you modify the drawing.
You can use Trim, Extend to Next, and Fillet to efficiently modify drawn geometry.
Annotate the drawing
Use text, dimensioning, and labels to annotate the drawing. Double-clicking on any drawn
object (except fills, dimensions, and leaders) creates an associative text box. Note that text
is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale.
Finish the drawing
Use patterns and fills and modify the symbols to enhance the drawing.
141
option.
See Also
Title Block Templates

The Title Block templates delivered with the software include a variety of standard ANSI and
ISO paper sizes with inserted title block fields. The title block is generally displayed at the
bottom of a drawing template. It can include signatures, revision and issue information, and
other properties associated with the drawing.
You add drawing properties, such as revision information or issue requests, to the title block
using the Insert Title Block Field or Title Block Properties commands when editing a
template
The title block templates provide the following:
Imperial templates - These templates have imperial units in decimal inches, ANSI sheet
sizes, ANSI or ASA dimensioning, and Arial, ANSI, or Architectural text.
Metric templates - These templates have metric units in millimeters, ISO sheet sizes, ISO
dimensioning, and Arial or ISO text.
142
Create a Template
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click File > New.

On the File New dialog box, select the Template to use as the basis for your new file.
Click OK to create the new file.
Complete any changes to be included as part of the template.
See Also
Save a Document as a Template

1. Click File > Save As Template.
2. In the Save As Template dialog box, specify the directory in which to save the new
template.
3. In the File Name box, type a unique name for the new template.
You can use the extension .igr. It is not necessary to use a different file extension for
templates.
By default, the software saves templates in the Template directory located in the directory
where you installed the software. You can, however, save your template to a UNC path.
You can change the default directory where templates are saved by selecting Options on
the Tools menu and setting the directory that you want on the File Locations tab of the
Options dialog box.
See Also
Save as Template Command

Saves a document as a template. The template is stored in the TEMPLATE directory located in
the directory where you installed the software. This command is available only on the File menu.
See Also
143
144
SECTION 5
Drawing Basic Elements

An element is any line, circle, or other part of the drawing. The Draw toolbar on the left side of
the drawing sheet contains most of the buttons that you can use to draw any type of basic
geometric elementfreeform shapes, lines, arcs, circles, and so forth.
You can place most basic elements with just a few clicks. For example, if you want to place a
line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous
on the Draw toolbar. Then, click two points to
indicate where to start and finish the line. If you do not want to place another line, you can
right-click to end the operation.
Right-clicking ends most operations in the software.
You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous
and then clicking and dragging
the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet. With this
method, you drag the pointer as if it were a pen. You can draw most elements, such as
rectangles, circles, and arcs, with this method, sometimes called mouse-down drawing. The
mouse-down method is typically used to place most elements in conceptual sketching and
modification.
If you want to place a precise line, click Line/Arc Continuous , type values into the ribbon
that appears, and then press Enter. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place the line.
This method, sometimes called mouse-up drawing, is typically used for precision placement and
when you want to draw elements that are related to each other.
In some cases, you might want to click points on the drawing sheet and type values in the ribbon
to place an element. For example, you can click Line/Arc Continuous
and then type 3.0 in
the Length box on the ribbon box and press ENTER to lock the length value.
When a line that is three inches long appears next to the pointer, you can click anywhere on the
drawing sheet to indicate where to place one end of the line. Then, you move the line around
and click again to set the line's orientation angle.
145

If you do not like the results of what you drew, you can click Undo on the Main toolbar. If you
want to repeat an action, click Redo on the Main toolbar.
See Also
Drawing FreeForm Shapes (on page 180)
Drawing Lines (on page 146)
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons (on page 174)
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses (on page 160)
Drawing Lines
If you want to place a line, you click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar. Then, you click
a point on the drawing sheet to indicate where to start the line. You click a second point to
indicate where to end the line. If you do not want to place another line, right-click to end the
operation.
You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous and then clicking and dragging the
pointer. When you release the mouse, the line appears on the drawing sheet.
If you want to place a precise line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous, type values into the
ribbon that appears, and then press Enter. You then click on the drawing sheet to place the line.
You can also use a combination of clicks and ribbon input to place the line. For example, you
can type a line length in the ribbon box to lock the length value and then set the line's orientation
angle graphically. You can set the color and line type by clicking a style in the Style list box.
See Also
Draw a Line (on page 146)
Drawing Doublelines (on page 158)
Draw a Line with FreeSketch (on page 182)
Draw a Line
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous .
2. Click the point where you want the line to begin.
3. Click the point where you want the line to end. This action defines the length and rotation
angle of the line.
Right-click to end the line.
To draw a series of connected lines, click at the point where you want each line
segment to end, and then right- click.
If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing again.
146
Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon bar. You can
also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw a line, you can drag the pointer to draw a
line.
You can press ESC to end a line or a line segment.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
When you use Point On on the SmartSketch dialog box, you can draw a line tangent to two
curved elements. First, click the curved element, then move the pointer through the tangent
intent zone on the first element. Use the SmartSketch dialog box options to establish a
tangent relationship to the other element. If you do not use the tangent intent zone, the line
connects to the elements, but is not tangent to them.
You can use relationships to make an end point of a line tangent or perpendicular to the
key point or end point of another element.
You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a
line.
See Also
Line/Arc Continuous Command (on page 147)
Line Ribbon (on page 147)
Line/Arc Continuous Command

Draws one line or a series of connected lines. When you draw a series of lines, the second
point of one line is the first point of the next line.
You can also draw a continuous series of lines and arcs that can be perpendicular or tangent to
each other. You can create an open or closed shape by drawing lines and arcs in any
combination. The last point of the line or arc is the first point of the next line or arc.
The Line/Arc Continuous command starts in line mode by default. If you want to start by
drawing an arc, press SHIFT + A. While drawing, you can toggle between the two modes by
pressing SHIFT + A for arc mode or pressing SHIFT + L for line mode.
See Also
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs (on page 166)
Line Ribbon (on page 147)
Line Ribbon
Style Sets the drawing style.
Line Color Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box.
Line Type Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width Sets the line width.
Line Switches the drawing mode from arc to line.
Arc Switches the drawing mode from line to arc.
Length Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values.
Angle Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values. A positive value
is counterclockwise from the X axis, and a negative value is clockwise from the X axis.
147

See Also
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs (on page 166)
Draw a Point
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Point
2. Click to place a point.
Instead of clicking to place the point, you can type values in the coordinate boxes on the
ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input. The coordinate
origin is located at the bottom left corner of the window.
point.
See Also
Point Command (on page 148)
Point Command
Draws a point. The point is displayed as a filled circle.
See Also
Draw a Point (on page 148)
Point Ribbon (on page 148)
Point Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
X Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
See Also
Point Command (on page 148)
Draw a Point (on page 148)
148
Drawing Connectors
You can use a connector to join two elements together. Connector , located on both the
Schematic and Draw toolbars, provides a convenient way to draw schematic diagrams and
other types of drawings.
Connector allows you to place connectors anywhere that you need them. You can connect
lines, circles, symbols, or points in free space.
Some symbols are created with connect points. When you attach a connector to a connect
point, the connector automatically attaches to the point at a predefined angle. Otherwise, the
connector locates and attaches to a keypoint or point along any elements in the symbol.
The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs.
You can also modify the connector after you place it by inserting or moving a line segment,
inserting or moving a vertex, or moving an element with a connector.
There are special connector styles that you can use in your diagram. On the Connector
ribbon, you can click the style that you want in the Style box. You can then draw a connector
that displays the line style that you selected. For example, in documents based on the Process
Block Diagram template, you can select Future and Phantom in the Line Style box on the
ribbon. When you select Future and draw a connector, the connector appears as a dashed line.
When you select Phantom and draw a connector, it appears grayed out; the connector is
highlighted when you point to it.
149

Besides line styles, you can also select line start and line end terminators on the Connector
ribbon. The following connectors display some of the different types of terminators that you can
apply.
See Also
Connector Command (on page 156)
Connector Ribbon (on page 157)
Place a Connector (on page 150)
Connector Drawing Elements

Connector on the Schematic toolbar allows you to place connectors anywhere that you need
them. You can connect lines, circles, symbols, or points in free space.
There are special connector styles that you can use in the diagram. Some examples in the
Process Flow template include Primary Line, Secondary Line, and Electric Signal. On the
Connector ribbon, you can click the style that you want in the Style box.
On the Connector ribbon, you can also select the line start and line end terminators that you
want. The following connectors display some of the different types of terminators that you can
apply.
Some symbols are created with connect points. When you attach a connector to a connect
point, the connector automatically attaches to the point at a predefined angle. Otherwise, the
connector locates and attaches to a keypoint or point along any elements in the symbol.
The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs.
If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the connector attaches to a connect point at
any angle.
See Also
Attach a Connector to an Object (on page 154)
Connect Two Objects (on page 155)
Place a Connector
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector .
2. Click to begin drawing the connector or move the pointer over the element to highlight the
potential key points or connect points.
150

The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with
Xs. The active point along the element is a filled red circle. You can connect to any point on
the element.
If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the connector attaches to a connect point at
any angle.
3. After you select a starting point, the direction in which you move from that point determines
the angle at which the connector is drawn.
The following picture shows that the pointer has been moved away from the initial point in a
downward direction.
You can generate two or more line segments with each click. When the pointer crosses
the current line segment, the software automatically generates another segment.
The following graphic shows a connector with three line segments although you clicked
only once.
To switch between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal
line segments, click Diagonal Mode (Alt).
If the element itself is rotated, the takeoff angle is adjusted appropriately so that the
connector is perpendicular to the element.
If you are connecting to a symbol, the connect point may have a pre-defined angle to
which the connector must connect.
To create a connector path
After you select a point to move from, you can click points to force a connector to go to a
certain path.
To end the connector

You can end a connector in the following ways:
After you place one or more connector line segments, right click to end the connector.
To attach the connector to another element, move the pointer over the element to display
the potential connect points. However, you can connect to any point on the element.
151
When the point closest to the pointer is highlighted, you can click to define the end of the
connector. The pointer snaps to connect points.
The software calculates the angle for the ending the connection point, based on how you
approach the element.
If the calculated angle is not correct when you move the pointer away from the point, you
can move the pointer back over the point and try again.
As you drag connected elements or symbols, the connections are maintained.
See Also
Modify a Connector
To modify a connector, select the connector, using the Select Tool. You can then change the
connector in several ways.
To insert a line segment
152
To insert a line segment into the connector, click Insert Segment Mode (Shift) on the
ribbon, or press Shift.
The pointer changes to a directional arrow when the command is in Insert Segment mode,
and the pointer is positioned over a connector segment.
Drag the pointer diagonally to define the shape of the segment. The following graphic shows
the connector dynamics display as you drag the pointer (A).
When you release the drag, the segment is inserted as part of the connector.

To move a line segment
To move a line segment, first move the pointer over a horizontal line segment or a vertical
line segment. Then click the segment and drag it to the location you want.
To insert a vertex
To insert a vertex, first click Diagonal Mode (Alt) on the ribbon, or press Alt.
Move the pointer over a horizontal line segment or a vertical line segment to which you want
to add the vertex, and drag the segment to a new location. The pointer changes to a
directional arrow. As you drag the segment, the software inserts a vertex. In the following
graphic a vertex has been inserted in a horizontal line segment.
To move a vertex
To move a vertex, move the pointer over the vertex. Then drag the vertex to move it.
When Diagonal mode is not active, you can move the vertex only in a horizontal or vertical
direction. The following graphic shows that moving the vertex (A) results in line segments
that are horizontal or vertical.
When Diagonal mode is active, you can move the vertex in any direction. This action means
that connector line segments are not limited to horizontal or vertical orientation. The
153

following graphic shows that moving the vertex (A) results in line segments that are no
longer horizontal or vertical.
To move an element with a connector
To move an element that is connected, select the element with the connector and move it.
The connector moves with the element.
To find out how to move an element, click Related Topics.
To modify end points
You modify end points to move a connector from one connect point to another or to move a
connector point to another location.
To move a connector, first select the connector. Then click the connector and drag it to a
connect point or another location.
After you connect a point, you can drag it to another connect point.
See Also
Format a Connector
1. Select a connector.
2. On the Connector ribbon, set the options you want.
On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Element Properties dialog box, set
the options you want.
You can also format a connector before you attach it by setting options on the ribbon.
Changing the current style settings on the ribbon or Properties dialog box overrides the line
style formats.
To change a line style, click the Style list on the ribbon, and select a style.
To change clearance, type a value in the Clearance box on the ribbon.
See Also
Attach a Connector to an Object

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector
154

2. In the Connector ribbon bar, set the line start and end terminators.
3. Pass the pointer over the target object to highlight the potential keypoints or connect points.
The connector can attach at keypoints on the symbol or predefined connect points. The
connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs.
4. Click the symbol to place the connector.
The connector attaches to the connect point that is nearest to the point that you clicked.
Otherwise, the connector attaches to a keypoint or any point along the elements in the symbol.
See Also
Connector Drawing Elements (on page 150)
Modify a Connector (on page 152)
Merge Connectors
1. Select two connectors.
The first connector selected drives the manner in which the merge occurs such
that the properties of the first connector selected will be applied to the second connector.
2. Click the Merge Connectors button
into a single connector.
on the Connectors ribbon. The connectors merge
If more than two connectors are selected, the Merge Connectors command is disabled
on the Connectors ribbon.
See Also
Reverse Connector Direction (on page 155)
Reverse Connector Direction

1. Select a connector.
2. From the shortcut menu, select Reverse Direction.
Right-click on the selected connector to display the shortcut menu.
See Also
Merge Connectors (on page 155)
Connect Two Objects

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector .
4. Click to start the connector at a predefined connect point or keypoint.
The direction in which you move from the start point determines the angle at which the
connector is drawn.
If the object itself is rotated, the takeoff angle is adjust appropriately so that the
connector is perpindicular to the object.
155
If you press the ALT key while drawing a connector, the connector attaches to a
connect point at any angle.
5. Pass the pointer over the second target object.
6. Click to end the connector at a predefined connect point or keypoint.
If one of the connected objects is moved the connection and clearance is maintained.
See Also
Split a Connector
1. Click a connector.
2. Click Split Connector
on the Connector ribbon.
3. Click the point at which to split the connector.
When you click within the range of a symbol on the connector, the software trims the two
resulting connectors to the symbol's range. If the symbol has connect points, the software
attaches the resulting connectors to the symbol at the connect points. This command
displays the connect points located on a symbol.
Split connector should not be used to trim a single connector to the edge of a symbol. In this
instance, the connector should be modified directly with its end handles.
The Clearance value on the Connector ribbon will determine the shortest length of a
connector. Thus, if one end of a split connector is shorter than the clearance value, that
segment length will be increased to match the value.
See Also
Reverse Connector Direction (on page 155)
Merge Connectors (on page 155)
Connector Command
Connects two elements together.
Using a connector, you can connect to an element by connecting to:
Key points. Hollow gray circles indicate potential key points (such as endpoint, midpoint, and
others) on an element, when the element is located by the pointer.
Connect points. Hollow red circles indicate potential connect points on a symbol.
Any point on an element. A solid red filled circle is displayed when the pointer locates an
element at a point other than its key points.
You must click the Connector command before you see the points for connecting on the
element.
You can also access this command on the Schematic toolbar.
See Also
156
Connector Ribbon
When you click Connector on the Draw toolbar, you can place a connector. After you select a
connector, you can change it.
Most of the options on the Connector ribbon are the same whether you are placing or modifying
a connector. The only difference occurs when you select a single connector or multiple
connectors for modification. When you select a single connector, the Split button becomes
active. When you select multiple connectors, the Merge button becomes active. When you
modify a connector, an additional option is available to insert a segment into the selected
connector. This last option is Insert Segment Mode (Alt+S).
Ribbon Box Options

Style - Sets the line style for the connector.
Line Color - Sets the line color for the connector. You can click More to define custom
colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 374).
Line Type - Sets the connector line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width for the connector.
Line Start Terminator - Sets the terminator for star ting the connector.
Line End Terminator - Sets the terminator for ending the connector.
Terminators are compatible with any of the linear styles.
Diagonal Mode (Alt) - Allows you to either place or modify a connector with diagonal
segments.
Placing a Connector
Switches the connector placement between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or
drawing diagonal line segments when you place a connector.
To alternate between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments or drawing diagonal
line segments, you also can press Alt.
Modifying a Connector
Inserts a vertex in a line segment of the connector when you are modifying a selected
connector.
This option is active only when you click Diagonal Mode (Alt), or when you press Alt.
Insert Segment Mode (ALT+S) - Inserts line segments into the connector. This option is
available only when you are modifying a connector.
This option is active when you click Insert Segment Mode (ALT+S), or when you press
ALT + S.
Split Connector Mode (Shift) - Splits the connector at the selected point. This option is
available only when you are modifying a connector.
This option is active when you click Split Connector (Shift), or when you press Shift.
Merge Connectors - Merges two connectors into a single connector, adding a segment
between the connectors if necessary. This option is only available when you select two
connectors.
Clearance - Specifies the amount of space that the software maintains between the connector
and the connected element (also known as range avoidance).
157

See Also
Drawing Doublelines
You can use Place Doubleline
to place a doubleline as you draw and clean corners as you
place the lines. This command is very useful in drawing an architectural floor plan for a house or
a factory.
Place Doubleline
also miters joints and trims as it you draw. It puts endcaps on single lines.
On the Place Doubleline

toolbar, you can define the thickness of the doubleline and
whether you draw the doubleline from the left, right, or center.
See Also
Place Doubleline Command (on page 159)
Place a Doubleline Precisely (on page 658)
Draw a Doubleline (on page 158)
Draw a Doubleline
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Place Doubleline
.
2. Click the point to begin the doubleline.
3. Click the point to end the doubleline. This action defines the length and rotation angle of the
doubleline.
Right-click to end the doubleline.
To draw a series of connected doublelines, click the points to end each doubleline
segment, and then right-click.
158
PinPoint, in conjunction with Place Doubleline, allows you to place the doubleline relative
to a known point.
You can use driven dimensions to determine distances between doubleline elements.
Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon to place precise
lines. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
You can press Esc to end a doubleline or a doubleline segment.
You can use the software to make an end point of a doubleline tangent or perpendicular to
the key point or end point of another element.
doubleline.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software creates relationships between the endpoints
of the lines.
If Maintain Relationships is set, you can use Selection to select portions of the drawing to
be moved while the relationships are maintained.
When you use Point On, you can draw a doubleline tangent to two curved elements. First,
click the curved element, then move the pointer through the tangent intent zone on the first
element. Use the software to establish a tangent relationship to the other element. If you do

not use the tangent intent zone, the line connects to the elements, but is not tangent to
them.
See Also
Place Doubleline Command (on page 159)
Place Doubleline Ribbon (on page 159)
Place Doubleline Command

Draws a doubleline or a series of connected doublelines. When you draw a series of lines,
the second point of one line is the first point of the next line.
This button is most effective if you use it in a document based on one of the architectural
templates in the AEC category.
This button appears on a set of fly-out buttons. If you cannot locate this button, click and
hold Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar.
See Also
Place Doubleline Ribbon (on page 159)
Place Doubleline Ribbon

Style - Sets the drawing style.
Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Colors dialog box (on page 374).
Line Type - Sets the drawing line type.
Line Width - Sets the line width.
Left Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the left side.
Right Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the right side.
Center Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from the center.
Length - Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values.
Angle - Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values. A positive value is
counterclockwise from the x axis, and a negative value is clockwise from the x axis.
Thickness - Determines the thickness of the doubleline. This thickness is the distance between
the doublelines. To change the width of each of the individual lines, use Line Width.
See Also
159
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses

If you want to draw a circle, you can click Circle by Center Point
on the Draw toolbar. Then,
you click a point to define the center of the circle. To place the circle, you click a second point to
define the distance of the circle radius from the first point. You can use other commands on the
Draw toolbar to place arcs, ellipses, and other types of circles.
To place circles, click Circle by Center Point

and while holding the mouse button down,
draw freehand. After you close the loop, the circle appears.
You can also place a precise circle by clicking Circle by Center Point
and then typing
values into the ribbon. After you press ENTER, a circle appears around the pointer. You can
then place the defined circle by clicking the point you want on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Circle Ribbon (on page 161)
Curve Ribbon (on page 171)
Ellipse Ribbon (on page 173)
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle by 3 Points
.
2. Click three points on the circumference of the circle.
160
Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line and
the software automatically changes it to a circle.
Instead of clicking to define the circumference of the circle, you can type values on the
ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input.
circle.
See Also
Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 161)
Circle by 3 Points Command

Draws a circle using three points that define the circumference.
See Also
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points (on page 160)
Circle Ribbon
Sets options for placing circles.
Colors dialog box.
Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle.
Radius Sets the radius.
See Also
Circle by Center Point Command (on page 162)
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements (on page 162)
Draw a Circle by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle by Center Point
2. Click the location where you want the center point.
161

3. Click to define the radius.
Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type values on the ribbon bar. You can also
use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line and
circle.
See Also
Circle by Center Point Command

Draws a circle using a center point and radius.
See Also
Draw a Circle by Center Point (on page 161)
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Circle .
2. Move the pointer along an element until the software recognizes a point on element
relationship or a key point.
3. Click to make the circle tangent.
4. Do one of the following to define the radius:
Move the pointer until the circle is in the position that you want, and then click.
Move the pointer until the software recognizes a tangent or key point relationship with
another element, and then click.
162
Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can draw a diagonal line, and
You can define the radius first to make a circle tangent to the first element, but not fixed in
one position on it.
After you type a value in the Diameter or Radius box, move the pointer along the element
until the software recognizes a point on element relationship, and then click. The circle is
then displayed dynamically, and you can move it along the element freely until you make it
tangent to another element or key point.
circle.
If you use Tangent Circle when Point On and End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box
are not set, you can draw a non-tangent circle by clicking two points that represent the
diameter.
If you use Tangent Circle when Point On and End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box
are not set, you can draw a non-tangent circle by clicking two points that represent the
diameter.
See Also
Tangent Circle Command

Draws a circle tangent to one or two elements.
See Also
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements (on page 162)
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by 3 Points .
2. Click the location to begin the sweep of the arc.
Click the location that you want as midpoint of the arc, and then click the location that
you want to end the sweep of the arc.
163
Click the location that you want to end the sweep of the arc, and then click the location
that you want as midpoint of the arc.
Use the intent zones at the first and second points to specify if the third point is
between the first two or beyond one of the first two.
Instead of clicking to define the sweep and the midpoint, you can type values on the ribbon.
You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can draw a diagonal line and
the software automatically changes it to an arc.
You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an
arc.
See Also
Arc by 3 Points Command (on page 165)
Arc Ribbon (on page 165)
164
Arc by 3 Points Command

Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines an end point. You can then either
define a point on the arc and then the end point, or the end point and then a point on the arc.
The end points are not tangent or perpendicular to other elements.
See Also
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points (on page 163)
Arc Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
Sweep Sets the sweep angle.
See Also
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements (on page 166)
Draw an Arc by Center Point (on page 165)
Draw an Arc by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by Center Point
2. Click the point where you want the center point.
3. Click where you want to begin and end the sweep of the arc.
You can change the arc direction by moving the pointer.
Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type a value on the ribbon bar. You can also
Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can draw a diagonal line and
the software automatically changes it to an arc.
You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit an
arc.
165

See Also
Arc by Center Point Command

Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines the center of the arc and the next two
points define the sweep.
See Also
Draw an Arc by Center Point (on page 165)
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements

You must set the Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box to draw arcs that
are tangent to other elements. You must set SmartSketch Tangent on the SmartSketch dialog
box to draw an arc tangent to two elements. You can set these options by clicking SmartSketch
Settings on the Tools menu.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Arc
.
2. Click an element to which you want the new arc to be tangent. You can click the end point of
a line or curved element, or any point on the element.
3. Move the pointer through one of the intent zones displayed at the position you just clicked.
If the command dynamics show an arc perpendicular to the existing element, move the
pointer back to the intent zones and exit through a different quadrant.
4. When the command dynamics show an arc that is tangent to the first element, move the
pointer to a position where the software recognizes the tangent relationship with another
element and then click.
Instead of clicking to define the radius and sweep of the arc, you can type values on the
ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input.
arc.
If Maintain Relationships on the SmartSketch dialog box is set, the software places
relationship handles.
See Also
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs

2. This command starts in line mode by default. If you want to start by drawing an arc, press
SHIFT + A.
166

3. Click the location to begin the line or arc.
4. Click the location to end the line or arc. You can use intent zones to specify if you want to
draw a tangent or perpendicular arc.
5. If you are drawing an arc, click a point on the arc to define the radius.
After you draw an arc, the command switches back to line mode automatically. You
can switch back to arc mode if you want to draw another arc.
6. Continue drawing lines or arcs, pressing SHIFT + A to switch to arc mode and SHIFT + L to
switch to line mode.
7. Right-click to finish.
Instead of pressing SHIFT + L or SHIFT + A to switch modes, you can use Line or Arc on
the ribbon.
You can make the first line or arc tangent or perpendicular to an element. First, move the
pointer to the element to which you want to be tangent. Click when the software recognizes
a Point On the relationship. Then use the intent zones to indicate if you want the line to be
tangent or perpendicular.
Instead of clicking locations on the drawing sheet, you can type values on the ribbon. You
can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
Using the ribbon boxes to type values does not affect the settings of the Line or Arc modes.
See Also
Arc by Center Point Command (on page 166)
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with FreeSketch

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch
.
2. On the ribbon, set the line and arc element types with Element Type, and clear the other
element types.
3. Drag to draw a line or arc. When you stop moving the pointer, do not release the mouse
button.
4. Drag to draw a series of line segments and arcs, continuing to hold the mouse button as you
draw each line and arc.
If you release the mouse button while you are drawing, you can start drawing at the
last end point you entered. Confirm that End Point is set on the SmartSketch dialog box.
5. When you have finished, release the mouse button.
Use Adjust to adjust the geometry you draw.

When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.
167
When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal or vertical and the arcs as
tangent to the connected elements.
The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the line. If Maintain
Relationships is set, the software places a connect relationship handle where the two lines
meet.
You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the shortcut menu to edit a line
or an arc.
See Also
FreeSketch Command (on page 184)
Tangent Arc Command

Draws an arc tangent or perpendicular to one or two elements. The first point defines one
end of the arc. If you place the first point on a key point of an element you want the arc to be
tangent or perpendicular to, then the second point defines the sweep.
If you place the first point in free space, then this command works like Arc by 3 Points. In this
case the first point defines an end point. You can then either define a point on the arc and then
the end point, or the end point and then a point on the arc.
While in dynamics for the second point, you can set the orientation of the arc by passing
the pointer through one of the four quadrants of the first point's intent zone.
See Also
Draw a Curve
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Curve
To draw an open curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Open.
To draw a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Closed.
3. Click three or more points on the drawing sheet. These points represent nodes on the curve.
You must place at least three points to draw a curve.
168

4. Right-click to end the curve.
You can drag the pointer to draw the shape of a curve. Instead of clicking several different
points to draw a curve, you can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes
it to a curve.
The nodes at the start point and end point of a curve are always smooth.
You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a curve.
You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes from a curve.
curve.
See Also
Change the Curve Type (on page 170)
Draw a Curve with FreeForm (on page 185)
Curve Command (on page 171)
Insert a Node into a Curve

1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Insert Node.
3. Position the pointer at the location to add a node.
4. Click to insert the node.

See Also
Draw a Curve (on page 168)
Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu)

Adds a node to a curve.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate the curve.
See Also
Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 170)
Insert a Node into a Curve (on page 169)
Delete a Node from a Curve

1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete Node.
169

3. Select the node you want to delete.
You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node.

See Also
Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 169)
Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu)

Deletes a node from a curve.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate a curve.
For more information, see Curve Ribbon (on page 171).
See Also
Insert a Node into a Curve (on page 169)
Delete a Node from a Curve (on page 169)
Change the Curve Type

1. Select the curve.
To change an open curve to a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to
Closed.
To change a closed curve to an open curve, select the node you want to open, and then
set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to Open.
If you do not select a node, the software opens the curve at the node that was automatically
activated when you selected the curve.

See Also
170
Change the Node Type

1. Select the curve.
2. Select the node you want to change.
3. On the ribbon, click the button for the node type you want to change the node to: Smooth,
Symmetric, or Cusp.

See Also
Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 169)
Curve Command
Draws a smooth, open, or closed curve. A series of curves can have smooth, symmetric and
cusp nodes. The node at the start point and the node at the end point of a curve are always
smooth.
See Also
Curve Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
Open Sets the curve type to Open.
Closed Sets the curve type to Closed.
The following options appear on the Curve ribbon only when a curve or curve
element is selected.
Previous Node Activates the previous node on the curve. This button is available only
when you have selected a curve to edit.
Next Node Activates the next node on the curve. This button is available only when you
have selected a curve to edit.
171

Symmetric Gives a curve the same curvature on each side of the selected node. This
button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.
Smooth Gives a curve a different curvature on each side of the selected node. The start
point and end point of a curve is always a smooth node. This button is available only when you
have selected a curve to edit.
Cusp Makes a curve bend sharply at the selected node. This button is available only
when you have selected a curve to edit.
See Also
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse by 3 Points
2. Click the location to begin the primary axis.
172

3. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of the primary axis
and the rotation angle.
4. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the secondary axis.
The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.
Instead of clicking to define the primary and secondary axes of an ellipse, you can type
values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you can draw a diagonal line,
and the software automatically changes it to an ellipse.
ellipse.
See Also
Ellipse by 3 Points Command (on page 173)
Ellipse by 3 Points Command

Draws an ellipse using three edge points. The first two points define the length of the primary
axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the secondary axis.
See Also
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points (on page 172)
Ellipse Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
Primary Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is based on the primary
axis.
Secondary Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is perpendicular to the
primary axis.
173

Angle Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X
axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
See Also
Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 174)
Draw an Ellipse by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse by Center .
2. Click the location for the center of the primary axis.
3. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of the primary axis
and the rotation angle.
4. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the secondary axis.
The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.
Instead of clicking to define the axes and rotation angle of the ellipse, you can type values
on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you can draw a diagonal line
and the software automatically changes it to an ellipse.
ellipse.
See Also
Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page 174)
Ellipse by Center Point Command

Draws an ellipse using the center point and two edge points. The center point and the next
point define half the length of the primary axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the
secondary axis.
See Also
Draw an Ellipse by Center Point (on page 174)
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and Polygons

To draw a rectangle or square, click Rectangle
on the Draw toolbar. Then, click two different
points to define the shape. If you want to precisely define dimensions, you can type values into
the ribbon and press ENTER.
174

If you place dimensions on a rectangle or square, these are always driven dimensions. This
means that if you edit the value of the dimension, the object does not change. You need to edit
the width and height values on the ribbon to change the dimensions of the rectangle or square.
Also, you cannot ungroup a rectangle or square into individual lines.
If you want to place a rectangle or square that has driving dimensions, you need to select
Line/Arc Continuous
on the Draw toolbar and place four separate lines in the shape of a
rectangle or square.
You can use the Polygon
and Polygon by Center
, also on the Draw toolbar, to draw an
n-side polygon. The default settings for both polygon commands are for drawing an isosceles
triangle. However, you can use the options on the Polygon and Polygon by Center ribbons to
specify the number of sides and dimension values.
Each polygon that you draw is really an object of grouped lines. Consequently, after the polygon
is drawn there is no way to modify its dimensions. You can, however, use Ungroup
on the
Relationships toolbar to separate the polygon into its individual linear elements.
See Also
Fillet Rectangle Command (on page 177)
Polygon Command (on page 178)
Rectangle Command (on page 176)
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch (on page 183)
Draw a Rectangle or Square (on page 175)
Draw a Rectangle or Square

1.
2.
3.
4.
On the Draw toolbar, click Rectangle .

Click the location for one corner of the rectangle or square.
Click to define the rotation angle and the width of the rectangle or square.
Do one of the following:
To draw a rectangle, click to define the height.
To draw a square, hold the SHIFT key, and then click. The command automatically
makes the height equal to the width.
Instead of clicking to draw the rectangle or square, you can type values in the Width,
Height, and Angle boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and
ribbon bar input.
175
Instead of clicking several different points to draw a rectangle, you can draw a diagonal line
and the software automatically changes it to a rectangle.
rectangle or square.
If you place dimensions on a rectangle, they are always driven dimensions.
You cannot ungroup a rectangle into individual lines.
See Also
Rectangle Command
Draws a rectangle using three points. The first two points define the width and rotation angle
of the rectangle, and the third point defines the height. You can also draw a square with this
command.
See Also
Rectangle Ribbon (on page 176)
Rectangle Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Width Sets the width of the rectangle or square.
Height Sets the height of the rectangle or square.
Angle - Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The
angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
See Also
Draw a Fillet Rectangle

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fillet Rectangle
176
2.
3.
4.
5.
If the Fillet Rectangle button is not displayed on the Draw toolbar, click the Rectangle
fly-out menu
and select it from the list.
When drawing a fillet rectangle, it is useful to have Maintain Relationships turned on.
Use Tools > Maintain Relationships to turn this command on and off.
Click a location to specify one corner of the fillet rectangle.
Move the mouse, and click again to define the rotation angle and the width of the fillet
rectangle.
Click a third point to define the height.
Move the mouse backwards or forwards to define the fillet radius.
To increase the fillet radius, move the mouse towards the center of the rectangle. To
decrease the radius, move the mouse away from the center of the rectangle.
6. Click in the drawing to place the fillet rectangle.
The fillet rectangle is not a single object. Rather, it is a collection of eight separate elements
(four lines and four arcs) with relationships. As such, if you drag a line or an arc, you can
stretch the entire fillet rectangle shape horizontally, vertically, or diagonally.
To modify the fillets after placement, select any one fillet and change its fillet value.
Changing one fillet does not impact the other three fillets.
Instead of clicking to draw the fillet rectangle, you can type values in the Width, Height,
Angle, and Radius boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and
ribbon bar input.
When typing a value into the Radius box, you must specify a positive number that is greater
than 0. Also, the fillet radius must be less than one-half the size of the rectangle width or
height. For example, if the rectangle dimensions are 3" x 5", the fillet radius must be less
than 1.5".
When using the ribbon to specify dimensions, you must define the width and the height of
the fillet rectangle before defining the radius.
See Also
Fillet Rectangle Command

Draws a fillet rectangle using four points and a user-specified fillet radius. The first two points
define the width and rotation angle of the fillet rectangle, and the third point defines the height.
The fillet radius can be specified dynamically using the mouse or by typing a value on the
ribbon. The fourth point defines the placement of the fillet rectangle in the drawing.
See Also
Draw a Fillet Rectangle (on page 176)
Fillet Rectangle Ribbon (on page 178)
177
Fillet Rectangle Ribbon

Colors dialog box.
Width - Sets the width of the fillet rectangle.
Height - Sets the height of the fillet rectangle.
Angle Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The
Radius - Specifies the radius of the fillet. The value must be a positive number greater than 0
and less than 1/2 the value specified for the width or height. For example, if the dimensions of
the rectangle are 3" x 5", the fillet radius must be less than 1.5".
See Also
Draw a Fillet Rectangle (on page 176)
Draw an N-Sided Polygon

1. Click Polygon
on the Draw toolbar.
If the Polygon button is not displayed on the Draw toolbar, click the Rectangle fly-out
menu
and select it from the list.
2. In the Sides field of the Polygon ribbon, define the number of sides for the polygon.
Since the default value for this field is "3", leaving the value unchanged results
in an isosceles triangle.
3. On the Drawing sheet, click a point to define the starting point for the polygon.
4. Click a second point to complete the polygon.
Instead of clicking in the Drawing sheet to specify start and end points for the polygon, you
can type values on the ribbon bar. Each mouse-click places a polygon with the specified
dimensions on the sheet.
You can use the options on the Polygon ribbon to apply formats, including line style and
line color, to any polygon prior to drawing it.
By default, the polygon is placed as a grouped element. To place the polygon as individual
elements, turn off Group after Placement
on the Polygon ribbon.
See Also
Polygon Command
Draws an n-sided polygon based on properties you define.
See Also
Polygon by Center Command (on page 180)
178

Draw an N-Sided Polygon (on page 178)
Draw a Polygon by Center point (on page 179)
Polygon Ribbon (on page 179)
Polygon Ribbon
Sets options for drawing a polygon.
Line Color - Defines the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Line Type- Specifies the drawing line type and style.
Line Width - Defines the width of the line.
Group after Placement - Binds the individual sides of the polygon at placement, so that you
can locate, select, and manipulate the polygon as a unit. This option is turned on by default. If
you turn off the option prior to drawing the polygon, the resulting polygon is placed as an
ungrouped collection of individual elements.
Sides - Sets the total number of sides for the polygon.
Length - Sets the length of the sides for the polygon. This field only accepts positive values.
Angle - Defines the orientation angle of the polygon. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x-axis.
The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
See Also
Draw an N-Sided Polygon (on page 178)
Draw a Polygon by Center point

1. Click Polygon by Center
If the Polygon by Center button is not displayed on the Draw toolbar, click the
Rectangle fly-out menu and select it from the list.
2. Click the location where you want to place the center point.
3. Click to define the radius.
Because the default value for this field is 3, leaving the value unchanged
results in an isosceles triangle.
4. On the Drawing sheet, click a point to define the starting point for the polygon.
5. Click a second point to complete the polygon.
Instead of clicking in the Drawing sheet to define the radius, you can type values on the
ribbon bar. Each mouse- click places a polygon with the specified dimensions on the sheet.
You can use the options on the Polygon ribbon to apply formats, including line style and
line color, to any polygon prior to drawing it.
By default, the polygon is placed as a grouped element. To place the polygon as individual
elements, turn off Group after Placement
on the Polygon by Center ribbon.
See Also
179
Polygon by Center Command

Draws an n-sided polygon based on properties you define.
See Also
Polygon Ribbon (on page 179)
Polygon by Center Ribbon

Sets options for drawing a polygon by center point.
Line Color - Defines the drawing color. You can click More to define custom colors with the
Line Type- Specifies the drawing line type and style.
Line Width - Defines the width of the line.
Group after Placement - Binds the individual sides of the polygon at placement, so that you
can locate, select, and manipulate the polygon as a unit. This option is turned on by default. If
you turn off the option prior to drawing the polygon, the resulting polygon is placed as an
ungrouped collection of individual elements.
Sides - Sets the total number of sides for the polygon.
Radius - Sets the length of the radius for the polygon. This field only accepts positive values.
Angle - Defines the orientation angle of the polygon. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x-axis.
The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
See Also
Drawing FreeForm Shapes

As you draw, you can place precisely defined lines, arcs, and circles by clicking and typing
values in the ribbon. You can also use tools to quickly sketch a design and let the software
convert it into a precision drawing.
FreeSketch
and FreeForm
allow you to quickly place fluid lines and let the software
convert these into precision shapes. FreeSketch
draws lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles,
and FreeForm
draws curves (splines). These commands can be found under Curve
.
180

You can begin sketching anywhere on the drawing sheet. You can draw in free space or use key
points or end points of elements as reference points.
How FreeSketch and FreeForm Work

As you drag the pointer, a rough sketch of your design appears. When you release the pointer,
the software recognizes the shapes in your sketch and turns the sketch into a precise drawing.
You can control the accuracy of the shape recognition using the ribbon options.
FreeSketch and FreeForm Options

FreeSketch Adjust controls how closely FreeSketch
interprets mouse movements. When
Adjust On is set, the software interprets all lines as either horizontal or vertical, and all arcs as
tangent. The first figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust On is
set.
The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust Off is set.
FreeForm Smoothing controls how closely the software interprets mouse movements when
drawing curves. The first figure shows how FreeForm interprets a rough sketch when
Smoothing On is set.
181

The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when Smoothing Off is set.
See Also
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch (on page 182)
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch (on page 183)
Draw a Line with FreeSketch

.
2. On the ribbon, set the Line element type and clear the other element type buttons.
3. Drag to draw a line or a series of connected lines.
Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.
When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal or vertical when you finish
drawing. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the line. If Maintain
Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw connected lines and arcs.
line.
See Also
FreeSketch Ribbon (on page 184)
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch

2. On the ribbon, set the Circle element type and clear the other element type buttons.
3. Drag to sketch the shape of the circle or the diameter of the circle.
182
When Adjust is on, the software interprets your pointer movements as a circle.
circle.
See Also
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch

You must set Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box to draw arcs that are
tangent to other elements. You can set these options by clicking SmartSketch Settings on the
Tools menu.
.
2. On the ribbon, set the Arc element type and clear the other element type buttons.
3. Drag to draw an arc.
When Adjust is on, the software interprets arcs as tangent to the connected elements. If
Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end point of the arc. If Maintain
Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw connected lines and arcs.
arc.
See Also
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch

If FreeSketch is not displayed, click the Curve fly-out menu

and
select it from the list.
2. On the ribbon, set the rectangle Element Type and clear the other Element Type buttons.
183

3. Drag the pointer to sketch the diagonal of the rectangle.
When Adjust is on, the software interprets the diagonal as a rectangle or square.
You can use the buttons on the ribbon and shortcut menu to edit a rectangle or square.
See Also
FreeSketch Command
Draws lines, arcs, rectangles, and circles by converting a sketch into a precision drawing.
You can specify which of these elements you want to draw using the ribbon.
See Also
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch (on page 182)
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch (on page 183)
FreeSketch Ribbon (on page 184)
FreeSketch Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
Adjust On Draws all lines recognized in the rough sketch as horizontal or vertical in the
precision drawing, and draws all arcs recognized in the rough sketch as tangent in the precision
drawing.
Adjust Off Does not adjust the orientation of lines and arcs in your rough sketch.
Line Draws lines in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
Arc Draws arcs in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
Circle Draws circles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough sketch.
Rectangle Draw rectangles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the rough
sketch.
184

See Also
Draw a Curve with FreeForm

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeForm
2. Drag to draw a curve.
Smooth allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.
When Smooth is off, the software interprets the exact movements of your pointer.
When Smooth is on, the software creates smooth, symmetric, or cusp curves.
You can use relationships to draw a curve that is tangent or perpendicular at its start point
and end point. If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles.
You can begin or end your drawing using the end point or key point of an element.
curve.
See Also
FreeForm Command
Draws freeform curves, or splines.
See Also
FreeForm Ribbon (on page 185)
Drawing Diagrams (on page 88)
FreeForm Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
Smoothing On Draws cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves in the precision drawing by
recognizing these shapes in the rough sketch.
Smoothing Off Draws elements that closely resemble the movements of your pointer,
without smoothing them into cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves.
185

See Also
FreeForm Command (on page 185)
Creating Isometric Drawings

If you want to create 2D drawings that represent 3D elements, such as cubes, you can create an
isometric drawing. An isometric drawing is not a true 3D drawing, because you cannot view the
drawing in perspective or from another angle. However, you can create a 3D effect by aligning
the elements and objects in a drawing along three major axes.
SmartSketch supplies several tools to create these types of documents:

Isometric Rectangle
Isometric Circle
Isometric Line
Segmented Styles
You can also use Customize on the Tools menu to place the isometric drawing
commands on a toolbar. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw in the
Categories list, and then drag the various Isometric buttons to an existing toolbar or use them to
create your own toolbar.
See Also
Draw an Isometric Rectangle (on page 191)
Draw an Isometric Line (on page 189)
Draw an Isometric Circle (on page 187)
186
Draw an Isometric Circle

1. Click Isometric Circle
on the Isometric toolbar.
If the Isometric toolbar is not displayed, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In
Manager dialog box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.
2. Click a point to define the center point of the isometric circle.

3. Click a second point to complete the circle.
You cannot drag the pointer to draw the circle.
You can set the plane on which to place the circle by setting options on the ribbon.
You can also customize an existing toolbar to include the Isometric Circle command. Click
View > Toolbars to open the Customize dialog box. On the Tools tab, click Draw in the
Categories list, and drag the Isometric Circle button to an existing toolbar.
See Also
Isometric Circle Command (on page 188)
Isometric Circle Ribbon (on page 188)
Creating Isometric Drawings (on page 186)
187
Isometric Circle Command

Allows you to draw an isometric circle. You can use this button to create 2D circles that look
like 3D circles.
To access this command, you must install the Isometric Toolbar add-in. Click Tools >
Add-Ins to open the Add- In Manager dialog box. Select the Isometric Toolbar Commands
checkbox, and click OK.
See Also
Isometric Toolbar (on page 46)
Isometric Circle Ribbon

Top - Allows you to draw the circle on the top plane.
Left - Allows you to draw the circle on the left plane.
Right - Allows you to draw the circle on the right plane.
Diameter - Sets the diameter of the isometric circle.

Radius - Defines the radius of the isometric circle.
188

See Also
Isometric Circle Command (on page 188)
Draw an Isometric Line

1. Click Isometric Line
2. Click a point to start the line.

3. Click a point to complete the line.
You cannot drag the pointer to draw the line.
You can set the angle for placing the line by setting options on the ribbon bar.
You can also customize an existing toolbar to include the Isometric Line. Click View >
Toolbars to open the Customize dialog box. On the Tools tab, click Draw in the
Categories list, and drag the Isometric Line button to an existing toolbar.
See Also
Isometric Line Command (on page 190)
Isometric Line Ribbon (on page 190)
189
Isometric Line Command

Allows you to draw lines that appear at 30, 60, or 90 degrees in an isometric drawing. This
command creates 2D lines that look like they are in a 3D plane.
See Also
Isometric Line Ribbon

Length - Sets the length of the isometric line.
Angle - Sets the angle of the isometric line.
See Also
Isometric Line Command (on page 190)
190
Draw an Isometric Rectangle

1. Click Isometric Rectangle
To confirm that the isometric rectangle consists of lines that remain connected
when you relocate them using the Select Tool command, turn on Maintain Relationships
on the Tools menu. If this option is not on, Isometric Rectangle creates a rectangle
composed of four separate lines that do not stay connected if you move each line.
2. Click a point to start defining the rectangle base.
3. Click a second point to complete the rectangle base.
4. Click a third point to complete the rectangle.
You cannot drag the pointer to draw the rectangle.
To set the plane on which to place the rectangle, you can set options on the ribbon.
See Also
Isometric Rectangle Command (on page 192)
Isometric Rectangle Ribbon (on page 192)
191
Isometric Rectangle Command

Allows you to draw an isometric rectangle. You can use this command to create 2D
rectangles that look like 3D rectangles.
See Also
Isometric Rectangle Ribbon

Top - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the top plane.
Left - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the left plane.
Right - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the right plane.
Width - Sets the width of the isometric rectangle.

Height - Sets the height of the isometric rectangle.
192

See Also
Isometric Rectangle Command (on page 192)
Format Part of an Element

1. Click Segmented Style
on the Isometric toolbar.
To enable the Isometric toolbar, click Tools > Add-Ins. On the Add-In Manager dialog
box, select the Isometric Toolbar Commands check box, and click OK.
After you enable the Isometric Toolbar Commands add-in, you can use View >
Toolbars to toggle on/off the Isometric toolbar.
2. On the ribbon, click the style or colors that you want to apply to part of an element.
3. Click the element to which you want to apply the style. The format extends to the next
element that crosses or bounds the element to which you are applying the line type or color.
Segmented Style does not recognize symbols as a bounding element.

If you change the size of the element, you must re-apply the line type or color by using
Segmented Style.
Segmented Style Command

Applies a line type, line weight, or color to part of an element. When you apply the line type,
line weight, or color, the format extends to the next element that crosses or bounds the element
to which you are applying the line type or color. This is handy if you want to change the
appearance of just part of an element.
If you change the size of the element, you must re-apply the line type or color using
Segmented Style. Segmented Style does not recognize symbols as a bounding element.
See Also
Format Part of an Element (on page 193)
193
Using Scaled Sketching

In drawings, you can have multiple embedded views on a drawing sheet that are at different
model scales (e.g. 1/4" = 1' and 1/8" = 1'). You can add graphics to the views and treat them as
if they were actual model graphics. Use the Scaled Sketching command to draw all graphics at a
consistent scale factor. The scale factor used is based on a user-selected SmartFrame.
See Also
Scaled Sketching Command (on page 195)
Scaled Sketching Ribbon (on page 195)
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor (on page 194)
Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the SmartSketch

Toolbar
Follow the steps below to add the custom Scaled Sketching command to SmartSketch.
1. Click Tools > Customize.
2. On the Toolbars tab, select Tools.
3. Select and drag the Scaled Sketch icon
to a place on your toolbar.
Now you can use the command from SmartSketch. This command will be available each time
you open SmartSketch.
See Also
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale Factor

Follow the steps below to use the Scaled Sketching command to draw or edit objects at a
specific scale factor.
Make sure you have added the Scaled Sketching command to your SmartSketch toolbar.
See Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the SmartSketch Toolbar (on page 194).
1. Click Scaled Sketching to open the Scaled Sketching ribbon.

2. To set the color of any objects not being edited using the scale factor, click Select color for
referenced data
. Click on the desired color from the color palette.
194

3. Insert a SmartFrame (see Working with Object, Linking and Embedding (on page 451)) and
set the scale factor of the SmartFrame, or click on an existing SmartFrame. The scale is
read and taken from that SmartFrame. The selected scale type is displayed in the Scaled
Sketching ribbon.
Do not create or edit any layers when using the scaled sketching command.
To get accurate dimensional data about scaled objects, be sure to dimension them
while in scaled sketching mode. The dimensions are automatically configured to display
at the value in which they were drawn.
4. Click Enter Scaled Sketch mode
to start drawing at the selected scale.
The system scales the drawing sheet to match the specified scale value.
5. Use the application's drawing/editing commands to draw the desired graphics.
6. Click Finish to end the selected scale mode.
The only way to exit scaled sketching is to click Finish. All modifications you made in the
document are retained.
Whenever you finish using scaled sketching, the undo history is cleared and you cannot
undo any previous edits. The Undo command becomes enabled once you continue working
in SmartSketch.
Leaders must be placed on objects (Labels, Text Boxes, and so forth) that were placed
during Scaled Sketch mode. If the objects were not placed during Scaled Sketch mode, the
leader is not remembered in the SmartFrame after the view is updated.
See Also
Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on page 274)
Scaled Sketching Command

Enables you to edit or draw new objects at a scale that is different from the drawing scale for
the active sheet. You can select a SmartFrame in the current document. The system then uses
the scale factor of that SmartFrame.
See Also
Scaled Sketching Ribbon

The Scaled Sketching ribbon displays when you click Scaled Sketching on the SmartSketch
toolbar.
Select color for referenced data
- displays a color palette for you to set the color of any
objects not being edited using the scale factor.
Scale Setting
- displays the scale taken from the selected
SmartFrame.
Enter Scaled Sketch Mode
- starts the system in using the scale factor for objects being
drawn or edited.
Finish - ends the scale mode.
195

See Also
Scaled Sketching Command (on page 195)
196
SECTION 6
Selecting, Moving, and Copying

Elements
The software provides several simple methods for utilizing existing elements. You can quickly
move or copy an existing element or group of elements onto a drawing sheet. Moving or copying
elements saves you time by eliminating the need to re-create information, as well as help you
maintain accurate graphic data throughout a project.
Selecting Elements
You can select individual or multiple elements using the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. When
you click the Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the
end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the
highlight color. When an element is highlighted you can click to select it.
You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding
the SHIFT or CTRL key as you click the elements you want to select. Or, you can click the
Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence elements.
You can also use a tool called QuickPick to select elements that overlap. To use it, hover the
Select Tool pointer over the elements. When an ellipsis displays you can left-click or right-click
to display the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the numbers;
when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding number to select
it.
Moving Elements
The software provides several methods for moving elements. You can drag an element with the
Select Tool or specify precision points with Move on the Change toolbar. You can also use
PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y relative to a
known position on your drawing.
Copying Elements
You can copy elements with one of many methods:
You can select an object and click Copy on the Main toolbar. The selected item is placed on
the Clipboard. Then, when you click Paste on the Main toolbar, the item is placed on the
drawing sheet. The element will not change from its original form.
You can copy one or more elements by clicking the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. After
the pointer changes to show that the element can be copied, hold the CTRL key and drag
the copy to its new location.
Formatting, such as line weight, line color, and line style, can be copied from selected
objects and applied to other objects as they are selected using Format Painter on the Main
toolbar.
You can make several copies of elements that are the same by selecting the element and
clicking Rectangular Pattern or Circular Pattern on the Change toolbar.
You can also click Offset, Move, Scale, or Rotate on the Change toolbar to create copies.
197
Selecting, Moving, and Copying Elements

Cutting and Deleting Elements
You can cut an element by clicking Cut on the Main toolbar. The element is placed on the
Clipboard. You can then use Paste to place the element in the current document or into other
documents.
If you do not Paste the element after cutting, it will be permanently removed from
the document.
You can permanently remove an element by selecting the element and pressing Delete on your
keyboard. You can also permanently remove an element by clicking Edit on the Main toolbar
and then selecting Delete.
See Also
Moving Elements (on page 210)
Copying and Pasting Elements (on page 213)
Cutting or Deleting Elements (on page 219)
Display the Change Toolbar
On the Main toolbar, click the Change icon
See Also
Rotating Elements (on page 331)
Mirroring Elements (on page 334)
Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements (on page 354)
Extending or Trimming Elements (on page 341)
Selecting Elements
To select an element, you must use Select Tool at the top of the Draw toolbar. You can select
lines, arcs, or annotations, such as dimensions or fills. You can also select element groups,
embedded or linked objects, symbols, or handles on elements that indicate relationships.
Selecting Single Elements

To select an element, you can click the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar.
When you click Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the
end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the
highlight color. When an element is highlighted, you can click to select it.
When you select an individual element, the following things happen:
The element changes to the selection color. You can change the selection color using
Options on the Tools menu.
The element's handles are displayed. Handles are solid squares at significant positions on a
selected element, such as end points and center points. Handles allow you to directly modify
the elementdrag a handle to change the element's shape. Although you can select more
than one element at a time, only one element can have handles at a time.
The element's important properties are displayed on a ribbon.
198
If the element is linked or embedded into the current document, selecting it allows you to
double-click it for editing.
When you select multiple elements or grouped elements, they change to the selection color.
Selecting Multiple Elements

You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then holding
the SHIFT or CTRL key as you click the elements you want to select. Or, you can click the
Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence elements.
You can use the ribbon to select whether you want only elements completely enclosed by the
fence to be selected or any element that is partly enclosed by the fence. Many manipulation
commands, like delete, move, copy, and rotate, act upon all elements in the selection set.
Selecting an Element That Overlaps Other Elements

If you want to select an element that overlaps other elements, and you cannot highlight the
element you want by moving the pointer over it, you can use a tool called QuickPick. To use it,
hover the pointer over the exact intersection of the elements. When the software displays an
ellipsis, or three small circles, by the pointer, you can left-click or right-click to display a small
toolbar that shows the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the
numbers; and, when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the corresponding
number to select it.
Clearing Elements
To clear an element or a group of elements, you can click any point on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Move an Element with the Select Tool (on page 211)
Copy an Element with the Select Tool (on page 214)
Select Elements Using SmartSelect (on page 202)
Select an Element
1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool.
To select one element, click it.
To select more than one element hold the Shift or Ctrl key and click each element.
To select more than one element at once, drag to fence the objects.
To select one of several overlapping elements, use QuickPick.
To select all elements, click Ctrl + A or right-click in the Drawing sheet and click Select
All.
To select an element with QuickPick

QuickPick helps you to select elements that overlap each other.
1. Position the pointer over the element you want to select and pause the pointer there.
199

2. When the pointer changes to an ellipsis (three dots), click. The software displays the
QuickPick toolbar near the pointer, with a button for each selectable element.
3. Move the pointer over QuickPick without clicking to highlight the corresponding elements.
4. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click the corresponding button on the
QuickPick toolbar.
To clear a selection
Click in free space.
Right-click in free space.
Select another element without holding the Shift or Ctrl key.
To clear the selection of one element and leave other elements selected, click the element
while holding the Shift key.
When the Select Tool is active, selectable elements highlight as you pass the pointer over
them. When the element you want to select is highlighted, click to select it.
You can use the ribbon commands to set element selection options.
You can change the element highlight and selection colors with Options on the Tools
menu.
See Also
Select Tool (on page 201)
Filtering the Selection of Drawing Elements (on page 204)
200
Select Tool
Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select, modify, and
manipulate elements. The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone.
See Also
Select Tool Ribbon (on page 201)
Select Tool Ribbon

The default selection ribbon is displayed only when nothing is selected. After you select an
object, the selection ribbon is replaced with a ribbon bar for editing the selected object.
To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer over an option and read
the ToolTip.
Inside
Specifies that elements inside the fence are selected.
Overlapping
Specifies that elements overlapped by the fence are selected, as well as
elements inside the fence.
Top Down
Specifies that groups of elements are located as opposed to individual
elements in a group.
Bottom Up
Specifies that individual elements in a group are located as opposed to the
whole group.
Expand Displays another ribbon depending on the items that you selected on the drawing
sheet. This button appears when you select ten or more items on the drawing sheet. When you
click it, another ribbon appears.
The options that appear depend on the types of elements that you selected. For example, if you
select eleven lines, then the Line ribbon appears. If you select several types of items, then only
the common properties for those types of elements appear on the Select Tool ribbon. For
example, if you select nine lines and a circle, then the ribbon displays the Style, Line Type,
Width, and Color options. For more information about the options that appear, see the Help
topic for the selected element's ribbon.
If the items that you selected have no common properties, then no options will appear if you
click Expand. For example, if you select a dimension and ten lines and then click Expand, a
ribbon does not appear.
See Also
201
Select All Command

Selects all visible elements in a window.
In addition to clicking Edit > Select All, you can also access this command when you
position the pointer in the document and right-click.
See Also
Selecting Elements (on page 198)
Select Elements Using SmartSelect

1. On the Draw toolbar, click SmartSelect
.
2. On the SmartSelect toolbar, select the type of fence placement - Rectangle
or
Polygon
. Complete one of the following actions:
Click Inside Fence
on the SmartSelect toolbar to select all elements entirely inside
the fence.
Click Overlapping Fence
to select all elements entirely inside the fence and those
elements outside but touching the fence at some point.
3. Place a fence around the elements you want to select by following the prompts in the Status
Bar.
-orClick Chain Selection
and click on an element that is endpoint-connected to other
elements. All endpoint-connected elements are automatically selected.
4. To locate groups of elements as opposed to individual elements in a group, click Top Down
on the SmartSelect toolbar.
-orClick Bottom Up
group.
to locate individual elements in a group as opposed to the whole
You can click Locate Filter

selected.
to define the types of drawing elements that can be
See Also
SmartSelect Command (on page 202)
SmartSelect Ribbon (on page 203)
SmartSelect Command
Opens a ribbon bar that provides different ways to create select sets. You can create a
select set by:
Drawing a rectangular or polygonal fence around elements based on points that you define.
Using the Chain Selection command to select an element and all elements that are
chained or connected to the element based on endpoint connection.
Using the Invert Selection command to clear the current element select set while adding
new elements to the select set.
See Also
Selecting Endpoint-Connected Elements (on page 203)
202
SmartSelect Ribbon
Rectangle - select elements defined by a rectangular fence. Drag the mouse to define a
dynamic rectangular shape. Release the mouse to select the element(s) inside or overlapping
the fence boundary.
Creates a select area, or fence, by drawing a rectangle around points that you define. When you
drag the mouse to define a rectangular fence, a dashed rectangular outline dynamically appears
as you drag. When you reach the correct size, release the mouse button to create the fence.
The dashed fence outline disappears and the elements are selected.
Polygon - select elements defined by a polygon-shaped fence. Click the mouse to define
points for a dynamic polygon shape. Right-click the mouse to select the element(s) inside or
overlapping the fence boundary.
Chain Selection - select other elements that are endpoint-connected to the selected
element.
Inside - select elements inside a rectangular or polygon fence.
Overlapping - select elements overlapped by a rectangular or polygon fence as well as
elements inside the fence.
Top Down - locate groups as opposed to individual elements in a group.
Bottom Up - locate individual elements in a group as opposed to the whole group.
Turn Filter On/Off - turn filtering for drawing elements on or off. When filtering is turned off,
the Locate Filter command is disabled.
Locate Filter - Opens the Define Locate Filter Dialog Box (on page 204) to specify the
type(s) of drawing elements that can be selected.
Invert Selection - remove selected elements from the select set while adding new
elements to the select set.
See Also
SmartSelect Command (on page 202)
Selecting Endpoint-Connected Elements

Use the Chain Selection command in the Select by SmartSelect ribbon to select multiple
elements that are endpoint-connected.
2. On the SmartSelect ribbon, click Chain Selection

.
3. Click to select a single element in the current drawing. Elements that are
endpoint-connected to that selected element are also selected.
Flter settings determine the type(s) of elements that can be selected. Use the Locate
Filter command in the SmartSelect ribbon to specify the type(s) of drawing elements to be
selected.
See Also
203
Invert Selection Command

Removes selected elements from the select set while adding unselected elements to the
select set. The Invert Selection command is in the SmartSelect ribbon.
2. On the SmartSelect ribbon, click Invert Selection

.
3. Elements in the active select set are cleared, and unselected elements are added to the
active select set.
Filter settings also determine the types of elements that can be selected. Use the Locate
Filter command on the SmartSelect ribbon to set the types of drawing elements to be selected.
See Also
Filtering the Selection of Drawing Elements

The Locate Filter command on the SmartSelect ribbon allows you to specify the type(s) of
drawing elements selected. Follow the steps below to set up element filtering.
.
2. From the Select by SmartSelect ribbon, use the Turn Filter On/Off toggle button to turn
on filtering (the button will be pressed in).
3. Click Locate Filter
.
4. From the Define Locate Filter dialog box, specify the desired element type(s) for selection.
5. Click OK to apply the filter.
See Also
Define Locate Filter Dialog Box (on page 204)
Define Locate Filter Dialog Box

Specifies the type(s) of elements selected with SmartSelect. Click Locate Filter
on the
SmartSelect toolbar to display this dialog box. Click to specify the element types from the list.
This command is inactive if filtering has been turned off. Use the Turn Filtering On/Off
command on the SmartSelect ribbon to enable and disable the use of filters during element
selection.
See Also
204
Undo Actions
To undo the most recent action, on the Main toolbar, click Undo
To undo more than one action, click Undo List

actions you want to undo.
on the Main toolbar, and then select the
You can do this action only if you have placed Undo List button on the Main toolbar. You
can place the button by selecting Tools > Customize > Edit, and then dragging it over to the
Main toolbar.
When operations are performed in the or in the SmartSketch Drawing Console, any
actions in the SmartSketch Undo buffer are removed. Consequently, any undo actions must be
performed manually.
See Also
Redo Actions (on page 205)
Undo Command
Reverses an action. You can change the number of actions that can be undone using
Options. You then click the General tab on the Options dialog box.
Undo List Command (Edit Menu)

Reverses an action based on what you select on the list.
You can change the number of actions that can be undone using Options.
View manipulations are not included in the action list.
To use Undo List, select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then drag it over to a menu or
the Main toolbar.
See Also
Redo Actions
To reverse the most recent Undo action, click Redo
on the Main toolbar. The Redo
command is not enabled until an Undo action has been performed.
To reverse more than one Undo action, click Redo List

want to perform.
, and then select the actions you
You can perform a redo list action only if you have placed Redo List on a menu or on
the Main toolbar. Select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then drag the button over to the
menu or Main toolbar.
See Also
Undo Actions (on page 205)
205
Redo Command
Reverses the most recent Undo action performed.
See Also
Redo List Command

Lists the most recent Redo actions if multiple Undo operations have been performed.
To use Redo List, select Tools > Customize > Edit, and then place it on a menu or on the
Main toolbar.
See Also
Finding Elements
The software has the ability to find items in your drawing. You can define search criteria based
on an item type already placed in your drawing. When you have found all drawing items of a
certain type, you can modify their properties or reposition them.
When you find drawing items, the selected items are added to a select set. You can view the
common properties of the select set items in the Properties window and edit them, if
appropriate.
See Also
Find a SmartSketch Object

1. Click Edit > Find.
You can also click Ctrl + F to execute the Find command.
2. In the Find dialog box, use the options on the various tabs to define your search criteria.
3. Click Find Now to execute the search.
Objects that match the specified search criteria appear as selected on the SmartSketch
Drawing sheet. These objects are added to the select set.
You can select Clear to void the results of the previous search and specify new search
criteria.
You can select Reset to return the Find options to their default settings.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Find button
206
on a toolbar.

See Also
Find Command (on page 207)
Find Dialog Box (on page 207)
Find Command
Searches for objects within a SmartSketch document based upon criteria you define.
Instead of scouring each sheet in your SmartSketch document, you can use the Find command
to locate geometric elements and symbols that have a specific format or a specific set of defined
attributes.
First, define your search criteria in the Find dialog box, and then execute the search. Items that
match the defined criteria appear selected on the Drawing sheet.
See Also
Find a SmartSketch Object (on page 206)
Find Dialog Box (on page 207)
Find Dialog Box

Provides options for locating matching information or formatting, throughout a SmartSketch
document. You can define your search criteria to look for as many (or as few) SmartSketch
object types as you wish. Options for defining and refining search criteria can be found on the
following tabs:
See Also
Type Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 207)
Symbology Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 208)
Style Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 208)
Layer Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 208)
Text Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 209)
General Tab (Find Dialog Box) (on page 209)
Type Tab (Find Dialog Box)

Specifies the type of SmartSketch element, object, or attribute you wish to find. You can define
the parameters of your search to encompass a wide- range of items, including geometric
elements, SmartSketch symbols, or a variety of attributes.
Find Now - Executes the search based on the criteria specified. When found, the matching
object appears highlighted on the active Drawing sheet.
Clear - Clears out the results of the last search conducted. All items that appeared selected in
the SmartSketch drawing are cleared.
Reset - Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.
See Also
207

Symbology Tab (Find Dialog Box)
Sets options for performing a search based on color, line weight, and line type.
Color - Specifies the drawing color used in the search criteria.
Width - Defines the line width used in the search criteria.
Type - Specifies the drawing line type used in the search criteria.
Reset -Returns the options on each of the Find dialog box tabs to their default settings.
See Also
Style Tab (Find Dialog Box)

Defines search criteria based on style attributes.
Linear - Specifies the line style used in the search criteria.
Fill - Specifies the type of fill used in the search criteria.
Dimension - Specifies the type of dimension used in the search criteria.
Text - Specifies the type of text used in the search criteria.
See Also
Layer Tab (Find Dialog Box)

Specifies the layer of the SmartSketch document on which to conduct the search. Two options
are available by default: All layers or the Default layer; however, if you have created additional
layers in the SmartSketch document, they are also displayed.
See Also
208

Text Tab (Find Dialog Box)
Sets search criteria based upon text-based options.
Text boxes and labels - Specifies the text string used in the search criteria.
Attribute names - Specifies the attribute name used in the search criteria.
Attribute values - Specifies the attribute value used in the search criteria.
Match case - Limits the search criteria to include only the text with the same capitalization as
the Text boxes and labels text.
Bold - Limits the search criteria to include only text that is bold.
Italics - Limits the search criteria to include only text that is italicized.
Underline - Limits the search criteria to include only text that is underlined.
Font name - Limits the search criteria to include only text that matches the font name specified.
Font size - Limits the search criteria to include only text that matches the font size specified.
See Also
General Tab (Find Dialog Box)

Refines your search criteria to include a specific symbol name.
Symbol name - Specifies the name of the symbol to be located when the search executes.
See Also
209
Moving Elements
You can move elements on the drawing sheet with one of several methods:
Dragging elements with the Select Tool on

the Draw toolbar.
Specifying precision points with Move/Copy
on the Change toolbar.
Moving elements in small increments with Nudge
You can also click Scale
and Rotate
on the Change toolbar to move elements.
Using the Select Tool

To move an element, you must first select it with Select Tool
on the Draw toolbar. You can
drag the selected element to move it without changing its shape.
The element's handles do not need to be displayed for you to move it. If they are displayed,
and you want to move the element and not modify it, position the pointer so it is not over a
handle.
You can move an element with precision if you use the relationship indicators.
When you modify a drawing, elements with maintained relationships automatically update to
honor the relationship. For example, if you move an element that shares a maintained parallel
relationship with another element, the other element moves as needed to remain parallel. If a
line and an arc share a maintained tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is
modified.
Moving Elements by Specifying Precision Points

You can move a line that shares a tangent relationship with an arc if you select the line and click
Move on the Change toolbar. As you move the line, the line moves without maintaining the
relationship with the arc. You can then specify a 'from' point and a 'to' point by clicking on the
drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can move any element by specifying
precision points with Move.
210

See Also
Move an Element (on page 211)
Move an Element Precisely (on page 212)
Move an Element
1. Select one or more elements.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Move
3. If you want to copy the elements, click Copy

on the ribbon.
4. Click to define the 'from' point.
5. Click to define the 'to' point. After the elements move, the relationships with other elements
are not maintained.
You can click Move before you select elements to move.

Using the Move command on the Change toolbar will break any relationships the element
may have. You must move an element with the Select Tool (on page 211) to maintain its
relationships.
Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy elements, you can hold down the CTRL key
while you click to position the elements.
You can use the ribbon boxes to specify the "to" point. The values are relative distances
along the x and y axes. You must click to specify to which quadrant you want to move or
copy the selection set.
When you move or copy elements, the "to" point becomes the next "from" point.
The software maintains relationships within the select set if they are still applicable after you
have moved or copied the elements.
You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom, Fit, and Pan, while you
are using Move.
When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Move at the point where
you left off.
See Also
Move Command (on page 212)
Move Ribbon (on page 212)
Move an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool .
2. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's handles.
3. Drag the element to its new position.
Move an element with precision

1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool .
2. Position the pointer over the element you want to move, at a location where the software
recognizes a key point.
3. Begin to drag the element.
4. Release the element when the software recognizes the key point of another element, or a
relationship between the element you are moving and another element.
211

If you want to move a selected element, make sure to position the pointer away from any
of the element's handles. Dragging a handle modifies the element instead of moving it.
See Also
Move an Element Precisely

You can use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y
relative to a known position in your drawing.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool
2. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint

.
3. Click the location that you want for the PinPoint target point to be.
4. Using the Select tool, point to the element that you want to move. Relationship indicators
appear next to the pointer to indicate keypoints on the element.
5. When the relationship indicators identify the key point that you want, drag the element.
PinPoint displays the distance between the pointer and the reference point as you drag.
6. Release the mouse button when the element is where you want it.
See Also
Placing Elements in Precise Locations (on page 267)
Draw with PinPoint (on page 268)
Move Command
Moves elements from one location to another. You can specify the locations by clicking on
the drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can move one or more elements at a
time, and you can move element groups.
See Also
Move Ribbon
Specifies the "from" point and "to" point when you move objects or elements.
Copy
Copies the elements in the selection set.
Step Distance Increments or decrements the value displayed in the ribbon boxes. For
example, typing a step value of 0.25 and moving the pointer away from the "from" point would
increment the distance from 0.25 to 0.5, 0.75, and so forth.
X Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
See Also
212
Nudge an Element
1. Select a graphical object in the SmartSketch drawing.
You can select multiple objects using the Ctrl key.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Nudge
.
3. In the Delta box, specify a delta value to control how much the object moves.
4. Use the arrow keys to "nudge" the object or select set in the corresponding direction (left,
right, up, down).
You can use Ctrl + arrow keys to move the object or select set a small delta.
The Nudge command stays active until you select another command.
See Also
Nudge Command (on page 213)
Nudge Command
Moves an element or a select set in small increments. You use the Delta box on the Nudge
ribbon to define the size of the increment, and then use the arrow keys to "nudge" the element
or select set in the corresponding direction (left, right, up, and down).
See Also
Nudge an Element (on page 213)
Copying and Pasting Elements

You can copy any element, dimension, or object by selecting it and clicking Copy on the Main
toolbar. Copying places the selected item on the Clipboard. When you click Paste on the Main
toolbar, the item is placed on the drawing sheet.
You can also copy an element with the Select Tool. You click the Select Tool on the Draw
toolbar, select the element, and press CTRL as you drag the element across the drawing sheet.
You can also copy several selected elements in the same manner.
When you copy elements that have relationships, the relationships are copied and retained
when possible. For example, if you make a copy of two related lines, the relationship is also
copied. However, if you copy one of two lines that are related to each other, the relationship is
not copied.
See Also
Copy an Element (on page 213)
Paste an Element (on page 215)
Copy an Element
1. Select an element.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Copy
213

You can also click CTRL + C to copy the selected element.
After you copy an element and its relationships, they are placed on the Clipboard. You can
then use Paste to paste them into the current document, or into other documents.
When you paste the element, it is pasted on top of the element you copied. To see the
pasted element, you must drag it.
See Also
Copy Command (on page 214)
Copy an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool .
3. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's handles. The pointer
changes to show that the element can now be copied.
4. Hold the CTRL key and drag the copy to its new location.
See Also
Copy Command
Copies selected elements and their associated relationships to the Clipboard. When you use
this command, it replaces the previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.
When you copy more than one element at a time, all relationships shared among the elements
are also copied. However, when you copy an element that shares a relationship with an element
that you are not copying, the relationship is not copied.
See Also
Copy an Element (on page 213)
Copy a Format
1. Click the object with the formatting you want to copy.
2. Click Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar) (on page 215)
3. Click another object to apply the new formatting.
214
If a connector with a line terminator is selected as the object from which to copy, the
terminator will be added to any other linear geometry selected with the Format Painter. This
is the only way to apply terminators to linear geometry that is not a connector.
You can apply format changes to multiple objects by dragging a fence around the desired
objects.
When copying a format from text to geometry, or vice versa, only the color is applied.
Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar)

Copies formatting, such as line weight, color and line style, from a selected object and
applies it to other objects as they are selected. The two objects do not have to be similar.
Format Painter will format all objects including text, dimensions, and groups; however, it will not
re-format symbols
See Also
Copy a Format (on page 214)
Paste an Element
You can place elements on the Clipboard with Copy or Cut, and then paste the elements into
the current document or another document.
1. Open the document in which you want to paste the contents of the Clipboard.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Paste
You can also press CTRL + V to paste elements on the Clipboard into your document.
The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use Copy or Cut again.
You cannot run Paste if the Clipboard is empty.
You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste.
If you are unable to see the symbol, element, fill, or document that you pasted into your
SmartSketch drawing, click Fit
on the Main toolbar
Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste.
See Also
Cut Command (on page 220)
Paste Command (on page 215)
Paste Command
Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same coordinates the elements had in the source
document. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty.
See Also
Paste an Element (on page 215)
Paste an Element with a Different Format (on page 216)
215
Paste an Element with a Different Format

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cut or copy the element you want to paste.

Click Edit > Paste Special.
To embed the information, click Paste.
To link the information, click Paste Link.
In the As box, select the format that you want to use to paste the information.
To paste the information into the lower left corner of the current document, click OK.
The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use Paste Special again.
You cannot run Paste Special if the Clipboard is empty.
If you select an element as the insertion point and that element cannot be replaced, the
Clipboard contents are not pasted at the insertion point.
You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste Special.
You can use Redo to repeatedly paste the contents of the Clipboard at the insertion point.
If the Clipboard contains data, and you have selected data in the document, the software
replaces the selected data with the contents of the Clipboard.
Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste Special.
See Also
Paste Special Command (on page 216)
Paste Special Command

Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format. This command is
available only on the Edit menu.
See Also
Paste Special Dialog Box (on page 216)
How Embedding Works (on page 453)
How Linking Works (on page 457)
Paste Special Dialog Box

Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format.
in the upper
See Also
Offset Elements
You can select elements to be offset before you use Offset. Or you can select Offset before
you select the elements.
1. On the Change toolbar, click Offset .
216

2. Click the element or elements that you want to offset.
3. In the Step Distance box on the ribbon, type the distance that you want to offset the
selected elements.
4. Click to define the direction in which you want to offset the elements.
If the Change toolbar is not displayed, click Change on the Main toolbar.
To select a chain of connected elements, select Offset Chain.
See Also
Associative Offset Command (on page 218)
Offset Command (on page 217)
Offset Command
Draws an offset copy of an element or a set of contiguous elements. This command copies
elements while maintaining characteristics such as the angle of lines and the center point of arcs
and circles.
Offset copies the original element at a specified distance. Offsetting outside the perimeter of the
original element creates a larger element. Offsetting inside the perimeter of the original element
creates a smaller element.
Elements are transitioned as necessary during the offset operation.
See Also
Offset Ribbon (on page 218)
Offset Elements (on page 216)
217
Offset Ribbon
Select Chain Selects a chain of continuous elements. If this option is not selected, Offset
selects only an individual element.
Step Distance Sets the distance from the base element to the offset copy.
Cumulative Offset Sets the total distance of the current offset graphic element from the
original graphic element.
The following graphic illustrates the difference between step distance (A) and cumulative offset
(B).
See Also
Associative Offset Command

Draws an offset copy of a curve and applies an offset relation. This command copies
elements while maintaining characteristics such as the angle of lines and the center point of arcs
and circles.
Associative Offset copies the original curve geometry at a specified distance. Offsetting
outside the perimeter of the original element creates a larger element. Offsetting inside the
perimeter of the original element creates a smaller element.
The Associative Offset command is available only if you use Customize on the Tools
menu to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, select
Manipulation under Categories to display the Associative Offset button.
See Also
Associative Offset Ribbon (on page 219)
218

Associative Offset Ribbon
Associative offsets - Sets the distance from the base element to the offset copy.
See Also
Cutting or Deleting Elements

To delete elements, select the elements and click Cut on the main toolbar or press DELETE on
the keyboard. Clicking Cut allows you to paste the element in another location. Pressing
DELETE removes the element permanently.
Relationships that are no longer applicable after you delete an element are automatically
deleted. For example, if you delete one of a pair of parallel lines, the parallel relationship is
deleted from the remaining line.
See Also
Delete Command (on page 219)
Cut an Element (on page 220)
Delete an Element
Click Edit > Delete.
On the keyboard, press DELETE.
When you delete an element and its relationships, the relationships are not pasted to
the Clipboard and cannot be reinserted. However, you can restore an element and its
relationships by immediately using Undo.
See Also
Delete Command
Deletes the selected element and any relationships and dimensions that have been placed
on it. You cannot reinsert or paste elements deleted with this command. However, you can
retrieve the data by immediately clicking Undo.
219

See Also
Delete an Element (on page 219)
Cut an Element
2. On the Main toolbar, click Cut
You can also press CTRL + X to cut the selected element.
After you cut an element and its relationships from a document, they are placed on the
Clipboard. You can then use Paste to paste them into the current document, or into other
documents.
When relationships exist between elements, cutting the elements from a document deletes
the relationships. If there is a relationship between a selected element and an unselected
element, you can do one of the following:
Cut and paste only the selected element.
Cut and paste both elements and their relationship.
Cut and paste only the selected element and the relationship, then reconnect the
relationship to another element.
See Also
Paste Command (on page 215)
Cut Command
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
See Also
Cut an Element (on page 220)
Creating Patterns
Patterns are useful if you want to create several elements quickly that are the same without
using several commands. You can create patterns by selecting one or more elements and
making several copies of it with Rectangular Pattern or Circular Pattern on the toolbar.
To modify individual members of the pattern, you can select an individual member of the pattern
and change it the way you would any other element.
See Also
Draw a Circular Pattern (on page 222)
Draw a Rectangular Pattern (on page 221)
220
Draw a Rectangular Pattern

1. Select one or more elements to pattern.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Rectangular Pattern

.
3. To define a rectangular area for the pattern, click Pattern Options on the ribbon.
4. On the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box, select Fit to Rectangle.
Use the ribbon boxes and the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box to define other
characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of pattern members and rows.
5. On the drawing sheet, click to identify one corner of the pattern and click to identify the
opposite corner of the pattern.
6. To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.
If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can use the Undo command.
See Also
Circular Pattern Ribbon (on page 223)
Rectangular Pattern Command (on page 221)
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon (on page 222)
Rectangular Pattern Command

Copies selected elements in a rectangular pattern on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Creating Patterns (on page 220)
Draw a Rectangular Pattern (on page 221)
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon (on page 222)
Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box

Pattern control Specifies how the pattern is constructed.
Incremental array Draws a pattern with a set offset between members.
Fit to rectangle Draws a pattern by evenly spacing members along the x and y axes of
the pattern rectangle.
Stagger Controls whether pattern members are arranged in a straight matrix, or whether
every other row or column is offset from its default position. Options are None, for a straight
matrix, Rows, to offset alternate pattern rows, and Columns, to offset alternate pattern columns.
Stagger Sets the row or column stagger distance to the specified distance.
Stagger = 1/2 offset Sets the row or column stagger distance to half the X Offset or Y Offset
value.
Include last column Controls whether to include the last staggered column in the pattern or
to exclude the last column.
221

See Also
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon

Options Displays the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box.
X count Sets the number of pattern members along the x axis of the pattern rectangle.
Y count Sets the number of pattern members along the y axis of the pattern rectangle.
X offset Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured along the x axis
of the pattern rectangle.
Y offset Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured along the y axis
of the pattern rectangle.
Angle Sets the rotation angle of the pattern rectangle.
Finish Completes the pattern. When you click this button, the pattern is created on the
drawing sheet and you can select other elements.
See Also
Draw a Circular Pattern

1. Select one or more elements to pattern.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Circular Pattern

.
3. Click where you want the center of the circular pattern to be.
4. Use the ribbon boxes and the Circular Pattern Options dialog box to define other
characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of pattern members and rows.
5. To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.
If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can use the Undo command.
See Also
Circular Pattern Command (on page 222)
Circular Pattern Command

Arranges selected elements in a circular pattern on the drawing sheet.
See Also
222
Circular Pattern Ribbon

Options Displays the Circular Pattern Options dialog box.
Count Sets the number of copies in the pattern.
Rows Sets the number of arc-shaped rows in the pattern. This option is available only when
Rows on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set to Multiple inward or Multiple
outward.
Angle Sets the angle of the pattern. This box sets the sweep angle between pattern
members when Pattern control on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set to
Incremental array. This box also sets the total sweep angle when Pattern control is set to Fit
to arc.
Row spacing Sets the distance between adjacent arc-shaped rows in the pattern, as
measured from the bottom of one row to the bottom of the next. The bottom is the side closest to
the center point of the circular pattern.
See Also
Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box

Pattern control Specifies how the pattern is constructed.
Incremental array Draws a pattern with a set sweep angle between members.
Fit to arc Draws a pattern by evenly spacing members along an arc.
Rows Controls how pattern rows are arranged.
Single row Draws a single row of pattern members.
Multiple inward Draws multiple rows, each one closer to the pattern center than the last.
Multiple outward Draws multiple rows, each one farther away from the pattern center than
the last.
See Also
223
224
SECTION 7
Adding Text to Documents

You can add text to documents using different types of tools:
Placing Annotations (on page 225), such as text boxes and balloons.
Labels (on page 250), such as text labels and SmartLabels.

You also can add text using a drag-and-drop operation. For example, you can drag an Excel
spreadsheet to a document to create a bill of materials.
See Also
Engineering Fonts (on page 254)
Place a Text Box (on page 230)
Place a SmartLabel (on page 252)
Create a Text Label (on page 251)
Place a Revision Cloud (on page 242)
Placing Annotations
An essential part of the drawing process is adding text, notes, and annotations. Annotations are
text and graphics that give information about a drawing. You can add this information quickly
and easily with the text and annotation commands in the software.
To place annotations in a document, you can click one of the following buttons:
Text Box on the Draw toolbar
Balloon on the Dimension toolbar
225

Annotations with Leaders
When you create a balloon, you can place it with a leader by setting options on the ribbon. The
leader can point to another element or be placed in free space. Annotations with leaders have
the following components:
(A)
Leader line
(B)
Break line
(C)
Graphic end
(D)
Annotation
You can manipulate the annotation by selecting the leader and moving parts of it. You can
control the display of a leader break line and the graphic end and insert or delete vertices on a
leader.
Adding Leaders
You can add a leader to an annotation using Leader on the Dimension toolbar. All leaders
have two ends - the notation end and the graphic end. The notation end, or the end that
describes something, is often attached to a text box or the annotation itself; the graphic end is
the end near the object being described and frequently has a terminator arrow or free-space dot
on it. An annotation can have more than one leader. The graphic end of the annotation can point
to an element or be placed in free space. The notation end of a new leader must connect to an
annotation or the leader on an annotation.
226

You can create a callout by placing a text box and adding a leader to it with Leader
Annotations and Associations

Annotations can be associative or non-associative. An associative annotation moves when its
associated element moves. Text boxes differ from the other annotations in that they are always
non-associative.
If you attach the terminator of a leader to an element, the annotation moves with the element.
If you point the graphic end of a leader to free space, the annotation is not associative to any
element in the drawing. To make an annotation associative, you can select the graphic end of
the leader and drag it to an element.
Formatting Annotations
You can format an annotation several ways. If you want several annotations to look the same,
you can apply a style by selecting it on the ribbon. You can apply dimension styles to balloons,
but not text boxes. You can apply text styles to text boxes.
If you want to format an existing balloon, click the balloon leader to select the balloon.
Then, you can change the format of the balloon.
If you want annotations to look unique, you can select an annotation and edit its properties with
the ribbon or with Properties on the Edit menu.
See Also
Place a Balloon (on page 239)
Add a Leader (on page 245)
Move an Annotation (on page 228)
227
Move an Annotation
1. Select an annotation to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the parts of the
annotation, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a part of the annotation or a
handle.
2. Click a handle and drag the leader or annotation to its new location.
The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to move an annotation.
The following descriptions explain how to move specific parts of an annotation.
To move a terminator
1. When a terminator is connected to an element, drag the terminator handle to a new location
along the element. If you drag the handle off the end of an open element, such as a line, an
extension line automatically appears. The annotation and break line do not move.
228

2. When a terminator is connected to an element, disconnect the terminator by holding the ALT
key while you drag the terminator handle. The terminator type automatically changes to the
active setting for a terminator in free space.
3. To reconnect a terminator to an element, drag the terminator handle to an element. The

terminator type automatically changes to the active setting for a terminator connected to an
element.
To move a leader line

1. Click a leader line and then drag the break line of a leader. The break line and annotation
move and the leader line changes in length, but not orientation.
2. If a leader was placed with the Leader command, you can move the leader away from the
annotation and attach it to another annotation or element. Click the leader line and then drag
the handle to the annotation or leader that you want to connect to.
To move a handle
Click a leader line and do one of the following:
1. Drag the handle closest to the annotation to move the annotation.
229

2. Drag the handle on a break line to move the leader line and annotation.
3. Drag a vertex handle to a new location.
See Also
Placing Annotations (on page 225)
Place a Text Box

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Text Box
.
2. To place a text box, drag to define the location and size of the text box. To see the text box,
begin typing text.
When you place text by this method, the width measures exactly between the two
points. Text is wrapped, if necessary.
The height measures at least the height between the two points. If necessary, the height
of the text box increases to fit all of the text.
To place a text box, you can also click a point, and begin typing text. When you place text by
this method, the height and width are set to Auto mode. The size of the text box increases
automatically to contain all of the text. The text does not wrap.
You can also place a text box by double-clicking any element. A blinking pointer appears
below or in the center of the element.
You can press Enter to create a new line in a text box.
When you are in edit mode, a border appears around the text box.
To place a callout, you can add a leader to the text box using Leader on the Dimension
toolbar.
See Also
Text Box Handles

Text box handles manipulate the origin or the size of the text box while maintaining the
relationship between origin and justification.
230

Handles on text boxes appear as an X square, a hollow square, or a solid square.
An X handle indicates the origin of the text box. Selecting an X handle modifies the origin.
If you select a hollow handle, you move the text box; therefore, you are moving the origin of
the text box.
You select a solid handle to modify the text box along at least one axis. You do not modify
the origin.
See Also
Text Box Command

Places a text box in a document.
You can find this command on the Draw or Schematic toolbar.
See Also
Text Box Ribbon (on page 231)
Adding Text to Documents (on page 225)
Text Box Ribbon

Formats a text box.
the ToolTip.
Style Lists and applies the available styles.
Font Lists and applies the available fonts.
Font Size Applies a text size.
Text Color Sets the color of the font.
Bold Makes text bold.
Italic Italicizes text.
Underline Underlines text.
Paragraph Alignment Positions the paragraph to the left, center, or right of the text area
edges in edit mode.
You can also align the paragraph after you select text.
Border Displays three options for setting borders. These options allow you to display no
border, display a border, or display a border with a shadow.
More Displays more options on the ribbon.
Height Sets the height of the text box.
231

Width Sets the width of the text box.
If you select text in the text box, Height and Width are not available because the text is
driving the dimension.
If you select a text box and Height is not available, the text is driving Height with Auto
Save. The same is true for Width.
If you place a text box with a single point, both Height and Width are not available. If you
drag a text box, Width is not available.
Angle Sets the angle of the text box.
Horizontal Text Orientation Specifies that the text is oriented horizontally on or in the
document.
Vertical Text Orientation Specifies that the text is oriented vertically on or in the
document.
See Also
Resize a Text Box (on page 238)
Format a Text Box (on page 440)
More Text Box Ribbon Commands

Height Sets the height of the text box.
Width Sets the width of the text box.
If you select text in the text box, Height and Width are not available because the text is
driving the dimension.
If you select a text box and Height is not available, the text is driving Height with Auto
Save. The same is true for Width.
If you place a text box with a single point, both Height and Width are not available. If you
drag a text box, Width is not available.
Horizontal Text Orientation Specifies that the text is oriented horizontally on or in the
document.
Vertical Text Orientation Specifies that the text is oriented vertically on or in the
document.
Text Box Properties Dialog Box

Formats the font, paragraph, borders, or shading of a text box.
See Also
Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 233)
Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 233)
User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box) (on page 236)
Paragraph Tab (on page 422)
232

Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)
Border Specifies the appearance of a border around a text box.
Show border Displays the outline of the text box.
Border type Sets the shape of the border around a text box. You can choose from a
selection of common geometric shapes.
Line style Sets the line style for the text box.
Border color Sets the color of the border.
Line width Specifies the width of the border in paper or world units of the text box.
Paragraph separators Places a horizontal line between each paragraph in a text box. This
option is only available if Show Border is selected.
A paragraph is defined by a carriage return within the text body. Using the carriage return as the
sole means to create a new line of text will result in a text object with many lines as shown in the
following illustration:
As an alternative for controlling auto returns within the text body, you can restrain the width of
the box during placement or through the Text Box Properties dialog box.
Shadow Places a shadow around the borders of text in a text box.
Shadow offset Specifies a distance to offset the shadow in paper or world units of the text
box.
Fill color Displays the color of a solid fill on an element boundary. This value overrides the
style of the fill. Transparent is the default. When you set the fill color to transparent, no fill is
visible on the boundary. You can also apply a fill color option with a fill pattern. Filled elements
always cover other elements when they overlap. A fill color always appears behind the fill
pattern when you apply both to the same boundary.
See Also
Apply a Border to a Text Box (on page 237)
Edit a Text Box (on page 237)
Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Sheet Shows the drawing sheet for an element.
Layer Shows the layer on which an element appears in a drawing sheet.
Origin Specifies the coordinates, or location, of a text box along the x and y axes.
All metrics on the text box are either in paper units or world units except origin. Origin is
always in world units.
Width Sets the width of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto
(the text drives the width), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field.
Height Sets the height of the text box to either At Least (at least the value you specify), Auto
(the text drives the height), or Exactly (exactly at the value you specify) in the At: field.
233

The text box always rotates about the origin.
Text Orientation Sets the orientation of the text either horizontally or vertically.
Units Space Sets the text box units to either paper units or to world units.
Paper units represent units on an actual sheet of paper. Paper units are set in inches. Other
units are also available.
World units indicate real world distances, but can be scaled down to fit a sheet of paper.
Within the drawing environment, "world units" is synonymous with the term "model units"
found in other CAD packages.
Justification Specifies the placement relationship between the origin and the shape (text
box) according to the horizontal and vertical components.
The inside text area is an area that the margins of the text box define. That is, margins are
inside the outside edges of the text box.
The following graphic illustrates top (1), right (2), bottom (3) and left (4) margins around the text
box for horizontal justification (A) and vertical justification (B).
The maximum cap height of the first formatted text line of each line defines the text area capline,
even if the line has been clipped out of the text box.
The line baseline is a font metric that describes an imaginary line for location of characters. The
largest descender for any font on the line defines the baseline. Therefore, the largest descender
of the fonts used on the last line defines the text area baseline, even if the line is clipped out of
the text box.
The following graphic illustrates text cap area (a) and text baseline (b) for horizontal justification
(A) and vertical justification (B).
You must define horizontal and vertical components together. These components apply to both
single-line and multi-line text. For multi-line text, the cap height of the first line is used for the
capline of the text, and the descender of the last line is used for the baseline of the text.
234

Horizontal Specifies horizontal placement at six options based on shape (text box), text
area, and the text within the text box at left, center, and right positions.
Vertical Specifies vertical placement at 10 options based on shape (text box), text area, and
the text within the text box.
Text Baseline Specifies the text area baseline.
Text Top Specifies the top of the text area, which begins at the bottom of the top margin.
Text Capline Specifies the text area capline.
Text Half Ascender Specifies half the distance from the text area baseline to the top of
the text area.
Text Half Cap Specifies the distance half way between the text area capline and
baseline.
Text Center Specifies the center of the text area.
Text Bottom Specifies the bottom of the text area.
Shape Top Specifies the top edge of the shape.
Shape Center Specifies center of the shape.
Shape Bottom Specifies the bottom of the shape.
Text Alignment Specifies the placement of formatted text within the shape (text box).
You must define horizontal and vertical components together.
Horizontal Specifies how each paragraph is aligned within the block of formatted text:
Left Places the edge of the first line of text at the left of the text area.
Center Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.
Right Places the formatted text in the right of the text area.
If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all
paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info
tab.)
If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These properties
appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
Vertical Places the block of formatted text at Top, Center, Bottom, or Justify area of the
text box:
Top Places the edge of the first line of text at the top of the text area.
Center Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.
Bottom Places the formatted text in the bottom of the text area.
Justify Places the first line of the first paragraph at the top of the text area.
If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify the shape alignment properties. (These
properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify all the paragraph alignment properties for all
paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the
Info tab.)
Margins - Sets the distance between the edge of the shape and the edge of the text area.
Margins are in the same units as the text box.
Top Sets the distance between the top edge of the shape and the top edge of the text
area.
Bottom Sets the distance between the bottom edge of the shape and the bottom edge of
the text area.
235
Left Sets the distance between the left edge of the shape and the left edge of the text
area.
Right Sets the distance between the right edge of the shape and the right edge of the
text area.
See Also
Paragraph Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Text style Displays the style for a text box.
Font Lists and applies the available fonts.
Font size Applies a text size.
Font style Lists the available font styles.
Underline Underlines text.
Language Lists and applies a language for text in a text box. If you use text characters from
more than one language in a text box, the option you specify in this box determines the way the
lines wrap in the paragraph.
Units space Sets the paragraph to paper units or to world units. You can change this control
only when you are creating new styles from the Format Styles or Format Text Box dialog
boxes. When you view this control from the Properties dialog box, it is read-only. You can
change the control from the Info tab because all paragraphs contained within a text box must
exist in the same units.
Font size type Specify the method for measuring font size: Ascender, Cap, or Tile.
Text color - Sets the color of the text.
Alignment - Sets the alignment of the text.
Line spacing - Sets the line spacing of the text:
Single sets the line spacing for each line to display the largest font in the line.
1.5 sets the line space for the line to one-and-a-half that of single lines.
Double sets the line spacing for the line to twice that of single lines.
Paragraph spacing Specifies the amount of space before and after paragraphs. No spacing
exists before the first paragraph and or after the last paragraph.
Before Adds space before a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in
points.
After Adds space after a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in
points. You can set the units using Units on the Format menu.
See Also
User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)

Attribute Set Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Save Places the attribute set on the element that you selected.
Remove Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected.
236

Attributes Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the
box and press TAB.
Name Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set.
Type Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date.
Value Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can enter is based on the type that
you selected in the Type box.
Add Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the
table.
Delete Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a
row in the table.
See Also
Move a Text Box

Drag the text box to the location that you want.
If handles of the text box are displayed, drag the highlighted border of the text box (or
anywhere inside of the text box) to move itdragging one of the solid square handles resizes it.
See Also
Delete Text in a Text Box

1. Select the text that you want to delete in the text box.
2. Press DELETE on the keyboard.
See Also
Apply a Border to a Text Box

1. Select the text box to which you want to apply a border.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Properties.
3. On the Border and Fill tab of the Text Box Properties dialog box, set the options for the
type of border that you want.
You can also apply a border by selecting a text box and clicking Border on the ribbon.
To see a text box border that is greater than 2 mm, set Display As Printed on the View tab
of the Options dialog box.
See Also
Edit a Text Box

1. Select the text box that you want to edit.
2. Double-click the box.
237

3. Point to the location to edit the text and type the text that you want.
See Also
Resize a Text Box

1. Click a text box to display its handles.
2. Drag a handle until the text box is the size you want.
You cannot drag hollow handles.
See Also
Use Spell Checker

1. Click Tools > Spelling.
The Spelling dialog box appears when the first word not found in the Microsoft Word
main dictionary is found. The Suggestions box lists recommended replacements.
To leave the word unchanged: Click Ignore or click Ignore All.
To change the word not found: If necessary, click the desired word in the
Suggestions list, then click Change or Change All.
You can also type your replacement text in the Not in Dictionary box and then click
Change or Change All.
To leave the word unchanged, and add it to the custom dictionary: Click Add. To
leave the word unchanged and add it to the AutoCorrect list: Click AutoCorrect
2. Click OK when notified that the spell check is complete.
You can click Cancel to close the spell checker at any time.
If you need information on any of the spell checking options, click

Word Help.
to display Microsoft
Clicking the Options button in the Spelling dialog box will open the Spelling and
Grammar dialog box; however, you can only edit the options for specifying the custom
dictionary or the rules Word uses to check spelling. Word's grammar-check capabilities are not
functional in SmartSketch documents.
If no spelling errors are found, the Spelling dialog box will not display.
The Spell Checker checks text boxes and double-click labels. It does not check
SmartLabels, text embedded in symbols, or text inside a leader.
See Also
Labels (on page 250)
Spelling Command
Uses the Microsoft Word spell checker to identify misspelled words and unknown words (that is,
words that are not in Word's dictionary). You can choose the correction you want to make, or
you can make your own changes. This command is available only on the Tools menu.
238
Spelling Dialog Box

Displays possible spelling errors within the SmartSketch document and offers suggestions for
correcting the errors.
Dialog Box Options

Not in Dictionary - Displays a possible error, such as a misspelled word or a duplicated word.
The possible errors appear in highlighted text. You can edit the text in this box and then click
Change to accept the correction.
Suggestions - Lists suggested corrections for the highlighted text in the Not in Dictionary box.
Spelling error replacement word suggestions are from the main dictionary and open custom
dictionaries.
Ignore - Leaves the highlighted text unchanged and finds the next spelling error.
Ignore All - Leaves all instances of the highlighted text unchanged throughout the document
and continues to check the remainder of the document.
Add - Adds the highlighted word in the Not in Dictionary box to the custom dictionary.
Change - Accepts the current selection in the Suggestions box or accepts the edited text you
have entered in the Not in Dictionary box.
Delete - Deletes a duplicated word.
If the error is a duplicate word, the Change button becomes a Delete button.
Change All - Changes all instances of an error in the active document.
AutoCorrect - Corrects the spelling error; however, unlike the functionality that exists in
Microsoft Word, the software does not monitor words as they are typed and does not
automatically corrects them.
Options - Opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog box.
Word's grammar-check capabilities are not functional in SmartSketch documents.
Consequently, you can only edit the options for specifying the custom dictionary or the rules
Word uses to check spelling.
Undo - Reverses the most recent spelling check actions.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without making any changes to the active document.
Close - Closes the dialog box after a change has been accepted.
After a change has been accepted, the Cancel button changes to a Close button.
Place a Balloon
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Balloon
.
2. On the ribbon, set the options you want. In the Balloon Text box, type the text that you want
to appear in the balloon.
3. To place a balloon with a leader, click where you want to place the graphic end of the
leader. The graphic end can be on an element or a point in free space.
239

Click where you want to place the notation end of the leader.
To place a balloon without a leader, clear Leader and click the element to which to
attach the balloon. You can also click a point in free space.
See Also
Balloon Command (on page 240)
Balloon Ribbon (on page 240)
Balloon Command
Places a balloon containing text. You can use balloons to refer to an element or a point in
free space. You can set options for controlling the size and shape of the balloon, text
presentation, and leader display.
See Also
Balloon Ribbon (on page 240)
Balloon Ribbon
Determines the size and shape of the balloon and the text within the balloon.
Dimension Style Lists and applies the available styles.
Leader Displays the leader line.
Break Line Displays a horizontal break line at the notation end of a leader.
Height Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you enter is a ratio of the font size
defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon is the value you enter multiplied
by the dimension font size.
Text Specifies the text you want inside the balloon.
Shape Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of available shapes.
Sides Specifies the number of sides for the balloon. This option only appears when you
select an N-sided shape in the Shapes box on the ribbon.
240

See Also
Balloon Command (on page 240)
Balloon Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a balloon.
See Also
General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) (on page 241)
Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box) (on page 241)
General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box)

Balloon Text Enters text in the balloon.
Balloon Height Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you enter is a ratio of the font
size defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon is the value you enter
multiplied by the dimension font size.
Balloon Shape Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of available shapes.
Number Of Sides Sets the number of sides of an n-sided balloon shape. You must click ? in
the Shape list to use this option. You can then type the value you want.
See Also
Balloon Properties Dialog Box (on page 241)
Format a Dimension or Annotation (on page 440)
Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog Box)

Text - Specifies how the text appears in a balloon annotation.
Font - Specifies the font to use for the text in the balloon annotation.
Font Style - Specifies the font style to use, such as bold or italic, for the text in the balloon
annotation.
Font Size - Displays the text size. You can type a size in the box.
Leader and projection line

Specifies how the leader and projection line are displayed.
Break Line - Displays a horizontal break line where the leader line meets the annotation text.
Enter a value to specify the size of the break line. For example, when Break Line is set to 1, the
break line looks like the following picture.
Element Gap - Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element to which
the leader is attached. This value is a ratio of the font size. This option is disabled for balloons.
Extension - Sets the distance that the leader line extends beyond the dimension. This value is a
ratio of the font size. This option is disabled for balloons.
Color and Width

Color - Sets the color of an annotation.
241

Width - Sets the line width of all lines in an annotation.
Type - Specifies the line type.
Terminator
Type - Sets the terminator type. Click different parts of the following picture to find out which
terminator type you want to use.
Length - Sets the length of the terminator. This value is a ratio of the font size. For example, in
the following picture, the length is set to three times the size of the font.
See Also
Leader Properties Dialog Box (on page 247)
Place a Revision Cloud

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Revision Cloud .
2. On the ribbon, select the size of the arcs you want to place in the Arc Mode list.
3. In the Caption box, type the text you want to place as a label for the revision cloud.
If you don't want a label generated, leave the Caption box blank.
4. Click a point in the drawing to indicate the start point for the revision cloud, and then move
the mouse to sketch the revision cloud.
242

As you move the mouse, the software displays the outline of the revision cloud in red.
5. To close the revision cloud, click again.

End drawing the revision cloud near the point where you started drawing so that the
final closing arc is not disproportionate in size to the other arcs that comprise the revision
cloud.
6. If you typed text in the Caption field, the software displays the label in a red rectangle on
your cursor at the bottom center of the revision cloud. Do one of the following:
Drag the rectangle to the appropriate location and then click to place it.
Right-click to place the label at the default location (bottom center of the revision cloud).
To move a revision cloud after placement, select the revision cloud and drag it to the
appropriate location.
You cannot modify the shape or the size of a revision cloud after placement.
Revision Cloud Command

Places a cloud around objects in a drawing. Prior to placement, you can define an arc size small, medium, large, or random. You can also place a label within the revision cloud or add
semi-transparent fill within its boundaries.
See also
Revision Cloud Ribbon (on page 244)
243
Revision Cloud Ribbon

Determines the size and shape of the revision cloud and the text within the revision cloud.
Style - Sets the line style for the revision cloud.
Line Color - Sets the line color for the revision cloud. You can click More to define custom
colors with the Colors dialog box.
Line Type - Sets the revision cloud line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width for the revision cloud.
Arc Mode - Defines the size of the arcs that are placed as you draw the revision cloud. You can
specify that the arc sizes be drawn randomly, or you can specify that they are all either small,
medium, or large.
Caption - Specifies the text to be placed as a label for the revision cloud. If you do not want a
label to be automatically generated, leave the caption blank.
Fill Cloud? - Indicates whether or not the cloud is filled with a semi-transparent yellow fill. For
no fill, leave the checkbox empty. The following illustration shows a revision cloud with that was
drawn with the Fill Cloud? option turned on.
See also
244
Add a Leader
1. On the Dimensions toolbar, click Leader .

2. Click a text box, callout, or another leader to place the notation end of the leader.
3. Click any element to place the graphic end of the leader, or click in free space.
You can place either end of a leader first.

After you place one end of the leader, the command only allows you to select an element
that is valid for placing the other end of the leader. For example, if you add the notation end
of the leader to a text box, the command then allows you to select only elements that are
valid for placing the graphic end of a leader. You could select a circle, but not another text
box.
If you want to add a leader to a balloon, you can set an option on the Balloon ribbon. To
select an existing balloon, you must click the leader of the balloon.
See Also
Leader Command (on page 246)
Leader Ribbon (on page 246)
245
Leader Command
Adds a leader to an annotation or to another leader. All leaders have two ends the notation
end and the graphic end. The notation end is the end that describes something and is often
attached to a text box or annotation; the graphic end is the end near the object being described
and frequently has a terminator arrow or free-space dot on it. You can place either end of the
leader first.
You can attach the notation end of a leader to one of the following:
Text box
Balloon
Another leader on a dimension or annotation
You can place the graphic end of a leader in one of the following ways:
Attach it to an element.
Place it in free space.
See Also
Leader Ribbon (on page 246)
Leader Ribbon
Dimension Style Lists and applies the available styles.
Break Line Displays a horizontal break line at the notation end of a leader.
Automatic Shape Connection Behavior Specifies automatic, shape-changing
connection point behavior for the notation (end) reference. If the option is selected, the notation
end of the leader uses information from the notation object in combination with the current
leader position to determine the attachment point and break line direction. If the option is not
selected, the notation end of the leader attaches to the point on the notation object that was
selected when the leader was created, and the break line direction will not automatically break
away from the notation object.
Break Line Along If the option is selected, the break line displays at an angle along the
notation object according to information provided by the object. For example, if a text box is at
an angle, the break line displays parallel to the text box at the same angle. If the option is not
selected, the break line remains in a horizontal position regardless of the angle of the notation
object.
Notation Object Attachment Lock Locks the notation end of the leader to the notation
object so that any drag/modify operations on the leader will not detach it from the object.
Graphic Object Attachment Lock Locks the graphic end of the leader to the graphic
object so that any drag/modify operations on the leader will not detach it from the object.
246

See Also
Leader Properties Dialog Box

Edits the properties of an element to which you have added a leader using Add Leader.
See Also
Insert a Vertex in a Leader

1. Select a leader to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the leader, the pointer
changes to show whether you are on a leader or a handle.
2. Position the pointer over the leader where you want to insert a vertex.
3. Hold the ALT key and click.
4. Drag the handle to position the new vertex.
You cannot insert a vertex on the horizontal break line of a leader.
247

See Also
Delete a Vertex from a Leader

1. Select the leader that has the vertex you want to delete. This displays its handles. As you
move the pointer over the leader, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a leader
or a handle.
2. Position the pointer over the vertex you want to delete.
3. Hold the ALT key and click the handle on the vertex.
See Also
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
248
and place a text box.
On the Dimension toolbar, click Character Map

.
On the font character chart, click the character you want to insert.
Click Select.
Continue to click the characters you want, clicking Select after you click each character.
On the Unicode Character Map dialog box, click Copy to copy the characters to the
Clipboard.

7. Click inside the text box where you want to paste the characters.
8. Press Ctrl-V to paste.
Character Map Command

Inserts a character into a text box using a different font. You can also insert special
characters that do not have corresponding keys on the keyboard. You can use this command
when you type or edit text in a text box.
If you are running Windows 95 or a higher version and this command is not available, you
must install the Character Map accessory. You can add it by clicking the Control Panel icon
and then the Add/Remove Programs icon. While adding the software, you can find the
Character Map software in the Accessories category. For detailed instructions on how to add
the Character Map accessory, see the Windows 95 on-line Help for Add/Remove Programs.
To place the Character Map button on a toolbar, click Tools > Customize to open the
Customize dialog box. On the Toolbars tab, select Tools from the Categories list. Click
and drag Character Map
to an existing toolbar.
See Also
Unicode Character Map Dialog Box (on page 249)
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box (on page 248)
Unicode Character Map Dialog Box

Selects special characters for inserting into a text box. For additional information about using
Character Map, click the Help button in the Character Map dialog box.
Font Lists the available fonts.
Help Opens the online documentation for using Character Map effectively and efficiently.
Characters to copy Displays selected characters to copy to the Clipboard.
Select Copies selected characters to the Characters to copy box.
Copy Copies the selected characters from the Characters to copy box to the Clipboard.
Advanced view Lets you display groups of characters to help in refining a search of a
character's Unicode value. When you check the Advanced view check box, the Character Map
dialog box displays additional options.
Character set Specifies the character set you want to search. If a character set is not
available, choose a different font from the Fonts list.
Go to Unicode Allows you to type the four-digit Unicode value for the character you are
looking for. This option is only enabled if you have selected Unicode in the Character set list.
Group by Specifies the group you want to use for your search. If you select Unicode
Subrange, a list of category characters is displayed.
Search for Allows you to type all or part of the name of the character for which you are
searching.
Search Executes the search based on the criteria you have defined.
See Also
Character Map Command (on page 249)
249
Labels
Technical drawings often have many labels that display important information about the objects
or elements in the document. There are two types of labels: text labels and SmartLabels.
Text labels are associated with an element or object. If you move the element or object, the text
label moves with it. You can create text labels in a document by double-clicking an element or
object. A text label appears near the element so that you can type text. The label appears at the
location where the element is double-clicked, except for closed elements, such as a circle or
rectangle. The label position on closed elements is the center of the element. When you enter
the text that you want, the text label orients itself with the element.
Another kind of label, a SmartLabel, can be associated to an object or element's text attributes.
A SmartLabel is often distinguished by a question mark in the display.
A SmartLabel displays the attributes of the element or object as text in the document. You can
drag SmartLabels from the Symbol Explorer into the current document. SmartLabels have an
.sym extension. As you change an element's or object's attributes in the Attribute Viewer or the
Properties dialog box, the SmartLabel's text displays those changes.
250

If an element or object has no attributes, and you drag a SmartLabel to it, the element or object
picks up the attributes of the SmartLabel. For example, you might want to assign attributes to a
heat exchanger, such as pressure and material type. If the SmartLabel has the pressure and
material type defined, and the heat exchanger does not, the SmartLabel's pressure and material
type are copied to the heat exchanger.
If an element already has existing attributes, a SmartLabel placed on the element displays the
values for the existing attributes. For example, if the heat exchanger already has values for
pressure and material type attributes, the values of those attributes are filled in for a SmartLabel
placed on the heat exchanger.
Not all SmartLabels assume the text attributes of an element or object. Some SmartLabels
contain shapes that grow automatically if you add text to the SmartLabel.
See Also
Edit a Text Label (on page 252)
Edit a SmartLabel (on page 253)
Create a Text Label

1. Double-click an element or object. A small, blinking pointer appears below the element or
object. For a closed element, the pointer appears in the center of that element
2. Type the text in the label.
3. Click outside the label to complete it. The text label rotates to align with the element or
object to which it is associated.
You can edit a text label like a text box.
251

See Also
Move a Label (on page 252)
Edit a Text Label

1. Double-click the label.
2. Type the text in the label.
3. Click a point outside the label to complete the operation. The text label rotates to align with
the element or object to which it is associated.
You can format a text label like a text box. Select the label and right-click. On the shortcut
menu, click Edit Text Properties.
See Also
Move a Label
If a text label or Smart Labelis associated with an element or object, drag the element or
object. The label moves with the element or object.
If a label is not associated with an element or object, drag the label.
See Also
Place a SmartLabel
1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer
.
2. Browse to the directory.
3. Drag the SmartLabel into the document. If you place the SmartLabel near an element in the
document, the SmartLabel is associated with that element.
See Also
Place Multiple Labels

1. Click the Select Tool on the Schematic toolbar.
2. Double-click the symbol that you want to add a label to. A cursor appears below the symbol.
Double-click the symbol away from any existing labels.
3. Type the text.
4. Right-click your mouse to deselect the text command.
252
The associated label will move with the symbol.

The symbol label text can be edited by double-clicking on the label.
The associated label can be moved by selecting it, unlocking it, and moving it to the desired
location.

A small green lock represents a lock handle. You click the lock handle to unlock the
symbol. Unlocking allows you to move a symbol away from the element to which the symbol is
associated.
See Also
Edit a SmartLabel
1. Double-click an element or object.
2. In the Attribute Viewer, type the values that you want for the label.
You can edit the properties or parameters of a SmartLabel.

You can also edit the properties of the elements or text in the SmartLabel. Select the
SmartLabel and then click Edit Graphic Properties or Edit Text Properties on the shortcut
menu.
If you place a symbol with a SmartLabel in a document, you cannot select or open the
SmartLabel to edit it like most symbols. You must create a new SmartLabel.
See Also
Edit Text Properties Command (Shortcut Menu)

Allows you to edit the properties of the text in a SmartLabel.
You must select a SmartLabel before you can select this command on the shortcut menu.
For more information, see Text Box Properties Dialog Box (on page 232).
See Also
Edit Graphic Properties Command (Shortcut Menu)

Allows you to edit the properties of the elements in a SmartLabel.
You must select a SmartLabel before you can select this command on the shortcut menu.
Element Properties Dialog Box (on page 433)
Fill Properties Dialog Box (on page 447)
Group Properties Dialog Box (on page 365)
SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box (on page 438)
See Also
Edit a SmartLabel (on page 253)
253
Engineering Fonts
The engineering fonts delivered with the software contain industry-specific fonts, special
characters, and symbols that you can use to annotate engineering drawings. These fonts
include degree symbols, diameter symbols, and other special characters and symbols that are
not usually included in a typical word processing package.
Your choice of font should be based on the industry for which you are creating engineering
drawings.
The software provides TrueType fonts; with TrueType fonts, what you see on the screen is
what appears on the printed page. The screen display of the document closely matches the
printed document.
When you open a .dwg or .dgn document, the software provides a default mapping to determine
which TrueType font will be assigned to which AutoCAD or MicroStation font. You can make
changes to this mapping to define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with
Options on the Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click the appropriate Options.
See Also
254
SECTION 8
Drawing with Relationships

As you move the pointer, the software automatically updates values in the ribbon, giving you
constant feedback on the size and position of the element you are drawing. As you draw, the
software shows a temporary, dynamic display of the element you are drawing by the
pointerthis feedback is called a relationship indicator. This temporary display shows the look
of the elements if you place the element at the current location.
The software gives you more information about the element that you are drawing by displaying
relationships between the temporary, dynamic element and the following items:
Other elements in the drawing
Horizontal and vertical orientations
Origin of the element that you are drawing
When the software recognizes a relationship, it displays a relationship indicator at the pointer.
As you move the pointer, the software updates the indicator to show new relationships. If a
relationship indicator appears by the pointer when you click to draw the element, the software
applies that relationship to the element.
Relationship
Relationship Indicator
End point
Midpoint
Intersection
Horizontal
Vertical
Point On Element
Perpendicular
Parallel
Tangent
Center
255

For example, if the horizontal relationship indicator appears when you click to place the second
end point of a line, then the line is exactly horizontal.
Relationships
You can set the types of relationships you want the software to recognize using SmartSketch
Settings on the Tools menu. The software can recognize one or two relationships at a time.
When the software recognizes two relationships, it displays both relationship indicators at the
pointer.
Locate Zone
You do not have to move the pointer to an exact position for the software to recognize a
relationship. The software recognizes relationships for any element within the locate zone of the
pointer. The circle around the pointer crosshair or at the end of the pointer arrow indicates the
locate zone. You can change the size of the locate zone with SmartSketch Settings on the
Tools menu.
Infinite Elements
The software recognizes the Point On Element relationship for lines and arcs as if these
elements were infinite. In the following example, the software recognizes a Point On Element
relationship when you position the pointer directly over an element and also when you move the
pointer off the element.
See Also
Maintain Relationships (on page 264)
Draw with Relationships (on page 261)
Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command (on page 263)
256
Display the Relationship Toolbar
On the Main toolbar, click Relationships
Using Relationships as You Draw

You can use relationships to capture and remember your design intent as your sketch. You can
make your drawings associative by applying those relationshipsor you can sketch designs that
do not use relationships.
How Relationships Affect a Drawing

You can move and change an element that does not use relationships in various ways without
affecting other parts of the design. For example, when no relationships exist between two lines,
you can move and change each line without affecting the other.
When you modify a part of a drawing that has a relationship to another part of the drawing, the
other part updates automatically. For example, if you apply a perpendicular relationship between
the two lines and move one line, the other line moves with it. The software remembers the
relationship between these two elements and always maintains the perpendicular relationship
between the lines. You can manipulate either of the two lines and the software will move or
modify the line automatically to maintain the relationship.
Applying and maintaining relationships in the design simplifies changes to the design later. In
the following drawing, all the relationships were automatically established as the design took
shape on the drawing sheet. If you want to change the design, you simply modify one segment
of it and all the relationships are maintained.
Applying and Maintaining Relationships

You can place elements that are related to each other as you draw. First, you must set Maintain
Relationships on the Relationship toolbar.
You can also set Maintain Relationships using the Tools menu.
Then, as you click commands on the Draw toolbar and place lines, arcs, and circles, you should
watch the relationship indicators that appear by the pointer. When a relationship indicator
appears by the pointer, you can click to apply that relationship to the element that you are
drawing.
Visualizing Maintained Relationships

When you apply relationships, relationship handles appear on the related elements. The
handles are symbols that show how elements are related. You can display or hide the
relationship handles in your drawings by setting or clearing Relationship Handles on the Tools
menu.
Relationship
Relationship Handle
Colinear
Connect
Concentric
Equal
257

Relationship
Relationship Handle
Horizontal/Vertical
Tangent
Symmetric
Parallel
Perpendicular
Lock
For example, the following four lines appear with relationship handles (A) turned off and with
relationship handles (B) displayed.
Applying Relationships to Existing Geometry

You can apply relationships to geometry after you place it with the buttons on the Relationship
toolbar. These buttons include parallel, tangent, connect, and so on. You can use relationships
created with these buttons if you set Maintain Relationships on the Relationship toolbar.
Removing Relationships
You can quit using all the relationships that you have applied to the drawing if you clear
Maintain Relationships. You can also remove individual relationships by selecting a
relationship handle and deleting it. Clearing Relationship Handles on the Tools menu hides
the handles, but the relationships are still maintained and used in the design.
When to Maintain Relationships

Maintaining relationships makes designing more productive and revisions much easier.
However, relationships can slow drawing and changes on large data sets. You should decide
whether to use relationships depending on the speed of your computer and the importance of
easy revision.
For conceptual sketching and diagrams, you might want to use relationships by setting Maintain
Relationships. This method allows you to quickly get your ideas on paper and revise them
easily using direct modification and driving dimensions. The kinds of projects in which you might
want to use relationships include mechanical concepts, architectural details, layouts, and
schematic diagrams.
When to Design Without Relationships

For more complex projects where you initially need to draw with precision, you should not use
relationships in the document. You can then draw with precision by using the PinPoint tool and
entering values on ribbons. You can still use relationships within symbols. The kinds of projects
258

in which you might want to draw without relationships include multiple-view drawings, floor
plans, maps, and detailed designs.
If you switch between using relationships and not using them while you draw, you can
receive confusing results.
See Also
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line (on page 653)
Intent Zones
As you draw and modify elements, small quadrants called intent zones appear next to the
pointer. The software uses intent zones to interpret your intentions as you draw. Intent zones
allow you to draw and modify elements many ways using few commands. You do not need to
select a different command for every type of element.
How Intent Zones Work

When you click to begin drawing certain elements, the software divides the region around the
clicked position into intent zones. By moving the pointer into one of these intent zones on the
way to your next click location, you can tell the software what you want to do next.
The last intent zone you move the pointer into is the active zone. To change the active intent
zone, move the mouse pointer into the zone you want to use, and then move it to the position
where you want to click next. You can change the size of the intent zones using SmartSketch
Settings on the Tools menu.
Drawing Tangent or Perpendicular Arcs

You can use intent zones to change the result of Tangent Arc. To draw an arc tangent to a line,
first click a point on the line to place the first end point of the arc. Then move the pointer through
the tangent intent zone and click to place the second end point of the arc.
If you want to draw a perpendicular arc instead, you can move the pointer back into the intent
zone region and out through the perpendicular zone before clicking to place the second end
point of the arc. The arc is then perpendicular to the line.
You can also use intent zones to define the arc direction.
259

Drawing Arcs by Three Points
When you use Arc by 3 Points, intent zones allow you to input the three points in any order.
You can also use intent zones to change the arc direction.
Drawing Lines Tangent or Connected to Curved Elements

Using intent zones with Line/Arc Continuous, you can draw a line tangent to a circle or arc. Or
you can draw a line that is connected to the circle or arc, but not tangent to it.
See Also
260
Draw with Relationships

1. Set the SmartSketch options so that the software recognizes the relationships you want to
use. You can set the options with SmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu.
2. On the Draw toolbar, click a drawing command.
3. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet to find relationships.
4. Click when the software recognizes a relationship you want to use for the element you are
drawing. When you click with a relationship indicator displayed at the pointer, the
relationship is established in the drawing.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship handles as you draw.
These relationships are maintained when you modify the drawing.
See Also
Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained (on page 645)
Connect Points While Drawing a Line (on page 646)
Establish More Than One Relationship (on page 654)
Relationships Command
Displays the Relationship toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to create
relationships between two drawing elements.
To maintain the relationship between elements when you modify either one of the
elements, you must set Maintain Relationships
on the Relationship toolbar.
See Also
Display the Relationship Toolbar (on page 257)
SmartSketch Settings Command

Sets up what relationships are recognized by the software. The relationships selected on the
SmartSketch dialog box are recognized as you draw.
See Also
Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained (on page 645)
Establish More Than One Relationship (on page 654)
SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box (on page 262)
261
SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box

Customizes the operation of the software in recognizing and placing relationships. You can set
pointer behavior and specify which relationships are recognized as you draw.
See Also
Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) (on page 262)
Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) (on page 262)
Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box)

This tab allows you select the relationships that are recognized by the software as you draw. Set
the relationships you want to recognize, and clear the relationships you do not want to
recognize. Clear all relationships so that the software does not place relationship handles.
See Also
Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box)

Cursor Setup Sets the sizes of the Locate Zone and Intent Zone around the pointer.
Locate Zone Sets the size of the locate zone radius. The locate zone is a region around the
pointer.
The software recognizes relationships based on elements within the locate zone so that you do
not have to move the pointer to an exact position. For example, if part of an element is within the
locate zone, the software recognizes a Point On relationship. The size of the locate zone is
indicated by a circle around the center of the pointer crosshair. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are
valid.
Intent Zone Sets the size of the intent zone radius. Intent zones allow drawing commands to
interpret your intentions as you draw. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are valid.
Preview Shows the size of the locate zone and the symbol for the selected relationship.
The Preview option does not apply to changes made to intent zone values.
See Also
262
Suspend Relationships
1. Hold ALT. The software does not recognize any relationships while you hold this key.
2. Release ALT to re-activate the software's ability to recognize relationships.
See Also
SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261)
Drawing with Relationships (on page 255)
Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command

1. Click Maintain Relationships
on the Relationship toolbar.
If the Relationship toolbar is not displayed, click Relationships

on the Main
toolbar.
You can also click Tools > Maintain Relationships to toggle on and off the Maintain
Relationships command.
2. Draw as usual. The software automatically establishes recognized relationships. For each
relationship, a relationship handle is placed on the related elements.
Relationships cannot be established in certain cases.
See Also
Drawing with Relationships (on page 255)
Alignment Indicator Command

Displays dashed lines to show horizontal or vertical alignment while you draw or modify
elements. Alignment indicators work similarly to relationship indicators. If you click when a
horizontal or vertical indicator line is displayed, the element you are drawing or modifying will be
horizontally or vertically aligned with the element the indicator line leads to.
The Alignment Indicator command is also available on the Relationship toolbar (on page
48).
See Also
Delete a Relationship
If the relationship handles are hidden, click Relationship Handles on the Relationship
toolbar to display them.
1. Select a relationship handle.
2. Press DELETE.
See Also
Relationship Handles Command (on page 264)
263
Maintain Relationships
Click Maintain Relationships
on the Relationships toolbar.
If the Relationships toolbar is not displayed, click Relationships

You can also click Tools > Maintain Relationships.
When Maintain Relationships is set and you apply relationships to new or existing elements,
the software places relationship handles on the elements. Elements that share relationships are
associative; when you move an element, the other elements on the drawing sheet move
according to the relationships they have with the element that you moved.
See Also
Maintain Relationships Command (on page 264)
Maintain Relationships Command

Places relationship handles as you draw. When this option is turned on, the software places
relationship handles for relationships that the software recognizes, and for relationships that you
apply using the commands on the Relationship toolbar.
You can also use Tools > Maintain Relationships to toggle this command on and off.
The Maintain Relationships command is also available on the Relationship toolbar.
See Also
Display or Hide Relationship Handles

Click Tools > Relationship Handles to turn on and turn off the display of relationship handles.
If a checkmark appears next to Relationship Handles, the display is on.
You can also click Relationship Handles
relationship handles on and off.
on the Relationship toolbar to toggle
See Also
Relationship Handles Command

Displays any relationship handles on elements.
The Relationship Handles command is also available on the Relationship toolbar.
See Also
Relationship toolbar (on page 48)
Delete a Relationship (on page 263)
Display or Hide Relationship Handles (on page 264)
264
Lock an Element or Key Point

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Lock.
2. Click an element or key point to lock the element and prevent it from being modified.
See Also
Lock Command (on page 265)
Lock Command
Controls elements so they cannot be modified. When you use this button, you can lock the
length, angle, radius, or position of an element. You can also lock keypoints on elements, such
as endpoints of a line or the center of a circle, in their absolute positions.
See Also
Lock an Element or Key Point (on page 265)
Insert a Detail View

1. Click Insert > Detail View.
2. Click the shape of the detail view, either Circular or Rectangular.
3. Click the Caption box and type a caption that the software places with the drawing detail.
You can define the active font for the Detail View caption by using Format > Text Box.
4. Select a scale for the drawing detail in the Scale Factor box.
You can click the scale factor box and type a value instead of selecting an available
value from the pull down list.
5. Select an existing sheet for displaying the detail view in the Place detail on: combo box.
6. Select the Display envelope check box to display the boundary of the detailed view on the
drawing.
When displayed, detail view boundaries (envelopes) can be moved to a different
location in the drawing to change the contents of the detail view. To do this, click the detail
view envelope in the drawing. Then using the displayed center point, drag the envelope to
a new location in the drawing. The contents of the detail view update to reflect the location
of the envelope.
You can use the F5 key to redraw (update) a detail view.

The detail view is a SmartFrame. You can edit its properties by selecting the detail view and
displaying the shortcut menu.
The envelope, labels, and detail view can all be moved to different locations at any time.
Labels can be edited at any time.
The contents inside a detail view cannot be edited; however, if the contents inside the
envelope are modified, changes are reflected in the detail view once the screen is repainted.
If the detail view is deleted, the envelope and associated labels are also deleted. However, if
the envelope or any labels are deleted, the detail view will remain.
All detail views placed in the document are saved when you save the file as an AutoCAD
DWG file. SmartSketch automatically creates a separate sheet in the resulting DWG file
265

that contains detail view(s). The name of each generated sheet corresponds to the name of
the sheet in SmartSketch containing the detail view(s). For example, if sheet25 contains one
or more detail views in the SmartSketch document, the resulting AutoCAD DWG file will
automatically create a sheet named sheet25, which contains the detail view(s).
See Also
Detail View Ribbon (on page 266)
Detail View Command (on page 266)
Detail View Command

Places either a circular or rectangular detail view into your drawing.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Detail View button on a toolbar.
See Also
Detail View Ribbon (on page 266)
Insert a Detail View (on page 265)
Detail View Ribbon

Places a detail view based on graphics inside a user-defined envelope. This command is
accessed via the Insert menu.
Circular detail - Places a detail with a circular envelope and detail view shape.
Rectangular detail - Places a detail with a rectangular envelope and detail view shape.
Caption - Specifies the label for the envelope and detail.
Scale Factor - Specifies the factor to which the detail view is scaled.
You can either select a value from the drop-down list, or type a value of your own.
Place detail on - Specifies the sheet in the document in which the detail is to be placed.
Display envelope - Turns on or off the display of the detail envelope.
See Also
Insert a Detail View (on page 265)
266
SECTION 9
Drawing Precisely
Engineering and architectural diagrams and drawings require accurate measurements and
precise positioning of elements and symbols. The software provides a variety of positioning and
dimensioning tools that are easy to use but powerful enough for the most complex drawings.
Many types of drawings require a drawing scale that makes it possible to represent very large or
very small objects on a sheet of paper. You can set up your drawings with the drawing scale and
measurement units you need to create a wide range of drawings.
When you are positioning elements and symbols on a drawing sheet, speed and precision
count. You can easily align symbols with other symbols or with locations indicated by guides,
rulers, and grids. You can also position symbols at exact x-and y-coordinates in your drawing.
You can also display the dimensions of elements in your drawings. With the software's
measurement and dimensioning tools, you can calculate and display linear and angular
dimensions. When you resize an element that has attached dimensions, the dimensions update
automatically.
See Also
Aligning SmartSketch Objects (on page 336)
Placing Elements with a Grid (on page 271)
Placing Elements in Precise Locations

PinPoint is a tool that helps you draw and modify elements relative to known positions in a
drawing. You can place a target point and then the software dynamically displays the horizontal
and vertical distance between the pointer and the target point. You can use PinPoint with all
element drawing commands. You can run PinPoint from the Tools menu or the Main toolbar.
How PinPoint Works

PinPoint allows you to provide coordinate input to commands as you draw. The x and y
coordinates are relative to a target point that you can position anywhere in the window. You can
change the location of the target point at any time by clicking Reposition Target on the ribbon
and then clicking a new position in the window.
As you move the pointer around, PinPoint dynamically displays the horizontal and vertical
distance between the pointer position and the target point. Help lines show the PinPoint X- and
Y-axis and the PinPoint orientation.
Locking and Freeing Values

You can lock the x coordinate or the y coordinate using the X and Y boxes on the ribbon. When
one coordinate value is locked, you can position the other coordinate by clicking a position in the
window. Or you can set both values using the ribbon boxes. If you want to free the dynamics for
a locked value, you can clear the value box by double-clicking in the box and pressing
Backspace or Delete.
267
Drawing Precisely
PinPoint Orientation
In its default orientation, PinPoint's x-axis is horizontal. You can re-orient the x-axis to any
angle by setting the angle on the PinPoint ribbon. The figure shows the PinPoint angle set to
20 degrees.
See Also
PinPoint Command (on page 270)
Re-Orient PinPoint (on page 269)
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point (on page 269)
Draw with PinPoint

.
2. Click where you want the target point to be and run any drawing command. As you move
the pointer, PinPoint displays the coordinates of the current mouse location in relation to
the target point. To provide precision input to the current command, click when the
coordinate display indicates that the pointer is in the correct position or type coordinate
values in the X and Y ribbon boxes.
You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid
Snap.
When the pointer reaches a distance from the target point that is a multiple of the Step
Value set on the ribbon, the related coordinate value and help line become bold.
If you know the exact x and y distances from the target point that you want to use as
command input, you can type the values in the X and Y ribbon boxes.
When the PinPoint ribbon is active, you can use your function keys to toggle on/off the
PinPoint command (F9), lock the X: box for data input (F10), or lock the Y: box for data input
(F11).
You can type a known x or y value into the X or Y ribbon box to lock one axis position, then
graphically define the coordinate for the other axis.
You can move the target point at any time. Click Reposition on the ribbon, and then click
where you want the target point to be.
You can re-orient the PinPoint x axis. Type a positive value in the Angle box on the
PinPoint ribbon to rotate the axis counterclockwise, or a negative value to rotate the axis
clockwise.
See Also
Draw a Line with PinPoint (on page 654)
268
Drawing Precisely
Move an Element with PinPoint and the Select Tool

You can use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise distance in X and Y
relative to a known position in your drawing.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool

.
3. Click the location that you want for the PinPoint target point to be.
4. Using the Select tool, point to the element that you want to move. Relationship indicators
appear next to the pointer to indicate keypoints on the element.
5. When the relationship indicators identify the key point that you want, drag the element.
PinPoint displays the distance between the pointer and the reference point as you drag.
6. Release the mouse button when the element is where you want it.
See Also
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point

On the PinPoint ribbon, click Reposition Target . The target point is attached to the
pointer. Click where you want the target point to be.
Press F12. The target point moves to the current pointer location.
See Also
Re-Orient PinPoint
The default PinPoint orientation is with the PinPoint x axis horizontal. To re-orient the PinPoint
x axis, type an angle in the ribbon Angle box. A positive value rotates the horizontal axis
counterclockwise. A negative value rotates the axis clockwise. The y axis is automatically
re-positioned to remain perpendicular to the x axis.
See Also
269
Drawing Precisely
PinPoint Command
Helps you draw elements with precision by displaying coordinate data at the pointer. The
displayed coordinates are relative to a target position that you set and can reset at any time.
Using PinPoint, you can draw elements at known locations on the drawing sheet, draw
elements known distances apart, and so forth. You can use PinPoint with all drawing
commands.
You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid
Snap.
See Also
PinPoint Ribbon (on page 270)
PinPoint Ribbon
Display On/Off (F9) - Displays or hides the PinPoint help lines and distance values.
Reposition Target (F12) - Attaches the target point to the pointer so that you can reposition
the target point. Click where you want the target point to be.
Relative Tracking - When toggled on, PinPoint is in relative mode such that the PinPoint
target moves to the last point clicked during a drawing command.
Define PinPoint Origin - Activates the Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon (on page 271)
containing fields for X & Y values which define a document origin for PinPoint.
To save this origin, you must select the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define
PinPoint Origin ribbon bar.
Reposition Target to Origin - Moves the PinPoint target to the X,Y position that was saved
using the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar.
Angle - Specifies the angle of the PinPoint x help line relative to its default horizontal
orientation. Positive values rotate the horizontal line counterclockwise. Negative values rotate
the horizontal line clockwise.
Step - Specifies the PinPoint step value. The step value is an incremental distance along the
PinPoint coordinate axes. When the distance between the target position and the current
pointer location is an increment of the step value, the related coordinate value and help line
become bold.
See Also
270
Drawing Precisely
Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon

When you click the Define PinPoint Origin
PinPoint Origin ribbon bar is displayed.
button on the PinPoint ribbon bar, the Define
the ToolTip.
Save PinPoint Origin Saves the currently displayed X and Y values for each sheet in the
document.
Target X Locks the horizontal distance between the target point and the current pointer
location to the value you type.
Target Y Locks the vertical distance between the target point and the current pointer location
to the value you type.
See Also
PinPoint Ribbon (on page 270)
Placing Elements with a Grid

The grid and its grid lines allow you to place elements in the document by aligning them with the
grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You can use the grid if you want the elements
to line up at regular intervals in the document.
The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document. When you use the View > Grid Snap
command, elements always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You
can view the grid by clicking View > Grid Display. The grid lines do not print.
You can change the display of the grid from static to dynamic by setting options on the View tab
of the Options dialog box. You can also adjust the brightness of the grid display using the View
> Grid Brightness command.
When you zoom in or out, the grid lines for a dynamic grid are generated dynamically. You can
set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium, or coarse levels. The grid lines appear at
common major measurement increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with
the darker, solid grid lines.
A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. You can set up the
increment settings on the View tab of the Options dialog box.
See Also
Grid Display Command (on page 272)
Grid Snap Command (on page 273)
271
Drawing Precisely
Place Elements with a Grid

1. Click View > Grid Display.
This step is optional. You do not have to display the grid to align elements with it.
2. On the View menu, select Grid Snap.
3. Place the elements that you want with the grid.
You cannot place elements using PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid Snap.
You can change the grid display by setting options on the View tab of the Options dialog
box.
When you perform Step 3, a red crosshair will appear at the pointer showing where an
element's points are placed. Elements align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the
grid lines.
Grid snap does not work while you identify elements that are aligned along grid lines. To
override this, press the ALT key while identifying these elements.
Relationship and alignment indicators override the grid snap. You can suppress the
indicators by pressing ALT.
See Also
Grid Display Command

Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision. The grid is not part of the
document and does not print.
You can also access Grid Display by right-clicking. You can change the grid display from
static to dynamic by setting options on the View tab of the Tools Options dialog box.
The Grid Display command is available on the Schematic toolbar (on page 49).
See Also
Place Elements with a Grid (on page 272)
272
Drawing Precisely
Grid Snap Command

Allows you to align elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document
that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap, the software always aligns elements
with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. Grid lines do not print.
Relationship and alignment indicators override the grid snap. You can suppress the indicators
by holding down ALT.
You can also access Grid Snap by right clicking in the SmartSketch document and
displaying the shortcut menu.
You can also use F3 to toggle on/off Grid Snap.
You can change the grid display by setting options on the View tab of the Tools Options
dialog box.
You cannot place elements using PinPoint on the Main toolbar if you are using Grid Snap.
The Grid Snap command is also available on the Schematic toolbar (on page 49).
See Also
Modify Grid Intensity

1. Click View > Grid Brightness.
2. On the Grid Brightness ribbon, move the slider left or right to adjust the intensity of the grid
display.
To lighten the grid intensity, move the slider to the left; to darken, move the slider to the
right.
The SmartSketch grid display can be toggled on/off by clicking View > Grid Display.
See Also
Grid Brightness Command (on page 273)
Grid Brightness Command

Allows you to lighten and darken the intensity of the SmartSketch grid. Grids are the net-like
lines that appear on the Drawing sheet. As with the lines on graph paper, these horizontal and
vertical grids allow you to plot SmartSketch elements with a high degree of precision. The grid
display can be toggled on and off by clicking View > Grid Display in SmartSketch.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Grid Brightness button on a toolbar.
See Also
Modify Grid Intensity (on page 273)
Grid Intensity Ribbon (on page 274)
273
Drawing Precisely
Grid Intensity Ribbon

Adjusts the intensity of the grid display.
Drag the slider to adjust the intensity of the SmartSketch grid. Moving it to the left lightens the
intensity; moving it to the right darkens the intensity.
See Also
Grid Brightness Command (on page 273)
Modify Grid Intensity (on page 273)
Dimensioning Drawing Elements

Dimensions supply information about the size, location, and orientation of elements, such as the
length of a line, the distance between points, or the angle of a line. Dimensions are associated
with the elements they refer to, so you can make design changes easily.
You can use the commands on the Dimension toolbar to place the following types of
dimensions:
274
(A)
Linear dimensions
(B)
Angular dimensions
(C)
Diameter dimensions
(D)
Radial dimensions
Drawing Precisely
(E)
Dimension groups
Dimension commands on the Dimension toolbar have a ribbon that sets options for placing the
dimension. When you select a dimension in the drawing, the same ribbon options appear. You
can use the options to change the selected dimension.
Placing Dimensions
To dimension elements, you can use a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar, such as
SmartDimension, and then select the elements you want to dimension.
As you place dimensions, the software shows a temporary, dynamic display of the dimension
you are placing. This temporary display shows what the new dimension will look like if you click
at the current pointer position. The dimension orientation changes depending on where you
move the pointer.
For example, when you click Distance Between on the Dimension toolbar and select an origin
element and an element to measure to, the dimension dynamically adjusts its orientation
depending on where you position your pointer.
Because you can dynamically control the orientation of a dimension during placement, you can
place dimensions quickly and efficiently without having to use several commands. Each of the
dimension commands uses placement dynamics that allow you to control how the dimension will
look before you place it.
Placing Dimensions with the Dimension Axis

The Axis command on the Dimension toolbar sets the orientation of the dimension axis on the
drawing sheet. You can use the new dimension axis, rather than the default axis of the drawing
sheet, while you are using Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension. You must set
Explicit on the Dimension ribbon to place dimensions that are perpendicular or parallel to new
dimension axis.
Dimensioning While You Draw

To dimension elements as you draw them, you can set Dimension Keyin Values
Automatically with Options on the Tools menu. Although placing dimensions as you draw is
convenient, it might be necessary to delete unneeded dimensions when you have finished your
design.
Dimension Keyin Values Automatically is available on the General Tab (Options Dialog
Box) (on page 465).
Dimensions placed with this option are only driven dimensions.
275
Drawing Precisely
Using Dimensions to Drive Elements
You can place a dimension that controls the size or location of the element to which it refers.
This type of dimension is known as a driving dimension. If you use the ribbon to change the
dimensional value of a driving dimension, the element updates.
Dimensions that are not driving dimensions are called driven dimensions. The value of a driven
dimension is controlled by the element it refers to. If the element changes, the dimensional value
updates.
Because both driving and driven dimensions are associative to the element they refer to, you
can change the design more easily without having to delete and re-apply elements or
dimensions when you update the design.
If you want to create a driving dimension, you must first set Maintain Relationships on the
Tools menu. When you are placing dimensions, an option on the ribbon allows you to specify
whether a dimension is driving or driven. A driving dimension and a driven dimension are
distinguished by color. There are different colors for driving dimensions and driven dimensions
in a dimension style.
Not-to-Scale Dimensions
You can override the value of a driven dimension by editing its dimensional value. This makes
the dimension not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value that is 15
millimeters to be 30 millimeters, the actual size of the line that you see would still be 15
millimeters.
Formatting Dimensions
If you want two or more dimensions to look the same, you can select the dimensions and apply
a style with the ribbon. If you want to format dimensions so that they look unique, you can select
a dimension and edit its formats on the ribbon or with Properties on the Edit menu.
Using Expressions in Dimensions

There are many instances when the dimensions of individual features in a design are related.
For example, the bend radius used to manufacture a sheet metal part is usually a function of the
stock thickness. You can define and automate these types of design relationships with
expressions. You can select a dimension and then use the Variables command on the Tools
276
Drawing Precisely
menu to enter a formula. When the formula is solved, the dimensional value changes to the
value that the formula calculates.
You might want to use dimensions with expressions for the following purposes:
Drive a dimension by another dimension; Dimension A = Dimension B
Drive a dimension by a formula; Dimension A = p * 3.5
Drive a dimension by a formula and another dimension; Dimension A = p * Dimension B
Setting or Modifying Units of Measure

To set the units of measure for a dimension, you can use Properties on the Edit menu. To set
the units of measure for a document, you can click Properties on the File menu and then click
the Units tab.
See Also
Dimension Groups (on page 295)
Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points (on page 292)
Place a Driving Dimension (on page 305)
Types of Dimensions
A linear dimension measures the length of a line or the distance between two points or
elements. You can place linear dimensions with the Distance Between and SmartDimension
commands.
An angular dimension measures the angle of a line, the sweep angle of an arc, or the angle
between two or more lines or points. You can place angular dimensions with the Angle
Between and SmartDimension commands.
A radial dimension measures the radius of elements, such as arcs, circles, ellipses, or curves.
You can place a radial dimension with the SmartDimension command.
A diameter dimension measures the diameter of elements, such as circles and ellipses. You can
place a diameter dimension with the SmartDimension command.
277
Drawing Precisely
The components of a dimension are as follows:
(A)
Projection line
(E)
Break line
(B)
Dimension line
(F)
Symbol
(C)
Dimensional value
(G)
Connect line
(D)
Terminator
See Also
Move a Dimension (on page 303)
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension (on page 279)
Display the Dimension Toolbar
On the Main toolbar, click Dimension
See Also
Dimension Command (on page 281)
278
Drawing Precisely
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension

You can place the following types of dimensions with SmartDimension:
Linear dimension
Angular dimension
Radial dimension
Diameter dimension
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click SmartDimension
.
2. Click an element.
The command determines the type of dimension to place, depending on the type of
element you select, and displays the dimension dynamically so you can position it.
3. Position the dimension, and then click a point to place it.
SmartDimension automatically determines the type of dimension to place based on the

element that you select, such as linear, radial, or angular. However, you can specify a
different dimension type. For example, if you click SmartDimension
and then select a
circle, by default Diameter is the active dimension type on the Dimension ribbon; you then
place a diameter dimension. However, if you want to place a radial dimension instead, you
can click Radius
on the ribbon and then place the dimension.
To place a driving dimension, you must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu,
select an element, and then click a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar; the
dimension that you place is a driving dimension by default.
You can change a dimension to driving or driven by selecting it and then clicking
Driving/Driven on the ribbon.
To place a horizontal or vertical dimension between the end points of an angular line, you
must press SHIFT.
A connector is not considered to be a geometric element; consequently, it cannot be
dimensioned.
See Also
Dimension the Diameter of a Circle (on page 651)
Dimension the Length of a Line (on page 651)
279
Drawing Precisely
SmartDimension Command
Places a dimension for the following:
Length and angle of a line
Radius and diameter of a circle
Length, angle, radius, and diameter of an arc
Radius of an ellipse or curve
See Also
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension (on page 279)
Dimension Ribbon (on page 281)
280
Drawing Precisely
Angle Between Command

Places a dimension that measures the angle between elements or key points. You can place
angular dimensions in stacked or chained dimension groups.
You can also add angular dimensions to existing dimension groups.
See Also
Dimension Command
Displays the Dimension toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to place and
modify dimensions and annotations.
See Also
Display the Dimension Toolbar (on page 278)
Dimension Ribbon
Sets options for dimensions. Some options on this toolbar are not available until you select an
element on the drawing sheet.
Dimension Style Lists and applies the available dimension styles.
Round-Off Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the unit setting
(decimal or fractional) and contains values as appropriate for the unit. This control is also
sensitive to the dimension being placed and contains values as appropriate for the dimension.
Dimension Value Sets the dimensional value.
Driving/Driven Toggles the selected dimension between a driving and driven state. If you
want to set this option before you place a dimension, you must set Maintain Relationships on
the Tools menu.
Auto Center Mark Places a center line crosshair at the center of the radius of curvature
being measured by the dimension.
Jog Offsets the projection line of a radial dimension. You can use this option to prevent
the projection line that you are placing from overlapping other dimensions.
Dimension Axis Sets the orientation of dimensions placed by Distance Between or
Coordinate Dimension. This option is not available until you select one of those buttons. This
option is not available after you select the origin element.
When you click Default, the dimensions that you place are parallel or
perpendicular to the horizontal edge of the drawing sheet.
281
Drawing Precisely
When you click Implicit, the dimensions that you place are parallel or
perpendicular to the element that you are dimensioning.
When you click Explicit, the dimensions that you place are parallel or
perpendicular to the element that you set the dimension axis to with
the Axis on the Dimension toolbar. You can use Explicit when the
default horizontal and vertical axes are not appropriate for the
geometry that you are dimensioning.
Complement Places an angular dimension at the 180 degree complement.
Half/Full Toggles between half and full. When you toggle this option, the symmetric
diameter appears as half or full.
The following options are available only if you click SmartDimension button on the Dimension
toolbar and select an element:
Length Places a linear dimension for the following:
The length of a line
The arc length of an arc
The horizontal or vertical distance between the end points of a line
Angle Places an angular dimension for the angle of a line or the sweep angle of an arc.
282
Radius Places a radial dimension for the following:

Arc
Circle
Ellipse
Curve
Drawing Precisely
Diameter Places a diameter dimension for an arc or circle.
Prefix Opens or closes the Dimension Prefix dialog box for specifying prefix, suffix,
superfix, and subfix information.
Dimension Type Specifies the dimension type and the related tolerances.
Upper Tolerance Sets the primary upper tolerance value. This option is available for
tolerance or limits dimension types only.
Lower Tolerance Sets the primary lower tolerance value. This option is available for
tolerance or limits dimension types only.
Class Sets the tolerance class. This option is available for the class dimension type only. You
can set the deviation (letters) and the grade (numbers).
See Also
Angle Between Command (on page 281)
Coordinate Dimension Command (on page 294)
Distance Between Command (on page 293)
Dimension Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a dimension or dimension style. You can point to a dimension and
right-click to access this dialog box from Properties on the shortcut menu.
See Also
General Tab (on page 284)
Units Tab (on page 284)
Secondary Units Tab (on page 285)
Text Tab (on page 286)
Lines and Coordinate Tab (on page 286)
Spacing Tab (on page 287)
Terminator and Symbol Tab (on page 288)
283
Drawing Precisely
Name Tab
Names a style when you create or modify a style. This tab appears only when you click New or
Modify on the Styles dialog box.
Name Names the style. Style names can contain up to 253 characters (including aliases and
separators) and can include any combination of characters and spaces, except the backslash
character (\), semicolon (;), and braces ({ }). Style names are case sensitive.
Based On Displays the name of the style that the current or new style is based on.
Description Displays a description of the formatting options.
See Also
Change the Formats of a Style (on page 419)
Create a Style with the Style Command (on page 419)
General Tab
Sets general properties for dimensions.
Color - Sets colors for a driving, driven, or error dimension.
Driving Dimension- Sets the color used for driving dimensions.
Driven Dimension- Sets the color used for driven dimensions.
Error Dimension - Sets the color for error dimensions. Error dimensions are driving or
driven dimensions that the software cannot recalculate correctly after parametric attributes
on driving dimensions are changed.
Scale Mode - Sets the scale mode to automatic or manual.
Automatic - Determines a correct dimensional value based on the scale set in the drawing
view.
Manual- Scales the dimensional value. The scale value determines the dimensional value. For
example, for a scale of 1:100mm, set the manual value to 0.01.
Manual mode only works with dimensions that are set to Driven.
See Also
Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 430)
New Dimension Style Dialog Box (on page 423)
Dimension Properties Dialog Box (on page 283)
Units Tab
Sets the primary units for dimensions.
Linear Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension.
Units Sets the primary units for linear dimensions.
Unit Label Sets the unit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a unit label.
Subunit Label Sets the subunit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a subunit label.
(decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the unit. This control is also sensitive
to the dimension that you place and contains values appropriate for the dimension.
Maximum Subunits Sets the maximum subunits value. You can type a value up to 255. This
value applies to feet and inches. For example, if you type 13, the dimension appears as 13
inches and not 1 foot and 1 inch.
284
Drawing Precisely
Angular Sets the units for an angular dimension.
Units Sets the primary units for angular dimensions. Options are Degrees, Deg-Min-Sec, or
Radians.
Zeroes Specifies if a zero is on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension.
Leading Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear to the left.
Trailing Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros placed is based
on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the dimensional value is .5, and the
round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional value appears as .5000.
Delimiter Specifies the decimal delimiter for a dimension.
Period Sets a period as the decimal delimiter.
Comma Sets a comma as the decimal delimiter.
Space Sets a space as the decimal delimiter.
See Also
Format Dimension Dialog Box (on page 441)
Secondary Units Tab

Sets the secondary units for dimensions.
Units Sets the secondary units in drawings with dual unit display. For example, the primary
unit can be inches, while the secondary unit can be millimeters. When you place the dimension,
it displays both units. The software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary unit.
Unit Label Sets the secondary units label in drawings with dual unit display. You can type up
to 20 characters.
Subunit Label Sets the secondary subunit label in drawings with dual unit display. You can
type up to 20 characters.
Round-Off Sets the round-off value for secondary units in drawings with dual unit display.
Maximum Subunits Sets the maximum subunits used for secondary subunits in drawings
with dual unit display.
Zeroes Specifies if a zero appears on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension.
Dual Unit Display Selecting/Activating this checkbox displays secondary units for
dimensions in drawings. For example, the primary unit can be inches, while the secondary unit
is millimeters. Both units display when you place the dimension. The software derives the
secondary unit by converting the primary unit.
See Also
285
Drawing Precisely
Text Tab
Sets the text options for dimensions.
Text - Sets text options for a dimension.
Font - Sets the font type for the dimension text.
Font Style - Specifies the font style to use for the text in a dimension.
Font Size - Sets the size for text in a dimension.
Orientation - Sets the orientation for the text on a dimension. For example, the dimension text
looks like the following picture when you select Vertical.
Position - Sets the position where text appears in relation to the base line. The base line is an
imaginary horizontal line directly under a line of text. For example, when you select Above, the
dimension text looks like the following picture.
Tolerance Text - Sets options for text in certain types of dimensions that have related
tolerances. You can set the dimension type on the dimension ribbon bar.
Size - Sets the size of the text for tolerance text. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size.
For example, if you type .5, the size of the tolerance text is half the size of the dimension text.
Limit Arrangement - Sets the text arrangement on limit dimensions.
See Also
Lines and Coordinate Tab

Dimension Lines Sets options for dimension lines. A dimension line defines the
measurement of a part feature. Dimension lines consist of a solid line with arrows at both ends
and a dimension in the center.
Connect Controls if the dimension line extends between both terminators when you place the
dimension text and terminators outside the projection lines.
Width Sets the width of the dimension line.
Stack Pitch Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a ratio of the
dimension font size.
Break Line Sets the size of the break line for the linear, angular, or radial dimension. This
value is a ratio of the font size.
The dimension break line is separate from the leader and balloon break lines.
Coordinate Sets options for coordinate dimensions.
286
Drawing Precisely
Auto-Jog Turns the jog control on or off on the Dimension ribbon. You can use this option
only when you place a coordinate dimension. If you set Auto-Jog and the distance between two
dimensions is less than the value set for Stack Pitch, then you can place the dimension with a
jog in the projection line.
Common Origin Sets the symbol type for the common origin on coordinate dimensions. You
can set the symbol type to dot, circle, or none.
Text Position Positions text in a coordinate dimension.
Projection Line Sets options for the projection line of a dimension.
Display Controls the display of projection lines on linear dimensions. You can set the display
to none (off), origin, measurement, or origin and measurement. You can use this option to hide
projection lines when they overlap and you are using a pen plotter.
Element Gap Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element you want
to dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension font size.
Extension Sets the distance that the projection line extends beyond the dimension. This
value is a ratio of the dimension font size.
Angle Sets the slant angle of the projection lines on dimensions. This option is useful when
you need to place a dimension on isometric drawings.
Center Mark Places a center line automatically when you dimension a nonlinear element.
Extend Center Mark Displays projection lines on center marks. Extend Center Mark only
works when the Center Mark option is selected as well.
See Also
Spacing Tab
Sets dimension spacing options. All options are a ratio of the dimension text value.
Text Clearance Gap Sets the space between the text and the dimension line.
Dual Display Vertical Gap Sets the space between the primary and secondary units when
dual unit display is active. You can set Dual Unit Display on the Secondary Units tab so that
dimensions display two units.
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space between the superfix or subfix and the dimension
text.
Dimension Above Line Gap Sets the space between the dimension text and the dimension
line.
Horizontal Tolerance Gap Sets the space between the dimensional value and the tolerance
on dimensions.
Vertical Tolerance Gap Sets the space between the upper and lower tolerance value on
dimensions.
Vertical Limits Gap Sets the space between the upper and lower dimensional values on limit
dimensions.
Symbol Gap Sets the space between the symbol and the dimension line. You can also set
the space between the symbol and the dimension text.
287
Drawing Precisely
Prefix/Suffix Gap Sets the amount of space between the prefix or suffix and the dimension
text.
Horizontal Box Gap Sets the space between the dimension text and the horizontal edges of
the box on dimensions.
Vertical Box Gap Sets the space between the dimension text and the vertical edges of the
box on dimensions.
See Also
Terminator and Symbol Tab

Sets terminator and symbol options for dimensions. A terminator is a graphic symbol, such as
an arrow or dot, placed at the end of a leader.
Terminator Sets options for terminators.
Type Sets the terminator type for all terminators. Examples of some of the terminator types
are provided below.
Arrow (Filled)
Arrow (Hollow)
Arrow (Open)
Back Slash
Blank
Circle
Dot
Slash
288
Drawing Precisely
Size Sets the size of the terminator. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. For
example, if you set Font Size on the Text tab to be .2 cm and Size to be 2, the terminator is
twice the size of the dimension text.
Inside Limit Controls the terminator position relative to a dimension's projection lines. The
Inside Limit is calculated as a constant times the dimension font size. For example, if the font
size is 0.125 inches and the Inside Limit is set to 3 (3 x font size), any dimension with a value
greater than or equal to 0.375 inches positions its terminators on the inside of the projection
lines. Any dimension with a value less than 0.375 inches positions its terminators on the outside
of the projection lines.
Display Specifies which end of the terminator displays or if both ends display. You can set
the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or both origin and measurement. The following
picture shows the display when you select Origin and Measurement.
Freespace Type Sets the terminator type for a dimension with a terminator placed in free
space.
Origin Type Sets the terminator type used on the origin of a linear dimension.
This setting affects dimensions only at placement. You can change the terminator's
position after placement by dragging the terminator to the other side of the projection line.
In the example below, the inside limit value is 3, the font size is 0.1 in., and the dimension line is
.317 in. in length. Therefore:
Dimension value > 3 (inside limit) * .01 (font size)
The inside limit affects newly-placed dimensions only. The setting has no effect if the
dimension value is changed because of changes in the parent geometry.
Datum Type Sets the terminator type for datum frames. If you select Normal, the datum
frame uses the active terminator type for dimensions. If you select Anchor, the datum frame
uses an anchor terminator.
Symbol Sets options for symbols in dimensions.
Placement Sets the placement position for the symbol on diameter and radial and linear
dimensions for an arc. You can place the symbol before or after the dimension. You can also
hide the symbol.
Not to Scale Displays an underline, zigzag, or no indicator on driven dimensions with
overridden values. You can use the zigzag option only on linear dimensions. You can override a
driven dimension value by typing a new value in the Edit Value box on a dimension ribbon.
Suppress Diameter Suppresses the diameter symbol on diameter dimensions.
See Also
289
Drawing Precisely
Dimension Along a Curve

Use the Dimension Along custom command to define or apply a constraint on the position of
b-spline curved objects (for example, hull seams and stiffeners) a given distance above or below
other objects. This command helps in designing seams and profiles on a shell or other curved
surfaces.
For example, when you place a longitudinal seam a certain distance above a deck, the girth
dimension will be constant along the two b-spline curves in some cases, while other cases will
require a varying girth dimension. The Dimension Along command can also be used to define
radically-placed stiffeners on either a flat plate or a conical-ruled surface.
Add the Dimension Along Command to Your Toolbar

Follow the steps below to add the custom Dimension Along command.
2. On the Toolbars tab, select Dimension.
3. Select and drag the Dimension Along icon to a place on your toolbar.
Place a Dimension Along a Curve

Follow the steps below to use the Dimension Along command to measure or dimension a
b-spline curve. The position of the controlled curve is modified if the dimension value is
changed.
The curve you are dimensioning must be a b-spline curve.
1. On the vertical toolbar, click Curve and draw the curve you want to measure.
-orSelect the curve you want to measure.
2. Click Point on the vertical toolbar and place your two key points on the curve where you
want the dimensioning to start and end.
290
A key point can be an intersection, end point, midpoint, or center point.

You can also dimension using the intersection of an object with a curve as a key point.
Drawing Precisely
The figure below shows a b-spline curve with two points, one placed directly on the curve
and one away from the curve. The points are using the Normal (Arrow Backward) style.
3. Click Dimension Along and select the curve you want to dimension.
4. Click the first or starting point of the dimension, then click on the ending point of the
dimension.
The system displays the dimension measurement for the curve between the two selected
points.
The arc above the measurement (

) indicates that the dimension represents a
curved dimension as shown in the figure above.
Align Dimensions
With the Align Dimensions custom command, you can select linear dimensions and align them
to a common point.
In the SmartSketch drawing, select the linear dimensions that you want to align.
To select multiple objects, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key and click each linear dimension.
291
Drawing Precisely
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To select multiple objects using a select set, click Select Tool

on the Draw toolbar and
then drag a fence around the linear dimensions you want to align.
Click Tools > Custom Commands.
In the Custom Commands dialog box, navigate to <Product Directory>\Program and click
igrAlignDim412.ocx.
Click Open.
Click a point or an object in the SmartSketch drawing along which you want to align the
selected dimensions.
Right-click to exit the command.
You can also press Esc to exit the command.
The Align Dimensions command remains active until you exit from it. As long as the
command is active, you can select additional linear dimensions to align or create a new select
set of linear dimensions to align.
Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following buttons:
Distance Between
Angle Between
2. Click an element or key point to identify the origin element.
3. Click an element or key point to measure to.
4. Move the pointer where you want to place the dimension. The dimension dynamically
follows the movement of the pointer.
5. Click to place the dimension.
6. If you want to place another dimension, click another element or key point to select the next
measurement element.
The origin element for this dimension is the element that you selected in step 2.
7. Click to place the next dimension.
292
After placing several dimensions, if you want to use a different origin element for additional
dimensions, right-click to start over.
Drawing Precisely
After you click the two elements that you want to place the dimension between, the
orientation of the dimension changes depending on where you move the pointer.
Before you place a dimension between two elements or keypoints, you can use Axis to set
the orientation of the dimension axis on the drawing sheet. You can use the new dimension
axis, rather than the default axis of the drawing sheet, while you are using Distance
Between. After you define the dimension axis, you can place dimensions that run parallel to
or perpendicular to the dimension axis.
A connector is not considered to be a geometric element; consequently, it cannot be
dimensioned.
If you place a manual linear dimension that is chained or stacked with an automatic linear
dimension, the manual dimension is immediately replaced with a standalone dimension that
is no longer attached to the automatic dimension. The new dimension is attached to a
newly-placed point object whose position coincides with the connect point location of the
automatic dimension projection line to which the manual dimension was originally attached.
Because the new dimension is no longer chained or stacked with the automatic dimension, it
does not move if the automatic dimension's position is modified.
See Also
Distance Between Command

Places a linear dimension that measures the distance between elements or key points. You
can place linear dimensions in stacked dimension groups.
You can place chained dimension groups.
You can also add linear dimensions to existing linear dimension groups.
See Also
293
Drawing Precisely
Coordinate Dimension Command

Places a dimension that measures the distance from a common origin to one or more key
points or elements. The coordinate dimensions that refer to the common origin are members of
a coordinate dimension group.
You can place coordinate dimensions in any order and on either side of the origin with respect to
the dimension axis. You can also add additional coordinate dimensions to existing coordinate
dimension groups.
See Also
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group (on page 297)
Place a Dimension Group (on page 296)
Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements

You can change dimensions on the drawing sheet to change existing elements. Driving
dimensions have relationships that allow you to maintain characteristics such as the size,
orientation, and position of elements. When you place a driving dimension on, or between
elements, you can change the element size by editing their dimensional valuesyou do not
have to delete or redraw elements at different sizes.
For example, dimensioning the radius of an arc shows its size. Editing the value of the radius
dimension changes the size of the arc.
To create dimensional relationships, select a dimension command and click the elements, and
key points you want to relate.
In order to generate driving dimensions you must set Maintain Relationships on the
Tools menu before creating your dimension.
See Also
Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension (on page 306)
294
Drawing Precisely
Dimension Groups
You can place dimensions in dimension groups with several commands. This makes the
dimensions easier to manipulate on the drawing sheet. All members of a stacked or chained
dimension group share the same dimension axis.
Stacked dimension group
Chained dimension group
A coordinate dimension group is another type of dimension group. Coordinate dimensions

measure the position of key points or elements from a common origin. All the dimensions within
the group measure from a common origin. You should use coordinate dimensions when you
want to dimension elements in relation to a common origin or zero point.
When you are placing dimension groups with Distance Between or Angle Between, the pointer
position determines what type of dimension group will be placed. After you place the first
dimension in a group and click the second element you want to measure, if the pointer is below
the first dimension, then the dimension group will be a chained group.
If the pointer is above the first dimension, then the dimension group will be a stacked group.
295
Drawing Precisely
You can place dimension groups with the following buttons on the Dimension toolbar:
Distance Between
Angle Between
Symmetric Diameter
Coordinate Dimension
See Also
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group (on page 297)
Place a Dimension Group

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following buttons:
Distance Between
Angle Between
Symmetric Diameter
Coordinate Dimension
2. Click an element that you want to measure.
4. Click another element that you want to measure.
5. Click to place the dimension in the dimension group.
296
The first dimension that you place in a dimension group is the origin dimension.
Drawing Precisely
Coordinate Dimension places coordinate dimensions. Coordinate dimensions can only be

placed in a group. You can place coordinate dimensions in any order and on any side of the
elements that you want to dimension.
See Also
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group
1. Click the element that the dimension measures.
2. Click a point for the dimension. This action adds the dimension to the dimension group.
If you change a dimension group, the group updates automatically.

If you delete a dimension from the middle of a chained dimension group, the group splits
into two groups.
297
Drawing Precisely
If you place a dimension group using Axis and then delete the first or middle dimension
from the group, this action deletes all the dimensions after the removed dimension.
See Also
Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Symmetric Diameter.
2. Click an element or key point. This element or key point is the origin.
3. Click an element to measure or a key point to measure to.
4. Move the pointer where you want to place the dimension. The dimension dynamically
follows the movement of the pointer.
6. To place another dimension, click another element to measure or key point to measure to.
The origin element for this dimension is the first element or key point that you selected.
298
To use a different origin element for additional dimensions, right-click to resume editing.
Drawing Precisely
After you click the two elements that you want to dimension between, the dimension
changes depending on where you move the pointer.
Turn on Half on the ribbon, and the dimensions appear as half. Turn off Half on the ribbon,
and the dimensions appear as full.
See Also
Symmetric Diameter Command

Places a dimension that measures the distance between a center line and another element
or key point, multiplies the distance by two, and displays the value as a diameter. You can place
dimensions that measure the symmetric diameter of elements in a dimension group.
You can also add additional symmetric diameter dimensions to an existing dimension group.
See Also
Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension (on page 298)
299
Drawing Precisely
Set a Dimension Axis

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Axis.
2. Click an element to which you want the dimension axis to be parallel or perpendicular.
3. Choose distance between, then place a dimension. You can now place a dimension that
runs parallel or perpendicular to the dimension axis that you have defined.
4. To use the dimension axis that you set using Axis, click Distance Between or Coordinate
Dimension on the Dimension toolbar.
5. On the ribbon, set Explicit in the Dimension Axis box. After you define the dimension axis,
you can place dimensions that run parallel to or perpendicular to the dimension axis.
See Also
Axis Command (on page 301)
300
Drawing Precisely
Axis Command
Sets a dimension axis for a drawing. A dimension axis allows you to place dimensions that
are perpendicular to or parallel to an element.
The default axis in a drawing is perpendicular or parallel to the horizontal axis of a drawing
sheet. Dimensions placed along the default axis look like this:
After you set a dimension axis with Axis, you can now place a dimension that runs parallel or
perpendicular to the dimension axis that you have defined. To use the axis that you have just
specified, you must set the type of dimension axis that you want to use on the dimension ribbon.
You do this by clicking Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension on the Dimension
toolbar. Then, you click Explicit in the Dimension Axis box on the ribbon so that you can use
the dimension axis that you set with Axis.
See Also
Set the Dimension Type

Dimension types control how the dimension is displayed. You can set the dimension type before
or after you place a dimension.
On the ribbon, click one of the options on the Dimension Type list on the palette to set the
dimension type.
In the following picture, you can click each palette option to see the type of dimension
and an example of what the dimension will look like.
See Also
301
Drawing Precisely
Edit a Dimension Prefix

1. Select a dimension.
2. On the ribbon, click Prefix .
3. On the Dimension Prefix dialog box, type the characters that you want to appear as prefix,
superfix, suffix, and subfix information in the appropriate boxes.
While you type information in one of the boxes, you can also click a symbol at the top
of the dialog box to add symbols to the prefix, superfix, suffix, and subfix information.
4. Click Apply to change the dimension that you selected.
You can also use the Dimension Prefix dialog box while you place a dimension.
You can change the prefix or suffix gap by selecting a dimension. Then, you can click
Properties on the Edit menu. On the Spacing tab of the Dimension Properties dialog box,
change the prefix or suffix gap. You can also set the superfix or subfix gap on this tab.
See Also
Dimension Prefix Dialog Box (on page 302)
Dimension Prefix Dialog Box

Adds prefix, suffix, superfix, and subfix text to a dimensional value. You can use this dialog box
while you place or edit a dimension.
(A)
Superfix
(B)
Prefix
(C)
Value
(D)
Suffix
(E)
Subfix
Special Characters Applies a font character to the dimension prefix. You can use the
buttons to apply font characters, such as a diameter, counterbore, depth, and initial length.
Superfix Specifies superfix information.
Prefix Specifies prefix information.
Suffix Specifies suffix information.
Subfix Specifies subfix information.
Apply Applies the prefix to the dimension.
See Also
Edit a Dimension Prefix (on page 302)
302
Drawing Precisely
Set the Dimension Units

1.
2.
3.
4.
Select a dimension.
On the shortcut menu, click Properties.
On the Dimension Properties dialog box, click the Units tab.
Set the options you want to use for the dimension unit.
You can set the dimension units for a dimension that you are about to place using the
Format > Dimension command.
You can save the dimension unit settings in a dimension style using the Format > Style
command.
See Also
Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 308)
Move a Dimension
1. Click part of the dimension that you want to move.
2. Drag the dimension to a new location.
The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to move a dimension. The
following descriptions explain how to move specific parts of a dimension.
To move the dimension line
Click the dimension line and drag the dimension.
To move the dimension text

1. Click the dimension text. Drag the dimension to one of the following positions:
2. Drag the dimension to one of the following positions:
303
Drawing Precisely
Along the dimension line
Outside of the dimension line
Outside of the projection line
To move the terminator
Click the terminator and drag it.
To move the projection line
Click the projection line and drag it.
You can lengthen or shorten the projection line.
304
Drawing Precisely
To move the leader break line
For radial dimensions, you can move the break line of the leader line. Click the dimension
text. Then, drag the text while pressing SHIFT.
See Also
Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements

You can change dimensions on the drawing sheet to change existing elements. Driving
dimensions have relationships that allow you to maintain characteristics such as the size,
orientation, and position of elements. When you place a driving dimension on, or between
elements, you can change the element size by editing their dimensional valuesyou do not
have to delete or redraw elements at different sizes.
For example, dimensioning the radius of an arc shows its size. Editing the value of the radius
dimension changes the size of the arc.
To create dimensional relationships, select a dimension command and click the elements, and
key points you want to relate.
In order to generate driving dimensions you must set Maintain Relationships on the
Tools menu before creating your dimension.
See Also
Place a Driving Dimension

1. On the Tools menu, set Maintain Relationships.
3. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following commands:
SmartDimension
Distance Between
Angle Between
305
Drawing Precisely
The dimensions that you place will be driving dimensions by default.
To change a driving dimension to a driven dimension, select a driving dimension and, on the
ribbon, click Driving/Driven.
To set the colors for driving and driven dimensions, select the dimension and click
Properties on the shortcut menu. Then set the options you want on the Properties dialog
box.
See Also
Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element (on page 307)
Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension

1. On the Tools menu, select Maintain Relationships.
2. Select the driven dimension that you want to change.
3. On the ribbon, click Driving/Driven. The color of the dimension changes to indicate a
driving dimension.
To place a driving dimension, you must select Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu,
select an element, and then click a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar; the
dimension that you place by default is a driving dimension.
To change a driving dimension to a driven dimension, select a driving dimension and click
Driving/Driven.
To set the colors for driving and driven dimensions, select the dimension and click
Properties on the shortcut menu. Then set the options you want on the Properties dialog
box.
See Also
Axis Command (on page 301)
Dimension Text Command

Allows you to override a driven dimensional value with a text string.
See Also
Override a Driven Dimension (on page 307)
Dimension Text Ribbon (on page 306)
Dimension Text Ribbon

Specifies a text string that can be used to replace a dimension value.
Dimension text - Enter a text string.
306
Drawing Precisely
See Also
Dimension Text Command (on page 306)
Override a Driven Dimension (on page 307)
Override a Driven Dimension

1. Click Dimension Text
on the Dimension toolbar.
If the Dimension toolbar is not displayed, click Dimension

2. Select the driven dimension you want to override.
3. In the Dimension Text field on the Dimension Text ribbon, enter the text that will override
the dimension.
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
If you select a driving dimension instead of a driven dimension, SmartSketch prompts you
either to select another dimension or to right-click and exit the command.
See Also
Dimension Text Command (on page 306)
Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element

When you override the value of a driven dimension by editing the dimensional value, the
resulting dimension is not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value of 15
millimeters to 30 millimeters, the actual size of the visible line remains 15 millimeters. Only the
dimension text is changed; the line remains unchanged.
To change the value of a dimension without changing the actual element:

1. Select a driven dimension.
A color that you set with Style on the Format menu indicates a driven dimension. You
can also set the color by selecting a dimension and clicking Properties on the Edit menu.
2. On the ribbon, delete the dimensional value from the Value box and type a new value.
To restore the dimension value to the original value of the element select a dimension, right
mouse click and select Not to Scale on the shortcut menu.
You can show dimensions that are not-to-scale by using Styles on the Format menu. This
option places a zigzag or straight line under the dimensional values that are not-to-scale.
To return the dimensional value to the value of the element it actually measures, delete all
the characters from the Value box on the ribbon. You can also select a dimension and clear
Not to Scale on the shortcut menu.
307
Drawing Precisely
See Also
Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu)

Returns a driven dimension to its actual value. You can use this command only on a
dimensional value that has been edited. Editing a dimensional value overrides the original value
and makes the dimension not-to-scale. For example, if you override the dimensional value that
is 15 millimeters to be 30 millimeters, the actual size of the line that you see would still be 15
millimeters.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must select a dimension.
See Also
Converting Dimensions to Individual Elements

Use the Drop Dimension to Graphics command, available from the Dimension shortcut
menu, to convert a dimension into individual elements such as lines and text boxes.
1. From the active drawing sheet, place drawing elements and then place a dimension. For
more information on using dimension commands, see Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on
page 274).
2. Right-click the dimension to open the Dimension shortcut menu.
3. Select Drop Dimension to Graphics.
The dimension is converted into a group of elements.
4. With the group selected, click Ungroup
from the Change toolbar.
You can now select each individual element.
In the figure below, a dimension has been placed for one side of a rectangle.
308
Drawing Precisely
After the dimension is converted and ungrouped, each element, such as the text box, can be
selected.
See Also
Drop Dimension to Graphics Command (on page 309)
Drop Dimension to Graphics Command

Converts or drops a dimension into a group of individual elements. This command is available
from the Dimension shortcut menu, which is accessed by right-clicking on a dimension.
See Also
Converting Dimensions to Individual Elements (on page 308)
Setting Paper and Model Units

Each document in the software is a container of sheets, where each sheet is a virtual sheet of
paper that displays model information.
The software supports measurements in two different spaces: paper space and model space.
The paper space units represent physical measurements on the virtual sheet. The model space
units represent real-world measurements associated with the model.
Within the drawing environment, "model space" is synonymous with the term "world
space".
You can define the relationship between paper space and model space on the Sheet Setup
dialog box. The default relationship between the paper and model spaces is 1:1. In other words,
one unit of model space is equivalent to one unit of paper space. For example, if a text box with
a font size of 1 inch in paper space is compared to a vertical line 1 inch in length, the text box
and line appear on the paper to have the same height. However, if you change the drawing
scale to 1:2, the line appears half as tall on the sheet as the text. If you change the drawing
scale to 2:1, the line appears twice as tall on the sheet as the text. In either case, if you select
the line, the length readout remains at 1 inch.
In the current software, you can place only balloons, leaders, and dimensions in paper space.
These graphics annotate objects in the model space but appear in paper space. You can place
text boxes in either paper space or model space.
If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet with Insert > Object, the
terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document.
The dimension lines and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This
behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the container
309
Drawing Precisely
document. You can set or change the size for dimension text and annotations by clicking
Style on the Format menu. On the Style dialog box, you select the type of style you want to
set or modify (dimension or text), and then click New or Modify to set the font size for
dimension text or a text box. Changing the font size of dimension-text style or a text-box
style changes only the dimension text or annotations with the modified style applied to them.
You can also set the font size for individual dimension text or annotations by overriding the
style that you applied. You do this by selecting the dimension or text box and editing its
properties with Properties on the shortcut menu or from the Edit menu.
You can adjust how the model units fit within the printable sheet area by clicking Sheet
Setup on the File menu. On the Size and Scale tab, you can select a scale setting by
clicking an item on the Select Scale dropdown list. The value that you select causes the
model to resize within the printable area, but neither the paper unit information (dimensions
and annotations) nor model unit information is scaled.
See Also
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet (on page 68)
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing

Sheet
2. On the Size and Scale tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the sheet size that you
want. After you close the dialog box, the correct sheet size is displayed.
3. Draw the elements that you want using real-world units. Do not worry if the elements do not
fit on the sheet.
4. Click File > Sheet Setup to check the ratio of the sheet size to the overall drawing size.
5. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, on the Size and Scale tab, click Custom. You should use
the ratio of the drawing to the drawing sheet to determine the custom scale for the drawing
sheet. After you close the dialog box, the drawing scales to the scale that you selected. All
dimensions appear in real-world units.
If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet, the terminators, spaces,
text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and
If you select Scale on the Change toolbar to scale the drawing, the dimensions are scaled
to compensate for the change in size. Scale changes the size of one set of geometry to another
set of geometry in the document. To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the
paper size, use the File > Sheet Setup command.
See Also
Sheet Setup Command (on page 66)
Measuring Distances and Areas

You can also measure the length of a line or the diameter of a circle by selecting the element
and looking at the value on the ribbon. For more detailed work, the software provides
commands for measuring distances or areas in a drawing. Even when you are in the middle of a
task, you can measure distances or areas with these commands.
310
Drawing Precisely
Measure Distance measures the distance between points on elements and points in free
space.
Measure Area measures the area inside one or more closed boundaries.
The distances are shown using the current units of measure for the document. To set the units
for measuring distances or areas, click File > Properties, and then set the units for the length,
area, or angle of a drawing on the Units tab.
This setting does not set units for dimensions. To set the active units for dimensions, click
Format > Style and set the units for a dimension style. Active units control the format for
dimensions when they are placed. For existing dimensions, you can click Edit > Properties and
set the units for dimensions that you have selected.
Bearing and Azimuth
You can orient your drawing in an environment with a specific bearing and azimuth. This tool is
useful for applications such as civil engineering.
Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use the Tools > Custom Commands
command to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Custom Commands
dialog box, click Tools to access the command.
See Also
Measure Area Command (on page 317)
Measure Distance Command (on page 313)
Measure an Area (on page 316)
Measure a Distance (on page 311)
Measure a Distance
1. On the toolbar, click Measure Distance
311
Drawing Precisely
2. Click in free space or click a key point. This identifies the point to measure from.
3. Click a point to measure to. The distance between the two points appears next to the
pointer.
4. Click another point to measure to. The distance between the last two points and the
distance between the first point and the last point appear next to the pointer.
When you move the pointer over a key point, the distance between the current location of
the pointer and the last point you clicked appears, along with the delta values. The delta
values are the distances, as measured along the X and Y axes.
When you click a third point, the cumulative distance between the first and last point that
you clicked appears next to the pointer.
When you are in the middle of a task, you can use Measure Distance at any time.
You can press TAB to move between the distance and total distance. You can also press
CTRL + C to copy the value to the Clipboard. You can then press CTRL + V to paste the
value to a text box or ribbon field.
See Also
Measuring Distances and Areas (on page 310)
Measure the Length of a Line

Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances using Measure
Distance. For example, consider the following workflow.
1. On the Draw toolbar, select Line/Arc Continuous and draw a line.
2. Click Tools > Measure Distance and measure a distance.

You do not need to exit Line/Arc Continuous before measuring a distance.
312
Drawing Precisely
3. Right-click to exit Measure Distance. Line/Arc Continuous is still activeyou can pick up
where you left off and continue using Line/Arc Continuous.
Measure Distance Command

Measures the distance between points in free space or between key points. When you are in
the middle of a task, you can measure distances using Measure Distance at any time.
When you move the pointer over a key point, the distance between the current location of the
pointer and the last point you clicked appears, along with the delta values. The delta values are
the distances, as measured along the x and y axes.
When you click a third point, the cumulative distance between the first and last point that you
clicked appears next to the pointer.
The Measure Distance command is also available on the Dimension Toolbar (on page
41).
See Also
Measure a Distance (on page 311)
Measure the Distance Along an Object

1. On the toolbar, click Measure Distance Along
.
2. Click a point or click a key point on the linear object. This identifies the point to measure
from.
313
Drawing Precisely
3. Click the second point or key point to measure to. The distance between the two points
appears next to the pointer.
For closed shapes (curves, circles, ellipses), the measurement will default to a clockwise
direction. You can hold the Ctrl key to change the measurement direction to counterclockwise.
See Also
Measure Distance Along Command (on page 315)
314
Drawing Precisely
Measure Distance Along Command

Measures the distance along a linear object based on two points.
For closed shapes (curves, circles, ellipses), the measurement will default to a clockwise
direction. You can hold the Ctrl key to change the measurement direction to counterclockwise.
315
Drawing Precisely
The Measure Distance Along command is also available on the Dimension Toolbar (on
page 41).
See Also
Measure the Distance Along an Object (on page 313)
Measure an Area
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Measure Area
.
2. Click inside a closed boundary to measure its area.
The area and perimeter measurements for the closed boundary appear next to the pointer.
The measured area appears as a gray fill.
As you click points, press SHIFT to display the total area and perimeter by the pointer.
If you are measuring multiple areas and want to clear a measurement, click inside one of the
filled, closed boundaries that you have measured while pressing the SHIFT key.
When you are drawing elements or modifying a drawing, you can measure an area with
Measure Area at any time.
You can press TAB to toggle between the area and total area. You can also press CTRL +
C to copy the value to the Clipboard. You can then press CTRL + V to paste the value to a
text box or ribbon field.
See Also
316
Drawing Precisely
Measure Area Command

Displays the most recently selected area and perimeter of the closed boundary in the current
document units. When multiple closed boundaries are selected, the command displays the total
area and perimeter of all selected boundaries in the current document units. Press SHIFT while
clicking to add other closed boundaries to the current selection.
The Measure Area command is also available on the Dimension Toolbar (on page 41).
See Also
Measure an Area (on page 316)
Set the Unit of Measure

2. On the Properties dialog box, click the Units tab. You can set the units for the length, area,
or angle of a drawing.
This setting does not set units for dimensions. To set the active units for dimensions,
click Style on the Format menu and set the units for a dimension style. Active units control
the format for dimensions when they are placed. For existing dimensions, you can click
Properties on the Edit menu and set the units for dimensions that you have selected.
3. On the Units tab, set the options you want.
See Also
Set Bearing Dialog Box

Controls the selection of Default, Bearing, and Azimuth angle settings. Also controls the
azimuth settings for Base Bearing and Direction.
Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use Customize on the Tools menu to place
it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Tools to access
the command.
Dialog Box Options

Default - Sets defaults for bearing and azimuth.
Bearing - Determination of position to refer to an angle.
317
Drawing Precisely
Azimuth - Horizontal direction expressed as an angle, progressing from a fixed point, based on
a circle.
Base Bearing - Direction (North, South, East, West) bearing to refer to an angle.
Direction - Clockwise or counterclockwise indicator for the angle bearing.
See Also
Bearing and Azimuth Command (on page 318)
Set Bearing and Azimuth

1. From a customized toolbar, click Bearing and Azimuth.
Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use Customize to place it on a toolbar or
menu.
2. Click Default, Bearing, or Azimuth to select the orientation for the drawing or element.
3. When you select Azimuth, you can change the current settings of Base Bearing and
Direction.
See Also
Bearing and Azimuth Command (on page 318)
Bearing and Azimuth Command

Allows you to determine how to display the angle for the selected element.
The Bearing and Azimuth Setup command is available only if you use Customize on the
Tools menu to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box,
select Tools under Categories to display the Bearing and Azimuth Setup button.
For more information, see Set Bearing Dialog Box (on page 317).
See Also
Set Bearing and Azimuth (on page 318)
Using the Variable Table

You can use the Variable Table to define and edit functional relationships between the
dimensions of a design in a familiar spreadsheet format. The Variable Table is accessed with
Variables on the Tools menu. There are two types of variables: dimensions displayed in the
design and variables you create directly in the Variable Table. Dimension variables directly
control elements of a design. The variable you assign must be set equal to a value or
mathematical expression; for example, PI = 3.14159.
You can use variables to do the following:
Drive a dimension with another dimension; Dimension A = Dimension B
Define a constant; pi=3.14
Drive a dimension with a formula; Dimension A = pi * 3.5
Drive a dimension with a formula and another dimension; Dimension A = pi * Dimension B
Drive a dimension with a formula that includes a function; Dimension A = Dimension B + cos
(Dimension C)
Drive a dimension with a value from a spreadsheet, such as a Microsoft Excel document, by
copying the value from the spreadsheet into the Variable Table. Besides Excel, you can use
any other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects.
318
Drawing Precisely
Accessing the Variable Table
After you select Variables on the Tools menu, a table appears with the following columns:
Type, Name, Value, and Formula. Each row of the table displays a variable.
Entering Data into the Variable Table

When you open the Variable Table in the document, all the dimensional values for the
dimensions on the drawing sheet appear in the columns. The name that appears in the Name
column is automatically generated by the software. You can change the name to something
more logical if you want.
Restricting the Display of Variables

You can restrict the display of variables in the table using Filter on the Variable Table window:
You can display only the variables for dimensions that the software created.
You can also display variables that are associated with elements in the current document or
the active window.
You can also display a set of elements that you have selected in the document.
Creating Expressions
The system provides a set of standard mathematical functions. The functions can be typed in
with the proper syntax or you can use the Function Wizard to select and define the function.
The Function Wizard is convenient when you forget the proper syntax for a math function. You
start the Function Wizard by clicking Fx in the Variable Table. The function is written in the
Formula column of the selected row.
Examples
Suppose you draw a sheet metal bracket and you want to build a relationship between the bend
radius and stock thickness. You can use a formula in the Variable Table to build and manage
this relationship. The following example illustrates how the Variable Table would look if you built
a relationship that changes the bend radius when the stock thickness changes.
Type
Name
Value
Variable
Stock_thickness
.25
Dimension
Bend_radius
.375
Formula
1.5 * stock_thickness
Here are some more examples of how you might set up the Variable Table:
Type
Name
Value
Variable
2.0 kg
Variable
10.0 rad
@c:\bearing.xls!sheet1!R6C3
Variable
20 mm
@c:\bearing.xls!sheet1R!6C3
Formula
319
Drawing Precisely
Argument Conventions
The following argument conventions are used in the Variable Table:
In the syntax line, required arguments are bold and optional arguments are not.
Argument names should follow the rules for Visual Basic.
In the text where functions and arguments are defined, required and optional arguments are
not bold. Use the format in the syntax line to determine whether an argument is required or
optional.
See Also
Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet (on page 322)
Create a Variable with a Value or Expression (on page 320)
Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine (on page 321)
Edit an Existing Variable (on page 320)
Create a Variable with a Value or Expression

1. Click Tools > Variables.
2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type for the variables value. The
default type is Distance, which means that any expression created will be for a distance.
For example, if you want to create a variable to control an angular dimension, you must
select Angular.
To store a value without units, select Scalar from the list.
3. In the Name column, click an empty cell.
4. Type a name for the variable that you want to create. Press ENTER.
5. In the same row, in the Formula column, do one of the following:
Type the value that you want for the variable.
Type a simple expression for the variable. A simple expression consists of using basic
mathematical operators to set up an equation using values and other variables. For
example, if variables Var1 and Var2 already exist, you can type the following formulas
when creating a new variable:
Var1 * Var2
Var1 / 3.0
(Var2 + 5.0) * Var1
Var2 ^ 2
References to existing variables in a formula are case-sensitive. For example, if you
create the variable Var1, you cannot reference it using var1.
6. Click Enter to create the variable.
See Also
Open Source Command (on page 328)
Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 328)
Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu) (on page 326)
Edit an Existing Variable

1. In the document, select the dimensions that you want to appear in the Variable Table.
3. The Variable Table automatically displays the dimensions that are selected in the
document. To see other dimensions and variables, click Filter on the Variable Table
window.
320
Drawing Precisely
4. On the Filter dialog box, set the following options to specify which variables or dimensions
are displayed in the Variable Table. For example, to see all the dimensions and variables in
the Variable Table, set the following options:
In the Type box, select Dimensions and User Variables.
In the Named By box, select Both.
In the Graphics In box, select File. When you click OK, the settings are saved, so the
next time you use Filter, the last settings are used. A convenient method of limiting the
number of variables and dimensions displayed is to name the ones you use frequently.
Then, on the Filter dialog box, in the Named By box, click Users to display the named
variables and dimensions.
5. After a variable is displayed in the Variable Table, you can change any of its attributes,
except its type and the unit type. On the Variable Table, in the Value column of a variable,
type a new value to change the variable.
6. In the Formula column, click the cell and use one of several methods to create a new
formula.
To access Filters on the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the
Variable Table and right- click.
The default filter is set to Last selected window; consequently, only the variables that are
associated with elements in the active window display. To display all the variables that are
associated with the elements in the current document, set the filter to File.
See Also
Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine

2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type. This is the unit type for the
variables value. The default type is Distance.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To store a value without units, select Scalar from the list.

In the Name column, click an empty cell.
Type a name for the variable that you want to create. Press ENTER.
In the same row, in the Formula column, click a cell.
Click Function Wizard.
Click the function that you want in the Function Wizard dialog box.
Enter the appropriate values in the dialog box. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the
available functions and appropriate input. For example, if the variables Var1 and Var2
already exist, some valid formulas using functions are as follows:
Sqr(Var1) * Sin(Var2)
Sqr( Var1^2 + Var2^2 )
321
Drawing Precisely
References to existing variables in a formula are case-sensitive. For example, if you
create the variable Var1, you cannot reference it using var1.
You can write external functions and subroutines in BASIC and use them as variable
formulas. You can write these functions in Visual Basic, or any text editor, and save them in
a .BAS file. The Function Wizard steps you through the process of selecting the BASIC
module, the specific function, and the necessary input and output.
If you type a function and you cannot remember the argument list, press CTRL + A after you
have typed the equal sign, function name, and opening parenthesis. This activates the
Function Wizard with the function already selected for you.
You can also type expressions with functions directly in the cell in the Formula column.
See Also
Open Source Command (on page 328)
Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet

You can use Microsoft Excel to link a variable to a spreadsheet. Besides Excel, you can use
other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects. Before you can link a variable to a
spreadsheet, you must first create the variables you want in the design document. Click Related
Topics for more information about how to create a variable.
1. In another application, such as Excel, open the document that contains the spreadsheet you
want to link to. The spreadsheet should contain the appropriate values for dimensional
relationships.
You can edit this link by clicking the Edit > Links command.
2. Open the design document that you want to link to and click Tools > Variables. Arrange the
windows of the spreadsheet document and the Variable Table in the design document so
that you can see the appropriate cells in both documents.
3. In the spreadsheet, select the cell that you want to link to. It can be a single cell or two
adjacent cells, where the first cell contains the value and the second cell contains the units.
4. Copy the selected cells. For example, if you are using Excel, click Edit > Copy.
5. In the Variable Table, in the Formula column, click the cell of the variable that you want to
link the spreadsheet to.
6. On the shortcut menu, click Paste Link.
To access the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the Variable
Table and right-click.
Press ENTER to accept the value you pasted. When you edit the value in the
spreadsheet, the variable in the Variable Table updates as well. For example, when
you link the dimensions in the design document to an Excel spreadsheet, you can
change the dimensions of the design by editing the corresponding values in the Excel
spreadsheet. The design document automatically updates.
You can edit the links with Edit Links command on the shortcut menu.
322
Drawing Precisely
See Also
Edit a Formula Containing a Function

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Tools > Variables.

In the Variable Table, click a cell that contains a formula that has a function.
Select a function that you want to replace.
Click Function Wizard. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the function you
selected.
5. Type a new function to replace the existing function.
6. Click Next.
7. Click Finish to replace the function in the formula.
See Also
Variable Table Dialog Box (on page 324)
Insert a Function into a Formula

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Tools > Variables.

In the Variable Table, click the function cell in which you want to insert the formula.
Click Function Wizard.
Click the function category and the function name.
Click Next.
The Function Wizard dialog box displays the arguments for the function.
6. Type the values for the arguments.
7. Click Finish to insert the completed function into your formula.
You can type values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the boxes on
the Function Wizard dialog box. These entries must produce valid values for the argument. If
an argument is required, the word "required" appears in the display area on the Function
Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box.
See Also
Edit a Formula Containing a Function (on page 323)
Format a Column
2. Drag the appropriate grid lines to adjust the column width.
See Also
323
Drawing Precisely
Variables Command
Accesses the Variable Table, which operates much like a software spreadsheet. The
Variable Table allows you to define and manipulate drawing variables and their values, as well
as establish functional relationships between the design variables. For example, you can use
the Variable Table to create expressions for dimensional values. You can restrict the display of
variables in the table using Filter on the Variable Table window to display only the variables for
dimensions that the software created, display variables that are associated with elements in the
current document or the active window, or display a set of elements that you have selected in
the document.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Variables button on a toolbar.
See Also
Insert a Function into a Formula (on page 323)
Variable Table Dialog Box

Displays, defines, and manipulates design variables and functional relationships between the
variables. This table operates much like a software spreadsheet. The design variables can be
dimensions in the document or variables defined with the Variable Table. The table consists of
the following columns: Type, Name, Value, Formula. Each row of the table displays a variable.
Unit Type Specifies the unit of measure for the variable entered in the Variable Table. The
box is located in the top left corner of the Variable Table. The default type is distance which
means that any expression created will be a distance parameter. For example, if you want to
create a variable to control an angular dimension, you should change the unit type to angular.
Then, the variable created will be an angular type, which can be used to control an angular
dimensional relationship.
Enter Accepts the edits you have made in the cell.
Cancel Clears the contents of the cell and returns the cell to its previous value.
Filter Access the Filter Dialog Box (on page 326) so that you can restrict the display of
variables in the Variable Table window.
Function Wizard Accesses the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box (on page 327).
Help Activates online Help for the Variable Table dialog box.
The following items describe the columns in the Variable Table:

Type Displays the variable type, generally the type of a dimension, such as DIM, VAR,
SCALAR, and so forth. DIM refers to a dimensional relationship. VAR refers to a variable that
you have created. This option is read-only.
Name Names the variable. By default, the software places the name of a dimension in this
column. These names can be renamed to a more logical one, if you want. You must always
name variables that you define when you create them. A variable must be named if you want to
refer to it in the Formula column of another row. You can change the name by editing the Name
cell and then selecting Check at the top of the Variable Table.
Variable names should meet the following requirements:
They must begin with a letter.
324
Drawing Precisely
They must contain only letters, numbers, and the underscore character; you cannot use
punctuation characters and spaces.
They must be 40 characters or fewer.
Value Displays the current value of the variable. A variable always has a value. You cannot
edit the value of a variable that has formula. You can edit driving dimensions with the Variable
Table.
Formula Displays the function or relation that defines the value of the variable. You can enter
a mathematical expression in a cell in this column to calculate the value for a corresponding
dimension. If the Formula cell is empty, then the variable value is independent of other
variables.
When using variable names within a formula, the names are case sensitive. For example, the
names var1 and Var1 reference two different variables.
If a value is defined by a formula, the formula appears in the Formula cell. You can enter an
algebraic expression in the formula cell to define the value of the variable. The single line
expression must be in standard Visual Basic syntax. The formula can include any available
function. The resulting value of the formula is shown in the Value column of the variable.
The software provides a set of standard mathematical functions. You can also select Visual
Basic functions that you wrote and saved. The functions can be typed in with the proper syntax
or you can use the Function Wizard to select and define the inputs to the function. If the
function does not contain proper syntax, the software displays a message indicating that there is
an error in the formula.
See Also
Alphabetical List of Functions (on page 325)
Alphabetical List of Functions

The following functions are available in the Variable Table. They are referred to as math and
trig functions.
ABS
Returns the absolute value of a number
ATN
Returns the arctangent of a number
COS
Returns the cosine of a number
EXP
Returns e raised to the power of a given number
FIX
Returns the integer portion of a number.
INT
Rounds a number down to the nearest integer
LOG
Returns the natural algorithm of a number
RND
Rounds a number to a specified number of digits
SGN
Returns an integer indicating the sign of a number
SIN
Returns the sine of the given angle
SQR
Returns the square root of number.
TAN
Returns the tangent of an angle
325
Drawing Precisely
The following functions are also available in the Variable Table.
User, Visual Basic
Relates variables through a user function,

usually defined with Visual Basic.
See Also
Format a Column (on page 323)
Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut Menu)

Restricts the display in the Variable Table to variables that you select on the Filter dialog box.
The default filter is set to Last selected window; consequently, only the variables that are
associated with elements in the active window display. To display all the variables that are
associated with the elements in the current document, set the filter to File.
To select this command from the shortcut menu, click Tools > Variables, and then pause
the mouse pointer in the Variable Table window.
See Also
Filter Dialog Box (on page 326)
Filter Dialog Box

Controls which variables should appear in the Variable Table.
Type Specifies the type of variables that are displayed in the Variable Table. If you click
Dimension, then only dimension variables are displayed in the Variable Table; these variables
directly control elements of a design. If you click User Variables, then only logical variables that
you created are displayed. This variable type cannot directly control a design. A user variable
must be set equal to a value or mathematical expression; for example, PI = 3.14159. Variables
can control dimensional relationships by setting the dimensional relationship equal to the
variable.
Named by Controls the view in the Variable Table so that only named variables are
displayed.
User Displays only variables that you have named.
System Displays only variables, usually the dimensions, that the software has created.
Both Displays all variables that are named.
Graphics in Displays variables that are associated with elements in the current document,
active window, or group of elements that you have selected. The default filter is set to Last
selected window.
Last selected window Displays variables that are associated with elements in the active
window.
Select set Displays variables that are associated with elements in a group that you have
selected in the document.
File Displays variables that are associated with elements in the current document.
326
Drawing Precisely
See Also
Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box

Selects the function you want to enter.
Function Category Selects subsets of all available functions. If you click the All in the
Function Category box, all the available functions appear. If you select any other category, only
those functions that belong to that category appear.
Custom functions that you define are included either under their assigned categories or in the
category you have defined if no other categories are assigned. See the Alphabetical List of
Functions (on page 325).
Function Name Lists all built-in and custom functions that are available in the selected
category. Also lists built-in and custom macro functions if a macro sheet is active. The display
area describes the selected function.
Next Moves to the next dialog box of the Function Wizard. You should click Next after
selecting the function you want to insert into the Formula Bar or the selected cell. After you
finish typing values into the appropriate fields, the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box is
displayed. This dialog box appears first if you are entering a math and trig function.
If you select a function that you defined using Visual Basic, a dialog box appears first that
allows you to open the document that contains the function. After you open the document, the
Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box displays.
Finish Inserts the function into the Formula Bar. If you do not type an argument, the
software inserts the argument names as placeholders in the formula.
Cancel Closes the Function Wizard dialog box without entering anything into the Formula
Bar or into the selected cell.
See Also
Edit a Formula Containing a Function (on page 323)

Enters values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the fields. The dialog box
changes according to the function you select in the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 dialog box.
Your entries must produce valid values for the arguments. If an argument is required for the
function to be entered successfully, the word "required" appears in brackets in the display area.
FuncName Displays the name of the function.
FnSummary Displays a summary of the function.
Number Displays the number of the function.
327
Drawing Precisely
First Argument Displays the argument of the variable. In the Function Wizard Step 1 of 2
dialog box, if the selected variable is a subroutine that you defined, more than one box appears
on the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box. The check box to the right of the field indicates
whether the variable is an input or output argument.
Back Moves from the current Function Wizard dialog box to the preceding one.
Finish Enters the completed function in the Variable Table.
See Also
Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box (on page 327)
Alphabetical List of Functions (on page 325)
Open Source Command

Opens a spreadsheet in the Variable Table that has been linked to it with Paste Link.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must click the Tools >
Variables command.
To access the Open Source command, right-click the Formula box in the Variable Table.
On the shortcut menu, click Edit Links. Select a link, and then click Open Source.
See Also
Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Links data in a document to a cell in the Variable Table.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must select Variables on
the Tools menu.
See Also
328
SECTION 10
Transforming Elements
Using the software tools, you can easily change the shape, size, angle, or relationship of an
existing element. The toolbars listed below contain most of the buttons that you can use to
transform an element.
The Draw Toolbar

Element handles can be used to quickly transform elements. For example, you can change an
arc by clicking the element with the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar and dragging the element's
handles. The selected arc is transformed to a straight line by dragging the mid-point handle. The
selected arc is transformed to a circle by dragging an end point handle.
The Draw toolbar also provides options for extending or trimming elements. You can click
Extend to Next to extend an element, or you can click Trim or Trim Corner to trim an element.
You can also add fillets or chamfers by clicking Fillet or Chamfer on the Draw toolbar.
The Change Toolbar

Elements can be mirrored by clicking Mirror on the Change toolbar. The software mirrors one
or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can also mirror and copy
elements.
You can rotate an element a precise angle about a specified point by using Rotate on the
Change toolbar. You can use the Rotate ribbon to change the Step Angle, Rotation Angle,
and Position Angle values.
You can also use the Change toolbar to scale elements. Scalable elements include framed
elements, such as text boxes. After clicking Scale on the Change toolbar, you can use the
Scale ribbon to increase the Scale Factor value.
You cannot use the Scale option to scale or scale and copy elements in a drawing
view because a scale factor has already been applied to the drawing view.
The Relationship Toolbar

You can also use the Relationship toolbar to transform elements. For example, selecting Equal
and clicking two elements will make the elements equal in size. The software will only allow you
to select elements that are valid input for a specific command. For example, if you use the
Concentric button, only circles, arcs, or ellipses can be selected.
When you apply a relationship between elements, the elements are modified to reflect the
relationship. If Maintain Relationships is set when you use the commands on the Relationship
toolbar to add relationships to your drawing, the added relationships will be maintained.
See Also
Changing the Shape of an Element (on page 330)
329
Changing the Shape of an Element

You can change the size, position, or orientation of an element with your pointer. When you
select an element with the Select Tool, its handles are displayed at key positions.
You can change the shape of a selected element by dragging one of its handles. The first figure
shows the effect of dragging an end point handle. The second figure shows the effect of
dragging the mid-point handle.
See Also
Modify an Element with the Select Tool (on page 330)
Change Command (on page 331)
Modify an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool.
3. Position the pointer over one of the element's handles. The pointer changes to show that the
element can now be modified.
4. Drag the element handle to reposition it. You can use relationships to position the handle
precisely.
330
To retain the angle or aspect ratio of the element you are modifying, hold the SHIFT key
while you drag the element's handle.
To suspend the effect of relationship handles so that you can modify the element more
freely, hold the ALT key while you drag the handle. The software maintains relationships as
appropriate for the modified element.
Change Command
Displays the Change toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to manipulate
elements.
See Also
Display the Change Toolbar (on page 198)
Rotating Elements
Using Rotate on the Change toolbar, you can rotate one or more elements a precise angle
about a specified point.
You can first select the element and then click Rotate, or you can click the button and then the
element.
As you click to define the reference points for the rotation, the software dynamically displays a
reference axis for the rotation. If you want to define a precise location for the rotation, you can
type values in the ribbon. You can type increments in the Step Angle box if you want to
dynamically view the results of the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is
displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully
dynamic.
The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon displays the angle of change between the old and new
positions with a positive value. The Position Angle box displays an absolute angle of the new
position of the rotation. You can type values in both of these boxes and preview the results. You
then click to complete the rotation of the element.
By default, a copy is made of the element when you rotate it. If you do not want a copy, you
should clear Copy on the ribbon.
See Also
Rotate Command (on page 332)
Rotate an Element (on page 331)
Rotate an Element
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select one or more elements.

On the Change toolbar, click Rotate .
If you want to copy the rotated elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
Click where you want the center of rotation to be. The software dynamically displays a
reference axis for the rotation.
5. Click to define the other end of the reference axis. The software dynamically displays the
rotation axis and elements being rotated. The location and position of the reference axis
defines the rotation 'from' point.
6. Position the elements where you want them and then click to define the rotation 'to' point.
To rotate by increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the ribbon.
You can click Rotate before you select elements to rotate.
You can use relationship indicators to define the rotation 'from' and 'to' points.
Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy the rotated elements, you can hold CTRL while
you click to define the 'to' point.
331
Relationships between elements within the selection set are maintained if the relationships
still apply after the elements have been rotated.
You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are
using Rotate.
When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Rotate at the point where
you left off.
See Also
Rotate Ribbon (on page 332)
Rotating Elements (on page 331)
Rotate Command
Rotates one or more elements a precise distance or angle about a specified point.
See Also
Rotate Ribbon (on page 332)
Rotate Ribbon
Copy Creates a copy of the element that you are rotating. If you do not want a copy of the
rotated element, then clear this option.
Step Angle Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the increments, in
degrees, that an element rotates from a temporary axis. The temporary axis is the line between
the element's center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate the element from (B).
You can specify increments in the Step Angle box if you want to dynamically view the results of
the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30 degree
increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully dynamic.
332
Rotation Angle Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between the point
that you rotate from and the point that you rotate to. In the following picture, the center of
rotation (A) is shown with the point that you rotate the element from (B).
The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the rotated
element. The value is always positive.
Position Angle Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of rotation
(A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the element, the position angle (C)
changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the point that you rotate to. The
position angle is always a positive value that is measured counter-clockwise from the axis.
See Also
333
Mirroring Elements
To mirror an element, you can click Mirror on the Change toolbar. The software mirrors one or
more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can mirror with or without
making a copy.
See Also
Mirror Command (on page 335)
Mirror an Element (on page 334)
Mirror an Element
You can mirror elements by defining a mirror axis or by using a linear element as a mirror axis.
You can also mirror and copy elements.
To mirror about an existing mirror axis or linear element

1.
2.
3.
4.

On the Change toolbar, click Mirror .
If you want to copy the mirrored elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
Locate a mirror axis. The mirrored elements are displayed dynamically on the other side of
the axis.
If you locate a linear element, the element can be part of the selection set.
5. Position the pointer so that the mirrored elements are where you want them, and then click.
To mirror about a mirror axis that you define

2. On the Change toolbar, click Mirror.
3. If you want to copy the mirrored elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
334
4. Define one end of the mirror axis by click in free space or by clicking a key point. The
software displays the mirror axis and mirrored elements dynamically.
5. Move the pointer until the mirror axis and the mirrored elements are in position where you
want them to be, and then click.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a symmetric relationship when you
mirror and copy elements. The mirror axis is used as the symmetry axis.
Relationships within the selection set are copied to the mirrored elements if they are still
applicable.
You can click Mirror before you select elements to mirror.
Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to mirror and copy, you can hold CTRL while you click
to position the elements.
Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically, you can use the Position Angle box on
the ribbon.
You can use relationship indicators to define a mirror axis.
You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom and Pan, while you are
using Mirror.
See Also
Mirror Ribbon (on page 335)
Mirror Command
Mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define. You can mirror
without copying, or mirror and copy.
See Also
Mirror Ribbon (on page 335)
Mirror Ribbon
Copy Mirrors and copies the elements in the selection set.
Position Angle Sets the angle of the mirror axis. The origin of the angle measurement is the
point you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. Setting the position angle to 0 extends the
axis horizontally to the right of the screen, 90 extends the axis vertically to the top, 180 extends
the axis horizontally to the left, and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom.
See Also
335
Aligning SmartSketch Objects

Alignment involves lining up two or more objects vertically or horizontally, either by their edges
or their centers. Almost all diagrams and drawings require aligning certain items with each other.
You can rely on rulers, grids, and guides to help you place objects, or you can use these
features along with the alignment functions.
Aligning Items Vertically

You can align objects vertically in three different ways:
Align objects by their left sides
Align objects by their right sides
Align objects by their centers
In the following illustration, the objects are aligned by their left sides:
The objects in the select set are moved horizontally from the place where they are selected until
they are aligned with the left edge of the leftmost object in the select set.
If two objects are horizontally near one another, one of the objects may be placed
behind another object. To avoid this, make sure that the items you select are never to the left or
right of one another when you use vertical alignment.
Aligning Items Horizontally

The Align command allows you to horizontally align objects in three different ways:
Align objects by their tops
Align objects by their bottoms
Align objects by their centers
336
In the following illustration, the objects are aligned horizontally by their tops:
The objects in the select set are moved vertically from the place where they are selected until
they are aligned with the top edge of the top-most object in the select set.
If two objects are vertically near one another, one of the objects may be placed
behind another object. To avoid this, make sure that the items you select are never to the top or
bottom of one another when you use horizontal alignment.
See Also
Align Command (on page 338)
Line Style Editor Command (on page 492)
Align SmartSketch Objects (on page 337)
Align SmartSketch Objects

1. On the drawing sheet, select two or more objects that you want to align.
To select more than one object, hold the Shift or Ctrl key and click each object.
You can create a select set by clicking Select Tool

on the Draw toolbar and then
dragging a fence around the objects you want to include.
2. Click Align
To display the Change toolbar, click Change
3. On the Align ribbon (on page 338), click the button that corresponds to the alignment type
you want.
When you use horizontal alignment, make sure the selected objects are not to the top or
bottom of one another. If two shapes are vertically near one another, one of the objects may
be placed behind another object.
When you use vertical alignment, make sure the selected objects are not to the right or left
of one another. If two shapes are horizontally near one another, one of the objects may be
placed behind another object.
Alignment features only line up objects; they do not distribute an equal amount of space
between aligned objects.
You cannot align items that are glued to other objects, including labels and symbols.
337
See Also
Align Command
Allows you to align two or more objects in a select set. You can create a select set by clicking
Select Tool
on the Draw toolbar and dragging a fence around the items you want to include.
To select more than one object, hold the Shift or Ctrl key and click each element.
The six align options provide the flexibility of arranging objects with less dragging.
You cannot align items that are glued to other objects, including labels and
symbols.
See Also
Drawing Precisely (on page 267)
Align SmartSketch Objects (on page 337)
Align Ribbon (on page 338)
Align Ribbon
Align Left - Aligns the left side of objects in a select set.
Align Right - Aligns the right side of objects in a select set.
Align about Horizontal - Aligns the objects in a select set along their horizontal centers.
Align about Vertical - Aligns the objects in a select set along their vertical centers.
Align Top - Aligns the tops of objects in a select set.
Align Bottom - Aligns the bottoms of objects in a select set.
See Also
Scaling Elements
Scale on the Change toolbar reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor that you
define. The scale factor is the same along the x and y axes. Scalable elements include framed
elements, such as text boxes. You cannot use Scale to scale or scale and copy elements in a
drawing view because a scale factor has already been applied to the drawing view.
Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable after
the elements have been scaled. If not, the relationships are deleted.
To define the new scale, you can click points on the drawing sheet or you can type a value in
the Scale Factor box on the ribbon. You can also use the Step box on the ribbon to make the
Scale Factor increase or decrease incrementally as you move the mouse.
See Also
Scale an Element (on page 339)
Scale an Element with Its Handles (on page 340)
Scale Command (on page 341)
338
Scale an Element
1.
2.
3.
4.

On the Change toolbar, click Scale .
If you want to copy the scaled elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
Click where you want the scale origin to be. The software displays a crosshair at the scale
origin, and dynamically displays a line between the scale origin and the pointer.
5. Move the pointer until the elements are the size you want and then click.
Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable
after the elements have been scaled.
You can click Scale before you select elements to scale.
Instead of clicking to define the new scale, you can use the Scale Factor box on the ribbon.
Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to scale and copy, you can hold CTRL while you click
to define the new scale.
You can use relationship indicators with this command.
You can use the Step box on the ribbon to make the Scale Factor increase or decrease
incrementally as you move the mouse.
You can use the Reference box on the ribbon to change how the command dynamics
correspond to the Scale Factor.
To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the paper size, use Sheet Setup
on the File menu.
See Also
339
Scale an Element with Its Handles

You can use handles to scale framed elements such as text boxes, symbols, and linked or
embedded objects.
2. Position the pointer over one of its handles.
3. Drag the handle to scale the element or object.
You can also click Scale on the Change toolbar to scale the drawing; the dimensions are
scaled to compensate for the change in size. Scale changes the size of one set of geometry
to another set of geometry in the document. To change the overall size of the graphics with
respect to the paper size, use Sheet Setup on the File menu.
Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are still applicable
after the elements have been scaled.
See Also
Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its Original Model Size

When you insert an AutoCAD or MicroStation document into a drawing sheet using Object on
the Insert menu, the object is automatically scaled to fit the print area of the drawing sheet. The
print area size changes depending on the selected working sheet. In some cases, you might
want to work in model space and not paper space.
1. Click Insert > Object to insert an AutoCAD or MicroStation object.
2. Highlight the inserted object with the Select tool.
4. On the Info tab of the Properties dialog box, click Scale (1:1). After you close the dialog
box, the inserted object changes back to the original model size.
If an inserted object was scaled before bringing it into the drawing sheet, you might need to
adjust the scale on the Properties dialog box to get the results you want.
After inserting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document, if you have not performed any other
actions, you can click Undo on the Edit menu to change the object back to the original
model size.
See Also
Object Command (on page 456)
Properties Command (File Menu) (on page 69)
340
Scale Command
Reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor that you define. The scale factor is
the same along the X and Y axis. Scalable elements include framed elements, such as text
boxes. You can use Scale to scale, or to simultaneously scale and copy.
See Also
Scale Ribbon (on page 341)
Scaling Elements (on page 338)
Scale Ribbon
Copy Scales and copies the elements in the selection set.
Step Specifies the step value for the Scale Factor. The step value causes the Scale Factor
to be decreased or increased in increments as you move the pointer toward or away from the
scale origin. For example, if you set the step value to 0.25, the scale increases in increments of
0.25 as you move the pointer away from the scale origin.
Scale Factor Specifies how much the software reduces or enlarges the element. A scale
factor between zero and one reduces; a scale factor greater than one enlarges.
Reference Specifies how long the dynamic line from the scale origin to the pointer has to be
in order to achieve a Scale Factor of 1.
For example, if you set Reference to 1, for every inch you move the pointer away from the scale
origin, the scale factor increases by one. If you set Reference to 2, for every two inches you
move the pointer away from the scale origin, the scale factor increases by one.
See Also
Extending or Trimming Elements

You can trim, extend or split/segment elements with buttons on the Draw toolbar. You can also
add fillets or chamfers by clicking Fillet or Chamfer on the Draw toolbar.
341
Relationships are added or removed as necessary when you trim or extend an element. For
example, if you trim part of a circle and more than one arc remains, concentric and equal
relationships are applied between the remaining arcs.
You can also draw a chamfer on two different elements with Chamfer on the Draw toolbar. The
elements must be linear, but do not have to intersect. The elements cannot be parallel to each
other.
When two lines intersect, you can draw a chamfer simply by clicking the corner and then moving
the pointer in the distance that you want. A final click on the drawing sheet places the chamfer
(B).
To place a fillet, you can click Fillet on the Draw toolbar and then select the elements you want
to modify. As with any command, you can use a combination of clicks and ribbon input.
See Also
Chamfer Command (on page 351)
Extend to Next Command (on page 348)
Fillet Command (on page 353)
Change Command (on page 331)
342
Trim an Element
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim
.
To trim one element at a time, click each element you want to trim.
To trim more than one element at the same time, drag the pointer over the elements.
When you release the mouse button, all the elements are trimmed.
Before you click an element to trim, you can use QuickPick to see which portion of the
element will be trimmed. When you move the pointer over the elements, QuickPick
highlights the portion of the element that will be trimmed if you click.
If you trim an element that does not intersect any other elements, the command trims the
entire element, effectively deleting the element.
See Also
Trim Command
Trims open and closed elements to the closest intersection in both directions.
See Also
Trim to Element Command

Trims open and closed elements to another selected element.
See Also
343
Trim an Element to Another Element

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim to Element
.
2. Select an element in the SmartSketch drawing.
3. Select the element you want to trim to.
The Trim to Element command remains active until you exit from it. As long as the
command is active, you can select additional elements to trim.
See Also
Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim Corner
.
Click each element you want to trim or extend.
Drag the pointer over one or more elements, and then release the mouse button. The
parts of the element over which you dragged the mouse remainother parts are
trimmed or extended as necessary.
You can draw only one corner at a time by dragging the pointer.
See Also
Trim Corner Command

Draws a corner by extending and/or trimming two selected open elements.
344
See Also
Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements (on page 344)
Trim an Element to a Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim to Point
.
3. Click the point, either in space or on another element, to which you want to trim.
The Trim to Point command remains active until you exit from it. As long as the
command is active, you can select additional elements to trim.
See Also
Trim to Point Command

Trims the selected element to a point in space.
See Also
Trim Part of Element

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim Inside
.
2. Click to define the first point of the element to trim.
3. Click to define the second point of the element.
The Trim Inside command remains active until you exit from it. As long as the command
is active, you can continue to trim parts of selected elements on the Drawing sheet.
See Also
Trim Inside Command

Trims within the selected element (partial delete).
See Also
Split Graphic Elements

To break an object into equal segments
1. Click Split
If the Split command is not displayed, click the Trim flyout menu on the Draw toolbar
and select it.
2. On the Split ribbon, enter the number of breaks in the Segments field.
Split mode is enabled by default whenever the Split command is selected. The
Segment the Element button is used to toggle between Split and Segment modes. When
345
the button is depressed, Segment mode is enabled; when the button is "up", Split mode is
enabled.
3. Select a graphic element in the SmartSketch drawing.
As long as the Split command is active, you can continue splitting SmartSketch
elements by selecting them on the Drawing sheet.
To place points equally spaced along an element

1. Click Split
2. On the Split ribbon, click Segment the Element
to enable Segment mode.
The Segment the Element button is used to toggle between Split and Segment
modes. When the button is depressed, Segment mode is enabled; when the button is "up",
Split mode is enabled.
3. Then, enter the number of segments in the Segments field.
4. Select a graphic element in the SmartSketch drawing.
As long as the Split command is active, you can continue splitting SmartSketch
elements by selecting them on the Drawing sheet.
To split an element at a specific point

2. Click Split
3. On the Split ribbon, click Split/Segment at Point

.
4. Click the point at which you want to split the element.
As long as the Split/Segment at Point button is enabled, you can continue selecting points
on the element.
Certain elements, such as circles, require that you use two points to split the element.
A graphic element is any primitive geometric shape, such as a line, circle, or arc.
Split mode divides the selected element into an equal number of sections; Segment mode
places equally spaced points along the selected element. You can toggle between these two
modes to alternatively split and segment SmartSketch elements when the Split command is
active.
Press Esc or right-click an empty space on the active Drawing sheet to exit the Split
command.
Split Command
Provides a variety of modes for splitting graphic elements: Split mode, in which the selected
element is divided into an equal number of sections, Segment mode, in which equally spaced
points are placed along the selected element, and Split/Segment at Point, in which you can
split the selected element at a specific point.
346
In Split mode, points display (as x's) on the selected object indicating where it will be divided. In
the following illustration, the circle has been divided into four sections:
In Segment mode, points display on the selected object indicating where the segments have
been spaced. In the following illustration, notice that the circle is segmented by four
equally-spaced points.
In Split/Segment at Point mode, each point you specify on the selected object displays as
In the following illustration, the line is divided at the point that was specified.
See Also
Split/Segment Ribbon (on page 347)
Split/Segment Ribbon
Sets options for dividing a graphic object.
Split/Segment at Point - Allows you to divide an element at a specific point. Certain
elements, such as circles, require that you use two points to split the element.
Segment the Element - Toggles between Split mode, which allows you to divide a graphic
object into equal sections, and Segment mode, which allows you to place equally spaced points
along a graphic object.
Number of Segments - Specifies the number of segments into which the graphic element is
divided. The minimum number of segments that can be specified is two.
Extend an Element
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Extend to Next
347
To extend one element at a time, click each element near the end you want to extend.
To extend more than one element at the same time, drag the pointer over the elements
near the end you want to extend. When you release the mouse button, all the elements
are extended.
Before you select an element to extend, you can view the possible results. When you move
the pointer over elements, the software displays the extension that will be drawn if you click.
If an element does not extend in the direction you want it to, move your pointer closer to the
end of the element you want to extend.
See Also
Extend to Next Command

Extends one or more open elements until they intersect with the nearest element in the
active window. The extension direction is determined by the position where you select the
element to extend. For example, if you select a horizontal line to the right of its midpoint, the line
extends to the right.
If there is no possible intersection between the element you want to extend and any other
element in the view, the command does not extend the element.
See Also
Extend an Element (on page 347)
Extend an Element to a Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Extend to Point
.
You can select multiple objects using the Ctrl key.
3. Click the point, either in space or on another element, to which you want to extend.
Before you select an element to extend, you can view the possible results. When you
move the pointer over elements, the software displays the extension that will be drawn if you
click.
348
See Also
Extend to Point Command (on page 349)
Extend to Point Command

Extends one or more open elements to a point in space or to another element. The extension
direction is determined by the position where you select the element to extend. For example, if
you select a horizontal line to the right of its midpoint, the line extends to the right.
See Also
Extend an Element to a Point (on page 348)
Draw a Chamfer
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Chamfer .
2. On the ribbon, type a distance value in the Setback A box. The first linear element will be
set back this distance from the corner.
To define the setback distance for the second linear element, type a value in the
Setback B box on the ribbon.
To define the chamfer angle, type a value in the Angle box on the ribbon.
4. Click the linear element to which you want to apply the Setback A value.
5. Click the linear element to which you want to apply the Setback B value or the chamfer
angle value.
The lines that you select do not need to intersect, but they cannot be parallel.
6. Click to draw the chamfer.
349
350
You can draw a chamfer only between linear elements.
When two lines intersect, you can draw a chamfer simply by clicking the corner and then
moving the pointer in the distance that you want. A final click on the drawing sheet places
the chamfer.
You can draw a chamfer with equal chamfer angles. Click the two linear elements you want
to use. When the chamfer is displayed dynamically, move the pointer until the setback
distance you want to use is displayed, and then click.
You can switch the setback values for the linear elements. After you click the linear
elements you want to use, move the mouse pointer to one side or the other of the temporary
line display, then click.
When the elements you want to use cross each other, you can draw the chamfer in any of
the quadrants. The software trims the remaining elements at the end points of the chamfer.
You can easily draw more than one 45 degree chamfer with the same setback distance. On
the ribbon, type a value in the Setback A or Setback B box. The value in the setback box is
active until you change it, so you can click one corner after another to draw equivalent
chamfers.
You can draw a chamfer by dragging the pointer over the two elements that you want to
draw the chamfer between. When you use this method, the setback distance and angle
boxes on the ribbon are not active.
See Also
Chamfer Command (on page 351)
Chamfer Ribbon (on page 351)
Chamfer Command
Draws a chamfer, or bevel, between two linear elements. You can control the chamfer angle
and the setback distances for both elements.
See Also
Draw a Chamfer (on page 349)
Chamfer Ribbon (on page 351)
Chamfer Ribbon
Colors dialog box.
Angle Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element.
Setback A Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the first
linear element you select.
351
Setback B Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the
second linear element you select.
See Also
Draw a Chamfer (on page 349)
Draw a Fillet
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fillet .
2. On the ribbon, type a radius in the Radius box.
3. Click one of the elements that you want to draw the fillet between. You can draw a fillet
between arcs, lines, circles, ellipses, and curves.
4. Click the other element.
5. Click to draw the fillet.
352
You can draw a fillet without typing a radius. Click the two elements you want to use. Then
move the pointer to a position that defines the radius, and click.
When the elements you want to use cross each other, you can draw a fillet at any of the
quadrants. The software trims the remaining elements at the end points of the fillet.
You can draw a fillet at a corner with one click. On the ribbon, type a value in the Radius
box. Position the pointer over a corner, then click.
The value in the Radius box is active until you change it, so you can click one corner after
another to draw fillets with the same radius.
You can draw a fillet by dragging the pointer over the two elements that you want to draw
the fillet between. When you use this method, the Radius box on the ribbon is not active.
See Also
Fillet Ribbon (on page 353)
Fillet Command
Draws a fillet between two elements. The elements can be arcs, lines, circles, ellipses, or
curves.
See Also
Draw a Fillet (on page 352)
Fillet Ribbon (on page 353)
Fillet Ribbon
Colors Dialog Box.
Radius Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to create the fillet.
Trim Removes the corner of the object where the fillet is created.
No Trim Leaves the corner of the object when creating a fillet.
See Also
Draw a Fillet (on page 352)
353
Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements

You can apply relationships as you draw and place elements by using the relationship indicators
that appear by the pointer. You can also apply relationships to elements that you have already
placed on the drawing sheet.
Applying Relationships to Existing Elements

To apply relationships to elements that you have already placed on the drawing sheet, click a
button on the Relationship toolbar and then select the elements you want to relate. When you
apply a relationship between elements, the elements are modified to reflect the relationship. If
Maintain Relationships is set when you use the commands on the Relationship toolbar to add
relationships to your drawing, the added relationships will be maintained.
For example, selecting Equal and clicking two circles makes the two circles equal in size.
If a line and arc are not tangential, applying a tangent relationship modifies one or both elements
to make them tangent.
When you use commands on the Relationship toolbar, the software allows you to select only
elements that are valid input for that command. For example, when you use Concentric, the
command allows you to select only circles, arcs, and ellipses.
Perhaps you begin designing with a few key design parameters. You would usually draw known
elements in relation to one another and then draw additional elements to fill in the blanks.
354
As you draw and add elements to the drawing, the relationships are maintained and additional
relationships are applied.
Modifying Elements That Share Relationships

If two elements share a relationship, the relationship is maintained when you modify either one
of the elements. For example, if you move a circle that has a tangent relationship with a line, the
line also moves. The elements remain tangent.
If you move a circle that does not have a tangent relationship with a line, the line does not move.
Other elements that share relationships maintain them in the following ways:
If a line and an arc share a tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is modified.
355
If a line and arc share a connect relationship, they remain connected when either is modified.
If two lines are horizontal, they remain horizontal even if you change the position and length of
one of the lines.
Deleting Relationships
You can delete a relationship as you would delete any other element. You select a relationship
handle, and then click Delete. Relationships are automatically deleted when their deletion is
necessary to allow a modification to occur. For example, if you rotate an element that has a
horizontal relationship applied to it, the relationship is automatically deleted.
If you want to change an element by adding or removing a relationship, and the element does
not change the way you expect, it may be controlled by a driving dimension. You can toggle the
dimension from driving to driven, and then make the change.
See Also
Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis (on page 360)
Make Elements Concentric (on page 356)
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical (on page 358)
Make Elements Collinear (on page 357)
Make Elements Perpendicular (on page 359)
Make Elements Tangential (on page 360)
Connect Elements (on page 357)
Make Elements Concentric

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric
2. Click an arc or circle.
3. Click another arc or circle. One element moves to make the two elements concentric.
356
The order in which you select the elements might determine which element moves to a
new location.
See Also
Concentric Command (on page 357)
Concentric Command
Makes an arc or circle concentric with another arc or circle.
See Also
Make Elements Concentric (on page 356)
Make Elements Collinear

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Collinear
.
2. Click a line, and then click another line. One line moves to become collinear with the other.
new location.
See Also
Collinear Command (on page 357)
Collinear Command
Makes two lines collinear.
See Also
Connect Elements
1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Connect
2. Click an element at a key point.
3. Click another element or key point. One element moves to connect the elements.
new location.
357
See Also
Connect Command (on page 358)
Connect Command
Connects two elements or key points at one point. This command also connects a key point
on an element to a position that you select on another element.
See Also
Connect Elements (on page 357)
Make Elements Equal

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Equal .
3. Click another element. The elements become equal.
You can make the following elements equal: two lines, two arcs, two circles, and an arc and
a circle.
You cannot make a line equal to an arc or circle.
See Also
Equal Command (on page 358)
Equal Command
Makes elements or dimension values equal. You can make the length of lines, the radius of
arcs and circles, and the values of dimensions equal.
See Also
Make Elements Equal (on page 358)
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Horizontal/Vertical
.
To make a line horizontal or vertical, click the line.
To make two key points horizontal or vertical, click a key point, and then click another
key point.
The current orientation of the line determines how it is positioned after you select it. For
example, if a line is closer to a horizontal orientation than a vertical orientation, the line becomes
horizontal.
See Also
Horizontal/Vertical Command (on page 359)
358
Horizontal/Vertical Command
Makes a line horizontal or vertical, or horizontally or vertically aligns two key points.
See Also
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical (on page 358)
Make Elements Parallel

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Parallel .
2. Click a line.
3. Click another line. One line moves to make the two lines parallel.
new location.
See Also
Parallel Command (on page 359)
Parallel Command
Makes two lines parallel.
See Also
Make Elements Parallel (on page 359)
Make Elements Perpendicular

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Perpendicular .
2. Click a line.
3. Click a line, arc, or circle. One line moves to make the two elements perpendicular.
new location.
See Also
Perpendicular Command (on page 359)
Perpendicular Command
Makes two elements perpendicular. You can make two lines, a line and an arc, or a line and a
circle perpendicular.
See Also
Make Elements Perpendicular (on page 359)
359
Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis

1.
2.
3.
4.
On the Relationship toolbar, click Symmetric

.
Click a line that you want to use as a symmetry axis.
Click an element.
Click another element. The two elements become symmetrical about the axis.
new location.
See Also
Symmetric Command
Makes elements symmetric about an axis. The characteristics of the first element selected,
such as size and position, are maintained by the symmetric relationship.
See Also
Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis (on page 360)
Make Elements Tangential

You can make two elements tangential.
To make elements tangential where their end points meet

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Tangent .
2. Click at a point where two end points meet. The elements are adjusted to make the two
elements tangential.
To make elements tangential that are not connected at an end point

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Tangent.
3. Click another element.
One element moves to make the two elements tangential.
new location.
See Also
360
Tangent Command
Makes two elements tangential. You can make two circles or arcs tangential. You can also
make a circle, or an arc, and a line tangential.
See Also
Make Elements Tangential (on page 360)
361
362
SECTION 11
Arranging Elements
You can arrange elements so that they can be more easily manipulated on a drawing sheet.
Several features for arranging elements are provided in the software.
The Group command on the Change toolbar allows you to group elements that reside in the
same document and drawing sheet together. The elements can then be modified as a unit. You
can ungroup elements by clicking Ungroup on the Change toolbar.
You can also use Layers on the Main toolbar to arrange elements. Each time you draw an
element it is assigned to the active layer. You can use Layers to see which layer is active or to
change the active layer.
The Display Manager on the Tools menu allows you to control the way elements appear on
sheets or layers by changing settings such as, line type or color.
Elements that overlap are displayed in the order they are drawn. A newly created element is
placed in front of all other elements because it has the highest display priority. An element's
display priority can easily be changed. You can pull an element up one position, push it down
one position, send it to the back, or bring it to the front by selecting the appropriate command on
the Change toolbar.
See Also
Grouping Elements (on page 363)
Element Display Priority (on page 367)
Grouping Elements
A group is a set of elements that you have selected. The set behaves like any other select set.
Grouping elements allows you to work with them as a unit. For example, you could place the
holes and center lines of a bolt hole pattern into a group. This would allow you to move, copy, or
delete the entire pattern at once, as if it were a single element.
The following list describes some of the properties of groups:
An element can be a member of only one group.
Grouped elements must reside in the same document and be on the same drawing sheet.
Any locatable element can be grouped.
Any combination of elements, such as lines, text, circles, and so forth, can be grouped.
You can use Group to nest two or more entire groups within a larger group, or you can nest
individual elements and groups within a larger group.
After elements are grouped, you can use Ungroup to ungroup all of the elements at the same
time. You can also use Ungroup and QuickPick to remove one or more elements from a group.
Selecting Groups and Members of Groups

The options on the Select Tool ribbon allow you to select an entire group or individual members
of a group. If you set the bottom-up option, you can select individual members. If you select the
top down option, you can select all the members.
You can also use QuickPick to select one or more group members or an entire group.
363
Arranging Elements
Performing Tasks on Groups
After you select a group, you can use a command or ribbon option on all of its members. For
example, when you move, copy, or delete a group, all of its members are moved, copied, or
deleted. You can move or apply relationships to a member of a group and the changes do not
affect the position of the other members of the group.
When you copy an entire group, all of its members are copied, including nested groups. The
software creates a new group that contains all of the members of the original group. When you
copy one member of a group, only that member is copied.
If you use PickQuick to select a member of a group, you can perform tasks on the member
individually, without affecting other members.
In Catalog Manager, you cannot save a symbol with grouped elements; therefore you
must ungroup all grouped elements before saving the symbol.
See Also
Group Command (on page 365)
Group or Ungroup Elements (on page 364)
Group or Ungroup Elements

Grouping elements allows you to work with them as a unit. The elements must reside in the
same document and drawing sheet.
To group elements
1. Select two or more elements.
You cannot select an element that is already a member of a group.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Group
To ungroup elements
1. Select a group.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup
To remove one element from a group

1. Use QuickPick to select the element you want to remove from the group.
364
You can nest groups by selecting two or more groups. You can then ungroup the entire
group or any of its members.
You can select a group and other elements and use Group to group them.
You can perform tasks on all members of a group by selecting the group and then selecting
the command or ribbon option you want to use.
You can use QuickPick to select and edit one or more members of a group.
You can use the bottom-up selection method instead of QuickPick, to select individual
group members. Set Bottom Up on the Select tool ribbon.
You can use the Properties dialog box to find out if an element is part of a group. Select the
element and then, on the shortcut menu, click Properties.
Arranging Elements
See Also
Group Ribbon (on page 365)
Group Command
Binds elements so that you can locate, select, and manipulate them as a unit. Grouped
elements are usually related, such as the holes and center lines of a bolt hole pattern. When you
select a group, the Group ribbon is displayed so you can edit the entire group or any of its
members. The command is only active when one of the following conditions is met:
An element or set of elements is selected
More than one group is selected
A group and another element are selected
See Also
Group Ribbon (on page 365)
Group Ribbon
Style Sets the style for all of the elements in a group.
Color Sets the color for all of the elements in a group.
Line Type Sets the line types and styles for all of the elements in a group.
Width Sets the line width for all of the elements in a group.
See Also
Group Properties Dialog Box

Displays the properties of the selected group.
See Also
Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) (on page 366)
User Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box) (on page 366)
365
Arranging Elements
Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box)
Type Displays the type of the selected element. You can't edit any of these.
Sheet Displays the name of the drawing sheet the element is on. You cannot edit the name
of the drawing sheet.
Name Displays the name of the group. The software names the group when you create it.
Number of Items Displays the number of elements in the group. This label updates
automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group.
Is Nested Within Another Group Shows whether the group is nested within another group.
This label updates automatically when you nest a group using Group, or ungroup a group using
Ungroup.
Contains Nested Groups Displays whether or not the selected group contains nested
groups.
Closed The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are primitive elements,
such as lines, arcs, and curves; whether the end points of these elements are connected; and
whether the members of the group form a closed region.
This box updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the group.
End-Point Connected The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are
primitive elements, such as lines, arcs, and curves, and whether the end points of these
elements are connected. This label updates automatically when you add elements to or delete
elements from the group.
See Also
User Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box)

Attribute Set Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Attributes Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the
box and press TAB.
Value Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can type is based on the value in
the Type box.
table.
row in the table.
Preview Displays the group you selected on the Drawing sheet.
See Also
366
Arranging Elements
Ungroup Command
Removes elements from groups that were defined using Group. You can remove individual
elements from a group. This command is active only if a group that can be ungrouped is
selected on the Drawing Sheet.
See Also
Element Display Priority

When 2-D elements overlap, their display priority determines which is in front. The first element
you draw is displayed behind all other elementsit has the lowest display priority. A newly
created element is displayed in front of all other elementsit has the highest display priority.
For example, if you draw a circle, then an ellipse, and then a rectangle, the circle is displayed in
back. The ellipse is displayed between the circle and the rectangle, and the rectangle is
displayed in front.
Changing the Element Display Priority

You can change an element's display priority by pulling it up one position, pushing it down one
position, sending it to the back, or bringing it to the front. One click on the striped box changes
the display priority.
You can change the display priority of a group the same way. The display priority of elements
within the group does not change.
See Also
Pull Up Command (on page 369)
Push Down Command (on page 369)
Pull an Element Up in the Display Order (on page 369)
Push an Element Down in the Display Order (on page 369)
367
Arranging Elements
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order

2. On the Change toolbar, click Bring to Front.
When you select a single element, the element moves to the front of the display.
When you bring more than one element or an element group to the front of the display
order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group.
See Also
Bring to Front Command (on page 368)
Bring to Front Command

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups to the front of the display order.
See Also
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order (on page 368)
Send an Element to the Back of the Display Order

2. On the Change toolbar, click Send to Back
When you select a single element, the element moves to the back of the display.
When you send more than one element or an element group to the back of the display
See Also
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order (on page 368)
368
Arranging Elements
Send to Back Command

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups to the back of the display order.
See Also
Pull an Element Up in the Display Order

2. On the Change toolbar, click Pull Up
When you pull more than one element or an element group up one position in the display
See Also
Pull Up Command
Moves one or more selected elements or element groups up one position in the display
order.
If more than one element overlaps the selected elements, the selected elements do not move all
the way to the front. To quickly move elements to the front, click Bring to Front.
See Also
Pull an Element Up in the Display Order (on page 369)
Push an Element Down in the Display Order

2. On the Change toolbar, click Push Down
When you push more than one element or an element group down one position in the
display order, the elements retain their display order within the selection set or group.
See Also
Push Down Command

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups down one position in the display
order.
If the selected elements overlap more than one other element, the selected elements do not
move all the way to the back. To quickly move elements to the back, click Send to Back.
369
Arranging Elements
See Also
Push an Element Down in the Display Order (on page 369)
Using Layers to Arrange Elements

Layers and display settings can help you group elements so that you can manipulate them more
easily on a drawing sheet. Layers and display settings also make it easier to keep track of
different types of elements. Each drawing sheet in a document can contain several layers.
When you draw an element, it is assigned to the active layer. To see which layer is active, or to
change the active layer, you can use Layers on the Main toolbar.
Controlling the Display of Elements and Objects

After assigning an element or object to a layer, you can set display criteria to control the way
items appear in a window by using Display Manager on the Tools menu. With this command,
you can set display criteria for any sheet and its associated layers in the current document. The
display settings can include the color or line type and line width of elements or objects.
If two windows are open for the same document, the display settings that you select with
the Display Manager dialog box affect every window view of the drawing sheet.
Displaying Layers
To view elements on specific layers, you can turn on one or more layers by selecting Layers.
When you turn layers off, you cannot see the elements assigned to the layers on the drawing
sheet. For example, you can assign lines to one layer and closed elements to another layer.
Then, if you turn off the layer for closed elements and turn on the layer for lines, you see only
lines on the drawing sheet.
You can still see relationships between elements that are assigned to different layers on a
drawing sheet. For example, suppose a line and a circle are tangent and they are assigned to
different layers. If the line's layer is displayed and the circle's layer is hidden, you can still see
the tangent relationship handle on the line. If the line's layer is hidden as well, the tangent
relationship handle is hidden.
370
Arranging Elements
With Display Manager on the Tools menu, you can control the way elements appear on sheets
or layers by changing settings, such as the line type or color. You can also create custom colors
for the display.
Layers and Layer Groups

While layers provide a way to control the display of elements on a drawing sheet, layer groups
give you another way to control the display of elements on drawing sheets. You can use Layer
Groups on the Tools menu to define layer groups.
Creating New Layers

You can create new layers using Layer Groups, or by typing a new layer name on the ribbon.
You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing sheet.
Assigning Elements to Layers

Although you can assign an element to only one layer, you can change the layer to which an
element is assigned. You can find out which layer an element is assigned to by selecting it and
using Properties on the Edit menu.
See Also
Display Manager Command (on page 371)
Layers Command (on page 375)
Control the Display of Elements in a Window (on page 371)
Create a Layer (on page 374)
Change the Layer of an Element (on page 376)
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group (on page 377)
Control the Display of Elements in a Window

1. Click Tools > Display Manager.
2. On the Sheets tab, set the options you want to use for displaying elements in a window. The
color, line type, and width settings are applied to all the elements on the sheet.
To set the display for a specific layer on a sheet, select the sheet on the Sheets tab.
The layers that are in that sheet are displayed on the Layers tab. You can specify display
settings for each layer in a sheet by clicking the Layers tab and setting the options you
want.
If you want to quickly display or hide layers for the current drawing sheet, you can click
Layers on the Tools menu. Then, on the Layers ribbon, you can click Layer Status to display
or hide layers.
See Also
Display Manager Dialog Box (on page 372)
Display Manager Command

Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing sheets and their
associated layers in the document.
You can quickly set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing sheet on the
Layer Display dialog box. You can access the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the
Tools menu.
371
Arranging Elements
See Also
Change the Active Layer (on page 376)
Display Manager Dialog Box

Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing sheets and their
associated layers in the document.
You can set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing sheet on the Layer
Display dialog box. You can access the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the Tools
menu.
See Also
Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) (on page 372)
Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box) (on page 373)
Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box)

Controls the way elements or objects appear on a drawing sheet.
Row Button Specifies at what level you want to display or hide items. When you click a
button to the left of a row, an arrow appears by that row. Clicking this button selects the drawing
sheet or linked/embedded object so that you can modify its display. Any options you set on the
Layers tab of the Display Manager dialog box are applied to the sheet or object that you
selected.
Sheets Displays a list of sheets and linked/embedded objects in the current document. An
arrow appears by the current active drawing sheet. You can control the display of each sheet or
object by setting the options you want in the Color, Line Type, or Width columns. The Display
and Lock options can only be set from the Layers tab.
Display Controls the layers listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box next to a layer, the
elements on that layer are displayed in the active document.
A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.
You can set the box next to each layer to display all the elements.
On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off.
Lock Locks or unlocks layers in a view to control whether the software can locate elements
on a layer. If a layer is locked, you can still see the elements on the screen, but you cannot
locate them or perform actions on them. You cannot lock the active layer.
If the lock beside a layer appears locked, you cannot locate elements on the layer in the
active document or drawing sheet.
If the lock beside a layer appears unlocked, the elements on the layer can be located.
Color Overrides a color for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded object.
You can select a color from the list. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors
dialog box.
Line Type Overrides a line type for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded
object.
Width Overrides a line width for all elements on a drawing sheet or in a linked/embedded
object.
OK Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Cancel Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
372
Arranging Elements
Apply Applies the current display settings without closing the Display Manager dialog box.
Clear Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row before you can
click this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a time.
Help - Activates the Online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.
See Also
Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box)

Controls the way layers and layer groups appear in a window.
Row Button - Indicates the layer being modified. The active layer cannot be modified and is
indicated by a solid filled check box in the display column.
Layers - Controls the display using layers and layers groups. The Layers column displays an
alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active drawing sheet.
Layer groups appear first in the list followed by individual layers. You can control the display of
each layer by setting the options you want in the Display, Lock, Color, Type, or Width
columns.
Display - Displays the elements listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box next to the element,
the element is displayed in the active document (if its layer is displayed).
A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.
You can set the box next to each element to display all the elements.
On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off.
Lock - Locks or unlocks elements and layers in a view to control whether the software can
locate them. If an element or layer is locked, you can still see it on the screen, but you cannot
locate it or perform actions on it. You cannot lock the active layer.
If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears locked, you cannot locate the element or layer in the
active document or drawing sheet.
If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears unlocked, the element or layer is not locked and you
can locate it.
Color - Overrides the color for a layer or layer group or applies another color to an element. You
can select a color from the list. You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors
dialog box.
Line Type - Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line
style for an element or linked object.
Width - Selects another line width for layer or layer group.
OK - Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Cancel - Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Apply - Applies the current display settings.
Clear - Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row before you can click
this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a time.
Help - Activates the Online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.
See Also
Modify Layers in a Layer Group (on page 377)
373
Arranging Elements
Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers

When you use Display Manager to control the way elements or objects appear in window, you
can create custom colors for the display of sheets or layers.
1. Click Tools > Display Manager.
2. On the Display Manager dialog box, click the row of the layer or sheet you want to change
the color of.
3. Click the cell in the Color column.
4. At the bottom of the palette, click More.
5. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the options you want to
create a new color.
6. Click Add to Custom Colors.
7. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for the color you
created. This name appears on the palette that you access when you click a cell in the
Color column.
See Also
Colors Dialog Box (on page 374)
Custom Color Name Dialog Box (on page 448)
Colors Dialog Box

Creates colors that you define by mixing a combination of hue, saturation, and luminosity values
or red, green, and blue values. After you click Define Custom Colors, the easiest way to
experiment with different colors is to drag the pointer around on the color matrix.
After you create a color and close the dialog box, the Custom Color Name dialog box appears,
allowing you to save the custom color with a name.
To change the settings for a custom color, you can click a custom color box and then specify a
different color. To define a new custom color, click an empty custom color box, specify a new
color, and then click Add To Custom Colors.
in the upper
See Also
Create a Fill Color (on page 445)
Create a Layer
1. On the Main toolbar, click Layers .
2. On the Layers ribbon, type the name of the new layer in the Layer box and press ENTER.
374
You can also create a layer using Layer Groups on the Tools menu. On the Groups dialog
box, you type the name of a new layer in the Layers box and press ENTER. The name of
the new layer is displayed at the bottom of the Layers table.
You can create as many layers on a drawing sheet as you need.
Arranging Elements
See Also
Layer Groups Command (on page 378)
Display or Hide Layers

On the Main toolbar, click Layers .
Click Tools > Layers.
2. On the Layers ribbon, click the Layer Status icon. The Layer Display dialog box displays
all layers available for the current drawing sheet. The layers that appear in gray text are
hidden or turned off. The layer that appears in red text is the active layer.
3. Click a layer name to display or hide the layer on the drawing sheet.
4. Click Apply.
If you want to display or hide layers for drawing sheets other than the current sheet, you
can use Display Manager on the Tools menu. On the Display Manager dialog box, Sheets
tab, click the sheet you want. Then, on the Layers tab, in the Layers column, click the layers
you want to display or hide. These settings override the settings on the Layer Display dialog
box.
See Also
Layers Command
Displays or hides layers. This command also sets the active layer and changes the layer of an
element.
You can set display criteria for all the sheets and their associated layers in the current
document with Display Manager on the Tools menu.
See Also
Layers Ribbon (on page 375)
Layers Ribbon
Layer Displays the active layer on the drawing sheet. You can change the active layer by
selecting from a list of all the layers on the active sheet. Typing a new layer name creates a new
layer.
Change Layer Accesses the Change Layer dialog box so that you can change the layer
of elements. This option is available only when you have selected a set of elements on the
drawing.
Layer Status Accesses the Layer Display dialog box. This dialog box has a Layer list
that you can use to display or hide layers on the drawing sheet.
See Also
375
Arranging Elements
Layer Display Dialog Box

Sets display criteria for the layers in the current drawing sheet.
You can set display criteria for all the sheets in the current document with Display
Manager on the Tools menu.
Active Layer Only Displays the active layer. If this option is set and the active layer changes,
then the new active layer is displayed and the previous active layer is hidden.
Layers Displays a list of layers on the active drawing sheet. Bold, black text shows that the
layer is displayed on the drawing sheet. Plain, gray text shows the layer is hidden. Bold, red text
preceded by a bullet shows that the layer is active.
Occupied Only Lists only layers containing elements. Empty layers do not appear on the list.
Groups Displays or hides the layer groups list on the dialog box. When you click this button,
the dialog box displays a list of all layer groups for the active drawing sheet. You can select a
group from the list to display or hide these layers on the drawing sheet.
On Displays the layers in the selected layer group.
Off Hides the layers in the selected layer group.
Apply Applies the current display settings to all windows. The dialog remains displayed.
Close Applies the current display settings to all windows and closes the dialog.
See Also
Change the Layer of an Element

An element can be assigned to only one layer.
1. Select the elements whose layer you want to change.
3. On the Layer ribbon, click Change Layer.
4. On the Change Layer dialog box, in the Change all to list, click the layer to change the
elements to.
You can also change the layer of an element by selecting the element and clicking
Properties on the Edit menu.
See Also
Change the Active Layer

2. On the Layers ribbon, type or select the name of another layer in the Layer box.
If you type the name of a layer that does not exist, a new layer is created.
376
Arranging Elements
See Also
Change Layer Dialog Box

This option is available only when one or more elements are selected.
Current Layers Lists the layers for all the selected elements.
Change all to Lists all the layers for the active sheet. Selecting a layer from the list changes
the layer for all the elements in the selection set.
See Also
Create a Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups.
2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups box, type the name of the new group and
press ENTER.
3. In the Layers table, in the Grouped column, click each box to include the layers in the
group.
In the Grouped column, if the check box beside the layer name already has a check mark,
the layer is a member of the current layer group.
See Also
Layer Groups Dialog Box (on page 378)
Modify Layers in a Layer Group

2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, select the group you want to change
by clicking the button on the left side of the row. In the Layers table, if the check box by the
layer name is set, the layer is in the layer group.
3. In the Layers table, set or clear the check box of each layer to add or remove it from the
layer group.
See Also
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group

2. On the Groups dialog box, click a group in the Groups table.
You should click directly on the Group name to change it. The name then highlights
and a blinking pointer appears, allowing you to type the new name.
377
Arranging Elements
To change the name of a group, type the new name and press ENTER.
To change the name of a layer, click the name of the layer you want to change in the
Layers table. Then, type a new name and press ENTER.
See Also
Layer Groups Command

Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with layers on the
current working sheet. This command is available only on the Tools menu.
See Also
Create a Layer Group (on page 377)
Layer Groups Dialog Box

Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with layers for the
active sheet in the active window. You cannot delete the active layer or a layer that has
elements placed on it.
Layers Displays a list of all the layers on the current drawing sheet so that you can create
new layers. You can type the name of a layer in the Layers box to create a new layer. You can
also add or remove layers in a layer group with the Layers table. When you select a group in
the Groups table, the check boxes in the Grouped column of the Layers table indicate the
status of the layers. If the check box is set, the layer is a member of the group that you selected
in the Groups table. If the check box is cleared, the layer is not a member of the group.
Groups Displays all layer groups for the current sheet. You can define a new group by typing
a name in the Groups box. You can select a group from the Groups table to display the layers
in the group in the Groups table. To select a group, you must click the button on the left side of
the row for a group. You can use the Description column to add a description to the layer
group. Typing a name of an existing layer group makes that group active. You can then add or
remove layers in a group.
See Also
Create a Layer Group (on page 377)
Delete a Layer Group

2. On the Layer Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, click on the layer group you want to
delete.
3. Press DELETE.
See Also
378
Arranging Elements
Remove Empty Layers

1. Click Tools > Remove Empty Layers.
You can also click Ctrl+R.
2. On the Remove Empty Layers dialog box, use the Empty Layers list to specify which
empty layers you want to remove from the active drawing sheet.
The software removes any empty layers that exist in the current document.
By default, the software selects all empty layers are selected.

To exclude an empty layer from being removed, clear its checkbox.
The dialog box will not list the Active Layer (if it does not contain any data) as a layer that
can be deleted.
If no empty layers exist, the following message is displayed:
See Also
Remove Empty Layers Command (on page 379)
Remove Empty Layers Command

Removes empty layers from the current SmartSketch document. If no empty layers exist, the
software displays the following message:
You can click Tools > Remove Empty Layers or press Ctrl+R to access this command.
You can customize any toolbar to include the Remove Empty Layers command. Click
Tools > Customize. On the Toolbars tab, select the Tools category and then drag
Remove Empty Layers
to any toolbar.
See Also
Remove Empty Layers (on page 379)
Remove Empty Layers Dialog Box (on page 380)
379
Arranging Elements
Remove Empty Layers Dialog Box

Empty Layers - Displays a list of layers in the active drawing sheet which contain no objects.
Select All - Selects all layers in the Empty Layers list. By default, all layers are selected when
you first open the dialog box.
Clear All - De-selects all the layers in the Empty Layers list so that none of them are removed
when you click OK.
The dialog box will not list the Active Layer (if it does not contain any data) as a layer that
can be deleted.
The dialog box displays only when empty layers exist in the active drawing sheet. If no
empty layers exist, the following message is displayed instead:
See Also
Remove Empty Layers Command (on page 379)
380
SECTION 12
Using Symbols in Documents

Symbols increase drawing productivity because they allow you to access existing graphic data
quickly and easily. With a symbol, you can place graphic information repeatedly without
re-creating it. Symbols save you time by eliminating the need to re-create information, as well as
help you maintain accurate graphic data throughout a project. Symbols are contained in
documents with an .sym extension.
Parametric symbols are also available. You can modify these symbols by changing a parameter
value.
See Also
Editing Symbols (on page 395)
Rotating Symbols (on page 403)
Mirroring Symbols (on page 403)
Creating Symbols
A symbol is a document with an .sym extension. You can create a symbol by selecting any
geometry and clicking Create Symbol on the Draw toolbar. You must then define the origin by
clicking the point that you want in the select set. After defining the origin, you can save the
select set as a symbol with the Save As dialog box.
Symbols that you create display a 90 degree rotation angle as a default behavior.
To preserve the data integrity of your custom symbol files from one software
version to the next, Intergraph PPM recommends after installing the latest version of the
software that you open all your custom symbol files and save them to new file format.
See Also
Create Symbol Command (on page 382)
Create a Symbol (on page 381)
Create a Symbol
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Create Symbol
.
2. Select a set of elements on the drawing sheet.
381

When creating a symbol using different elements, press Ctrl while choosing elements
with the Select tool.
3. Click a point on the drawing sheet to define the origin of the symbol.
The Save As dialog box automatically appears at this point. You do not need to use Save
As on the File menu to open this dialog box.
On the Save As dialog box, select the directory where you want to save the symbol.
Type the name that you want for the symbol. The software saves the document with an .sym
extension.
A specific symbol may be used up to 8192 times in a file.
See Also
Create Symbol Command

Allows you to create a symbol. The command is available on the Draw toolbar.
This button is available only when you select elements.
See Also
Open a Symbol Library (on page 385)
The Symbol Explorer

You can use Symbol Explorer to drag symbols from a directory to the current document. You
can also use Symbol Explorer to view document directories on your computer or a network
drive. Symbol Explorer can also display HTML pages on the World Wide Web or your
computer.
When you click Symbol Explorer
on the Main toolbar, Symbol Explorer is displayed on
the right side of the main window. The buttons on the Symbol Explorer are similar to the ones
in the Windows Explorer. For example, you can click a Favorites button to go to one of your
favorite web sites.
If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to point to a directory, you see a tree view, the
contents of the directory, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set the path to an HTML page, you
see the contents of that page, if Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.0 or later is installed. If Internet
Explorer is not installed, then the software prompts you to install it.
Placing Symbols
The main use of the Symbol Explorer is to drag symbols from a directory to the current
document. The Symbol Explorer acts much like the Windows Explorer. To view symbols, you
can type the name of the directory in the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer; or
you can click the Explore Elsewhere button and set the directory path that the Symbol
Explorer looks in.
If you click Home at the top of the Symbol Explorer, it displays the home page for the symbols
that are associated with the template on which the active document is based. You can override
this property by setting a new address with Properties on the File menu. On the Properties
dialog box, you click the Browser tab to set the option.
382

After the Symbol Explorer displays the symbols, you can drag a symbol from the Symbol
Explorer to the current document.
Displaying HTML Pages

The Symbol Explorer can display HTML pages on the World Wide Web or your computer. To
view an HTML page in the Symbol Explorer, you must enter the entire directory path and
filename in the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer.
To view HTML pages on the World Wide Web, you must type the HTTP address in the Address
Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer. When you do this, the Symbol Explorer displays the
HTML page of the address you entered. The Symbol Explorer can display any web site that
you have permissions to access.
HTML pages appear only if Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.0 or later is installed.
Searching Document Directories

You can view the Symbols of any directory on your computer or the network with the Symbol
Explorer. You can type the path of the directory in the Address Box; or you can click Browse
and set the directory path on the dialog box.
After the Symbol Explorer displays the symbols of the directory that you want, you can
double-click any document, much like the Windows Explorer, and the software that created the
document opens and displays the document for editing.
You can drag any document created by software that supports OLE 2.0 into the current
document. These documents can include .igr, .dgn, .dwg, and .dxf types.
Symbol Explorer Settings

When you set options for the Symbol Explorer, the current document stores and uses these
the next time you open the document. You can define a different home page for each document
in the Symbol Explorer with Properties on the File menu.
On the Properties dialog box, you click Browser to set the option. When you set the address
for the home page on the Properties dialog box, the Symbol Explorer goes to that address
when you click the Home button at the top of the Symbol Explorer.
The address can be a directory on a local or network drive or an HTTP address to a web
page.
See Also
Close the Symbol Explorer (on page 387)
Move the Symbol Explorer (on page 388)
Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer (on page 387)
383
Symbol Explorer Window

Displays files in a directory or World Wide Web pages (HTML pages). You can use the Symbol
Explorer window just like you would the Windows Explorer or Windows Internet Explorer. You
can also use Symbol Explorer to place symbols (.sym) from the Symbol Explorer window to
the current document.
Within the Symbol Explorer window, you can access several commands that allow you to
change or filter the view in the window. For example, you can change the window to show only
symbols. You can also add directories or web addresses to a list of favorites. If you want to
place several copies of a symbol, you can click the Stamp Here command. To access these
commands, place the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click.
Window Options
Back - Takes you backward to the previous location of the Symbol Explorer, either a web
page or a directory path.
Forward - Takes you forward to the previous location of the Symbol Explorer, either a web
page or a directory path.
Stop - Halts the loading of an HTML page.
Refresh - Reloads the current HTML page or directory.
Home - Takes the Symbol Explorer back to the home page that you set with Properties on
the File menu. If you do not set the home page with this command, the Symbol Explorer opens
the symbols directory associated with the template that the active document is based on.
Explore Elsewhere - Accesses the Browse for Folder dialog box so that you can locate
another directory for the Symbol Explorer to look in. You can use the dialog box to look in
directories on your hard drive or a network drive.
Address - Sets the current location for the Symbol Explorer. You can type in a directory or a
World Wide Web address and then press Enter. Some examples of what you can type in are as
follows:
http://www.intergraph.com
C:\PROGRAM FILES\DRAWINGS\
If you want to view an HTML page on your hard drive, you must enter the entire path and
filename in the address box.
If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to a directory, you can see a tree view , a shell
view, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set the path to an HTML page, you can see the
symbols of that page in the style of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that version
is installed. If Microsoft Internet Explorer is not installed, the software prompts you to install
it.
See Also
Close the Symbol Explorer (on page 387)
Move the Symbol Explorer (on page 388)
Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer (on page 387)
384
Open a Symbol Library

Before you place a symbol on the drawing sheet, you can set an option to link or embed the
symbol with Options on the Tools menu. On the Options dialog box, click the Symbols tab to
set the option.
Before you open a symbol library, you must either have installed the needed symbols or place
the CD-ROM for installing the software in the appropriate drive.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Select a template or create a document.
For example, if you want to open a symbol library of architectural symbols, you can
click an architectural template to create a document based on that template.
. The software automatically displays the
symbols library associated with the template.
4. Drag the symbols from the Symbol Explorer window into the document.
If you open or create a document while the Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home
to display the symbol directory associated with the current document or template.
You can also use links from a web page to navigate in a symbol library. Sometimes a web
page appears depending on the template for the current document.
See Also
Symbol Explorer Command

Activates the Symbol Explorer window and the Atrribute Viewer. The Symbol Explorer
window allows you to organize and manage documents and symbols. You can browse
document directories on the computer hard drive or the network. You can also view HTML
pages on the Internet, the computer hard drive, or DVD drive.
See Also
Open a Symbol Library (on page 385)
Symbol Explorer Window (on page 384)
View File Type Command

Filters the view in the Symbol Explorer window according to the document type that you select.
For example, if you want to see only AutoCAD documents, you could select the AutoCAD option
for .dwg documents. When you set this option, the Symbol Explorer window displays only
.dwg documents.
This command is available only on the Symbol Explorer shortcut menu. To access,
right-click on the Symbol Explorer content window and select View.
385
View a Web Page with the Symbol Explorer

. The Symbol Explorer opens on the right
of the main window.
2. In the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer, type the name of the HTTP address
and press Enter. For example, you could type the following: http://www.intergraph.com.
The World Wide Web page appears inside the Symbol Explorer.
If you cannot see the entire Web page, you can double-click the bar at the top of the
Symbol Explorer to undock it. You can then resize the Symbol Explorer window so that you
can see the entire page.
You can use many of the same tools to view web pages that are available in the Windows
Internet Explorer. For example, if you click Back at the top of the Symbol Explorer, the
Symbol Explorer returns to the previous page.
If you open or create a document while Symbol Explorer is open, you must click Home to
display the symbols directory associated with the current document.
View Documents with the Symbol Explorer

of the main window.
2. In the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer, type the name of the directory to go
to and press Enter. For example, you can type the following: C:\DRAWING FILES.
You can also change the directory by clicking Explore Elsewhere at the top of the Symbol
Explorer to display the Modify Location dialog box. You can then enter another directory for
the Symbol Explorer to look in.
386
You can filter the view of documents in the Symbol Explorer. If you want to view just one
type of document, such as symbols, pause the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and
right-click. On the shortcut menu, click View, and then File Type.
If you double-click a document in the Symbol Explorer, the software that created the
document opens and displays the document. For example, if you double-click the
SYMBOL.sym document, the software opens and displays the SYMBOL.sym document.
Or, if you double-click a document with an .htm extension, the Microsoft Internet Explorer
opens.
to display the symbols directory associated with the current document.
You can filter the view in the Symbol Explorer window to display only certain types of
documents, such as MicroStation, AutoCAD, or other types. You can click View File Type
on the shortcut menu in the Symbol Explorer window.
For example, to display only AutoCAD documents, select the AutoCAD option for .dwg
documents. When you set this option, the Symbol Explorer window displays only .dwg
documents.
If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to a directory, you can see a tree view, a shell
symbols of that page in the style of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that version
is installed. If Microsoft Internet Explorer is not installed, the software prompts you to install
it.
Close the Symbol Explorer
On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer
You can also close the Symbol Explorer by clicking Toolbars on the View menu. On the
Toolbars dialog box, you should clear the Symbol Explorer check box.
Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer

side of the main window.
2. In the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer, type the name of the directory that
you want to go to and press Enter. For example, you could type the following:
C:\PROGRAM FILES\DRAWINGS\.
You can also change the directory by clicking Explore Elsewhere at the top of the
Symbol Explorer to display the Modify Location dialog box. You can then enter another
directory for the Symbol Explorer to look in.
3. Double-click a document in the Symbol Explorer. The software that created the document
opens and displays the document. For example, if you double-click on the SYMBOL.sym
document, the software opens and displays the SYMBOL.sym document. Or, if you
double-click a document with an .htm extension, the Microsoft Internet Explorer opens.
You can drag any document that supports OLE 2.0 from the Symbol Explorer to the
drawing sheet.
If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to a directory, you can see a tree view, a shell
symbols of that page in the style of the Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that
version is installed. If Microsoft Internet Explorer is not installed, then the software prompts
you to install it.
Set the Home Page for the Symbol Explorer

2. On the Browser tab of the Properties dialog box, type the HTTP address of the home page
that you want for the Symbol Explorer. In the Symbol Explorer, when you click Home, the
Symbol Explorer displays the Web page for the address that you typed.
The address that you enter on the Browser tab of the Properties dialog box is saved with
the current template and document.
You can also set the home page while the Symbol Explorer is open. In the Symbol
Explorer window, right-click and, on the shortcut menu, select Set Document Home.
If you do not set the home page for the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer displays
the symbol directory that is associated with the template that the active document is based
on.
to display the symbols directory associated with the current document.
If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at symbols on your computer, you
can type the following syntax in the Address box: <application.path>\..\<path of symbols. For
example, you could enter <application.path>\..\symbols\arch.htm.
387

See Also
Set Document Home Command (Shortcut Menu)

Sets the home address for the current document. When you open a document and then open
the Symbol Explorer and click Home, the Symbol Explorer goes to the address that you enter
here. The address can be any address that you would use in a web browser, such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer or Netscape; for example, you can type http://www.intergraph.com
(http://www.intergraph.com/).
If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at symbols on your computer, you can
type the following syntax in the Address box: <application.path>\..\<path of symbols>. For
example, you could enter <application.path>\..\symbols\arch.htm.
To access this command, pause the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and
right-click.
Move the Symbol Explorer

of the main window.
2. Double-click the bar at the top of the Symbol Explorer to display it as a separate window
from the main window. You can now drag the Symbol Explorer and relocate it. You can
also resize the Symbol Explorer window.
If the Symbol Explorer is displayed as a separate window from the main window,
double-click the bar at the top to make it part of the main window again. You can dock the
Symbol Explorer at any place in the window.
If you resize the Symbol Explorer and then double-click it to make it part of the main
window, the Symbol Explorer size remains the same.
Show a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer

. The Symbol Explorer appears on the
right of the main window.
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, on the shortcut menu, click Show Favorites. A bar
appears at the top of the bottom pane. You can click one of these bars to go to a favorite
document or directory.
388
Add to the Favorites List in the Symbol Explorer

1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer opens on the right of
the main window
.
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, select the directory or document that you want to add to a
list of favorites.
3. In the Symbol Explorer window, right-click and then click Add To Favorites.
A bar appears at the top of the bottom pane.
You can click this bar to go to a favorite document or directory.
Show Favorites Command

Shows bars in the Symbol Explorer window that point to documents or web pages that you
added to the list of favorites. When you click a bar, the Symbol Explorer displays the
associated documents or web pages.
To access this command, pause the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and
right-click.
Delete From a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer

of the main window.
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, select the bar in the bottom pane that you want to delete.
You can also select a favorite directory, HTML page, or file in the Symbol Explorer
window.
3. Right-click and then click Delete Favorite on the Shortcut menu.
See Also
Delete Favorite Command (on page 389)
Delete Favorite Command

Deletes the selected bar from the Symbol Explorer window and removes the item from the list
of favorites.
To access this command, pause the pointer over the favorite directory, HTML page, or file
in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click.
See Also
Delete From a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer (on page 389)
389
Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles

Symbols can display different types of behavior depending on how the symbol was created.
When you drag a symbol into a document, you can check out different characteristics of the
symbol to see what it can do.
Depending on how the symbol was created, some symbols automatically ungroup into individual
elements in the document when you place the symbol. For example, if you place a symbol that
contains a circle and a rectangle in a document, the symbol immediately ungroups. The parts of
the symbol, the circle and rectangle, act as a separate circle and rectangle, not a symbol.
Labels
Some symbols have a label that appears as a question mark under the symbol. To change the
text in the label, you can double-click the question mark. When the Attribute Viewer appears,
you can then edit the text in the Value column and press Enter.
Commands on the Shortcut Menu

While the symbol is selected, right-click and look at the shortcut menu. Some symbols have
special commands on the shortcut menu that run custom processes for the symbol. If the
shortcut menu has Help, you can access a Help file that displays special information about the
symbol.
Commands on the shortcut menu can also activate different representations of the same
symbol. For example, you can access different representations of the same valve symbol, with a
flanged globe, a welded globe, and so forth.
Drop Points
You can move the symbol around in the document with the Select Tool. You can discover
special behaviors by dragging the symbol over an element or another symbol.
Some symbols automatically connect to other symbols. These symbols were created with drop
points for symbol-to-symbol connections. When you click a drag point on a symbol and drag it
over another symbol, the drop points appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears when you exactly
align the drag point and drop point. You can then attach the symbol to the other at a precision
point.
390

ToolTips
If you pass the pointer over the drop points on a symbol, you might see ToolTips. These
ToolTips display special information about different parts or points on the symbol. For example,
the serial number for networking diagramming equipment can appear in a ToolTip.
Custom Processes
Some symbols actually run special processes when you drag them, double-click them, or
perform other actions. If you select the symbol and click the right mouse button, you might also
see special custom commands for the symbol on the shortcut menu.
Displaying Attributes on an Element

Some symbols can display attributes that are assigned to an element. When you drag the
symbol to the element with attributes, the symbol automatically displays the values of those
attributes.
Handles
When you select a symbol, different handles appear on the symbol.
Some symbols have several different kinds of handles:
Black boxes on the outside corners of the range box lines represent scale handles (A). You
can drag a scale handle to resize the entire symbol.
Yellow boxes in the middle of the range box lines represent standard parametric handles
(B). You can drag a parametric handle to resize part of the symbol.
A green plus sign represents a mirror handle (C). You can drag a mirror handle to create a
copy of the symbol directly horizontal or vertical to the original symbol.
A large green circle represents a rotate handle (D). You can drag this handle to rotate the
entire symbol. Specific increments are displayed by the pointer while you rotate the symbol.
A series of small green circles represents drag points (E). You can use these points to
attach the symbol at a precise point to another symbol or element.
A small green lock represents a lock handle (F). You can click the lock handle to unlock the
symbol. Unlocking allows you to move a symbol away from the element to which the symbol
was associated.
A lock handle appears only if you drag the symbol to an element with one of the drag
points on the symbol.
391

See Also
Mechanism Modeling (on page 407)
Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points (on page 406)
Attach a Connector to an Object (on page 154)
Connect Two Objects (on page 155)
Edit Symbol Properties (on page 398)
Place a Symbol (on page 393)
Associate a Symbol with an Element (on page 392)
Associate a Symbol with an Element
Drag the symbol to a position near the target element. The symbol automatically aligns itself
with the element.
The symbol is now associated with the element. If you move the element, the symbol moves
along the element.
If you move the symbol, it moves along the element, but not away from it.
At this point, if you want to associate the symbol and target element again, you can click the lock
handle again. The symbol stays in the new position, but is now associated to the target element
again. If you select another element or command after unlocking the symbol and moving it, you
cannot re-establish the association with the target element.
If you want to unlock the symbol from the element, you can select the symbol and click
the lock handle to unlock it. You can then move the symbol away from the target element.
See Also
Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles (on page 390)
Placing Symbols
To place a symbol, you can use single-click placement or drag the symbol from the Symbol
Explorer or Windows Explorer into the current document.
Symbol Libraries
After starting the software, you can open a template or document. For most standard templates,
the Symbol Explorer automatically opens and displays a default directory for all the symbols
that would be appropriate to use with that template. For example, templates in the Process
category point to directories with process diagram symbols.
To open the Symbol Explorer, you can also click Symbol Explorer on the Main toolbar.
You might need to click Home in the Symbol Explorer. The Home path is stored on the
Browser tab of the File Properties dialog box.
When you click a symbol in the Symbol Explorer, the pointer attaches to the origin of the
symbol by default to drag it in. At that instance, the origin is the drag point.
Some symbols contain more than one drag point. These appear as green dots on the symbol.
These drag points are useful if you want to place a symbol using a particular part of the symbol.
You can change to another drag point by pressing the Up and Down arrow keys.
By default, every element in a symbol does not appear when you place the symbol in a
document. For example, if you place a symbol that contains dimensions in a document, the
dimensions are not displayed.
392

See Also
Place Copies of a Symbol (on page 394)
Place a Symbol
Before you place a symbol, you can set an option to link or embed the symbol with Options on
the Tools menu.
1. The Symbol Explorer
template or document.
automatically displays the symbol library associated with the
For some documents, you might need to click Home in the Symbol Explorer.
The Browser tab on the File Properties dialog box stores the Home path.
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, browse to the directory that contains the symbols that you
want.
3. Click on the symbol in the Symbol Explorer window.
4. Click the desired location in the active document to place the symbol.
While in single-click placement mode, you can place multiple copies of the selected symbol
with each additional mouse click. To cancel single-click placement mode, press the Esc key
or click the right mouse button.
You can also place a symbol by dragging it from the Symbol Explorer window into the
active document.
You can use the left and right arrow keys to rotate the symbol prior to its placement on the
Drawing sheet.
To place multiple copies of a symbol while in mouse-down mode, you can click Stamp Here
on the shortcut menu.
You can filter the view of documents in the Symbol Explorer. If you want to view just one
type of document, such as symbols, pause the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and
right-click. On the shortcut menu, click View, and then click File Type.
If you use a certain symbol library for many different documents, you can access the library
quickly by adding it to your list of favorites in the Symbol Explorer. Point to the Symbol
Explorer window, right-click, and click Add To Favorites.
You also can place a symbol by dragging it from Windows Explorer. You can set the
default option to link or embed the symbol when you drag it with Options on the Tools
menu. You set the option on the Symbol tab of the Options dialog box.
If you press Ctrl while you drag a symbol, the symbol is embedded. If you press Ctrl +
Shift, the symbol is linked.
Pressing the keys overrides the option that you set for dragging symbols on the
Options dialog box.
Sometimes when you place a symbol that contains dimensions in a document, the software
does not display the dimensions. This behavior depends on options that you set when you
created the symbol. However, if you open the symbol to edit it, the dimensions appear.
to display the symbol directory associated with the current document or template.
393

See Also
Manipulating Symbols (on page 405)
Place Here Command

Places one instance of a symbol as you drag a symbol into a document.
You can access this command by dragging and dropping a symbol into a document with
the right mouse button.
See Also
Place Copies of a Symbol

Using Single Click Placement
.
2. The Symbol Explorer automatically displays the symbol library associated with the
For some documents, you need to click Home in the Symbol Explorer. You can
edit the Home value by clicking the Browser tab of the File Properties dialog box.
3. In the Symbol Explorer window, go to the directory that contains the symbols that you
want.
4. Click on the symbol in the Symbol Explorer window.
5. Click the desired location in the active document to place the symbol.
While in single-click placement mode, you can place multiple copies of the selected symbol
with each additional mouse click.
To cancel single-click placement mode, press the Esc key or click the right mouse button.
Using Mouse-Down Mode (Dragging)

.
The Symbol Explorer automatically displays the symbol library associated with the
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
394
For some documents, you need to click Home in the Symbol Explorer. You can
edit the Home value by clicking the Browser tab of the File Properties dialog box.
In the Symbol Explorer window, go to the directory that contains the symbols that you
want.
Select a symbol while pressing the right mouse button.
While pressing the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the document.
Release the right mouse button, and click Stamp Here on the shortcut menu.
Click a point in the document to place the symbol.

7. Click another point in the document to place a copy of the symbol. You can continue to click
points in the document to place multiple copies of the same symbol.
The number of occurrences you can place of the same symbol within a document is limited
to 8,192.
You can also activate the Stamp Here command by holding down Ctrl and dragging the
symbol with the left mouse button.
If you decide that you do not want to place several copies of a symbol, you can click Place
Here on the shortcut menu. This places one instance of the symbol.
See Also
Stamp Here Command

Places more than one instance of a symbol as you drag a symbol into a document. This
command allows you to copy a symbol quickly and easily as you place it.
You can access this command by dragging a symbol into a document with the right mouse
button.
See Also
Editing Symbols
You can edit a symbol by opening the .sym file directly. You can also edit a symbol that you
drag from the Symbol Explorer to place into a drawing. After you drag the symbol, you can
manipulate it by actions such as mirroring, rotating, and sizing.
To edit a symbol, you should select it and click Open on the shortcut menu.
To display the shortcut menu, highlight a symbol with the pointer and right-click.
You can also edit the properties and parameters of some symbols to change the symbols. When
you drag these special symbols into a document, the Attribute Viewer automatically displays
the properties and parameters. The properties are in plain text. The parameters are identified
with bold text. You cannot edit the names of the parameters.
If the Symbol Explorer is closed, you can also access the properties and parameters of a
symbol by selecting it and clicking Symbol Explorer.
Editing Embedded or Linked Symbols

If the symbol is linked, you can open the symbol and edit it. The symbol that you placed on the
drawing sheet updates automatically. Those same changes are saved in the .sym document on
the hard drive.
Embedding the symbol means that a copy of the symbol was placed in the document. If you edit
one instance of the embedded symbol in a document, all copies of that symbol within the current
document reflect those changes.
You can also select multiple symbols and convert them simultaneously; however, if the
select set contains anything other than a symbol, Convert is not available.
395
You must place the symbol in a document at the default scale (1:1) if you want to use
Convert.
If you convert the symbol into an element group, you cannot turn the group back into a
symbol.
Symbol Labels
To create a label, you can double-click the symbol. A blinking pointer appears below, above, or
in the middle of the symbol so that you can start typing the text that you want.
Changing Parameters
You can change the parameters of a symbol with the Parameters tab on the Properties dialog
box. You can change the value of the parameter, but you cannot change the name of the
parameter.
See Also
Edit a Symbol (on page 396)
Edit a Symbol
The way that you edit a symbol depends on if the symbol is linked or embedded. You can
determine whether to link or embed the symbol by setting an option with Options on the Tools
menu before you place the symbol on the drawing sheet.
To Edit a Symbol Document Directly

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click File > Open.

Select the symbol document that you want to edit. The document has an .sym extension.
Edit the symbol.
Click File > Save.
You cannot edit the connect points, drag points, handles, or other properties of a
symbol directly.
To Edit an Embedded Symbol

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the symbol.

Click Open on the shortcut menu.
Edit the symbol.
Click File > Update. The software changes the symbol in the current document.
Click File > Close to close the symbol document and return to the document that contains
the symbol.
If you change a linked symbol, the software also records those changes in the source
document on your computer and the instance of the symbol in the current document.
396

To Edit Elements in a Symbol
If you want to edit individual elements of a symbol, you must convert the symbol to elements in
1. Select the symbol on the drawing sheet.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Convert to convert the symbol to a group of elements.
You can also select multiple symbols and convert them simultaneously; however, if the
select set contains anything other than a symbol, Convert is not available.
You must insert a symbol at the default scale (1:1) if you want to use Convert.

to separate the elements so that you can edit
them individually. You can now edit the symbol elements just like ones that you created with
one of the drawing commands.
If you want to quickly edit a symbol, you can open the Symbol Explorer and double-click
any symbol to for editing.
If a symbol containing a Smart Label is placed into a document, you cannot select the
Smart Label and open it to edit it like most symbols. You must create a new Smart Label.
See Also
Convert Command (Symbol) (on page 397)
Convert Command (Symbol)

Converts the selected symbol to another file format. For example, if you select a symbol, and
click Convert, the symbol is converted to a group of elements on the drawing sheet. You can
also use Convert with a symbol select set to convert multiple symbols simultaneously.
See Also
Symbol Ribbon
The options provided by the Symbol ribbon depend on the type and content of the selected
symbol.
Graphic Options
The following options are available when a symbol is made up of only graphic elements.
Colors dialog box.
Text Options
The options below are available when a symbol contains a text label.
397

Font - Lists and applies a font for the label text.
Text size - Applies a text size.
Text Color - Sets the color of the font.
Bold - Makes text bold.
Italic - Italicizes text.
Shape - Sets the shape of the border around the label. You can choose from a selection of
common geometric shapes.
Graphic Elements and Text

All the above options display for a symbol containing text and graphic elements.
Edit Symbol Properties

1. Click a symbol in a drawing.
2. Click Edit > Properties.
3. On the Properties dialog box, set the options you want to use.
See Also
Symbol Properties Dialog Box

Defines the properties of a symbol.
See Also
Info Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 400)
Behavior Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 398)
User Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 400)
Parametric Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 400)
Behavior Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

This tab is available only for documents that are symbols and have an .sym
extension.
Insertion Type - Specifies the insertion type for a symbol. You can set the insertion type by
clicking Options on the Tools menu and then clicking the Symbols tab on the Options dialog
box. After you set an insertion type for a symbol, you cannot change the type.
Update - Displays the type of update for the link on the symbol. To change the update status of
a link, click Automatic. To prevent updating the link, click Frozen. You can select Automatic
when you want the document to automatically reflect any changes to the symbol document. You
can select Frozen when you do not want the symbol in the current document to change at all.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor that the symbol uses when you drag it into the active
document. The scale factor used is relative to the model units of the symbol. For example, if you
set the scale factor to 2 and the symbol has 1 cm square in model units, it displays 2 cm square
when you drag it into the active document.
398

Lock Scale - Specifies if you can scale the symbol after you place it in a document.
You can scale a symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar or by dragging the
symbol handles.
Allow Rotation By Relationships - Allows a symbol to change its orientation on the drawing
sheet according to the applied relationships. If you clear the check box, the symbol does not
change its orientation regardless of changes to its relationships.
This check box is available only when the symbol is an open document. You can open the
symbol document (.sym) with the Open command on the File menu. When you set or clear this
check box and close the symbol document, the setting affects the behavior of the symbol when
it is dragged from the Symbol Explorer onto the drawing sheet.
The check box is clear by default. When the check box is clear, a symbol maintains its
orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the symbol or other elements that are related to
it. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end
of the symbol is grounded in place with a lock relationship.
The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale, as indicated by the
underlined dimensional value.
When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box, the symbol changes orientation
on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships. In the example, when you edit the
Nested Display - Defines the behavior of nested symbols. The options are Public and Private.
When you open a document that contains nested symbols, the public option displays these
symbols, but the private option hides these symbols.
399

See Also
Info Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and allows you to set symbol placement options such as the symbol angle, layer on
which you want to place the symbol, and coordinates for the symbol.
Name - Displays the name of the parent document of the symbol.
Layer - Specifies the layer on which you place the symbol. When you place a symbol, it is
placed on the active layer.
X Origin - Specifies the X coordinate of the symbol origin.
Y Origin - Specifies the Y coordinate of the symbol origin.
Angle - Displays the current angle of the symbol. You can specify a new angle. The number of
degrees increases in the counterclockwise direction. For example, 90 degrees is at the top of
the screen.
See Also
Parametric Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

Displays information about the parameters in the symbol. The parameters that appear on this
tab are the same items that appear in the Attribute Viewer when you select the symbol.
You can change the name of the value of the parameter, but not the name. When you change
the value, you must click Apply for the change to take effect on the symbol.
See Also
User Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

Displays and allows you to set property options for each symbol that you place. This feature
provides an administrative tool for tracking property information, such as the serial number of
label text, for each placement of a symbol.
Name - Defines a property name.
Type - Specifies the property type you want to define for the symbol property name. You can
choose from text, double, number, boolean, money, byte, integer, date, or single.
Value - Specifies a value for the symbol. For example, you can assign a manufacturer name, a
serial number, or other descriptive information as a value.
Properties - The properties table lists all the properties currently defined for the symbol.
Add - Creates an attribute for the symbol.
Delete - Deletes the attribute that you select in the Properties box.
See Also
400
Create a Symbol Report

You must have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on your computer.
1. Open the Symbol Explorer.
2. Drag symbols from one of the following directories into the document:
<drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\PROCESS\PFD
(INTERGRAPH).
<drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\ SYMBOLS\PROCESS\P&ID
(INTERGRAPH).
<drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\
SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING\NETWORK.
3. In the Symbol Explorer, browse to one of the following directories, depending on the
symbols you placed in the document:
<drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\SYMBOLS\PROCESS\PFD
(INTERGRAPH)\REPORTS.
<drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\SYMBOLS\PROCESS\P&ID
(INTERGRAPH)\REPORTS.
<drive letter>:\PROGRAM
FILES\SMARTSKETCH\SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING\NETWORK\REPORTS.
4. Drag a REPORT.sym document into the document.
5. The software prompts you to update the report and, if you click OK, the software creates the
report automatically.
See Also
Delivered Reports (on page 412)
Update a Symbol Report (on page 401)
Update a Symbol Report

You must have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on your computer.
1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
2. In the Custom Commands dialog box, navigate to the Update Report macro and then click
Open.
The Update Report macro (igrUpdateReport412.dll) is located in <Product
Directory>\Program.
You must have a report selected before running the Update Report macro.
You can use the Tools > Customize command, to add the Update Report macro to a
toolbar or menu.
See Also
Create a Symbol Report (on page 401)
401
Scaling Symbols
You can use scale handles on a symbol to resize it. Four black scale handles are displayed on
the corners of the range box of a symbol. You can drag any of the four handles up or down.
You can also change the size of the symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar.
You can modify different parts of some symbols with parametric handles. Standard parameter
handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have been applied to the graphics in a
symbol. The four standard positions where parameter handles can appear are top center,
bottom center, left center, and right center of a symbol's range box. Dragging a parameter
handle changes the value of the dimension by the length readout precision set on the Units tab
of the Properties dialog box when the symbol is created.
You can also scale a parametric symbol by selecting the symbol and then editing the values in
the Attribute Viewer. The Attribute Viewer automatically appears when you select the symbol.
For example, if you select the Para Tower symbol, you can change the Top attribute from 7.29
to 9.00 so that the height of the symbol increases.
See Also
Scale a Symbol
1. Click a symbol in the document.
2. Drag one of the scale handles that appears as a black box on each corner of the symbol
range box.
402
You can change the size of a parametric symbol by selecting it and right-clicking. On the
Parametrics tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box, enter the value that you want and
click Apply.
You can also change the size of a parametric symbol by selecting it and changing the
values in the Attribute Viewer.
You can scale a part of a parametric symbol. Drag one of the standard parameter handles.
These handles appear as black boxes in the middle of each side of the symbol range box.
Note that only one dimension of the symbol changes. For example, if you click the lower
parametric handle on a box, only the height changes, not the width.

See Also
Mirroring Symbols
You can use mirror handles to mirror a symbol about its center. The mirror handle appears at
the right center of a symbol's range box. Dragging the mirror handle across the center of a
symbol's range box causes the symbol to mirror about its center in dynamics. A center line for
the X and Y axis appears through the range box of the symbol. The axes appear as solid when
the pointer crosses one or both axes.
When you manipulate a symbol, you see the same behaviors unique to that symbol that existed
when you placed the symbol in the document.
See Also
Mirror a Symbol (on page 403)
Mirror a Symbol
1. Select a symbol in the document.
2. Click the mirror handle that appears as a green plus sign at the top right of the symbol's
range box.
3. Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the symbol.
See Also
Mirroring Symbols (on page 403)
Rotating Symbols
You can rotate a symbol by using one of the following methods:
Clicking Rotate.
Selecting the symbol's rotate handle to turn it.
Using a rotation angle.
Using relationships applied to the symbol.
Rotate Button
To rotate a symbol, you can select the symbol and click Rotate on the Change toolbar.
Rotation Angle
You can also rotate a symbol by the rotation angle. When you drag a symbol or align it to an
element, you can press the left or right arrow keys. This rotates the symbol in 15 degree
increments by default. Some symbols are designed to rotate at different increments.
If the symbol is created with a rotation angle other than zero, you can rotate it by the defined
step angle using the left and right arrow keys.
403

Relationships
By default, when you rotate a symbol, it maintains its orientation on the drawing sheet. In the
following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end of the
symbol is set in place with a lock relationship. When you edit the dimensional value of the
driving dimension, the symbol does not change its orientation. The driving dimension changes to
a driven dimension that is not to scale.
You can also allow symbols to change orientation on the drawing sheet according to the
relationships applied to them. This is handy if you want to change the orientation of whole sets
of geometry with one driving dimension or relationship. In the example, when you edit the driving
dimension between the line and symbol, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet,
maintaining the relationships applied to it.
For a symbol to rotate according to the relationships applied to it, you must first set an option by
opening the symbol document (.sym) directly. You can open the document with Open on the
File menu. Then, you must click Properties on the File menu. On the Behavior tab, you must
set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box. After saving and closing the symbol
document, you can drag the symbol into a document.
See Also
Rotate a Symbol (on page 404)
Rotate a Symbol
1. Select a symbol in the document.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Rotate
404
You can also rotate a symbol about its center with the appropriate handle. Click the green
circle at the right of the range box for the symbol. Drag the rotate handle closer to or further
from the center of the range box for the symbol.
Select the symbol and press the left or right arrow keys to rotate the symbol in predefined
increments. The rotation angle can vary depending on how you created the symbol.

See Also
Rotating Symbols (on page 403)
Manipulating Symbols
You can manipulate a symbol just like you would manipulate other graphics. For example, you
can edit symbol properties, apply relationships, move it, or copy it. When you manipulate a
symbol, it behaves as a single unit. You can view properties for the symbol in the Attribute
Viewer that appears at the bottom of the Symbol Explorer.
You can click any part of a symbol to move it around in a document.
Some symbols are created with drag points that appear as green dots on the symbol. When you
move the symbol around in the document, the pointer automatically attaches to the drag point
that you used most recently. You can change drag points by pressing the Up and Down arrow
keys.
If you drag a symbol on an element in the document, the symbol is automatically associated with
that element. When the element moves, the symbol moves with it. You must click one of the
green drag points on the symbol and then move the symbol to the element.
Some symbols cannot be associated with an element depending on what options were set
when the symbol was created.
Aligning a Symbol with an Element

Many symbols align automatically with elements in the document.
When associated with an element, these symbols display a green lock handle. When the
element moves, the symbol moves with it.
You can click the lock handle to free the symbol from the associated element. When you unlock
the handle, you can move the symbol away from the element. If you move the element, the
symbols stays in its original position.
You can use the lock behavior in many ways. For example, you can ensure that a door symbol
moves with the wall to which it is attached if the lock handle on the door symbol is locked. If you
want to move the wall, and not the door, you must click the lock handle on the symbol to unlock
the door symbol from the wall. The door now remains in its current position when you drag the
wall away from it.
Aligning a Symbol with Another Symbol

Some symbols can be placed only on other symbols. These symbols are created with drop
points that allow you to align the symbol to a precise point on another symbol. You cannot place
a symbol with drop points on an element, such as line, arc, or circle.
When a symbol has drop points, red dots appear to indicate the drop points defined on the
symbol. These drop points let you know where you can place the symbol on the target symbol.
When you click a drag point on a symbol and drag it over another symbol, the drop points
appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears when the drag point and drop point are exactly aligned.
You can then attach the symbol to the other with precision.
See Also
405

Manipulate a Symbol (on page 406)
Manipulate a Symbol
1. Click a symbol in the document.
2. Use any element manipulation command like Move, Copy, or Scale to manipulate the
symbol in the drawing.
You can edit a symbol by selecting the symbol and clicking Open on the shortcut menu.
You can manipulate only the symbol, not its individual elements. You can convert the
symbol to individual elements on the drawing sheet by selecting the symbol and clicking
Convert on the shortcut menu. You can also select multiple symbols and convert them
simultaneously; however, if the select set contains anything other than a symbol, Convert is
not available.
You can change the size of a symbol by selecting the symbol and then dragging one of the
handles.
If you cannot scale the symbol with this procedure, select the symbol and click Properties
on the shortcut menu. Then, on the Behavior tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box, clear
Lock Scale.
See Also
Convert Command (Symbol) (on page 397)
Manipulating Symbols (on page 405)
Unlock a Symbol From an Element

1. Select the symbol.
2. Click the green lock handle to unlock the symbol.
3. Drag the symbol away from the element.
If you want to unlock the symbol from the element, you can select the symbol and click the
lock handle to unlock it. You can then move the symbol away from the target element.
At this point, if you want to associate the symbol and target element again, you can click the
lock handle again. The symbol stays in the new position, but is now associated to the target
element again. If you select another element or command after unlocking the symbol and
moving it, you cannot re-establish the association with the target element.
See Also
Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points
406
Using a drag point, drag a symbol to another symbol. The available drop points appear as
red dots.

See Also
Mechanism Modeling
You can use mechanism modeling to check for clearances on moving parts. Mechanism
modeling is a set of elements that are related to each other so that one group of geometry
moves relative to another when the dimensions change. You can use any kind of elements for
mechanism modeling, but symbols are the easiest elements to use.
Symbols are easy to use because they act as one piece of geometry when you want to
reposition them. For example, if you draw four lines that form a rectangle, you might want to
connect the lines so that the rectangle has predictable behavior when rotated by a dimensional
change. To do this, you must connect every line. The length of each line, the connections of the
end points, and the angle between each line and its adjacent line must be defined as shown in
the picture.
If the same four lines were constructed and made into a symbol, the orientation and length of
each line would always remain constant regardless of the orientation of the symbol. No
relationships or dimensions for the geometry making up the symbol would be necessary as
shown in the picture. If you change the angle from 90 degrees to 45 degrees, the geometry
stays together with the symbol as a rigid body.
The easiest way to create a mechanism is to use rigid body symbols and constrain the symbols
to move like you want. Symbols can have two behaviors: rotating and non-rotating. The default
behavior, non-rotating, means that the symbol cannot be rotated. The other behavior, rotating,
allows rotation by relationships. This allows the symbol to rotate.
Example
The field pump mechanism serves as a good example of a kinematics animation. The
mechanism is made up of five symbols and only one dimension to control the mechanism
movement. If you select the dimension and change the value of the dimension from 12 degree
to 60 degrees, all the geometry moves together. The other symbols that are connected to each
other move to their proper position based on the angle applied and relationships to the symbols
and the behavior applied to each symbol.
See Also
Rotate a Symbol (on page 404)
Associate a Symbol with an Element (on page 392)
Creating a Kinematics Animation (on page 647)
Attach a Connector to an Object

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector
4. Click the symbol to place the connector.
407

The connector attaches to the connect point that is nearest to the point that you clicked.
Otherwise, the connector attaches to a keypoint or any point along the elements in the symbol.
See Also
408
SECTION 13
Working with Attributes

Attributes can help you work more efficiently by allowing you to enter and edit values for a
symbol, object, or element. Attributes can include such items as the manufacturer, price, and
other data. Attributes include user- defined properties and parameters.
A user-defined property is an attribute assigned to an element or object that defines a
characteristic about that element or object. A property is usually in the form of a text notation,
such as cost, weight, color, and so forth. You can change user-defined properties, but these
changes have no affect on the appearance of the element or object.
A parameter is a mechanism to change a property. A parameter is an attribute assigned to an
element or object, usually a numerical value representing a dimension. Parameters are usually
used in symbols to resize the length or width of a symbol.
The Attribute Viewer displays the user-defined properties and parameters for a selected item.
The viewer also allows you to edit the values of the properties or parameters.
User-defined properties also appear on the User tab of the Properties dialog box.
Parameters appear only in the Attribute Viewer.
You cannot edit the names of attributes; you can edit only their values. The viewer displays two
columns, one for the name of the attribute and one for the value. User-defined properties appear
in plain text. Parameters appear in bold text.
When editing attributes, you can only work on one element or object at a time. When more than
one item in the document is selected, no attributes are displayed in the Attribute Viewer.
See Also
Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer (on page 411)
Move the Attribute Viewer (on page 410)
Edit Attributes (on page 411)
409
Display the Attribute Viewer

1. Select an object, or element.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. If the selected item has assigned attributes,
the Attribute Viewer opens and displays the properties and parameters.
If the Symbol Explorer window is open, you can display or hide the Attribute Viewer. To
display or hide the viewer, place the pointer over a toolbar at the top of the document
window and right-click. On the shortcut menu, select or clear Attribute Viewer.
You can drag the splitter bar between the Symbol Explorer and the Attribute Viewer to
display or hide the viewer.
If you close the Attribute Viewer, you can open it again by pausing the pointer in the
toolbar area, right-clicking, and clicking Attribute Viewer on the shortcut menu.
See Also
Attribute Viewer (on page 410)
Attribute Viewer
Displays user-defined properties and parameters of an element, symbol, or inserted document.
The viewer displays two columns, one for the name of the attribute and one for the value.
User-defined properties appear in plain text. Parameters appear in bold text.
You can specify user-defined properties on the User tab of the Properties dialog box for an
element or symbol.
Dialog Box Options

Name - Displays the name of a user-defined property or parameter. Parameters are displayed in
bold text. The Name is read-only.
Value - Displays the value of a property or parameter. Parameters are displayed in bold text.
You can change the value.
See Also
Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer (on page 411)
Edit Attributes (on page 411)
Move the Attribute Viewer

Drag the title of the Attribute Viewer to move the viewer.
You can dock or undock the viewer inside the Symbol Explorer and place the viewer at a
different location.
410
To resize the Attribute Viewer like any document window, you can double-click the title bar
of the viewer to undock it. Then, you can drag the sides of the viewer to resize.
The position of the Attribute Viewer does not stay the same if you close the software and
then start it again. The viewer appears docked in the default position inside the Symbol
Explorer.
See Also
Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer

1. Click a cell in the Attribute Viewer.
2. Type new information or change existing information.
You can delete text in the Attribute Viewer by pressing Delete.

Double-click to highlight the whole word.
Drag to highlight the word.
You can use the Up and Down arrow keys (or the Enter key) to scroll through Attribute
Viewer values.
You can resize cells in the viewer by using the splitter bar between each cell at the top of
the viewer.
See Also
Edit Attributes
1. Select a symbol, object, or element.
.
3. If the item that you selected has attributes, the Attribute Viewer appears in the Symbol
Explorer window.
You can use Attribute Viewer to view a symbol's user properties and parameters. These
properties include the dimensions of the symbol and other items. To open the Attribute
Viewer, double-click a symbol. You can also select a symbol and then click the Symbol
Explorer button on the Main toolbar.
In the Attribute Viewer, the user properties appear in plain text. The parameters appear in
bold text. You cannot edit the names of the parameters in the Name column. To change the
values, click in the Value column, type the information that you want, and press Enter.
You can use the Up and Down arrow keys (or the Enter key) to scroll through Attribute
Viewer values.
If the Symbol Explorer window is open, you can display or hide the Attribute Viewer. To
display or hide the viewer, point to a toolbar at the top of the document window and
right-click. On the shortcut menu, select or clear Attribute Viewer.
You can drag the splitter bar between the Symbol Explorer and the Attribute Viewer to
display or hide the viewer.
You can edit the parameters of a parametric symbol to automatically change the dimensions
of the symbol.
See Also
411
Edit Common Attributes Within a Select Set

1. Click the Select Tool on the Schematic toolbar.
2. Select the symbol set that you want to change.
A symbol set is a group of identical symbols containing the same attributes.
Only symbols containing the same attributes can be selected and changed simultaneously.
You can select more than one symbol at a time by clicking the Select Tool and then
holding the Shift or Ctrl key as you click the symbols.
3. Make the desired changes in the Attribute Viewer window.
The Attribute Viewer displays user-defined properties and parameters of a selected element,
symbol, or object. User-defined properties appear in plain text; parameters appear in bold
text.
After you have changed an attribute, the change is applied to all symbols within the symbol
set.
Delivered Reports
The software delivers some reports that you can update automatically when you add symbols to
a document. The reports work with symbols that have specific attributes assigned to them. You
must have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on your computer. The software includes
several sample reports.
When you open a template, that specific template displays a default directory of symbols in the
Symbol Explorer. You can find reports in the Reports directory of the default symbol directory.
Examples that you can drag into your document include the following reports:
Network ReportsIn the Network template, you can drag in reports listing network
equipment contacts and reports inventorying equipment.
Process ReportsIn the Process Flow template, you can drag in heat exchanger, pump
and tower equipment reports and a stream report.
To use the Process Flow template, you must install the Process Solutions option.
The software prompts you to update the report when you add it to a document. After you add
more symbols to the document, you can update the existing report by double-clicking it.
See Also
Create a Symbol Report (on page 401)
Create a Custom Report (on page 412)
Report Generator Dialog Box (on page 413)
Create a Custom Report

1. Select a symbol with attributes from which you wish to create a report.
2. Click Tools > Report Generator. The Report Generator dialog box opens; the selected
symbol's attributes display in the Report Fields.
412
If you do not have a symbol selected, SmartSketch prompts you to select a symbol from
your drawing.
In the Report Generator dialog box, enter a name for the report.

3. In the Items field, specify the maximum number of report items you wish to display.
4. Under Report Data, use the Criteria drop-down list to select the attribute that defines the
selection criteria for the symbol, and then specify the text string you wish to use for the
criteria.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
For example, to generate a report of all the doors in a design, you can set the criteria to
Class and enter Door in the Equals (=) field.
From the Report Fields list, select the fields (attributes) you wish to display in the report.
Under Data Orientation, use the Columns and Rows radio buttons to specify the desired
orientation for the report.
Use the Prompt for the Sheet Name check box to specify whether or not you wish to have
the report prompt you for the sheet to report on.
Click OK to begin the report generation procedure.
Specify the location of the report file and click Save.
The Report Generator creates a symbol file that contains an Excel spreadsheet with the
selected field on it. When this symbol is dragged from the Symbol Explorer and dropped
into a SmartSketch file, the Update Report macro (igrUpdateReport412.dll) fills in the actual
data.
You can run the Update Report macro at any time to update or replace the report. Select a
report and then click Tools > Custom Commands. In the Custom Command dialog box,
navigate to <Product Directory>:\Program directory, and double-click
igrUpdateReport412.dll.
Once you have created a report symbol, you can use the symbol over and over in different
files.
The fields you select from the Report Fields list are placed in the report in the order that
they appear in the list. You can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the
items you've selected.
If you do not select the Prompt for the Sheet Name check box, the report data is obtained
from the sheet in which the report is dropped.
See Also
Report Generator Command (on page 413)
Report Generator Command

Allows you to create a custom report based upon specified symbol attributes. This command is
available only on the Tools menu.
The Report Generator creates a symbol file that contains an Excel spreadsheet with the
selected fields displayed. When this symbol is dragged from the Symbol Explorer and dropped
in a SmartSketch file, the Update Report macro fills in the actual data. Once you have created
a report symbol, you can use the symbol over and over in different files.
See Also
Report Generator Dialog Box (on page 413)
Report Generator Dialog Box

Sets options for creating a custom report based upon specified symbol attributes.
413

Report Name - Specifies a name for the report.
Items - Specifies the maximum number of items to appear in the report.
Report Data - Defines the type of data used to generate the report.
Criteria - Defines the selection criteria for the symbol.
= (Equals) - Specifies a value that for the criteria you selected.
Report Fields - Identifies the type of data displayed in the report. Fields are placed in the report
in the order they appear in the list.
Move Up / Move Down - Moves the selected field up or down in the Report Fields list.
Data Orientation - Specifies how the data in the report is oriented.
Columns - Orients the report data horizontally.
Rows - Orients the report data vertically.
Prompt for the Sheet Name - Directs the Report Generator to prompt you for a sheet to report
on. If this option is not enabled, the report data is obtained from the sheet on which the report is
dropped.
Calculate Quantities - If enabled, adds a quantities field to the report.
OK - Begins the report generation process.
Cancel - Exits the Report Generator without creating a report.
Help - Displays the online help topic for the Report Generator dialog box.
See Also
Report Generator Command (on page 413)
414
SECTION 14
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors

You can use color and style formats to make your drawing a more powerful communication tool,
or simply to make it more aesthetically appealing. The software provides several different
methods for formatting one or more geometric elements, such as lines, arcs, and circles. You
can also format dimensions, annotations, and.
Styles
To make elements that are the same type look alike, you can use styles to apply several formats
at once. Styles are a collection of formats that are saved under a name. Styles allow you to save
several formats so you can use them again and again. Using styles guarantees consistency in a
drawing.
To make an element look unique, you can select it and then format it directly. Formatting a few
elements at a time takes more time than applying styles, but gives you greater flexibility.
The software provides fills that you can apply to closed boundaries. A fill floods a closed
boundary with a solid color or pattern.
Besides fills, the software provides line types such as continuous, dash, chain, continuous
chain, double chain, dot, and end gap. New line types can be created through Visual Basic
Automation.
The software provides several other tools for consistent drawings. You can save styles and
background sheets in a template so that you can use them in other drawings.
Properties and Parameters

You can edit the properties of an element, symbol, or object by selecting it and then changing
properties on the ribbon. You can also Select the Element, right click, and select Properties on
the shortcut menu.
A property is a unique characteristic of an element, object, symbol, or document. You can
display document properties in the Windows Explorer or by clicking Properties on the File
menu or Edit menu. Properties for elements or objects can be classified by three different types,
as defined on the Properties dialog box:
Size properties, as specified on the Info tab affect physical characteristics of the element,
such as the length.
Style properties, as specified on the Format tab, affect the format of the element.
User-defined properties, as created on the User tab. User-defined properties are usually in
the form of a text notation, such as cost, manufacturer, and so forth. You can change
user-defined properties, but these changes have no effect on the appearance of the element
or object.
For example, a valve symbol's style properties can include color, line style, and width. Other
user-defined properties stored with the symbol can include the manufacturer, cost, or material.
User-defined properties are displayed in the Attribute Viewer when you select the valve
symbol. User-defined properties are displayed in the Attribute Viewer when you select the
valve symbol.
See Also
Applying Unique Formats (on page 431)
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries (on page 442)
415

Applying Formats with Styles (on page 416)
Format a Geometric Element (on page 432)
Applying Formats with Styles

If you want elements that are the same type to look alike, you should use styles, a collection of
formats that can be applied to the following items:
Geometric elements
Dimensions
Annotations
Fills
Using styles ensures consistency. If you place or draw one or more elements, the formats in the
style are applied directly to the elements. You do not have to spend time formatting as you draw.
You can apply the formats in each style again and again.
The software provides styles that you can apply to elements so that they conform to an
engineering standard, such as ISO or ANSI.
Managing Styles
Using the Format > Style command, you can create several styles so that elements in a
drawing appear the way you want. You can use or modify the styles delivered with the software,
or you can set up new ones that conform to your unique requirements. One or more styles can
be stored in a template so that you can use them in other drawings.
The software divides styles into types, such as text, dimension, line, and fill. A style type
contains one or more styles. You can create styles for each style type. When you create a new
document based on a template, the template is copied. The copy includes any styles that are in
the template. Fonts are never copied into a document. If you want someone to view the fonts,
and that person's system does not have the same fonts installed, you should give that person
the fonts along with the document.
Including Styles from Other Documents in a Template

If you want to make styles from other documents available in the current document, you can
reference the styles with style resource documents. You can reference a style resource
document to the active template or document by clicking Resources on the Styles dialog box.
The Style Resources dialog box allows you to add style resource documents to the current
template or document. Style resource documents can be any .igr document or .RSC line style
file that contains styles native to that document.
If you create a document based on a template, any style resource documents attached to the
template are attached to the new document as well. When you reference a style resource
document from the current document or template, the styles in the resource document are
added to the Style dropdown list on the active document's ribbon. When you apply a style to an
element on the drawing sheet, the style is copied from the style resource document to the
current document. The fonts are added to the dropdown list on the ribbon as well, but are not
copied into the current document.
Applying Styles
The style type determines what type of item to which you can apply a style. A text style can be
applied to text within a text box. A fill style can be applied to a fill. A line style can be applied to
416

any geometric element such as a line, arc, circle, or ellipse. A dimension style can be applied to
a dimension or balloon.
When you place dimensions or annotations, or draw elements, the formats from their default
styles are applied automatically. For example, if you click SmartDimension on the Dimension
toolbar, the ANSI style appears on the ribbon. Each dimension that you place receives the
ANSI style. To apply a different style, you can change the style name on the ribbon before or
after you draw or place an element.
Applying Styles to More Than One Element

Selecting more than one element and then applying the same style to them removes any
previous formatsthe elements now all have the same formats from the style that you applied.
To do this, you must select elements that are in the same style type, such as text, dimension, fill,
or line. For example, you cannot apply a line style to a dimension.
To preserve the data integrity of your custom styles files from one software version
to the next, Intergraph PPM recommends after installing the latest version of the software that
you open all your custom styles files and save them to the new file format.
See Also
SmartSketch Templates (on page 107)
Apply a Style
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the element you want to format.

Click Format > Style.
On the Style dialog box, in the Styles list, click the style you want to apply.
Click Apply.
If you have formatted an element with Properties, or by setting options on the active
ribbon, these formats are removed when you apply a style.
See Also
Reapply Style Dialog Box (on page 431)
Apply a Style to a Group of Elements (on page 418)
Rename a Style
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you want.
In the Style box, click the style you want to rename.
Click Modify.
In the Name box, type the new name for the style.
Click OK.
Close the dialog box.
See Also
417
Apply a Style to a Group of Elements

1. Select two or more elements.
2. Click Format > Style.
3. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Type box, click the style type that you want.
If you have selected several elements from different style types, the Style Type box is
blank.
4. In the Style box, click the style that you want to apply to the elements.
5. Click Apply to change all the elements that you selected.
If you select different types of elements, you can apply a style only to the elements that
are in the style type that you selected on the Style dialog box. For example, if you select
several lines and dimensions on a drawing, you can apply a line style only to the lines. You
cannot apply a line style to the dimensions.
See Also
Delete a Style
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

In the Style box, click the style you want to delete.
Click Delete.
Confirm that you want to delete the style.
See Also
Create a Style Using a Formatted Element

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select an element.
Apply the formats you want to save as a style by setting the options you want on the ribbon.
On the ribbon, click the Style box to select the current style name of the element.
Type a new name to create a style using the formats applied to the element.
Press ENTER.
If you create a new style using the Style box on the ribbon, you cannot base the new
style on any other style.
See Also
Reapply Style Dialog Box (on page 431)
418
Create a Style with the Style Command

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Click New to open a dialog box based upon the style type you clicked.
On the Name tab, in the Name box, type a name for the new style.
To base the style on an existing style, click a style from the list in the Based On field.
Click the other tabs on the dialog box and set the options you want to apply to the new style.
See Also
New Line Style Dialog Box (on page 421)
New Text Box Style Dialog Box (on page 422)
Change the Formats of a Style

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

In the Style box, click the style you want to change.
Click Modify to open a dialog box based upon the style type you clicked.
To base the style on an existing style, click a style from the list in the Based On field.
Click the other tabs on the dialog box and set the options you want to modify.
After you close the dialog box, the software updates all elements formatted with the modified
style throughout the document.
If an element has a style, you can override the style by editing the element's properties with
the Properties command on the Edit menu.
You can remove style overrides by re-applying a style.
You can modify one or more styles using Style on the Format menu.
See Also
Modify Line Style Dialog Box (on page 429)
Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box (on page 430)
Save a Style to a Template

1. Open a document template.
3. On the Style dialog box, select the style you want to save to the template of the active
document.
4. Click New or Modify.
5. On the dialog box that appears, click the Name tab.
6. Type a name in the Name text box, and enter other information on the dialog box, as
needed.
7. Click OK to save the changes.
See Also
419
Add Styles to the Current Document

You can reference a style resource document from any template or document.
1. Click File > Open and open the document to which you want to add a style resource.
3. In the Style dialog box, click Resources.
4. In the Style Resources dialog box, click Add.
5. In the Add Style Resources dialog box, select the name of the style resources document
that you want to add to the template, and then click Open.
6. In the Style Resources dialog box, click OK.
7. In the Style dialog box, click Apply and then click Close.
8. On the Draw toolbar, select Line/Arc Continuous .
9. In the Style list, select a line style. Each line style that you select will be imported to the new
file.
11. In the Style dialog box, click Resources.
12. In the Style Resources dialog box, select the style resource document you previously
added and click Remove.
13. Click OK to close the Style Resources and Style dialog boxes.
14. When you close the document, click OK when you are prompted to indicate whether or not
you want to save changes to the document.
15. The styles in the style resource document are referenced from the template or document
that you just saved. If you open a document that references a style resource document, the
styles in the style resource document will be available on the Styles list of the current
document's ribbon. If you open a document that is based on a template with references to
style resource documents, the styles will also be available in the same manner. You can
then apply the styles in the style resource document to elements or annotations in the
current document.
The line styles are copied from the style resource document into the current document.
The font styles are not copied. So, if you want another person to be able to view the same
fonts in the document and that person's system does not have the same fonts installed, you
should give that person a copy of the fonts along with the document.
Sometimes you might attach several style resource documents that contain styles with
duplicate names. In these cases, the style in the style resource document that is listed first in the
Style Resources list takes precedence and will be listed on the ribbon of the active document.
See Also
Style Command
Modifies, creates, deletes, or applies styles.
See Also
Apply a Style (on page 417)
420

Create a Style Using a Formatted Element (on page 418)
Delete a Style (on page 418)
Save a Style to a Template (on page 419)
Style Dialog Box

Specifies the name of the style, the formats defined for the style, and other options for working
with styles.
You cannot create or modify a fill style with this dialog box. To create a new fill style, you
can type a name for a fill style in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style is saved with
the current settings on the Fill ribbon.
Dialog Box Options

Style type Specifies the style type. If you are placing a new element, you can specify the
style by clicking the appropriate style type in this box and then clicking the style that you want in
the Styles box. You can also change the style of an existing element by selecting the element
and then clicking Styles on the Format menu to set these options.
Styles Specifies the style. Before selecting an item on this list, you must first select the
appropriate style type in the Style Type box.
List Specifies which styles appear in the Styles list. You can list only the styles in use, styles
that you defined, or all styles.
The only styles that appear in the list are styles that are saved in the current document.
The styles saved in a styles resource document are not listed. However, if you click New, you
can select a style from a style resource document to use as a base style for the new style that
you are creating.
Description Displays a description of the settings in the style.
Apply Applies the style selected in the Styles box to elements that you selected. Applying a
new style to elements that you selected removes the current formats for the element.
New Accesses one of the New Style Dialog Boxes so that you can create a new style.
Modify Accesses one of the Modify Style dialog boxes so that you can modify the style that
you selected in the Styles list.
Delete Deletes the selected style from the document or template.
Resources Allows you to add style resource documents to the current template with the
Style Resources dialog box.
See Also
New Line Style Dialog Box

Creates a line style by allowing you to specify new characteristics. You can also define a new
dash definition.
See Also
Name Tab (on page 284)
General Tab (New Line Style Dialog Box) (on page 422)
421

Name Tab
See Also
General Tab (New Line Style Dialog Box)
Sets formats for a line.
Style Displays the name of the style that is currently applied to the selected element.
Color Sets the drawing color.
Width Sets the line width.
Type Defines how the line appears.
See Also
Modify Line Style Dialog Box (on page 429)
New Line Style Dialog Box (on page 421)
New Text Box Style Dialog Box

Specifies the name of the style, the formats defined for the style, and other characteristics.
See Also
Name Tab
See Also
Paragraph Tab
Text Style - Displays the style for a text box.
Font - Lists and applies the available fonts.
422

Font Size - Applies a text size.
Font Style - Lists the available font styles.
Language - Lists and applies a language for text in a text box. If you use text characters from
more than one language in a text box, the option you specify in this box determines the way the
lines wrap in the paragraph.
Units Space - Sets the paragraph to paper units or to world units. You can change this control
only when you are creating new styles from the Format Styles or Format Text Box dialog
boxes. When you view this control from the Properties dialog box, it is read-only. You can
change the control from the Info tab because all paragraphs contained within a text box must
exist in the same units.
Font size type - Specify the method for measuring font size: Ascender, Cap, or Tile.
Single sets the line spacing for each line to display the largest font in the line.
1.5 sets the line space for the line to one-and-a-half that of single lines.
Double sets the line spacing for the line to twice that of single lines.
Paragraph Spacing - Specifies the amount of space before and after paragraphs. No spacing
exists before the first paragraph and or after the last paragraph.
Before - Adds space before a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in
points.
After - Adds space after a paragraph. This value is set in the current working units, not in points.
You can set the units using Units on the Format menu.
See Also
Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box (on page 430)
New Text Box Style Dialog Box (on page 422)
New Dimension Style Dialog Box

Sets options for creating a new dimension style. A dimension style is a collection of dimensional
formats, including primary and secondary units, text, spacing, and terminator type. Using a
dimension style guarantees that the display of related dimensional information is consistent in a
drawing. For example, if you want all driving dimensions to display in a specific color with
vertical text above the base line, you can create a dimension style that contains those specific
formats.
See Also
423

General Tab
Sets general properties for dimensions.
Color - Sets colors for a driving, driven, or error dimension.
Driving Dimension- Sets the color used for driving dimensions.
Driven Dimension- Sets the color used for driven dimensions.
Error Dimension - Sets the color for error dimensions. Error dimensions are driving or
driven dimensions that the software cannot recalculate correctly after parametric attributes
on driving dimensions are changed.
Scale Mode - Sets the scale mode to automatic or manual.
Automatic - Determines a correct dimensional value based on the scale set in the drawing
view.
Manual- Scales the dimensional value. The scale value determines the dimensional value. For
example, for a scale of 1:100mm, set the manual value to 0.01.
Manual mode only works with dimensions that are set to Driven.
See Also
Units Tab
Sets the primary units for dimensions.
Units Sets the primary units for linear dimensions.
Unit Label Sets the unit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a unit label.
Subunit Label Sets the subunit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a subunit label.
Maximum Subunits Sets the maximum subunits value. You can type a value up to 255. This
value applies to feet and inches. For example, if you type 13, the dimension appears as 13
inches and not 1 foot and 1 inch.
Angular Sets the units for an angular dimension.
Units Sets the primary units for angular dimensions. Options are Degrees, Deg-Min-Sec, or
Radians.
Zeroes Specifies if a zero is on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension.
Delimiter Specifies the decimal delimiter for a dimension.
Period Sets a period as the decimal delimiter.
Comma Sets a comma as the decimal delimiter.
424
Space Sets a space as the decimal delimiter.
See Also
Secondary Units Tab
Sets the secondary units for dimensions.
Units Sets the secondary units in drawings with dual unit display. For example, the primary
unit can be inches, while the secondary unit can be millimeters. When you place the dimension,
it displays both units. The software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary unit.
Unit Label Sets the secondary units label in drawings with dual unit display. You can type up
to 20 characters.
Subunit Label Sets the secondary subunit label in drawings with dual unit display. You can
type up to 20 characters.
Round-Off Sets the round-off value for secondary units in drawings with dual unit display.
Maximum Subunits Sets the maximum subunits used for secondary subunits in drawings
with dual unit display.
Zeroes Specifies if a zero appears on the left or right of the decimal in a dimension.
Dual Unit Display Selecting/Activating this checkbox displays secondary units for
dimensions in drawings. For example, the primary unit can be inches, while the secondary unit
is millimeters. Both units display when you place the dimension. The software derives the
secondary unit by converting the primary unit.
See Also
Text Tab
Sets the text options for dimensions.
Text - Sets text options for a dimension.
Font - Sets the font type for the dimension text.
Font Style - Specifies the font style to use for the text in a dimension.
Font Size - Sets the size for text in a dimension.
Orientation - Sets the orientation for the text on a dimension. For example, the dimension text
looks like the following picture when you select Vertical.
425

Position - Sets the position where text appears in relation to the base line. The base line is an
imaginary horizontal line directly under a line of text. For example, when you select Above, the
dimension text looks like the following picture.
Tolerance Text - Sets options for text in certain types of dimensions that have related
tolerances. You can set the dimension type on the dimension ribbon bar.
Size - Sets the size of the text for tolerance text. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size.
For example, if you type .5, the size of the tolerance text is half the size of the dimension text.
Limit Arrangement - Sets the text arrangement on limit dimensions.
See Also
Lines and Coordinate Tab
Dimension Lines Sets options for dimension lines. A dimension line defines the
measurement of a part feature. Dimension lines consist of a solid line with arrows at both ends
and a dimension in the center.
Connect Controls if the dimension line extends between both terminators when you place the
dimension text and terminators outside the projection lines.
Width Sets the width of the dimension line.
Break Line Sets the size of the break line for the linear, angular, or radial dimension. This
value is a ratio of the font size.
The dimension break line is separate from the leader and balloon break lines.
Coordinate Sets options for coordinate dimensions.
Auto-Jog Turns the jog control on or off on the Dimension ribbon. You can use this option
only when you place a coordinate dimension. If you set Auto-Jog and the distance between two
dimensions is less than the value set for Stack Pitch, then you can place the dimension with a
jog in the projection line.
Common Origin Sets the symbol type for the common origin on coordinate dimensions. You
can set the symbol type to dot, circle, or none.
Text Position Positions text in a coordinate dimension.
Projection Line Sets options for the projection line of a dimension.
Display Controls the display of projection lines on linear dimensions. You can set the display
to none (off), origin, measurement, or origin and measurement. You can use this option to hide
projection lines when they overlap and you are using a pen plotter.
Element Gap Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the element you want
to dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension font size.
426

Extension Sets the distance that the projection line extends beyond the dimension. This
value is a ratio of the dimension font size.
Angle Sets the slant angle of the projection lines on dimensions. This option is useful when
you need to place a dimension on isometric drawings.
Center Mark Places a center line automatically when you dimension a nonlinear element.
Extend Center Mark Displays projection lines on center marks. Extend Center Mark only
works when the Center Mark option is selected as well.
See Also
Spacing Tab
Sets dimension spacing options. All options are a ratio of the dimension text value.
Text Clearance Gap Sets the space between the text and the dimension line.
Dual Display Vertical Gap Sets the space between the primary and secondary units when
dual unit display is active. You can set Dual Unit Display on the Secondary Units tab so that
dimensions display two units.
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space between the superfix or subfix and the dimension
text.
Dimension Above Line Gap Sets the space between the dimension text and the dimension
line.
Horizontal Tolerance Gap Sets the space between the dimensional value and the tolerance
on dimensions.
Vertical Tolerance Gap Sets the space between the upper and lower tolerance value on
dimensions.
Vertical Limits Gap Sets the space between the upper and lower dimensional values on limit
dimensions.
Symbol Gap Sets the space between the symbol and the dimension line. You can also set
the space between the symbol and the dimension text.
Prefix/Suffix Gap Sets the amount of space between the prefix or suffix and the dimension
text.
Horizontal Box Gap Sets the space between the dimension text and the horizontal edges of
the box on dimensions.
Vertical Box Gap Sets the space between the dimension text and the vertical edges of the
box on dimensions.
See Also
Terminator and Symbol Tab
Sets terminator and symbol options for dimensions. A terminator is a graphic symbol, such as
an arrow or dot, placed at the end of a leader.
Terminator Sets options for terminators.
427

Type Sets the terminator type for all terminators. Examples of some of the terminator types
are provided below.
Arrow (Filled)
Arrow (Hollow)
Arrow (Open)
Back Slash
Blank
Circle
Dot
Slash
Size Sets the size of the terminator. The value is a ratio of the dimension text size. For
example, if you set Font Size on the Text tab to be .2 cm and Size to be 2, the terminator is
twice the size of the dimension text.
Inside Limit Controls the terminator position relative to a dimension's projection lines. The
Inside Limit is calculated as a constant times the dimension font size. For example, if the font
size is 0.125 inches and the Inside Limit is set to 3 (3 x font size), any dimension with a value
greater than or equal to 0.375 inches positions its terminators on the inside of the projection
lines. Any dimension with a value less than 0.375 inches positions its terminators on the outside
of the projection lines.
428

Display Specifies which end of the terminator displays or if both ends display. You can set
the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or both origin and measurement. The following
picture shows the display when you select Origin and Measurement.
Freespace Type Sets the terminator type for a dimension with a terminator placed in free
space.
Origin Type Sets the terminator type used on the origin of a linear dimension.
This setting affects dimensions only at placement. You can change the terminator's
position after placement by dragging the terminator to the other side of the projection line.
In the example below, the inside limit value is 3, the font size is 0.1 in., and the dimension line is
.317 in. in length. Therefore:
Dimension value > 3 (inside limit) * .01 (font size)
The inside limit affects newly-placed dimensions only. The setting has no effect if the
dimension value is changed because of changes in the parent geometry.
Datum Type Sets the terminator type for datum frames. If you select Normal, the datum
frame uses the active terminator type for dimensions. If you select Anchor, the datum frame
uses an anchor terminator.
Symbol Sets options for symbols in dimensions.
Placement Sets the placement position for the symbol on diameter and radial and linear
dimensions for an arc. You can place the symbol before or after the dimension. You can also
hide the symbol.
Not to Scale Displays an underline, zigzag, or no indicator on driven dimensions with
overridden values. You can use the zigzag option only on linear dimensions. You can override a
driven dimension value by typing a new value in the Edit Value box on a dimension ribbon.
Suppress Diameter Suppresses the diameter symbol on diameter dimensions.
See Also
Modify Line Style Dialog Box

Modifies a line style by allowing you to specify new characteristics or a dash definition.
See Also
429

Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box
Modifies a style by allowing you to specify new characteristics.
See Also
Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box

Modifies a dimension style.
See Also
Style Resources Dialog Box

Lists style resource documents that are available to the current document. Resources can be
any .igr document or MicroStation line style resource with an .RSC extension. The styles in the
style resource document are available for use in the current document.
Dialog Box Options

Style Resource Files Lists the style resource documents that are attached to the current
document. When you attach one of these documents to a template, the styles in the document
appear on the Style dropdown list of the ribbon in the current document. A style is copied into
the current document from the style resource document when you select this style on the ribbon.
A style is also copied when you apply the style to an element or annotation on the drawing
sheet. For example, if you attach DIMENSION.igr to the document, the dimension styles in
DIMENSION.igr appear on the dropdown list when you select a dimension on the drawing sheet
of the active document. You can then apply any of the styles to the dimension. The dimension
style that you applied is then copied from DIMENSION.igr into the active document when you
save it.
Add Allows you to add a style resource document to the Style Resource Files list with the
Add Style Resource dialog box. This dialog box allows you to select .RSC or .igr documents
and add them to the Style Resource Files list on the Style Resources dialog box.
Remove Removes a style resource document from the Style Resource Files list. You must
first select a document in that list.
See Also
Add MicroStation Styles to a Document (on page 599)
Add Styles to the Current Document (on page 420)
430
Reapply Style Dialog Box

Redefines a style according to the formatting of selected element, or returns the formatting of
selected element to that of the style currently applied to it.
Style Displays the name of the style that is currently applied to the selected element.
Redefine the style using the selection as an example? Changes the formatting of the
current style to the formatting applied to the element that you selected.
Return the formatting of the selection to the style? Applies the formatting of the current
style to the element that you selected.
See Also
Apply a Style (on page 417)
Applying Unique Formats

At times, you may want to make geometric elements, dimensions, fills, or annotations look
different from other ones on the drawing. To do this, you can edit the formats of the element
directly. When you do this, the formats are applied only to the selected element or the one you
are about to draw. This overrides whatever settings are applied to it by the style, without
changing the style.
Formatting Individual Elements

Before you place or draw an element, you can set unique formats with the ribbon, without
changing the style. The commands on the Format menu, except for Style, can also be used to
set an element's formats before you place or draw it.
For example, if you click Text Box, a style appears in the Style box on the ribbon. The style
contains a format for bold fonts. If you turn Bold off on the ribbon, the text box that you place will
not display bold text.
You can also apply unique formats to an existing element, dimension, fill, or annotation. You can
select the element and then edit the formats with the ribbon or the Edit > Properties command.
For example, if you select a text box that has a style that displays borders, you can remove the
borders with the Edit > Properties command. Since you are changing the element's format, and
not its style, the style of the text box still contains borders. If you apply this style to any other text
box, it will still display borders.
Formatting More Than One Element

You can change the format of more than one element at a time by selecting the elements and
formatting them the same way you would format an individual element. However, all the
elements that you select must be of the same type. For example, if you select several text
boxes, you can apply settings to all of them at once. You cannot apply the same settings to a
dimension and a text box by selecting both of them at once.
See Also
Format Dimension Command (on page 441)
431
Format a Geometric Element

1. Select a geometric element, such as a line, arc, or circle.
You can also right-click the selected element, and click Properties on the shortcut
menu.
After selecting the geometric element, you can use the ribbon to edit such properties as
line style, line color, line type, and line width.
3. On the Element Properties dialog box, set the options you want.
You can also format an element before you draw it by using the Format > Line command,
or by setting options on the ribbon.
Changing the current style settings on the ribbon or Properties dialog box overrides the line
style formats.
You can change the definition of a line style with the Style dialog box.
See Also
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors (on page 415)
Line Command
Formats a new line as you place it.
See Also
Format Line Dialog Box (on page 432)
Format Line Dialog Box

Sets options for placing lines. You can access this dialog box by clicking Line on the Format
menu. You define line styles by clicking Style on the Format menu.
See Also
Line Command (on page 432)
432
Properties Command (Edit Menu)

Edits the properties of a selected element, group, symbol, dimension, or annotation. If you
select a group of elements, you can edit only the common properties of that group. You can also
edit the properties of a border around an inserted object, called a SmartFrame.
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you must locate an element
and then right-click.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Properties button on a toolbar.
See Also
Element Properties Dialog Box

Sets the display properties and properties you define for elements.
See Also
Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) (on page 433)
Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box) (on page 437)
User Tab (Properties Dialog Box) (on page 437)
Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box)

The contents of this tab vary depending on whether you selected or highlighted one of the
following types of elements:
Line Tab Options

Type Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You cannot edit the
name of the drawing sheet.
Layer Sets the layer that contains the element.
Start Point Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the element.
X Sets a value for the X coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
End Point Sets the X and Y values for the end point of an element.
Length Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value.
Angle Sets the angle of a line.
Arc Tab Options

433

Start Point Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the element.
X Sets a value for the X-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
Y Sets a value for the Y-coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the X option.
Center Point Sets the X and Y values for the center point of the arc.
End Point Sets the X and Y values for the end point of an element.
Start Angle Displays the angle formed by the X axis and the first point of the sweep angle.
Zero degrees is horizontal to the x-axis.
Sweep Angle Sets the sweep angle.
Circle Tab Options

Center Point Sets the X and Y values for the center point of the circle.
Diameter Sets the diameter of the circle.
Circumference Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although you cannot edit
the circumference, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Area Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the area, the box
automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Curve Tab Options

Curve Type Displays the type of curve (open or closed). You cannot edit this field.
Order Displays the order of the curve. Higher order curves are more accurate or precise than
lower order curves. All curves drawn with the curve command will be 4th order curves.
Vertices Sets the coordinates of the nodes on the curve.
Nodes Lists the nodes on a selected curve. When you select a node from the list, its x and y
values are displayed so you can edit them. The node type is also displayed.
Length Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value.
Area Displays the area of a closed curve. Although you cannot edit the area, the box
434

The X/Y coordinate values are read-only.
Ellipse Tab Options

Center Point Sets the X and Y values for the center point of a closed element.
Primary Axis Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is based on the
primary axis.
Secondary Axis Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is perpendicular
to the primary axis.
Rotation Angle Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to
the X-axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
Point Tab Options

Coordinate Sets the X and Y values for an element.
Fillet Tab Options

435

Radius Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to create the fillet.
Chamfer Tab Options

Angle Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element.
Setback A Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the first
linear element you selected.
Setback B Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the chamfer on the
second linear element you selected.
Rectangle Tab Options

Centroid Defines the exact center of the rectangle with X and Y coordinates.
Height Sets the height of the rectangle or square.
Width Sets the width of the rectangle or square.
Angle Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X-axis. The
Connector Tab Options

436

Start Point Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the connector.
Y Sets a value for the Y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with the Y option.
End Point Sets the X and Y values for the end point of a connector.
# Vertices Sets the number of vertices for a connector.
See Also
Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box)

Color Sets the drawing color.
Width Sets the line width.
Type Sets the drawing line type and style.
See Also
Format Tab (Connectors)

These options display for connector properties.
Color - Sets the drawing color.
Width - Sets the line width.
Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Start Terminator - Sets the terminator for starting the connector.
Line End Terminator - Sets the terminator for ending the connector.
Terminators are compatible with any of the linear styles.
See Also
User Tab (Properties Dialog Box)

Attribute set Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Attributes
Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box and press
TAB.
437

Value Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can type is based on the value in
the Type box.
table.
row in the table.
See Also
SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box

Sets properties for a frame, called a SmartFrame, that provides a border for an object when you
insert or paste the object into the current document. You can scale the object by dragging one of
the handles on the frame. Or, you can crop the object by pressing the SHIFT key and dragging
one of the handles.
See Also
Embed an Object (on page 454)
Info Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box)

Provides information about frames around objects, such as raster images or drawings from
other applications.
Type - Displays the category of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the selected element. You cannot
edit the sheet.
Name - Specifies the name for the selected element. This field is user-defined. The name that is
entered in this field is also displayed in the Display Manager (Sheet tab).
Layers - Sets the layer that contains the selected element.
Origin - Specifies the coordinates, or location, of an element along the X and Y-axes.
Behavior - Specifies how the SmartFrame reacts to changes made within its source. For
example, if Fit Frame to Reference is selected and the size of the frame contents is expanded,
the SmartFrame will also resize and attempt to encompass all the data. Conversely, if you resize
the SmartFrame, the data inside is scaled so that it continues to fit within the frame. If Frame
Fixed is selected, the SmartFrame does not react to changes made within its source, and
resizing the frame will not affect the scale factor of the frame contents; consequently, the frame
remains fixed in its original size and position.
Height - Displays the height of the selected SmartFrame. The value in this field is for display
purposes only.
Width - Displays the height of the selected SmartFrame. The value in this field is for display
purposes only.
Scale (1:1) - Sets the scale to a 1:1 ratio. As a result, the representation of the objects in the
SmartFrame is the same size as the real-world object being described.
Select scale - Sets the scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio defines the size of the
SmartFrame in relation to the size of the real-world object.
Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio.
438

Use photographic style scale - Controls how paper-based items are scaled. When this option
is enabled (and if the Display as Printed option on the View Tab of the Options dialog box is
also enabled), text and geometry widths scale up. When this option is disabled, text and
geometry widths stay true to size (even if Display as Printed is enabled).
Link - Determines the way that the object links with a SmartFrame. This option is available only
for linked objects.
As Part of the Model (Public)- Allows the linked object to publicly appear in any document that
links to the current document. Therefore, if you link an object to the current drawing and then
link to the current drawing from another document, the current drawing and the linked object
appear in the other document. For example, this setting is useful if you link comments from a
Word document to the current drawing and you want other documents to appear in the current
drawing with the comments.
As Reference Only (Private)- Restricts the linked object from being displayed in any document
that links to the current document. If the current drawing is linked to another document, the
linked object does not appear in the other document. For example, this setting could be useful if
you want to link comments from a Word document to the current drawing and you want other
documents to display the drawing, but not the comments.
Border Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to format frames around objects, such as raster images or drawings from other
applications.
Show Border - Turns on/off the frame border around the object.
Color - Sets the color of the border.
Line Type - Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and sets another line
style for an element or linked object.
View Shape - Specifies the geometric shape of the border. Two options are available:
Rectangular and Elliptical. Changing the border shape can result in cropping the contents of
the SmartFrame.
User Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box)

Attribute Set - Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box and press TAB.
Save - Places the attribute set on the element that you selected.
Remove - Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected.
Attributes - Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a name in the box
and press TAB.
Name - Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set.
Type - Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or date.
Value - Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can enter is based on the type that
you selected in the Type box.
Add - Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute appears in the
table.
Delete - Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an attribute by clicking a
row in the table.
439
Format a Text Box

1. Select a text box.
On the ribbon, set the options you want. To apply several formats at once, click a style
on the ribbon.
On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Text Box Properties dialog box,
set the options you want.
You can format a text box before you place it by using the Format > Text Box command or
by setting options on the ribbon.
To format a group of text boxes quickly and easily, select several text boxes and apply a text
style by clicking a style on the ribbon. You can modify a text style using the Format > Style
command.
If you apply a text style, you can override the formats of the style by setting options on the
ribbon or Text Box Properties dialog box.
To apply a border to a text box, click a border option on the ribbon. To change the settings
for the border, you must select the text and then, on the shortcut menu, click Properties to
open the Text Box Properties dialog box where you can set the options.
See Also
Format Text Box Dialog Box (on page 440)
Text Box Command

Formats a new text box as you place it.
See Also
Apply a Border to a Text Box (on page 237)
Format Text Box Dialog Box (on page 440)
Format Text Box Dialog Box

Sets options for placing text boxes. You can access this dialog box by clicking Text Box on the
Format menu.
See Also
Format a Dimension or Annotation

1. Select a dimension or annotation.
440

3. On the Properties dialog box, set the options you want.
You can format a dimension or annotation before you place it by using the Format >
Dimension command, or by setting options on the ribbon.
You can also set formatting options on the Dimension ribbon.
You can also change a dimension style using the Format > Style command. Dimension
styles apply to dimensions and all annotations, except text boxes and callouts.
If you want to format an existing balloon, you must click to select the leader line of the
balloon, and then you can change the formats of the balloon.
See Also
Format Dimension Command

Sets options for placing dimensions. The Format Dimension command allows you to override
the style settings for the current active dimension style. These overrides are applied to new
dimensions that are placed using the style. This command does not modify existing dimensions
using the style nor does it modify the style dimension for the dimension style.
Once a dimension has been placed with style overrides, subsequent modification of the style
(using Format > Style) will not be applied to the existing dimension that was placed with the
style overrides.
See Also
Format Dimension Dialog Box

Sets options for placing dimensions. You can access this dialog box with Dimension on the
Format menu. You can define dimension styles with Style on the Format menu.
See Also
441
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries

You can fill a boundary with a pattern or a solid color using Fill on the Draw toolbar. A fill is like
other elements in that you can format it and move it around, but the fill is always associated with
a boundary. The boundary can be made up of more than one element, but it must be closed on
all sides. The following figure shows a pattern fill and solid fill.
The software provides styles for fills for various engineering standards, such as ANSI, ISO, and
AIA.
Modifying Fills
A fill is associative, which means it maintains its original orientation to an element regardless of
the way you manipulate the element. For example, if you move the boundary, the fill moves with
it. If you change the boundary, the fill changes to conform to the new boundary area.
A fill can exist only inside a closed boundary. If you drag a fill to another region, the fill assumes
the shape of the region where you dragged it. If you open a closed boundary, the fill changes
color to indicate that it is disabled. If you close the boundary again, the fill changes color to show
that it is now active.
Formatting Fills
Formatting a fill is similar to applying formats to an element. You can apply unique formats to
fills using Properties on the Edit menu or by setting options on the ribbon. To make several fills
look the same, you can apply a fill style by selecting the style on the ribbon.
The blank color on the Fill ribbon takes on the background color of the document. This is
useful for creating symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed.
Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out
elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol.
You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new name
in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as the formats
for the style.
If you want to copy a fill style from one document to another, just create a fill, apply a style,
and then copy the fill to a new document. The fill style appears in a drop-down list on the Fill
ribbon in the new document.
442

Masking Objects
You can mask out underlying graphics without deleting or trimming. The software provides a lot
of flexibility for creating a mask, such as shape, line style, with or without a label or border. The
following illustrations show examples of masks placed in a drawing. The first example shows a
rectangular mask, border shown with dashed line style, with a caption.
The second example shows a polygonal mask, border shown in green and no label.
443

See Also
Fill Command (on page 446)
Format a Fill (on page 445)
Draw a Mask (on page 448)
Place a Fill
You can place a fill only inside a closed boundary. If the software cannot determine the fill
boundary due to the complexity of the geometry, the fill color will be gray to indicate that the
fill was improperly done.
If the software determines that the fill boundary is not closed, the feedback is a beep and no
fill.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fill
.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click the settings that you want.
3. Click inside one or more closed boundaries that you want to fill.
If you open a closed boundary, the fill color changes to gray to indicate that it is disabled. If
you close the boundary again, the fill changes color to show that it is now active.
When you change a filled boundary by drawing another element, the fill does not
automatically update to fit the new boundary. You can refill the new boundary by selecting
the fill handle, then clicking Redo Fill on the ribbon to apply the fill to the new boundary. You
can also refill an area by dragging the handle to the new area.
To fill a boundary quickly, you can zoom in on it first using Zoom Area on the View menu.
You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new
name in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as
the formats for the style.
See Also
Refill a Modified Boundary (on page 446)
444
Format a Fill
1. Select a fill.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click the settings that you want to update the fill.
You can format a fill before you place it by setting options on the ribbon or using Properties
on the Edit menu.
You can apply several formats at once by clicking a new fill style in the Style list box on the
ribbon.
You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by typing a new
name in the Style list box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon
as the formats for the style.
If you want to copy a fill style from one document to another, just create a fill, apply a style,
and then copy the fill to a new document. The fill style appears in a drop-down list on the Fill
ribbon in the new document.
The blank color on the Fill ribbon (the cross hatched area at the bottom-right of the
color-picker grid) takes on the background color of the document. This is useful for creating
symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed. Incorporating a fill with
blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as
lines or connectors that intersect the symbol.
See Also
Create a Fill Color

When you change a fill by setting options on the ribbon, you can create custom colors for the fill.
1. Select the Fill command.
The existing fill will be replaced by the pattern and color you select.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click Solid Color or Pattern Color.
Pattern Color will not be selectable when Solid Color is selected.
3. At the bottom of the palette, click More.
4. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the options you want to
create a new color.
5. Click Add to Custom Colors.
6. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for the color you
created. This name appears on the palettes for Solid Color or Pattern Color on the Fill
ribbon.
See Also
Fill Ribbon (on page 446)
445
Refill a Modified Boundary

When you change a filled boundary by drawing another element, the fill does not automatically
update to fit the new boundary.
1. Select the fill handle inside the fill.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click Redo Fill to apply the fill to the new boundary.
You can also refill an area by dragging the fill handle to the new area.
See Also
Fill Command
Places a fill inside a closed boundary. You can place a fill only inside a closed boundary. If
the software cannot determine the fill boundary due to the complexity of the geometry, the fill
color will be gray to indicate that the fill was improperly done. Also, if the software determines
that the fill boundary is not closed, the feedback is a beep and no fill.
You can modify fill properties using the Fill ribbon.
You can also access this command on the Schematic toolbar.
See Also
Place a Fill (on page 444)
Fill Ribbon
Displays the active settings for a fill.
Style Lists and applies the available styles. To define a new fill style, you can type a name in
the box. The new style uses the current settings on the ribbon.
Pattern Color Applies a pattern line color for pattern fills. If you select none (the
cross-hatched area at the bottom-right of the grid), the background will be transparent. Filled
elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom colors
with the Colors Dialog Box (on page 374).
Solid Color Applies a system color to set the background color for the fill. If you select
none (the cross-hatched area at the bottom-right of the grid), the pattern will be transparent.
Filled elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom
colors with the Colors dialog Box.
The blank fill color (the cross hatched area at the bottom-right of the color-picker grid for
both the Pattern Color and the Solid Color) takes on the background color of the document.
This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an element on which the symbol is placed.
446

Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask out
elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol.
Redo Fill Re-applies a fill to a filled area when the boundary changes. A fill can become
disabled, and change color, if you modify its boundary by drawing another element or moving
part of the existing boundary. If you click Redo Fill, the area surrounding the fill handle is filled
again.
Angle Sets the angle of the fill in the active unit. Zero degrees is horizontal to the X axis, and
the angle (A) increases in a counterclockwise direction with zero on the positive side (B) of the X
axis. If you type a negative value, the software displays the equivalent positive value.
Spacing Sets the spacing between the pattern lines.
See Also
Place a Fill (on page 444)
Fill Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a fill.
See Also
Fill Tab (on page 447)
Fill Tab
Formats a fill. This tab is available only if you have selected a fill or an element with a fill.
Style - Displays the name of the style applied to the element.
Solid Color - Applies a system color to set the background color for the fill. If you select none,
the background will be transparent. Filled elements cover other elements when they overlap.
You can click More to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box (on page 374).
Pattern Color - Applies a pattern line color for pattern fills. If you select none, the background
will be transparent. Filled elements cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More
to define custom colors with the Colors dialog Box.
Pattern Spacing - Adjusts the spacing of the pattern lines in a fill.
Pattern Angle - Sets the angle of the fill in the active unit. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x
axis, and the angle (A) increases in a counterclockwise direction with zero on the positive side
(B) of the x axis. If you type a negative value, the software displays the equivalent positive
value.
447

Preview - Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.
See Also
Fill Properties Dialog Box (on page 447)
Custom Color Name Dialog Box

Saves a color that you created with a name. This dialog box appears after you create a color
with the Colors dialog box.
Color Name Specifies the name of the color that you created on the Colors dialog box. After
you save the custom color with a name, the name appears on the color palette.
See Also
Create a Fill Color (on page 445)
Draw a Mask
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Mask
.
2. Use the options on the Mask ribbon to specify the following:
Style, color, line type and width of the boundary object of the mask.
Placement mode of the mask - you can select rectangular mask, circular mask, or
polygonal mask.
The text that will appear in the label.
Whether the border is shown or hidden.
If Show Border is unchecked, the color setting is ignored and the border object
color is set to "blank".
3. Click once in the drawing to indicate the start point for the mask.
For rectangular and circular masks, click a second point in the drawing to place the
mask
For a polygonal mask, each click places a vertex for the mask. To finish placing
vertices, right-click to place the mask in the drawing.
5. If you entered text in the Caption box, the software automatically places a label in the
center of the mask area.
To exit the command, press Esc.
See also
Mask Command (on page 448)
Mask Ribbon (on page 449)
Mask Command
Masks out underlying graphics without deleting or trimming. Three shapes are available for
creating the mask - rectangle, circle, and polygon. You can create a mask with or without a
caption (placed as a label in the center of the mask area), and you can show or hide the border
of the mask.
448

See also
Draw a Mask (on page 448)
Mask Ribbon (on page 449)
Mask Ribbon
Determines the shape, style and placement mode of the mask boundary object.
Style - Sets the line style for the mask.
Line Color - Sets the line color for the mask. You can click More to define custom colors with
the Colors Dialog Box (on page 374).
Line Type - Sets the line type and style for the mask.
Line Width - Sets the line width for the mask.
Rectangular Mask - Restricts the placement mode of the mask to be rectangular.
Circular Mask - Restricts the placement mode of the mask to be circular.
Polygonal Mask - Restricts the placement mode of the mask to polygonal.
Caption - Specify the text to be placed as a label for the mask. Leave the Caption box blank to
not have a label automatically generated when you finish drawing the mask.
Show Border - Specifies whether the border of the mask is displayed. Leave the checkbox
unchecked to keep the border hidden.
449
450
SECTION 15
Working with Object, Linking and

Embedding
SmartSketch supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) to provide a flexible and efficient
means of inserting and working with external objects. An object is data created in another
application and inserted in a SmartSketch drawing. Part of the power OLE provides is the ability
to update objects automatically if they've been modified in their source document, or edit objects
in place.
SmartSketch is fully compatible with OLE-compliant software, such as Microsoft Office. You can
transfer text, numbers, sound bites, or intelligent graphics between documents that were created
with SmartSketch and other Microsoft Office applications. For example, you can use Microsoft
Word to create a materials report and then display the report in your SmartSketch document.
You can also link a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to the Variable Table in a SmartSketch
document. You can then use the value in the spreadsheet to control the dimensions in the
SmartSketch drawing. You can even create a document that contains a drawing created by
SmartSketch, notes from Microsoft Word, a spreadsheet created by Excel, and an image
created in Photoshop.
You can insert objects into your SmartSketch drawings using any of the following methods:
Linking
Embedding
Cutting/Copying-and-Pasting
SmartFrames
Any time a data file is inserted as embedded or linked, or pasted into SmartSketch, a
SmartFrame is created containing the object. A SmartFrame usually appears as a rectangular
outline in a document file, but it can also have other boundary type shapes (elliptical, for
example).
SmartFrames provide ways for these objects to be manipulated, including moving, scaling,
rotating, mirroring, and cropping. SmartFrames also contain properties for defining borders,
styles and placement options. You can access these properties via the SmartFrames Properties
dialog box.
451
Working with Object, Linking and Embedding

Linking
Linking takes data that's stored in one location (referred to as the source document) and places
a reference to it in another location (referred to as the destination document). Linking allows you
to use consistently updated versions of an object in multiple SmartSketch drawings. You can
edit the linked object only by opening the source document and making your changes there.
When you change the original data, the linked data automatically updates. You can link an
object in a SmartSketch drawing by inserting the information with Object on the Insert menu.
Relative Paths for Linked Objects

Linked objects placed in a SmartSketch drawing are saved as relative links. You can think of a
relative link as being a "child" of the SmartSketch drawing in which it is inserted. A relative link
points to the location of the linked file in relation to the "parent" drawing. For example, a link to
Building\Doors\door1.igr points to a file called door1.igr, which is located in the Building/Doors
subdirectory inside the directory or folder where the parent drawing is located. The use of
relative links in your SmartSketch projects enables you to create drawings that are portable,
meaning you can copy or move an entire directory structure to another location without updating
the file paths.
The parent drawing must already exist as a saved file prior to inserting the linked
object; otherwise, there is no "relative" location.
Embedding
Embedding takes data from the source document and stores a copy of the information in the
destination document. The copy becomes an independent version of the original information.
Although editing the data in the original application has no effect on the copied version, you can
edit the embedded object in-place from within the SmartSketch drawing. You can embed an
object inside a SmartSketch drawing by inserting the information with Object on the Insert
menu.
Linking and Embedding with Copy/Cut-and-Paste

You're not limited to using the SmartSketch Insert menu to link or embed files. You can move
information between documents or between locations using Cut, Copy, and Paste on the Edit
menu in any OLE-compliant software.
You can also move information between SmartSketch and other software by selecting the
information in a document or a document in the Windows Explorer and dragging it to another
location or another document. With this method, you simply select the information that you want
to move, press the left mouse button, and drag the document to a location inside SmartSketch
or another Office application. To finish the operation, release the left mouse button.
If you want to copy the information, and not move it, press Alt while dragging the object.
When you drop the information, a shortcut menu appears beside the pointer. The options on the
shortcut menu allow you to select how you want to place the information in the destination
document, such as pasting, linking, and so forth.
If the software that you are copying or pasting to cannot edit the information, it will automatically
store, or embed, the information in the document. You can then edit the embedded information
with the software that created it. If you cannot edit the information, the information is displayed
as a static picture.
When Do I Link or Embed?

Choosing whether to link or embed depends, in large part, on how you intend to use your
SmartSketch drawing. Linking is useful when you want to share information in many different
452

places and have that information update automatically. For example, if you want to display a
SmartSketch drawing in several different documents, you can link the drawing inside each
document. Then, later, when you edit the drawing, each document automatically displays the
results of the drawing updates. Another consideration is file size. Because linking only adds a
reference to a file, the data does not significantly increase the size of the SmartSketch drawing.
If you want to keep the document's size small, considering linking the data.
If you place dimensions or constraints to items located within a reference file, it is
recommended that you do not manipulate those items in the reference file without first deleting
the dimension or constraint in the Master file. Such manipulations could cause problems in the
Master file.
If the document's size is not an important factor, then you might want to use embedding.
Because an embedded object becomes part of the SmartSketch drawing, it will increase the file
size. Embedding is also useful when you want to keep your data in one file, or if you want to
distribute the data among several people who may not have access to the source application.
For example, if you want to send out several drawings for review, you can embed your drawing
document into a Word document and mail the Word document to each reviewer.
Embedding information is also a good choice if the information does not require frequent
updating.
If you want to embed an object or edit an embedded object, you must have access
to the software that created it.
See Also
Change the Source for a Linked Object (on page 459)
Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software (on page 455)
Link an Object (on page 458)
How Embedding Works

When you embed data from another program, the object becomes part of the drawing. When
you double-click the embedded object in SmartSketch, the software in which the object was
created opens so that you can edit it. When you go back to SmartSketch, the object updates
automatically with the changes that you made. The changes, however, exist only in the current
drawing.
You can embed existing information or create a new object and then embed it.
Embedding an Object
Suppose you want to use Word to add comments to a SmartSketch drawing. First, click Insert >
Object. On the dialog box, click Create New and then click Microsoft Word in the list. After you
click OK, Word opens so that you can edit the object. If Word is already open, the new
document creates a new window in Word. After you type your notes, click Update on the File
menu in Word. You should then switch back to the SmartSketch document or drawing. A box the
size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place
the Word object and display your notes on the drawing sheet. You can use this same process
with any documents created with Office-compatible or OLE- compliant software.
If you want to insert some notes that you already have in a Word document, you can use the
Insert > Object command. On the dialog box, you should select Create From File and then
enter the name of the Word document to insert the entire document into the SmartSketch
document.
453

If you want to embed the object, make sure the Link check box is not set.
You can also embed information that you copied from another document. Copy the information,
and then switch to the SmartSketch document, and use Paste Special to paste the information
as an embedded object.
If you want to use a mouse to embed objects, you can select the information in the source
software and then drag it into another document. You can also drag the document that you want
to embed from the Windows Explorer or into a SmartSketch document. The object is placed with
the mouse drop point at the center of the object.
When dropping SmartSketch documents, you can place the object coincident with the
coordinate system of the container document. To do this, select Coincident on the Reference
Files tab of the Options dialog box.
Editing an Embedded Object

To edit an embedded object, you can double-click the object to open the software that created
the object. The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the
menus and toolbars of the software that just opened.
The software that created both documents must support OLE.
You can also click commands on the shortcut menu to activate the software that created the
object. To get the shortcut menu, select the embedded object and then right-click.
See Also
Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File (on page 598)
Open an OLE Object for Editing (on page 459)
Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File (on page 639)
Embed an Object
To Embed a New Object
1. Click Insert > Object.
2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create New.
3. In the Object Type box, click the type that describes the software in which you want to
create the object, and then click OK.
The contents of the list depend on which applications installed on your computer support
linking and embedding.
4. To return to SmartSketch, do one of the following:
If the object was created in another application that is in a separate window, click Exit or
Update on the File menu in that application. If a message appears asking if you want to
update the document, click Yes.
If the software temporarily replaces some of the SmartSketch menus and toolbars, click
anywhere outside the embedded object.
When you return to SmartSketch, a box the size of the object appears beside the pointer.
You can click on the drawing sheet to place the object that you edited or created. While the
box appears beside the pointer, if you press the ESCAPE key, the object will be placed at
the default location. You can set the default location with the Tools > Options command.
You enter the location on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.
454

To Embed an Existing Object
1. Click Insert > Object.
2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create from File.
3. In the File box, type or click the name of the object you want to embed, and then click OK.
If you do not see the file that you want to embed, click a different drive or volume, directory
or folder.
A box the size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can click on the drawing sheet to
place the object that you edited or created.
While the box appears beside the pointer, if you press the ESC key, the object will be
placed at the default location. You can set the default location using the Tools > Options
command. You enter the location on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.
If you are working in the source software, you can embed an existing object using the Edit >
Paste Special command.
You can also embed an object by dragging and dropping a document from the Windows
Explorer into a SmartSketch document.
If you insert a SmartSketch document into the current document, the terminators, spaces,
text, and styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines
and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can cause the
See Also
Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software

1.
2.
3.
Double-click the embedded object.

Edit the object.
If you are editing the object in a separate application window, click either Exit or Update on
the File menu to return to SmartSketch.
If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces the SmartSketch menus
and toolbars, click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to SmartSketch.
See Also
455
Object Command
Inserts objects into a document through linking and embedding. The difference between linking
and embedding is how data is stored and updated. The Object command inserts any OLE 2.0
enabled object, such as a Word document, .AVI document, or CAD document. The inserted
object can then be edited by double-clicking it.
When you link an object to a document, the document stores information about where the
object is locatedthe object is not stored in the document. When you embed an object in a
document, a copy of the object is stored in the document.
When you make changes to a linked object, all documents that have links to that object
update. When you make changes to an embedded object, only the copy of the object that is
stored in the document updates.
See Also
Insert Object Dialog Box

Create New Creates a new object to insert into the file that is currently open. After you insert
the object, you will be able to automatically enter information into it.
Create from File Inserts an entire document into the file that is currently open. You will be
able to edit the inserted object with the program used to create the file.
File Provides a space to type the file name you want to insert into your document.
Browse Provides a dialog box for locating the file you want to insert into your document.
Link Allows you to choose whether you want to link or embed your file.
Result Shows the type of file you are inserting. This information changes depending on the
type of file you are inserting.
To get help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question Mark
right corner of the dialog box, and then click on a dialog box control.
in the upper
See Also
456
Save Copy As Command (File Menu)

Saves the active document to a new name, directory, and format. This command appears on the
File menu when you double-click an inserted object on the drawing sheet.
See Also
How Linking Works

Suppose you are sketching a drawing with SmartSketch, and you want to include it in an
engineering change request that was created in Word. You intend to update the drawing several
times and want the change request to reflect the latest updates. A good way to keep the
updates current is to link the drawing to the Word document and then periodically update the
link.
Creating a Link
You can create links between documents as easily as you cut and paste information. To create
a link to an entire document, you insert information into the destination document with Object on
the Insert menu. This is convenient when you do not want to switch away from the document in
which you are currently working.
You can also link information by dragging and dropping the document from the Windows
Explorer into a SmartSketch document.
To insert the document as a linked object, you must press CTRL + SHIFT while
dragging and dropping the document; otherwise, the document is embedded.
To create a link to just part of a document, copy the information in the source document and
then use Paste Special in the destination document to create the link. To establish the link, you
must save the destination document. The software that created both documents must support
OLE.
Reconnecting or Changing a Link

When you move a document or rename the source document, the links in the destination
document are broken. To reconnect the link to the source document or change the link to
another document, you can click Links on the Edit menu.
Updating a Link
Suppose you linked revision notes in a Word document to your drawing. You have revised your
notes in Word since you first created the link. You must now update the link in the document so
that it displays the latest revisions to your notes. You can specify whether the updates happen
automatically when you change the Word notes or if you must manually update the link in your
original document. First, click Links on the Edit menu and then, on the Links dialog box, select
the link that you want to set. You can then click Automatic or Manual. With Automatic set,
SmartSketch updates the links every time you open the document. With Manual set,
SmartSketch updates the links only when you click Update Now on the Links dialog box.
457

Editing Linked Information
The best way to edit linked information is to change it in the source document. To edit the linked
information, double-click on the linked object.
Master file.
Breaking a Link
If you do not need to automatically update the information displayed in the destination
document, you can break the link using Links on the Edit menu. Once the link is broken, the
information still appears in the destination document, but you cannot update the information or
reconnect the link. You must create a new link instead.
See Also
Break a Connection to a Linked Object (on page 460)
Link an Object
Make sure that you save the source document before you link the information.
Create a link to another document

1. In the software in which the information you want to link was created, open the source
document and then select the information that you want to link.
2. Click Edit > Copy.
3. Switch to your original document.
4. Click Edit > Paste Special.
5. Click Paste Link.
With this procedure, you can create a link only to an entire document; you cannot link
to a selection in a document.
458
The software creates links as automatic links by default. It updates automatic links each
time you open the document and each time the data in the source document changes,
whereas it updates manual links only when you specify. To change the way the software
updates links, see Update a Link.
You can also link information by dragging and dropping a document from the Windows
Explorer onto the drawing sheet. You must press CTRL + SHIFT while dragging and
dropping to link the information. If you do not press a key, the information will be embedded.
If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the document, the terminators, spaces, text, and
styles appear in paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines and
In order to save files containing unavailable linked references to a previous version of the
software, you must do one of the following:

See Also
Links Command (on page 460)
Links Dialog Box (on page 460)
Open an OLE Object for Editing

1. Select an OLE object.
If the object is linked, right-click to display the shortcut menu and click Edit Object >
Open to open the source file in which the object was created.
If the object is embedded, double-click the object to edit it.
See Also
Edit a Linked Object

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click Edit > Links to open the Links dialog box.

In the Links list, click to select the linked object you want to edit and click Open Source.
In the source file, make the changes you want to the linked object.
In the source file, click File > Save to save the changes in the source file.
In the source file, click File > Exit to return to the SmartSketch document.
You can also double-click a linked object from within the SmartSketch document to open
up the source file and make any necessary changes.
See Also
Change the Source for a Linked Object

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Edit > Links.

In the Links list, click to select the link whose source file you want to change.
Click Change Source.
In the File Name box, type the name of the new source file.
If you do not see the file you want to open, navigate to a different drive, directory, or
folder.
5. Click Close to return to the SmartSketch document.
If you have other links to the same source file, make sure you change all links from the
previous source file to the new source file.
459

See Also
Break a Connection to a Linked Object

1. Click Edit > Links.
2. In the Links list, click to select the link you want to break.
To select multiple linked objects, hold down the CTRL key and click each linked object.
3. Click Break Link, and then when the software prompts you to confirm that you want to
break the link, click Yes.
4. Click Close to return to the SmartSketch document.
See Also
Links Dialog Box (on page 460)
Close a Linked Object's Source Document and Save the

Changes
Close and Return are available only after you double-click an object and edit it.
Click File > Close > Return. The changes you made to the object are saved to memory.
When you use Close and Return, you are not asked to save the document until you exit the
software.
You can use Revert to close the document without saving your changes.
See Also
Edit a Linked Object (on page 459)
Open an OLE Object for Editing (on page 459)
Close a Document Without Saving Changes (on page 99)
Links Command
Edits or updates links to objects in another document. This command is available only on the
Edit menu.
See Also
Edit a Linked Object (on page 459)
Links Dialog Box

Displays information about links in a document including file name, file location, and whether the
link is automatically or manually updated.
Links Lists the names, types, locations, and update settings of the linked source files in the
active SmartSketch document.
460

Cancel Closes the Links dialog box without saving any of the changes that you have made.
Update Now Updates the selected links.
Open Source Opens the selected file in the source application for editing.
Change Source Changes the source file for the selected link to a different file.
Break Link Breaks the link between the source file and the SmartSketch document. Data for
broken links is no longer updated if the source file changes. After you break a link, it no longer
appears in the Links list.
Update Allows you to specify whether your link is updated automatically or manually. If you
select Automatic, whenever you change the linked information in the original document, this
document will be updated. If you select Manual, you will need to click Update Now to update
information in your document.
See Also
Break a Connection to a Linked Object (on page 460)
461
462
SECTION 16
Customizing the Software

Customization allows you to modify and enhance the software to meet your specific needs. You
can use standard Windows programming tools and languages that are OLE-aware, such as
Microsoft Visual Basic. There are several ways to customize the software:
Customizing with Built-In Commands

You can add built-in commands or macros to the toolbars and menus delivered with the
software. To add a button to a toolbar or a command to a menu, you click Tools > Customize.
From there, you can click the Menu or Toolbars tab and click the options that you want. For
example, if you frequently use the File > Sheet Setup command, you can add Sheet Setup to
the Main toolbar for quick access.
The Sheet Setup command button is listed in File categories on the Toolbars tab of the
Customize dialog box. For more information about adding commands to a toolbar, see Add a
Button to a Toolbar (on page 471).
If you want to create a new toolbar that does not exist in the software, first click View >
Toolbars. Next, click New and type the name of the new toolbar on the New Toolbar dialog
box. After you click OK, the Customize dialog box automatically appears so that you can add
buttons to the new toolbar.
When you add commands or buttons to the menus or toolbars in the software, the changes
that you made appear only if a document is open.
Customizing with Custom Commands

Not only can you add built-in commands or buttons to the software, you can also create your
own custom commands or macros that can be added to the menus and toolbars in the same
manner. The Tools > Customize command allows you to add macros to the standard menus
and toolbars in the software. You can also run the custom commands directly by clicking Tools
> Custom Commands and selecting the custom command.
You can create custom commands in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming
applications. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are VBA (inside Excel), Visual
C++ Delphi, Visual Basic, and so forth.
The software also includes a type library, which contains the objects, properties, and methods
available with the product. The online Help that is delivered when you install the Programming
Tools component provides a complete reference to the objects, methods, and properties. You
can view the type library with Visual Basic's type library browser or the browser for an
OLE-aware programming application. A variety of custom commands are delivered with the
software; use Tools > Custom Commands to view a list of those custom command.
When you install the Programming Tools component, the software delivers a set of custom
commands to <Product Directory>\VB Examples\BIN. These files are stand-alone .EXE files and
.DLL files, which can be launched directly from within the software. A README.TXT document
is located in the source directory for each custom command and provides information on how
you can use the command.
For information about installing the Programming Tools component, see the SmartSketch
Installation Guide, available with the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
463

See Also
Programming Tools (on page 27)
Customize Command (on page 473)
Remove a Command from a Toolbar (on page 471)
Delete a Command From a Menu (on page 472)
Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings (on page 473)
Create a New Toolbar (on page 469)
Create a New Menu (on page 471)
Customize the Software with the Options Command

You can use Options on the Tools menu to customize the software. You can change such
things as the screen appearance, document location, and display colors.
1. Click Tools > Options.
2. On the Options dialog box, select the tab containing the information you want to customize.
3. Use the controls on the Options dialog box to make the appropriate changes.
See Also
Options Command
Changes settings that control screen appearance, document location, user information, and so
forth. This command is available only on the Tools menu.
You can use the Options command to set options for importing MicroStation or AutoCAD
documents into the software.
See Also
Customize the Software with the Options Command (on page 464)
Open a MicroStation Document (on page 595)
Open an AutoCAD Document (on page 638)
Options Dialog Box (on page 464)
Options Dialog Box

Sets options for the current document. For example, you can set the grid display by clicking the
View tab.
See Also
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 465)
General Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 465)
File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 466)
View Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 468)
Symbols Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 468)
Reference Files Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467)
464
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls color settings for the active document.
Sheet - Sets the default color of all drawing sheets in the active document.
Sheet color is stored in the file. However, when you specify a sheet color on the
Colors tab, it will override the sheet color stored in previously saved files. To allow the display of
a saved sheet color, access the Colors tab and select Default before re-opening the drawing
file.
Highlight - Sets the highlight color.
Selected Element - Sets the color of selected elements.
Disabled Elements - Sets the color of disabled elements. This setting can also define the color
of relationship indicators and their corresponding glyphs if Maintain Relationships is disabled.
Select Tools > SmartSketch Settings to see the relationship indicators and their corresponding
glyphs or images.
Handles - Sets the color of handles when an element is selected. Also, if Maintain Relationships
is enabled, the Handles option sets the color for the relationship indicators that display during
element placement.
Owner group - Sets the display color of the group containing the selected element during
dimension placement.
The color is used during dimension placement. For example, you could have elements that
belong to different groups on top of each other. When you place dimensions, it could be difficult
to determine which group a selected element is from. To clarify this situation, the dimension
commands highlight the selected element and display the owning group in the Owner group
color. For more information on placing dimensions, see Dimensioning Drawing Elements (on
page 274).
If you set the sheet color the same as another control setting, the control color setting and
the cursor color is automatically changed to a complementary color. For example, if you have
both the Selected Element color and the Sheet color set to Yellow, the sheet background
displays yellow and the selected elements display in a complementary blue color.
See Also
General Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls settings such as the display of 3-D effects and the number of entries in the list of
recently used files.
Update Links Automatically At Open - Updates links automatically when the document is
open and this option is set.
Recently Used Files List - Sets the number of entries for the Recent Files area of the File
menu when the Recent Files area is set.
465

Dimension Keyin Values Automatically - Places dimensions for recognized step values or for
values you type in a ribbon field while drawing a geometric element. For example, select
Rectangle on the Draw toolbar. On the ribbon, type a value in the Width, Height, and/or Angle
fields, press <Enter> or <Tab>, and then click the location in the Drawing sheet where you
want to place the rectangle.
Display Unit Of Measurement Labels - Displays the units of measurement in the value field.
Set printer paper size to sheet size - Automatically sets the printer paper size to match the
sheet size (if the printer supports that size).
Display XY coordinate readout - Displays the XY coordinate of the cursor position in the right
side of the application window status bar.
Undo Steps - Sets the number of operations that can be undone.
Middle Button Operation - Sets up the middle mouse button so that it can be used for either
scrolling or panning. The default action of the middle mouse button is Windows Scrolling.
See Also
File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Specifies the default location for documents, templates, and other objects you create or use in
the software. You can use the following types of documents:
Document
Templates that you define
Fonts
Macros
MicroStation references
AutoCAD references
File Types - Indicates the file type for which you want to specify a location.
Location - Displays the designated location for each file type.
Modify - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box. The folder selected with the dialog box is
displayed in the Location column on this tab. After you select a location, you can delete it later
by selecting the location in the Location column and pressing Delete.
466

See Also
Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box)

The Foreign Data tab is only available on the Options dialog box if you install the
Translators (on page 28) option.
Sets options for moving information into the current document by dragging a document or by
clicking one of the following commands:
Paste Special on the Edit menu
Object on the Insert menu
Open on the File menu.
Format - Sets the type of format that you can use for importing or saving a document. When
you click MicroStation or AutoCAD and then click the appropriate Options, you can access a
specific dialog box to set options for importing or saving AutoCAD (.dxf, .dwg) or MicroStation
(.dgn) documents.
Import - Sets options for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.
File Units - Sets the units for the document you want to import. When you insert or drag a
document into the drawing sheet, the software uses this setting only when the document has
units assigned that the software does not recognize.
Orientation - Sets the orientation for the document that you want to import.
Options - Accesses one of the dialog boxes for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation
document.
Export - Sets options for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.
Options - Accesses a dialog box for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.
See Also
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box (on page 590)
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 585)
AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 624)
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box (on page 629)
Reference Files Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Scale - Sets a scale option for importing a document.
Coincident - Brings in a reference file, also known as an inserted object, at full scale (1:1) and
coincident to its original coordinate position. The setting shifts the drawing sheet to the lower left
of the document graphic range and then determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference
file within the sheet. If the current document already contains graphics, the drawing sheet shifts
to include those graphics.
If you use the Coincident setting, the reference file does not appear when you drag the
pointer.
the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object. For a 2:1 ratio, 2 represents the size
of the drawing and 1 represents the size of the real-world object.
Fit to Sheet determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the sheet,
but allows you to specify where to insert the file by clicking on the drawing sheet.
467

Custom Scale - Sets the scale that you type in the boxes for a document that you insert or
drag. For example, when you type in 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes, the scale of the
foreign document is one-and-a-half times its original size.
See Also
Working with CAD Drawings (on page 565)
Symbols Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Determines the default actions when you drag a symbol into the document. You can override the
settings on this tab when you drag a symbol. You can press Ctrl to embed the symbol or Ctrl +
Shift to link the symbol.
Drag and Drop Default - Specifies actions when you drag a symbol into the document.
Embed - Sets the default action so that the symbol embeds when you drag it on the drawing
sheet. Embedding the symbol means that the software places a copy of the symbol in the
document. If you edit one instance of the embedded symbol in a document, all copies of that
symbol within the current document reflect those changes.
Link - Sets the default action so that the symbol is linked when you drag it into the document.
Linking the symbol allows you to edit the original symbol document. The symbol that you placed
on the drawing sheet updates automatically. If you edit the symbol inside the active document,
those changes are saved in the .sym document on your computer.
See Also
View Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls the appearance of the software and document window, such as the display of the
graph paper, ruler, and scroll bar.
Display - Controls the display.
Display as printed - Displays the drawing as it appears on paper. This option is enabled by
default.
Style view scale - Controls the width of linear styles as displayed on the screen. This option is
only available when Display as printed is disabled and will not apply to printed drawings.
Maximum line width - Sets the maximum width allowed for the display linear styles. This option
is only available when Display as printed is disabled and will not apply to printed drawings.
Reset - Resets Style view scale and Maximum line width to their default values. This option is
only available when Display as printed disabled.
Window - Controls the window display.
Vertical Scroll Bar - Displays the vertical scroll bar of the active window.
Horizontal Scroll Bar - Displays the horizontal scroll bar of the active window.
Sheet Tabs - Displays the drawing sheet tabs.
Grid - Sets options for the grid.
The grid display option must be checked from the view menu before these settings will be
visible.
468

Grid Display - Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision. The grid lines are
not considered part of the document and do not print.
Grid Snap - Aligns elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document
that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap, elements always align with the grid
lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines.
Grid Style - Changes the format of the grid lines to either static or dynamic. When you zoom in
or out, the software dynamically generates the grid lines for a dynamic grid. You can set
dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium, or coarse levels. The grid lines appear at common
major measurement increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the
darker, solid grid lines. A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or
out. The grid maintains a constant minimum spacing.
Grid Index - Determines the number of index grid lines, also known as minor grid lines, to be
equally spaced between the major grid lines. This option is available only if you select Static in
the Grid Style list box.
Grid Spacing - Sets the spacing of the major grid lines. This option is available only if you
select Static in the Grid Style list box. The selected options on the Units tab of the Properties
dialog box determine the units that you can enter, such as inches or centimeters.
You can open the Properties dialog box by clicking Properties on the File menu.
Grid Density - Changes the number of dashes in the index lines, or minor grid lines, between
intersections with the grid lines. This option is available only if you select Dynamic in the Grid
Style list box.
Sheet outline - Sets options for the outline of the drawing sheet.
Display - Displays the outline of a drawing sheet so you can view its boundaries.
Use during fit - Specifies whether or not to use the sheet outline during a fit.
See Also
Create a New Toolbar

1. Click View > Toolbars.
2. On the Toolbars dialog box, click New.
3. On the New Toolbars dialog box, type the name of the new toolbar. When you click OK, the
Customize dialog box appears so that you can add buttons to the new toolbar.
4. On the Toolbars tab, click the category containing the command that you want to add.
5. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the toolbar.
When you create a new toolbar, the changes that you made appear only if a document
is open.
See Also
Customize Dialog Box (on page 473)
Customizing the Software (on page 463)
469
Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default Settings

If you customize a toolbar, you can restore the toolbar to the original settings.
1. Click View > Toolbars.
2. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the toolbar you want to restore.
3. Click Reset.
4. Click OK.
See Also
Toolbars Command
Creates new toolbars and displays or hides selected toolbars. You can also change toolbar color
schemes and button sizes. This command is available only on the View menu.
See Also
Toolbars Dialog Box (on page 470)
Toolbars Dialog Box

Sets options for displaying, hiding, or changing toolbars. The settings on this dialog box are
remembered for the current user.
Toolbars Lists the available toolbars. You can select the box next to the toolbar you want to
display, hide, or change.
Toolbar name Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected.
New Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box in which you can specify a name for the new
toolbar.
Customize Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the Customize
dialog box.
Reset Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons.
Color buttons Adds color to the toolbar buttons. If this option is cleared, toolbar buttons are
black and white.
Large buttons Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see.
Show ToolTips Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the pointer pauses
over it.
Classic icons Displays the toolbar icons using the classic icons. If this option is not selected,
toolbars use the high-color icons.
OK Saves changes and dismisses the dialog.
Cancel Ignores any changes and dismisses the dialog.
Help Displays the Help topic for this dialog.
470

See Also
New Toolbar Dialog Box (on page 471)
New Toolbar Dialog Box

Names a toolbar that you selected on the Toolbars dialog box. You can type the name of the
new toolbar in the box.
See Also
Add a Button to a Toolbar

2. On the Toolbars tab, click the category that contains the command you want to add.
3. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the toolbar.
See Also
Remove a Command from a Toolbar

2. On the Toolbars tab, drag the button you want to remove from the toolbar and drop it
outside the toolbar boundary.
When you remove commands from the toolbars, the changes that you made appear only if
a document is open.
See Also
Create a New Menu

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Tools > Customize.

On the Menu tab, click the command category that you want in the Categories box.
In the List box, click the name of an existing menu.
Click Add Menu. The new menu is added after the existing menu.
If you want to add a menu to an existing menu, select the Place into selected menu
check box before you click Add Menu. You can add commands to the new menu later to
create a cascading menu.
5. In the List box, type the name of the menu and click anywhere away from the name to enter
it.
471

When you create menus, the changes that you made appear only if a document is open.
See Also
Add a Command to a Menu

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Tools > Customize.

On the Menu tab, click the command category that you want in the Categories box.
In the Commands box, click the name of the command that you want to add.
In the Preview box, double-click the name of an existing menu that you want to add a
command to. The Preview box expands to show the commands on the existing menu.
5. Click the name of the command that you want the new command to appear after.
6. Set the Place into selected menu check box.
If you want to add the new command to the main menu bar, do not set the Place
into selected menu check box. The name of the new command will be added to the main
menu bar after the existing menu that you selected in the Preview box.
7. Click Add Command. The new command is added after the existing command.
When you add buttons to the menus, the changes that you made appear only if a
document is open.
You can also add custom commands/macros to an existing menu. In the Categories box,
select Custom Commands. The Commands box becomes the Macros box and displays a list
of macros that are available in the current active directory. You can click Browse to change the
active directory. When you do so, the macro list in the Macros box updates to display a list of
macros in the specified location.
See Also
Delete a Command from a Menu

2. On the Menu tab, double-click a menu in the List box. The List box expands to show the
commands on the existing menu.
3. Click the name of an existing menu or command that you want to remove from the menu or
the main menu bar.
4. Click Remove.
When you delete a command from a menu, the changes that you made appear only if a
document is open.
See Also
472
Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings

2. On the Menu tab, click Reset All.
If you remove the Customize command from the Tools menu, you can restore it by
positioning the pointer over a toolbar and, on the shortcut menu and clicking Customize.
See Also
Customize Command
Allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow. This command is available only
on the Tools menu.
See Also
Customize Dialog Box

Customizes toolbar buttons and menus.
See Also
Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 473)
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) (on page 474)
Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Adds or removes commands and macros from menus or the main menu bar. You can add a
command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands that you want.
Categories Sets the category from which you want to select a command or macro to add to
the menu or main menu bar. When you select the category for a group of commands in this box,
a list of commands specific to the selected category is displayed in the Commands box. When
you select Custom Commands in the Categories box, the Commands box becomes the
Macros box and displays a list of available macros. Also, a Browse button displays that you can
use to open the Select Macro Directory dialog box.
Commands Specifies the command or macro that you want to add to the menu. If you select
Custom Commands in the Categories list, the Commands box becomes the Macros box and
displays a list of macros that are available in the current active directory. You can use Browse
to change the active directory. When you change the active directory, the macro list in the
Macros box updates to display a list of macros in the specified location.
Preview Lists the menus. Double-click on a menu name to see all the commands on a menu.
When you click Add Command, Add Menu, Place into selected menu, or Remove, the
changes show up on this list. This list also changes to allow you type in a name for the new
menu that you want to add.
473

Place into selected menu Places a command or macro that you selected in the Commands
box on the menu that you selected in the Preview box. If you do not set this option, then the
macros or commands that you are adding are placed before or after the command or menu that
you selected in the Preview box.
Reset All Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings.
Add Command Places a command or macro on a menu or the main menu bar. This button
is available only when you select a command or macro in the Commands box.
Add Menu Places a menu on an existing menu or the main menu bar. When you add a menu
with this option, you can add commands to the new menu later. If you add a menu to an existing
menu, this creates a cascading menu. After you click this button, you can type the name that
you want in the Preview box and then click away from the name to enter it.
Remove Removes the command or menu that you selected in the Preview box.
Description Displays a description or result of the options that you selected before you apply
them to a menu.
Browse Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box where you can navigate to the
directory containing the macro you want to add to a SmartSketch menu. Browse appears only
when you click Custom Commands in the Categories box.
See Also
Delete a Command From a Menu (on page 472)
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Allows you to customize existing toolbars by adding or removing commands and macros. You
can also create your own toolbars.
Categories Sets the category from which you want to select a command or macro to add to
the toolbar. When you select the category, a list of toolbar buttons specific to the selected
category is displayed in the Buttons box. When you select Custom Commands in the
Categories box, the Buttons box becomes the Custom Commands box and displays a list of
available macros. Also, a Browse button displays that you can use to open the Select Macro
Directory dialog box.
Buttons/Custom Commands Specifies which button or macro from the active category you
want to add to a toolbar. If you select a macro, you can also click Browse and change the active
directory. When you change the active directory, the macro list in the Commands/Custom
Commands box displays a list of macros in the specified location.
Description Describes the selected button displayed in the Buttons/Custom Commands
box. Descriptions are not available for macros.
Browse Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box where you can navigate to the
directory containing the macro you want to add to a toolbar. Browse appears only when you
click Custom Commands in the Categories box.
See Also
Create a New Toolbar (on page 469)
474

Select Macro Directory Dialog Box
Allows you to search for and specify the directory containing the macro you want to add to a
SmartSketch toolbar. The Select Macro Directory dialog box changes the directory for listing
macros on the Customize dialog box (on page 473). When you change the directory and click
OK, you immediately return to the Toolbars tab on the Customize dialog box. The macros for
the directory that you selected are listed in the Custom Commands box on the Toolbars tab.
Custom Commands - Lists the files in the selected drive and folder location that match the type
specified in the Save file as type list.
Folders - Allows you to browse through and select a folder on the specified drive.
Save file as type - Specifies the type of file you are saving.
Drives - Lists the names of available drives. You can browse through the list and click on a drive
name to select it.
Network - Allows you to connect to a shared network folder.
See Also
Run a Custom Command

1. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
2. In the Custom Command dialog box, locate the custom command you want to run.
3. Click Open.
You can create custom commands with any programming tool that supports OLE
automation, such as Microsoft Visual Basic.
See Also
Custom Commands Command (on page 475)
Custom Commands Command

Opens the Custom Command dialog box. You can choose a macro and run it. Some
macros are delivered with the software, generally in the [Installation Folder]\Program
Files\SmartSketch\VB Examples folder. You can also create your own macros and store them in
a location of your choosing.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Macro button on a toolbar.
The following custom commands are delivered with SmartSketch:
2D Custom Commands
Align Dimensions - Aligns linear dimensions that you select to a common point. For more
information, see Align Dimensions (on page 291).
Clear Manual Edits Clears manual edits from the drawing.
Highlight Manual Edits Highlights in the drawing the label and dimension options,
including filters that you select. For more information, see Run Highlight Command.
Run Extend - Extends one or more open elements to a point in space or to another
element. For more information, see Run Extend Command.
475
Run Highlight - Highlights in the drawing label and dimension options, including filters, that
you select. For more information, see Run Highlight Command.
Run Place Girth Dimension - Places a girth dimension. For more information, see Run
Place Girth Dimension Command.
Run Trim - Trims open and closed elements to a point in space, to a point on another
element, or performs a partial delete on a section of the element itself. For more information,
see Run Trim Command.
3D Custom Commands
SmartSketch also delivers 3D custom commands. These commands are run from Tools >
Custom Commands on the main menu, rather than the Drawing Editor. For more information
on using 3D Custom commands, see Custom Commands in the Common User's Guide.
Large Sector Utility PROGID: DwgBinaryEditorCmd.FixSectorSize
Converts existing production drawings from a small to larger sector format so that Microsoft
structured storage limits and their corresponding errors are avoided.
Repair Style Path Command PROGID: DwgRepairCmd.RepairDocuments
Fixes the Symbol or Style path on a RAD document.
Synchronize Drawing Templates Command PROGID:
DwgSynchTemplatesCmd.SynchTemplates
Synchronizes or copies a template from one drawing component to another.
See Also
Run a Custom Command (on page 475)
Custom Command Dialog Box (on page 476)
Custom Command Dialog Box

Allows you to locate the custom command or macro that you want to run.
See Also
Custom Commands Command (on page 475)
Run a Custom Command (on page 475)
Assign a Shortcut Key

1. Click Tools > Customize Keyboard.
2. In the Customize Keyboard dialog box, click the command category that you want in the
Categories list.
3. In the Commands box, click the command to which you want to assign a shortcut key.
4. Press the shortcut key combination you want to assign. For example, press CTRL and the
key.
476
You cannot use a single letter or alpha character (like "T"). You must begin each
shortcut key combinations with CTRL, ALT, or a function key.
The following keys cannot be used to define the shortcut key combination:
Punctuation keys

Divide
Plus
Multiply
Shift
Scroll Lock
Pause
Num Lock
5. Click OK to save the shortcut key combination.
To remove a shortcut key, select a command in the Commands list that has a shortcut key
and then click Clear.
You can also assign a shortcut key combination to a custom command:
a. In the Categories list, select Custom Commands.
b. Type the progid for the custom command in the Progid box, and then click Add to add
the progid to the Commands list.
c. Press the shortcut key combination you want to assign, and then click OK.
d. Shortcut key mappings are saved locally in
<APPDATA>\SmartSketch\SmartKeysMappings.txt. You can share these mappings
among multiple SmartSketch users by placing a copy of the SmartKeysMappings.txt file
on a server and then referencing it with a UNC path. In the registry of each user's local
machine, modify
the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Intergraph\Applications\SmartSketch.Applicatio
n\PrefSets\AddIns\SmartKeysManager\MapFile value so that it points to the file in the
server location.
See Also
Customize Keyboard Dialog Box (on page 477)
Customize Keyboard Command

Uses shortcut keys to quickly accomplish tasks you perform frequently. Shortcut keys are
one or more keys you press on the keyboard to complete a task. For example, pressing CTRL +
N creates a new document or template, just as selecting New on the File menu or clicking New
on the Main toolbar creates a new document or template.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Customize Keyboard button on a toolbar.
The following keyboard combinations are not available: ALT+C, ALT+K, ALT+O,
ALT+H, ALT+N, and ALT+P.
See Also
Customize Keyboard Dialog Box (on page 477)
Customize Keyboard Dialog Box

Categories - Sets the category from which you want to select a command to assign a shortcut
key combination. When you select the category for a group of commands in this box, a list of
commands specific to the selected category is displayed in the Commands box.
Commands - Specifies the command to which you want to assign a shortcut key combination.
477

Progid - Specifies the executable (.dll, .ocx, .exe) to which you want to assign a shortcut key
combination. The Progid box displays only when you select Custom Commands in the
Categories list.
Delete - Removes the selected Progid from the Commands list. This button displays only when
you select Custom Commands in the Categories list.
Add - Adds the executable you entered in the Progid box to the Commands list. This button
displays only when you select Custom Commands in the Categories list.
Press new shortcut key - Displays the shortcut keyboard combination you defined for the
selected command.
Clear - Removes the shortcut key combination that displays in the Press new shortcut key
box.
Use shortcut keys - Enables the use of shortcut keys in the software. If this box is disabled, the
shortcut key combinations that you have defined are inactive.
See Also
Customize Keyboard Command (on page 477)
Installing Additional Tools

Add-ins are commands or functions that add special capabilities to the software. To install an
add-in, choose Add-Ins from the Tools menu. After you install an add-in, its commands or
functions become an integrated part of the software until you remove the add-in.
Add-Ins Included with the Software

The following add-ins are included with the software and are located in the <Product
Directory>\Addins folder:
Add-in
Description
Symbol Authoring
Tools
Provides ready-to-use symbols and a tool set for

creating your own symbols.
AutoSave
Automatically saves open documents at the

interval you specify.
ImageIntegrator
Enables large format raster display and provides

image editing tools.
Isometric Toolbar
Activates an isometric toolbar while a given

document is active.
Line Style Editor
Edits linear styles, linear patterns and point styles.
To Do List Manager Manages a To Do List for documents.

Organizational
Chart Wizard
478
Creates organization charts quickly and easily.
The ImageIntegrator and Symbol Authoring Tools add-ins are only available if you install the
Image Integrator (on page 25) and Symbol Authoring (on page 27) options. For more
information about installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch Installation Guide,
The Line Style Editor does not display in the Add-ins list until you click Tools > Line Style
Editor to toggle it on for the first time. Once it has been added to the Add-ins list, you can

toggle on/off the Line Style Editor by selecting/deselecting it in the Add-ins list or by clicking
Tools > Line Style Editor.
See Also
Add-Ins Command (on page 479)
Install or Remove an Add-In (on page 479)
Install or Remove an Add-In

1. Click Tools > Add-Ins.
2. To install an add-in, select the associated check box.
The add-ins you install are active until you remove them.
To remove, clear the check box associated with the add-in. The software removes the
add-ins the next time you start this application.
If the add-in you want to install is not listed in the Add-In Manager dialog box, click Browse
and locate the drive, folder, and filename for the add-in.
See Also
Add-Ins Command (on page 479)
Add-Ins Command
Allows you to select add-ins that are automatically available and ready to use when you start the
software. This command is available only on the Tools menu.
With Add-Ins, you can install or remove:
Add-ins that come with the software.
Add-ins that you create.
Available Add-Ins
Lists the available add-ins. You can select or clear the add-in check boxes to install or remove
add-ins in the software.
See Also
Install or Remove an Add-In (on page 479)
Add-In Manager Dialog Box

Allows you to install or remove supplemental features, such as the SmartPlant Line Style Editor
from an application.
Available add-ins - List all the supplemental applications and features which you can install.
Additionally, you can click the Browse button and search for additional add-ins on your
computer or network.
Add-in description - Provides a brief description of the add-in selected in the Available
add-ins field.
479
Install the To Do List Add-In

The To Do List add-in allows you to define and manage tasks that are associated with a
specific drawing. You can view the entire To Do List and see the tasks that have been
completed and those that are pending.
From the To Do List, you can perform tasks, defer them, or delete them altogether. Additionally,
you can view properties for each task in the To Do List.
2. In the Add-In Manager dialog box, select the To Do List Manager Addin check box in the
Available add-ins list and then click OK.
Drag the To Do List toolbar and dock it at the top, bottom, or either side of the document
window.
The To Do List add-in remains active until you remove it.

To remove the To Do List add-in, clear the associated check box. The software removes
the add-in the next time you open the software.
To Do List Toolbar
To Do List Manager - Displays the To Do List Manager Dialog Box (on page 481) where
you can view, manage and define To Do List items for the active document, including tasks,
status, priority, and any special instructions that need to be considered.
To Do List Options - Displays the To Do List Notification Options Dialog Box (on page 482)
where you can specify when you want the software to notify you if there are changes to the To
Do List assigned to a drawing.
Create a To Do List
The following procedure requires the To Do List add-in. For more information, see
Install or Remove an Add-In (on page 479).
1. Open a SmartSketch document.
2. On the To Do List toolbar, click To Do List Manager
If the To Do List toolbar is not displayed, do the following:

Click View > Toolbar
In the Toolbars dialog box, select To Do List in the list of toolbars.
Click OK
So that the To Do List toolbar remains visible, you can dock it to the top, bottom, or
either side of the drawing window.
3. In the To Do List dialog box, type a description of the task in the Item box.
4. Select a status in the Status list.
When a task is created, the status is set to Open.
5. In the Priority list, select a level of priority for the task.
6. In the Details box, enter any additional information that is pertinent to the task.
7. Click Add.
480

8. Click Apply and then repeat steps 1-7 to define as many tasks as needed.
9. When you are finished defining the To Do List tasks, click Close to return to the
SmartSketch document.
If you click Close before clicking Apply, none of the To Do List entries will be saved.
When you save the document, the To Do List is also saved. You can use the To Do List
Notification Options dialog box (on page 482) to request that the software notify you when
the status or priority of a task on the To Do List changes.
To Do List Manager Command

Displays the To Do List Manager Dialog Box (on page 481) where you can view, manage
and define To Do List items for the active document, including tasks, status, priority, and any
special instructions that need to be considered.
To Do List Manager Dialog Box

Provides the ability to define, view, and manage tasks that have been associated with a specific
drawing.
Item - Provides a descriptive string that helps you identify the purpose of the task. You cannot
modify the Item once it has been added to the task list.
Status - Indicates the level of completion for the task. You can select from the following: Open,
Reviewed, Complete, Rejected, and Resolved. When a task is created, the status is set to
Open.
Priority - Defines an order of importance to the task, with 1 being the highest priority and 4
being the lowest priority.
Details - Allows you to enter freeform text about the task, such as information about the
execution of the task.
Add - Places the information you entered in the Item, Status, Priority, and Details fields into
the next empty row in the task list.
Modify - Updates the selected task with any changes you have made to Status, Priority, or
Details.
Delete - Removes the selected row from the task list.
See Also
Create a To Do List (on page 480)
To Do List Options Command

Displays the To Do List Notification Options dialog box (on page 482) where you can specify
when you want the software to notify you if there are changes to the To Do List assigned to a
drawing.
See Also
Create a To Do List (on page 480)
481
To Do List Notification Options Dialog Box

Provides the ability to specify when you want the software to notify you if there are status or
priority changes to a task in the To Do List assigned to a drawing.
A document with a To Do List is open - When this option is enabled, the software displays the
following message when you open a document that contains a To Do List:
Item Status - Specifies that the software inform you when the status of the To Do List task
meets the criteria you define. You can select from the following statuses: Open, Reviewed,
Complete, Rejected and Resolved. When the item meets the criteria you have specified, the
software displays a message similar to the following:
Item Priority - Specifies that the software inform you when the priority of the To Do List task
meets the criteria you define. Four priority levels are available, with 1 being the highest level of
priority and 4 being the lowest level of priority.
482
SECTION 17
Using the Line Style Editor

The Line Style Editor allows you to create and modify point styles, linear patterns, fill styles, and
linear styles through a user-friendly interface. You can create custom styles based on existing
ones, modify the properties of existing styles, or delete styles that are not used or referenced by
others.
Linear patterns and styles are defined by a series of strokes, called a stroke sequence. Each
stroke appears either as a dash or a gap; however, point styles may be added to the stroke
when necessary. The strokes, when used together in a stroke sequence, are placed in locations
indicated by a stroke index, a number indicating the order in which the individual strokes appear
in the sequence.
The Line Style Editor appears as a frame in the SmartSketch window. The Line Style Editor
toolbar appears at the top of the frame. A tree window displays line styles defined for the active
document or within any applicable resource files, and a preview window at the bottom of the
frame provides a graphic representation of selected styles. To toggle on/off the Line Style Editor,
use the Tools > Add-Ins command to open the Add-In Manager dialog box and then select or
clear the check box beside Line Style Editor. Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the toolbar
area, and on the shortcut menu, and select or clear Line Style Editor to toggle the display.
Using the Line Style Editor, you can create the following custom tools, which are saved within
the active symbol (.sym) file.
Point Styles Holds graphical images used periodically throughout a line or as a terminator at
the beginning or end of a line. Examples of common point styles might include arrowheads used
at one end of a line or symbols drawn over a line to indicate what the line represents.
Linear Patterns Adds point styles, if applicable, to a series of dashes and gaps (strokes).
When defining a linear pattern, you set both, the order in which dashes, gaps, and point styles
appear, and the position of the point styles relative to the stroke.
Linear Styles Provides point styles and linear patterns in a format that can be used in
drawings. When you define a linear style, you provide width and color to linear patterns so they
can be applied to linear geometry.
Fill Styles Provides patterns or solid colors used inside a closed boundary. When you define
a fill style, you provide a color and degree of transparency. When you define a pattern, you
define such items as a pattern line color, degree of transparency, line width, spacing of the
pattern lines, and so on.
If you are using a Workshare environment, fill styles, point styles, linear patterns, and
linear styles should not be created at a satellite site.
See Also
Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492)
483
Customize the Line Style Editor Toolbar

1. From the Line Style Editor window, double-click in the open space on the right-hand side of
the Line Style Editor toolbar.
2. On the Customize Toolbar dialog box, select a command from the Available buttons list
and click Add.
The command is placed in the Toolbar buttons list pane.
3. Use the Add button to place all desired command buttons into the Toolbar buttons list
pane.
4. Select a command button in the Toolbar buttons list pane and click Remove button to
remove it from the toolbar and place it in the Available buttons list pane.
5. Select a command button in the Toolbar buttons list pane. Use the Move Up and Move
Down commands to change the display order of the command buttons in the toolbar.
-orDrag and drop command buttons in the list pane to change their display order.
Command buttons listed from top to bottom in the window list display left to right in
the toolbar.
6. Click Reset if you want to clear all settings and return to the system default toolbar display.
7. Click Close when you have finished.
You can write your own applications and run them from within the current document. Click Start
> Programs > Intergraph SmartSketch > Programming Help to get more information about
creating your own macros.
Programming Help is only available if you have installed the Programming Tools
(on page 27) option. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the
Installation Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command.
Customize Toolbar Dialog Box (Line Style Editor)

Allows you to customize the Line Style Editor toolbar by adding or removing command buttons.
Available buttons - Contains command buttons that can be placed in the toolbar. The
Separator command places an additional space between toolbar buttons.
Add - Adds selected command buttons from the Available buttons list pane.
Remove - Removes selected command buttons from the Toolbar buttons list pane.
Toolbar buttons - Contains command buttons that display in the Line Style Editor toolbar.
Close - Closes the dialog box and automatically saves all changes.
Reset - Restores the default toolbar command buttons.
Move Up - Moves the selected command button up in the Toolbar buttons list pane.
Move Down - Moves the selected command button down in the Toolbar buttons list pane.
Command buttons listed from top to bottom in the window list display left to right in the
toolbar.
484
Creating a Buried Pipe Line Style

You can use the Line Style Editor to create customized linear styles. In this sample workflow,
you will create a line similar to the one in the following illustration:
The process to create a new linear style involves the steps listed below.
1. Create the text.
2. Create a new point style.
3. Add the style to the linear patterns.
4. Add a style to the linear styles.
5. Test the new linear style.
Create the Text

1. Click Text Box
on the Draw toolbar and place a B on the drawing sheet. This text will
become part of the new point style.
2. Right click the text box, and click Properties to open the Text Box Properties dialog box.
3. On the Info tab, change the Justification for the Horizontal and Vertical options to Shape
Center.
485
In your new line style, each occurrence of the letter "B" will be centered horizontally and
vertically in the line.
Add a New Point Style

1. Click Point Styles in the Line Style Editor, and then click Create New Style
Create New Point Style dialog box.
to open the
You can also right-click on Point Styles and select Add Style from the popup menu to
open the Create New Point Style dialog box.
2. Type BuriedPipe in the Style name box to define a name for the new point style, and then
click OK.
486

3. In the Point Style Properties dialog box, type Buried Pipe Point Style in the Notes box,
and click OK. The entry for BuriedPipe appears in the Point Styles list.
4. On the drawing sheet, select the letter "B", and then click Define Point Style Graphics
5. Move the cursor back to the drawing sheet and click on the "B" to place the origin of the
point style.
Add a Style to Linear Patterns

1. Click Linear Patterns in the Line Style Editor, and then click Create New Style
the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box.
to open
You can also right-click on Linear Patterns and select Add Style from the popup
menu to open the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box.
2. Type BuriedPipe in the Style name box to define a name for the new linear pattern, and
then click OK.
3. On the Linear Pattern Properties dialog box, type Buried Pipe in the Notes box.
4. In the Stroke sequence definitions section, select 1 in the Stroke index list.
487

5. Set the Dash length to 0.500 in.
6.
7.
8.
9.
488
In the Stroke index list, select 2.

Set the Gap length to 0.25 in.
In the Point style section, select BuriedPipe in the Name list.
In the Position along stroke box, type 50.

10. In the Orientation list, select Always up.
As you define properties for the new linear pattern, the Preview pane displays an
image of the new style.
11. Click OK. The entry for BuriedPipe appears in the Linear Patterns list.
Add a Style to Linear Styles

1. Click Linear Styles in the Line Style Editor, and then click Create New Style
the Create New Linear Style dialog box.
to open
You can also right-click on Linear Styles and select Add Style from the popup menu
to open the Create New Linear Style dialog box.
489

2. Type BuriedPipe in the Style name box to define a name for the new linear style, and then
click OK.
3. In the Linear Style Properties dialog box, type Buried Pipe Linear Style Property in the
Note box.
4. In the Color list, select Red.
490

5. In the Linear pattern list, select Buried Pipe.
491

6. Click OK. The entry for BuriedPipe appears under Linear Styles.
Test the New Linear Style

1. Click Line/Arc Continuous
2. On the Line ribbon, select BuriedPipe in the Style list.
3. Draw a line on the drawing sheet.
See Also
Line Style Editor Command

Allows you to create and modify point styles, linear patterns, fill styles, linear styles, and fill
styles through a user-friendly interface called the Line Style Editor. You can create custom
styles based on existing ones, modify the properties of existing styles, or delete styles that are
not used or referenced by others.
You can use Tools > Customize to place the Line Style Editor button on a toolbar.
See Also
Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 496)
Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 497)
Line Style Editor Toolbar

The following commands are available on the toolbar at the top of the Line Style Editor.
Create New Style Creates a new point style, linear pattern, fill styles, or linear style.
Depending on what you have selected in the tree window of the Line Style Editor, clicking this
button will open either the Create New Point Style, Create New Linear Pattern Style, Create
New Fill Style, or Create New Linear Style dialog box, which you use to define a new style.
Copy Style Creates a copy of the style selected in the tree window of the Line Style
Editor.
Import Style Imports a selected style into the active document. This command is
available only when you have selected a style object in a resource file.
Delete Style Removes the selected style from the active document only if the style is not
in use or referenced by another style as a base style or as a component of another style.
Properties Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected style.
492

Place Point Style Graphics Places the selected point style graphic into the active
drawing so that it can be modified using the standard drawing tools. This command is available
only if you have selected a point style in the tree.
Define Point Style Graphics Defines the graphic for a point style from ordinary graphics
in the active drawing. This command is available only when you have selected a point style in
the tree and one or more objects are selected in the drawing.
Show Styles in Resource Files Displays or hides styles from attached styles resource
files in the tree window. Resource files are attached to a file using the host application.
Styles that appear bolded in the tree are styles currently saved in the active document,
while non-bolded styles are located in resource files.
See Also
Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear Styles (on page 497)
Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and Fill Styles (on page 498)
Create Custom Point Styles

On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Point Styles.
4. On the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492), click Create New Style
.
5. Name the new point style and add any applicable notes on the Point Style Properties
dialog box.
6. Draw the image for the new point style in the drawing sheet.
7. Select the image using the Draw > Select Tool command.
8. On the Line Style Editor toolbar, click Define Point Style Graphics.
9. Click on the image to place the origin of the point style.
You can also access the Create New Point Style dialog box by right-clicking on Point
Styles in the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style.
Use the Redefine Point Styles (on page 504) procedure to define a new image for the point
style or to reset the origin of the point style.
To toggle on/off the Line Style Editor, use the Tools > Add-Ins command to open the
Add-In Manager dialog box, and then select or clear the check box beside Line Style
Editor. Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu,
select or clear Line Style Editor to toggle the display.
See Also
Create New Point Style Dialog Box (on page 494)
Point Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 498)
493
Create New Style Command

Creates a new point style, linear pattern, fill style, or linear style. Depending on what you
have selected in the tree window of the SmartSketch Line Style Editor, clicking this button will
open either the Create New Point Style, Create New Linear Pattern Style, Create New Fill
Style, or Create New Linear Style dialog box, which you use to define a new style.
See Also
Create New Fill Style Dialog Box (on page 495)
Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box (on page 494)
Create New Linear Style Dialog Box (on page 495)
Create New Point Style Dialog Box

Defines a new point style for the active document.
Style name Type a name for the new point style.
See Also
Create Custom Point Styles (on page 493)
Create Custom Linear Patterns

In the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Linear Patterns.
10. Click Create New Style
on the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492).
11. On the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box, name the new linear pattern.
12. If applicable, select the existing linear pattern on which the new one should be based, and
click OK.
13. Configure the settings on the Linear Pattern Properties dialog box as necessary.
You can also access the Create New Linear Pattern dialog box by right-clicking on
Linear Patterns in the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style.
See Also
Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box (on page 494)
Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box (on page 499)
Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box

Defines a new linear pattern for the active document.
Style name Type a name for the new linear pattern.
Based on Select an existing linear pattern on which to base the new pattern.
See Also
Create Custom Linear Patterns (on page 494)
494
Create Custom Linear Styles

1. In the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Linear Styles.
3. On the Create New Linear Style dialog box, name the new linear style.
4. If applicable, select the existing linear style on which the new one should be based, and
click OK.
5. Configure the settings on the Linear Style Properties dialog box as necessary.
You can also access the Create New Linear Style by right-clicking on Linear Styles in
the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style.
See Also
Create New Linear Style Dialog Box (on page 495)
Linear Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 501)
Create New Linear Style Dialog Box

Defines a new linear style for the active document.
Style name Type a name for the new linear style.
Based on Select an existing linear style on which to base the new style.
See Also
Create Custom Linear Styles (on page 495)
Create Custom Fill Styles

1. In the tree in the Line Style Editor, select Fill Styles.
3. On the Create New Fill Style dialog box, name the new fill style.
4. If applicable, select the existing fill style on which the new one should be based, and click
OK.
5. Configure the settings on the Fill Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 503) as necessary.
You can also access the Create New Fill Style dialog box by right-clicking on Fill Styles in
the Line Style Editor tree and clicking Add Style.
You can use the Tools menu to toggle on/off the Line Style Editor.
See Also
Create New Fill Style Dialog Box (on page 495)
Create New Fill Style Dialog Box

Defines a new fill style for the active document.
495

Style name - Enter a name for the new fill style.
Based on - Select an existing fill style on which to base the new style.
See Also
Create Custom Fill Styles (on page 495)
Fill Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 503)
Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles, and

Fill Styles
1. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style, fill style, linear pattern, or linear
style you want to copy.
2. Click Copy Style
3. Name the new item on the dialog box that appears, either the Copy Point Style Dialog Box
(on page 496), the Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box (on page 496), the Copy Fill Style Dialog
Box (on page 497), or the Copy Linear Style Dialog Box (on page 497).
4. Modify attributes of the new styles on the applicable Properties dialog box that appears.
Copy Style Command

Creates a copy of the style selected in the tree window of the Line Style Editor.
See Also
Copy Fill Style Dialog Box (on page 497)
Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box (on page 496)
Copy Linear Style Dialog Box (on page 497)
Copy Point Style Dialog Box (on page 496)
Copy Point Style Dialog Box

Creates a copy of an existing point style, which you can modify as necessary for the active
document.
Style name Type a name for the new point style.
See Also
Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box

Creates a copy of an existing linear pattern, which you can modify as necessary for the active
document.
Style name Type a name for the new linear pattern.
See Also
496
Copy Linear Style Dialog Box

Creates a copy of an existing linear style, which you can modify as necessary for the active
document.
Style name Type a name for the new linear style.
See Also
Copy Fill Style Dialog Box

Creates a copy of an existing fill style, which you can modify as necessary for the active
document.
Style name - Enter a name for the new fill style.
See Also
Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear

Styles
1. Find the line style you want to import from a resource file, and select it in the tree in the Line
Style Editor.
If styles in resource files are not displayed in the tree, click Show Resource File
Styles on the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492).
2. Click Import Style
on the Line Style Editor toolbar. The software copies the style from
the resource file into the active document.
Styles that appear bold in the tree are styles currently saved in the active document,
while non-bold styles are from the resource files.
Import Style Command

Imports a selected style into the active document. This command is available only when you
have selected a style object in a resource file.
See Also
Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and Linear Styles (on page 497)
Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles,

and Fill Styles
1. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the style you want to delete.
2. Click Delete Style
You cannot delete point styles used to define linear patterns or linear styles or linear
patterns used to define linear styles.
497
Delete Style Command

Removes the selected style from the active document only if the style is not in use or
referenced by another style as a base style or as a component of another style.
See Also
Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear Styles,

and Fill Styles
1. On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the style you want to modify.
2. Double click the selected item.
3. From the appropriate Properties dialog box, make your changes as necessary.
Refer to the Point Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 498), Linear Pattern Properties
Dialog Box (on page 499), Fill Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 503), or Linear Style
Properties Dialog Box (on page 501) for additional information about the fields on these
dialog boxes.
Properties Command
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected style.
See Also
Fill Style Properties Dialog Box (on page 503)
Point Style Properties Dialog Box

Displays specific descriptive information and an image of the selected point style.
Notes Type a brief description or other useful information about the point style.
Units Specifies the geometric definition for the point style. World units define the width of the
point style in geometric space; Paper units define the width of the point style on paper.
Changing the drawing scale has no effect on styles defined in Paper units; however, it does
change styles defined in World units.
When using the Line Style Editor to create new styles, if a linear style uses a linear
pattern and/or point style it is recommended that they all have the same units.
Preview Displays the point style image.
See Also
498
Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box

Displays specific descriptive information and attributes of the selected linear pattern.
Notes Type a brief description or other useful information about the linear pattern.
Based on Displays the name of the pattern on which this linear pattern was based.
Units Specifies the geometric definition for the linear pattern. World units define the width of
the line in geometric space; Paper units define the width of the line on paper. Changing the
drawing scale has no effect on styles defined in Paper units; however, it does change styles
defined in World units.
pattern and/or point style, it is recommended that they all have the same units.
Phasing Select how dashes will be displayed.
Normal Repeats the stroke sequence without altering the strokes between repetitions.
Autophasing Adjusts the length of stretchable strokes so that the line always starts and
ends with a dash.
Single Stroke Sequence Scales the stroke sequence uniformly so that the first stroke
sequence begins the line and the last stroke sequence appears at the end of the line.
Fraction of first dash (%) Set a numeric between 0 and 100 that represents the fraction of
the first dash to be used as the last dash of a line when the phasing is set to Autophasing or
Single Stroke Sequence.
Display dashes Indicates whether dashes in this pattern are visible.
Break on change in direction Indicates that a break in the linear pattern occurs whenever
the line changes direction.
Stroke index Indicates the location within a stroke sequence where each stroke is displayed.
Each stroke within a sequence appears as a gap or a dash. Information about the stroke located
in a selected index location appears in the remaining fields in this section of the dialog box.
Dash length Set the length of the current stroke.
Fixed length Indicates that the length of the stroke is definite and cannot be lengthened or
shortened for phasing.
Stretchable Indicates that the active stroke may be altered for phasing.
Dot Indicates that the stroke should be displayed as a dot.
Selecting the Dot option disables the Dash length field, as the length is set by the
selection.
Zero length Indicates that the active stroke has no length. A stoke with no length is often
used as a place holder for a point style or as the last stroke if no gap is wanted between cycles.
Selecting the Zero Length option disables the Dash length field, as the length is set by
the selection.
Name Select a point style from this list box to apply to the active stroke.
Angle Set the angle which the point style should be rotated when it is displayed. This value is
measured from the selected Orientation. This field is available only when you have selected an
option from the Name list box.
The angle appears in the default units set in the host application; however, the field accepts
any unit of measure applicable to an angle.
A positive value in this field rotates the point style in a counter-clockwise direction about its
origin, while a negative value results in clockwise rotation.
499

Orientation Specifies the reference from which rotation is measured, as specified in the
Angle field. This reference may be the sheet or the line to which the point style is applied. This
field is available only when you have selected an option from the Name list box.
Relative Indicates rotation should be calculated from the slope of the line.
Absolute Indicates rotation should be calculated relative to the sheet.
Always Up Indicates rotation should be calculated relative to the slope of the line, but
that the x-axis of the point style is aligned with the line before the specified rotation is
applied. In other words, if a line is horizontal, the top of the point style is aligned toward the
top of the page, or if the line is vertical, the point style is aligned toward the left side of the
page before the rotation is applied.
This setting allows you to ensure that text within a pattern is displayed so that it is
readable from left to right or from bottom to top. Even if a line is drawn from right to left the
images within the pattern are displayed as if the line was drawn from left to right.
Position along stroke (%) Using a numeric value between 0 and 100, set the fraction into
the stroke from which the X and Y offsets are measured. For example, if you set this value to 50,
the offsets will be measured from the middle of the selected stroke. This field is available only
when you have selected an option from the Name list box.
X offset Distance along the stroke, at which the point style's origin is located. This distance is
measured from the point specified in the Position along stroke field. This field is available only
when you have selected an option from the Name list box.
Y offset Distance perpendicular to the stroke at which the point style's origin is located. This
distance is measured from the point specified in the Position along stroke field. This field is
available only when you have selected an option from the Name list box.
Add stroke Creates a new stroke. A new number will be added to the Stroke index list box,
and the new stroke is made active in the dialog box.
Remove stroke Removes the active stroke from the linear pattern. This button is available
only when more than two strokes exist.
To create a solid line with superimposed point style images, create dashes and apply the
point styles relative to those dashes. Then create gaps with zero length.
When you turn off the Display dashes command on this dialog, point styles applied to the
linear pattern are still displayed positioned relative to the invisible dashes.
Preview Displays the linear pattern image.
See Also
500
Linear Style Properties Dialog Box

Displays specific descriptive information, attributes, and an image of the selected linear style.
Notes Type a brief description or other useful information about the linear style.
Based on Displays the style on which this linear style was based.
Units Specifies the geometric definition for the linear pattern. World units define the width of
the line in geometric space; Paper units define the width of the line on paper. Changing the
drawing scale has no effect on styles defined in Paper units; however, it does change styles
defined in World units.
pattern and/or point style, it is recommended that they all have the same units.
Component index This list contains a number for each of the components within the linear
style. Information about the component selected in this field is displayed in the remaining fields
in this section of the dialog box.
Override point style color Indicates that the color specified for this component will override
the color defined for any point style used as the component.
Override point style width Indicates that the width specified for this component will override
the width defined for any point style used as the component.
Do not print Displays objects using this linear style on screen but does not print them. The
option is applied per component. For example, a style can have two components, both of which
will display but only one of which will print.
Color Select the color to be used for the active component.
If the component you are defining is a point style, and the color you select is not the color
with which the point style was defined, you should select the Override point style color check
box.
Transparency (%) Indicate how transparent the drawn line will be. Zero (percent) indicates
that you will not be able to see through the line at all, while 100 (percent) indicates the line will
not be visible, as it will be completely transparent.
Linear pattern Select a defined linear pattern to use as the active component in the linear
style.
Width - Select the width to be used for the active component.
If the component you are defining is a point style, and the width you select is not the width
with which the point style was defined, you should select the Override point style width check
box.
Offset Specify the distance the active component should be placed from the centerline of the
linear style. The offset distance appears in the default length units set in the host application;
however, the field accepts any distances in any unit of measure applicable to a distance.
501

Crossover orientation Controls how the component with an offset crosses over the
component without an offset. As such, this option is typically used on a style with two
components, one of which has an offset and one which does not. In the following illustration, the
darker line is the component without the offset, while the lighter line is the component with the
offset and the Crossover orientation.
Start terminator Select the point style with which you would like to start the line.
End terminator Select the point style with which you would like to end the line.
End cap type Indicate the type of cap you want to place at the end of the line. You can
choose from a rounded, flat, squared, or triangular end. For examples of each type of end cap,
see the following graphic.
Join type Select the kind of join you want to use for line strings and complex strings created
through automation. You can choose from rounded, beveled, and mitered joints. For examples
of each type of joint, see the graphic below.
The selected type of joint is not applied to regular lines joined at the end point.
502

Add component Creates a new component. A new number will be added to the Component
index list box, and the new component is made active in the dialog box.
Remove component Removes the active component from the linear style. This button is
available only when more than one component exists.
Preview Displays the linear style.
Fill Style Properties Dialog Box

Displays specific descriptive information and attributes of the selected fill style.
Fill color -Specifies the current fill color.
Fill transparency (%) - Specifies the degree of transparency for the fill color. Defining a high
degree of transparency for the fill color makes it more "see through", and any background
pattern will be more visible. Conversely, a low degree of transparency makes the fill color less
"see through"; consequently, the pattern is less visible.
Pattern
Name - Specifies the name for the current pattern.
Transparency (%) - Specifies the degree of transparency for the pattern. When you define a
high degree of transparency for the pattern, it becomes less visible against the fill color. If you
define a low degree of transparency for the pattern, it stands out against the fill color and is
more visible.
Units - Specifies the geometric definition for the linear pattern that occurs in the fill style. World
units define the width of the linear pattern in geometric space; Paper units define the width of
the linear pattern in the fill style on paper. Changing the drawing scale has no effect on styles
defined in Paper units; however, it does change styles defined in World units.
Rotation - Sets the angle of the pattern lines in the active unit. Zero degrees is horizontal to the
x axis, and the angle (A) increases in a counterclockwise direction with zero on the positive side
(B) of the x axis. If you type a negative value, the software displays the equivalent positive
value.
Spacing - Sets the spacing between the pattern lines.

Width -Sets the line width of the pattern lines.
See Also
Show Styles in Resource Files Command

Displays or hides styles from attached styles resource files in the tree window. Resource files
are attached to a file using the host application.
Styles that appear bolded in the tree are styles currently saved in the active document,
while non-bolded styles are located in resource files.
See Also
503
Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet

From the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style you want to insert into the
drawing sheet.
4. Click Place Point Style Graphics
5. Click in the drawing sheet where you want to place the graphic.
Add-In Manager dialog box, and then select or clear the check box beside Line Style Editor.
Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu, select or clear
Line Style Editor to toggle the display.
Place Point Style Graphics Command

Places the selected point style graphic into the active drawing so that it can be modified
using the standard drawing tools. This command is available only if you have selected a point
style in the tree.
See Also
Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet (on page 504)
Redefine Point Styles

1. In the drawing sheet, draw the image you want to define as a point style.
2. Click Select
on the Draw toolbar, and then select the image on the Drawing sheet.
On the tree in the Line Style Editor, select the point style you want to redefine with the new
image.
3. On the Line Style Editor Toolbar (on page 492), click Define Point Style Graphics
4. Click on the image to place the origin of the point style.
Add-In Manager dialog box, and then select or clear the check box beside Line Style Editor.
Alternatively, right-click anywhere in the toolbar area and on the shortcut menu, select or clear
Line Style Editor to toggle the display.
See Also
Define Point Style Graphics Command

Defines the graphic for a point style from ordinary graphics in the active drawing. This
command is available only when you have selected a point style in the tree and one or more
objects are selected in the drawing.
See Also
Redefine Point Styles (on page 504)
504
SECTION 18
Symbol Authoring
As well as providing you with ready-to-use symbols, the Symbol Authoring option gives you
the flexibility to create your own.
There are several ways to create your symbols. You can:
Draw a shape from scratch using the drawing tools, such as the line, rectangle, ellipse, and
freeform tools.
Merge a shape with other shapes to create a new, unique symbol.
Revise an existing symbol.
To use this functionality, you must first install Symbol Authoring using Add-Ins on
the Tools menu. If you do not see the Symbol Authoring add-in listed in the Add-In Manager,
you must run the Custom setup to install the Symbol Authoring option. For more information
on installing SmartSketch options, see the Installation Guide, available with the Help >
Printable Guides command from within the software.
Planning Your Symbol

After you have determined the need for a symbol, you need to decide how you want that symbol
to behave. The goal is to create a symbol that acts the way a user expects it to.
When you create a symbol, it displays the following default behaviors:
90 degree rotation angles
Handles for scaling, rotating, and mirroring
You can change these default behaviors with commands on the Symbol Authoring Tools
toolbar.
Checklist for Consideration

When planning your symbol, the first item to consider is what happens when you add text to a
symbol. Do you want to add text to the shape? If so, you should consider the position and
appearance of labels, text boxes, or balloons. A SmartLabel can be associated with attributes
that you define. You can also define symbols that resize as a user adds text to the symbol.
The second item you should consider is what template will you want to use with the symbol. The
scale of the template affects how the symbol looks when it is dragged in from the Symbol
Explorer. For example, the scale for the Architecture (metric) template is set to 1:100 mm on
the Sheet Setup dialog box. Consequently, some symbols that you drag into documents based
on that template may appear small.
The next item for you to decide is what happens when you manipulate the symbol. Do you want
to size, mirror, flip, and rotate the symbol freely? Do you want the symbol to move with an
element? You can set different options on the Symbol Properties dialog box. You can create
SmartPoints on a symbol to determine how the symbol attaches to connectors, other symbols,
or elements in a document.
How smart should you make the symbol? You can create symbols that have text and parametric
attributes. You can create text attributes using SmartText by clicking the Edit SmartText button
on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar. You can create parametric attributes by adding driving
505
Symbol Authoring
dimensions to the symbol and then adding the dimensions to the Parameters tab on the
Symbol Properties dialog box.
Controlling Display Properties

You can control display properties for symbols in various ways. You can change the properties
of various elements in the shape by applying styles or setting options such as line weight and
color on the ribbon bar. You can also determine what handles appear on the symbol by setting
options on the Symbol Properties dialog box.
On this dialog box, you can also set options for how the symbol displays when a user drags it
into the document. For example, if you want the symbol to display as separate elements, and
not a unified symbol, you can click the Discrete Objects option on the Behaviors tab of the
Symbol Properties dialog box.
Creating Flexible Symbols with Handles

Your symbol might need more control than users can implement by simply selecting the symbol
and dragging. You can add different types of handles to give the user more control over the
symbol.
To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27)
option.
See Also
Create a Parametric Symbol

To create a parametric symbol, you must take the following steps in the order that
they are listed. Before you begin, select the Maintain Relationships option on the Tools menu.
Create a Symbol with Driving Dimensions

1. Click File > New.
2. Draw the elements that you plan to use in the symbol.
3. On the Main toolbar, click the Dimension button
.
4. On the Dimension toolbar, click the SmartDimension button
On the ribbon bar, make sure that Driving/Driven

is set, if you have turned it off
when previously placing dimensions.
Do not use the Angle button on the ribbon bar if you want users to rotate the symbol.
You can use any of the dimension buttons on the Dimension toolbar to place your
dimensions.
506
Symbol Authoring
6. Click to place a driving dimension.
Repeat this step to place up to four driving dimensions. These dimensions are used to
create the parametric handles for the height and width of the parametric symbol. You can
use up to four dimensions for the parametric handles.
7. Select the elements that you want for the symbol and create a symbol.
Set Up Parametric Handles

1. Open the symbol document that you just created.
2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties
.
3. The Parameters tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box automatically displays the
driving dimensions in the symbol document.
4. On the Parameters tab, select a driving dimension in the table by clicking the appropriate
row. For example, for the dimension 30.000 mm, you would want to select the row that
displayed the value 30.000 mm.
If you move the Symbol Properties dialog box to one side of the document window,
you can see the dimension that you selected on the Parameters tab highlighted in the
document.
5. In the Symbol Parameter box, select a row to apply Top, Bottom, Left, or Right to the
row. For example, for the dimension 30.000 mm, you would want to select Right.
You can also click Apply.

Selecting Top, Bottom, Left, or Right determines the place on the finished symbol
where the yellow parametric handles appear. For example, if you select Top and Left,
the parametric handles appear at the top center and left center of the symbol range box.
While creating a parametric symbol that grows when text is added, you must identify the
two primary dimensions as TextHeight and TextWidth, instead of selecting Top,
Bottom, Left, or Right.
507
Symbol Authoring
6. Repeat the previous two steps as necessary for the number of handles that you want to
appear on the symbol. You can identify up to four parametric handles. In the current
example, for the dimension 20.000 mm, you would want to select Bottom

8. This procedure creates drag handles that appear as square yellow handles on the symbol's
range box. You can place the symbol and use the drag handles to move the symbol in the
document. In a new document, drag the symbol that you created.
The parametric handles do no support grid snap. You cannot define a step distance.
Parametric handles change the represented dimension by the precision units defined on the
Units tab of the Properties dialog box. You can access the Properties dialog box by clicking
Properties on the File menu.
option.
Define Symbol Properties

1. Open a document with an .sym extension.
.
3. On the Define Symbol Properties dialog box, select the properties that you want for the
symbol.
option.
Define Handles for a Symbol

2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties button
3. On the Behaviors tab, select the type of handles that you want.
option.
508
Symbol Authoring
Add a Symbol Attribute

1. Open a document with a .sym extension.
2.
3.
4.
5.
On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties

.
Click the Attributes tab.
Type the attribute name in the Name box.
Select the attribute type from the Type list. The available attribute types are Text, Date,
Number, Boolean and Money.
6. Type the attribute value in the Value box.
7. Click the Add button. The software adds the attribute at the bottom of the attribute list.
You can drag an attribute in the attribute list to change the order of the attributes.
option.
Modify a Symbol Attribute

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

.
Select an attribute in the attribute list.
Change the attribute data.
Click the Modify button. The software updates the attribute data in the attribute list.
If you change the attribute name in the Name box, the Add button becomes active, and the
Modify button becomes inactive.
You can drag an attribute in the attribute list to change the order of the attributes.
option.
Remove a Symbol Attribute

2.
3.
4.
5.

Click an attribute in the attribute list.
Click the Remove button. The software deletes the symbol attribute.
option.
509
Symbol Authoring
Attach a Help File to a Symbol

2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties.
3. On the General tab, type the name of the compiled Help file (.CHM) you want to attach in
the Help File box.
4. In the Help Context box, type the Help context identifier that is mapped to the Help topic
you want to display.
5. Click OK to return to the document, and then click File > Save to save the symbol.
You can access the Help topic by right-clicking on the symbol and selecting Help on the
shortcut menu.
For more information on mapping context IDs and creating compiled Help, see the Microsoft
HTML help authoring tools available from the Microsoft website.
To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring (on page 27) option.
Define an Icon for a Symbol

2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties.
3. On the Icons tab, set the options that you want.
option.
Symbol Properties Command
Defines properties for a symbol. These properties can include the following items:
A special Help document for the symbol
The types of handles the symbol displays
Special custom macros that execute when you drag the symbol
Custom behaviors that occur when you place the symbol in a document
option.
See Also
Symbol Properties Dialog Box (on page 511)
510
Symbol Authoring
Symbol Properties Dialog Box

Allows you to create properties for a symbol.
option.
See Also
Attributes Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 511)
Behaviors Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 511)
Custom Actions Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 513)
General Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 514)
Icons Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 514)
Parameters Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 514)
Standard Actions Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box) (on page 515)
Attributes Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to add attributes to a symbol.
Tab Options
Name - Defines a name for the attribute.
Type - Defines the type of data you can use in the Value box. Select either Text, Date,
Number, Boolean or Money as the type of data displayed in the Value box.
Value - Defines a default value for the attribute.
Add - Adds the attribute.
Modify - Writes the edits that you have completed for the Type and Value boxes and updates
the list of attributes to reflect the changes.
Remove - Clears the information displayed in the Name, Type, and Value boxes and removes
the attribute.
option.
Behaviors Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

This tab only appears when you are editing a symbol file (.sym). It does not appear
when you are inside a regular SmartSketch file (.igr).
Tab Options
Label - Select this check box if you are creating a SmartLabel. Selecting Label enables the
Graphics Fit to Text and Place leaderline options also located on this tab. See also
SmartLabels.
Mirror About Target Object - Allows the symbol to mirror about the element or object to which
you are attaching the symbol.
Glue to Target Object - Specifies that the symbol moves with the element or object to which it
is attached. When this option is enabled, the glued symbol may be opened and modified;
however, it cannot be broken down to its individual components until it is no longer glued
(attached) to another element.
511
Symbol Authoring
Align Parallel with Target Object - Ensures that the symbol aligns parallel to the element or
object to which the symbol is being attached, no matter where you move the element or object.
Allow Rotation By Relationships - Allows a symbol to change its orientation on the drawing
sheet according to the relationships that you apply to it. If the check box is cleared, the symbol
does not change its orientation regardless of the way you change its relationships.
The check box is cleared by default. When you clear it, a symbol maintains its orientation to the
drawing sheet when you move the related symbol or other elements. In the following example,
the line and symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end of the symbol is grounded
in place with a lock relationship.
The driving dimension changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale, as the underlined
dimensional value indicates.
When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships checkbox, the symbol changes orientation on
the drawing sheet according to the relationships applied to it. In the example, when you edit the
Honor layer display - Allows you to turn on and off the display of layers in a symbol file. For
example, if you create a symbol with multiple layers and enable the Honor layer display check
box, you can turn on/off any layer so that the items on that layer will display/not display.
Additionally, the layers are created (if they do not exist) in the file in which you place the symbol.
Graphics Fit to Text - Allows you to define a symbol that stretches to fit the text height and width
of a text box in the symbol, when you edit the text. This checkbox is available only when you
select the Label checkbox. This checkbox only affects parametric symbols or symbols created
with one closed shape that is a rectangle, circle, or ellipse. The parametric symbol must have
two driving dimensions defined as parameters on the Parameters Tab (Symbol Properties
Dialog Box) (on page 514). These parameters must be identified as TextHeight and TextWidth.
Scale Handles - Specifies that the symbol has scale handles. You can drag a scale handle to
resize the entire symbol uniformly in the X and Y directions.
Mirror Handles - Specifies that the symbol has mirror handles. You can drag the mirror handle
across the mirror line in the direction that you want to mirror the symbol.
Rotate Handles - Specifies that the symbol has rotate handles. You can drag this handle to
rotate the entire symbol.
Split Element on Drop - Allows a symbol to split elements on which you place the symbol. This
behavior is intended primarily to split connectors when placing an inline symbol, but also will
split most other elements. When a symbol is placed, the element is trimmed back to the range of
the symbol.
Place leaderline - Allows you to define a symbol that places a leaderline from the symbol to the
object on which it is placed. Once the symbol is placed, you can use the options on the Leader
ribbon (on page 246) to edit leader properties. A leaderline is only valid when the symbol
contains a text object. In cases involving multiple text objects, the leaderline is attached to the
512
Symbol Authoring
first text object created in the symbol. This checkbox is available only when you select the
Label checkbox.
Drop As - Defines the graphical output when you place a symbol in a document.
If you select Symbol, the symbol remains and behaves as a symbol when you place it in a
document.
If you select Group, the symbol changes to a group of elements or objects when you place
it in a document.
If you select Discrete Objects, the symbol is broken up into individual elements and objects
that you can edit separately.
Step Rotation - Determines the increment for rotating the symbol when you place it while
pressing the Left and Right arrow keys on the keyboard. If you enter 0 in the box, you cannot
rotate the symbol with the Left and Right arrow keys when you place the symbol in a document.
Double-Click Label Position - Allows you to define a label's location when a user double-clicks
a symbol to add a text label. For example, if you select the Top radio button, you can double
click to add a text label above the symbol.
option.
See Also
Custom Actions Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to specify processes that you can execute when you select a symbol, click the right
mouse button, and then click a custom command on the shortcut menu. The command names
of the processes that you define appear at the top of the shortcut menu. The command can be a
.DLL or .OCX file that you created.
For example, if you create a symbol for a heat pump, you might want to place a Calculate
Volume command on the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu appears when you place the heat
pump symbol in a document, select it, and click the right mouse button. The Calculate Volume
command appears on the shortcut menu. When you click the Calculate Volume command, a
Visual Basic program appears that allows you to calculate the volume of the heat pump.
Tab Options
Name - Specifies the name of the process that appears on the shortcut menu.
Programmatic identifier - Specifies which process is executed when a specific command is
selected on the shortcut menu.
Type the ProgID of registered files directly in the list box and press Apply. The ProgID is
assigned when you create the .DLL or .OCX file. See the documentation for Visual Basic for
more information about ProgID's.
Add - Places the values specified in the Name and Programmatic identifier fields in the list of
custom actions.
Modify - Allows you to edit the Name and Programmatic identifier data associated with the
selected custom action.
Remove - Deletes the selected custom action from the list.
option.
513
Symbol Authoring
General Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)
Help File - Specifies a special Help file (.CHM) that you can use to display special information
about the symbol that you create. For example, you could use a Help file to explain different
ways to place a door symbol.
Help Context - Defines a Help context identifier for calling a specific topic in a Help file. The
Help file must be compiled with the Help context identifier mapped to the Help topic.
For more information on mapping context IDs and creating compiled Help, see the Microsoft
HTML help authoring tools available from the Microsoft website.
Right-click a symbol that has a Help file attached, and then click Help on the shortcut menu
to display its Help topic.
Icons Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

Defines the symbol icon that you see in the Windows Explorer or the Symbol Explorer.
Automatic - Uses the elements and objects in the current document window to create the
symbol. This is handy if you want to see what the symbol looks like without opening it.
Use Active Sheet - Allows you to save the latest changes in the symbol document to the
symbol icon.
Use Bitmaps - Allows you to select a bitmap document to display as the symbol icon. You might
want to assign the same icon to a group of symbols that you are creating. For example, you can
assign your company logo to an entire library of symbols.
Small - Displays a small icon.
Large - Displays a large icon.
option.
Parameters Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

Automatically displays all the dimensions in the symbol document. You can use this tab to
create symbols that fit to text. You can also use this tab to define drag handles for resizing when
you place the symbol in a document.
The information that appears in the Value and Symbol Parameter columns also appears
in the Value and Name columns of the Attribute Viewer. The Attribute Viewer displays this
information when you place or select a symbol in a document.
Name - Displays the name of the dimension or variable that you selected in the table. You can
select a row in the table by clicking the row.
If you want to see which dimension in the symbol corresponds to the row that you have
selected, you can move the dialog box to one side of the document window. The corresponding
dimension is highlighted in red.
Symbol Parameter - Displays the parameter that you assign to the dimension. To assign the
symbol parameter, you must first click a row in the table. You can then type in your own name
for a symbol parameter or select one from the dropdown list.
If you want to create a symbol with parametric handles for resizing the symbol, you must assign
the following symbol parameters to dimensions in the symbol document: Top, Bottom, Right,
and Left.
514
Symbol Authoring
Driven dimensions cannot have parametric attributes or parametric handles for resizing the
symbol. Driven dimensions appear grayed out. You cannot select a driven dimension in the
table.
Name Column - Displays the name of a dimensional value in the symbol document.
Value Column - Displays a dimensional value or variable in the symbol document.
Formula Column - Displays a formula for calculating the dimensional value.
Symbol Parameter Column - Displays the name of the parameter that you assigned in the
Symbol Parameter box below the table.
option.
Standard Actions Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)

Allows you to define processes that can execute when you place a symbol in a document and
then perform actions on that symbol, such as dropping it (during placement), double-clicking it,
or clicking the Properties command on the Edit menu.
Type the ProgID directly in the appropriate Programmatic identifier text box and click
Apply. The ProgID can be any valid executable (.dll, .exe, etc). Refer to the documentation for
Visual Basic for more information about ProgID's.
Tab Options
On drop - Specifies a process that executes when you drag a symbol in a document.
On double-click - Specifies a process that executes when you double-click a symbol in a
document.
On property change - Specifies a process that executes when you select a symbol in a
document and click the Properties command on the Edit menu. You might want to select this
and display a Properties dialog box that you created, rather than the one that is delivered with
the software.
option.
Define Several Representations of a Symbol in One

Document
Before you begin, you must create a symbol document that contains all the different elements
that you would want to show up as several different versions of the same symbol. For example,
if you want a symbol to appear as either a box, triangle, or circle, you must draw the box,
triangle, or circle in the document and create a symbol. You can add new elements and further
modify the symbol at any time during the next steps.
You cannot include the same element in different representations. You must create a copy
of that element in the document to allow it to appear in different representations.
1. Click File > Open to open a symbol document (.sym).
2. Select two or more elements that you want to show up as a representation of the symbol.
You cannot select an element that is already a member of a group.
3. On the Change toolbar, click Group
515
Symbol Authoring
You cannot place one element in more than one group. To include the same
element in different representations, you must copy the element and include it in a different
group.
4. Define a separate group for each representation that you want to save in the symbol
document.
You can create the representation more easily if you keep each group in a separate
section of the document at this point in the procedure. Do not allow the groups to overlap.
You can define a common origin for all the groups later in the procedure.
5. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Representation
.
6. Select a group that you want to appear in the representation. The name of the group
automatically appears in the Group Name box on the Define Symbol Representation
dialog box. This name is automatically generated by the software.
7. In the Representation Name box, type a name. The name you enter appears as a
command on the shortcut menu when you place the symbol in a document.
8. Click the Add button to enter the name in the table.
The order in which the names appear in the table is the order in which the commands
appear on the shortcut menu. For example, if you enter the following names in the table in
the following order, that is the order in which they will appear on the shortcut menu for the
symbol:
Representation Name
Group Name
Flanged Globe
Group 235
Screwed Globe
Group 236
Bell Spigot Globe
Group 237
Welded Globe
Group 238
Soldered Globe
Group 239
9. Repeat these steps for each representation that you want to appear on the shortcut menu.
10. Select each group and move it to a position that is on top of the other groups. You should
position each group so that they share a common origin.
You can adjust the symbol origin by clicking Symbol Origin
Authoring Tools toolbar.
516
on the Symbol
Symbol Authoring
11. Click OK to close the Define Symbol Representation dialog box and return to your
SmartSketch drawing.
You should close the symbol document before dragging and dropping the symbol into a
document.
After saving the symbol, you should test the different representations that you defined.
Close the symbol. Drag the symbol from the Symbol Explorer into a new document. Select
the symbol and click the right mouse button. Make sure that the names of the
representations appear on the shortcut menu.
You can change the name of a group by clicking a row in the table, entering a new name in
the Group Name box, and clicking the Modify button.
You can insert or delete names from the table at any time.
The group name listed first in the table is the default thumbnail for the symbol.
option.
Symbol Representation Command

Defines different representations of the same symbol within one symbol document (.sym).
The names of the representations that you define appear on the shortcut menu for the symbol
when you drag the symbol into a document. When you click the name of the representation, the
symbol changes to display the elements that you included in the representation.
For example, you can define different representations of a valve with different types of actuators.
When you drag the symbol into the document, you can choose which valve that you want to
display from the shortcut menu.
option.
See Also
Define Symbol Representation Dialog Box (on page 518)
517
Symbol Authoring
Define Symbol Representation Dialog Box

Allows you to define several different representations of a symbol in one symbol document.
For example, you might want to place a valve symbol. But you might want the actuator on the
valve to display in several different positions. Rather than create several different symbols, you
can define representations of the same symbol with the actuator appearing in different
representations. After you place the symbol in a document, you could choose the representation
that you want. You can choose it by clicking the right mouse button and selecting the
representation name from the shortcut menu. The position of the actuator changes based on the
representation that you selected.
You must define a group in the symbol document before you can use this dialog box.
Dialog Box Options

Representation name Column - Displays the name of the representation that you entered in
the Name box below. You must select a group in the document, enter a name in the Name box,
and then click the Add button.
Group name Column - Displays the name of the group. The software automatically assigns the
name. You cannot change this value.
Representation name Box - Allows you to enter the name that you want for the representation.
You must select a group in the document before you can enter a name for the group in the
Name box. This is the name of the representation that appears on the shortcut menu when you
place the symbol in a document.
Group name Box - Displays the name of the group that you selected in the symbol document.
The software automatically assigns the name of the group. You cannot change this value.
option.
Redefine the Origin of a Symbol

2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Origin
.
3. Click a point to redefine the origin of the symbol. The symbol origin is the point that the
mouse cursor uses to drag the symbol into a document.
option.
Symbol Origin Command

Defines the origin of the symbol that you are creating. The origin of the symbol is the point
that the mouse cursor uses to place the symbol in a document. When you click Symbol Origin,
the symbol origin appears where it was originally placed. You can then click any position or key
point on an element to define the origin.
option.
518
Symbol Authoring
Managing Text in Symbols

You can add text to symbols by creating text boxes and balloons, placing text labels, or creating
SmartLabels with SmartText. SmartText defines the text attributes for the symbol.
The Edit SmartText
command is used to define the contents of a SmartLabel that is
associated to attribute names and values. One or more attribute names can be associated to a
label. The values of the attributes can be predefined or the values can remain null. When a
SmartLabel containing attribute values is dragged and dropped on to a symbol, the attribute
names and values in the SmartLabel are loaded on the symbol. When a SmartLabel that
contains null values is dragged and dropped on a symbol that has the same attribute name(s),
the values are read from the target symbol and displayed in the SmartLabel during placement.
In the following example, a SmartLabel has been created and associated with a "code" attribute.
Notice that no value for the attribute is defined in the SmartLabel:
Consequently, when the SmartLabel is dropped on a symbol that contains the same attribute
with a value defined, the symbol's "code" is displayed:
Although users can then edit the values of the text attributes in the Attribute Viewer, they
cannot change the names of the attributes.
ot all labels assume the text attributes of an element or object. Some labels contain shapes that
grow automatically if you add text to the label. These are called text-driven symbols.
option.
519
Symbol Authoring
Define SmartText Attributes for a Smart Label

option.
Delete existing graphics unless you want the graphics displayed with the SmartLabel.
2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Edit SmartText
.
3. In the Property box, enter the attribute information that you want the SmartLabel to display.
The property specifies the attribute name of the object that you want to label such as
Name, Code, Class, Manufacturer, Cost, Location, or Description; consequently, the
information in the Property box must match the symbol's attribute Name field.
Symbol attributes are displayed in the Attribute Viewer:
4. Enter the information that you want in the Value box.

The values of the attributes can be predefined, or the values can remain null. When a
SmartLabel containing attribute values is dragged and dropped on to a symbol, the attribute
names and defined values in the SmartLabel are loaded on the symbol. Conversely, when a
SmartLabel that contains null values is dragged and dropped on a symbol that has the same
attribute name(s), the values are read from the target symbol and displayed in the
SmartLabel during placement
5. Select or type the format that you want in the Format box.
The format can be any format supported by Visual Basic. The format type you specify
must match the format type of the
6. Click Insert Field. The information displays in the Existing text box.
7. Repeat steps 3-6 to define additional attributes for the SmartLabel to display.
8. When finished, click OK to return to the SmartSketch document.
9. Select Symbol Properties
on the Symbol Authoring toolbar.
10. On the Behaviors tab of the Define Symbol Properties dialog box, select the Label and
Glue to Target Object check boxes and then click OK.
11. Save and close the symbol file.
520
Symbol Authoring
You can test the SmartLabel by dragging it from the Symbol Explorer and dropping it on a
symbol or object.
The SmartLabel placed on the object displays the attribute values that are already assigned
to the object. If the object does not have attribute values, the default value displays.
The Font button in the SmartText Editor dialog box determines the format of the characters
that you want to appear in the SmartLabel.
If you want to remove a field, you can either select and edit the field in the SmartText
Editor box and press Delete or select the label text on the symbol and delete it. You can
also edit label text directly on the symbol or redefine the fields in the SmartText Editor box.
You cannot select individual characters between the angle brackets of the SmartText field.
You can select only the entire field.
Edit SmartText Attributes for a Symbol

2. Double-click a label in the symbol.
3. Type the text that you want and press Enter.
If you place a symbol with a SmartLabel in a document, you can edit the label by
selecting it and making the necessary changes.
option.
Create a Leader for a SmartText Label

1. On the Dimensions toolbar, click Leader .
2. Click the SmartText Label to place the annotation end of the leader.
3. Click any element to place the terminator end of the leader, or click in free space.
You can place either end of a leader first.

After you place one end of the leader, the command only allows you to select an element
that is valid for placing the other end of the leader. For example, if you add the annotation
end of the leader to a SmartText Label, the command then allows you to select only
elements that are valid for placing the terminator end of a leader. You could select a circle,
but not another SmartText Label.
If you want to add a leader to a balloon, you can set an option on the Balloon ribbon. To
select an existing balloon, you must click the leader of the balloon.
option.
521
Symbol Authoring
Define a Text-Driven Symbol

To create a symbol that resizes to fit any text, you must take the following steps in the
order that they are listed. Before you begin, select the Maintain Relationships option on the
Tools menu.
For a Symbol with a Circle, Rectangle, or Ellipse

1. In a symbol document, draw a rectangle, circle, or ellipse.
On the Info tab, set Horizontal in the Text Alignment group to Center.
On the Info tab, set Vertical in the Text Alignment group to Center.
On the Paragraph tab, set Alignment to Center.
3. On the Behaviors tab, select the Label checkbox.
4. Select the Graphics Fit to Text checkbox.
For a Parametric Symbol

1. Create a parametric symbol (on page 506)
While creating the parametric symbol, you must identify two primary dimensions as
TextHeight and TextWidth.
2. Open the new symbol document that you just created.
4. Click the center of the symbol to place a text box.
5. On the Draw toolbar, click the Select tool
and select the text box.
7. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that indicate the directional flow for text if you
add characters to the text box. You can specify the direction by the options that you click.
For example, if you want the text in the rectangle, circle, or ellipse to grow from the center of
the element, you can set the following options:
On the Info tab, set Horizontal in the Text Alignment group to Center.
On the Info tab, set Vertical to Center.
On the Paragraph tab, set Alignment to Center.
9. On the Behaviors tab, select the Label checkbox.
10. Select the Graphics Fit to Text checkbox.
If you want to create a symbol that has text associated to attributes, you can define a
SmartLabel that contains SmartText for the symbol. SmartLabels that contain SmartText are
associated with text attributes for the symbol. When you attach a symbol with a SmartLabel to
an element or object in a document, the symbol attributes assume the values of the element
attributes. If the element or object does not have attributes, then the element or object assumes
the attributes on the symbol.
option.
522
Symbol Authoring
Edit SmartText Command

Defines the contents of a SmartLabel. SmartLabels are associated to an object's attributes
and displays those attributes as text in the document. You can drag and drop SmartLabels from
the Symbol Explorer into the current document. If the object has values assigned to its
attributes, the SmartLabel displays those values. However, if you drag and drop a SmartLabel
on an object that has no attributes, the object picks up the attributes of the SmartLabel. For
example, you want to assign attributes to a valve, such as pressure and material type. If the
SmartLabel has the pressure and material type defined and the object does not, the
SmartLabel's pressure and material type are copied to the valve.
For more information, see SmartText Editor Dialog Box (on page 523).
option.
SmartText Editor Dialog Box

Places and edits SmartText in a symbol. When you create SmartText in a symbol, you are
defining the text attributes for the symbol. When the symbol is placed in a document, you can
edit the values of the attributes in the Attribute Viewer. SmartText is typically used to create a
SmartLabel.
Dialog Box Options

Existing text - Specifies the text that appears in the SmartLabel. You can type in plain text or
enter a field by defining information in the Item, Property, Value, and Format boxes.
Font - Determines the format of the characters that you want to appear in the SmartLabel. You
can define such things as font, font style, and font size. For example, you can select Arial Bold.
Item - Defines the type of object to which the SmartLabel is associated.
Property - Names the attribute of the object that you want to label such as Manufacturer, Cost,
or Location. The name you enter in the Property field must match the name of the attribute you
want the SmartLabel to display. You can use the Attribute Viewer to view object attributes.
Value - Identifies the value of the property based on what appears in the Format box. The
values of attributes can be predefined, or the values can remain null.
Format - Identifies the format of the object attribute specified in the Property field. For example,
if you entered a text attribute, such as Cost, the logical format is String (that is, text=string). The
format is any format supported by Visual Basic.
Insert Field - Enters the information that you specified in the Property, Value, and Format
boxes into the SmartText Editor box.
If you want to remove a field, you must select the field in the SmartText Editor box and
press Delete. Then you can define a new field.
option.
523
Symbol Authoring
Create a SmartLabel With SmartText Fields

The following workflow shows you how to create a symbol containing a SmartLabel with
SmartText fields that display the values of symbol attributes in SmartSketch. This workflow can
be broken down into three main processes:
1. Create a symbol containing the attributes to display.
2. Create a SmartLabel and edit the SmartText fields to obtain values from the symbol
attributes.
3. Combine the symbol and the SmartLabel into a single, wrapper symbol that can be placed
into a drawing file, which is then dissolved, leaving the original symbol and SmartLabel in
the drawing file.
The steps required to complete each of the three sections are listed below. Example symbols
and attributes are provided so that you can work through the processes.
Create the Symbol with Attributes

1. Draw the graphics for the symbol. You can draw your own symbol or use a pre-existing
symbol delivered with SmartSketch. The figure below represents a tank.
2. Select the graphics, and then click Create Symbol
524
from the Draw toolbar.
Symbol Authoring
3. Define the symbol origin.
4. From the Save as Symbol dialog box, type the symbol name, and then click Save. For this
example, use the name Inner_Graphics.sym.
This is the name of the symbol instance when the SmartSymbol is placed as a
discrete object.
SmartSketch displays the new symbol in the Symbol Explorer. Make sure you are looking in
the correct file location.
5. Click the Inner_Graphics symbol from the Symbol Explorer, and drag it to the toolbar area
to open the symbol file for editing.
6. Click Tools > Add-Ins > Symbol Authoring Tools.
SmartSketch displays the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar.

7. Click Symbol Properties
on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar.
8. Click the Attributes tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box, and then enter the attribute
values for the following fields:
Name - Specifies the name of the attribute to show in the Attribute Viewer.
Type - Defines the type of attribute.
Value - Specifies the default value for the attribute
525
Symbol Authoring
9. Click Add after you enter each value, and then click OK to close the Symbol Properties
dialog box.
For this example, enter the following two attributes:
Attribute A
Name - Tag Prefix
Type - Text
Value - ?
Attribute B
Name - Tag Number
Type - Number
Value - 1
10. Click Save
to save the symbol attributes, and then close the symbol file.
11. Select the original graphics you drew to create the tank, and then press DELETE.
Now you are ready to create a SmartLabel to display the symbol attributes you just added.
Create a SmartLabel Containing SmartText

1. Click Text Box
and type in your text. In the example, type in A-B in the text box.
2. Select the text box you created, and then click Create Symbol
3. Define the symbol origin.
4. From the Save as Symbol dialog box, type the symbol name. For this example, use the
name Inner_SmartLabel.sym.
SmartSketch displays the new symbol in the Symbol Explorer.
5. Click the Inner_SmartLabel symbol from the Symbol Explorer, and drag it to the toolbar
area to open the symbol file for editing.
6. With the text box selected, click Paragraph Alignment

alignment. For this example, select Center.
, and then select the text
7. Click Edit SmartText

8. Highlight the A in the SmartText Editor dialog box, and then set the Property, Format, and
Value fields for the attribute to display. For the example attribute A, enter the following:
Property - Tag Prefix
Value - ?
Format - String
9. Click Insert Field after entering the above fields for Attribute A.
10. Now highlight the B in the SmartText Editor dialog box, and then set the Property,
Format, and Value fields for the attribute to display. For the example attribute B, enter the
following:
526
Symbol Authoring
Property - Tag Number
Value - 1
Format - General Number
11. Click Insert Field after entering the above fields for Attribute B, and then click OK.
SmartSketch shows the values for A and B in the symbol.
12. To create the label, click Symbol Properties

on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar,
and then click the Behaviors tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box.
13. Click Label and Glue to target object options, and then click OK.
14. Click Save

, and then close the file.
15. Select the original text box in the SmartSketch document, and then press DELETE.
Create the Wrapper Symbol for Placement into SmartSketch

1. Select Inner_Graphics.sym, representing the tank, from the Symbol Explorer, and then
drag it into the document.
527
Symbol Authoring
2. Select Inner_SmartLabel.sym from the Symbol Explorer, drag it into the document, and
then attach it to the Inner_Graphics symbol.
You can check the SmartLabel by changing the attribute values in the Attribute
Viewer. The value of the text changes in the document.
3. Select both symbols, and then click Create Symbol
4. Define the origin.
5. From the Save as Symbol dialog box, type the symbol name, and then click Save. For this
example, type the name Wrapper.sym.
SmartSketch displays the new symbol in the Symbol Explorer.
6. Click the Wrapper symbol from the Symbol Explorer, and drag it to the toolbar area to
open the file for editing.
7. Click Symbol Properties
8. Click the Behaviors tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box.
528
Symbol Authoring
9. Set the Drop as field to Discrete Objects, and then click OK.
This behavior causes the wrapper symbol to be removed on placement, leaving the
individual objects (symbol and SmartLabel) in the drawing file so they can be selected and
edited separately.
10. Click Save
, and then close the file.
11. Select the original graphics, and then press DELETE.
You can now use this symbol in your work to modify and display symbol attribute values.
Integrating Programs with Your Symbol

You can kick off special processes from your symbol when a user performs an particular action,
such as double-clicking the symbol, dragging it, or even modifying the symbol. The special
process can be a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE file that you created in other programming software. You
can select an action from the Standard Actions tab on the Symbol Properties dialog box.
You can also specify special processes that you can execute when you select a symbol, click
the right mouse button, and then click a custom command on the shortcut menu. The command
names of the processes that you define appear at the top of the shortcut menu. You define
these processes on the Custom Actions tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box.
option.
Add Symbol Commands

Before you can take the following steps, you must create a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE in Visual Basic.
You must place the executable file in the following directory: <Drive Letter>:\Program
Files\SmartSketch\Addins\CustomActions\.
.
3. On the Custom Actions tab in the Name box, type the command name that you want to
appear on the shortcut menu.
The shortcut menu appears when you select the symbol in a document and then right
click.
4. In the Command box, select the name and path of the .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE file. This
command runs when you place a symbol and select the command on the shortcut menu.
You can also add commands to the shortcut menu by setting options on the Standard
Actions tab.
option.
529
Symbol Authoring
Run a Program That You Created from a Symbol

Before you can take the following steps, you must create a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE in Visual Basic.
You must place the executable file in one of the following directories, depending on what action
that you want to use to start the executable file. For example, if you want a special process to
run when you drop the symbol in a document, you must place the executable file in the
DropActions subdirectory.
<Drive Letter>:\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\DoubleClickActions
<Drive Letter>:\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\DropActions
<Drive Letter>:\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\ModifyActions
<Drive Letter>:\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\PropertyActions
<Drive Letter>:\Program Files\SmartSketch\Addins\RightClickActions
.
3. On the Standard Actions tab, select the options that you want. For example, if you want a
special process to run when you drop the symbol in a document, you must enter the ProgID
directly in the On Drop box.
The ProgID can be any valid executable (.dll, .exe, etc). Refer to the documentation for
Visual Basic for more information about ProgID's.
If you want to create special commands for the shortcut menu that appear when you
select the symbol in a document, you can set options on the Custom Actions tab.
To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring option.
Using Blank Color and Fill with Symbols

Symbols are actually groups of graphic elements with defined behaviors and properties that are
saved in an .sym document. You can enhance a symbol's display and performance during
symbol design and creation. Incorporating a fill with blank color into the symbol allows the
symbol, when placed, to mask out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the
symbol. This gives the appearance that the underlying lines have been broken at the edges of
the symbol. In reality, the lines still exist beneath the symbol.
You can apply a fill to any closed boundary. Placing many fills in a document can significantly
increase the size of the document. A single fill can be used for the symbol by filling an area that
represents the outer edges of the symbol and displaying the detailed graphic linework on top of
the fill.
The blank color can be used with any graphic object besides fill, so experiment and you might
find other uses for this masking capability.
option.
530
Symbol Authoring
Create a Symbol with a Fill for Masking

Before you begin, create a symbol with the outermost elements on a separate layer. If the
symbol has already been drawn, just select the elements that form the outer edges of the
symbol and move the select set to a new layer named Boundary.
1. Turn off all other layers in the symbol document, except the layer containing the boundary of
the symbol.
2. Create a layer named Fill. This helps to organize the elements that make up a symbol.
3. With the Fill layer active and the Boundary layer displayed, click the Fill button on the
Draw toolbar.
4. On the Fill ribbon bar, change the style to Solid, and then select the blank color from the
pallet.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The blank color is located in the lower right corner of the standard color pallet.
Click inside the bounding line elements to place the solid blank colored fill. You can see the
blank fill when grid display is turned on.
Click to select the fill.
With the fill selected, click the Send To Back button on the Change toolbar.
This pushes the blank fill to the back of the symbol and allows the detailed elements that
make up the interior of a symbol to display on top of the blank fill.
Turn on the display of the other layers containing interior graphics.
Save the symbol.
option.
Defining SmartPoints
SmartPoints are points that can serve up to three functions: connect points, drop points, and
drag points. The purpose depends on the symbol.
Connect points are points at which a connector attaches to a symbol. You can place connect
points in free space on any part of the document or on an element.
Define SmartPoints for a Symbol

2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoints Properties
. All the
SmartPoints appear in the document.
3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, set the properties for the SmartPoint.
4. Click Insert.
5. In the document, click to place the SmartPoint.
option.
See Also
Defining SmartPoints (on page 531)
Edit SmartPoints on a Symbol (on page 533)
SmartPoint Properties Command (on page 533)
531
Symbol Authoring
Place a SmartPoint with Connect Attributes

Any existing SmartPoints will appear in the document.

3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Connect point check box.
4. In the Connect point angles drop-down list, select the angle at which the connector should
attach to the SmartPoint.
5.
6.
7.
8.
You can also type a value in the Connect point angles box.
In the ToolTip box, enter the text that you want for the ToolTip that appears when you
attach a connector to the SmartPoint on the symbol.
Click Insert.
In the document, click on the symbol to place the SmartPoint.
Click Apply.
option.
Place a SmartPoint with Drag Attributes


3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Drag point check box.
4. In the Drag point order box, type a number to define the drag point order for the
SmartPoint.
5. Click Insert.
6. In the document, click on the symbol to place the SmartPoint.
7. Click Apply.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to place additional SmartPoints with drag point attributes.
Place a SmartPoint with Drop Attributes


3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Drop point check box.
4. In the Drop point angles drop-down list, select the angle at which the symbol should attach
to another object.
You can also type a value in the Drop point angles box.
5. In the ToolTip box, enter the text that you want for the ToolTip that appears when you
attach an object to the SmartPoint on the symbol.
6. Click Insert.
7. In the document, click on the symbol to place the SmartPoint.
532
Symbol Authoring
8. Click Apply.
option.
Edit SmartPoints on a Symbol

2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoint Properties
Any existing SmartPoints appear in the document.

3. In the document, click a SmartPoint. The SmartPoint's properties display on the SmartPoint
Properties dialog box.
4. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, modify the properties for the SmartPoint as
desired.
5. Click Apply.
option.
SmartPoint Properties Command

Places SmartPoints on a symbol. SmartPoints are points that can serve up to three functions:
connect points, drop points, and drag points. The purpose depends on the symbol.
Connect point attribute

Connect points are points at which a connector attaches to a symbol. You can place connect
points in free space on any part of the document or on an element.
You can attach connectors to symbols with the Connector button on the Draw or
Schematic toolbar.
Drag point attribute

A drag point is the point to which the pointer attaches for dragging a symbol. This attribute,
when combined with the drop point attribute, allows precise attachment between symbols.
Drop point attribute

Drop points allow for symbol-to-symbol connections. When you click a drag point on a symbol
and drag it over another symbol, the drop points appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears when
the drag point and drop point are exactly aligned. You can then attach the symbol to the other
with precision.
option.
533
Symbol Authoring
SmartPoint Properties Dialog Box

Behaviors Tab
Connect point - Assigns the connect point attribute to the SmartPoint.
Connect point angles - Defines the angle at which the connector line attaches to the connect
point on the symbol.
Connect point ToolTip - Specifies the ToolTip that appears when you attach a connector to a
connect point on the symbol.
Drop point - Assigns the drop point attribute to the SmartPoint.
Drop point angles - Defines the angle at which a dropped symbol attaches to the SmartPoint
on the symbol.
Drop point ToolTip - Allows you to define the ToolTip that appears on the drop point of the
symbol when you place it. You can use a drop point when you are placing a symbol on another
symbol. The ToolTip is useful for quickly displaying important information that you want a user to
know about the symbol.
For example, you could define a ToolTip for a network card symbol that displays the words
Network Card. If you attempt to drop the network card symbol near a hub symbol, the ToolTip
appears as a visual reminder of the type of symbol that you are placing. In drawing network
diagrams, you do not want to connect a network card symbol to a hub symbol.
Drag point - Assigns the drag point attribute to the SmartPoint.
Drag point order - Allows you to define the order that the drag points attach to the pointer when
you drag the symbol. You can cycle through the drag points when dragging the symbol by
pressing the Up or Down arrow keys on the keyboard.
Information and Format Tab

Style - Sets the style of the SmartPoint.
Color - Sets the color of the SmartPoint.
Width - Sets the size of the SmartPoint.
Layer - Sets the layer where the SmartPoint displays.
X - Specifies the x dimension of the SmartPoint.
Y - Specifies the y dimension of the SmartPoint.
option.
Symbol Lookup Tables

Symbol lookup tables allow you to drive parameters of a symbol using import data from a
spreadsheet, database, or any other ODBC data source. Lookup tables are ideal for use with
Ortho and Structural content. These imported values save time, allowing you to use a single key
column to specify numerous attribute and parameter values for a symbol.
The Lookup Table command takes a snapshot of the specified data source and generates an
.xml file containing the information in the data source. When you have generated the .xml file
containing the data, you can select a particular set of values for the selected symbols from a
combo box in the Attribute Viewer. This combo box contains the list of values in the key
column defined in the data source.
534
Symbol Authoring
option.
Set Up an ODBC Data Source

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click Start, point to Settings, and click Control Panel.

On Control Panel, double-click Administrative Tools.
On Administrative Tools, double-click Data Sources (ODBC).
On the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click the User DSN tab or the
System DSN tab, depending on the type of data source you want to use.
Refer to Microsoft Windows Help for more details on the different types of data
sources.
Click Add.
On the Create New Data Source dialog box, select a driver for the data source.
Click Finish. The system displays the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box.
Enter the necessary information on the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box.
The ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box contains different settings for each driver
type.
9. On the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box, click OK to save the changes and close the
dialog box, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without saving the changes.
10. On the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click OK to close the dialog box.
Generate a Lookup Table

1. Set up an ODBC Data Source (on page 535).
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
In SmartSketch, on the Symbol Authoring toolbar, click Lookup Table

.
Select the option that you want from the Data Source list.
Select the option that you want in the Table list.
Drag columns from the Table list to the Driven By column in the Data Map.
Double-click an entry in the Driven By column to specify it as the unique Key Column.
Click OK.
Click Save. The software writes the contents of the selected table into an .xml file.
Each entry in the Key Column list must be unique.
option.
535
Symbol Authoring
Lookup Table Command

Imports data from an open database connectivity (ODBC) data source to drive values for
symbol parameters and attributes.
option.
See Also
Lookup Table Dialog Box (on page 536)
Lookup Table Dialog Box

Allows you to assign data sources and tables to use with the Lookup Tables command, to save
information to an .xml file, and to open existing .xml files for editing.
Select Data Source - Specifies the open database connectivity (ODBC) Data Source.
Select a Table - Specifies the table from the ODBC Data Source.
Data Map - Specifies the parameters and attributes to use for the symbol.
Attribute/parameter - Lists the attributes and parameters for the symbol.
Driven by - Displays the column from the data source that drives an attribute or parameter.
Drag columns to Driven by - Lists the columns in the specified table. You can drag these
column names to the Driven by column in the Data map.
Define Key - Defines the unique Key Column used to differentiate among the various symbol
parameter sets.
Clear Column - Deletes the selected value in the Driven by column.
Open - Opens an existing .xml file and displays the information in the Lookup Table dialog box
for editing.
Save As... - Saves the information from the data source to a new .xml file.
536
Symbol Authoring
OK - Saves the information from the data source to an .xml file.
Cancel - Closes the Lookup Table dialog box without saving the information.
Help - Displays Help for the dialog box.
option.
537
Symbol Authoring
538
SECTION 19
Using the Internet

You can view the World Wide Web from within SmartSketch with a special tool called the
Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer is available only if you have installed Internet Explorer
5.0 or later. After you click the Symbol Explorer icon on the Main toolbar, the Symbol
Explorer appears on the right of document window. You can type the URL or directory path of
an HTML page in the Address Box and press Enter to view the HTML page.
See Also
Hyperlinks (on page 539)
Open a Document Inside the Internet Explorer (on page 539)
Open a Document Inside the Internet Explorer

1. In the Internet Explorer, click File > Open.
2. On the Open dialog box, browse to and select the document that you want to open inside
the Internet Explorer. Because SmartSketch is an ActiveX document, its toolbars and menus
appear inside the Internet Explorer, along with the contents of the document that you
selected.
You can also drag a SmartSketch document from the Windows Explorer to the Internet
Explorer. The document automatically opens inside the Explorer.
Hyperlinks
You may want to link an element or object in a document to other documents, such as a web
page. The Hyperlink command on the Main toolbar is used to create, edit, and follow hyperlink
addresses attached to objects in a document.
You can also click Insert > Hyperlink to activate the Hyperlinks command.
See Also
Hyperlink Command (on page 540)
Edit a Hyperlink (on page 543)
Delete a Hyperlink (on page 541)
Insert a Hyperlink
1. On the Main toolbar, click Hyperlink
You can also click Insert > Hyperlink.
2. Click the object or element to insert a hyperlink and to display the Add Hyperlink dialog
box.
3. Click the Source field and type the URL or directory path of a HTML page.
You can also link to files on the intranet or your computer. For example, you can type
the following path: D:\MYFILE.htm.
539
Using the Internet
You can also click the Browse button

to open the Link to File dialog box and
navigate to the file you wish to link.
4. Click Add. By default, SmartSketch inserts the URL or filename in the Name field.
If you link to a SmartSketch document which contains multiple sheets, you are
prompted to select which sheet to link to.
5. Click the Name field and type a logical hyperlink name, if desired.
6. Click the Set as default link check box to identify this link as the default link for the object.
7. Click OK to accept the hyperlink.
To stop the Hyperlink command, press Esc.

You cannot add hyperlinks to elements contained in nested symbols.
While in the Add Hyperlink dialog box, repeat steps 3 through 6 to add any number of
hyperlinks, URL addresses, or file paths to an element or object. If you add more than one
hyperlink, you must choose a link as the default.
Right click on any drawing object to display a list of associated hyperlinks.
The text which appears in the Name field will display as a tooltip
when the mouse passes over the hyperlinked object. The hyperlink name will also appear
in the shortcut menu when you right-click on the object.
See Also
Hyperlink Command
Adds hyperlinks to objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines, circles,
ellipses, and groups. You can enter a link to a file or a web page on the Internet.
See Also
Insert a Hyperlink (on page 539)
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box

Inserts a hyperlink to a selected object, symbol, text, connector, or element.
Source - Specifies the URL or directory path of a HTML page. (http://. . . ) for the hyperlink.
(Browse) - Opens the Link to File dialog box. From here you can navigate to the file you
wish to link.
Add - Adds the hyperlink to the selected object.
Name - Specifies a logical name for the hyperlink. The text which appears in the Name field will
display as a tooltip when the mouse passes over the hyperlinked object. The hyperlink name will
also appear in the shortcut menu when you right-click on the object.
Set as default hyperlink - Identifies the link as the default link for the object.
OK - Closes the dialog box and saves the hyperlink.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without saving the hyperlink.
540
Using the Internet

See Also
Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Removes hyperlinks from objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines,
circles, ellipses, and groups.
To see the shortcut menu, click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar, and then right-click.
See Also
Follow a Hyperlink (on page 542)
Delete a Hyperlink
You can also select this command from the Insert menu. You can press Esc to stop
the command.
2. Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists.

On the shortcut menu, click Remove Link.
On the Select Link To Remove dialog box, click the hyperlink that you want to remove.
Click Remove.
In the Remove Hyperlink? dialog box, click the OK button.
The Select Link to Remove dialog box only displays if an object has more than one
hyperlink assigned to it. If an object has only one hyperlink, the Remove Hyperlink? dialog box
displays after you select Remove Link from the shortcut menu.
See Also
Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 541)
Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Allows you to open the web page or file at which the hyperlink is pointing.
To see the shortcut menu, you must first click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar, and then
right-click.
See Also
541
Using the Internet
Follow a Hyperlink
You can also select this command from the Insert menu. You can press Esc to stop the
command.
Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink. A tooltip displays the
name of the default link.
The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists. You can also click Show Links
on the shortcut menu. All the elements or objects with hyperlinks highlight.
2. Click the left mouse button to follow the hyperlink.
When an object has more than one hyperlink, the default hyperlink can be set via the Set as
default link check box. If you do not select a default hyperlink, SmartSketch uses the first
hyperlink assigned to the object as the default.
If the hyperlink points to a SmartSketch document, then SmartSketch opens the document.
The browser opens all other documents.
See Also
Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 541)
Show Links Command (Shortcut Menu)

Displays all the hyperlinks in a document. When you click this command, all the elements or
objects that have a hyperlink are highlighted.
To access this command, click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar and then right-click.
See Also
542
Using the Internet
Edit a Hyperlink
You can also select this command from the Insert menu. You can press Esc to stop
the command.
2. Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink.
The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists.
3. On the shortcut menu, click Edit Link.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Right-click to display the shortcut menu. On the shortcut menu, you can also use Add
Link, Edit Link, and Remove Link to modify the hyperlink.
On the Select Link To Edit dialog box, click the hyperlink to edit.
Click Edit.
On the Edit Hyperlink dialog box, click either the Source or the Name field and type your
changes to the hyperlink.
Click the Make default link check box to identify this hyperlink as the default link for the
drawing object.
Click OK.
The Select Link to Edit dialog box only displays when an object has more than one
hyperlink assigned to it. If an object has only one hyperlink, the Edit Hyperlink dialog box
displays after you click Edit Link.
See Also
Edit Link Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 543)
Edit Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Allows you to change the web addresses or paths for hyperlinks that are applied to objects,
symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines, circles, ellipses, and groups.
To see the shortcut menu, you must first click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar and then
right-click.
See Also
543
Using the Internet
544
SECTION 20
Working with Raster Images

Images created by lines of pixels are called raster images, and the code that represents the
pixels in the raster image is called raster data. The format of the raster data in the document
determines how the pixels are arranged when the image is displayed.
Raster data is unintelligent. A line segment in a raster image cannot be manipulated as a line
segment. Rather, it must be manipulated as the collection of pixels that form the line segment.
A vector data document is a collection of coherent, geometric elements. Vector data is
intelligent. A line segment in a vector file can be manipulated as a line segment.
A vector data object is an indivisible entity. A raster image, by contrast, is composed of pixels,
arranged to give the appearance of lines, shapes, and characters. When zoomed out, a raster
image appears as contiguous lines and shapes. However, if you zoom in, it becomes apparent
that a raster image consists of individual foreground pixels, represented as small squares on the
screen.
Displaying Raster Images

Image Integrator allows you to display and manipulate raster images along with the vector data
on the drawing sheet. When you save the current document, which contains vector graphics,
you can save a link to a raster image along with it.
This structure can be useful in many ways. For example, if a shopping center is planned for a
piece of property, and proposals are sought for the design of the shopping center, an aerial
photograph may be taken of the property. The photograph can then be converted into a raster
image. Proposals can be submitted as vector documents that each contain a link to the original
raster image. In this way, different proposals for the shopping center can be easily evaluated,
with each proposal starting from the same raster image of the property.
Inserting an Image
To insert a raster image, you must first install Image Integrator using Add-Ins on the Tools
menu. If you do not see the add-in listed in the Add-In Manager, you must run the Custom
setup to install the Image Integrator (on page 25) option.
After installing Image Integrator, you can then insert the raster image using the Image
command on the Insert menu. You can only link the image; you cannot embed it. To edit
various properties of the image border, you can select the image and click Properties on the
shortcut menu. You can also insert raster images, edit their properties, and make other
modifications using the commands on the Image Integrator ribbon.
Positioning an Image
After you insert a raster image into a document, you can use Position to align the image with a
vector element or a group of elements. You can move, scale, rotate, and skew a source image
to match a target image or vector frame. All alignment modifications are made by placing up to
three source points and three target points. You can define source points by clicking and
dragging or by a single click on the source image. To use Position, select an image and then
click Position on the Image Integrator toolbar.
545

Defining Source and Target Points by Clicking and Dragging
Clicking and dragging (on the image border or within the borders) allows you to drag the image
frame to the needed target location. When the image is released the source image will
reposition, and display a crosshair, representing the location of the first source point. A second
point will be required on the source image to reposition (rotate and/or scale) the image. Click
and drag on (or within) the image border, move to the needed location and release. The source
image will be repositioned, scaled, and rotated about the two points. The location where the
source image is released represents the corresponding target points. These target points can
be another image file, a vector element, or nothing at all. The source image will be skewed
about the two points.
Defining Source and Target Points Using a Single Click

When you define source points using single clicks, you must also use single clicks to define the
target points. Depending on where the source and target points are placed, you can use this
method to move, scale, rotate, and skew the source image to match a target image.
See Also
Insert a Raster Image (on page 546)
Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image (on page 551)
Fill an Image Area with Color (on page 553)
Save Changes to a Linked Image (on page 547)
Redo Changes to Images (on page 548)
Invert Colors in an Image (on page 553)
Insert a Raster Image

1. Click Insert > Image.
2. In the Look In field, select the directory containing the raster image you want to insert.
3. In the File Name field, type the name of the raster image or select it from the list of raster
images.
You can narrow the list of available raster files by selecting the file type(s) from the
list.
4. The image frame will dynamically attach to the mouse cursor. You can position the frame
and click to place the image at a 1:1 scale. Click and drag to place the image at a
user-defined scale.
All inserted images are "linked". Embedded images are not allowed.
You can also insert a raster image using the Insert Image command on the Image
Integrator toolbar.
To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator option.
See Also
Image Command (on page 547)
546
Image Command
Places a raster image into your document. This command is available on the Insert menu
and on the Image Integrator toolbar.
Save Changes to a Linked Image

When you make changes to a linked raster image, the software does not save changes to the
image source file when you save your document. If you want to save changes to the image
source file, you must use the Save Selected Image(s) command on the Image Integrator
toolbar.
1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images that you want to save.
2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Save Selected Image(s)
The software saves changes to the source files for the selected images. Once you save
changes to the image source file, you cannot undo them.
The software saves changes to the source files for the selected images. Once you save
changes to the image source file, you cannot undo them.
Save Selected Image(s) Command

Saves changes you make to the raster image in the image source file. You can select
multiple images and then use this command to save changes to all their source files.
Undo Changes to Images

To undo the most recent reversible change made to the image, click Image Undo
Image Integrator toolbar.
on the
The Image Undo command is unavailable when there are no edits to undo or when edits
made to the raster image cannot be reversed.
See Also
Image Undo Command (on page 548)
547
Image Undo Command

Reverses the last change made to the raster image. The Image Undo command reverses
or purge raster data edits and raster transformations. The Image Undo command is unavailable
when there are no edits to undo or when edits made to the raster image cannot be reversed.
See Also
Image Redo Command (on page 548)
Redo Changes to Images
To reverse the most recent Undo change to a raster image, click Image Redo
Image Integrator toolbar.
The Image Redo command only brings back the most recent Image Undo action.
The Image Redo command is unavailable when there are no commands that have been
reversed using the Image Undo command.
on the
Image Redo Command

Reverses the last change most recent undo command. The Image Redo command only
brings back the most recent change that was reversed. The Image Redo command is
unavailable when there are no commands that have been reversed using the Image Undo
command.
See Also
Image Undo Command (on page 548)
Select a Rectangular Area of an Image

1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images on which you want to define a select
area.
2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Rectangular Select Area
To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25)
option.
3. Drag to define the rectangular select area on the image. When you drag the crosshair to
define a rectangular select area, a solid rectangular outline dynamically appears as you
drag.
You can use the Alt, Shift, and Space Bar keys to modify the default behavior of the
Rectangular Select Area command.
4. Release the mouse button to end the rectangular select area. When you complete the
rectangle, the solid select area outline becomes a dotted outline.
548

As you create a select area with the Rectangular Select Area command, you can use
the following modifier keys to change the default behavior of your selection:
Keyboard Modifier
Result
Shift
Constrains the select area to a square with the

same aspect ratio.
Alt
Adds a new area to an existing select area (union).
Space Bar
Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing

select area (difference).
Space Bar + Alt
Designates the overlapping area as the new select

area (intersection).
Shift + Alt
Constrains the select area to a square and adds a

new area to the existing select area.
Shift + Space Bar
Constrains the select area to a square and

subtracts the overlapping area from the existing
select area.
Shift + Space Bar +

Alt

designates the overlapping area as a new select
area.
Rectangular Select Area Command

Creates a select area in a raster image by drawing a rectangle around pixels that you
define.
A select area is a user-defined area of individual pixels or groups of pixels within an image. You
can create a select area for editing purposes.
When you drag the crosshair to define a rectangular select area, a solid rectangular outline
dynamically appears as you drag. When you reach the desired size, release the mouse button
to create the select area. The solid select area outline then becomes a dotted outline.
As you create a select area with the Rectangular Select Area command, you can use the
following modifier keys to change the default behavior of your selection:
Keyboard Modifier
Result
Shift
Constrains the select area to a square with the

same aspect ratio.
Alt
Adds a new area to an existing select area

(union).
Space Bar
Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing

select area (difference).
Space Bar + Alt
Designates the overlapping area as the new

select area (intersection).
Shift + Alt
Constrains the select area to a square and adds a

new area to the existing select area.
549

Shift + Space Bar

subtracts the overlapping area from the existing
select area.
Shift + Space Bar +

Alt

designates the overlapping area as a new select
area.
See Also
Polygonal Select Area Command (on page 551)
Select a Polygon-Shaped Area of an Image

1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images on which you want to define a select
area.
2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Polygonal Select Area
.
To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25)
option.
3. Click to define the first point of the polygon select area. When you select the first point, a
dynamically drawn solid line connects the first point to the cursor.
4. Click to define additional points to define the shape of the polygon select area. As you
define additional points, the software dynamically displays a solid outline of the polygon.
While drawing a polygon-shaped select area, you can back up a point at a time using
the Backspace key. When you press the Backspace key, the last line segment in the
solid outline is deleted, and you can continue creating the select area from the previous
point. You can continue pressing the Backspace key until you are at an appropriate
point to begin defining the polygon again.
You can also use the Alt and space bar keys to modify the default behavior of the
Polygonal Select Area command.
5. Right-click to end the polygon. When you complete the polygon, the solid select area outline
becomes a dotted outline.
As you create a select area with the Polygonal Select Area command, you can use the
following modifier keys to change the behavior of your selection:
Keyboard Modifier
Result
Alt
Space Bar
Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select

area (difference).
Space Bar + Alt
Designates the overlapping area as the new select

area (intersection).
The Shift key is not a valid modifier for the Polygonal Select Area command.
See Also
Polygonal Select Area Command (on page 551)
550
Polygonal Select Area Command

Creates a select area in a raster image by drawing a polygon around pixels that you define.
A select area is a user-defined area of individual pixels or groups of pixels within an image. You
can create a select area for editing purposes.
Following the first point, click the points to define the polygon. Points are placed when you
release the mouse button. To remove a point or back up, press the Backspace key. Right-click
to end the polygon. The solid select area outline then becomes a dotted outline.
As you create a select area with the Polygonal Select Area command, you can use the
following modifier keys to change the behavior of your selection:
Keyboard
Modifier
Result
Alt
Space Bar
Subtracts the overlapping area from the existing select

area (difference).
Space Bar + Alt
Designates the overlapping area as the new select area

(intersection).
The Shift key is not a valid modifier for the Polygonal Select Area command.
See Also
Rectangular Select Area Command (on page 549)
Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image

Select the image or images for which you want to adjust the contrast and brightness.
You can select an area of an image using the Rectangular Select Area and Polygonal
Select Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar after you select the image that you
want.
1. Click Contrast and Brightness
on the Image Integrator toolbar.
2. In the Contrast and Brightness dialog box, make changes to the contrast and brightness
settings by dragging the sliders or clicking in the grid.
As you move the two slider bars in the grid, the corresponding values in the Contrast
and Brightness boxes change.
In the grid, the horizontal line represents the brightness of the raster image, and the
vertical line represents the contrast of the image.
3. To review settings in the Preview window, click Preview Current Settings.
4. To store the new contrast and brightness settings, click Store.
You can also change brightness and contrast values by typing the values directly into the
Contrast and Brightness boxes.
To change both the contrast and brightness at the same time, drag the intersection of the
sliders to a new position, or click the new position in the grid.
551
By default, the intersection of the two sliders in the grid is always the center of the grid. The
two sliders appear in white. When they are moved, a black non-editable outline appears to
show the sliders' default position.
To view only the original image in the Preview window, click View Original Image.
To view the results of the last stored settings in the Preview window, click Preview Stored
Settings. This option is only available if you stored gradation settings previously.
Contrast and Brightness Command

Modifies the contrast and/or brightness of an image. You can modify these two attributes
individually using the two-dimensional grid or the edit boxes in the Contrast and Brightness
dialog box.
The 2-D grid also allows you to modify contrast and brightness together by clicking anywhere in
the grid. The intersection of the two lines moves to the point you click. You can also select the
intersection of the two lines and dragging it within the grid to adjust the brightness and contrast
at the same time.
For more information, see Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box (on page 552).
To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator (on page 25) options.
See Also
Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box

Modifies the contrast and/or brightness of an image.
Dialog Box Options

Contrast and Brightness Grid - Allows you to modify the contrast and/or brightness of an
image by dragging the horizontal and vertical lines in the grid. The horizontal line represents the
brightness of the raster image, and the vertical line represents the contrast of the image. You
can also modify the contrast and brightness at the same time by clicking anywhere in the grid to
move the intersection of the two lines. By default, the intersection of the two sliders in the grid is
always the center of the grid. The two sliders appear in white. When they are moved, a black
non- editable outline appears to show the sliders' default position.
As you move the sliders, the values in the Contrast and Brightness boxes for both attributes
dynamically change.
Contrast - Specifies the contrast for the raster image. You can enter a value directly in the
Contrast box to change the contrast.
When you type a value, the Contrast slider in the grid automatically moves to reflect the new
value. If you move the Contrast slider or both sliders in the grid, the value automatically updates
in the Contrast box.
Brightness - Specifies the brightness of the raster image. You can enter a value directly in the
Brightness box to change the brightness. When you type a value, the Brightness slider in the
grid automatically moves to reflect the new value. If you move the Brightness slider or both
sliders in the grid, the value automatically updates in the Brightness box.
View Original Image - Displays the image using original gradation value settings in the Preview
window.
Preview Current Settings - Displays the image using new gradation value settings in the
Preview window.
552

Preview Stored Settings - Displays the image using stored gradation value settings in the
Preview window. This option is only available if you stored gradation values previously.
Store - Stores the current gradation value settings.
See Also
Contrast and Brightness Command (on page 552)
Invert Colors in an Image

1. Select the image or images that you want to invert.
You can select an area of an image using the Rectangular Select Area and
Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar after you select the
image that you want.
2. Click Invert
on the Image Integrator toolbar. Image pixel values are inverted.
Inverting the colors in a binary image swaps all foreground and background pixel values.
Inverting the colors in a positive continuous tone image to a negative converts the
brightness values for all pixels to their inverse values. For example, a value of 90% converts
to 10%.
Inverting the colors in a negative continuous tone image to a positive converts the
brightness values for all pixels to their inverse values. For example, a value of 10% converts
to 90%.
Invert Command
Creates a negative image of the selected raster image, replacing each pixel color with its
opposite on the color wheel. You can invert both grayscale and color images.
If an area is selected in the image, the invert conversion applies only to the select area, and
changes are applied directly to the image.
Fill an Image Area with Color

1. Select the image that you want to modify.
2. Select an area of the image using the Rectangular Select Area and Polygonal Select
Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar. By default, the entire image is selected.
3. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Fill
.
4. In the Fill dialog box, click Edit to select the color that you want to use to fill the image
area.
5. Under Opacity, drag the slider to define the level of transparency you want for the fill color.
As you drag the slider, the opacity value in the Value box changes.
553

6. To fill the selected area with the selected color, click OK.
Opacity defines the degree of transparency of the fill color. For example, 100% opacity is a
solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95%
opacity is 5% transparent.
You can also define the opacity for the fill by typing the percentage in the Value box.
See Also
Fill Command
Fills the select area with the selected fill color.
You can also set the opacity of the fill. Setting the opacity allows you to fill the select area with a
certain degree of transparency. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than
100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent.
See Also
Fill Dialog Box (on page 554)
Fill Dialog Box

Specifies the fill color and opacity for the fill.
Dialog Box Options

Fill color - Specifies the current fill color. You can change the fill color by clicking Edit.
Edit - Allows you to select a new fill color. Clicking Edit displays the standard Windows Color
dialog box to allow you to select from existing colors or define your own custom color.
Select opacity - Specifies the opacity for the fill color. To change the opacity, drag the slider bar
to the left or right. As you drag the slider, the opacity value in the Value box changes. Opacity
defines the degree of transparency of the fill color. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill.
Anything other than 100% contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5%
transparent.
Value - Allows you to enter the opacity value for the fill color. If you enter a value here, the
Select opacity slider moves to reflect the new value. Opacity defines the degree of
transparency of the fill color. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100%
contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent.
Position an Image by Dragging
554
1. With the Select Tool
active, select the raster image.
2. Select the Position
command from the Image Integrator toolbar.

3. Click the image (on or within the image border) for source point one and drag the displayed
outline to the appropriate position and release the mouse button at target point one.
When you drop the image in its new location, source point one (S1) displays on the
image.
4. Click the image again for source point two (on or within the image border), and drag the
displayed outline to scale and rotate the image to the appropriate angle and release the
mouse button for target point two.
During a drag operation, hold down the Ctrl key to restrict movement to 45 degree
increments for placing the second target point. You can also hold down the Shift key to restrict
movement in placing the second target point.
Clicking and dragging produces an outline of the source image that contains a crosshair,
representing the source image being dragged to the target location.
The second point entered on the source image enables you to scale and rotate the image by
clicking and dragging.
See Also
Position Command (Shortcut Menu) (on page 555)
Position an Image by Clicking (on page 556)
Position Command (Shortcut Menu)

Positions an image in a document. You can move, scale, rotate, and skew a source image to
match a target image or vector frame. All alignment modifications are made by placing up to
three source points and three target points. You can define source points by clicking and
dragging or by a single click on the source image.
555

To select this command on the shortcut menu, you must first select a raster image and
then right-click.
Position an Image by Clicking

1. Click Select
from the vertical toolbar.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the Position

command from the Image Integrator toolbar.
Single click the source image to select source point 1.
Single click the target location to place target point 1.
Single click the source image again to select source point 2.
Single click another location on the target to place target point 2.
When you use single clicks, the image is not moved into position until the second target
point is defined.
You can to exit the command by right-clicking the mouse or by pressing the Esc key.
Position Command
Positions a raster image in a document. You can move, scale, rotate, and skew a source
image to match a target image or vector frame. All alignment modifications are made by placing
up to three source points and three target points. You can define source points by clicking and
dragging or by a single click on the source image.
View Image Properties

1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images for which you want to view properties.
2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Image Properties
556
If you select multiple images, only the fields that have a common property for all the
selected images display information in the Image Properties dialog box.
You cannot edit image properties.
See Also
Image Properties Command (on page 557)
Image Properties Command

Allows you to view the properties of a raster image. Image properties are not editable.
If multiple images are selected, only the fields that have a common property for all the selected
images display information.
See Also
Image Properties Dialog Box (on page 557)
General Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) (on page 557)
Image Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the fill color and opacity for the fill.
See Also
Details Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) (on page 557)
General Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box)

Source file - Specifies the name of the source file for the raster image.
Type - Specifies the image type, such as BMP, TIFF, JPG, and so on, and data type of the
image, such as binary, RGB, or grayscale.
Location - Specifies the storage location for the image source file.
Resolution - Specifies the resolution for the image source file in pixels/inch or pixels/centimeter
and microns.
Size - Specifies the file size of the image source file on disk.
Created - Specifies the creation date for the image source file.
Modified - Specifies the last modification date for the image source file. If you make changes to
the image in the product and click Save Image on the toolbar, this modification date updates
with the date you saved the image.
See Also
Image Properties Dialog Box (on page 557)
Details Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) (on page 557)
Details Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box)

Source file - Specifies the name of the source file for the raster image.
557

Width - Specifies the actual width of the raster image.
Height - Specifies the actual height of the raster image.
Number of lines - Specifies the number of lines in the selected image.
Pixels per line - Specifies the number of pixels per line in the selected image.
Orientation - The scanline orientation of the selected image, such as ULH, URH, and so on.
See Also
General Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box) (on page 557)
Erase Part of An Image

1. Select the image that you want to modify.
2. Select an area of the image using the Rectangular Select Area and Polygonal Select
Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar. By default, the entire image is selected.
3. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Image Erase
If you do not select an area of the image, the entire image is erased.
See Also
Image Erase Command (on page 558)
Image Erase Command

Erases the selected image or selected edit area. By default, the entire image is selected;
however, you can use the Rectangular Select Area Command (on page 549) and the Polygonal
Select Area Command (on page 551) to create a select area in the raster image.
See Also
Erase Part of An Image (on page 558)
Remove Speckles from an Image

There are three ways to designate speckle size.
Edit the size field on the Speckle Remove dialog box.

1. Select a binary image.
2. Click Speckle Remove
on the Image Integrator toolbar. The selected image displays
in a Preview window.
3. On the Speckle Remove dialog box, select the unit of measure from the Speckle size
drop-down list. When you change the units of measure, the speckle size automatically
converts to the new units.
4. Click OK.
558

Draw a box to determine the maximum speckle size to remove
3. Click inside the Preview window and drag to define the box. The Speckle size field
automatically updates when you draw the box.
4. Click OK.
Select a representative speckle in the image.

3. Hold down the Ctrl key and select a representative speckle inside the Preview window. The
Speckle size field automatically updates when you select a representative speckle.
The cursor changes to an eyedropper.
4. Click OK.
Speckle Remove Command

Removes all unwanted areas of speckle in a binary image. Speckles are small, unwanted
areas of foreground data. To remove a speckle, the software looks for a rectangular boundary
around a potential speckle. The boundary is limited by the maximum speckle size you specify.
You can specify speckle size 3 different ways.
Edit the size field on the Speckle Remove dialog box.
Draw a box to determine the maximum speckle size to be removed.
Select a representative speckle in the image.
See Also
Speckle Remove Dialog Box

Speckle size - Displays default size and units. If inches are selected as the units on the Units
Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 73), the default size is .050 in. If centimeters are
selected as units, the default size is 0.127 cm. If any other units are selected, the default size is
40.0 pixels.
You can change the units of measure at any time. Available units on the drop-down list are
inches, centimeters, and pixels. When you change the units of measure, the speckle size
automatically converts to the new units.
Preview control pad - Controls what is displayed in the preview window. When you define the
speckle size, you can store this setting or go back to the initial setting. To preview the command
again, you draw another rectangle, select an existing hole or edit the size of the field, and select
the Preview button again.
559
Warp an Image Using Multiple Points

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the image to be warped.

Click Multi-Point Warp
on the Image Integrator toolbar.
On the Multi-Point Warp Ribbon (on page 560), enter the first source point.
Select the desired zoom factor and the warp model.
Click Warp Options to open the Warp Options Dialog Box (on page 561).
Collect the desired number of points for the warp.
Click Finish to execute the warp.
See Also
Multi-Point Warp Command (on page 560)
Multi-Point Warp Command

Performs linear and non-linear transformations of images.
A warp is a two-dimensional topological transformation in which a source area is fitted to a
destination area. Usually, a warp is used to counteract some undesirable influence on the
original raster data. For example, a satellite photograph which includes asymmetrical curvature
may need to be fitted to a square grid for mapping purposes.
Essentially, a warp is a reverse interpolation to remove unwanted distortions and arrive at a
desired raster data form. The source is the raw, distorted data, and the destination is the desired
data after the warp operation. The relationship between source and destination is specified by
the warp model and by a series of source/destination point pairs. These pairs specify the
relationship between the original drawing and the drawing after the warp.
Warping changes the scale of the drawing. Therefore, if you have already determined the
position of your raster drawing in relation to your vector drawing, you will lose the previously set
scale when you warp.
See Also
Multi-Point Warp Ribbon (on page 560)
Multi-Point Warp Ribbon

Options - Opens the Warp Options dialog box in which you can define the warp
parameters, load point pairs, and/or save point pairs. In order to perform a warp, you must
locate two or more pairs of points.
Cancel/Finish - Allows you to cancel or execute the command. Once you have entered the
minimum number of required pairs of points (as determined by the Model type), the Finish
button is enabled. Clicking Finish warps the selected raster image based on your input. You
can, however, click Cancel at any time.
Zoom - Allows you to modify the zoom factor for the zoom window. When the Zoom button is
clicked off, the Zoom factor list is disabled; when the Zoom button is clicked on, the Zoom
factor list is active. You can choose a zoom factor from 1 to 10. When Zoom is enabled and
you click on an image, a new window opens to show you the area that you zoomed in on by the
amount specified in the Zoom factor list. This allows you to refine the location of the point you
placed in the main image. If Zoom is on, you must place perform a "refining" click in the Zoom
560

window to get the point selected and to hide the Zoom window. The software will then prompt
you for the next point. Clicking the next point again opens the Zoom window where you can
refine the selected point. This sequence continues until you click Finish on the Multi-Point
Warp ribbon.
Model - Specifies the model (Helmert, 1st Order Polynomial, or Projective) on which you
want to base the image transformation or warp. Projective is not listed as a model type unless
Resample is selected on the Warp Options Dialog Box (on page 561). The model you select
determines the minimum number of required source/destination points, as well as how the
selected image is transformed.
Helmert - This model, sometimes referred to as an Orthogonal warp, performs a general
data file rotation, X and Y axes translations, single value scaling, and orthogonality of
perimeters. This warp is proportional and cannot be "rubber sheeted". The minimum number
of points is 2, and will also create residuals if more than 2 point pairs are selected. In effect,
the Helmert warp operates more like an interactive scale and rotate function. No distortion is
created with this method. General use includes engineering type applications.
1st Order Polynomial - This model uses a first order polynomial to mathematically best fit
the data. This is the stereotypical "rubber sheet" warping. A minimum of three point pairs will
ensure that the source/destination points are placed exactly, while other portions of the
drawing will be placed as close as mathematically possible.
With 3 point pairs, there will be no residuals (errors).
Projective - Projective warping will determine exact placement of 4 control points (corners).
Although this warp is categorized as a Linear warp, second order polynomials are used to
determine the location of the fourth point. This model eliminates the "best fit" results of Affine
warping when applied to rectangular data. While accuracy of the fourth point is substantial,
the time required to calculate results using this model is also substantial an may deter use
with large data sets.
With all models, selection of more than the minimum number of points will introduce residuals
(errors). For warps with no residuals, use the following number of point pairs: 1st Order
Polynomial (3); Helmert (2); Projective (4).Keep in mind that no residuals does not necessarily
produce the best or desired results.
Warp Options Dialog Box

Warp Model - The default warp model is Helmert for the first invocation of the Multi-Point Warp
command. The last used model becomes the next default model. The Warp Model dialog box
setting automatically changes the associated ribbon bar setting, and vice-versa
Resample - The default is unchecked. When Resample is unchecked, the Warp command is
display only, meaning that warp settings are applied only to the image display and are not
saved. This takes less time and is useful for viewing and printing. When Resample is
unchecked, Helmert and 1st Order Polynomial are the only two Warp Model options available.
When Resample is checked, warp settings are applied to the image itself when you save it.
When checked, there are three Warp Model options available (Helmert, 1st Order Polynomial,
and Projective).
Helmert - This model, sometimes referred to as an Orthogonal warp, performs a general
data file rotation, X and Y axes translations, single value scaling, and orthogonality of
perimeters. This warp is proportional and cannot be "rubber sheeted". The minimum number
of points is 2, and will also create residuals if more than 2 point pairs are selected. In effect,
the Helmert warp operates more like an interactive scale and rotate function. No distortion is
created with this method. General use includes engineering type applications.
561
1st Order Polynomial - This model uses a first order polynomial to mathematically best fit
the data. This is the stereotypical "rubber sheet" warping. A minimum of three point pairs will
ensure that the source/destination points are placed exactly, while other portions of the
drawing will be placed as close as mathematically possible.
With 3 point pairs, there will be no residuals (errors).
Projective - Projective warping will determine exact placement of 4 control points (corners).
Although this warp is categorized as a Linear warp, second order polynomials are used to
determine the location of the fourth point. This model eliminates the "best fit" results of Affine
warping when applied to rectangular data. While accuracy of the fourth point is substantial,
the time required to calculate results using this model is also substantial an may deter use
with large data sets.
Points - Automatically updates with the appropriate number of points as different warp models
are selected. You cannot edit this field, however you can collect as many points as you desire
(over the minimum required) for any warp model.
Point Number - Displays the Source and Destination point pairs. When you place your first set
of points (Source/Destination), it is considered to be point number 1 (point pair). The second set
is point number 2, and so on.
Source (in) - Displays the X and Y value for each Source point. The values are displayed in
inches.
Destination (wu) - Displays the X and Y value for each Destination point. The values are
displayed in working units.
Residual - Displays the X and Y value for each point's residual error. The residual error for each
point pair represents the error involved in modifying the Source point to its corresponding
Destination point.
Mean square error - Displays the measure of how well the transformation model selected fits
the point pairs defined. It is the average of the individual point errors (divided by the Degrees of
Freedom).
Delete - Allows you to delete a point pair from the points window. When a point pair has been
defined and highlighted in the points window the Delete button is enabled. Selecting the Delete
button causes the highlighted point pair to be removed from the points window, and all the
remaining points will be reassigned the next number available (incremented by 1 or however
many point pairs were deleted). For example, if you have 3 point pairs defined, and delete point
pair 1, point pair 2 becomes the new 1, and point pair 3 becomes 2. If you collect another pair, it
becomes point pair 3.
You can delete multiple point pairs with the Delete button. After highlighting the first point
pair to be deleted, holding down the Ctrl key allows you to select any combination of other point
pairs. Holding the Shift key selects all the point pairs from the first one highlighted to the second
one. This works exactly like selecting files in Windows Explorer.
Load - Allows you to load previously defined point pairs. Selecting this button displays the Load
Points Dialog Box (on page 563).
Save - Allows you to save the currently collected points shown in the points window to a file on
disk. This allows you to reuse the defined point pairs for future warps. Selecting this button
displays the Save Points Dialog Box (on page 563).
See Also
562
Load Points Dialog Box

Allows you to load previously defined point pairs. Once you load the point pairs, you can use
them to warp, or transform, the selected raster image.
Save Points Dialog Box

Specifies the name of, location of, and file format for the point collection displayed in the Points
window on the Warp Options dialog box.
563
564
SECTION 21
Working with CAD Drawings
Use SmartSketch's CAD translation capabilities to translate or reference MicroStation and
AutoCAD files for use with SmartSketch. You can modify your drawings in SmartSketch and
then save them as either MicroStation or AutoCAD formats. CAD translation provides equivalent
objects to and from which elements or entities may be mapped during translation. Translator
options let you customize how MicroStation or AutoCAD fonts, linestyles, widths, views, and
units are imported, referenced, or saved as MicroStation or AutoCAD drawings.
To use this functionality, you must install the Translators (on page 28) option.
See Also
Working with MicroStation Files

CAD Translators for SmartSketch directly supports MicroStation font and linestyle (*.RSC)
resource files, resulting in near perfect visual fidelity when you import, reference, or export
MicroStation drawings. Invisible MicroStation information such as database linkages, tag data,
and user data is preserved as attributes on SmartSketch graphics. You can even import
MicroStation cell libraries as SmartSketch symbols, further enhancing your re-use of existing
data.
Opening and Saving MicroStation Files

SmartSketch supports opening and saving MicroStation files in two ways: you can either select
a MicroStation file and translate it into equivalent SmartSketch elements, or you can create a
reference file from a MicroStation file.
If you use the method for selecting a MicroStation file and translating it into equivalent
SmartSketch elements, you can click Open on the File menu. After you have opened a
MicroStation file using this method, the resulting file is in a SmartSketch format (igr).
If the MicroStation file extension is not a .DGN extension, you may need to use a utility to
define other extensions as MicroStation files.
If you use the method for creating a reference file from a MicroStation file, you can either click
Object on the Insert menu, or you can drag from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer.
This action enables you to display and, if MicroStation is available on your PC, edit the
MicroStation file while working in SmartSketch. You can also select the view position of a 3-D
MicroStation file upon placement. Once a MicroStation file has been referenced using this
method, you can then locate and establish relationships between the new information and
elements on the drawing sheet.
The Options command on the Tools menu displays the Options dialog box. By selecting
the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) and setting the format to MicroStation,
you can configure the settings for importing MicroStation data that applies to both of these
methods.
565

Roundtrip of MicroStation data (importing MicroStation data to SmartSketch data and
exporting back to MicroStation data) is currently supported visually. Data fidelity for information
such as tags, database linkages, and user data are not supported during export to the
MicroStation file format.
Other Methods for Importing MicroStation Data

You can use the following methods to move MicroStation (.dgn) documents into SmartSketch:
Cutting and pasting.
Dragging.
Inserting the information as an object.
When you open a MicroStation document that has references to other documents, those
referenced documents appear as well. You can locate referenced documents in the current
document.
You can set placement options by clicking Options on the Tools menu. Then, you can set
the options you want on the Reference File tab of the Options dialog box.
Inserting as an Object
Inside SmartSketch, you can insert the entire foreign document with Object on the Insert menu.
On the Insert Object dialog box, you can set the option to link or embed the document. After
you insert the object, SmartSketch places a SmartFrame border around the object, allowing you
to crop it without altering the scale of the object. The software recognizes the geometry of the
inserted document. You can use the relationship indicators to draw or create relationships
between the geometry of the inserted object and other elements in the SmartSketch document.
You can edit the inserted object by double-clicking it.
Object inserts any OLE 2.0-enabled object, such as a Word or .AVI document, or a CAD
document, such as .dgn. You can then edit the inserted object by double-clicking it.
Master file.
Saving SmartSketch to MicroStation

You can save a SmartSketch document as a MicroStation document. Before you do this, you
can adjust the translation options with Options on the Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab,
you can click Export Options.
When you save a SmartSketch document as a .DGN document, the active sheet is saved. On
the Options dialog box, you can map SmartSketch layers to MicroStation levels (163). All the
remaining layers are placed on the last layer or level of the foreign document. The layer names
are preserved, whether you are importing or exporting MicroStation documents.
If you save a SmartSketch document with raster reference files as MicroStation
documents, only the files of the same type (.DGN) can be exported back into.
See Also
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import (on page 581)
566
Command Comparison with MicroStation

This command comparison lists MicroStation commands and their equivalent commands in the
software.
MicroStation
Software
A
Active
...Color (CO=)
Style Command (on page 420)
...Font (FT=)
Text Box Command (on page 231)
...Keypoint
...Style
...Weight(WT=)
Array
.....Polar
....Rectangular
B
C
Change
...Color
Select Tool (on page 201) and Properties

Command (on page 498)
...Level
...Style
Construct
...Tangent Arc1
Tangent Arc Command (on page 168)
Construct Bisector
...Angle

and SmartSketch Settings Command (on page
261)
...Line
Construct Circle
...Tangent to Three
Elements
Circle by 3 Points Command (on page 161) with

Construct Line
567

MicroStation
Software
...AA1

with SmartSketch Settings Command (on page
261)
Construct
Perpendicular
...From
...To

261)
Construct Tangent
...Between
...Circle 1

261)
...Perpendicular
...To
...from Element
Copy Element
Select Tool (on page 201) and Copy Command

(on page 214)
Copy Parallel
Move Command (on page 212) with copy option
...by Distance
Move Command (on page 212) with copy and

step distance option
Create Cell
Symbols
Create Chain
...Manual
Crosshatch
Style Command (on page 420); Fill Command

(on page 554)
D
Define Cell Origin
Symbols
Delete
...Element
Select Tool (on page 201) with Delete

...Partial
Trim Command (on page 343)
Delete Cell

Dimension
...Diameter
Extended
SmartDimension Command (on page 280)
...Radius
568

MicroStation
Software
...Save style
...Size Arrow
...modify text
location
...settings
...text style
E
Enter data field
...commands
Exit
Extend Element 2
Extend Line
...Intersection
Extend to Next Command (on page 348) with

...by Keyin
F
Fence
...Change Color
...Change Level
Select Tool (on page 201); Properties

Command (Edit Menu) (on page 433)
...Change Style
...Change
Symbology
Select Tool (on page 201); Properties

...Copy
Select Tool (on page 201) with Copy Command

(on page 214)
...Delete

...Move
Select Tool (on page 201) with Move Command

(on page 212)
...Stretch
Select Tool (on page 201) with Move Command

(on page 212)
Fence Array
...Polar
Select Tool (on page 201) with Circular Pattern

569

MicroStation
Software
...Rectangular
Select Tool (on page 201) with Rectangular

Pattern Command (on page 221)
Fence Rotate
...Original
Select Tool (on page 201) with Rotate

Fence Scale
...Copy
Select Tool (on page 201) and Scale Command

(on page 341) with copy option
...Original
Select Tool (on page 201) and Scale Command

(on page 341)
File Fence (FF=)

Fillet
...Modify
...Nomodify
Fillet Command (on page 353) with

...Single
Fillet Command (on page 353) with

and Trim Command (on page 343)
Fit
G
Graphic Group
Select Tool (on page 201) with Group

Command (on page 365) and UnGroup
H
Hatch
I
Identify
...Cell
Select Tool (on page 201) and select a symbol.
Increment Text
Macros (Custom Commands Command (on

page 475)) with Text Box Command (on page
231)
Intersection
J
Justify
...Center
570

MicroStation
Software
...Left
...Right
K
L
Levels
...Off (OF=)
...On (ON=)
Lock
...Axis
...Grid
M
Measure
...Area
...Area Element
...Distance Points
...Radius
Select Tool (on page 201) or SmartDimension

Mirror Copy
...Horizontal/Vertical Mirror Command (on page 335) with copy
option
...Line
Mirror Original
...Horizontal/Vertical Mirror Command (on page 335)
...Line
Modify
...Element
Select Tool (on page 201) (Use direct

manipulation of the handles)
Modify Arc
...Angle
...Radius
Move
...Element
571

MicroStation
Software
...Up/Left/Right/Dow
n
N
O
P
Place
...Lstring Point
...Mline
...Note
...Shape
...Shape Orthogonal
...Text
Place Arc
...by Center
...by Edge
...by Radius
Tangent Arc Command (on page 168)
Place Block
...Rotated
Place Cell
...Absolute
Symbols
Place Circle
...Center
...by Diameter
...by Edge
...by Radius
Place Ellipse
572
...Half
Ellipse by Center Point Command (on page

174) and Trim Command (on page 343)
...Quarter

and Trim Command (on page 343)

MicroStation
Software
...by Center

174)
...by Edge
Place Line
Place Point
Place Text
Plot
Q
Quit
...Stop
R
Rename Cell (CR)=
Symbols
Reset (button)
Right mouse button.
Rotate
...Copy
Rotate Command (on page 332) with copy

option
...Original
S
Save
Save Command (on page 94)
Scale
...Copy
Scale Command (on page 341) with copy

option.
...Original
Select Cell
...Absolute
Symbols
Set
...Linefill
Style Command (on page 420) ; Fill Command

(on page 554)
Set Coordinates
Show Library
Symbols
573

MicroStation
Software
Stop Drawing
Screen automatically refreshes.
T
U
Undo
Update
Screen automatically refreshes.
V
W
Window
...Area
Zoom Area Command (on page 55) Also

located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.
...Center
Pan Command (on page 58) Also located on

Main tool bar and shortcut menu.
X
Y
Z
Zoom
...In
Zoom In Command (on page 56) Also located

on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.
...Out
Zoom Out Command (on page 56) Also located

on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.
See Also
Task Comparison with MicroStation

This task and term comparison lists MicroStation tasks and terms and the equivalent
functionality in the software.
MicroStation
SmartSketch
A
Active Depth
The active depth of a 3-D element is maintained through OLE

servers as an attribute when a MicroStation file is embedded in a
software file.
574

MicroStation
SmartSketch
C
Cell
Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to use

OLE servers to embed or link a MicroStation cell or convert a cell
library.
Command Window
The ribbon allows you to give and receive feedback when you are
using a command.
Compress
It is not necessary to compress documents in the software.
D
Default
The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to pre-define the
default settings of elements.
Data Point
The PinPoint Command (on page 270) is used to draw geometry.
Data Button
The software uses the left mouse button for providing input points.
Dimension Units
The Dimension Command (on page 281) allows you to specify the
units you want to use when you place dimensions.
Dimension Format
The Dimension Command (on page 281) allows you to specify how
your dimensions appear when you place them.
Drop Status
The Ungroup Command (on page 367) allows you to remove an

element from a group.
Design ".dgn" file
Drawing sheets provide an area for creating and editing a drawing.

Drawing sheets are part of the software document.
Dynamic Update
The software displays geometry as it is constructed. As you use a

command, one end of a dynamic line is attached to a point in your
drawing and the other end of the line is attached to the pointer.
E
Element Attributes
The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to define the
attributes of elements.
F
Fence
The software provides group selection and manipulation using

Select Tool (on page 201) and edit commands.
Font
Font support includes TrueType fonts
G
Graphics Cursor
The pointer is a screen display device that allows you to place

graphics and annotations.
Graphics Screen /
Graphics Window
The windows of the software allow you to create graphics and

select commands. Drawing sheets are displayed in the window.
575

MicroStation
SmartSketch
Handles
Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry is

selected for modification.
Hatching
The Fill Command (on page 554) (Draw Toolbar) allows you to fill
enclosed shapes with various colors or styles.
I
Identify
Select Tool (on page 201) allows you to identify elements for
selection and manipulation.
J
K
L
Level
The Display Manager Command (on page 371) allows you to define
layers and styles for layers.
Line style
The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to define the line
styles of elements.
M
MicroCSL
The software allows you to program and customize.
Mirror
The Mirror Command (on page 335) allows you to move elements
or sets of elements about a mirror point.
N
O
Origin
The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify the
coordinates of a point. The software Command (Tools Menu)
allows you to locate positions and points on elements including
elements on symbols.
P
Parameter
The software allows you to define user properties of elements and

objects.
Pull-down Menus
The software has menus, shortcut menus, and toolbars for

command selection.
Q
R
576
Real World Units
coordinates of a point. You can draw on drawing sheets and then
scale to real-world units.
Relative
Coordinates
coordinates of a point.

MicroStation
SmartSketch
Reset Button
Reset by releasing a button or by selecting a new command.
S
Screen Menu
The software has menus, shortcut menus, and toolbars for

command selection.
Seed File
Templates allow you to define variables and settings for a new

drawing.
T
Tags
The software provides a mechanism for using database features.
Tentative Snap
Points on elements as you draw such as midpoints and end points.
The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to locate the

key
UCS (User
Coordinate
System) Icon
coordinates of a point.
Update
Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw.
V
View
Views are used to display the information in a window. Windows

display drawings from a particular viewpoint.
W
Working Units
The software allows you to specify the working units you want to
use when you draw.
X
Y
Z
Z Depth
The z value of a 3-D element is maintained as an attribute through

OLE servers when a MicroStation file is embedded into a software
file.
Zoom
The Zoom Out Command (on page 56) and Zoom Area Command
(on page 55) allow you to increase or decrease the display of the
graphics in a drawing. The Fit Command (on page 57) changes the
display of a window to display all elements.
See Also
577
MicroStation-Based Workflow Examples

Conceptual Design
Because the software gives you robust and intuitive drawing tools, this software is a natural
choice for sketching and developing concepts during the initial stages of a project. You can
capture relationships as you draw, or easily add them later as relationships or dimensions. You
can also alter dimensions to directly drive graphics. After you create your design, you can save it
in the MicroStation (.dgn) file format to complete downstream tasks in MicroStation.
Details
You can use the software to add annotations to existing MicroStation files by inserting a
MicroStation file in your document with Object on the Insert menu and then adding annotations
and text. You can then save the added annotations, dimensions, text, and graphics as a
MicroStation document with Save As on the File menu.
578

If you do not have MicroStation but need to provide files in MicroStation format, you can create
the document in the software and then save the file in MicroStation format.
Project Management
Managing large projects becomes easier when you use the software to integrate MicroStation
drawings. You can use the software to gather drawing files from several sources and combine
them into a single project book. You can then add details using the software and save the files in
MicroStation format so other project team members using MicroStation can review the project.
You can also assemble entire projects and then detail the project using the software. You can
then save the files in MicroStation format so other project team members using MicroStation can
review the project.
579

You can also use documents created with the software as a central location for all project
informationboth graphic and non-graphic data. Files created with products that are
OLE-compliant can be linked and embedded into a MicroStation file that has been opened with
the software.
Review and Redlining

The software is an excellent tool for reviewing and redlining MicroStation drawings. You can use
Object on the Insert menu to link or embed a 2-D or 3-D MicroStation drawing in your
document and then sketch on the drawing. You can sketch and revise on top of the native data.
After reviewing, you can then electronically mail the redlined file to others.
580

See Also
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import

When you translate MicroStation data into SmartSketch, you are concerned with either Visual
fidelity, Data fidelity, or both.
Visual Fidelity
Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after translation.
SmartSketch preserves the visual accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing support for the
following areas:
Colors
MicroStation and SmartSketch use the same format for colors, and they each store them in the
industry standard red, green, blue (RGB) format. During import, MicroStation colors are
automatically translated to the corresponding RGB values in SmartSketch, resulting in a perfect
color match.
Widths
SmartSketch provides a default set of line widths that corresponds to standard metric pencil
leads: .13 mm, .18 mm, .25 mm, .35 mm, .5 mm, .7 mm, 1.0 mm, 1.4 mm, and 2.0 mm. When
you open a MicroStation document, a default mapping determines which SmartSketch line width
is assigned to go with which MicroStation weight. You can change any of the default mappings
to define your own mapping with the Line Width tab of the MicroStation Import Options dialog
box (accessed through the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) after you
select Options on the Tools menu).
Linestyles
The core MicroStation linestyles 0-7 default to matching SmartSketch linestyles, unless they are
mapped on the Linestyle tab of the MicroStation Import Options dialog box. MicroStation
User Defined Line Styles (UDLS) are supported directly. If you use the Style Resources dialog
box, you can attach a MicroStation linestyle resource (*.RSC) file as a resource for linestyles to
use in a document.
Patterns
Non-associative MicroStation patterns are imported as groups. Associative patterns are not
translated into SmartSketch.
Font Styles
SmartSketch supports the system TrueType fonts delivered with Windows NT and supplies
additional ANSI and ISO TrueType engineering fonts. SmartSketch also supports
MicroStation fonts. When you open a .DGN document, SmartSketch provides a default mapping
to determine which TrueType font is assigned to which MicroStation font. You can change to this
mapping to define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with Options on the Tools
menu. On the File Locations tab, you can set the paths to the font resources by double-clicking
on Fonts 1, 2, and 3.
581

References
MicroStation references are imported as SmartSketch reference files, which use the automatic
defaults or same options for configuring how color, weights, line styles, patterns, and fonts are
handled for visual accuracy.
Configuring the Fit to Sheet Feature

SmartSketch automatically calculates the sheet scale when you import MicroStation documents
so that the range of graphics automatically fits within the lower left-hand corner of the drawing
sheet. If you do not want the sheet scale automatically calculated, then you must uncheck the
Fit imported data to active sheet check box on the MicroStation Import Options dialog box.
You can create a template for calculating sheet scale at the scale you want and insert a
MicroStation document to base the template on. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, you set the
Drawing Scale and Paper Units that you want.
Using MicroStation Fonts and Styles in a SmartSketch Document

If you want to make line styles from MicroStation resource files available in a SmartSketch
document, you can reference the styles with style resource documents. You can reference a
MicroStation .RSC file from the active template or document by clicking Resources on the
Styles dialog box.
When you attach a .RSC file from the current document or template, the styles in the resource
document are added to the Style dropdown list on the ribbon for the active document.
MicroStation resource files for line styles are treated as a document setting. If you want to
have all documents that are created by importing use the same styles, you must create an .IGR
template with those styles attached. You then specify the .IGR template as the template to use
during import of MicroStation documents.
Data Fidelity
Data fidelity is a phrase that describes how accurately the data is preserved when compared to
its original form in the application that created it. SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of a
MicroStation file by providing equivalent element types with mapped entities to SmartSketch.
SmartSketch also provides support for non-displayed data such as database linkages, units, and
coordinates.
SmartSketch preserves data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing support for the
following areas:
Units
MicroStation files are determined by the master and sub-unit labels in the file.
If meaningful master units and sub-units are found, the resulting SmartSketch document has
the closest matching units set on the Units tab of the Properties dialog box.
If no meaningful master units and sub-units are found, the File Units setting in the Import
area of the Options dialog box is used to determine the units for translated or referenced
MicroStation files.
Coordinates
MicroStation data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions when you
translate the MicroStation files (click Open on the File menu). Referenced MicroStation file
coordinate positions are determined by the settings on the Reference File tab on the Options
dialog box.
582

You can use Coincident to import the data in its original coordinate position at a 1 to 1
scale.
Levels
MicroStation level numbers, names, or both are preserved as SmartSketch layer names, but the
color and linetype settings (level symbology) are not. The color and linestyle settings apply
directly to the resulting elements.
Within a SmartSketch document, there are an unlimited number of layers per sheet. When
translating foreign files into SmartSketch, the levels in MicroStation keep the same names. The
MicroStation Export Options dialog box provides a layer mapping table, due to the limit of 63
levels in MicroStation. You can access this dialog box with the Foreign Data tab after you select
Options on the Tools menu.
Cells
When you translate a .DGN document, the default is to translate cells into symbols. You can
change this default with Options on the Tools menu so that cells or blocks are embedded
groups. This action translates cells and blocks into embedded symbols, or groups, in
SmartSketch.
MicroStation Type 2 cells are imported into SmartSketch as a group. However, for
MicroStation V8, the Import Cells2 as Symbols setting has been added to the itmstn.ini
configuration file to define whether Type 2 cell headers are imported from MicroStation V8 files
as symbols or groups. A group contains a dynamic attribute set that stores the name of the cell,
its origin, and any other data characterizing the cell. There is, therefore, enough information
stored in the group to reconstruct an element back into a cell to export in the future.
When you import a MicroStation document that has cells, a temporary folder is created in the
Temp folder on your computer. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in
the MicroStation document. By default, these symbols are deleted after the document is
imported into the drawing sheet. You can change a setting in <Product
Directory>\Program\itmstn.ini to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open the .INI file and
change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0.
If there is no Delete Symbol Definitions setting in the .ini file, the software presumes
the setting is set to 1; consequently, the symbols that are embedded into the drawing sheet are
deleted after the MicroStation document is imported into the drawing sheet.
Cells with Attribute Data

When translating a .dgn document, the default is to translate all cells containing attribute data
into symbols with Labels (on page 250).
3D Data
All 3D data is flattened into a 2D view when you translate files using Open on the File menu.
The 2D view orientation is determined by the Orientation setting in the Import area of the
Options dialog box.
The following information is an entity-to-element map when you translate files using Open on
the File menu.
MicroStation
SmartSketch
Line
Line
Linestring
Linestring
583

Bspline Curve
Bspline Curve
Shape
Linestring
Ellipse
Ellipse
Arc
Arc
Complex String
Complex String
Complex Shape
Complex String
Bspline Surface
Bspline Curve
Curve
Bspline Curve
Cone
Flattened wire frame
Surface
Group
Dimension
Dimension
Text
Text
Text Node
Text
Cell
Group
Shared Cell
Symbol (Shared Embed)
Multiline
Group
Point String
Points
Reference
Reference
Raster
Reference
Database Linkages
Dynamic Attribute set on the element
Tags
User Data
The Image Integrator option must be downloaded to support import of raster reference
files.
MicroStation symbols with nested graphics, groups, and complex shapes (for example,
rectangles) will not translate successfully into SmartSketch symbols.
None of the data that is part of the reference file can be deleted or altered using
SmartSketch commands. However, if MicroStation software is installed on your computer,
then you can click Open on the Shortcut menu over the reference file. This action opens
the MicroStation reference file in the MicroStation application.
If you establish relationships between elements in the SmartSketch file and a reference file,
the relationships will be removed if you change the position of elements in the source file
and then update the reference file in SmartSketch.
If you change the inserted information (copied from MicroStation), the original information
does not change.
See Also
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Export (on page 587)
584
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box

Controls how a MicroStation document is opened or inserted into the current document.
See Also
General Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 585)
Font Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 586)
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 586)
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 586)
General Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)

Cell Library - Sets options for translating MicroStation cell libraries. When a cell library is
imported, a symbol document with an .sym extension is created.
Units of Resolution - Determines the sub-unit and positional unit settings for MicroStation cell
libraries. Cell libraries do not have units and depend on the MicroStation document for their units
of resolution. These settings have no effect on translating documents with a .dgn extension; the
settings only affect documents with a .CEL extension.
Cells - Sets options for importing cells in MicroStation documents. When you import a
MicroStation document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your computer. The
temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the MicroStation document. By
default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You
can change a setting in ITMSTN.INI to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open ITMSTN.INI
and change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0.
Options - Determines if cells are imported as elements on the drawing sheet or embedded
symbols. Symbol documents have an .sym extension. For example, type 2 cells are imported as
groups and shared cells, type 34, are imported as symbols.
Template File - Specifies the path and filename for the template that you want to use to create
a document.
Browse - Accesses the Browse dialog box.
Fit imported data to active sheet - Places the MicroStation data on the active drawing sheet. If
the checkbox is not selected, the imported data is placed on a new drawing sheet.
See Also
Open a MicroStation Cell Library (on page 600)
Place MicroStation Information in the Document (on page 597)
585

Font Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)
Maps the software font to a MicroStation font.
See Also
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps the MicroStation line styles to line style definitions in the software. The core MicroStation
line styles (0 - 7) default to equivalent SmartSketch line styles unless they are mapped on the
Linestyle Tab.
The number values listed below can be used in the line style table to map MicroStation line
styles to line style definitions in the software. When mapping line styles use the line style
number, not the line style name.
MicroStation
SmartSketch
Line Style
Number
Line Style
Number
Solid
Normal
Dotted
Dashed
10
Medium Dotted
Dotted
11
Long Dotted
Dash Dot
12
Dot Dash
Dash 2Dot
13
Short Dash
Chain
18
Dash Dot Dot
Double Chain
20
Long Short Dash
2Dash Dot
21
See Also
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps the MicroStation weights to line widths in the software.
See Also
586
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Export

When you translate SmartSketch files into MicroStation data, you are concerned with either
Visual fidelity, Data fidelity, or both.
Visual Fidelity
Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after translation.
SmartSketch preserves the visual accuracy of a file during export to MicroStation by providing
support for the following different areas:
Colors
When SmartSketch colors are saved to a .DGN file, a color table containing matching colors is
created and attached to the resulting .DGN by default. If a seed file with a color table attached is
specified on the MicroStation Export Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data
tab after you select Options on the Tools menu), SmartSketch colors are automatically mapped
to the closest RGB equivalent colors in that table.
Widths
SmartSketch default widths are pre-mapped to their most equivalent MicroStation widths on the
Line Width tab of the MicroStation Export Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign
Data tab after you select Options on the Tools menu).
Linestyles
SmartSketch line styles are mapped on the Linestyle tab of the MicroStation Export Options
dialog box. If styles from a referenced MicroStation .RSC file have been used in the
SmartSketch file being exported, the line style names are transferred to the resulting .DGN file.
If a style exists in the MicroStation application by the same name, that style will be used. If there
is no style in the MicroStation application by the same name, MicroStation assigns a default
style. Linestyles that are not mapped on export are stroked to give them a more correct
appearance. The default length of the stroking line is 0.1 millimeters (mm).
Fill Styles
Basic fill styles such as Normal are automatically recreated as MicroStation associative hatch
patterns in the resulting .DGN files. Fill styles that use symbols such as Earth (in AEC
templates) are exported as individual elements in the resulting .DGN file. Objects containing
blank fill styles are exported; however, the blank fill styles themselves are not exported.
Font Styles
SmartSketch default font styles (TTF) are pre-mapped to their most equivalent MicroStation font
styles on the Font tab of the MicroStation Export Options dialog box. If the font is not listed in
the mapping table on the font tab, it defaults to font 3 (Engineering) in the resulting MicroStation
file. If font styles from a referenced MicroStation .RSC file have been used in the SmartSketch
file being exported, the font style names are passed into the resulting .DGN file, provided it has
not been mapped in the font mapping table. Mappings override automatic behaviors. If a font
style exists in the MicroStation application by the same name, that font style will be used. If
there is no font style in the MicroStation application by the same name, MicroStation assigns the
default font 3 (Engineering) style.
587

References
MicroStation .DGN files that are referenced in SmartSketch will be saved as MicroStation
reference files in the resulting MicroStation file. Raster reference files in SmartSketch will be
saved as MicroStation raster files in the resulting MicroStation file. Linked and embedded
references, including .DXF, .IGR, .DGN, and DXF file types, will be saved as MicroStation
reference files during export to MicroStation. Embedded files will be saved in the same location
as the master file; linked files will be save in the same location as the original linked file. Inserted
objects such as .XLS, .DOC, or .BMP are not currently supported during the export to the
MicroStation file format.
Multiple Sheets
Only the active sheet and background sheet in a SmartSketch file is exported to a MicroStation
file. Exporting multiple sheets from a document is not currently supported.
The active background sheet graphics are merged into the resulting .DGN file.
Data Fidelity
Data fidelity is a phrase used to describe how accurately the data is preserved when compared
to its original form in the application that created it. SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of
a MicroStation file during export by mapping data to its most equivalent form in MicroStation.
SmartSketch does not support exporting data such as attribute sets that can be associated with
elements in the file.
SmartSketch preserves data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing support for the
following areas:
Units
If a seed file is specified on the MicroStation Export Options dialog box, then the units of that
seed file are used in the resulting file. Otherwise, the following chart indicates what happens to
SmartSketch units as they are exported to MicroStation units.
588
IGR Primary
Units
MSTN MU MSTN Resolution
inches
IN
1000:254
feet
FT
12:8000
meters
1000:10
millimeters
MM
1000:100
centimeters
CM
1000:100
manometers
NM
Seed file values unchanged
yards
YD
miles
MI
kilometers
KM
tenths
TE
hundreds
HN
thousands
TH
poles
PL

rods
RD
chains
CH
furlongs
FR
Coordinates
SmartSketch data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions when you
translate to the MicroStation files.
SmartFrames and Detail Views

SmartFrames that exist on the active sheet are preserved upon translation to the MicroStation
file; Detail Views - whether on the active sheet or on a background sheet - are also preserved
upon translation to the MicroStation file.
Layers to Levels
SmartSketch layer names are preserved as MicroStation level names and numbers, but the
color and linestyle settings (level symbology) are not. The color and linestyle layer settings are
applied directly to the resulting elements.
Any translated levels past Level 63 are combined together on Level 63.
The following is an element to element map when you translate files using Save As on the File
menu.
SmartSketch
MicroStation
Line
Line
Ellipse
Ellipse
Arc
Ellipse
Point
Line
Linestring
Linestring
Connector
Linestring
Bspline Curve
Bspline Curve
Rectangle
Shape
Complex String
Complex Chain
Text
Text
Dimension
Dimension
Symbol
Shared Cell
Leader
Dimension
Group
Elements
SmartLabel
Elements
Parametric
Symbols
Elements
589

Multi
Representation
Symbol
Elements
.DGN Reference
.DGN Reference
.IGR, DWG, or
.DXF Reference
Ignored (no
equivalent)
OLE Objects
(.doc, .xls, etc.)
Ignored (no
equivalent)
Attribute sets
Ignored
Raster Reference
Raster Reference
See Also
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box

Controls how a document will be translated to a MicroStation file format.
See Also
General Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 590)
Font Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 590)
LineStyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 591)
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 591)
Layer Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 591)
General Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Version - Specifies the versions of MicroStation that can be used for export. You can select
multiple versions. The selected versions display in the Save as type list in the Save As dialog
box.
Seed File - Specifies the path of a default seed file that contains appropriate units, color tables,
and other important information.
When you specify a 2D seed file while exporting a 3D MicroStation reference file from
the current document, the 3D reference file is not saved in MicroStation. For the 3D MicroStation
reference file to be saved in MicroStation, you must specify a 3D seed file on the MicroStation
Export Options dialog box.
Browse - Displays the Seed File dialog box.
See Also
Font Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the fonts in the software to a MicroStation font.
590

See Also
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the line styles in the software to MicroStation line styles.
The number values listed below can be used in the Linestyle table to map line styles in the
current document to MicroStation line styles. When mapping line styles, use the line style
number; not the line style name.
SmartSketch
MicroStation
Line Style
Number
Line Style
Number
Normal
Solid
Dashed
10
Dotted
Dotted
11
Medium Dotted
Dash Dot
12
Long Dotted
Dash 2Dot
13
Dot Dash
Chain
18
Short Dash
Double Chain
20
Dash Dot Dot
2Dash Dot
21
Long Short dash
See Also
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the software line widths to MicroStation weights.
See Also
Layer Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box)

Layer Mapping Table - Displays an alphanumeric ordered list of the layers.
See Also
Configuration File Settings for MicroStation Translation

The configuration file, itmstn.ini, is delivered with the Translators (on page 28) option to
<Product Directory>\Program. This configuration file is used by translators and provides the
591

capability for customizing the process of translation between the software and a MicroStation
document.
Most of the options found in the itmstn.ini file are accessible through the various
tabs on the MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box (on page 585) and the MicroStation Export
Options Dialog Box (on page 590). It is recommended that options modified directly in the INI file
be done so only by an experienced user at his/her own risk.
The following table defines the INI settings, along with any corresponding default values:
[Name of the Section]/
Name of the Setting
Description
Import
Export
Default
Value
[Options]
Seed File
Name of a seed file used for

export
Yes
Yes
File name
Enable Logging
If set, a log file will be created
Yes
Yes
0/1
Read Default Units
Sets the default units for foreign

format
Yes
Yes
59=m; 61=mm; 62=cm;

63=km; 64=in; 65=ft;
66=yd; 67=mil
Template File
Sets the document that will be

used as a template when
importing foreign data.
Yes
Yes
File name
Symbol Template File
Sets the symbol file that will be

used as a template when
importing foreign data.
Yes
N/A
File name
Dissolve Symbol to Groups
A flag that indicates whether or Yes

not to dissolve parametric and
multi- representation symbols to
groups.
Yes
0/1
Ignore Sheet Scale
If set to 1, the file translated into Yes

RAD is fit to the sheet size by
adjusting the sheet scale.
N/A
0/1
Processing Batch
Translation
If set, progress bar dialog boxes Yes

do not display during the
translation.
Yes
0/1
10
Attribute Sets
Names of attributes.
Yes
Yes
String
consisting of
attribute
names
delimited by
semicolons.
11
Read Cell Options
Sets how the cells in

MicroStation are handled. The
first option translates cells into
groups, whereas the second
option preserves cells.
Yes
N/A
Shared
Embeds
Rigid groups/ Shared

Embeds
12
Import Cells2 as Symbols
Specifies that cell headers of

Type 2 should be imported from
MicroStation V8 files as either
groups or symbols.
Yes
N/A
0=Type2 cell headers are

imported as groups.
Sets what version of the foreign

file format is created on export.
N/A
13
Write Version
592
1=Type2 cell headers are

imported as symbols
Yes
5.0
3.x, 4.0, 4.4, 5.0

14
Read Reference Options
Specifies options to process

reference files during
translation.
Yes
N/A
Translate/
Link/ Merge
15
Read Reference Paths
Specifies the paths for reference Yes

files.
N/A
Directory
Name
16
Sub Units per Master Units
Sets the values to determine the Yes

size of units for the MicroStation
cell file.
N/A
10
Number
17
Pos Units per Sub Units
Sets the values to determine the Yes

size of units for the MicroStation
cell file.
N/A
1000
Number
18
Max Nesting Depth
Determines how deep the

translation processes the
reference files.
Yes
N/A
Number
19
Application Text Type
Determines if text origin and

justification are preserved.
Yes
Yes
0= Text origin is always

in the upper left corner
1 = Origin preserved
2 = Not Available
3 = Not Available
4 = Indicates that when
the text is imported from a
MicroStation file and it
has both horizontal and
vertical mirroring, then
180 degrees would be
added to the existing
angle and the mirroring
properties are not set on
such text
5 = Provides a combined
effect of values 1 and 4
20
MS Resource Files
Determines the location of

MicroStation resource files.
Yes
N/A
Directory
name
21
Process Non- Displayable

Reference Files
Determines if non-displayable
reference files are translated.
Yes
Yes
0/1
22
Attributes as SmartText
Determines if SmartText is
created from the attributes
Yes
N/A
0/1
23
EDF as SmartText
Determines if Tags are

processed as SmartText
Yes
N/A
0/1
24
Stroke Reference
Determines if attached
reference files are stroked on
export.
N/A
Yes
0/1
25
Stroke Text
Determines if text is stroked

during export.
N/A
Yes
26
Stroke Dimension
If set, the dimension objects are

stroked on export.
N/A
Yes
0/1
27
Disk-based Symbols
When set to 1, .SYM files are

created for each foreign symbol
during import.
N/A
Yes
0/1
28
Ignore Non-Displayable
Symbols
When set to 1, non-displayable

objects are exported.
Yes
Yes
0/1
0/1
593

29
Preserve Layers on
Dissolved Symbols
If set, members or symbol are

exported even if their layer is
turned off.
N/A
Yes
0/1
30
Preserve MSTN UDLS

Styles
When set to 0, user-defined

linestyles are stroked.
Yes
Yes
0/1
31
Push Owner Attributes to its

Children
If set to 1, RAD dynamic

attributes are moved from a
group (symbol) to its members.
N/A
Yes
0/1
32
Metafile to Raster DPI

Resolution
Sets the dpi resolution for raster N/A

metadata during export.
Yes
350
dpi resolution
33
Stroking Tolerance
Determines the accuracy used

N/A
when objects are stroked during
export.
Yes
0.1
millimeters
34
Always Shift GO to Center

Drawing
In case the document ranges is

not larger than the .DGN file
design plane but is outside of it.
N/A
Yes
0/1
35
No Background Color
If background is white, forces it

to be black (does not apply to
the printout image).
N/A
Yes
0/1
36
Hatch support complexity
Supported Hatch complexity of

output format.
N/A
Yes
1 (only
supports a
single
independent
hatch line
with dashes
and gaps)
37
Need hatch description and

stroke
If true, then stroke hatch even

when hatch name and
description are included in
symbology.
N/A
Yes
38
Style Resource Name
Sets the style filename to be

used on export.
N/A
Yes
Filename
39
Delete Symbol Definitions
If set, symbol definitions are

deleted after the translation.
Yes
N/A
0/1
40
[Read Default View] and

[Write Default View]
Yes
Yes
41
Transformation
Sets the 4x4 matrix.
Yes
Yes
identity
matrix
4x4 matrix
42
Type
Yes
Yes
43
Name
Yes
Yes
44
Reference Point
Yes
Yes
45
Normal
Yes
Yes
46
Projection Vector
Yes
Yes
47
Active View
Yes
Yes
48
[Read Text Fonts] and

[Write Text Fonts]
Determines the mapping of

fonts between the foreign file
format and RAD.
Yes
Yes
49
[Option Forms]
The following entries determine

what dialog box is opened on
the Foreign Data tab (Options
dialog box)
594
0/1

50
Dll
Yes
Yes
51
Import Entry Point
Yes
N/A
52
Export Entry Point
N/A
Yes
53
[Read Widths] and [Write

Widths]
Determines the mapping of the

line widths between the foreign
file format and RAD.
Yes
Yes
54
[Write Layers]
Determines the mapping of RAD N/A

layers to MicroStation levels.
Yes
55
Symbol Layers
Saves the level information by

pushing each symbol to the
level of its first graphical
element.
No
Yes
If set to 0, it allows setting

Honor Layer Display ON
for Graphic cells and OFF
for Point Cells.
If set to 1, it forces the
Honor Layer Display to be
OFF.
If set to 2, it honors the
Symbol Layers = 0 setting
and pushes symbols to
the same level as that of
its first graphical element.
If set to 3, it forces Honor
Layer display to be OFF,
and pushes all the
symbols to the same level
as that of its first
graphical element.
See Also
Open a MicroStation Document

1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Tools > Options.

On the Foreign Data tab, click the software that you want in the Format box.
In the Import box, click Options to access the MicroStation Import Options dialog box.
On the General tab of the dialog box, enter the directory path and template that you want in
the Template File box.
You can search for the seed file by clicking Browse.

5. On the Browse dialog box, click the seed file you want.
6. On the Open dialog box, select the .dgn extension.
7. Select the document that you want to open.
If you create a reference file, you can either click Insert > Object or drag a MicroStation
document from the Windows Explorer into the current document.
After you place the MicroStation information on the drawing sheet, you can locate elements
and establish relationships between the new information and elements that are already in
You can use DGN resource files to preserve the original fonts and line types of the
document when you open a MicroStation document with File > Open. You can set font
locations before opening the MicroStation document by clicking Tools > Options and then
clicking the File Locations tab. You can set options for line types by clicking Format > Style
and then clicking Resources.
595
MicroStation line strings are imported as SmartSketch line strings.

MicroStation point strings are imported as groups.
A MicroStation text node (two or more lines of text handled as a text box) is imported into
the software as two separate line strings (text boxes).
referenced documents show up as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four
levels deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document.
You can use the Registration Extension utility (igrRegisterExtensions412.exe) to register
alternate MicroStation extensions so that SmartSketch will recognize them as valid
MicroStation files without having to rename them. The utility is delivered to the
..\SmartSketch\Program folder on your computer after you install the software.
All translation options for opening AutoCAD documents using Open on the File menu
are delivered through the Custom or Typical setup for these options. If you cannot open an
AutoCAD document, you should re- install the software with the Custom or Typical setup
for these options.
See Also
Drop Line String Command (Shortcut Menu)

Divides a line string into individual line segments.
To access Drop Line String, point to line string and right click. After you select the command
from the shortcut menu that appears, the line string is divided into individual line segments.
You cannot create line strings with SmartSketch. You can only drop line strings that
come in from imported MicroStation .DGN files.
See Also
Drawing Lines (on page 146)
Drop Complex String Command (Shortcut Menu)

Breaks a complex string of elements into individual elements, such as individual arcs, lines, and
circles.
To access Drop Complex String, point to the complex string and right-click. After you select the
command from the shortcut menu that appears, the complex string divides into individual
elements.
You cannot create complex strings with SmartSketch. You can only drop complex
strings that come in from imported MicroStation .DGN files.
Convert Command (Rectangle)

Divides a rectangle into four individual line segments.
To access the Convert command:
1. Point to the rectangle and right-click to open a shortcut menu.
2. Select Convert. The rectangle is then divided into individual line segments and right angles.
The Convert command only applies to rectangles.
596
Place MicroStation Information in the Document

To place MicroStation information onto the drawing sheet, you must first open the software and
open the document that you want. You set options for inserting the MicroStation information into
the document with Options on the Tools menu. The options are located on the Foreign Data
tab.
To Drag a Document
1. Open Windows Explorer and select the MicroStation document that you want.
2. Drag the document into the active document in the software.
To Insert a Document
Click Insert > Object and select MicroStation document that you want.

Master file. See Embed an Object (on page 454).
To Drag Selected Elements

1. Open the MicroStation document and select the elements that you want.
2. Drag the selected elements into the active document in the software.
If you press Ctrl while you drag a document, the symbol is embedded. If you press Ctrl +
Shift, the document is linked.
To Copy and Paste Selected Elements

1. Open the MicroStation document and select the elements that you want.
2. Copy the selected information.
3. In the software, on the Edit menu, click Paste Special or Copy to copy the selected
elements into the current document.
You can also open a MicroStation document directly with Open on the File menu.
referenced documents also appear. You can locate referenced documents in the current
document.
After you place the MicroStation information in the current document, you can locate
elements and establish relationships between the new information and elements that you
place using the software.
See Also
597
Create a Template to Insert a MicroStation Document

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Click File > Open and select the document to base a template on.
Click View > Background Sheets.
Click File > Sheet Setup and set the options that you want for the background sheet.
Click View > Working Sheets.
Click File > Sheet Setup.
On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the Drawing Scale and Paper Units that you want.
On the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box, select User Templates.
Click Modify.
On the Modify Location dialog box, select the directory where you want to store the
template.
Click File > Save As to save the document in the directory that you selected. This document
is the template.
Click File > New to create a blank document.
On the File New dialog box, in the Templates box, select the template that you created to
base the new document on.
On the Insert menu, click Object and select the MicroStation document that you want to
insert.
See Also
Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File

You can establish relationships between elements in the current document and elements in a
MicroStation reference file that you inserted.
1. Place a MicroStation reference file in a document. You can use one of several methods.
Place AutoCAD Information in the Document (on page 638)
You should set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If you want to see the
relationship handles, set Relationship Handles on the Tools menu.
2. Establish relationships between elements in the object and elements in the same manner
you would any elements.
Make Elements Equal (on page 358) Make Elements Parallel (on page 359)
If you change the position of elements in a MicroStation document that is linked to your
current document and then update the link in the document, the relationships are no longer
valid.
598

See Also
Control Layers in a MicroStation Reference File

1. Open the MicroStation reference file.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Any file that is not native to Catalog Manager and that is linked or embedded and
used for reference information is termed a reference file.
Adjust the file in the active view by clicking Fit
.
On the Tools menu, click Display Manager.
If the document contains multiple drawing sheets, select the sheet which contains the
reference file on the Sheets tab.
Click the Layers tab.
Turn On/Off Layer Display

1. On the Layers tab, select a layer or layer group from the list.
2. In the Display column, turn on/off a layer by selecting or deselecting the check box.
3. To save your changes and return to the drawing document, click OK.
Override the Color of a Layer or Layer Group

2. Click in the Colors column of the selected layer/layer group to display the Colors dialog
box.
3. Select a color from the list.
The Layers column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active
drawing sheet. Layer groups appear first in the list, followed by individual layers.
If you wish to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply.
See Also
Add MicroStation Styles to a Document

You can reference a MicroStation .RSC file that contains linestyles as a style resource
document from any template or document.
1. Click File > Open to open the document to which you want to add a style resource
document.
3. On the Style dialog box, click Resources.
4. On the Style Resources dialog box, click Add.
599

5. On the Add Style Resource dialog box, select the name of the .RSC file that you want to
add to the template.
6. Click OK on each dialog box.
7. When you close the document, click OK when you are prompted to indicate if you want to
save changes to document.
The styles in the style resource document are referenced from the template or document that
you just saved. If you open a document that references a style resource document, the styles in
the style resource document will be available on the Styles list of the current document ribbon. If
you open a document that is based on a template with references to style resource documents,
the styles will also be available in the same manner. You can then apply the styles in the style
resource document to elements or annotations in the current document.
Use this procedure only for linestyle resources.

You must apply linestyles to each document individually, unless you apply a template.
Sometimes you can attach several style resource documents that contain styles with
duplicate names. In these cases, the Style Resources list in the style resource document
has priority. In that list, the style listed first appears on the ribbon of the active document.
If you want to add MicroStation fonts to a document, click Options on the Tools menu.
Then, on the File Locations tab, you can set the paths to the fonts with the Fonts 1, 2, and
3 options.
See Also
MicroStation Cells in Your Document

To use MicroStation cells as symbols in your document, the cells must first be converted into
individual symbols (.sym). On the File menu, Open allows you to open a MicroStation cell
library. A directory is created, with the same name as the cell library. The individual cells within
the library are saved as individual symbols in the new directory.
You can drag these symbols from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer into other
SmartSketch documents.
Options for the cell library units (SU and PU) can be set on the MicroStation Import Options
dialog box. You can access this dialog box by clicking Options on the Tools menu. Then, on
the Foreign Data tab, you can enter the appropriate working units in the SU: and MU: fields.
Symbols in your document are saved as MicroStation cells during translation from your
document to MicroStation formats.
See Also
Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467)
Open a MicroStation Cell Library

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. On the Foreign Data tab, in the Format box, click MicroStation.
600

3. In the Import box, click Options to access the MicroStation Import Options dialog box.
4. On the General tab, set the Units of Resolution to specify the resolution of the cells that
you want to import.
5. On each dialog box, click OK.
6. On the Main toolbar, click File > Open.
7. On the Open dialog box, click the .CEL extension and select the cell library that you want to
open. A progress box appears to show the progress of the translation of the cells in the cell
library. The software creates a subdirectory with the same name as the .CEL file in the
directory of the cell library. The software then creates one symbol for each cell that was in
the .CEL file; the names of the new symbols are identical to the cells used to create them.
See Also
Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467)
MicroStation Construction Class Information

When you open a MicroStation document, the construction class information is preserved with
layer names. When importing the document, the software creates special layers for construction
elements. The layers are named so that you can recognize the layers, including the layer for the
construction element. For example, level 6 would become Constr. 6 and level Border would also
become Constr. Border. You can also save these layers back out to the MicroStation document
format.
See Also
Working with AutoCAD Files

CAD Translators for SmartSketch directly supports True Type Fonts and dashed gap linetypes
for outstanding visual fidelity when you import, reference, or export AutoCAD drawings. Invisible
AutoCAD information such as database linkages, attributes, and Xdata is also preserved as
attributes on SmartSketch graphics.
Opening and Saving AutoCAD Files

Your document supports opening and saving AutoCAD files in two ways: you can either select
an AutoCAD file and translate it into equivalent SmartSketch elements, or you can create a
reference file from an AutoCAD file.
If you use the method for selecting an AutoCAD file and translating it into equivalent elements in
your document, you can click Open on the File menu. After you open an AutoCAD file using this
method, the resulting file is in a SmartSketch format (igr).
If an AutoCAD file contains paper space data, the resulting SmartSketch file contains two
sheets: one sheet represents the paper space data, and is named paper space; the other sheet
represents model space data, and is named model space. The paper space views are recreated
as reference views of the model sheet on the paper space sheet.
601

If you use the method for creating a reference file from an AutoCAD file, you can either click
Object on the Insert menu, or you can drag from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer.
This action enables you to display and, if AutoCAD is available on your computer, edit the
AutoCAD file while working in SmartSketch. You can also select the view position of a 3-D
AutoCAD file upon placement. After an AutoCAD file has been referenced using this method,
you can then locate and establish relationships between the new information and elements on
the drawing sheet.
The Options command on the Tools menu displays the Options dialog box. By selecting
the Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) and setting the format to AutoCAD,
you can configure the settings for importing AutoCAD data that applies to both of these
methods.
Roundtrip of AutoCAD data (importing AutoCAD data to SmartSketch data and
exporting back to AutoCAD data) is currently supported visually. Data fidelity for information
such as attributes, database linkages, and Xdata are not supported during export to the
AutoCAD file format.
Other Methods for Importing AutoCAD Data

You can use the following methods to move AutoCAD (.DWG or .DXF) files into SmartSketch:
Cutting and pasting.
Dragging.
Inserting the information as an object.
When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to other documents, those
referenced documents also appear. You can locate referenced documents in the current
document.
You can also use Open on the File menu to translate and open documents.
Cutting and Pasting

You can select the information in the AutoCAD document and then cut or copy the information
and paste it into SmartSketch with Paste Special.
Dragging
You can select the information in the AutoCAD document and then drag it into SmartSketch. In
the Windows Explorer, select the AutoCAD document and then drag it into SmartSketch. The
document is embedded in the drawing by default. Before you drop the document, you can
embed the document in SmartSketch by pressing Ctrl. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is
linked. When you place the document, handles appear that allow you to scale the object. The
foreign document is placed into SmartSketch and behaves much like a symbol, allowing you to
click to place it or move it around.
You can set placement options by clicking Options on the Tools menu. Then, you can set
the options you want on the Reference File tab of the Options dialog box.
Inserting as an Object
Inside SmartSketch, you can insert the entire foreign document with Object on the Insert menu.
On the Insert Object dialog box, you can set the option to link or embed the document. After
you insert the object, SmartSketch places a SmartFrame border around the object, allowing you
to crop it without altering the scale of the object. The geometry of the inserted document is
recognized; you can use the relationship indicators to draw or create relationships between the
geometry of the inserted object and other elements in the SmartSketch document. You can edit
the inserted object by double-clicking it.
602

Object inserts any OLE 2.0 enabled object, such as a Word or .AVI document, or CAD
document, such as .DWG. The inserted object can then be edited by double-clicking it.
Master file.
Saving SmartSketch to AutoCAD

You can save a SmartSketch file as an AutoCAD file. Before you do this, you can adjust the
translation options using Options on the Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click
the appropriate Export Options.
When you save a SmartSketch document as a .DWG or .DXF document, the active sheet is
saved.
You do not have to map layers for AutoCAD documents; the layer names are imported or
exported as named in the native document. If a SmartSketch layer has not been mapped, it is
automatically placed on the next available layer or level in the foreign document until the last
level or layer occurs.
All detail views placed in the document are saved when you save the file as an AutoCAD DWG
file. SmartSketch automatically creates a separate sheet in the resulting DWG file that contains
detail view(s). The name of each generated sheet corresponds to the name of the sheet in
SmartSketch containing the detail view(s). For example, if sheet25 contains one or more detail
views in the SmartSketch document, the resulting AutoCAD DWG file will automatically create a
sheet named sheet25, which contains the detail view(s).
If you save a SmartSketch document with raster reference files as AutoCAD
documents, only the files of the same type (.DWG) can be exported back into.
See Also
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import (on page 620)
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export (on page 626)
Command Comparison with AutoCAD

This command comparison lists AutoCAD commands and their equivalent commands in the
software.
AutoCAD
Software
A
Arc
...Center Start Angle
...Center Start End

...Center Start Length
...Start Center Angle
...Start Center
...Start Center Length
...Start End Angle
603

AutoCAD
Software
...Start End Direction

Area
Array
.....Polar
....Rectangular
B
Block
Symbols
C
Change
Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page

433) and Style Command (on page 420)
...color
Select Tool (on page 201) and Properties

...endpoint
...layer
...linetype
...style
Circle
...2 Point
Circle by Center Point Command (on page

162) and Tangent Circle Command (on page
163)
...3 Point
...Center Radius
Circle by Center Point Command (on page

162)
...Tangent Radius
Tangent Circle Command (on page 163) with

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page
261)
Color
Select Tool (on page 201) and Style

Command (on page 420) or the command
ribbon.
Copy
...Multiple
Select Tool (on page 201) and Copy

...Single
Copy Command (on page 214) or Move

Command (on page 212) with copy option
D
DIM
604

AutoCAD
Software
...diameter
...horizontal
...leader
...style
Dimension
...Radius
...Save
Dimension Command (on page 281)
...Variables
...Vertical
DxfIn
Open Command (on page 65) (choose a dxf

format document)
DxfOut
Save As Command (on page 94) (use the dxf

file format)
E
Ellipse
....Center

174)
... Axis Endpoint
End
Erase
...multiple objects
Select Tool (on page 201) and Delete

...single object
Extend
Extend to Next Command (on page 348) (use

direct manipulation of the handles.)
F
Fillet
605

AutoCAD
Software
Grid

261) and PinPoint Command (on page 270)
H
Hatch
...Single Hatch
Style Command (on page 420) and Fill

I
J
K
L
Layer
...OFF
...ON
Line
...Line
...Osnap TAN
...perp

and SmartSketch Settings Command (on
page 261)
Linetype
List
Properties Command (Edit Menu) (on page

433)
M
Mview
Not Applicable
Menu
Toolbars and Shortcut menus
Mirror
Move
...multiple objects
606
Select Tool (on page 201) and Move


AutoCAD
Software
...single object
Select Tool (on page 201) and Move

N
O
Ortho

261)
Osnap
...INT
P
PSpace
Managing Multi-Sheet Documents (on page

73)
Pan
Pan Command (on page 58)
Pline
Plot
Point
This command is available only if you use the

Customize command to place it on a toolbar
or menu.
Q
Quit
R
Redraw
Screen refresh is automatic.
Regen
Not applicable.
Rename
...Block
Rotate
....several objects
Select Tool (on page 201) and Rotate

S
Save
607

AutoCAD
Software
Scale
...a single object
...multiple objects
Snap
...Standard

261)
Stretch
Style
T
Text
...Justify
Trim
Trim Command (on page 343) and Chamfer

U
Undo
Undo Command (on page 205)
Units
V
W
X
Y
Z
Zoom
...All
...In
...Out
...Window
See Also
608
Task Comparison with AutoCAD

This task and term comparison lists AutoCAD tasks and terms and the equivalent functionality in
the software.
AutoCAD
Equivalent Command
A
Angular Dimension
The SmartDimension Command (on page 280) (Dimension

Toolbar) measures the angles or sweep angles of arcs. The
Angle Between Command (on page 281) (Dimension
Toolbar) measures the angle between two elements.
Absolute Coordinates
The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to specify

coordinates.
Annotations
The annotation commands allow you to add text, balloons,

and leaders to drawings.
Anonymous Block
Although anonymous blocks are not necessary for

crosshatching, you can use the Fill Command (Draw Toolbar)
and select from several fill patterns.
Approximation Points
The FreeForm Command (on page 185) allows you to easily

sketch curves. The software converts the approximation into
a precision drawing.
Array
The software provides the Rectangular Pattern Command

(on page 221) (Change Toolbar) and the Circular Pattern
Command (on page 222) for drawing patterns of elements.
Arrowhead
The terminator, such as an arrow or dot at the end of a

dimension line shows which element a dimension measures.
Associative Dimension
The dimensions in the software are associative.
AutoCAD Development
System (ADS)
The software uses macros to create programs to run with the

software. You can create programs that automate many
software tasks.
AutoDesk Device
Interface (ADI)
The system architecture of The software uses GDI or Open

GL for developing device drivers needed for peripherals.
Axes Tripod
The PinPoint Command (on page 270) displays the xy axis

as you draw.
AutoLISP
Programming with the software is easy. You can write

macros for graphics or use 3rd Party LISPS that support the
software architecture.
B
B-spline Curve
Bezier Curve
The FreeForm Command (on page 185) allows you to draw

curves.
609

AutoCAD
Equivalent Command
Bind
OLE servers can be used to join files.
Blip Marks
Blip marks, temporary screen markers displayed when you

designate a point, are not applicable to the software. The
software automatically refreshes geometry as you draw.
Block
Symbols in the software are similar to AutoCAD blocks. You

can also use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD
block in a software document.
removed symbols and OLE server links
Block Definition
Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you to

use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD file.
Block Reference

use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD file.
BYBLOCK
color or line type of symbols within a drawing.
BYLAYER
The Display Manager Command (on page 371) allows you to

define colors, line types and other properties associated with
a layer.
C
Cartesian Coordinate
System
The PinPoint Command (on page 270) allows you to define

precision points in space using a Cartesian coordinate
system.
Centerline
The AutoCenter Line option in the Dimension Command (on

page 281) (Dimension Toolbar) allows you to place a center
line at the center of a curved element.
Center Mark
610
Chamfer
The Chamfer Command (on page 351) allows you to draw a

line between existing lines. The existing lines are trimmed to
the chamfer's end points.
Circular External
Reference
OLE servers allow you to link or embed a file as a reference

file.
Color Map
colors of elements.
Cubic Curve

curves.
Cursor
The mouse cursor allows you to place graphics and

annotations. It is a screen display device.
Cursor Menu
The Shortcut menu automatically appears when you

right-click. The commands displayed on the Shortcut menu
depend upon the type of element or object you select.
Curve

AutoCAD
Equivalent Command
Curve Fitting
curves.
D
Default
The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to predefine

the default settings of elements.
Definition Points
The software does not need definition points for placing an

associative dimension because all dimensions are associated
with the geometry.
DIESEL (Direct
Interpretively Evaluated
String Expression
Language)
Programming in the software allows you to program and

customize menu items.
Diameter Dimension

Toolbar) allows you to place a diameter dimension.
Dimension Line
A dimension line shows where a measurement starts and

stops. All dimensions in the software have dimension lines.
Dimension Line Arc
The arc spanning the angle formed by the extension lines of

an angular dimension. An angular dimension can be placed
with the SmartDimension Command (on page 280)
(Dimension Toolbar).
Dimension Style
The settings that determine the appearance of the dimension.

You can set the dimension style formats in the software by
using the Dimension Command (on page 281).
Dimension Text
The value and text display of dimensioned elements is

defined by using the Dimension Command (on page 281).
Dimension Variables
The dimensioning variables can be defined with the

Dimension Command (on page 281).
Display Extents
Windows are used as display devices. The window

coordinates are defined as view coordinates.
Documentation Drawing
Documentation drawings are two-dimensional drawings that

describe a real world object. Documentation drawings are
composed of drawing sheets.
Drag
Geometry or documents can be moved by dragging them

with the mouse cursor.
Drawing
Drawing sheets are used to draw your elements on.
Drawing Extents
The Fill Command (on page 554) displays the entire drawing
in a window.
Drawing File
Documents are drawing files that can be saved on the disk.

You can save files in the software format or in AutoCAD
format.
611

AutoCAD
Equivalent Command
Drawing Unit
The units of measure for a drawing sheet can be English or

metric.
dxf (Drawing
Interchange Format)
The files you create can be saved in the ASCII file format
used by AutoCAD through OLE servers.
E
Entity
Entities are elements within documents.
Extension Lines
Extension lines, also called witness lines or projection lines,

are parts of dimensions.
External Program
The software allows you to write and run external programs.
External Reference
(xref)
OLE servers allow you to attach files to one another.
F
Fill
The Fill Command (on page 554) (Draw Toolbar) allows you
to fill enclosed shapes with various colors or styles.
Fillet
The Fillet Command (on page 353) creates a constant radius

blend between two elements. The elements are trimmed to
the end points of the fillet.
Fit Points
The FreeForm Command (on page 185) allows you to place

curves with interpolation and approximation points.
Freeze
The Display Manager Command (on page 371) allows you to

define how you want the information on specific layers to
display.
G
Graphics Area
Drawing sheets provide an area for creating and editing a

drawing.
Graphics Cursor
The mouse cursor is a screen display device that allows you

to place graphics and annotations.
Graphics Screen /
Graphics Window
The windows of the software allow you to create graphics

and select commands. Drawing sheets are displayed in the
window.
Grips

selected for an element modification or edit.
Grips Modes

H
Handle
612
Handles in the software are similar to grips in AutoCAD.

AutoCAD
Equivalent Command
Hatching
The Fill Command (on page 554) (Draw Toolbar) allows you
to fill enclosed shapes with various colors or styles.
Horizontal Dimension
Horizontal or vertical dimensions can be placed with the

Distance Between Command (on page 293) (Dimension
Toolbar).
I
Icon Menu
Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus

contain Command names.
Include Angle

Toolbar) allows you to describe the sweep angle of a
dimension.
Initial Environment
Templates allow you to define variables and settings for a

new drawing.
Instance

use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD block or
convert the graphics of an AutoCAD block.
Interpolation Points
The FreeForm Command (on page 185) allows you to create

curves. The points that the curve passes through are created
when you draw the curve.
Island
Islands are closed boundaries that have not been filled within
an area that has been filled with the Fill Command (on page
554) (Draw Toolbar).
J
K
Key
The software provides user properties, OLE servers, and

Open Database Connection (ODBC) from Microsoft.
L
Layer
Layers allow you to group elements according to type or for

manipulation purposes.
Leader
A leader line with a terminator allows you to place

annotations on drawings.
Linetype
The Style Command (on page 420) allows you to define dash
definitions for lines.
Link
In AutoCAD, a link is a database connection between an SQL

element and a database record. In the software, links allow
you to reference information between documents.
613

AutoCAD
Equivalent Command
Macro
The software allows you to write programs in the form of

macros. A macro is a sequence of actions or commands that
are named and saved.
Method
When you program with the software, you use methods. A

method is a named operation or instance.
Mirror
The Mirror Command (on page 335) allows you to move

elements or sets of elements about a mirror point.
Mnemonic
The mnemonics on menus and dialog boxes allow you to

select commands quickly.
Model Space
In the software, you can create 2-D models, which represent

real world objects, by drawing the real world object on a
drawing sheet.
N
Node
The Curve Command (on page 171) in the software draws a

curve that has nodes. The nodes describe the various key
points along the curve.
Normal
A perpendicular vector.
Noun/Verb Selection
In the software you can select either the command or the

object first.
NURBS (Non- Uniform

Rational B- spline)
Curve
A non-uniform rational B-spline curve. The software curves

are mathematically defined as NURBS.
614
Object
The software provides elements for drawing creation.
Object Snap (Osnap)
The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) and

PinPoint Command (on page 270) allow you to create precise
elements on drawings. The software recognizes key points of
elements and describes the relationship between the element
and the mouse pointer.
Object Snap Override

Origin

the coordinates of a point. The Measure Distance command
(Tools menu) allows you to locate positions and points on
elements including elements on symbols.

AutoCAD
Equivalent Command
Ortho Mode

Orthogonal
The SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261) allows

you to define horizontal or vertical element positions on
drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements
and describes the relationship between the element and the
position of the mouse pointer.
P
Pan
The Pan Command (on page 58) allows you to shift the view
of a drawing.
Paper Space
Drawing sheets are 2-D areas that you can use to draw.
Parallel Dimension
Parallel dimensions can be placed with the SmartDimension

Command (on page 280) (Dimension Toolbar). A linear
dimension can be parallel to the line it measures.
Personalization
You can personalize when you install the software.
Pick
Handles and selection sets allow you to select geometry and

objects. The mouse cursor is a screen display device that
allows you to place graphics and annotations.
Point
An x and y position in space.
Pline
The FreeSketch Command (on page 184) allows you to

create an element that is composed of one or more
connected line or arc segments.
Polar Coordinate
System

the coordinates of a point.
Polygon Window
Handles and selection sets highlight when geometry is

Polyline
The FreeSketch Command (on page 184) allows you to

create an element that is composed of one or more
connected line or arc segments.
Q
R
Radial Dimension
Radial dimensions can be placed with the SmartDimension

Command (on page 280) (Dimension Toolbar).
Real World Units

the coordinates of a point. You can draw on drawing sheets
and then scale to real-world units.
615

AutoCAD
Equivalent Command
Redraw
Regenerate
Region
Regions are automatically closed as you draw with the

SmartSketch Settings Command (on page 261).
Relative Coordinates

Rubber- Band Line
The software displays geometry as it is constructed. As you

use a command, one end of a dynamic line is attached to a
point in your drawing and the other end of the line is attached
to the mouse cursor.
Running Object Snap

you to connect end points by moving the pointer over the end
points.
S
Screen Menu

Script File
Scripts are written and run as macros. Programming with

SmartSketch allows you to write macros for the software. A
macro is a sequence of actions or commands that are named
and saved.
Selection Set
The software provides group selection and manipulation

using Select Tool (on page 201) and edit commands.
Snap Mode

you to define how you want to locate elements.
Snap Resolution

you to define locate zones that define how close the pointer
must be to an element you want to recognize or select.
Space
Drawing Sheets allow you to draw in a 2-D work space.
T
Text Style
The Text Box Command (on page 231) (Draw Toolbar) lets
you define the text characteristics you want to use.
Thickness
The z value, or elevation, of a 3-D element is maintained as

an attribute through OLE servers when an AutoCAD file is
embedded in a software file.
Toolbar

Transparent Command
The view commands allow you to start a Command while

another is processing.
616

AutoCAD
Equivalent Command
UCS (User Coordinate

System) Icon

Unit
V
Vector

Vertical Dimension
The length of a line can be measured with the

SmartDimension Command (on page 280) (Dimension
Toolbar). The Distance Between Command (on page 293)
(Dimension Toolbar) can also be used to place a horizontal
or vertical dimension.
View
Windows are used to display drawings from a particular

viewpoint.
Viewport
Drawing sheets allow you to define a bounded area.
W
WPolygo
The software provides group selection and manipulation

using the Select Tool (on page 201).
X
XYZ Point Filters

Y
Z
Zoom Extents
The Zoom Out Command (on page 56) and Zoom Area
Command (on page 55) allow you to increase or decrease
the display of the graphics in a drawing. The Fill Command
(on page 554) changes the display of a window so that all the
elements are displayed.
See Also
AutoCAD-Based Workflow Examples

Conceptual Design
Because the software gives you robust and intuitive drawing tools, it is a natural choice for
sketching and developing concepts during the initial stages of a project. You can capture
relationships as you draw, or easily add them later as relationships or dimensions. You can also
617

alter dimensions to directly drive graphics. After you create your design, you can save it in the
AutoCAD (.dwg) file format to complete downstream tasks in AutoCAD.
Drawing Files
You can use the software to add annotations to existing AutoCAD drawing files by inserting an
AutoCAD drawing file in the software with Object on the Insert menu, adding annotations and
text, and saving the file in AutoCAD format.
If you have not installed AutoCAD but need to provide drawing files in AutoCAD format, you can
create the drawing files in the software and then save the file in AutoCAD format.
Project Management
Managing large projects becomes easier when you use the software to integrate AutoCAD
drawings. You can use the software to gather drawing files from several sources and combine
618

them into a single project book. You can then add details and save the files in AutoCAD format
so other project team members using AutoCAD can review the project.
You can also use the software as a central location for all project informationboth graphic and
non-graphic data. Files created with products that are OLE-compliant can be linked and
embedded into an AutoCAD file that has been opened in the software.
Review and Redlining

The software is an excellent tool for reviewing and redlining AutoCAD drawings. You can use
Object on the Insert menu to link or embed a 2-D or 3-D AutoCAD drawing in the software and
then sketch on the drawing. You can sketch and make revisions on top of the native data. After
reviewing, you can then electronically mail the redlined file to others.
619

See Also
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import

When you translate AutoCAD data into your document, you are concerned with either visual
fidelity or data fidelity or both.
Visual Fidelity
Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after it has been
translated. Your software preserves the visual accuracy of an AutoCAD file by providing support
for the following seven different areas:
Colors
AutoCAD colors are automatically mapped to the corresponding matching red, green, blue
(RGB) color in the color table, resulting in a perfect color match.
Colors that were used in AutoCAD to determine plotting pen widths can also be mapped to
a width in your document by using AutoCAD Color on the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD
Import Options dialog box.
Widths
AutoCAD R9 through R14 polylines are the only type of entity that support a width. Polyline
widths are automatically mapped to an exact matching in model width of your document. All
other entities such as lines, arcs, and circles in AutoCAD do not support width. For the entities
that do not support width, a default width is applied (all elements in your document have a
width). You can make changes to any of the default mappings to define your own mapping with
the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign
Data Tab (Options Dialog Box) (on page 467) after you select Options on the Tools menu).
SmartSketch provides a default set of line widths that correspond to standard metric pencil
leads: .13, .18, .25, .35, .5, .7, 1.0, 1.4, and 2.0.
Linestyles
AutoCAD default line styles are pre-mapped to the most equivalent line styles for your document
on the Linestyle tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box. Line styles other than the
default line styles or any complex line styles containing shapes are mapped to continuous
unless they are specifically mapped on the Linestyle tab.
Hatches
AutoCAD default hatches are automatically mapped to matching fill styles in your document.
Hatches other than the defaults delivered with AutoCAD are stroked into their primitive elements
to preserve their visual accuracy.
Font Styles
AutoCAD default font styles are pre-mapped to their most equivalent font styles in your
document, True Type Fonts, on the Font tab of the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box. Other
620

fonts default to the Arial true type font delivered with Windows. If the font is not listed in the
mapping on the tab, it defaults to Arial.
Xrefs
AutoCAD Xrefs are imported as reference files in your document, which use the automatic
defaults or same options for configuring how color, width, line styles, hatches, and fonts are
handled for visual accuracy.
Paper Space
If paper space was active when an AutoCAD file was saved, the file containing paper space
data causes two sheets to be created when you click Open on the File menu. One sheet
represents the paper space data and is named Paper Space. The other sheet represents model
space data and is named Model Space. The paper space views are recreated as reference
views of the model sheet on the paper space sheet.
AutoCAD files that are reference files instead of files translated using Open on the File
menu, do not support the display of paper space data; instead, the model space information is
displayed.
Configuring the Fit to Sheet Feature

The software automatically calculates the sheet scale in your document then you import
AutoCAD documents so that the range of graphics automatically fits within the lower left-hand
corner of the drawing sheet. If you do not want the sheet scale automatically calculated, then
you must manually modify the .INI file.
To modify the .INI file, you click Explore on the Start menu and go to the directory where
SmartSketch resides. You can use any text editor to modify the file. Double-click itacad. In the
Options section of the file, set Ignore sheet scale = 0.
You can create a template for calculating sheet scale at the scale you want and insert an
AutoCAD document to base the template on. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, you set the
Drawing Scale and Paper Units that you want.
Using AutoCAD Fonts and Styles in Your Document

The software supports the system TrueType fonts delivered with Windows and supplies
additional ANSI and ISO TrueType engineering fonts. When you open a .dwg document, the
software provides a default mapping to determine which TrueType font will be assigned to which
AutoCAD font. You can make changes to this mapping to define your own mapping. You can
change the mapping with Options on the Tools menu. On the File Locations tab, you can set
the paths to the font resources by double clicking on Fonts 1, 2, and 3.
Data fidelity
to its original form in the application that created it. Your document preserves the data accuracy
of an AutoCAD file by providing equivalent element types that entities are mapped to. The
software also provides support for non-displayed data such as attributes on the resulting
elements.
Your document preserves data accuracy of an AutoCAD file by providing support for the
following areas:
621

Units
AutoCAD files are considered unit-less files. The File Units setting for AutoCAD import data on
the Options dialog box is used to determine the units for translated AutoCAD data or referenced
AutoCAD data.
Coordinates
AutoCAD data is automatically positioned to the matching coordinate positions when you
translate the AutoCAD files (click Open on the File menu). Referenced AutoCAD file coordinate
positions are determined by the settings on the Reference File tab on the Options dialog box.
You can use Coincident to import the data in its original coordinate position at a 1 to 1
scale.
Layers
Within your document, there are an unlimited number of layers per sheet. AutoCAD layer names
are preserved as layer names in your document, but the color and linetype settings are not. The
color and linestyle settings are applied directly to the resulting element.
In AutoCAD, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied on a layer-by-layer basis.
When you select a different layer, the colors, line styles, and line widths change. In your
document, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied directly to each individual element or
object. When you select a different layer, the colors, line styles, and line widths are not affected.
When you export back to AutoCAD, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied on an entity
basis.
AutoCAD entity colors & linetypes are determined one of three ways on an element:
Byblock - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of a block
containing it. The software does not support the entity concept so the Byblock properties are
applied directly to the resulting element.
Bylayer - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of its associated
layer. The software does not support the entity concept so the Bylayer properties are applied
directly to the resulting element.
Byentity - occurs when colors and linetypes are directly applied to the entity and override
any Byblock or Bylayer properties. The software supports this concept for all of its elements
and preserves Byentity properties for colors and linestyles.
Blocks
When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate cells or blocks into symbols. You
can change this default with the Options command on the Tools menu so that cells or blocks
are embedded groups. This translates cells and blocks into embedded symbols, or groups, in
your document.
When you import an AutoCAD document that has blocks, a temporary folder is created in the
Temp folder on your hard drive. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded
in the AutoCAD document. By default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported
into the drawing sheet. You can change a setting in \\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ITACAD.INI
to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open the .INI file and change the following line in the
Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0.
Blocks with Attribute Data

When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate all blocks containing attribute data
into symbols with SmartLabels.
622

3D Data
All 3D data is flattened into a 2D view when you translate files using Open on the File menu.
The 2D view orientation is determined by the Orientation setting in the Import area of the
Options dialog box.
The following is an entity to element map when you translate files using Open on the File menu.
AutoCAD
SmartSketch
Line
Line
Circle
Ellipse
Polyline (lines only)
Linestring
Polyline (lines & arcs) Complex String

Arc
Arc
Trace
Line
Point
Point
Face3d
Line
Solid
Linestring
Block
Symbol
Multiline
Linestring
Spline
Bspline Curve
Dimension
Dimension
Text
Text
Paperspace Viewport Reference

Xline
Line
Ray
Line
Database Linkages
Dynamic Attribute set

on element
Attributes

on element
Ellipse
Ellipse
Region
Ignored
Solid3d
Ignored
Mtext
Text
Leader
Leader
Tolerance
Group
Xdata

on the element
Hatch
Fill
Image
Reference
623
The Image Integrator option must be downloaded to support raster reference files.
AutoCAD symbols with nested graphics, groups, and complex shapes (for example
rectangles) will not translate successfully into SmartSketch symbols.
None of the data that is part of the reference file can be deleted or altered using commands
in the software. However, if AutoCAD software is located on your machine, then you can
click Open on the Shortcut menu over the reference file. This will open the AutoCAD
reference file in the AutoCAD application.
If you establish relationships between elements in the SmartSketch file and a reference file,
the relationships will be removed if you change the position of elements in the source file
and then update the reference file in your document.
If you change the inserted information (copied from AutoCAD), the original information does
not change.
See Also
AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box

Controls how an AutoCAD document is opened or inserted into the current document.
See Also
General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 624)
Font Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 625)
Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 625)
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box) (on page 626)
General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)

Blocks - Specifies whether an AutoCAD block is imported as an embedded symbol or a group
of elements. An embedded symbol document has a .sym extension. When you import an
AutoCAD document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp folder on your hard drive. The
temporary folder contains the symbols that are embedded in the AutoCAD document. By
default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You
can change a setting in ITACAD.INI and change the following line in the Options section: Delete
Symbol Definitions = 0.
Template File - Specifies the path and filename for the template that you want to use to create
a document.
Browse - Displays the Browse dialog box.
Fit imported data to active drawing sheet - Places the AutoCAD data on the active drawing
sheet. If the checkbox is not selected, the imported data is placed on a new drawing sheet.
See Also
AutoCAD Template File Dialog Box
Controls how you open a document.
624

shortcut menu to automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts, send the
To use this functionality, you must install the Translators option.
See Also
Font Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps AutoCAD fonts to system TrueType fonts.
SmartSketch supports system TrueType fonts. AutoCAD-compiled shape fonts (.shx) and
postscript binary fonts (.pfb) are not supported. Many of the standard AutoCAD fonts are
pre-mapped to their most equivalent TrueType fonts. If a font is not mapped, it defaults to the
font specified in the first entry in the font mapping list.
See Also
Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)

Maps the line style of the current document to AutoCAD line types. The values for mapping are
as follows:
Line Style
Type
Number
Normal
Continuous
Dashed
Dash
10
Dotted
Dot
11
Dash Dot
Dash Dot
12
Dash 2Dot
Dash Dot Dot
13
Chain
Chain
18
No Style Delivered
Centered Chain
19
Double Chain
Double Chain
20
2Dash Dot
Dash Dash Dot
21
Zig-Zag
No Type Delivered
22
No Style Delivered
End Gap
23
See Also
625

Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)
Maps a line width for the current document to an AutoCAD color.
Default Width - Defines the width to assign to all AutoCAD entities that do not have width or
color-to-width mapping.
See Also
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export

When you translate your document into AutoCAD data, you are concerned with either Visual
fidelity or Data fidelity or both.
To see the AutoCAD versions that are supported for export, click the General tab of the
AutoCAD Export Options dialog box, and click the Version arrow.
Visual Fidelity
Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture after it has been
translated. Your document preserves the visual accuracy of a file during export to AutoCAD file
by providing support for the following areas:
Colors
The software colors map to the closest matching red, green, blue (RGB) color in the default
AutoCAD color table.
Widths can be mapped to an AutoCAD color by using the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD
Export Options dialog box. AutoCAD colors are used to determine plotting pen widths.
Widths
Every element in your document has widths applied that are exported as polyline objects with
equivalent AutoCAD widths if the widths are equal to or greater than the polyline width
threshold. The Polyline width threshold field is located on the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD
Export Options dialog box. Whenever possible, elements that have widths less than the
threshold are exported as AutoCAD entities that do not support width.
Linestyles
The default line styles in your document are pre-mapped to the most equivalent AutoCAD line
styles on the Linestyle tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. Line styles other than
the default line styles or any complex line styles containing shapes are mapped to continuous
unless they are specifically mapped on the Linestyle tab. Linestyles that are not mapped on
export are stroked to give them a more correct appearance. The default length of the stroking
line is 0.1 millimeters (mm).
626

Fill Styles
SmartSketch default fill styles are exported as matching hatch styles in the resulting AutoCAD
files. Blank fill styles are exported as wipeout objects.The boundaries of curved objects with fill
styles are exported as polygonal shapes.
Font Styles
SmartSketch default font styles are pre-mapped to their most equivalent AutoCAD font styles
(True Type Fonts (TTF)) on the Font tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. Other
fonts default to the txt.shx font deliver with Windows. If the font is not listed in the mapping table
on the font tab, it defaults to txt.shx in the resulting AutoCAD file.
Dimension Styles
SmartSketch dimension styles are preserved as AutoCAD dimension styles in the resulting dwg
files.
Reference Files and OLE Inserts

AutoCAD .DWG files that are referenced in SmartSketch are saved as AutoCAD Xrefs in the
resulting AutoCAD file. Raster reference files in SmartSketch are saved as AutoCAD raster files
in the resulting AutoCAD file. Linked and embedded references, including IGR, DGN, DWG and
DXF file types, will be saved as AutoCAD reference files during export to AutoCAD. Embedded
files will be saved in the same location as the master file; linked files will be save in the same
location as the original linked file. OLE inserted objects such as .XLS, .DOC, or .BMP are not
currently supported during export to the AutoCAD file format.
The Merge References setting in itacad.ini determines how linked and embedded
references are translated to AutoCAD. If set to 1 or 2, linked and embedded references are
translated to AutoCAD block references and merged into a single master DWG or DXF file. If set
to 0, separate DWG files are generated for each linked and embedded reference. The default
value is 1.
Multiple Sheets
Only the active sheet in a SmartSketch file is exported to an AutoCAD file. Exporting multiple
sheets from a document is not currently supported.
Data fidelity
to its original form in the application that created it. SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of
an AutoCAD file during export by mapping data to its most equivalent form in AutoCAD.
SmartSketch does not support exporting data such as attribute sets that can be associated with
elements in the file.
SmartSketch preserves element and document data support for the following areas:
Units
The subunits of the file being saved as a dwg file determines the model size of the graphics in
the resulting AutoCAD file.
Coordinates
SmartSketch data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions when you
translate to AutoCAD.
627

SmartFrames and Detail Views
SmartFrames that exist on the active sheet are preserved upon translation to the AutoCAD file;
Detail views - whether on the active sheet or on a background sheet - are also preserved upon
translation to the AutoCAD file. A separate sheet that contains one or more detail views is
automatically created in the export AutoCAD DWG file. The name of the created sheet is taken
from the name of the sheet in SmartSketch containing the detail view(s).
Text Box Borders

In order for text box borders to display correctly in an exported DWG file, you must have wipeout
objects enabled. In AutoCAD 2002, you can download the AutoCAD Wipeout Object Enabler
executable directly from the AutoDesk FTP site. In newer versions of AutoCAD, you can find the
Wipeout Express Tool inside the AutoCAD installation.
Layers
SmartSketch layer names are preserved as AutoCAD layer names, but the color and linetype
settings are not. The color and linestyle settings are applied directly to Byentity, the resulting
element In AutoCAD.
AutoCAD entity colors & linetypes are determined one of three ways on an element:
Byblocka property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of a block
containing it. SmartSketch does not support the entity concept so the Byblock properties are
applied directly to the resulting element.
Bylayera property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or linetype of its associated
layer. SmartSketch does not support the entity concept so the Bylayer properties are applied
directly to the resulting element.
Byentityoccurs when colors and linetypes are directly applied to the entity and override
any Byblock or Bylayer properties. SmartSketch supports this concept for all of its elements
and preserves Byentity properties for colors and linestyles.
The following is an entity to element map when you translate files:
628
SmartSketch
AutoCAD
Line
Line
Ellipse
Circle
Arc
Arc
Point
Point
Connector
Polyline
Linestring
Polyline
Bspline Curve
Polyline
Rectangle
Polyline
Complex String
Polyline
Reference
Xref
Text
Text
Leader
Leader
Dimension
Dimension

Group
Entity or Group
Symbol
Block
SmartLabel
Entities
Parametric
Symbols
Entities
Multi-representatio Entities
n Symbol
Raster Reference
Raster Reference
Leader Lines and Terminators

When using arrows to terminate leader lines, the leader lines are exported and display in
AutoCAD, but the terminating arrows do not display in cases where the leader line is less than
half the length of the entire leader (line and arrow).
See Also
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box

Controls how a document will be saved to AutoCAD file format.
See Also
General Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 629)
Font Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 630)
Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 630)
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box) (on page 631)
General Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)

Version - Specifies the versions of AutoCAD that can be used for export. You can select
multiple versions. The selected versions display in the Save as type list in the Save As dialog
box.
Prototype DWG File - Specifies the default prototype drawing (.dwg) file to use during
translation. This document can contain appropriate styles, color tables, and other preconfigured
settings.
Browse - Displays the AutoCAD Template File dialog box.
See Also
629

Font Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)
Maps the fonts in the current document to AutoCAD-compiled shape fonts (.shx), AutoCAD
postscript binary fonts (.pfb), or system TrueType fonts (.ttf).
If a font is not mapped, it defaults to the font specified in the first entry in the font mapping
list.
See Also
Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)

Maps the AutoCAD line types to line style definitions in the current document.
The number values listed below are used in the linestyle table to map linestyle definitions in
the current document to AutoCAD line types.
Linestyle
Type
Number
Normal
Continuous
Dashed
Dash
10
Dotted
Dot
11
Dash Dot
Dash Dot
12
Dash 2Dot
Dash Dot Dot
13
Chain
Chain
18
No Style Delivered
Centered Chain
19
Double Chain
Double Chain
20
2Dash Dot
Dash Dash Dot
21
Zig-Zag
No Type Delivered
22
No Style Delivered
End Gap
23
See Also
630

Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box)
Maps a line width in the current document to an AutoCAD color.
Polyline Width Threshold - Defines the threshold used to determine when polylines with width
must be created.
See Also
Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD Translation

The configuration file, itacad.ini, is delivered with the Translators (on page 28) option to
<Product Directory>\Program. This configuration file is used by translators and provides the
capability for customizing the process of translation between the software and an AutoCAD
document.
Most of the options found in the itacad.ini file are accessible through the various
tabs on the AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box (on page 624) and AutoCAD Export Options
Dialog Box (on page 629). It is recommended that options modified directly in the .INI file
be done so only by an experienced user at his/her own risk.
The following table defines the .INI settings, along with any corresponding default values:
[Name of
the Section
/Name of
the setting]
1
[Options]
Seed File
Description
Name of a seed file used for export
Import
Export
Default
Value
Yes
Yes
File name
Enable Logging If set, a log file will be created
Yes
Yes
0/1
Read Default
Units
Sets the default units for foreign

format
Yes
Yes
59=m; 61=mm; 62=cm; 63=km;

64=in; 65=ft; 66=yd; 67=mil
Template File
Sets the document that will be used as Yes

a template when importing foreign
data.
Yes
File name
Symbol
Template File
Sets the symbol file that will be used

as a template when importing foreign
data
N/A
File name
Yes
631

7
Dissolve
Symbol to
Groups
A flag that indicates whether or not to

dissolve parametric and
multi-representation symbols to
groups
Yes
Yes
0/1
Ignore Sheet
Scale
If set to 1, the file translated into RAD

is fit to the sheet size by adjusting the
sheet scale.
Yes
N/A
0/1
Processing
Batch
Translation
If set, progress bar dialog boxes do

not display during the translation.
Yes
Yes
0/1
10
Attribute Sets
Names of attributes
Yes
Yes
String
consisting of
attribute
names
delimited by
semicolons
11
Read Block
Options
Sets how the blocks imported from

AutoCAD are handled. The first option
translates blocks into groups, whereas
the second option preserves blocks.
Yes
N/A
Shared
Embeds
632
Rigid groups/ Shared Embeds

12
Write Version
Sets what version of the foreign file

format is created on export.
N/A
Yes
5.0
13
Read
Reference
Options
Specifies options to process reference

files during translation
Yes
N/A
Translate/Lin
k/Merge
14
Read Default
Width
Sets the width to be assigned to all

AutoCAD entities that do not have
width or color to width mapping.
Yes
N/A
0.25
Millimeters
15
Write Polyline
Width
Threshold
Sets the width to determine when

polylines with width must be created.
N/A
Yes
16
Dissolve
Symbol to
Groups
A flag that indicates whether or not to

dissolve parametric and
multi-representation symbols to
groups.
Yes
Yes
0/1
3.x, 4.0, 4.4, 5.0
633

17
Ignore Sheet
Scale
If set to 1, the file translated into RAD

is fit to the sheet size by adjusting the
sheet scale.
Yes
N/A
0/1
18
Export All
Graphics to
PaperSpace
This flag deals with the export of files

with reference attachments. If set to
0, all graphic objects are exported to
Model space. SmartFrames with
clipping boundaries do not display
properly and detail views are ignored.
If set to 1, all graphic objects are
exported into the Paper space.
SmartFrames with clipping boundaries
display properly. Detail views are
ignored. If set to 2, all graphic objects
are exported to Model space and
Paper space is populated so that the
original SmartSketch sheet is
recreated.
Yes
Yes
0/1/2
19
Process
Multiple
Orientation in
Viewports
This flag indicates whether or not to

handle multiple orientation in
viewports.
Yes
N/A
0/1
20
Max
Nesting Depth
Determines how deep the translation

processes the reference files.
Yes
N/A
Number
21
Application
Text Type
Determines if text origin and

justification are preserved.
Yes
Yes
0= Text origin is always in the

upper left corner
1= Origin preserved
22
Single Text
Alignment
If set to 1, horizontal text alignment is

set to Horizontal Justification. If not
specified or if it is set to 0, horizontal
text alignment is set to Left.
Yes
No
0/1
23
Process
Non-Displayabl
e Reference
Files
Determines if non-displayable
reference files are translated.
Yes
Yes
0/1
634

24
Process
Construction
Elements
If set, elements on a MicroStation

construction layer are translated.
Yes
N/A
0/1
25
Attributes as
SmartText
Determines if SmartText is created

from the attributes
Yes
N/A
0/1
26
AutoCAD
Extended Data
Sets the XData Xdata to be imported.
Yes
N/A
String
consisting of
XData
names
delimited by
semicolons
27
Stroke
Reference
Determines if attached reference files

are stroked on export.
N/A
Yes
0/1
28
Stroke Text
Determines if text is stroked during

export.
N/A
Yes
29
Stroke
Dimension
If set, the dimension objects are

stroked on export.
N/A
Yes
0/1
30
Disk-based
Symbols
When set to 1, .SYM files are created

for each foreign symbol during import.
N/A
Yes
0/1
31
Ignore
Non-Displayabl
e Symbols
When set to 1, non-displayable objects Yes

are exported.
Yes
0/1
0/1
635

32
Preserve
Layers on
Dissolved
Symbols
If set, members or symbol are

exported even if their layer is turned
off.
N/A
Yes
0/1
33
Preserve
MSTN UDLS
Styles
When set to 0, user-defined linestyles

are stroked.
Yes
Yes
0/1
34
Push Owner
Attributes to its
Children
If set to 1, RAD dynamic attributes are

moved from a group (symbol) to its
members.
N/A
Yes
0/1
35
Metafile to
Raster DPI
Resolution
Sets the dpi resolution for raster

metadata during export.
N/A
Yes
350
dpi resolution
36
Stroking
Tolerance
Determines the accuracy used when

objects are stroked during export.
N/A
Yes
0.1
millimeters
37
Hatch support
complexity
Supported Hatch complexity of output

format.
N/A
Yes
1 (only
supports a
single
independent
hatch line
with dashes
and gaps)
38
Need hatch
description and
stroke
If true, then stroke hatch even when

hatch name and description are
included in symbology.
N/A
Yes
39
Style Resource
Name
Sets the style filename to be used on

export.
N/A
Yes
Filename
636
0/1

40
Delete Symbol
Definitions
If set, symbol definitions are deleted

after the translation.
Yes
N/A
0/1
41
Merge
References
If set to 1 or 2, linked and embedded

references are translated to AutoCAD
block references and merged into a
single master DWG file. If set to 0,
separate DWG files will be generated
for each linked and embedded
reference.
No
Yes
0 = No Merge
1 = Merge with BIND
2 = Merge with INSERT
42
[Read Default
View] and
[Write Default
View]
Yes
Yes
43
Transformation
Sets the 4x4 matrix.
Yes
Yes
44
Type
Yes
Yes
45
Name
Yes
Yes
46
Reference
Point
Yes
Yes
47
Normal
Yes
Yes
48
Projection
Vector
Yes
Yes
49
Active View
Yes
Yes
50
[Read Text
Fonts] and
[Write Text
Fonts]
Determines the mapping of fonts

between the foreign file format and
RAD.
Yes
Yes
51
[Option Forms]
The following entries determine what

dialog box is opened on the Foreign
Data tab (Options dialog box)
52
Dll
Yes
Yes
53
Import Entry
Point
Yes
N/A
54
Export Entry
Point
N/A
Yes
55
[Read Widths]
and [Write
Widths]
Determines the mapping of the line

widths between the foreign file format
and RAD.
Yes
Yes
56
Export Graphic
Groups
If this option is set to 1, SmartSketch

groups translate to AutoCAD as
groups. If the option is set to 0,
SmartSketch groups translate to
AutoCAD as individual objects.
No
Yes
identity
matrix
4x4 matrix
0/1
637

57
Override
Layers on
Export
The OLOE ini setting is used only

when the itacad.ini file has a seed file
entry in it and is used in exporting
drawing files.
No
Yes
0 = Visibility and symbology of

the graphics are controlled by
the template file layer.
1 = Visibility and symbology of
the graphics are controlled by
the RAD document layer.
2 = Actual block is placed on the
correct layer.
See Also
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import (on page 620)
Open an AutoCAD Document

1.
2.
3.
4.

On the Foreign Data tab, click the software that you want in the Format box.
In the Import box, click Options to access the AutoCAD Import Options dialog box.
On the General tab of the dialog box, enter the directory path and template that you want in
the Template File box.
You can search for the template by clicking Browse.

5. Click File > Open.
6. On the Open dialog box, select the .dwg extension.
7. Select the document that you want to open.
If you create a reference file, you can either click Insert > Object or drag an AutoCAD
document from the Windows Explorer into the current document.
After you place the AutoCAD information on the drawing sheet, you can locate elements and
establish relationships among the new information and elements that are already in the
current document.
AutoCAD polylines are imported as SmartSketch line strings.
AutoCAD mtext (two or more lines of text handled as a text box) is imported into the
software as two separate line strings (text boxes).
referenced documents appear as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four levels
deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document.
When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate all blocks containing attribute
date into symbols with SmartLabels.
All translation options for opening AutoCAD documents using Open on the File menu are
delivered through the Custom or Typical setup for these options. If you cannot open an
AutoCAD document, you should re-install the software with the Custom or Typical setup for
these options.
Place AutoCAD Information in the Document

To place AutoCAD information on the drawing sheet, you must first open the software and open
the document that you want. You should set options for bringing the AutoCAD information into
the document with Options on the Tools menu. The options appear on the Foreign Data tab.
638

To Drag a Document
1. Open the Windows Explorer and select the AutoCAD document that you want.
2. Drag the document into the current document in the software.
To Insert a Document
Click Insert > Object and select the AutoCAD document that you want.

Master file.
To Drag Selected Elements

1. Open the AutoCAD document and select the elements that you want.
2. Drag the selected elements into the current document in the software.
If you press Ctrl while you drag a document, the symbol is embedded. If you press Ctrl +
Shift, the document is linked.
To Copy and Paste Selected Elements

1. Open the AutoCAD document and select the elements that you want.
2. Copy the selected information.
3. In the software, on the Edit menu, click Paste Special or Copy to copy the selected
elements into the current document.
You can also open an AutoCAD document directly with Open on the File menu.
referenced documents appear as well. Nested reference documents can be up to four levels
deep. You can locate referenced documents in the current document.
After you place the AutoCAD information in the current document, you can locate elements
and establish relationships between the new information and elements that you place using
the software.
When placing translated AutoCAD symbols, all elements of the items that make up the body
of the component need to be placed on the default layer of the document.
See Also
Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File

You can establish relationships between elements in the current document and elements within
an AutoCAD object that you inserted.
1. Place an AutoCAD reference file on the drawing sheet. You can use one of several
methods.
639

You should set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If you want to see the
relationship handles, set Relationship Handles on the Tools menu.
2. Establish relationships between elements in the object and elements in the document in the
same manner you would any elements.
Make Elements Equal (on page 358) Make Elements Parallel (on page 359)
If you change the position of elements in an AutoCAD document that is linked to your
current document and then update the link in the document, the relationships will not be valid
any more.
See Also
Control Layers in an AutoCAD Reference File

1. Open the AutoCAD reference file.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Any file that is not native to Catalog Manager and that is linked or embedded and
used for reference information is termed a reference file.
Adjust the file in the active view by clicking Fit
.
On the Tools menu, click Display Manager.
If the document contains multiple drawing sheets, select the sheet which contains the
reference file on the Sheets tab.
Click the Layers tab.
Turn On/Off Layer Display

2. In the Display column, turn on/off a layer by selecting or deselecting the check box.
Override the Color of a Layer or Layer Group

2. Click in the Colors column of the selected layer/layer group to display the Colors dialog
box.
3. Select a color from the list.
The Layers column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active
drawing sheet. Layer groups appear first in the list, followed by individual layers.
If you wish to preview your changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply.
See Also
640
SECTION 22
Using the Validation Add-In Tool

The SmartPlant Validation Tools Add-In is a file validation utility that allows you to scan your
project files to detect certain kinds of stream inconsistencies and conflicts between style type
and geometry type. The results of each scan are written to a validation log file.
After it is installed, you can use the utility to scan your files on a case-by-case basis or to scan
each file automatically when it is opened in the software.
Install the Validation Tools Add-In

The Validation Tools AddIn allows you to run a file validation utility that scans documents for
certain kinds of stream inconsistencies and conflicts between style type and geometry type. The
results of each scan are written to a validation log file.
You can use the Validation Tool to scan your files on a case-by-case basis or to scan each file
automatically when it is opened in the software.
2. In the Add-In Manager dialog box, select the Validation Tools AddIn check box in the list
of Available add-ins.
If the add-in is not displayed in the Available add-ins list, click Browse and navigate to
<installation directory>:\Program\igrValidateAddIn413.dll.
If you do not see the Validation Tools AddIn file, run the Custom setup to install this
option. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the SmartSketch
Installation Guide, available with the Help > Printable Guides command from within the
software.
3. Click OK. The software displays the Validate toolbar in the SmartSketch window.
You can drag the Validate toolbar and dock it at the top, bottom, or either side of the
document window.
The Validation Tools Add-In remains active until you disable it. To disable the Validation
Tools Add-In, clear the associated check box.
641
Run the Validate Tool on the Active Document
Make sure you have installed the Validation Tools Add-In. For more information, see
Install the Validation Tools Add-In.
The following procedure is only necessary if you have disabled the Validate on file open
option the Validation Options dialog box. For more information about this option, as well as
the other options available on the dialog box, read Validation Options Dialog Box (on page
643).
1. Open a document in SmartSketch.
2. On the Validate toolbar, click Validate
If the Validate toolbar is not displayed, do the following:

i. Click View > Toolbars.
ii. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the Validate check box in the Toolbars list.
iii. Click OK.
So that the Validate toolbar remains visible, you can dock it to the top, bottom, or either
side of the drawing window.
3. The Validate Tool scans the document. If no invalid elements are found, the software
displays the following message:
4. Click OK to close the Validate message box.
The software writes the results of the file validation process to a log file and saves it in the
location you specified in the Validation Options dialog box. The name of the log file is
dependent upon the storage location you have specified.
You can enable the Validate Tool to automatically scan each file as it is opened in the
software.
See Also
Validation Options Command (on page 643)
642
Validate Command
Runs the Validate Tool. During the file validation process, the software scans the contents
of the active document for certain kinds of stream inconsistencies and conflicts between style
type and geometry type. The results of the scan are written to a log file and saved in the location
specified in the Validation Options dialog box.
See Also
Run the Validate Tool on the Active Document (on page 642)
Validation Options Dialog Box (on page 643)
Validation Options Command

Displays the Validation Options dialog box. You use this dialog box to specify the storage
location for the log file that the software generates when it scans the contents of a file for
inconsistencies and invalid elements. Additionally, you can specify whether or not the Validate
Tool will automatically scan the contents of each file as it is opened in the software.
See Also
Validation Options Dialog Box

Provides the ability to specify the location of the log file that the software generates whenever it
runs the Validate Tool. You can also use this dialog box to enable or disable the utility to
automatically scan each file as it is opened in the software.
Log file location - Specifies where the log file that the software generates during the file
validation process is stored. You can choose any one of the following three options:
Desktop - Saves the validation log file on the Desktop of the local computer. By default, the
software saves the log file as SmartSketch.Document.log.
Document location - Saves the validation log file in the same location as the document that
is being validated. By default, the software saves the log file as the full document name
appended with .log (filename.igr.log).
Path - Saves the validation log file to the location and filename specified by the path. When
specifying a path, you must type the full location, including the filename.
Validate on file open - Enables the Validate Tool to scan each document automatically
whenever it is opened in the software. This option is disabled by default.
643

When the Validate on file open option is active, the software does not create a log
file nor does it display the Validate message box after it scans a document..
See Also
Run the Validate Tool on the Active Document (on page 642)
644
SECTION 23
Sample Workflows
The topics in this section provide you with step-by-step workflows for using SmartSketch tools to
perform a variety of common tasks.
Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained

Relationships cannot be maintained in certain cases, as in the following example.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by 3 Points .
2. Click where you want the sweep of the arc to begin.
3. Move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes a point on the element
relationship with a line on the drawing sheet.
4. When the Point On relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the
second input point for the arc.
5. Move the pointer past the line and click. The position of this input point defines it as the end
of the sweep, making the point in the middle a key point that cannot have relationships. The
software recognizes this, and does not maintain the point on element relationship.
If the third input point for the arc had been between the first two points, then it would have
been interpreted as the arc midpoint, making the second input point one end of the arc sweep.
In this case, the point would have been constrainable, and the software would have maintained
the point on element relationship.
645
Sample Workflows
Connect Points While Drawing a Line

2. Click where you want the line to begin.
3. Move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes the end point of a line on the
drawing sheet.
4. When the point on relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the end of
the line.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a connect relationship handle where
the two lines meet.
Connect Points While Modifying a Line

1. Select the line you want to modify.
2. Position the Select Tool over the handle at the end of the line you want to modify. The
pointer changes to a plus (+) shape to indicate that you have located the handle.
646
Sample Workflows
3. Drag the handle to a position where the software recognizes the end point of another line on
the drawing sheet.
4. Release the mouse button to place the end point of the line you are modifying at the end
point of the stationary line.
Creating a Kinematics Animation

1. Click File > New.
2. Select the Mechanical Imperial template.
Selecting the Mechanical Imperial template creates a document with a C-wide sheet
and a 1:1 scale.
.
4. Browse to the directory with the field pump symbols.
5. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the foundation symbol in the lower left area of the
document.
6. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the pendulum, donkey head, beam rod, and pump thread
symbols so that these do not overlap each other or the foundation.
To connect the parts

1. On the Tools menu, select Maintain Relationships. Your action confirms that the
relationships are maintained when you move parts of the drawing.
2. On the Relationship toolbar, click Lock
647
Sample Workflows
3. To lock the foundation, select one of the end points of the line on the lower right side. This
action keeps the foundation stationary when you attach the other components or animate
the movement.
To connect the pendulum to the motor on the foundation

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric. .
2. Select the circle on the left end of the pendulum arm as the first element.
3. Select the small circle on the motor as the next element. The pendulum moves so that the
circles align and are concentric.
The pendulum appears on top of the motor and the foundation. If the pendulum does not
do this, select the pendulum using Select on the Draw toolbar. You can then click Bring To
Front on the Change toolbar. This action ensures that the pendulum is on top of the motor and
foundation.
To connect the donkey head to the top of the foundation

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric.
2. Select the circle at the center of the donkey head for the first element.
3. Select the circle at the top of the A-frame of the foundation symbol for the second element.
The donkey head moves so it appears balanced on top of the A-frame and the circles align.
To connect the beam rod to the pendulum

2. Select the lower circle on the beam rod for the first element.
3. Select the right-most circle on the pendulum arm for the second element. This circle is
almost centered on the pendulum. The rod moves and connects with the pendulum.
To connect the beam rod to the donkey head

2. Select the circle on top of the beam rod for the first element.
3. Select the circle on the left side of the donkey head for the second element.
The pendulum, donkey head, and beam rod now move so that the connections are
complete.
The beam rod appears on top of the pendulum. Otherwise, click Select Tool on the Draw
toolbar. You can then click Bring To Front on the Change toolbar. This action ensures that the
beam rod appears on top of the other parts.
To connect the pump thread to the donkey head

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Connect
.
2. Click the top of the line on the pump thread.
3. For the second element, select the endpoint of the small line embedded along the right edge
of the donkey head. The thread moves and attaches to the head.
You can zoom on the edge of the head to find this line, because it is very small. On the
Main toolbar, click Zoom Area
.
To place a dimension on the pendulum for controlling the rotation angle

1. Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings.
648
Sample Workflows
2. On the Relationships tab of the SmartSketch dialog box, ensure that the Midpoint check
box is set.
3. On the Dimension toolbar, click Angle Between to place the dimension. The dimension is
driving, so it appears in black
.
To select the circle on the pendulum where it connects to the motor, zoom in close
enough to see the entire pendulum in full view. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area.
You must select the right circle to ensure that a driving dimension is placed. If you
use the wrong circle, the dimension will be a driven dimension, shown as green. If this
should occur, delete the dimension and try again.
4. Pass the pointer over the circle where the pendulum connects to the motor. You see three
ellipses appear next to the pointer.
5. Click to see a box. This is PickQuick. The box has two numbers. This PickQuick box
indicates how many elements you can select at this location in the window. In this case, you
can select only two elements.
6. Click the number 2 square.
You can see three squares in the PickQuick box, depending on the zoom distance when
you see the ellipses. If you see more than two squares, dismiss the PickQuick box by
selecting the X in the upper right, and then zoom in closer and try again. On the Main
toolbar, click Zoom Area. After you can see only two numbered squares in the PickQuick
box, select the number two square. This action selects the circle associated with box
number two as the first point of the dimension.
If PickQuick does not appear, you can also click Bring To Front and click the motor
symbol to bring it to the front to try the previous steps. You need to click Send To Back after
you complete the steps to bring the pendulum back to the front.
Pass the pointer over the line on the right end of the pendulum and move slowly toward the
mid-point of the line. When you see the midpoint indicator, click for the second point of the
dimension. Place the dimension to the right of the pendulum. Location is not important. This
dimension drives the animation of the pump.
To drive the model
After you place the dimension, you can select the dimension with the Select Tool and
change the value in the ribbon. When the dimension changes, the angle of the pendulum
changes and all of the other parts change accordingly.
See Also
649
Sample Workflows
Customizing a Toolbar
Using Extend to Next on the Draw toolbar, you can extend one line to the next line. This
command is easy and intuitive to use. However, sometimes you might want to extend a line a
specific distance that does not depend on the location of another element.
1. In the document, place two lines that are not connected, but are perpendicular.
2. On the Tools menu, click Customize.
3. On the Customize dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.
4. In the Categories box, click Custom Commands.
5. Click Browse.
6. On the Select Macro Directory dialog box, navigate the <INSTALLATION
DIRECTORY>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\VB
EXAMPLES\ACTXCOM\RIBBONS\EXTEND directory, and click EXTEND.OCX.
If you cannot find the VB Examples directory, you must run a Custom setup and
select the Programming Tools option.
7. Click OK.
8. On the Customize dialog box, in the Custom Commands box, drag the EXTEND.OCX
filename onto the drawing sheet. The filename appears as a separate floating toolbar.
9. Click Close to close the Customize dialog box.
10. Drag the floating toolbar over to the top of the window and place it beside the Main toolbar.
11. On the new toolbar, click Extend.
12. On the Extend by Distance dialog box, in the Distance box, type 10 and press Enter. The
dialog box automatically converts whatever you type into the units of measure that are set
for the current document. You can set the units using Properties on the File menu.
13. In the document, drag the mouse over the line that you want to extend. A preview of what
the line will look like shows up in a red color.
14. Click the line to set the distance.
15. On the Extend by Distance dialog box, click Close.
You can write your own applications that are very similar to the EXTEND.OCX file and run them
from within the current document. Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartSketch
> Programming Help to get more information about creating your own macros.
Programming Help is only available if you have installed the Programming Tools
(on page 27) option. For more information on installing SmartSketch options, see the
Installation Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command.
650
Sample Workflows
Dimension the Length of a Line

.
2. Click a line. SmartDimension dynamically displays a linear dimension.
3. Position the dimension, and then click to place it.
Dimension the Diameter of a Circle

.
2. Click a circle. SmartDimension dynamically displays a diameter dimension.
3. Position the dimension, and then click to place it.
Draw an Arc
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc By Center Point
2. Click where you want to place the center point.
3. Move the pointer horizontally to a position where the software recognizes step angle
alignment with the center point.
4. Click where you want the sweep to begin.
651
Sample Workflows
5. Move the pointer to a position where the software identifies the step angle you want to use
for the sweep.
6. While the step angle relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to define the end
of the sweep.
Draw a Horizontal Line

You can use relationships to draw a line that is exactly horizontal. You can apply a horizontal
relationship as you draw the line, or draw the line without a horizontal relationship.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings.

On the Relationships tab, select Horizontal or Vertical, and then click OK.
On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous .
Click where you want to place the first end point of the line, anywhere in the application
window.
5. Move the pointer around in the window. Notice that the dynamic line display always extends
from the end point you just placed to the current pointer position. You may also see
relationship indicators displayed at the pointer.
Relationship handles can be displayed or hidden with Relationship Handles on the

Tools menu.
6. Move the pointer to make the dynamic line approximately horizontal.
7. When the horizontal relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer, click to place the
second end point.
652
If Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu is set, the software places a horizontal
relationship handle on the new line.
If you do not want to place a horizontal relationship, you can follow the same procedure with
Maintain Relationships cleared. The line will still be exactly horizontal when you draw it.
Sample Workflows
Draw a Line
2. Click where you want a new line to begin.
3. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet. Notice that the line follows the movement of
the pointer. At the same time, the pointer recognizes any relationships it encounters, such
as a horizontal relationship. When the pointer finds a relationship, a relationship indicator
appears at the pointer.
4. Click to place the end point of the line according to the displayed relationships.
5. Continue clicking to draw additional line segments, or right-click to end the command.
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line

You can use relationships to connect an element you are drawing with an existing element. You
can apply a connect relationship as you draw the lines, or draw the line without a connect
relationship.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings.

On the Relationships tab, set End Point, and click OK.
On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous .
Move the pointer to the end of a line in the application window. The software displays the
End Point relationship indicator at the pointer.
While the software displays the relationship indicator, click to place the first end point of
the new line. This end point is connected to the end point of the previous line.
5. Click where you want to place the second end point of the new line.
653
Sample Workflows
6. The new line and the previous line have connected end points.
If Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu is set, the software places a connect
relationship handle at the point where the two lines connect.
If you do not want to place a connect relationship, you can follow the same procedure
with Maintain Relationships cleared. The end points of the two lines will still be exactly
coincident when you draw them.
Draw a Line with PinPoint

You can use PinPoint to draw a line starting at a specific x and y distance from a known
position in your drawing.
.
2. Click where you want the target point to be.
3. Change the step value in the PinPoint Ribbon if it is not already set to a value that is
appropriate for the operation.
5. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet. PinPoint displays at the pointer its current x
and y positions in relation to the target point.
6. Click when the pointer is positioned where you want the line to begin.
7. Click where you want the second point of the line to be, or type the length and/or angle on
the Line/Arc Continuous ribbon and then click to draw the line.
8. If you are finished with the PinPoint command, click PinPoint on the Main toolbar to
dismiss the command.
See Also
Establish More Than One Relationship

654
Sample Workflows
2. Click where you want the line to begin.
3. Move the pointer to recognize point on element and tangent relationships with a circle on the
drawing sheet.
4. While the point on element and tangent relationship indicators are displayed at the pointer,
click to define the end point of the line.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a relationship handle for each recognized
relationship.
Formatting a New Drawing

You can use styles to make new drawings conform to your company's standards. For example,
the software provides line styles with names such as Normal. You have decided to apply the
Normal style to hidden lines. The Normal style has a line type that looks like a dashed line.
Your company standard may require that a hidden line look like a dotted line.
To change the Normal line style to conform to your company's standards, you can follow these
steps:
2. On the Style dialog box, click the line style type in the Style Type box.
3. In the Styles list box, click the Normal line style.
4. Click Modify to access the Modify Line Style dialog box.
5. On the General tab, in the Type box, select the line type that looks like a dotted line.
All the lines that you draw while the Normal style is selected on the ribbon will conform to your
companys standards: hidden lines will appear as dotted lines. You can save the style to a
template with Style on the Format menu. This allows you to use the style again in other
drawings.
655
Sample Workflows
Formatting an Existing Drawing

You can use styles to make existing drawings conform to your company's standards. Suppose
you receive a drawing from another company, and all the hidden lines are continuous.
Your company standard indicates that hidden lines should be a line type that is dashed. You
have been using a line style, called Dashed, to conform to the standards used by your
company.
To change the hidden lines in the drawing quickly and efficiently, you can follow these steps:
1. Open the drawing that you received from the other company.
2. Select all the lines that you want to change.
3. On the ribbon, select Dashed in the Style box to change all the lines that you have
selected. All the lines now appear as dashed lines instead of continuous lines.
Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet

Before you can link a variable to a spreadsheet, you must first create the variables you want in
the design document. You can link to a spreadsheet created in Microsoft Excel or other
spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects.
1. In the current document, create a rectangle and dimensions as shown.
Use Line/Arc Continuous

on the Draw ribbon to create and dimension the
rectangle as specified in the previous illustration.
2. Click Tools > Variables to display the dimensions you defined.
656
Although the values that appear in the Name column are automatically generated by the
software, you can edit the names.
By default, the Variable Table filter is set to Last selected window, meaning that only
the variables that are associated with elements in the active window will display. To
display all the variables that are associated with the elements in the current document,
set the filter to File.
Sample Workflows
3. In Excel, create and save a document that contains the spreadsheet you want to link to. The
spreadsheet should contain the appropriate values for dimensional relationships as follows:
4. Arrange the windows of the Excel document and the SmartSketch document so that you can
see the appropriate cells in both documents.
5. In the Excel document, select the cell that you want to link to.
6. Click Edit > Copy to copy the selected cells.
7. Click the SmartSketch document so that it becomes the active document.
8. In the Variable Table, in the Formula column, click the cell of the variable that you want to
link the spreadsheet to.
9. On the shortcut menu, click Paste Link.
To access the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white area of the Variable
Table and right-click.
Click Enter to accept the value you pasted.
Repeat the previous steps as needed for the other values. The resulting Variable Table
should update as follows:
When you edit the value in the Excel document, the variable in the Variable Table updates as
well. When you link the dimensions in the SmartSketch document to the Excel document, you
can change the dimensions of the SmartSketch document by editing the corresponding values
in the Excel document. The SmartSketch document automatically updates.
Measure the Length of a Line

Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances using Measure
Distance. For example, consider the following workflow.
1. On the Draw toolbar, select Line/Arc Continuous and draw a line.
2. Click Tools > Measure Distance and measure a distance.

You do not need to exit Line/Arc Continuous before measuring a distance.
3. Right-click to exit Measure Distance. Line/Arc Continuous is still activeyou can pick up
where you left off and continue using Line/Arc Continuous.
657
Sample Workflows
Place a Doubleline Precisely

1. On the Tools menu, set the PinPoint option On.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
You can click Reposition Target on the PinPoint toolbar or press F12 to change the
location of the target point to the current position.
On the Draw toolbar, click Place Doubleline.
Click a point to start the doubleline.
Click a point to end the doubleline. This action defines the length and rotation angle of the
doubleline.
To end the doubleline, right-click.
Pause over the doubleline, and press F12 to reposition the target point and to precisely
determine the starting point of the next doubleline.
Place the second doubleline relative to a known point on the first one.
You can also press F9 to set PinPoint on or off.

Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also
You can press Esc to end a doubleline or a doubleline segment.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software creates relationships between the endpoints
of the lines.
You can use the software to create an end point of a doubleline tangent or perpendicular to
the key point or end point of another element.
doubleline.
See Also
Draw a Doubleline (on page 158)
658
Sample Workflows
Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional Values

You can use the Variable Table to create expressions that change dimensions in the drawing
when you change the expressions.
1. Open a drawing document.
2. Click Tools > Variables. The Variable Table displays.
3. On the Variable Table window, click Filter
and define which variables you want to
display in the Variable Table. For example, in the Filter dialog box, if you select
Dimensions in Type and then select Last selected window, this displays all the
dimensions that appear in the active window.
The default filter is set to Last selected window, meaning that only the variables that
are associated with elements in the active window will display. To display all the variables
that are associated with the elements in the current document, set the filter to File.
4. In the Variable Table, click the Formula cell that displays the dimension that you want to
edit and type an arithmetic expression to calculate the value of the dimension: V681/2.
When you type an entry in the cell, the entry also appears in the Formula Bar.
5. On the Formula Bar, click Enter or press ENTER to calculate the result of the expression.
In this example, when V681 is modified, V680 is automatically updated to reflect the
relationship.
659
Sample Workflows
660
Glossary
A
active style
Style that is used when you draw an element or copy it. You can change the active style to one
of the styles listed in the Style box on the ribbon bar.
angular dimension
Measures the sweep angle of an arc, the angle between an origin and a line, the angle between
two lines, or the angle among three key points.
annotation
Text, graphics, or symbols that give you more information about a drawing.
aspect ratio
Ratio of width to height of geometry.
associative
Condition in which an element is related to another element.
associative dimension
Dimension that is updated when the measurement of the element it refers to changes.
associativity
Embraces all techniques for capturing design intent, including variational design, parametric
design, and feature-based modeling.
attribute
User-defined property or parameter assigned to an element, object, or document. A parameter
refers to variables in a symbol document that drive dimensional values. You can display
attributes with the Attribute Viewer.
azimuth
Horizontal direction expressed as an angle, progressing from a fixed point, based on a circle.
B
background sheet
Component of a drawing sheet. The background sheet is used for graphics that you want to
display on more than one drawing, such as a border, title block, logo, or raster background
661
Glossary
picture (watermark). A background sheet can be displayed and printed along with any attached
working sheet.
balloon
Type of annotation that consists of a closed shape that contains text. A balloon defines
individual parts in assemblies and field notes on drawings.
base bearing
Direction (North, South, East, West) bearing to refer to an angle.
baseline
Area between a line and text. The process that freezes a document from any further
modification. When you baseline a document, you also freeze any documents that are linked to
the baselined document.
basic
Shows a dimension with a border.
bearing
Determination of position to refer to an angle.
break line
Line connecting a leader line to annotation text.
C
center point
Middle of a circle or arc.
centerline
Annotation on a mechanical drawing that marks the center position of a hole or other feature on
a part.
chained dimension group

A series of dimensions that are arranged in a straight line. A chained dimension group measures
locations from element to element.
chamfer
Corner that has been cut at an angle.
class
Shows the dimension along with the user-defined class.
662
Glossary
closed curve
Curve whose end points meet. A closed curve encloses an area.
closed element
Element whose end points meet. A closed element encloses an area.
coincident relationship
Relationship that specifies that two points have the same location.
collinear relationship
Relationship that ensures that a set of identified points or lines lie in a straight line.
command
Tool designed to complete a single task, such as create an arc or a line.
container
Document that contains documents created with other applications. Through OLE you can
access the application that created the document and link and embed a document created by
another application.
control menu
Accesses standard Windows commands for minimizing, maximizing, and switching between
applications.
coordinate dimension
Group of dimensions that measure locations from a common origin.
cross hatching
Annotation on a drawing that designates the fill area of a model; a fill.
curve
Element type that is not linear.
cusp node
Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a cusp node bends sharply at the node. A handle can be
attached to a cusp node for editing.
D
diameter dimension
Dimension that measures the diameter of a circle or arc.
663
Glossary
dimension
Control that assigns and maintains a dimensional value to an individual element or establishes a
dimensional relationship among multiple elements. A label with text, lines, and arrows
graphically represents a dimension.
dimension axis
Axis for dimension orientation that you define by selecting a line. You can place linear
dimensions that run parallel or perpendicular to the axis. By default, dimensions are placed
horizontally or vertically.
dimension group
Series of dimensions. You can place a chained dimension group, a coordinate dimension group,
or a stacked dimension group.
dimension line
A line used to define the measurement of a part feature. Dimension lines consist of a solid line
with arrows at both ends and a dimension in the center.
dimensional value
Text that indicates the value of a dimensional measurement, such as distance, length, or angle.
direction
Clockwise or counterclockwise indicator for the angle bearing.
display filter
Tool that allows you to display selected layers in a drawing.
document data
Annotations, such as dimensions, text boxes, callouts, balloons, and centerlines, that are used
to describe design data.
drawing sheet tab

Drawing sheet tabs are located at the bottom of the drawing sheets in your document. There is a
drawing sheet tab for each drawing sheet. The drawing sheet tabs allow you to change the
active drawing sheet, create new drawing sheets, delete drawing sheets, and copy drawing
sheets.
driven dimension
A dimension with a value that depends on the value of other dimensions or elements.
664
Glossary
driving dimension
Dimension with a value that controls the size, orientation, or location of an element.
E
edge point
Location on the boundary of an element. For example, edge points can be used to define the
circumference of a circle.
embed
Method for inserting information from a source document into the active document. Once
embedded, the information becomes part of the active document; if changes are made to the
source document, the updates are not reflected in the active document.
end point
End of an element.
equation
Algebraic relationship between dimensions and/or numeric properties.
error dimension
Driving or driven dimensions that the software cannot recalculate correctly after parametric
attributes on driving dimensions are changed.
F
file locking
Ability to prevent updates to a document.
fill
Pattern or solid color placed inside a closed boundary.
free space
An area that is not on or inside an element or object on a drawing sheet.
freeform
Drawing tool that allows you to use the mouse to sketch curves. As you press and hold the
mouse button and drag the pointer across the drawing sheet, a rough sketch of your design
appears. When you release the mouse button, the software turns your sketch into smooth
curves.
665
Glossary
freesketch
Drawing tool that allows you to use the mouse to sketch lines, arcs, circles, and rectangles. As
you press and hold the mouse button and drag the pointer across the drawing sheet, a rough
sketch of your design appears. When you release the mouse button, the software recognizes
the shapes in your sketch and turns them into a precise drawing.
from point
Starting point for an action. For example, when you rotate elements, the from point determines
where you want the rotation to begin.
G
geometric element
Point, line, arc, circle, or other simple geometry unit.
group
Collection of objects that you can manipulate as a single item.
H
handle
Solid or hollow squares that are displayed at significant positions on a geometric element when
you select the element. You can manipulate an element with a handle.
help lines
Dashed coordinate axes displayed by PinPoint. The help lines extend from the target point to
the current pointer location. They are dynamically updated as you move the cursor. You can turn
the help line display on or off.
horizontal relationship
Relationship that specifies that the end points of a line, or two key points, are level with each
other along the x axis.
horizontal scroll bar

Horizontal scroll bar allows you to pan the active window from top to bottom.
hyperlink
Colored and underlined text or a graphic that you click to go to a file, a location in a file, an
HTML page on the World Wide Web, or an HTML page on an intranet. Hyperlinks can also go to
Gopher, telnet, newsgroup, and FTP sites.
666
Glossary
I
image
Raster image, which can be a .TIFF, .GIF, .JFIF, .BMP, .COT, .CIT, or .RLE document.
inspection
Shows the dimension inside a balloon.
intent zone
Quadrant divided into four pie-shaped wedges that determines the behavior of an element's
relationship to either a circle or arc. Intent zones allow you to specify where you want to draw an
element in relation to an arc or circle. For example, as you draw an arc, you can change the
arc's direction by moving the cursor to a different position within the intent zone. You can define
the size of the intent zone by specifying the number of pixels in it.
isometric
Turned so that three mutually perpendicular edges are equally shortened. A two-dimensional
representation of a three-dimensional object.
isometric drawing
Drawing represented as the object or element is actually projected on a plane of projection: a 3D
drawing represented in 2D.
K
key point
Recognizable point on an element. Key points include vertices, mid points, center points, and so
forth.
kinematics analysis
Analysis of mechanical motion.
L
layer
Logical grouping of elements or objects on a drawing sheet. You can have several layers in a
drawing sheet.
limit
Shows the upper and lower dimensions based on the user-defined tolerances.
667
Glossary
linear dimension
Dimension that measures the linear distance between two or more elements, the length of a
line, or the arc length of an arc.
locate zone
Circular area at the center of the crosshair cursor or at the end of the arrow cursor. The locate
zone specifies how close the cursor must be to an element you want to recognize or select. You
can define the size of the locate zone with the SmartSketch Settings command on the Tools
menu.
lock
Relationship that makes the position of an element or key point, or the value of a driving
dimension, stationary.
M
midpoint
Middle point of an element.
mirror axis
Line about which the selection set is mirrored. When you select the Mirror command, the
software displays horizontal and vertical mirror axes that go through the center of the selection
set. You can display other mirror axes by locating linear elements.
modification
Act of changing the size, position, or orientation of an element by modifying the element or its
handles.
N
nested symbol
Symbol that is placed into a document which is then placed as a symbol in another document.
Symbols that are public display across different documents. Symbols that are private only
display in the first document.
node
Vertex on a curve. An exterior node has one handle, and an interior node has two handles. A
curve can have one or more smooth, cusp, or symmetric nodes. The type of node a curve has
affects how you modify the curve.
nominal
Shows the dimension based on the current active parameters.
668
Glossary
O
object
Information that can be linked or embedded into an OLE-compliant product. A group of elements
that represent a real-world object. An object can also be made up of a single element.
open curve
Curve whose end points do not meet.
open element
Element whose end points do not meet.
P
parallel relationship
Relationship that specifies that the orientation of one line is identical to that of another line.
parameter
Attribute assigned to an element or object, usually a numerical value representing a dimension.
A parameter is a mechanism to change a property. A parameter refers to variables in a symbol
document that drive dimensional values. Parameters appear as bold characters in the Attribute
Viewer.
parametric symbol
Symbol that contains geometry constrained together using relationships, with driving dimensions
that are defined as adjustable parameters.
perpendicular relationship
Relationship that specifies that the orientation of a line or end point of an arc is at a right angle
to the orientation of another line, arc, circle, or curve.
pickquick
Automatic software tool that allows you to select an element when several elements overlap.
When you place the pointer over a set of overlapping elements, three small circles appear at the
bottom right of the cursor. When you click, a small toolbar with the number of selectable
elements appears. You can move the pointer over the numbers; and, when the element that you
want highlights, you can click on the corresponding number to select it.
pinpoint
Tool that allows you to place, move, and modify elements with precision, relative to a reference
point.
669
Glossary
pointer
Screen device that you use to select elements, commands, and other items in the software.
primary axis
Axis that defines the rotation angle of the ellipse. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis; the
angle increases in the counterclockwise direction. The primary axis is defined first and can be
shorter than the secondary axis.
property
Unique characteristic of an element, object, symbol, or document. You can display document
properties in the Windows Explorer or by clicking Properties on the File menu or Edit menu.
R
radial dimension
Dimension that measures the radius of an arc, circle, ellipse, or curve.
reference
Shows the dimension within parentheses.
reference file
Any file not native to Catalog Manager that is linked or embedded and used for reference
information. You click Insert > Object to link or embed a reference file, or you can drag or drop
it with Windows Explorer.
relationship
Condition that exists for an individual element or between elements. You can establish
relationships as you place new elements or between elements already on the drawing sheet. If
Maintain Relationships is set, then the relationship controls the modification behavior of the
related elements. For example, if two lines have a parallel relationship, they remain parallel
when one of the lines is moved. SmartSketch recognizes potential relationships as you draw.
Relationship handles are placed on related elements to represent maintained relationships.
670
Glossary
relationship handle
Graphic used to represent a geometric relationship between elements, key points, and
dimensions, or between key points and elements. The relationship handle shows that the
designated relationship is being maintained.
relationship indicator
Graphic that is displayed at the pointer when the software recognizes a SmartSketch
relationship.
ribbon bar
Ribbon bar is a dynamic toolbar that displays different options depending on which command
you are using. The options on each ribbon bar operate much like the options on standard
Windows dialog boxes.
rotation angle
Angle between 0-180 degrees that an element is rotated in either direction. Zero degrees is
horizontal to the x axis; the angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
rotation axis
Temporary line that shows the rotation angle with respect to the rotation reference axis. Zero
degrees is defined by the positional angle; the angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
rotation reference axis

Temporary line defined by the center of rotation and the rotation from point. Zero degrees is
horizontal; the angle increases in the counterclockwise direction. The rotation angle is measured
from this line.
S
scale origin
Starting point from which an object is scaled along the x and y axes.
select tool
Allows you to select elements before you run a command on them.
selection set
Single selected object or a group of selected objects.
share embed
Document copied directly into a drawing. When you embed the same document more than once
in the same document, the document elements are copied each time. When you share embed
the same document more than once in the same document, the documents are not copied each
time. Instead, the other documents reference the initial placement of the document.
671
Glossary
sheet outline
Shows the orientation of the drawing sheet and the printable region of the sheet.
shortcut menu
Menu that gives you quick access to commands that are related to the item you are working
with. The commands available on the shortcut menu depend upon the selected element or
active command. To activate the shortcut menu, click the right mouse button.
sketch
Process of creating a rough drawing that approximates the size or shape of a real-world object.
smart label
Label that is associated to the attributes on an element or object. Smart Labels are created with
the tools on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar.
smooth node
Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a smooth node has a different curvature on each side of
the node. The start point and end point of a curve is always a smooth node. A handle can be
attached to a smooth node for editing.
source document
Document that provides data, graphics, or other information to another document through a link.
stacked dimension group

Series of individual dimensions that are arranged at different levels from the smallest value to
the largest. A stacked dimension group measures locations from a common origin.
status bar
Shows information and messages at the bottom of the window. Some of the information is about
what a particular command does or what action you should take.
style resource document

Any .igr or .RSC document that contains styles native to that document. A template or document
can reference several style resource documents. These styles are copied into the current
document when the styles are actually applied to elements or annotations in the document.
style type
Type of style that is based on the type of element that the style affects. The style types include:
fill, dimension, line, and text.
sweep angle
Angle that defines the length of an arc.
672
Glossary
symbol
Document placed in a drawing. You can override and edit the properties and style of the symbol.
A document can be linked, or embedded.
T
tab scrolling buttons
Scroll through the sheets in your drawing.
tabs
Allow you to display a sheet in your drawing when you click the tab you want. The name of the
active sheet is in bold text.
tangent relationship
Relationship between an arc or circle and another geometric element. The elements share a
common point that is not intersecting.
target point
Origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPoint. You can position the target point
anywhere on the drawing sheet.
template
Default set of properties that defines what a new document will look like. You can use a
template to set standards for a group of users or to define your own preferences.
terminator
Graphic symbol, such as an arrow or dot, placed at the end of a leader.
text box
Rectangular element that contains text or symbols; you can place text boxes on drawing sheets.
title bar
Displays the name of the active document. You can also use the title bar to move the window
around on the screen.
to point
Ending point for an action. For example, when you rotate elements, the to point determines
where you want the rotation to stop.
tolerance
Shows the dimension along with the variance allowed.
673
Glossary
toolbar
Graphic menus with buttons that allow you to quickly access commands. You can define custom
toolbars or use the toolbars delivered with the software.
tools
Set of commands that can be activated from a menu, toolbar, or keyboard shortcut. Tools are
self-contained, designed for specific tasks, and can be used in any compatible environment.
U
user property
Unique characteristic of an element or object in a file. You can assign unique values to an
element or object with the Properties command on the Edit menu.
user-defined property
Type of property created on the User tab of the Properties dialog box for the element or object.
User-defined properties are usually in the form of a text notation, such as cost and
manufacturer. You can change user-defined properties, but these changes have no affect on the
appearance of the element or object. For example, user-defined properties stored with a valve
symbol can include the manufacturer, cost, or material. User-defined properties are displayed in
the Attribute Viewer when you select the valve symbol.
V
variable
Value that can be referenced and changed.
vertex
Highest point or apex of a figure, the intersection of lines or curves, or the end point of an
element.
vertical relationship
Relationship that specifies that the end points of a line, or two key points, are level with each
other along the y axis.
vertical scroll bar

Allows you to pan the active window from side to side.
W
window
Area defined by a standard border and buttons that is used to display information in an
application.
674
Glossary
wireframe element
Graphic representation of simple geometry; wireframe elements include points, lines, circles,
arcs, conic curves, freeform curves, and composite curves.
working sheet
Component of a drawing sheet. The working sheet is where you create design data and
document data. You can apply a scale to document and design data and attach a background
sheet to the working sheet.
675
Glossary
676
Index
A
About Command 31
Access Online Tutorials 29
Access the Printable Guides 29
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export
626
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import
620
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During
Export 587
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During
Import 581
Activate a Drawing Sheet 77
active style 661
Add a Button to a Toolbar 471
Add a Command to a Menu 472
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group
297
Add a Leader 245
Add a Symbol Attribute 509
Add MicroStation Styles to a Document
599
Add Styles to the Current Document 420
Add Symbol Commands 529
Add the Scaled Sketching Button to the
SmartSketch Toolbar 194
Add to the Favorites List in the Symbol
Explorer 389
Add-In Manager Dialog Box 479
Adding Text to Documents 225
Add-Ins Command 479
Additional Documentation 24
Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an
Image 551
AEC Solutions 25
AEC Templates 108
Align Command 338
Align Dimensions 291
Align Ribbon 338
Align SmartSketch Objects 337
Aligning SmartSketch Objects 336
Alignment Indicator Command 263
Alphabetical List of Functions 325
Angle Between Command 281
angular dimension 661
annotation 661
Apply a Border to a Text Box 237
Apply a Style 417
Apply a Style to a Group of Elements 418

Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed
Boundaries 442
Applying Formats with Styles 416
Applying Relationships to Change Existing
Elements 354
Applying Unique Formats 431
Arc by 3 Points Command 165
Arc by Center Point Command 166
Arc Ribbon 165
Architectural Templates 108
Arranging Elements 363
aspect ratio 661
Assign a Shortcut Key 476
Associate a Symbol with an Element 392
associative 661
associative dimension 661
Associative Offset Command 218
Associative Offset Ribbon 219
associativity 661
Atlas Mapping Templates 117
Attach a Connector to an Object 154, 407
Attach a Help File to a Symbol 510
Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with
Drop Points 406
attribute 661
Attribute Viewer 410
Attributes Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog
Box) 511
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box 629
AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box 624
AutoCAD Template File Dialog Box 624
AutoCAD-Based Workflow Examples 617
AutoSave Command 95
AutoSave Dialog Box 95
Axis Command 301
azimuth 661
B
background sheet 661
Background Sheets Command 79
Background Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box)
67
balloon 662
Balloon Command 240
Balloon Properties Dialog Box 241
Balloon Ribbon 240
base bearing 662
baseline 662
677
Index
basic 662
Basic Diagramming Templates 119
bearing 662
Bearing and Azimuth Command 318
Behavior Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
69
Behavior Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog
Box) 398
Behaviors Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog
Box) 511
Border and Fill Tab (Text Box Properties
Dialog Box) 233
Border Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog
Box) 439
Break a Connection to a Linked Object
460
break line 662
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display
Order 368
Bring to Front Command 368
Browser Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
71
C
Cascade Command 59
Case Where a Relationship Is Not
Maintained 645
center point 662
centerline 662
chained dimension group 662
chamfer 662
Chamfer Command 351
Chamfer Ribbon 351
Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving
Dimension 306
Change Command 331
Change Layer Dialog Box 377
Change the Active Layer 376
Change the Background Sheet 79
Change the Curve Type 170
Change the Formats of a Style 419
Change the Layer of an Element 376
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer
Group 377
Change the Node Type 171
Change the Source for a Linked Object
459
Change the Window Layout 59
Change Toolbar 40
Changing the Shape of an Element 330
Character Map Command 249
Check Out a License for SmartSketch 34
Circle by 3 Points Command 161
678
Circle by Center Point Command 162

Circle Ribbon 161
Circular Pattern Command 222
Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box 223
Circular Pattern Ribbon 223
class 662
Close a Document 98
Close a Document Without Saving Changes
99
Close a Linked Object's Source Document
and Save the Changes 460
Close Command 99
Close the Symbol Explorer 387
closed curve 663
closed element 663
coincident relationship 663
Collinear Command 357
collinear relationship 663
Colors Dialog Box 374
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) 465
command 663
Command Comparison with AutoCAD 603
Command Comparison with MicroStation
567
Concentric Command 357
Configuration File Settings for AutoCAD
Translation 631
Configuration File Settings for MicroStation
Translation 591
Connect Command 358
Connect Elements 357
Connect Points While Drawing a Line 646
Connect Points While Modifying a Line
646
Connect Two Objects 155
Connector Command 156
Connector Drawing Elements 150
Connector Ribbon 157
container 663
Contrast and Brightness Command 552
Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box 552
Control Layers in a MicroStation Reference
File 599
Control Layers in an AutoCAD Reference
File 640
Control Loop Templates 114
control menu 663
Control the Display of Elements in a
Window 371
Convert Command (Rectangle) 596
Convert Command (Symbol) 397
Converting Dimensions to Individual
Elements 308
Index
coordinate dimension 663
Coordinate Dimension Command 294
Copy a Format 214
Copy an Element 213
Copy an Element with the Select Tool 214
Copy Command 214
Copy Fill Style Dialog Box 497
Copy Linear Pattern Dialog Box 496
Copy Linear Style Dialog Box 497
Copy Point Style Dialog Box 496
Copy Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear
Styles, and Fill Styles 496
Copy Style Command 496
Copying and Pasting Elements 213
Create a Background Sheet 78
Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or
Layers 374
Create a Custom Report 412
Create a Fill Color 445
Create a Layer 374
Create a Layer Group 377
Create a Leader for a SmartText Label
521
Create a New Document 64
Create a New Drawing Sheet 76
Create a New Menu 471
Create a New Toolbar 469
Create a Parametric Symbol 506
Create a SmartLabel With SmartText Fields
524
Create a Style Using a Formatted Element
418
Create a Style with the Style Command
419
Create a Symbol 381
Create a Symbol Report 401
Create a Symbol with a Fill for Masking
531
Create a Template 143
Create a Template to Insert a MicroStation
Document 598
Create a Text Label 251
Create a To Do List 480
Create a Variable Using a Function or
Subroutine 321
Create a Variable with a Link to a
Spreadsheet 322
Create a Variable with a Value or
Expression 320
Create Custom Fill Styles 495
Create Custom Linear Patterns 494
Create Custom Linear Styles 495
Create Custom Point Styles 493
Create New Fill Style Dialog Box 495

Create New Linear Pattern Dialog Box 494
Create New Linear Style Dialog Box 495
Create New Point Style Dialog Box 494
Create New Style Command 494
Create Symbol Command 382
Creating a Buried Pipe Line Style 485
Creating a Kinematics Animation 647
Creating Isometric Drawings 186
Creating Patterns 220
Creating Symbols 381
cross hatching 663
Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog
Box) 262
curve 663
Curve Command 171
Curve Ribbon 171
cusp node 663
Custom Actions Tab (Symbol Properties
Dialog Box) 513
Custom Color Name Dialog Box 448
Custom Command Dialog Box 476
Custom Commands Command 475
Customize Command 473
Customize Dialog Box 473
Customize Keyboard Command 477
Customize Keyboard Dialog Box 477
Customize the Line Style Editor Toolbar
484
Customize the Software with the Options
Command 464
Customize Toolbar Dialog Box (Line Style
Editor) 484
Customizing a Toolbar 650
Customizing the Software 463
Cut an Element 220
Cut Command 220
Cutting or Deleting Elements 219
D
Define a Text-Driven Symbol 522
Define an Icon for a Symbol 510
Define Handles for a Symbol 508
Define Locate Filter Dialog Box 204
Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon 271
Define Point Style Graphics Command
504
Define Several Representations of a
Symbol in One Document 515
Define SmartPoints for a Symbol 531
Define SmartText Attributes for a Smart
Label 520
Define Symbol Properties 508
679
Index
Define Symbol Representation Dialog Box
518
Defining SmartPoints 531
Delete a Command from a Menu 472
Delete a Drawing Sheet 80
Delete a Hyperlink 541
Delete a Layer Group 378
Delete a Node from a Curve 169
Delete a Relationship 263
Delete a Style 418
Delete a Vertex from a Leader 248
Delete an Element 219
Delete Command 219
Delete Favorite Command 389
Delete From a List of Favorites in the
Symbol Explorer 389
Delete Node Command (Shortcut Menu)
170
Delete Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear
Delete Sheet Command 81
Delete Style Command 498
Delete Text in a Text Box 237
Delivered Reports 412
Detail View Command 266
Detail View Ribbon 266
Details Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box)
557
diameter dimension 663
dimension 664
Dimension Along a Curve 290
dimension axis 664
Dimension Command 281
dimension group 664
Dimension Groups 295
dimension line 664
Dimension Prefix Dialog Box 302
Dimension Properties Dialog Box 283
Dimension Ribbon 281
Dimension Text Command 306
Dimension Text Ribbon 306
Dimension the Diameter of a Circle 651
Dimension the Length of a Line 651
Dimension Toolbar 41
dimensional value 664
Dimensioning Drawing Elements 274
direction 664
Directional Mapping Templates 121
Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles
390
Display Background Sheets 79
Display Context-Sensitive Help 29
display filter 664
680
Display Help Topics 31

Display Information About the Software 31
Display Manager Command 371
Display Manager Dialog Box 372
Display or Hide Layers 375
Display or Hide Relationship Handles 264
Display the Attribute Viewer 410
Display the Change Toolbar 198
Display the Dimension Toolbar 278
Display the Relationship Toolbar 257
Display the Tip of the Day 30
Distance Between Command 293
document data 664
Document Explorer Command 61
Document Explorer Window 62
Draw a Chamfer 349
Draw a Circle by Center Point 161
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points
160
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two
Elements 162
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch 182
Draw a Circular Pattern 222
Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending
Elements 344
Draw a Curve 168
Draw a Curve with FreeForm 185
Draw a Doubleline 158
Draw a Fillet 352
Draw a Fillet Rectangle 176
Draw a Horizontal Line 652
Draw a Line 146, 653
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line
653
Draw a Line with FreeSketch 182
Draw a Line with PinPoint 654
Draw a Mask 448
Draw a Point 148
Draw a Polygon by Center point 179
Draw a Rectangle or Square 175
Draw a Rectangle or Square with
FreeSketch 183
Draw a Rectangular Pattern 221
Draw an Arc 651
Draw an Arc by Center Point 165
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points 163
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements
166
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch 183
Draw an Ellipse by Center Point 174
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points
172
Draw an Isometric Circle 187
Index
Draw an Isometric Line 189
Draw an Isometric Rectangle 191
Draw an N-Sided Polygon 178
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs 166
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with
FreeSketch 167
Draw or Edit Objects at the Same Scale
Factor 194
Draw Toolbar 42
Draw with PinPoint 268
Draw with Relationships 261
Drawing Basic Elements 145
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses 160
Drawing Connectors 149
Drawing Diagrams 88
Drawing Doublelines 158
Drawing FreeForm Shapes 180
Drawing Lines 146
Drawing Precisely 267
drawing sheet tab 664
Drawing Squares, Rectangles, and
Polygons 174
Drawing with Relationships 255
driven dimension 664
driving dimension 665
Drop Complex String Command (Shortcut
Menu) 596
Drop Dimension to Graphics Command
309
Drop Line String Command (Shortcut
Menu) 596
E
edge point 665
Edit a Dimension Prefix 302
Edit a Formula Containing a Function 323
Edit a Hyperlink 543
Edit a Linked Object 459
Edit a SmartLabel 253
Edit a Symbol 396
Edit a Text Box 237
Edit a Text Label 252
Edit an Embedded Object with the Source
Software 455
Edit an Existing Variable 320
Edit Attributes 411
Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer 411
Edit Common Attributes Within a Select Set
412
Edit Graphic Properties Command
(Shortcut Menu) 253
Edit Link Command (Shortcut Menu) 543
Edit SmartPoints on a Symbol 533
Edit SmartText Attributes for a Symbol

521
Edit SmartText Command 523
Edit Symbol Properties 398
Edit Text Properties Command (Shortcut
Menu) 253
Editing Symbols 395
Electrical Diagramming Templates 114
Electrical Solutions 25
Electrical Templates 115
Element Display Priority 367
Element Properties Dialog Box 433
Ellipse by 3 Points Command 173
Ellipse by Center Point Command 174
Ellipse Ribbon 173
embed 665
Embed an Object 454
end point 665
Engineering Fonts 254
Equal Command 358
equation 665
Erase Part of An Image 558
error dimension 665
Establish a Relationship with the
SmartSketch Command 263
Establish More Than One Relationship
654
Establish Relationships on a MicroStation
Reference File 598
Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD
Reference File 639
Exclude Universal Scrolling with the
IntelliMouse 53
Exit Command (File Menu) 99
Exploring the Interface 35
Exploring the Window with Your Mouse 36
Extend an Element 347
Extend an Element to a Point 348
Extend to Next Command 348
Extend to Point Command 349
Extending or Trimming Elements 341
F
File Locations Tab (Options Dialog Box)
466
file locking 665
fill 665
Fill an Image Area with Color 553
Fill Command 446, 554
Fill Dialog Box 554
Fill Properties Dialog Box 447
Fill Ribbon 446
Fill Style Properties Dialog Box 503
681
Index
Fill Tab 447
Fillet Command 353
Fillet Rectangle Command 177
Fillet Rectangle Ribbon 178
Fillet Ribbon 353
Filter Command (Variable Table Shortcut
Menu) 326
Filter Dialog Box 326
Filter Objects Dialog Box 62
Filtering the Selection of Drawing Elements
204
Find a SmartSketch Object 206
Find Command 207
Find Dialog Box 207
Finding Elements 206
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on
the Drawing Sheet 68, 310
Fit All Elements in the Active View 57
Fit Command 57
Flowchart Templates 122
Follow a Hyperlink 542
Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu)
541
Font Tab (AutoCAD Export Options Dialog
Box) 630
Font Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog
Box) 625
Font Tab (MicroStation Export Options
Dialog Box) 590
Font Tab (MicroStation Import Options
Dialog Box) 586
Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box)
467
Format a Column 323
Format a Connector 154
Format a Dimension or Annotation 440
Format a Fill 445
Format a Geometric Element 432
Format a Text Box 440
Format Dimension Command 441
Format Dimension Dialog Box 441
Format Line Dialog Box 432
Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar)
215
Format Part of an Element 193
Format Tab (Connectors) 437
Format Tab (Element Properties Dialog
Box) 437
Format Text Box Dialog Box 440
Formatting a New Drawing 655
Formatting an Existing Drawing 656
free space 665
freeform 665
682
FreeForm Command 185

FreeForm Ribbon 185
freesketch 666
FreeSketch Command 184
FreeSketch Ribbon 184
from point 666
327
327
G
General Diagramming Templates 117
General Tab 284, 424
General Tab (AutoCAD Export Options
Dialog Box) 629
General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options
Dialog Box) 624
General Tab (Balloon Properties Dialog
Box) 241
General Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
71
General Tab (Find Dialog Box) 209
General Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box)
557
General Tab (MicroStation Export Options
Dialog Box) 590
General Tab (MicroStation Import Options
Dialog Box) 585
General Tab (New Line Style Dialog Box)
422
General Tab (Options Dialog Box) 465
General Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog
Box) 514
Generate a Lookup Table 535
geometric element 666
Getting Started with SmartSketch 33
Grid Brightness Command 273
Grid Display Command 272
Grid Intensity Ribbon 274
Grid Snap Command 273
group 666
Group Command 365
Group or Ungroup Elements 364
Group Properties Dialog Box 365
Group Ribbon 365
Grouping Elements 363
H
handle 666
Help Command 29
help lines 666
Index
horizontal relationship 666
horizontal scroll bar 666
Horizontal/Vertical Command 359
How Embedding Works 453
How Linking Works 457
HVAC Templates 110
hyperlink 666
Hyperlink Command 540
Hyperlinks 539
I
Icons Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)
514
image 667
Image Command 547
Image Erase Command 558
Image Integrator 25
Image Integrator Toolbar 45
Image Properties Command 557
Image Properties Dialog Box 557
Image Redo Command 548
Image Undo Command 548
Import Point Styles, Linear Patterns, and
Linear Styles 497
Import Style Command 497
Info Tab (Element Properties Dialog Box)
433
Info Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box)
366
Info Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog
Box) 438
Info Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)
400
Info Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)
233
Insert a Detail View 265
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box
248
Insert a Function into a Formula 323
Insert a Hyperlink 539
Insert a Node into a Curve 169
Insert a Raster Image 546
Insert a Vertex in a Leader 247
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box 540
Insert Node Command (Shortcut Menu)
169
Insert Object Dialog Box 456
inspection 667
Install or Remove an Add-In 479
Install SmartPlant License Checkout Utility
33
Install the To Do List Add-In 480
Install the Validation Tools Add-In 641
Installing Additional Tools 478

Integrating Programs with Your Symbol
529
intent zone 667
Intent Zones 259
Introducing SmartSketch 23
Invert Colors in an Image 553
Invert Command 553
Invert Selection Command 204
isometric 667
Isometric Circle Command 188
Isometric Circle Ribbon 188
isometric drawing 667
Isometric Line Command 190
Isometric Line Ribbon 190
Isometric Rectangle Command 192
Isometric Rectangle Ribbon 192
Isometric Toolbar 46
Issue Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog
Box) 86
K
key point 667
Keyboard 51
kinematics analysis 667
L
Labels 250
Landscape Templates 111
layer 667
Layer Display Dialog Box 376
Layer Groups Command 378
Layer Groups Dialog Box 378
Layer Tab (Find Dialog Box) 208
Layer Tab (MicroStation Export Options
Dialog Box) 591
Layers Command 375
Layers Ribbon 375
Layers Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box)
373
Leader Command 246
Leader Properties Dialog Box 247
Leader Ribbon 246
Learning Center Command 30
License Checkout Utility Dialog Box 35
limit 667
Line Command 432
Line Ribbon 147
Line Style Editor Command 492
Line Style Editor Toolbar 492
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Export Options
Dialog Box) 631
683
Index
Line Width Tab (AutoCAD Import Options
Dialog Box) 626
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Export
Options Dialog Box) 591
Line Width Tab (MicroStation Import
Options Dialog Box) 586
Line/Arc Continuous Command 147
linear dimension 668
Linear Pattern Properties Dialog Box 499
Linear Style Properties Dialog Box 501
Lines and Coordinate Tab 286, 426
Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Export Options
Dialog Box) 630
Linestyle Tab (AutoCAD Import Options
Dialog Box) 625
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Export Options
Dialog Box) 591
Linestyle Tab (MicroStation Import Options
Dialog Box) 586
Link an Object 458
Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet 656
Links Command 460
Links Dialog Box 460
Load Points Dialog Box 563
locate zone 668
lock 668
Lock an Element or Key Point 265
Lock Command 265
Lookup Table Command 536
Lookup Table Dialog Box 536
M
Main Toolbar 47
Maintain Relationships 264
Maintain Relationships Command 264
Make Elements Collinear 357
Make Elements Concentric 356
Make Elements Equal 358
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or
Vertical 358
Make Elements Parallel 359
Make Elements Perpendicular 359
Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis
360
Make Elements Tangential 360
Managing Multi-Sheet Documents 73
415
Managing Text in Symbols 519
Manipulate a Symbol 406
Manipulating Symbols 405
Mask Command 448
Mask Ribbon 449
684
Measure a Distance 311

Measure an Area 316
Measure Area Command 317
Measure Distance Along Command 315
Measure Distance Command 313
Measure the Distance Along an Object
313
Measure the Length of a Line 312, 657
Measuring Distances and Areas 310
Mechanical Engineering Templates 131
Mechanical Solutions 26
Mechanical Templates 132
Mechanism Modeling 407
Menu Bar and Menus 38
Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box) 473
Merge Connectors 155
Microsoft IntelliMouse Features 52
MicroStation Cells in Your Document 600
MicroStation Construction Class Information
601
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box
590
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box
585
MicroStation-Based Workflow Examples
578
midpoint 668
Mirror a Symbol 403
Mirror an Element 334
mirror axis 668
Mirror Command 335
Mirror Ribbon 335
Mirroring Elements 334
Mirroring Symbols 403
modification 668
Modify a Connector 152
Modify a Symbol Attribute 509
Modify an Element with the Select Tool
330
Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box 430
Modify Grid Intensity 273
Modify Layers in a Layer Group 377
Modify Line Style Dialog Box 429
Modify Point Styles, Linear Patterns, Linear
Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box 430
More Text Box Ribbon Commands 232
Most Recently Used Files Command 68
Mouse 52
Move a Dimension 303
Move a Label 252
Move a Text Box 237
Move an Annotation 228
Index
Move an Element 211
Move an Element Precisely 212
Move an Element with PinPoint and the
Select Tool 269
Move an Element with the Select Tool 211
Move Command 212
Move Ribbon 212
Move Sheet Border 82
Move Sheet Border Command 82
Move Sheet Border Dialog Box 83
Move the Attribute Viewer 410
Move the Symbol Explorer 388
Moving Elements 210
Multi-Point Warp Command 560
Multi-Point Warp Ribbon 560
N
Name Tab 284, 422
Name Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog Box) 67
nested symbol 668
Network Diagram Templates 124
New Command 64
New Dialog Box 64
New Dimension Style Dialog Box 423
New Line Style Dialog Box 421
New Sheet Command 76
New Text Box Style Dialog Box 422
New Toolbar Dialog Box 471
New Window Command 59
node 668
nominal 668
Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu)
308
Notes Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog
Box) 87
Nudge an Element 213
Nudge Command 213
O
object 669
Object Command 456
Office Layout Templates 126
Offset Command 217
Offset Elements 216
Offset Ribbon 218
Open a Document 65
Open a Document Inside the Internet
Explorer 539
Open a MicroStation Cell Library 600
Open a MicroStation Document 595
Open a New Window 58
Open a Symbol Library 385
Open an AutoCAD Document 638

Open an OLE Object for Editing 459
Open Command 65
open curve 669
Open Dialog Box 65
Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer
387
open element 669
Open Source Command 328
Open the SmartSketch Home Page 31
Options Command 464
Options Dialog Box 464
Organizational Chart Templates 128
Organizational Chart Wizard 131
Ortho Piping Templates 135
Override a Driven Dimension 307
P
Pan a View 57
Pan Command 58
Paragraph Tab 422
Paragraph Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog
Box) 236
Parallel Command 359
parallel relationship 669
parameter 669
Parameters Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog
Box) 514
parametric symbol 669
Parametric Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog
Box) 400
Paste an Element 215
Paste an Element with a Different Format
216
Paste Command 215
Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu)
328
Paste Special Command 216
Paste Special Dialog Box 216
Perpendicular Command 359
perpendicular relationship 669
PFD and P&ID Templates 136
pickquick 669
pinpoint 669
PinPoint Command 270
PinPoint Ribbon 270
Place a Balloon 239
Place a Connector 150
Place a Dimension Between Two Elements
or Key Points 292
Place a Dimension Group 296
Place a Doubleline Precisely 658
Place a Driving Dimension 305
685
Index
Place a Fill 444
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial
Dimension 279
Place a Revision Cloud 242
Place a SmartLabel 252
Place a SmartPoint with Connect Attributes
532
Place a SmartPoint with Drag Attributes
532
Place a SmartPoint with Drop Attributes
532
Place a Symbol 393
Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension
298
Place a Text Box 230
Place AutoCAD Information in the
Document 638
Place Copies of a Symbol 394
Place Doubleline Command 159
Place Doubleline Ribbon 159
Place Elements with a Grid 272
Place Here Command 394
Place MicroStation Information in the
Document 597
Place Multiple Labels 252
Place Point Style Graphics Command 504
Place Point Styles in the Drawing Sheet
504
Placing Annotations 225
Placing Elements in Precise Locations 267
Placing Elements with a Grid 271
Placing Symbols 392
Planning Your Symbol 505
Plot Plan Templates 138
Point Command 148
Point Ribbon 148
Point Style Properties Dialog Box 498
pointer 670
Polygon by Center Command 180
Polygon by Center Ribbon 180
Polygon Command 178
Polygon Ribbon 179
Polygonal Select Area Command 551
Position an Image by Clicking 556
Position an Image by Dragging 554
Position Command 556
Position Command (Shortcut Menu) 555
Preface 19
Previous Command 57
primary axis 670
Print a Document 101
Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet 102
Print Area Dialog Box 105
686
Print Command 104

Print Dialog Box 104
Print Several Documents Simultaneously
103
Print to a File 103
Printable Guides Command 29
Printer Document Properties Dialog Box
105
Printing Documents 99
Process Block Diagramming Templates
139
Process Diagraming Templates 134
Process Solutions 26
Programming Tools 27
Properties Command 498
Properties Command (Edit Menu) 433
Properties Command (File Menu) 69
Properties Dialog Box 69
property 670
Pull an Element Up in the Display Order
369
Pull Up Command 369
Push an Element Down in the Display
Order 369
Push Down Command 369
R
radial dimension 670
Reapply Style Dialog Box 431
Rectangle Command 176
Rectangle Ribbon 176
Rectangular Pattern Command 221
Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box
221
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon 222
Rectangular Select Area Command 549
Redefine Point Styles 504
Redefine the Origin of a Symbol 518
Redo Actions 205
Redo Changes to Images 548
Redo Command 206
Redo List Command 206
reference 670
reference file 670
Reference Files Tab (Options Dialog Box)
467
Refill a Modified Boundary 446
relationship 670
relationship handle 671
Relationship Handles Command 264
relationship indicator 671
Relationship Toolbar 48
Relationships Command 261
Index
Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings
Dialog Box) 262
Remove a Command from a Toolbar 471
Remove a Symbol Attribute 509
Remove Empty Layers 379
Remove Empty Layers Command 379
Remove Empty Layers Dialog Box 380
Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu)
541
Remove Speckles from an Image 558
Rename a Drawing Sheet 80
Rename a Style 417
Rename Command (Shortcut Menu) 80
Rename Dialog Box 80
Reorder Sheets 81
Reorder Sheets Command 82
Reorder Sheets Dialog Box 82
Re-Orient PinPoint 269
Report Generator Command 413
Report Generator Dialog Box 413
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point 269
Resize a Text Box 238
Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default
Settings 470
Restore a View 57
Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original
Settings 473
Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value
of the Element 307
Reverse Connector Direction 155
Revision Cloud Command 243
Revision Cloud Ribbon 244
Revision Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog
Box) 87
ribbon bar 671
Ribbons and Dialog Boxes 39
Rotate a Symbol 404
Rotate an Element 331
Rotate Command 332
Rotate Ribbon 332
Rotating Elements 331
Rotating Symbols 403
rotation angle 671
rotation axis 671
rotation reference axis 671
Run a Custom Command 475
Run a Program That You Created from a
Symbol 530
Run the Validate Tool on the Active
Document 642
S
Sample Workflows 645
Save a Document 93
Save a Document as a PDF File 95
Save a Document as a Template 143
Save a Style to a Template 419
Save As Command 94
Save As Dialog Box 94
Save as Image 96
Save as Image Command 97
Save as Image Dialog Box 97
Save as PDF Command 96
Save as PDF Dialog Box 96
Save as Template Command 143
Save Changes to a Linked Image 547
Save Command 94
Save Copy As Command (File Menu) 457
Save Points Dialog Box 563
Save Selected Image(s) Command 547
Saving a Document Automatically 94
Saving and Printing Documents 91
Saving Documents 92
Scale a Symbol 402
Scale an Element 339
Scale an Element with Its Handles 340
Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its
Original Model Size 340
Scale Command 341
scale origin 671
Scale Ribbon 341
Scaled Sketching Command 195
Scaled Sketching Ribbon 195
Scaling Elements 338
Scaling Symbols 402
Schematic Toolbar 49
Scroll Through Drawing Sheet Tabs 77
Secondary Units Tab 285, 425
Segmented Style Command 193
Select a Polygon-Shaped Area of an Image
550
Select a Rectangular Area of an Image
548
Select All Command 202
Select All Sheets Command (Shortcut
Menu) 78
Select an Element 199
Select and Manipulate Drawing Sheets 77
Select Elements Using SmartSelect 202
Select Macro Directory Dialog Box 475
select tool 671
Select Tool 201
Select Tool Ribbon 201
Selecting Elements 198
Selecting Endpoint-Connected Elements
203
687
Index
197
selection set 671
Send a Document to Others 98
Send an Element to the Back of the Display
Order 368
Send Command 98
Send to Back Command 369
Set a Dimension Axis 300
Set AutoSave Options 95
Set Bearing and Azimuth 318
Set Bearing Dialog Box 317
Set Document Home Command (Shortcut
Menu) 388
Set Document Properties 68
Set Printing Options 101
Set the Dimension Type 301
Set the Dimension Units 303
Set the Home Page for the Symbol Explorer
387
Set the Unit of Measure 317
Set Up a Drawing Sheet 66
Set Up an ODBC Data Source 535
Setting Paper and Model Units 309
Setting Up Documents 63
Settings Dialog Box 106
share embed 671
sheet outline 672
Sheet Setup Command 66
Sheet Setup Dialog Box 66
Sheets Tab (Display Manager Dialog Box)
372
shortcut menu 672
Show a List of Favorites in the Symbol
Explorer 388
Show Favorites Command 389
Show Links Command (Shortcut Menu)
542
Show Styles in Resource Files Command
503
Signature Area Tab (Title Block Properties
Dialog Box) 86
Site Templates 112
Size and Scale Tab (Sheet Setup Dialog
Box) 66
sketch 672
smart label 672
SmartDimension Command 280
SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box 438
SmartPoint Properties Command 533
SmartPoint Properties Dialog Box 534
SmartSelect Command 202
SmartSelect Ribbon 203
688
SmartSketch on the Web Command 31

SmartSketch Settings Command 261
SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box 262
SmartSketch Templates 107
SmartText Editor Dialog Box 523
smooth node 672
source document 672
Spacing Tab 287, 427
Speckle Remove Command 559
Speckle Remove Dialog Box 559
Spelling Command 238
Spelling Dialog Box 239
Split a Connector 156
Split Command 346
Split Graphic Elements 345
Split/Segment Ribbon 347
stacked dimension group 672
Stamp Here Command 395
Standard Actions Tab (Symbol Properties
Dialog Box) 515
Statistics Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
72
status bar 672
Status Bar 53
Style Command 420
Style Dialog Box 421
style resource document 672
Style Resources Dialog Box 430
Style Tab (Find Dialog Box) 208
style type 672
Summary Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
72
Suspend Relationships 263
sweep angle 672
Switch to Another Open Document 58
symbol 673
Symbol Authoring 27, 505
Symbol Authoring Toolbar 50
Symbol Explorer Command 385
Symbol Explorer Window 384
Symbol Lookup Tables 534
Symbol Origin Command 518
Symbol Properties Command 510
Symbol Properties Dialog Box 398, 511
Symbol Representation Command 517
Symbol Ribbon 397
Symbol Tab (File Properties Dialog Box)
72
Symbology Tab (Find Dialog Box) 208
Symbols Tab (Options Dialog Box) 468
Symmetric Command 360
Symmetric Diameter Command 299
Index
T
tab scrolling buttons 673
tabs 673
Tangent Arc Command 168
Tangent Circle Command 163
Tangent Command 361
tangent relationship 673
target point 673
Task Comparison with AutoCAD 609
Task Comparison with MicroStation 574
Technical Drawing Templates 141
Technical User Forum 24
template 673
terminator 673
Terminator and Symbol Tab 288, 427
Text and Leader Tab (Balloon Properties
Dialog Box) 241
text box 673
Text Box Command 231, 440
Text Box Handles 230
Text Box Properties Dialog Box 232
Text Box Ribbon 231
Text Tab 286, 425
Text Tab (Find Dialog Box) 209
The Symbol Explorer 382
Tile Horizontally Command 59
Tile Vertically Command 60
Tip of the Day Command 30
Tip of the Day Dialog Box 30
Title Area Tab (Title Block Properties Dialog
Box) 85
title bar 673
Title Block Field Command 84
Title Block Field Ribbon 84
Title Block Properties Command 84
Title Block Properties Dialog Box 85
Title Block Templates 142
To Do List Manager Command 481
To Do List Manager Dialog Box 481
To Do List Notification Options Dialog Box
482
To Do List Options Command 481
To Do List Toolbar 480
to point 673
tolerance 673
toolbar 674
Toolbars 40
Toolbars Command 470
Toolbars Dialog Box 470
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box) 474
tools 674
Transforming Elements 329
Translators 28
Trim an Element 343

Trim an Element to a Point 345
Trim an Element to Another Element 344
Trim Command 343
Trim Corner Command 344
Trim Inside Command 345
Trim Part of Element 345
Trim to Element Command 343
Trim to Point Command 345
Turn the Tip of the Day On or Off 30
Type Tab (Find Dialog Box) 207
Types of Dimensions 277
U
Understanding Document Concepts 61
Undo Actions 205
Undo Changes to Images 547
Undo Command 205
Undo List Command (Edit Menu) 205
Ungroup Command 367
Unicode Character Map Dialog Box 249
Units Tab 284, 424
Units Tab (File Properties Dialog Box) 73
Unlock a Symbol From an Element 406
Update a Symbol Report 401
Use Spell Checker 238
User Assistance 28
user property 674
User Tab (Group Properties Dialog Box)
366
User Tab (Properties Dialog Box) 437
User Tab (SmartFrame Properties Dialog
Box) 439
User Tab (Symbol Properties Dialog Box)
400
User Tab (Text Box Properties Dialog Box)
236
user-defined property 674
Using Blank Color and Fill with Symbols
530
Using Dimensions to Change Existing
Elements 294, 305
Using Layers to Arrange Elements 370
Using Relationships as You Draw 257
Using Scaled Sketching 194
Using SmartSketch Options 24
Using Symbols in Documents 381
Using the Internet 539
Using the Line Style Editor 483
Using the SmartPlant License Checkout
Utility 33
Using the Validation Add-In Tool 641
Using the Variable Table 318
689
Index
Using Title Blocks 84
Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional
Values 659
V
Validate Command 643
Validation Options Command 643
Validation Options Dialog Box 643
variable 674
Variable Table Dialog Box 324
Variables Command 324
vertex 674
vertical relationship 674
vertical scroll bar 674
View a Web Page with the Symbol Explorer
386
View Document Properties 62
View Documents with the Symbol Explorer
386
View File Type Command 385
View Image Properties 556
View Tab (Options Dialog Box) 468
View the Properties of a Document 69
Viewing Your Work 54
W
Warp an Image Using Multiple Points 560
Warp Options Dialog Box 561
What's New in SmartSketch? 21
What's This Help Command 29
window 674
Window List Command 58
wireframe element 675
Workflow Diagram Templates 130
working sheet 675
Working Sheets Command 78
Working with Attributes 409
Working with AutoCAD Files 601
Working with CAD Drawings 565
Working with MicroStation Files 565
Working with Object, Linking and
Embedding 451
Working with Raster Images 545
Z
Zoom Area 55
Zoom Area Command 55
Zoom In Command 56
Zoom In on an Area 55
Zoom Out 56
Zoom Out Command 56
690

Smart Sketch Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Smart Sketch Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SmartSketch

Version 2014 (8.0)

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

What's New in SmartSketch?

SmartSketch User's Guide

What's New in SmartSketch?

SmartSketch User's Guide

Industry Solutions Available in SmartSketch and in SmartSketch Options

SmartSketch Works with Leading CAD Products

SmartSketch User's Guide

Technical User Forum

Using SmartSketch Options

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

User Interface Features

SmartSketch User's Guide

Display Context-Sensitive Help

What's This Help Command

Access the Printable Guides

Printable Guides Command

Access Online Tutorials

SmartSketch User's Guide

Learning Center Command

Display the Tip of the Day

Turn the Tip of the Day On or Off

Turn On Tip of the Day

Tip of the Day Command

Tip of the Day Dialog Box

SmartSketch User's Guide

Display Help Topics

Open the SmartSketch Home Page

SmartSketch on the Web Command

Display Information About the Software

SmartSketch User's Guide

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Using the SmartPlant License Checkout Utility

Install SmartPlant License Checkout Utility

You must have a PDF reader to view the license agreement.

SmartSketch User's Guide

Getting Started with SmartSketch

Check Out a License for SmartSketch

Checked out licenses cannot be checked in.